This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project to make the world’s books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web ai[http: //books . google. com/|
A ἢ 4 a ay
Glassical Series.
THUCYDIDES .. BOOK VII
en 5ἥ0σ,..---- - - - - - τ
ey "
Ρύριις
eye ᾿
v
4...
ΓΙ ΝΑ
aK
.- vy, [Δ ΑΥ
SUSE
“ THUCYDIDES |
BOOK VII
EDITED BY
E. C. MARCHANT, M.A.
LATE FELLOW AND ASSISTANT-TUTOR OF PETERHOUSE, CAMBRIDGE PROFESSOR OF GREEK AND ANCIENT HISTORY IN QUEEN'S COLLEGE, LONDON ASSISTANT-MASTER IN ST. PAUL'S SCHOOL
Landon
MACMILLAN AND CO., Limttep NEW YORK: THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
1902
All rights reserved
First Edition 1893 Reprinted 1900, 1902
TU
THe Rey. W. GUNION RUTHERFORD, M.A., LL.D.
38X1084
CONTENTS
IN TRODUCTION—
§ 1. The Siege- Works of the Athenians, with plan .
§ 2. Nicias. A Sketch “ 8. The MSS. and Text of the Seventh Book .
TEXT ΝΌΟΤΕΒ
APPENDIX— I. On the first harangue of Nicias IT. On the text of certain passages III. Events at Athens, July 414-Sept. 413
INDEx—Greek _ English
PAGE
Map—Syracuse . . of . Frontispiece
aw
KEY TO PLAN
A=7d πρὸς τὸν κρημνόν. . . . Introd. p. xiii. 1=First Syracusan Counter-work . . | " p. xX. 2=Second , ,9 . . " p. ΧΙ. 3= Third ,» ,» . . . . ch. 4. 4-- τὰ τρία στρατόπεδα . . . . . ch. 48, 4.
5=70 τείχισμα τὸ κατὰ τὸν Εὐρύηλον. . . ch. 48, 8.
INTRODUCTION
§ 1. THE SIEGE-WORKS OF THE ATHENIANS AT SYRACUSE BEFORE THE ARRIVAL OF GYLIPPUS!
As soon as the Athenians had obtained possession of 414 κα. Epipolae, they fortified a point known as Labdalum, which looked from the north side of the cliff towards Megara. From Labdalum they marched down Epipolae towards the walls of the city, searching for a site suitable for the building of a central fort which might serve them as a base of operations while engaged in circumvallating the city. Presently they found themselves in a broad open table-land which de- scended by a barely perceptible incline to the walls of Achradina.
In selecting the site for this central fortress, the Athenian generals had to look for a point which lay about half-way between the Great Harbour and the northern sea—since to those limits their projected lines were to be carried northward and southward. The fort must not be very near to the city itself ;
1 For the convenience of junior students and of those who
prefer to avoid controversy, I have relegated to the end of the section the arguments on which these remarks are based.
x INTRODUCTION
but, at the same time, the question of the distance to be covered with their lines was, of course, of extreme importance. They fixed on a site due south of Trogilus, and distant from the north coast about a mile and a half or rather less. Reckoning together the wall which would have to be built on the southern cliff from the central fort and that which would run from the southern cliff to the Great Harbour, about the same distance would have to be covered south of the fort—that is to say about a mile and a half. This point was thus north of the Portella del Fusco, and a short distance from the spot at which the southern wall would touch the edge of the cliff. In this place, then, they built a large round fort—or circle—protected i in front by an outwork.
Soon, when the fortress stood finished, they began building out from it towards Trogilus. Meantime the Syracusans knew well that the object of the enemy was to hem them in, and they determined, by building a counter-work, to prevent him from reaching the Great Harbour. The besieged knew better than the besiegers that safe communication with the harbour was to the Athenian a matter of vital importance. This safe communication he should not obtain without a struggle. Now he was at present thinking only of his communication with his. naval station at Thapsus. Accordingly the Syra- cusans built out a wall towards the Portella del Fusco, intending to carry it immediately south of and past the Athenian ‘circle.’ On the north side the wall was protected by a palisade, and near the east end there was a door in the wall affording communi- cation between the north and south.
But the Athenians, after biding their opportunity,
SIEGE-WORKS AT SYRACUSE xi
attacked, captured and destroyed both palisade and wall, They then realised that, in order to secure communication with the sea, the southern wall was more needed. than the northern. They therefore ceased building north of the ‘circle’ and ‘proceeded to fortify the cliff above the marsh.’ That is to say, they filled up with a wall the short space between the ‘circle’ and the Portella del Fusco. It is not possible ‘to ascertain the exact point on the cliff at which this short piece of wall ended. .
The Syracusans made a second effort to prevent the Athenians from reaching the Great Harbour. It was now useless to build along the cliff as they had previously done. Nor did they choose the middle level above the marsh, apparently because they ex- pected that the Athenian works would reach it before they could build far enough to check them. Start- ing from the city they dug a trench across the marsh itself and towards the Anapus, building as before a palisade on the north side. But this work also was captured by the Athenians, but only at the cost of Lamachus’ life. During the battle, the Athenian fleet, having left Thapsus, entered the Great Harbour.
And now from the Portella del Fusco Nicias built a double wall towards the coast. But why was it double? We can hardly doubt that Nicias had Athens and the Piraeus in mind, and that, following that model, he wanted to render safe the conveyance of provisions to the upper walls. When the fleet left Thapsus, he seems to have modified his plans to some extent and to have supposed that the northern wall might safely be left a mere fragment until he was quite secure on the south. He must have con-
“xii - INTRODUCTION .
sidered also, that—should the Syracusans occupy the Olympieium—a double wall in the low ground would be absolutely necessary to protect his army against simultaneous attacks directed from the village and from the city.
The account given above of the siege-works differs in some respects from all those hitherto published. The difficulties are entirely due to the careless description of Thucydides, who seems to have forgotten that his readers would not know the ground, with which he was himself familiar.
1. Where was the κύκλος Thucydides says at Syce, which tells us nothing. On the middle of the slope of Epipolae, say Arnold, Grote, Stahl, Holm and Freeman. Near the southern cliffs, says Leake, who unfortunately arrives at his conclusion by an entirely wrong route. But the conclusion appears to be right. (@) Those who are opposed to it urge that the κύκλος was to be the central position of the Athenian lines, which were to run north and south from it. But this argument appears to me to be in favour of Leake. In the Seventh Book Thucydides mentions τὰ τείχη many times, but never to denote only the northern wall and that which joined the κύκλος to the edge of the cliff. He means by ra τείχη either forts, or the double wall, or the lines generally. He evidently did not think ra τείχη the right expression for the two short pieces of single wall. Now, in order that the κύκλος may be approximately in the centre of the Athenian τείχη, it is clear that if the κύκλος is to be placed north or north-west of the Portella del Fusco, it must also be near the cliff; otherwise the distance to be built over will he considerably greater at
SIEGE-WORKS AT SYRACUSE xiii
the south than at the north of the κύκλος. Of itself, however, the argument that the κύκλος must have been the central point is not of much weight. .
(6) In vi. 101, 1 comes a statement which causes great difficulty to those who place the κύκλος on the middle of Epipolae. Thucydides says ἀπὸ τοῦ κύκλον ἐτείχεζον τὸν κρημνὸν τὸν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἕλους, and then further on he refers to τὸ πρὸς τὸν κρημνόν. First, what does ἐτείχεζον τὸν κρημνόν mean? ‘They fortified a point on the cliff,’ according to Arnold, Grote, and Freeman, and, owing to. the distance which they assume between κύκλος and κρημνός, they naturally find ἀπὸ τοῦ κύκλον difficult to explain. Subsequently, they say, Nicias must have built a wall between this new fort on the κρημνός and the xvxAos. But Thucydides says nothing about such a building. Stahl sees that ἐτείχιζον τὸν κρημνόν must mean ‘they fortified the cliff,’ and cannot mean ‘built a wall along the cliff,’ as Classen says. So Stahl reads <és> τὸν κρημνόν with Lupus.
Surely the words mean ‘they butlt a wall on the cliff.’ The expression is quite natural as soon as we place the κύκλος just north of the Portella del Fusco; for a wall built from the κύκλος will thus be on the cliff. This short piece of wall is afterwards still more accurately called τὸ πρὸς τὸν κρημνόν ; but so short comparatively was the wall built ‘to the cliff’ that it could also be called a wall ‘ on the cliff.’
(c) The nearer the κύκλος to the south cliff, the easier would communication be with the Great Harbour. The fact that the southern wall was double sufficiently shows that Nicias knew that he would have to be careful about this matter. It is no objection that he began building to the north first; for, when no walls as yet existed, he may quite well have thought that he was even more exposed to attack on that side, and at first he probably contemplated keeping a naval station at Thapsus with a view to his connection with Catana and
ΧΙ INTRODUCTION
the south of Italy. Some modern writers, as Holm and Fr. Miller, apparently struck with the importance of the southern communication, while placing the κύκλος in the centre of Epipolae, represent the wall which connected the κύκλος with the κρημνός as double, like that from the κρημνός to the Harbour ; but there is absolutely no authority for this in the text, and very much that 18 against it.
2. Where was the first Syracusan counter- work 9 Goller, Dunbar, Didot and Stahl place it north of the κύκλος ; while Leake, Arnold, Grote, Holm, Classen and Freeman place it at the south. Thucydides says merely that the Syracusans ἐτείχιζον κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου.
(a) It is unnecessary to demonstrate that κάτωθεν can mean ‘south of.’ If we could be sure that this is the meaning, the matter would be settled. Freeman indeed is not clear what the words mean. On p. 664 of his third vol., he says it means ‘on a level lower than that of the Athenian central fort’: on p. 668 he commends Grote for being ‘the first to see, in opposition to both Arnold and Leake, that κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου did not mean on a lower level than the Athenian fort, but lower down on the cliff,’ 2e. south of the fort. Those who place the Syracusan work north of the ‘circle’ make κάτωθεν mean ‘on lower ground’; but it is a grave objection to this explanation that the land rises but very slightly between the walls of Syracuse and the site of the Athenian lines. (See also note on c. 2, 4.) It simplifies matters very much if we can take κάτω to mean ‘south’ and ἄνω ‘north’ in the narrative of the siege.
(Ὁ) The Syracusans knew well that they had before all things to prevent the Athenians from reaching the Great Harbour. Else, why was the second counter-work built across the marsh and not rather north of the κύκλος ἢ The most effectual way to carry out their purpose was to build in the first instance towards the Portella del Fusco.
SIEGE-WORKS AT SYRACUSE xv
(c) If the Syracusans built the first counter-work on the north side of the κύκλος, why did the Athenians leave off building at the north wall after destroying the counter-work ? They would have had every reason to press on in that direction to prevent the Syracusans from repeating their attempt to traverse the northern wall. But if the Syracusans built between the κύκλος and the κρημνός, Nicias had good reason for building at once across this space ; just as afterwards, when he had turned the Syracusans out of the marsh, he at once proceeded to build across it.
3. There is a serious difficulty connected with the wall of Gylippus. It is in the words (vii. 7, 1) αἱ δὲ Κορινθίων νῆες. . ἐσέπλευσαν. . . καὶ ξυνετείχισαν τὸ λοιπὸν τοῖς Συρακοσίοις μέχρι τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου τείχους. Grote and Freeman say that when Gylippus had built past the unfinished northern wall, “he began to work at the extreme point of Euryelus and then built eastward till he reached the wall already begun at the other end.” But what object had Gylippus in beginning anew at Euryelus instead of continuing to build westwards? To secure the road up the hill, says Freeman. This reason is insufficient, (a) There would be a gap of at least a mile and a half between the western extremity of Gylippus’ incomplete wall and the point on Euryelus at which this supposed new start was made. While Gylippus was building eastwards there was nothing whatever to prevent Nicias from passing through this gap and cutting off his communication with the wall at the east. It was at least as likely that Nicias would do this as that Athenian reinforcements would attempt to come up by the west road before Gylippus could complete his original wall. (6) In all other cases in which either side made a change in the scheme of building, Thucydides tells us of it. But he says nothing whatever about a second wall of Gylippus built to meet the first. The plan is invented by modern writers and attributed
xvi » INTRODUCTION
to Gylippus in order to explain the one word μέχρι. Is it not far more probable that τοῦ EvpvyjAov' has dropped out of the text before τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου than that Thucydides has forgotten to tell us of this very important change in Gylippus’ plans ?
§ 2. NICIAS. A SKETCH.
JOHN STUART MILL was an ardent admirer of Grote. In a remarkable passage of his Representative Govern- ment, he acutely observes that the adoption of an ingenious scheme for the parliamentary representa- tion of minorities would insure greater political influence to the élite of the instructed classes. ‘Their abilities would probably draw to them more than their numerical share of the actual administra- tion of government ; as the Athenians did not confide responsible public functions to Cleon or Hyperbolus (the employment of Cleon at Pylos and Amphipolis was purely exceptional), but Nicias, and Theramenes, and Alcibiades were in constant employment both at home and abroad.’ And in another passage, in his review of Grote’s history, he says: ‘The Demos (of Athens) may be alternately likened to the commonly received idea of a man, ἃ woman, or a child, but never a clown or a boor. Right or wrong, wise or foolish, Athenians are never ἀπαίδευτοι; theirs are never the errors of untaught or unexercised minds.’ It has been the fashion, since Grote’s work revolu- tionised the study of Greek history, for writers to express dissent from the view which Thucydides pre- sents to us of Nicias. Even those who are most
b
XViii INTRODUCTION
enthusiastic in praise of the general accuracy of Thucydides are forced to admit, when they come to Nicias, that here at least the historian has either wilfully misled us, or was himself blinded by partiality.
Every reader of Grote knows his eloquent protest against the sympathetic remark with which Thucy- dides dismisses Nicias!: ‘Our great historian—after devoting two immortal books to this expedition —after setting forth emphatically both the glory of its dawn and the wretchedness of its close, with a dramatic genius parallel to the Cdipus Tyrannus of Sophoklés—when he comes to recount the melan- choly end of the two commanders, has no words to spare for Demosthenés (far the abler officer of the two, who perished by no fault of his own), but reserves his flowers to strew on the grave of Nikias, the author of the whole calamity—‘“ What a pity! Such a respectable and religious man!”’ One can almost see the historian working himself into a fine democratic frenzy, and then piling up his lofty sentence only to throw that stone at it just when it is complete :—‘ Such a respectable and religious man!’
Undoubtedly Demosthenes was far the abler officer of the two. Thucydides was the last man to be duped, and he shows clearly, by the narrative which he gives of the exploits of Demosthenes, that he knew him to be an officer of quite unusual ability. Yet he reserves his flowers to strew on the grave of Nicias. His verdict therefore is thought to be
1 ¢. 86, 5 καὶ ὁ μὲν τοιαύτῃ ἣ ὅτι ἐγγύτατα τούτων αἰτίᾳ ἐτεθνήκει, ἥκιστα δὴ ἄξιος ὧν τῶν γε ἐπ᾽ ἐμοῦ Ἑλλήνων ἐς τοῦτο δυστυχίας ἀφικέσθαι διὰ τὴν πᾶσαν ἐς ἀρετὴν νενομισμένην ἐπιτήδευσιν. We
are not here concerned with either the reading or the construction of this sentence.
NICIAS xix
unjust. The next generation, we may suppose, or the second or the third generation after Thucydides will reverse his decision. So we come to the time of Aristotle, with whom, as with Mill, history is but the servant of philosophy. He will estimate, perhaps more accurately than a mere historian could have done, the real value of a man’s work. In public Opinion, at any rate, the statesmen of the fifth century before Christ will have assumed their proper places. Contemporary historians are notoriously unsafe guides in matters of opinion. But the public opinion of a century later counts for something. And what does Aristotle! tell us? ‘With regard to Nicias nearly everybody admits that he was not only a man of noble birth and character (καλὸς κἀγαθός), but also a statesman, and that his public career was entirely worthy of his ancestors.’ It is clear that Nicias is not to be condemned off-hand as a fool.
The undertakings of Nicias outside Attica previous to the Sicilian Expedition, though they were of considerable service to Athens, were certainly not of a very arduous nature. Ever since 427 B.c. he was, as Mill puts it, in constant employment both at home and abroad. That is to say, he was almost continuously elected war-minister for a succession of years nearly as long as that during which Pericles had continuously held office. In 427 he had done good service by occupying the island of Minoa which lay off Megara. This proceeding would render the Piraeus more secure against a surprise
1 The reader will understand that no opinion is here implied as to the actual authorship of the Aristotelian treatise On the Consti- tution of Athens as we have it.
Xx INTRODUCTION
like that attempted two years before. In the follow- ing year he went in command of a considerable force to Melos, and, if we may trust the statement of Diodorus, he actually laid siege to the island. Anyhow he failed to gain possession of it in spite of his large fleet and army. On his return to Greece, he laid waste the territory of Tanagra, and then sailed home. More than one writer has remarked that this expedition is in every respect similar to that which Pericles made against Epidaurus just before the outbreak of the plague (ii. 56).
It is impossible to defend the behaviour of Nicias in his dispute with Cleon about the expedition to Pylus. Grote abundantly proves that Cleon was in the right. Nevertheless the conduct of Nicias was in accordance with his principles, and a large party in the assembly undoubtedly believed him to be in the right. In the first place Nicias was exasperated that an opportunity of ending the war on favourable terms had just been lost through Cleon’s blustering. While the Lacedaemonians were being blockaded in Sphacteria, they had sent envoys to Athens to propose peace: but, owing to the extravagant de- mands made of them on Cleon’s proposal, they had returned to Pylus withont success. Grote himself admits that Cleon was to blame here; that ‘there was every reason for trying what could be done by negotiation, and that ‘the step, by which Kleon abruptly broke off such hopes (the hopes of peace), was decidedly mischievous.’ The farmers of Attica | were particularly galled by the protraction of the war, and they formed probably the most numerous body in the aggregate of minorities which supported Nicias. They doubtless flocked into Athens in
NICIAS xxi
considerable numbers when the request for reinforce- ments arrived from Demosthenes, and jeered at Cleon for having caused the unceremonious dismissal of the Spartan envoys. The apparent inconsistency which so often surprises us in the action of the Athenian assembly not infrequently disappears when we re- collect that the members attending and voting in the assembly on different days differed very much. We know that Nicias himself always felt some anxiety whether he would at an important meeting be able to command a majority of the voters present.
There is another circumstance which goes far to explain both the attitude of Nicias throughout this transaction and the favourable light in which Thucy- dides sets his conduct. The occupation of Pylus was the design of Demosthenes. Now that officer was the chosen general of the party which desired a more active policy outside Attica. He was the hero of the brilliant and risky Aetolian expedition which had been the first decided reversal of the policy of Pericles. Both Thucydides and Nicias firmly be- lieved that the policy of Demosthenes was wrong. That is why Thucydides ‘has no words to spare’ for that gallant officer when he perished by no fault of his own in Sicily. Moreover the design of seizing Pylus was closely connected with the burning ques- tion of Athenian intervention in Sicily. The scheme for conquering Sicily—a scheme as ingenious and as _ impossible as the plan of Rasselas for escaping from the happy valley with the aid of a flying-machine— had been already started in the lifetime of Pericles. Gustav Gilbert believes with good reason that, when Pericles repeatedly warned his countrymen against dangerous enterprises, he had uppermost in his
Xx INTRODUCTION
thoughts the dream of Sicilian conquest. Unhappily Pericles left to Athens maxims instead of men; and Niclas was not strong enough, either by natural ability or by acquired influence, to guide Athenian ambition in safe paths.
Not that the permanent occupation of Pylus was a measure of which Pericles would certainly have dis- approved. On the contrary, it was in accordance with the programme which he himself had sketched out before war was declared. But in the mind of Nicias the occupation of Pylus just at that time was closely associated with the dangerous scheme for invading Sicily ; it seemed to bring the invasion of Sicily, as we say, within the range of practical politics. Should the occupation of Pylus prove a success, the extreme party would turn it to account as an argument in favour of aggressive measures. And in the result, when the post was permanently secured and the Spartans had been brought in triumph to Athens, whereas Cleon and his party viewed the late events only as an encouragement to prosecute the war with - vigour, to double the sum payable by the allies, to negotiate for an alliance with Argos, and to attempt the recovery of the supremacy by land, Nicias and his party, on the contrary, looked upon the possession of the prisoners as a guarantee that peace was now near, and as an encouragement to work hard for peace.
We know, from the experience of our own times, that frequently those political and religious parties are the bitterest enemies, which, while they are in substantial agreement on most essential matters, differ only about mere detatls—about the desirability of making a measure, of which the advantage is, in the
NICIAS xxiii
abstract and apart from present circumstances, ad- mitted by all parties, a test question at the present time. That was the situation with regard to Pylus. Nicias would admit that the occupation of a position on the Laconian coast was most desirable; at any rate, when the fortification of Pylus had been justified by success, he himself eagerly adopted a similar plan for annoying the enemy. But he would fight tooth and nail against any plan which brought the Sicilian expedition nearer.
Perhaps Nicias was quite wrong: but his action was not capricious, nor was it dictated by his personal dis- like of Cleon. It was rational, and in accordance with principles which, as both Nicias and Thucydides believed, would have been approved by Pericles,— who, after all, as Aristotle at length saw, had been equally in the wrong.
One peculiarity in the character of Nicias stands out very prominently in all his dealings with Cleon. It is a quality on which we must dwell for a moment, as it greatly influenced the will of Nicias when he was in Sicily. The comic poets of course caricatured him on the stage, and a very poor creature they made of: him. In the Equites, which was produced the year after the affair.of Pylus, Nicias, Demos- thenes, and Cleon are represented as the slaves of Demos. Nicias is utterly terrified of Cleon. He suggests suicide or desertion to the enemy as the only possible means of escape from his bullying. At the same time, of all forms of demise, he would much prefer the death of Themistocles. Two remarkable characteristics of Nicias are here satirised—his strong dislike of the new school of demagogues, and his ambition to leave behind him a reputation like that
XX1V INTRODUCTION
of the older school,—the reputation of a profound politician. To this ambition, which Aristotle’s remark proves to have been at least partially realised, we shall have to refer presently. That he was extremely sensitive to the attacks of demagogues is evident from the language which he is represented as using to Demosthenes in the debate on the ques- tion of abandoning the siege of Syracuse. Seven years after the quarrel with Cleon, he even combined with Alcibiades in order to rid the city of a dema- gogue. His sensitiveness in this matter doubtless laid him open to. the unjust suspicion of personal cowardice. It should seem that in reality he regarded the blustering demagogue of the period as a nolsome pestilence which made him lose his temper. In consequence of this weakness, Nicias sometimes made a poor figure in the assembly when any considerable section of his supporters was not present, or did not go with him; while at other times he was unable to do more than hold his own. This sensitiveness was not wholly irrational. It was due to intense regret that the old decorum which had marked the proceedings of the assembly in the days when Pericles developed his despotism of eloquence was dying out through the violence of the new demagogues. For this change in the character of the debates Cleon alone was responsible. Thanks to his shrewish tongue the discussions too often degenerated into a mere wrangle between rival speakers. In these disputes Nicias became angry and personal: he had nothing like the reserve and restraint of Pericles, who was often enough attacked, but never lost control either of himself or of the situation. That Nicias was in
NICIAS XXV
the right in this matter must be conceded. . Ile represented here ‘the élite of the instructed classes’ ; whereas Cleon was not even above playing ‘the clown or the boor’ in a spirit utterly opposed to the hitherto dignified and educated character of the. Athenian Demos. It is not without reason that Thucydides makes Cleon extol ignorance. There was really very much about Cleon to cause both Nicias and the historian, and indeed all the élite of the instructed classes, to detest him as the representative of the new eloquence and the new ignorance. Cleon was at the head of the small but noisy knot of ἀπαίδευτοι among Athenian politicians.
In the same summer, and shortly after this un- fortunate encounter, Nicias sailed from the Piraeus with a very considerable force and not only ravaged the eastern coasts of Peloponnese, but established a permanent garrison at Methana between Epidaurus and Troezen, thus carrying out in his own way the policy advocated by Pericles. It appears that Nicias was entrusted with special powers on this occasion, and there is not much doubt that he hoped to show Demosthenes and Cleon how that policy could be pursued without mortgaging the safety of Athens. This proceeding of Nicias lends additional point to the jests of Aristophanes in the following year upon the rivalry between the slaves of Demos in serving their difficult master. The same system was con- tinued by Nicias in 424, when he took possession of the island of Cythera and again inflicted considerable damage on the eastern maritime region.
The repulse of Demosthenes at Siphae and the disastrous defeat of Hippocrates at Delium were very severe checks to the progressive party, and
'ΧΧΥῚ INTRODUCTION
afforded Nicias once again the opportunity for which he was always on the look-out of exhibiting the superiority of his strategy. Through the failure in Chalcidice of his admirer Thucydides (whose own want of foresight and energy when he was placed in a difficulty reminds us strongly of the failing that disfigured the character of Nicias), it became clear that the situation in the north-east would cause great trouble. Nicias was more than ever convinced that peace was necessary. In 423 he succeeded in obtaining a truce with Sparta for a year ; and in the meantime negotiations were to be continued with a view to a definitive peace. But the new complications which at once arose in Chalcidice forced Athens to send an armament thither during the truce. Nicias himself was in command. He must have known that, unless events should take a more favourable turn, it would be impossible to arrange terms of peace for which he could hope to obtain the ratification of the assembly. He succeeded in recovering Mende, and began the blockade of Scione. But his efforts to restore Athenian prestige in the north did not solve the great difficulty caused by the popularity and success of Brasidas. In the autumn of 423, says Grote, ‘the state of sentiment between the contracting parties was not such as to make it possible to treat for any longer peace, or to conclude any new agreement.’ | Matters were now at a deadlock, and the hopes of the peace party, which had burned so brightly since the battle of Delium, seemed in danger of being extinguished. The assembly again began to pay heed to Cleon’s argument, that it was idle to
NICIAS ° XXVii
continue to treat for peace until the Northern Question was solved. Grote argues forcibly that’ in urging the despatch of a new force to Chalcidice in the summer of 422, Cleon held precisely the language which had been uttered by Pericles himself at the beginning of the war, and was only insisting on the necessity of the preservation of the empire. This is true. But the dispute now was between a war and:a peace party. The peace party supposed that further interference would at once bring the negotiations to an end. The present conditions were in no way similar to the conditions under which Pericles had given his advice. He had spoken ‘it the outset of the war: but now negotiations were in progress for ending the war. Is it certain that, given the circumstances of 422, Pericles would have urged an expedition to the north?
To decide which statesman was in the right is unnecessary. It is enough to point out that Nicias believed this to be a case which called for diplomacy, while Cleon was convinced that nothing could be done except by force of arms.
Cleon’s mission to the north forwarded the negotiations for peace in a very unexpected manner. Both he and Brasidas fell before Amphipolis, and thus ‘the two most pronounced individual opponents of peace’ were removed once for all. After a winter spent in continual negotiation, the repre- sentatives of Athens and Sparta signed the Peace in the spring of 421.
With what joy the rural population of Attica greeted this result, to the attainment of which every act of Nicias had been consecrated for the last six years, may be imagined from the play of Aristophanes
XXxVvili . INTRODUCTION
which is named after the peace. Some even im- ‘ proved the occasion by attacking the memory of Pericles. ‘He had been the cause of the war; but Nicias had brought it to an end.’ Thucydides himself, who must have seen, one would suppose, that there were grave difficulties still to be faced, seems to have thought that the war was over. And he had in his place of exile better means than most men ,.of surveying the political situation. To the oppressed population of Attica, almost ruined by ten years of continuous warfare, the peace meant nothing less than a renewal of life itself. Perpetual liability to be called out on active service, perpetual dread of invasion and the consequent loss of home and means of support, the possibility that another plague might carry off those who were not slain by the enemy,—all these evils were now at an end. But perhaps the most universally appreciated of all the blessings that Nicias had conferred on_ his countrymen was the financial recovery. He had indeed throughout his contests with Cleon and Alcibiades this great advantage—that his policy was a policy of retrenchment: whereas their policy meant continually increasing burdens. The property-tax, which had been levied for the last six years, was now no more required. A surplus would soon begin again to accumulate in the Acropolis: the docks would once more be filled with ships in reserve: the fleet would be restored to its normal strength : the price of food would decline: and security and plenty, so long missed, would return to the home- steads of Attica. No longer the trumpet note, but again—at last—the cock-crow only would sound the réveillé; at last undisturbed the spider might weave
NICIAS xxix
its web about the rusty spear-heads.! Giving expres- sion to such thoughts in rustic songs, the farmers, who in ordinary times cared little about politics and were glad to be rid of the necessity of attending assemblies in the city, were loudest in their praise of Nicias.
He had in truth reason to felicitate himself: for he seemed to have reached the summit of his ambition—to have made sure of ‘léaving behind a name as one who had never endangered the state.’ Had he died in 421, we should cease to wonder why, almost a century later, most men regarded him as a father of his country, and why, after his death, Thucydides bestowed on his grave all his tears and all his flowers.
But no sooner was the peace signed than the troubles of the government began. Nicias had not in the first instance obtained from Sparta terms which could be regarded as favourable to Athens. But that was, overlooked in the enthusiasm of the moment. All the more bitter must have been the disappointment of the assembly when Nicias proved unequal to the task of securing from Sparta the fulfilment of the conditions. It is not surprising that alliance with Argos, which was a traditional maxim of Athenian diplomacy, and which now became possible, was cagerly canvassed by a con- siderable party under the leadership of Alcibiades, the new opponent of the peace.
We may be sure that the rural population continued to revere Nicias throughout the two years which followed the peace. But in the assembly the new policy attempted by Alcibiades made rapid
1 Aristophanes, Par,
XXX INTRODUCTION
headway. There Nicias was quite unequal to the task of combating such a consummate wire-puller as Alcibiades. It is among the strangest phenomena of Athenian politics that Alcibiades, who, Grote tells us, ‘never inspired confidence or esteem in any one,’ whom ‘sooner or later so much accumulated odium and suspicion was sure to bring to ruin,’ was yet able to carry the majority of the assembly with him. But we know very little of the means by which the political caucuses were in the habit of ‘working’ the assembly. Nicias was apparently not elected war minister in 420. We hardly need the help of fragments of comedies to lead us to the conclusion that, in spite of Alcibiades, Nicias was still head of a very large minority, and might at any moment again find his party in a majority, should Alcibiades fail to fulfil expectation. In spite of the new alliance with Argos, the peace of Nicias was still technically observed. Party-feeling ran higher than ever in the assembly, and, in the absence of Alcibiades, there was but little to choose between the young men who shouted at Nicias and the old school that still believed in him.
So keen was the struggle of parties at the beginning of 418, that it was resolved in the sixth ‘prytany’ to have recourse to ‘ostracism.’ That expedient had not been resorted to since the ostracism of Damonides, the friend and adviser of Pericles. Alcibiades had not the constant support of the extreme democrats, and it should seem that his dislike of their leader Hyperbolus was as vehement as that felt for the demagogue by Nicias himself. A coali- tion was effected between the supporters of Nicias and the younger men who looked to Alcibiades, and
ἂ
NICIAS XXXi
this coalition secured the ostracism of Hyperbolus. Very shortly after this strange event the election of war-ministers was held for the official year which would begin in July 418. Consequently no force was sent into Peloponnese when the cam- paign opened. In July, however, Alcibiades was sent as ambassador to Argos; and the result of this mission was the defeat of the allies at Mantinea.
We hear nothing further of the public life of Nicias until the discussions in the assembly, during the early part of 415, with reference to the embassy which had come to Athens from Segesta in the winter. The Sicilian command was the first really difficult business entrusted to him outside Attica. But he had hitherto been successful in all his military under- takings. That he should afterwards fail so utterly in Sicily must have occasioned very great astonish- ment at Athens, where, owing to his previous good fortune, some confidence was felt in his military skill.
It is well to realise exactly what Thucydides means by ‘the good luck of Nicias in military commands,’ because it is a matter on which there has been a considerable amount of loose writing. πλεῖστα τῶν τότε εὖ φερόμενος ἐν στρατηγίαις, and again, ἕως ὁ Νικίας εὐτυχὴς δοκεῖ efvac—what is the precise significance of these expressions? First we must notice that by στρατηγία Thucydides means something more than orparefa. Whenever a man is war-minister, he is ἐν στρατηγίᾳ, even though he does not leave Athens at all. This is due to the peculiarity of the Athenian constitution, according to which the war-ministers in the fifth century were at once the chief administrative and the chief executive officials. Now it is in his account of
Xxxii INTRODUCTION
the causes which led to the Peace of 421, that Thucydides uses the first of these two expressions with regard to Nicias. He was then, according to the historian, the most successful of all those who had held the office of war-minister. That his achievements outside Attica were not of great importance we have already seen. Yet may we reasonably doubt whether any who had been elected to the ministry had in 421 a reputation equal to ᾿ that of Nicias. Demosthenes—‘ the abler officer,’ it is true—had won victories far greater than anything Nicias had done in the field; but then he had in his first year of office committed a serious mistake in Aetolia, which involved a heavy loss of Athenian troops. His policy was brilliant but it was unsafe : Nicias, on the contrary, was always safe. It seems too that an unbroken series of small successes was thought at Athens at least as much of as a chequered career in which defeat mingled with splendid victories. Cleon does not concern us; for he was not war-minister till July 422, and then he was killed in Thrace ; his mission to Sphacteria had been quite extraordinary and should accordingly be left out of account,
But there are indications that the reputation of Nicias as a minister rested rather upon his political action than upon his military achievements. He had by 421 convinced the majority at Athens that, however great the victories won by Demosthenes, peace was the only cure for the troubles of the state. This is a fact which admits of no dispute. To the party of Nicias—that is, to the peace party, now in the majority—belonged Thucydides. He was per- suaded that the course which Nicias had throughout
NICTAS XXxili
pursued was the right course. It is therefore un- reasonable to charge the historian with misrepresenta- tion when he calls Nicias in 421 the most successful war-minister of the day. One need not be among the ‘random panegyrists’ of Thucydides to maintain that. To be sure, he writes with a strong party bias, and sometimes as ἃ man would be apt to write who had lived among the persons whom he described. But he narrates their actions honestly ; that is to say, in accordance with his convictions. That his view was endorsed by large bodies of men in the fourth century is clear from the passage of Aristotle. During the Archidamian war the Athenian people exaggerated the value of success. Their power had been gained by such phenomenal rapidity : their statesmen had been so consummate: they were so clearly the first people in the Greek world, except only as soldiers. No wonder that they thought they must succeed in all that they attempted. It needed all the experience of the Sicilian expedition to teach them that they were not infallible. There- fore they greatly valued a minister who could show a series of successes, however slight, unbroken by failure. In Nicias the constant anxiety to succeed was not backed by sufficient strength either of body or of mind to enable him to overcome real difficulties. But as he bodies forth to us that eagerness to succeed in everything, which is so characteristic of the volatile Athenians, he seems—to adopt another of Mill’s suggestive remarks—one of the successive phases in which Athens appears to us; he reflects what was perhaps the most prominent quality—defect, perhaps, though an amiable defect—in the character of his contemporaries. They liked him because he reflected C
XXXIV INTRODUCTION
them. He had persuaded himself and the people that he was under the special care of the gods. One half suspects that Alcibiades was laughing at this foible of the Athenians when he urged them to make the most of Nicias ἕως εὐτυχὴς δοκεῖ εἶναι. For these words are doubtless the genuine words of Alcibiades, spoken in 415. The gods had not been quite con- stant to Nicias since the peace was signed: and perhaps their late fickleness increased. the devout man’s anxiety about the expedition to Sicily.
The conduct of Nicias in Sicily subsequent to the landing of Gylippus is without excuse. He is ‘the author of the whole calamity.’ But let us remember that the government at home knew what it was about when it retained Nicias in the command in spite of himself. Nicias is the immediate cause of the calamity ; but is not Thucydides in a sense right in declaring that the failure was due to the folly of the home government? If he preferred to lay the blame on the men who ought to have recalled Nicias, and ought not to have recalled Alcibiades, rather than on the unfortunate minister with whom he sympathised, we must hesitate to find fault with the historian’s judgment. He is only tracing back results to their original causes, after his own fashion. And after all, had Nicias been listened to, the ex- pedition would never have been undertaken.
Only those who have suffered from diseases similar to the distressing malady which oppressed Nicias in his last years know how much allowance must be made for him owing to his illness. It is a malady which, while it does not totally disable the patient, yet renders him incapable of prolonged or violent exertion. Its intensity is increased sensibly and
NICIAS XXXV
immediately with every fresh effort, whether physical or mental. It enfeebles the will: it induces pessi- mism, even in a character before buoyant. On a man naturally nervous, as Nicias was, its effects are especially distressing. I sometimes think that the retreat of Nicias in his state of health was an extra- ordinary act of heroism and endurance ; and it is just here, in the narrative which Thucydides gives of the retreat, that I feel some misgiving about the historian’s veracity. From what one reads in Plutarch and in Pausanias, it does seem possible that Thucydides has here suppressed something.
The trait in Nicias’ character which is most obvious of all is his superstition. For him, as indeed for all Athenians with the exception of an emanci- pated few, human life was no strict succession of cause and effect. Rather life was a ‘colossal riddle,’ to which there was a hidden solution which the gods had revealed to certain chosen servants—the diviners; and they in their turn were privileged to purvey the secret to pious enquirers who brought the required gift. Nicias, with his constant anxiety to know before acting what would be the result of his action, was oppressed more than most men by the puzzling enigma. He must find help. Hence his naive faith in oracles and divination. He - had his own prophets continually about him. Stilbides, one of the most reputed prophets of the day, was his chief confessor, and went with him to Sicily. If ever he failed, some god must be angry —the Eleusinian deities (one might think with Diodorus) when he failed in Sicily. When he suc- ceeded, his success was due not to his own foresight, or power, or skill, but to the pleasure which the gods
᾿ χχχνὶ INTRODUCTION
found in his offerings. For, like coquettes, the gods could be coaxed with costly presents into bestowing their favours on him. Now it was a bridge for Delos, with fantastic drapery of flowers and tapestry and cloth of gold; now an endowment to provide for sacrifice and a dinner for the island-folk that they might remember him when they prayed to the god; now a huge column of brass for Phoebus him- self, wrought into the likeness of a tall palm. But alas! either the brazen tree did not take the god’s fancy, or else it roused the jealousy of some less courted divinity : for one day a cruel wind arose and threw it down.
Ominous collapse! For, sooner or later, that controlling power which Thucydides calls τύχη, and which is above all the gods, demands from man satisfaction for every weakness. For his weakness Nicias paid a hard price at the end of the Sicilian expedition. Well might the emancipated few chaff Nicias. Aristophanes introduced him into his play called Amphiaraus, which was produced in 414. There Nicias was a superstitious invalid, enquiring of the oracle how he might regain his health. In better taste Thucydides, who was of course a com- plete sceptic with regard to divination, censured the superstition of Nicias—not sternly, it is true; but perhaps he went as far as he thought it safe to go in those days. For the license allowed to comedy was not extended to prose; and Thucydides was not defending a principle against his countrymen. Still, while he, with his clearer insight, despised supersti- tion, he yet had the utmost veneration for the real virtue of the man. It was peculiarly hard that one who had lived so good a life, one whose whole
NICIAS xxxvii
ambition was summed up in the one word εὐτυχία, should experience such terrible δυστυχία at the end. We have no words in our tongue at all corresponding to these three terms—rvy, εὐτυχία, dvorvyia—which play such an important part in Thucydides. But we can now understand better why the historian says of him ἥκιστα δὴ ἄξιος ὧν τῶν ye ἐπ᾽ ἐμοῦ Ἑλλήνων és τοῦτο δυστυχίας ἀφικέσθαι, ---- why he reserves his flowers for Nicias’ tom).
A beautiful picture is presented by ancient writers of the private life of Nicias: and though his ami- ability cannot excuse his shortcomings as a public leader, it at least affords a further explanation of the fidelity with which large classes of Athenians clung to his memory. We can be brief here, because there is neither doubt nor difficulty about the matter. The most striking notice—and the most attractive —which we have of him is contained in the descrip- tion which Euripides gives of Capaneus in the Supplices. The character, so strangely altered from the character which Aeschylus attributes to Capaneus in the Seven against Thebes, is sketched from Nicias:
There Capaneus lies. Great store of wealth was his, Wealth without pride of riches. For his heart
Was lowly as the poor man’s: but, if any,
Flouting the warnings of sufficiency,
Waa’d riotous and immoderate at the feast,
Him he disdained. For not in surfeiting
Lay goodness ; but plain living gave content.
Few men remember absent friends: but he,
Present or absent, was a loyal friend.
True man he was, and, whether to his own
Or to the citizens he promised aught,
Prompt to redeem his promise.
There could scarcely be a better comment on the difficult words διὰ τὴν πᾶσαν és ἀρετὴν νενομισμένην ἐπιτήδευσιν.
XXXViii INTRODUCTION
Ihave made no attempt to disguise the faults of Nicias. It is one of the greatest services rendered by Grote that he for the first time presented a truer picture of Cleon and Nicias in public life. But, as so often happens to enthusiasts, he went, I think, too far in his attack on Nicias through his eagerness to defend Cleon. I have only endeavoured to show that Thucydides and Aristotle are not mere ‘random panegyrists’ of Nicias—that they were standing on solid ground, even if they were in the wrong Paradise. Had Nicias been a stronger man, his peace might have been lasting. His intentions were excellent ; and, in the largest sense, his policy-—to avoid Sicily and to make peace with Sparta—was certainly the right policy for Athens. But as a diplomatist he was mediocre; or, at most, he was not insolently superior to the ordinary Athenian citizen. And this moderate superiority is, after all, the secret of his popularity among the political. mediocrities. Unfortunately, painstaking and in many respects sane, he had none of the coarser qualities necessary to a statesman. His very virtues, his transparent honesty, told fatally against him in diplomacy ; and it seems as if he was too anxious to introduce the ethics of private life into international politics.
Φ
§ 3. THE MANUSCRIPTS AND TEXT OF THE SEVENTH BOOK
THE chief MSS. of Thucydides are as follows :— 1. VATICAN GROUP.
B or Vaticanus. ΧΙ century. Vatican Library.
A or Cisalpinus or Italus. ΧΙ century. Bibliothéque nationale, Paris. Lost from 1815 to 1869, when it was rediscovered by R. Prinz (Cod. Jtalus, N. Jahrb.)
E or Palatinus. XIth century. Heidelberg.
F or Augustanus. Dated 1301. Munich.
Observe also that Parisinus H, one of ten MSS. iu the Paris Library collated by Gail in 1807, was copied from B. H ends at vii. 49; but from vi. 92, 5 to vii. 49 it is the only MS. which gives the peculiar version of the text which we read in B from vi. 92, 5 onwards.
2. LAURENTIAN GROUP.
C or Laurentianus. Xth century. Florence. G or Monacensis. XIIIth century. Munich. The top is eaten away throughout.
3. THE British MS., agreeing sometimes with group 1, sometimes with 2.
M or Britannus. XIth century. vi. vii. viii. collated by Bloomfield ; viii. by Herwerden; the whole by Eggeling for Stahl. A new collation of vii. is con- tained in this edition. The MS. is very disappointing considering its antiquity.
It is not possible to decide whether B or C is the best MS.; Bekker pronounced in favour of the
xl INTRODUCTION
Vatican, but during the last fifteen years several critics supported the claims of the Laurentian. But all three classes go back to one MS. now lost, which was itself not very ancient. In 1885 Wessely discovered the famous FAYOUM FRAGMENTS - of viii. 91 and 92 in Upper Egypt (/Viener Studien vii.) These bits are believed to be part of a MS. of the first century A.D. Consequently they are some nine centuries older than the Laurentian, from which however they only differ in orthography and in the order of words. They are unfortunately too scanty to support any theory with regard to the condition of the text as a whole.
The study of the MSS. of this book leads to the following conclusions.
I. There are two versions of the text of this book. As far as vi. 92 all the MSS. are in substantial agreement. But from vi. 92, 5 to the end of the history, B differs greatly from all the rest. (1) B frequently adds one or more words—especially re— not found in other MSS. ; (2) frequently B gives a different word or form; (3) occasionally B omits something found in the other MSS.
II. On the whole the balance is decidedly in favour of B. The alterations in the text which are obtained from it are generally elegant, especially the additions. In many cases B alone gives the true reading. | ΕΣ
III. It is probable that the scribe οὗ B used ἃ different MS. from vi. 92, 5 onwards; and this MS. was on the whole better than that which he had been using up to this point.!
1 In 1885, Wilamowitz- Moellendorf, the accomplished author and editor, published an ingenious pamphlet intended
MANUSCRIPTS AND TEXT xli
IV. The readings of B have to be ‘considered in every case in which the MS. differs from the rest: no general rule can be given. Some of the readings are suspiciously like ingenious corrections made by the scribe himself: some additions are probably interpolations.
V. With the help of B the text of this hook is made considerably better than the text of earlier books, such as the second and the fourth. Even without B the text would be somewhat better; for there are (1) fewer interpolations; (2) fewer con- fusions of case and construction. This superiority is in part due to Thucydides himself; since this book is manifestly more polished than some other parts ! of the history, and the style is smoother. It
to prove (1) that according to the ancient division of Thucy- dides into thirteen books, the ¢enth begins where B and Paris H begin to differ from the other MSS., and that the scribe of B used a MS. divided according to this older system from this point ; (2) that Thucydides left his work even more incomplete Ὁ than is generally supposed, and that a dull editor patched it up after his death. With regard to (1), W.-M. makes the eleventh book end with the end of our vii. The statement that there was a division into thirteen books is made by Marcel- linus ; and traces of such an arrangement are found in the margin of existing MSS. In Diodorus vii. 37 ὁ δὲ Θουκυδίδης γέγραφεν ἐν βίβλοις ὀκτώ (H), ws δέ τινες διαιροῦσιν, ἐννέα (8), W.-M. supposes H to be a corruption of N, and that both N and 6 are here really letters, not awmbers ; so that N represents a division into thirteen lettered books, and © a division into cight lettered books. Unfortunately it is likely enough that H is right, and that Diodorus means that some reckon the cight books by 2wmbers down to H, others by Jeffers down to O—which appears from existing MSS. to be a true statement. \2) The editor theory has given rise to a very dull and profit- less controversy. In fact, there are three phantom editors now, of whom one is stupid and another pious, one contem- porary with Thucydides and another much later.
1 Cwiklinski (Hermes xii. 1877) attempts to prove that Thucydides at first wrote vi. and vii. as a separate work. He
xlii INTRODUCTION
is partly due to the ancient annotators ; for, finding the text easier to follow, they added fewer glosses, and hence there was less danger of the text becom- ing interpolated with notes from the margin.
VI. There is thus less need of conjectural emendation in this than in earlier books.
VII. The fact that B continually supplies a small word not found in other MSS. is strong evidence that a small word is frequently lost altogether in the earlier books ; and editors ought to take this into account in emending the text. It is also highly probable that now and then a single word is still missing in the text of vii. An attempt is made in the present edition to supply these words.
- The current text is based on Bekker’s critical edition,’ which first appeared in 1821 and entirely superseded ‘the Vulgate,’ that is, the text of Stephanus (second edition 1588). The following list gives most variations of the present edition from Bekker’s text, and it is added because Bekker is the earliest and in some respects the greatest of modern textual critics. He settled once for all which were the most important MSS. then known, and he first collated BCAE. Of the other good MSS. F had already been collated, and G was collated for
is answered by Fischer (Zeitschrift fiir die dsterreichischen Gymnasien, 1881), who argues forcibly that vi. and vii. are integral parts of the whole work. Few will agree with Schroter (ad Thue. vii. quaest. phil. 1886), that the Seventh Book is imperfect and accordingly must be leniently criticised.
1 J. BEkKER. Thucydides de Ὁ. P. 1. viii. Accedunt scholia Graeca et Dukeri Wassiique annotationes, 3 vols. Berlin. In the same year the book was also published at Oxford in 4 vols., including the Latin version ΟἹ Aemilius Portus. The subsequent editions of Bekker’s text appeared in 1824, 1832, 1846, 1868. Bekker died in 1871.
MANUSCRIPTS AND TEXT xliti
Poppo. Those passages in the list to which an asterisk is prefixed illustrate very common blunders in the MSS. of Thucydides. No account is taken of those conjectures of Bekker himself which are now rejected. Those of the present editor's own con- jectures which are admitted into the text are given in a separate list. It appeared best to pass over in silence all conjectures which seemed unnecessary or
improbable. added to the text.
LECTIO BEKKEBRI, A.D. 1868.
3. Lléra. τό TE. πρὸς τὰς with Vat. . τοῦτο καιροῦ. κατελείπετο. 1. προπέμπει. 3. ἑαυτοῦ. 5. τῷ μεγάλῳ λιμένι with Vat. 4, τῷ τῶν Συρακοσίων. δ. ἐξετείχιζε with Steph. , 1. προέλθοι. 2. πεζὴν with Vat. 3. κατὰ τὸ with Vat. ἢ 10. γραμματεὺς ὁ τῆς πό- λεως with Vat. 11. πολλαῖς om. with Vat. 2. ἀπὸ οἴῃ. with Vat. 12, 3. ὅπερ with Schol. *13, 2. ναυτῶν τῶν. 14, ὃ. διαπεπολεμήσεται. . . ὁ πόλεμος. . βουλεύεσθε.
[1] denote words cut out, < > words
LecTIo CRITICORUM in hac editione reposita.
᾿Ιετὰς Goller.
τότε τι Vat.
ἐς τὰς.
τοῦτο τοῦ κ. Vat. κατελέλειπτο Cobet. προσπέμπει Vat. ἑαυτῶν Vat.
τῷ λιμένι.
del. Kriiger.
ἐξετείχισε MSS., Ald.
παρέλθοι Classen.
πεζικὴν.
τὰ κατὰ τὸ.
γραμματεὺς werden.
[τῆς mw.) Her-
. πολλαῖς.
ἀπὸ.
ἧπερ.
ναντῶν [τῶν] Poppo.
ὃ. . .. [ὁ π.] Kriiger.
βουλεύσασθε I'at.
30,
οὐ to coe ue τὸ te te
. μεταναστήσαντας
INTRODUCTION
. εἴκοσι. . γένοιτο. . καὶ οὐ πολλῷ πλέον.
ἐξ αὐτῆς. ᾿Αργείων τε. ὑπελείπετο. κατεργάσασθαι.
. ξυνέπειθε..
ἐπιχειρήσειν. [av] αὐτοῖς.
. παρεσκευάσατο.
. τριηράρχων. . τὸ στράτευμα τὸ τῶν.
τῆς ἐπαγωγῆς.
. φράσωσιν, ἐποτρύνωσι. . ἀνέκλων (ANEKAON).
. οἱ Εἵλωτες τῶν .\axke-
δαιμονέων.
. ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει τούτῳ. . ἐς Θράκην.
ἐλάμβανεν.
. ἐποίησαν. . τὸ τῶν Θρᾳκῶν.
τὸν Εὔριπον καὶ.
. τοῦ ζεύγματος. . ἐπέσχοντο. . τῶν ᾿Ιαπύγων.
προανεχούσαις with Vat.
δι᾽ αὐτὸ.
. ἀντίπρωροι. . διεκπλεῖν.
καὶ,
ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν κομίσαι with Vat.
εἴκοσι «- καὶ ἑκατὸν > Valla.
ἐγένετο Brit.
del. Hude.
ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς Vut.
re del. Reiske.
ὑπελέλειπτο Stahl.
κατεργάσεσθαι Stahl.
ξυνανέπειθε Laur’. Steph. (ξυναναπείθει Ald.)
ἐπιχειρῆσαι Dobree.
ἂν [αὐτοῖς] Badham.
παρεσκεύαστο inferior MSS.
τῶν τριηράρχων Vat.
τὸ στράτευμα τῶν Vat.
del. Poppo.
φράσουσιν, -νοῦσι Dobree.
ἀνεῖλκον (ANEAKON) Wid- mann.
τῶν Aax. del. Herwerden.
Mon. Vat.
τοῦ αὐτοῦ 0. τ. Vat. del. Bothe.
ἐλάμβανον Vat. ἐπέθεσαν Badham.
del. Stahl.
del. Stahl.
τοξεύματος Valla. ἐπέσχον τὸ Laur. Brit. del. Herwerden. ἀνεχούσαις.
αὐτοὶ Classen (αὐτὸ Vat.)
ἀντιπρῴροις Reiske.
διέκπλουν Vat.
del. Classen.
παρὰ τ. θ. μεταστῆσαι Kopl- σαντας.
MANUSCRIPTS AND TEXT xlv
43, 5. τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης. *44, 8. οἱ πολλοὶ, 45, 2. ψιλοὶ ἄνευ τῶν ἀσπί- δων. 46. ὑπαγάγοιτο. 47, 2. ὅτι ἀνέλπιστα. 8. διακινδυνεῦσαι. ἀπιέναι with Vat.
48, 3. ἀκούσαντας. 5 διαβάλλοι. 6. ὡς. 49,°1. [που] τὸ. ἢ. θαρσήσει. 2. αὐτούς.
50, 1. ἐς φίλια. 2. ὅθεν πρὸς Σικελίαν. 61, 1. ἐγηγερμένοι. 2. προτεραίᾳ with Vat. 52, 2. καὶ μυχῷ. 53, 4. τὴν ναῦν. 55, 2. xpelocous. *66, 2. κωλύσωσι with Vat. 3. μόνον bis.
μέρος. 4, λόγου. 57, 1. Συρακούσας. ἑκάστοις. ἔσχεν.
2. Ἑστίαιαν οἰκοῦντες. 5. καταντικρὺ. 9, ἄκοντας. 11. κατειλημμένων. 58, 3. δύναται δὲ τὸ νεοδα- μῶδες ἐλεύθερον ἤδη . εἶναι. 59, 2. τε οὖν. 60, 9. ἀσθενοῦσιν with Vat.
ἀπὸ τ. π. τὸ Goller. πολλοὶ Bloomfield, ἄνευ τῶν a. del. Haacke.
ἐπαγάγοιτο Pluygers. [ὅτι] a. LE.
διεκινδύνευσε Vat. Laur. ἐξιέναι.
ἀκούοντας Vat. διαβάλλῃ Stahl.
ὧν Vat.
πολὺ τὸ Linwood.
ἢ Stahl.
ἐθάρσει Gertz (ἐθάρσησε Vat.) αὐτοῦ Kriiger.
φιλία Bauer (ἐς φιλία Vat.) ὅθενπερ Σικελία Bohme. ἐπηρμένοι Vat.
προτέρᾳ.
del. Bothe.
del. Bothe.
κρείσσονος Schol.
κωλύσουσι Laur.
μόνων Stahl] and μόνοι Madvig. del, Kriiger.
ὄχλου Kriiger.
-ais Bauer.
ἕκαστοι Vat.
ἔσχον Ald.,
del. Kriiger.
καὶ ἄντικρυς Bohme.
ἑκόντας Vat.
κατειλημμένοι Reiske.
del. Portus.
δ᾽ οὖν Kriiger. ἀσθενέσιν.
. ἀντιναυπηγῆσαι
INTRODUCTION
with Vat.
ὑμῶν with best MSS.
τὸ.
. ἀποκιψδυνεύσει.
ἢν.
. παραβοηθοῖ. . οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι.
ὅτε.
. ᾿Αθηναίους. . διὰ τὸ ἀνώμαλον καὶ
τὴν ἔποψιν τῆς ναυ- μαχίας. ὅσα.
. ἐβούλοντο with Vat. . διαλαβόντας with Vat.
. ἀφῖκτο.
. θεοῦ.
. ἄλλα.
. TE
. ἐλθεῖν.
. ἀπὸ.
. μετεπέμψαντο
with Vat.
. ὅσα ἀναγκάζονται with
Vat.
. ᾿Αθηναῖοι. . γοῦν.
. χρῆσθαι. . Σικελικῷ.
. τοιούτῳ. . Ἑλληνικὸν.
ἀντινανπηγεῖσθαι.
ἡμῶν.
τοῦ Kriiger.
ἀποκινδυνεῦσαι Duker.
del. Vat.
παρεβοήθει Dion. Hal.
οἱ ἄλλοι᾽ Α., Lar.
ὁπότε Vat.
del. Duker.
διὰ τὸ < ἀνώμαλον» τῆς ναυμαχ- tas ἀνώμαλον καὶ τὴν ἔποψιν Wolffiin.
ὅσ᾽ ἂν Herwerden.
ἐβονλεύοντο Laur.
προφθάσαντας Laur. [προλα- βεῖν is the regular scholiast’s gloss on φθάνειν. }
ἀφίκατο Badham.
θείου Kriiger.
dua Reiske.
del. Kriiger.
del. Kriiger.
del. Reiske.
μετέπεμψαν Laur.
ὅσ᾽ ἂν Dobree. ἀναγκάζωνται Laur.
del. Kriiger.
5 οὖν Dobree.
χρήσασθαι Vat.
del. Dobree. [The Schol. pro- poses ᾿Ἑλληνικῴ.]
τῷ τοιούτῳ Vat.
det, Kriiger.
MANUSCRIPTS AND TEXT
LECTIO BEKKERI.
2,4. τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ τοῦ κύ- κλου.
. μέχρι τοῦ τείχους.
8. τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν ἐν ὁλκάσιν ἢ πλοίοις ἢ ἄλλως ὅπως ἂν προχωρῇ.
. οὖς ἀπέστειλε.
. ἐπιχειρήσειν πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, λέγων.
ἐγκαρσίου
28, 8. τὸ γὰρ αὐτοὺς. ὅσον κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς. .. οἱ μὲν. ὥστε.
81, 4, καταλύουσι τὸν πόλε- μον.
48, 8. περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν.
49, 1. γενέσθαι.
_ κρατηθείς.
δ6, 4. πολέμῳ.
57, 5. μετὰ Συρακοσίων.
68, 1. καὶ τὸ λεγόμενόν που
ἥδιστον εἶναι, . παραλειφθέντα. . ἢ ἄλλη.
xlvil
LECTIO AB EDITORE PRIMO REPOSITA.
τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ «ἄνω: τοῦ κύ- κλονυ.
μέχρι «-τοῦ Ἑὐρνήλου:» τοῦ €. τείχους.
τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν ἑνῇ, ὁλκάσιν ἢ πλοίοις, K.T.r.
del,
ἐπιχειρῆσαι (Dobree), πρὸς τοὺς "A. λέγων.
τό γ᾽ ἄν, αὐτοὺς.
ὅσον <ol μὲν» κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς... οἱ μὲν.
οἱ δὲ [See Appendix II.]
κατοκνοῦσι Tov π. Cf. VIII. 12, 1 ἀποκνῆσαι τὸν πλοῦν.
περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν.
ἐνδίδοσθαι.
del,
πολέμῳ «-πολεμοῦντος:».
del.
καί, τὸ λεγόμενόν που, ἥδιστον εἶναι.
παρακλῃσθέντα.
ἥ «τ᾽» ἄλλη.
No attempt has been made to supply a complete
apparatus criticus for this edition.
The editor believes
such compilations to be generally of small value in a text-book. He has also recorded in the footnotes only such conjectures as seem to him in some way
instructive.
NOTE
THE Greek Index has been prepared with the object of providing readers with a conspectus of Thucydidean diction—-1) ἀρχαία ’ArOis—so far as it is to be gathered from this book. The Index is therefore a catalogue of words and idioms that should be found useful both for syntax and for composition. A few brief notes have been added, which may increase the value of the catalogue for those who will use it.
1
OL 91, 8. 8.6. 414 Summer.
@OTKTAIAOT
BYTTPAPHS Ζ.
ἐπεὶ ἐπεσκεύασαν τὰς vais, παρέ- 2. : 4 \ 9 πλευσαν ἐς Λοκροὺς τοὺς ᾿Ἐπιζε-
, φυρίους" καὶ πυνθανόμενοι σαφέστε.
1
ρον ἤδη ὅτι οὐ παντελῶς πω ἀπο- τετειχισμέναι αἱ Συράκουσαί εἰσιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἔτι οἷόν τε κατὰ τὰς ᾿Επιπολὰς στρατιᾷ ἀφικομένους ἐσελθεῖν, ἐβου-
λεύοντο εἴτ᾽ ἐν δεξιᾷ΄ Daf λαβόντες τὴν
Σικελίαν διακινδυνεύσωσιν ἐσπλεῦ-
Ὃ δὲ Γύλιππος καὶ ὁ ᾿Τυθὴν ἐκ τοῦ Τάραντος,
EXTRACTS FROM GROTE’s HISTORY.
‘Gylippus, on arriving at Himera as com- mander named by Sparta, and announcing him- self as fore- runner of Peloponnesian reinforcements, met with a hearty welcome.’
σαι, εἴτ᾽ ἐν ἀριστερᾷ ἐς Ἱμέραν πρῶτον πλεύσαν- τες καὶ αὐτούς τε ἐκείνους καὶ στρατιὰν ἄλλην προσλαβόντες, ods ἂν πείθωσι, κατὰ γῆν ἔλθωσι. 4 καὶ ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς ἐπὶ τῆς Ἱμέρας πλεῖν, ἄλλως τε
καὶ τῶν ᾿Αττικῶν τεσσάρων νεῶν οὔπω παρουσῶν 15 ἐν τῷ Ῥηγίῳ, ἃ ἃς ὁ Νικίας ὅμως, πυνθανόμενος
αὐτοὺς ἐν “Λοκροῖς εἶναι, ἀπέστειλε.
φθάσαντες
δὲ τὴν φυλακὴν ταύτην περαιοῦνται διὰ" τοῦ ἡορθμοῦ, καὶ σχόντες “Ῥηγίῳ καὶ Μεσσήνῃ
« 1, ἐπεσκεύασα»] ἑπαρεσκεύασαν Μ. ---πανστρατιᾶι Μ.
Έ Β
10
2 OOYKYAIAOY
ὃ ἀφικνοῦνται és Ἱμέραν. ἐκεῖ δὲ ὄντες τούς τε 20
‘The Himeraeans ἱμεραίους ἔπεισαν Ev “πὸλεμεῖν καὶ agreed toaidhim °/©P 5 Ν pews
witha bodyof αὐτούς τε ἕπεσθαι καὶ τοῖς ἐκ τῶν hoplites, and to
> furnish panoplies νεῶν τῶν σφετέρων VaUTALS ὅσοι μὴ for the seamen °
in his vessels,’ εἶχον ὅπλ. παρασχεῖν (τὰς γὰρ ναῦς
ἀνείλκυδαν ἐν Ἵμερᾳ), καὶ τοὺς Σελινουντίους 3:
πέμψαντες ἐκέλευον ἀπαυτᾶν πανστρατιᾷ ἔς τι 4 χωρίον. πέμψειν δέ τινα αὐτοῖς ὑπέσχοντο στρα- τιὰν οὐ πολλὴν καὶ οἱ Γελῷοι καὶ τῶν Σικελῶν
‘On sendingto τίνες, οὗ πολὺ προθυμότερον προσχω- Selinus, Ge
and sore of the βεῖν ἑτοῖμοι ἦσαν τοῦ τε ᾿Αρχωνίδου 80
fhe interior, he {εωστὶ 'χεθνηκότος, ὃς τῶν ταύτῃ received equally ἱκελῶν βασιλεύων τινῶν καὶ dp οὐκ ἀδύνατοᾷἘ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις φίλος
assurances.’ ἦν, καὶ τοῦ Τυλίππου x Λακεδαίμονος προθύμως
5 δοκοϑντος ἥκειν. καὶ ὁ μὲν Γύλιππος avaraBov 35
a f A awn B ‘He wasenablead ΤῸ TE σφετέρων ναυτῶν καὶ ETTLOG-
> foundertake γῷμ χρὺς ὡπλισμένους ἑπτακοσίους ee μάλιστα, “Ἱμεραίους δὲ ὁπλίτας καὶ Syracuse.’
Ψιλοὺς ξυναμφοτέρους χιλίους καὶ
ἱππέας ἑκατὸν καὶ Σελινουντίων τέ τινας ψιλοὺς 40
καὶ ἱππέας καὶ Γελῴων ὀλίύγους, Σικελῶν τε ἐς χιλίους τοὺς πάντας, ἐχώρει πρὸς τὰς Συρακούσας.
2 Of δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς. Λευκάδος Κορίνθιοι ταῖς Te
“The Corinthian ἄλλαις ναυσὶν ws εἶχον Τάχους ἐβοή-
12 hones ες θουν καὶ Γόγγυλος, εἷς τῶν Κοριν-
to Syr. ite way Olwy ἀρχόντων, μιᾷ νηὶ τελευταῖος
Deer να ὑδὰ at ὁρμηθεὶς πρῶτος μὲν ἀφικνεῖται ἐς 3. καὶ ὅσοι M ; ὅσοι I τὰς μὲν Μ.---στρατιᾶι Μ. “4, τινα om. M.—re om. M. δ. ὁπλίτας ψιλοὺς MT ; om. καὶ, ---τε after Σικελῶν om. M.
a
2 τῶν ἄρχων
8 ἡσ
2
EYTTPA®H®S Z (1---9)
τὰς Συρακούσας, ὀλίγον δὲ πρὸ Tv- λέππον" καὶ καταλαβὼν αὐτοὺς περὶ 3 a A — / 7.
ἀπαλλαγῆς τοῦ πολέμου μέλλοντας
ἐκκλησιάσειν διεκώλυσέ τε καὶ παρε--"
θάρσυνε, λέγων ὅτι νῆές τε ἄλλαι ἔτι προσπλέουσι καὶ Τύλιππος ὁ Κλεαν- δρίδον Λακεδαιμονίων ἀποστειχάν- καὶ οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι
3
Leucas. Yet he reached Syr. the soonest.—A public assembly was just about to be held to sanction a definitive capitu- lation.’ The Syr. ‘instantly threw aside all idea of capitula- tion.’
ἐπερρώσθη-
10
σάν τὲ καὶ τῷ Τυλίππῳ εὐθὺς πανστρατιᾷ ὡς oma
f 9 ἢ VOVTO QAUTOP.
ἃπαντησόμενοι ἐξῆλθον ἤδη yap καὶ ἐγγὺς ὄντα 1s δά ὁ δὲ Ἰετὰς τότε τι τεῖχος ἐν
τῇ παρόδῳ τῶν Σικελῶν ἑλών, καὶ ξυνταξάμενος ς 3 , 3 a 3 3 . ᾿ς " ὡς ἐς μάχην ἀφικνεῖται ἐς τὰς ᾿Επιπολάς" καὶ
CgugRas κατὰ τὸν Ἐὐρύηλον, ἧπερ καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
τὸ πρῶτον, ἐχώρει μετὰ τῶν Συρακοσίων ἐπὶ τὸ τον, exe? : 4 τείχισμα τῶν Αθηναίων.
4 \ ἔτυχε δὲ vA a a : a δ 2 κατὰ τοῦτο τοῦ καιροῦ ἐλθὼν ἐν ᾧ
eo NN «ἃ aA 23 \ Ν 2 ἑπτὰ μὲν ἢ ὀκτὼ σταδίων ἤδη ἀπετε- .΄ 3. fe 9 ΝΜ , τέλεστο τοῖς A@nvaisis ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα διπλοῦν τεῖχος, πλὴν κατὰ βραχύ τι τὸ πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν (τοῦτο δ᾽ ἔτι ὠκοδόμουν)" τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ
20
Gylippus having ‘reached Eury§4- lus and the heights of Epipolae above Syr.—with his new levied force enters Syr. un- opposed,’ through the ‘unaccountable inaction of N.’
4 ‘ “Aw t 4 Ἁ N ’ 9 A «ἄνω: Tod κύκλον πρὸς τὸν Τρώγιλον ἐπὶ τὴν “ἀπ, ν 4
1. ἔτι om. M. 8. γε τότε τὸ τεῖχος M.
4, ἐπετετέλεστο Μ.--τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ «ἄνω. τοῦ κύκλου πρὸς τὸν
T.
I insert ἄνω, on the side of the κύκλος, away from the low
ground near the Harbour; cf. c.4 ἀνεβεβήκεσαν ἄνω, c. 60 τὰ ἄνω τείχη. Thus ἄνω means here ‘north of’ (or possibly merely the higher ground away from the accessible coast) ; τοῦ κύκλου and ἐπὶ. . θάλασσαν limit ἄνω to a certain part of Epipolae, as in c. 4 διὰ τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως ἀρξάμενοι
limits it to another part of the same. In vi.
99 κάτωθεν τοῦ
4 OOYKYAIAOY
ἑτέραν θάλασσαν λίθοι τε παραβεβλχημένοι. τῷ πλέονι ἤδη ἦσαν, καὶ ἔστιν ἃ καὶ ἡμίεργα, τὰ δὲ 0 καὶ ἐξειργασμένα κατελέλειπτο. παρὰ τοσοῦτον μὲν Συράκουσαι ἦλθον κινδύνου.
8 Οἱ δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, αἰφνιδίως τοῦ τε I' υλέίππου “Thedouble wall καὶ τῶν Συῤακοσίων σφίσιν ἐπιόν-
ββν: Southern cu «= TOV, ἐθορυβήθησαν μὲν τ πρῶτον,
of Epipolae and παρετάξαντο δέ. ὁ δὲ (θέμενος τὰ »
was all but co
pleted. ae ets ΔῊ πλα ἐγγὺς κήρυκα προσπέμπευ. αὐὖὐ- 5
μα ρα τοῖς λέγοντα, εἰ βούλονται ἐξιέναι ἐκ
with the Syr., τῆς Σικελίας πέντε ἡμερῶν, λαβόντες
when he mar- Ta σφέτερα αὐτῶν, éfotuos εἶναι 9 united force in
order of battle. σπένδεσθαι. οἱ δὲ ἐν ΣΡ TE
weg But he drew off 2rovopyto καὶ οὐδὲν ἀποκριν EVOL 10
ἀπέπεμψαν. καὶ μετὰ τοῦτο are
8 παρεσκευάξοντο ἀλλήλοις ὡς ἐς μάχην. κα
ὁ Γύλιππος ὁρῶν τοὺς Συρακοσίους ταρᾶσσο μένους καὶ οὐ ῥᾳδίως. ξυντασσομένους, ἐπανῇ ὅτι τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐς τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν μᾶλλον: é ς
ὁ Νικίας οὐκ ἐπῆγε τοῦς θηναίουν, 2 ἀλλ᾽ ate πρὸς τῷ ἑαυτῶν, τείχει. ὡς δ᾽ & ἔγμω ὁ Γύλιππος οὐ προσιόντας αὐτούς, ἀπήγαγε τὴν στρατιὰν ἐπὶ τὴν ἄκραν τὴν Τεμενῖτιν καλουμένην, καὶ αὐτοῦ
his troops with- out a battle.
κύκλου similarly means ‘south,’ as Sitzler renders. This is the natural sense for an Athenian of ἡ ἄνω πόλις to attach to the word. So too Grote and Freeman (His¢. Sic. iii. 668). Cf. Intr. § Lend. <daxd> τοῦ κύκλου Wolfflin. Grote and Freeman explain τῷ ἄλλῳ τοῦ «x. as for ἑτέρωθι τοῦ κύκλου, an impossible use of τῷ ἄλλῳ. Mr. Goodwin suggests constructing τοῦ κύκλον as dependent on TpuyAov.—Tpoy:kdv Μ.---κατελέλειπτο] κατε- Alero Μ΄: κατελείπετο B; corr. Cobet. 3 1. rdom. M. 8. ἑαυτοῦ M.
BYTTPA®HS Z (2—4)
5
4 ηὐλίσαντο. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἄγων τὴν μὲν “πλεί- 20 στὴν τῆς στρατιᾶς παρέταξε πρὸς τὰ τείχη τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ὅ ὅπως μὴ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν ἄλλοσε, μέρος δέ
τι πέμψας πρὸς τὸ φρούριον τὸ Δάβ- δαλον αἱρεῖ, καὶ ὅσους οὺς ἔλαβεν ἐν. αὐτῷ πάντας ἀπέκτεινεν" ἣν δὲ οὐκ ἐπιφανὲς τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοὶς τὸ χωρίαν.
5 καὶ τριήρης τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἁλίσκεται τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ἐφορμοῦσα τῷ λιμένι.
4 ΚΚαὶ μετὰ ταῦτα ἐτείχιζον οἱ Συρα- κόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι διὰ τῶν Ἔπι- πολῶν ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως ἀρξάμενοι ἄνω πρὸς τὸ τἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος ἀτ- _ roby, ὅπως ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι, εἰ μὴ δύν- awto κωλῦσαι, μηκέτι οἷοί τε ὦσιν
2 ἀποτειχίσαι. καὶ οἵ τε ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀνεβεβήκεσαν ἤδη ἄνω, τὸ ἐπὶ θα- λάσσῃ τεῖχρς ἐπιτελέσαντες, καὶ ὁ- Γύλιππος (ἦν γάρ τ Tt τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις
He ‘ brought them out again next morning, as if about to attack. But while the atten- tion of the A.
“was thus
en ged, he sent etachment to
surprise the
fort of L. The
enterprise was
completely
successful.’
He immediately began to build ‘a third counter- wall, on the north side of the A. circle—at the same time alarming them by threatening attack upon their lower wall —which was now just finished.’
TOU TE ixo υς
ἀσθεχές) νυκτὸς ἀναλαβὼν τὴν στρατιὰν ἐπήει ὃ πρὸς αὐτός. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι (ἔτυχον γὰρ ἔξω a αὐ ἐῤμενοι) ὡς ὡς ἤσθοντο, ἀντεπῇσαν" ὁ δὲ γνοὺς κατὰ τάχος ἀπήγαγε τοὺς ὀφετέρους πάλιν. ἐποικοδομήσαντες δὲ αὐτὸ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὑψηλό.-
Pee
τερον αὐτοὶ μὲν ταύτῃ ἐφύλασσον, τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους ξυμμάχους κατὰ τὸ ἄλλο τείχισμα ἤδη διέταξαν 4 ἧπερ ἔμελλον ἕκαστοι φρουρεῖν. τῷ δὲ Νικίᾳ
5. ἑφορμῶσα Μ.
4. 2. ἀναβεβήκεσαν Ν..---ἐπὶ τῆι ϑαλάσσηι Μ. 3. ἀντετήεσαν Ν.---ἀπήγαγε twice M pr.
25
6 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
ἐδόκει τὸ Πλημμύριον καλούμενον τευχίσαι" ἔστι
‘N.nowsaw δὲ ἄκρα ἀντιπέρα πόλεως, ἥπερ 20 that hence- Κρ pas τῆς Sy ἥ <p
forward his προύχουσα του μεγάλου λιμένος τὸ operations
would be for the στόμα στενὸν ποιεῖ, καὶ εὐ i τειχισθείη, most part mari-
time—he re- Gov αὐτῷ ἐφαίνετο ἐσκο ιδὴ) τῶν solved to fortify p¢ ῷ ἐφ ἡ μιοη
Cape P.—and to ἐπιτηδείων ἔσεσθαι δι᾽ ἐλάσσονος make it a secure
main station for yap πρὸς τῷ λιμένι [τῷ τῶν Συρακο- 20 Θ Leet al stores." σίων] ἐφορμήσειν σφᾶς, καὶ οὐχ ὥσ- περ νῦν ἐκ μυχοῦ τοῦ λιμένος τὰς ἐπανωγωγὰς ποιήσεσθαι, ἢν τι ναυτικῷ κινῶνται. προσεῖχέ τε ἤδη μᾶλλον τῷ κατὰ θάλασσαν πολέμῳ, ὁρῶν τὰ ἐκ τῆς γῆς σφίσιν, ἐπειδὴ Γύλιππος ἧκεν, 80 ἢ
ἀνελπτιστότερα ὄντα. διακομίσας οὖν στρατιὰν καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἐξετείχισε τρίω φρούρια᾽ καὶ ἐν
3 a , Rev \ a ” \ αὐτοῖς τά τε σκεύη τὰ πλεῖστα ἔκειτο Kal τὰ
. nan ὋῪφσ Ψ ὃ 9 A a 7 ‘oe ,' 6 a πλοία ἢ η ἐκεῖ T μεγάλα ὥρμει καὶ αἱ ταχείαι
6 νῆες. ὥστε καὶ τῶν πληρωμάτων οὐχ ἥκιστα 35
mJ
TOTE πρῶτον κάκωσ ts ἐγένετο" τῷ TE yap ὕδατι
‘Three τα σπανίῳ χρώμενοι καὶ οὐκ ἐγγύθεν,
--«- Bere erected on αὶ ἐπὶ Φφρυγανισμὸν ἅ ἅμα ὁπότε ἐξέλ.-
ion en- be the station en θοιεν οἱ ναῦται, ὑπὸ TOV ἱππέων τῶν
ων supplios of Συρακοσίων ( κρατούντων τῆς μ᾿ Vota ‘also, the διεφθείροντο. τρίτον γὰρ μέρος 7
to crews had to ΗΝ ἱππέων τοῖς Συρακοσίοις δὲ διὰ τοὺς ἐν
able distance, exposed to sur- - τῷ Πλημμυρίῳ, ἵνα μὴ κακου ἧ-
prise from sve σοντες ἐξίοιεν, ἐπὶ τῇ ἐν τῷ ‘Odup-
eee τὶ είῳ πολίχνῃ ἐτετάχατο. ἐπυνθά- 45 4, ῥᾷων C, Hw., Hu. The adv. appears to me more forcible here. Contrast ii. 75, 1 ἐλπίζοντες ταχίστην τὴν αἵρεσιν ἔσεσθαι. τῷ τῶν Σ.] Kr. ᾿ ἐπαγωγὰς Μ. 5. τὴν στρατιὰν Mg.
5
2 ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀντιπαρετάσσοντο.
SYTTPASHS Ζ (4—5)
veto δὲ καὶ Tas λοιπὰς τῶν Κορινθίων ναῦς προσπλεούσας ὁ Νικίας" καὶ
the t temple of
πέμπει ἐς φυλακὴν αὐτῶν εἴκοσι ναῦς, αἷς εἴρητο͵
περὶ te Aox xpovs καὶ ᾿Ῥήλχιον καὶ τὴν τῆς Σικελίας vav λοχεῖν αὐτάς. ὁ .
προσβολὴν 50
ὋὉ δὲ Γύλιππος ἅμα μὲν ἐτείχιξε τὸ διὰ τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν τεῖχος, τοῖς λίθοις χρώμενος οὗς οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι or προπαρεβάλοντο σφίσιν, ἅ ἅμα δὲ παρ- έτασσεν ἐξάγων αἰεὶ πρὸ τοῦ τειχίσματος τοὺς
Συρακοσίους καὶ τοὺς
τῷ Τυλέππῳ καιρὸς εἶναι, 7 ἦρχε τῆς
3 ἦν.
ἐφόδον" καὶ ἐν “χερσὶ γενόμενοι ἐμά- χοντο μεταξὺ τῶν τειχισμάτων, ἡ τῆς ἵππου τῶν Συρακοσίων οὐδεμία χρῆσις καὶ νικηθέντων τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων καὶ νεκροὺς ὗπο- σπόνδους ἀνελομένων καὶ τῶν ᾿Αθη-
7 e ,
ναίων τροχαῖον στησάντων, 0 Γύλιπ-
πος ξυγκαλέσας τὸ στράτευμα οὐκ FF
ἔφη τὸ ἁμάρτημα ἐκείνων ἀλλ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ γενέσθαι" τῆς γὰρ. ἵππου καὶ τῶν ἀκοντιστῶν τὴν ὠφελίαν τῇ τάξει ἐντὸς “λίαν τῶν τειχῶν ποιήσας ἀφελέσθαι: νῦν οὖν αὖθις ἐπάξειν.
_——— 4 καὶ Stavbeiobat οὕτως ἐκέλευεν αὐ- τοὺς ὡς τῇ μὲν παρασκευῇ οὐκ ἔλασσον ἕξοντας,
7. πέμπει ἐς φυλακὴν.
ξυμμάχους" ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἔδοξε
\ e Kat Οὐ ὅδ
‘ Day after day Gylippus brought out his Syr. in battle- array ;—but the A. showed no disposition to attack. At
10
tage what he thought a favourable opportunity to make the attack himself; but the ound was 80 hemmed in by various walls— that his cavalry and darters had no space to act. The Syr. were beaten back. Gylippus had the prudence to take the blame of this defeat upon himself.’
15
20
. ναῦς] Contrast ii. 26 ναῦς ἐξέπεμψαν
Εὐβοίας φυλακήν. Cf. Aristoph. Vesp. 562 φωνὰς ἱέντων els ἀπό-
φευξιν ; Andoc. ii. 23 διδόντας els χρήματα δωρεάς. 3. ἐπανήξειν Μ.
1. ἀντεπαρετάσσοντο M. 2. τῷ om. Μ.
8 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
τῇ δὲ γνώμῃ οὐκὶ ἀνεκτὸν ἐσόμενον εἰ μὴ ἀξιώσουσι Πελοποννήσιοί τὲ ὄντες καὶ Δωριῆς [Ἰώνων καὶ νησιωτῶν καὶ ξυγκλώδων ἀνθρώπων κρατήσαντες 35 ἐξελάσασθαι ἐκ τῆς χώρας. 6 Καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐπειδὴ κ aes ἢ ἦν, αὖθις % ὁ δὲ
‘After nolong ἐπῆγεν αὐτούς. txias καὶ οἱ ἣν
time, he again > a re
ey in order of ων oy t, μίξον' ς εἰ ἐκείμοια» ιι Θ. e a
marched out μὴ EVENOLEV μὶ xas ἄρχειν, ἀναγκαῖον
into the open elvat σφίσι μὴ “περιορᾶν πα, δ
tim. ‘The δομούμενον τὸ τεῖχος (ἤδη γὰρ καὶ intersection was ὅσ ΌΡ οὐ ἢ παρεληλύθει τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθη- in ναίων τοῦ τείχους τελευτὴν ω line—so that it xs 5 Ἶ 7 ἐκείνων was essential fo without delay.’ ἐποίει αὐτοῖς νικᾶν Te μαχομένοις 10 A διὰ παντὸς καὶ μηδὲ μάχεσθαι), ἀντεπῇσαν οὖν ὁπλίτας ἔξω τῶν τειχῶν! μᾶλλον ἢ πρότερον προωγάγὼν ξυνέμισιγεν αὐτοῖς, τοὺς δ᾽ ἱππέας ᾿Αθηναίων κατὰ τὴν εὐρυχωρΐαν ἡ τῶν τειχῶν 8 ἀμφοτέρων af ἐργασίαν ἔληγον. καὶ προσ- κέρᾳ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ὅπερ Kar αὐτοὺς ἦν, ἔτρεψαν: καὶ δι᾿ αὐτὸ καὶ τὸ ἄχχο στράτευμα 30 4:thewholea, τεύχίσματα. καὶ τῇ ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ ἔφ- army under- flefeat, and only exXPovres τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οἰκοδο-
counter-wall of cutting the A. τείχισις καὶ εἰ παρέλθοι, ταὐτὸν N. to attack ps ᾽ ἤδη 2 τοῖς Συρακοσίοις. καὶ ὁ Τύλιππος τοὺς μὲν. καὶ τοὺς ἀκοντιστὰς ἐκ πλαγίου τάξας τῶν 15. 4 e e “A 4 “A + “a 9 ’ βαλόντες οἱ ἱππῆς ἐν τῇ μάχῃ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ νικηθὲν ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων κατηράχθη ἐς τὰ went a thorough θασαν παροικοδομήσαντές καὶ παρ-
6 1. αὖθις om. Μ. ν τ ρέλθοι] προέλθοι MSS. ; corr. - CL ὃ. κατερράχθη M
ἘΥΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z (6—7) 9
ίαν, ὥστε μηκέτι μήτε αὐτοὶ κωλύε- within ita forti- 25 a °. . ines.
σθαι ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν, ἐκείνους Te καὶ πᾶν - in the course of the very next
τάπασιν ἀπεστερηκέναι, εἰ καὶ _ Kpa- night, the 8. counter-wall
τοῖεν, μὴ ἂν ἔτι. σφᾶς ἀποτειχίσαι. was pushed so far as to traverse
7 Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο al re τῶν Κορινθίων and get beyond
the projected
νῆες καὶ ᾿Αμπρακιωτῶν καὶ Λευκαὺ- line of -A. block-
᾿ ade.
ίων ἐσέπλευσαν ai ὑπόλοιποι δώδεκα, «ποτίμοι defence
λαθοῦσαι τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων φυλα- fe oo ἐπα"
of the fleet of 12
,¢ ( ἣ δὲ 9. κα Ἔ ασ ὃ δ κὴν PXE O€ αὕτων PeotvLons triremes under ἃ Κορίνθιος), ‘Kar ξυνετείχισαν τὸ λοι- ee ad
ψβς * i - πὸν τοῖς Συρακοξίοις μέχρι «τοῦ ὍΣΣ ον to
Εὐρνήλου- τοῦ ἐγκαρσίον τείχους. rer
2 καὶ ὁ Γύλυππος «ἐς τὴν ἄλλην Σικελίαν ἐπὶ στρα- τιάν τε ᾧχετο καὶ ναυτικὴν καὶ πεξικὶ ν ξυλλέξων, καὶ τῶν πόλεων ἅ ἅμα προσαξόμενος εἴ τις ἢ ἡ μὴ πρό- θυμος ἦν ἢ παντάπασιν ἔτι ἀφειστήκει τοῦ πολέ-
8 μου. πρέσβεις τε ἄλλοι τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ Κορινθίων ἐς Λακεδαίμονα καὶ Κόρινθον ἀπε- στάλησαν, ὅπως στρατιὰ ἔτι περαιωθῇ τρόπῳ 15 ᾧ av ἐνῇ, ὁλκάσιν ἢ π ἢ πλσίοις ἢ ἢ ἄλλως «ὅπως ἂν
μ᾿
0
7 1. μέχρι “τοῦ ἙΕὐρυήλου-. 1 τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου τείχους. I have in- serted two words which appear to have dropped out before rod éyxapolov. Freeman (Hist. Sic. iii. 257, 679) defends Grote’s view that the wall now built is a separate wall built from Euryelus eastwards to join τὸ ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος. If a temporary gap was left west of the cross-wall, what was to prevent Nicias from attacking the cross-wall? And howis it that in this single instance Thuc. gives no indication of the direction of this supposed new wall? Contrast vi. 99,3; 101, 2.—[uéxpr] Badham, Holm, Cl. ; [μέχρι . . relxous] Sta.
2. στρατείαν Μ. “ ξνλλέγων Μ. ---ἀφεστήκει Μ.
8. περαιωθῇ τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν ἐνῇ, ὁλκάσιν ἢ πλοίοις] περαιωθῇ τρόπῳ @ ἂν ἐν ὁλκάσιν ἣ πλοίοις ἢ ἄλλως ὅπως ἂν π. MSS. ; Widmann brackets τρόπῳ ῳ ay; [ἐν . . ὅπως dv] Bekker, Schiifer, Hw. ; I have restored evi for ἐν, ὁ, é. guoguo modo fiert possit. Cf. i.
10
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
προχωρῇ, ὡς καὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπιμετάπεμπο-
‘Not content with having placed the S. out of danger, Gylippus took advantage of their renewed confidence to infuse into them projects of retaliation.’
ὟΝ became con- vinced that to remain as they were was absolute ruin. He determined to send home an undisguised account of his critical position, and to solicit either reinforce- ments or instruc- tions to return.’
μένων. οἵ τε Συρακόσιοϊ, 2 ναυτικὸν ἐπλήρουν καὶ ἀνεπειρῶντο ὡς καὶ τούτῳ ἔπιχει Ἴσοντες, καὶ ἐς τἄλλα 20 πολὺ ἐπέρρωντο.
Ὁ δὲ Νικίας αἰσθόμενος τοῦτο καὶ ὁρῶν καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἐπιδιδοῦσαν τήν τε τῶν πολεμίων ἰσχὺν καὶ τὴν σφετέραν" ἀπορίαν, ἔπεμπε καὶ αὐτὸς ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας ἀγγέλλων πολλάκις μὲν καὶ 5 ἄλλοτε καθ᾽ ἕκαστα τῶν γυγνομένων, μάλιστα δὲ καὶ τότε, νομίξων ἐν δεινοῖς τε εἶναι καὶ εἰ μὴ ὡς τάχιστα ἢ σφᾶς μεταπέμψουσιν ἢ ἢ ἄλλους μὴ
ὀλύγους ἀποστελοῦσιν, οὐδεμίαν εἶναι 10
2 σωτηρίαν. φοβούμενος δὲ μὴ οἱ πεμπόμενοι. ὴ κατὰ τοῦ λέγειν ἀδυνασίαν ἢ καὶ μνήμης ἐλλιυπεῖς γιγνόμενοι ἢ τῷ ὄχλῳ πρὸς. χάριν τι λέγοντες οὐ τὰ ὄντα ἀπαγγέλλωσιν, ἔγραψεν ἐπιστολήν, νομί-
Ψ A A Ἁ e A , \ ζων οὕτως ἂν μάλιστα τὴν αὑτοῦ γνώμην μηδὲν
fund
5
ἐν τῷ ἀγγέλῳ ἀφανισθεῖσαν μαθόντας ᾿ τοὺς
᾿Αθηναίους
βουλεύσασθαι περὶ τῆς ἀληθείας.
8 καὶ οἱ μὲν ᾧχοντο φέροντες [ods ἀπέστειλε] τὰ
8
5 περαιοῦσθαι ναυσίν ; 1. 107 ναυσὶ περιπλεύσαντες. They say also ἐπὶ πλοίου and ἐν πλοίῳ περαιοῦσθαι: but the dat. is here preferred on account of τρόπῳ. ---πλοίωι M.
1. ἣν for εἰ M.
2. μνήμης Β] γνώμης the rest. -- γενόμενοι Μ.
8. [οὖς ἀπέστειλε] I bracket: ὡς ἀπέστειλε Sta., Hu.; ἃ ἀπέστειλε [τὰ γράμ.) Pluygers ; [φέροντες . . εἰπεῖν) Hw., ‘inter- polata ex cap. x (Stud. 93. Cf. Mnem. viii. fase. 8), non sufficiente Pluygersii conjectura. Duo sunt glossemata οὖς
"5.0, 414 Autumn. ΞΥΤΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z (7—11) 11
, @ » 3 A 3 a e de N γράμματα καὶ ὅσα ἔδει αὐτοὺς εἰπεῖν" ὁ δὲ τὰ . 3 κατὰ τὸ στρατόπεδον διὰ φυλακῆς 4188 sent homes 20 ἄλλον ἤδη ἔχων H Se ἑκουσίων Kiv- seems to have μάννον 107 &X ἢ reached A.about δύνων ἐπεμέλετο. the end of , Α -Ἐ-κ ., ,..λ᾽, a * November, and 9 Ev-d€ τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει τελευτῶντι᾽ was read form- Ἢ ’ , 9 , ally in the public καὶ Evetiwy στρατηγὸς ᾿Αθηναίων assembly by the \ ΗΝ a > 29 _ Secretary of the peta Περδίκκου στρατεύσας ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αμ-΄ city. φίπολιν Θρᾳξὶ πολλοῖς τὴν μὲν πόλιν οὐχ εἷλεν, ἐς δὲ τὸν Στρυμονα; περικομίσας τριήρεις ἐκ τοῦ 5 ποταμοῦ ἐπολιόρκει ὁ evos ἐξ “Iuepatov. καὶ οταμοῦ ἐπϑλιόρκει ὁρμώμενος ἐξ Ἱμεραίου. τὸ θέρος ἐτεχεύτα. = 10 Tod δ᾽ ἐπλγυγνομένου χειμῶνος ἥκοντες ἐς \ 4 , e N A ld @ 9 Α τὰς ᾿Αθήνας οἱ παρὰ τοῦ Νικίου ὅσα τε ἀπὸ γλώσσης εἴρητο αὐτοῖς εἶπον, καὶ εἴ τις τι ἐπηρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο; καὶ τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἀπέ- ὃ e \ A A 4 θ A οσαν. ὁ δὲ γραμματεὺς [τῆς Todews] παρελθὼν 5 } yee τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις δηλοῦσαν τοιάδε: ‘ , A gel? “Ta μὲν πρότερον πραχθέντα, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἐν ἄλλαις πολλαῖς ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε" τ προοίμιον δι δὲ . \ 3 θ , - ΑΙ, ἮΝ I beg νῦν δὲ καιρὸς οὐχ ἧσσον μαθόντας to report to you,
ec ὦ τ φ 4 and to invite ὑμᾶς ἐν ᾧ' ἐσμὲν βουλεύσασθαι. your considera- N ’
. a Ν “.. tion. 4 κρατησάντων ἡμῶν μάχαις TAS κα. διήγησις - Ὁ ᾿ , id > a Σ,, 2 8), i.e. a clear
δ oA / ᾽ 4 ible statement of θημεν, καὶ Τὰ TELYN οἰκοδομησαμένων the position in
ἐν οἷσπερ νῦν ἐσμέν, ἦλθε Γύλιππος Sicily.
ἀπέστειλε ad οἱ μὲν, reliqua ad ᾧχοντο.᾽---μᾶλλον om. Μ.---ἢ δι᾽ om. Μ, and so Badham, Hw.; διὰ φυλακῆς ἔχων, ἤδη ἀκουσίων κινδύνων ἐπεμέλετο Dobree.—émepuedeiro Μ. 10 ἠρώτα ΜΊ.---[τῆς πόλεως] Hw., Sta., Hu. 1, πρῶτον Μ.---ἧττον Μ. 11 2. οἰκοδομησάντων M.—viv om. M.
12 BOYKYAIAOY
Λακεδαιμόνιος στρατιὰν ἔχων ἔκ τε Ἰ]έλοπον- νήσου καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν Σικελίᾳ πόλεων ἔστιν ὧν. τὸ καὶ μάχῃ τῇ μὲν πρώτῃ νικῶται ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν, τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἱππεῦσί τε πολλοῖς καὶ ἀκοντισταῖς ὃ βιασθέντες ἀνεχωρήσαμεν ἐς τὰ τείχη. νῦν οὖν ἡμεῖς μὲν παυσάμενοι τοῦ περιτειχισμοῦ διὰ. τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἐναντίων ἡσυχάζομεν (οὐδὲ yap Evp- 15 πάσῃ τῇ στρατιᾷ δυναίμεθ᾽ ἂν χρῆσθαι,(ἀπᾳνη- ' 7 λωκγίας τῆς φυλακῆς τῶν τειχῶν μέρος τι τοῦ , ὁπλιτικοῦ)" οἱ δὲ παρῳκοδομήκασιν ἡμῖν τεῖχος ἁπλοῦν, ὥστε μὴ εἶναι ἔτι περιτειχίσαι αὐτούς, ἣν μή τις τὸ παρατείχισμα τοῦτο πολλῇ στρατιᾷ 30 ., ἐπελθὼν ἕλῃ. δ΄ 4 Βυμβέβηκέ τε πολιορκεῖν δοκοῦντας ἡμᾶς b. Informal ἄλλους αὐτοὺς μᾶλλον, ὅσα γε κατὰ
τρόῤεσις (Δ γῆν, τοῦτο πάσχειν' οὐδὲ γὰρ τῆς
position on χώρας ἐπὶ πολὺ διὰ τοὺς ἱππέας 35 i / , a 12 about to insist. ἐξεργόμεθᾳ. ἸΠεπόμφασι ᾿δὲ καὶ és Πελοπόννησον πρέσβεις ἐπ᾽ ἄλλην στρατιάν,
/ / 11. πίστις (12- καὶ ἐς τὰς ἐν Σικελίᾳ πόλεις Γύυλιπ-
i \ \ ἢ
15, 2) designed ros (οἴχεται, Tas μὲν καὶ πείσων
Toaing ξυμπολεμεῖν ὅσαι νῦν ἡσυχάζουσιν, 5 Ἁ a \ thoccemy, ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν καὶ στρατιὰν ἔτι πεζὴν ὃ. The in- ὶ A Α a ὃ ὃν
creasing ὀ καὶ ναυτικοῦ παρασκευὴν ἢν δύυνη-
weakness 0 ν» a ΄, ς.- 9 AN
2. the A. tat ἄξων. διανοοῦνται yap, ὡς ἐγὼ
i / A a Φ A object ofindac. πυνθάνομαι, τῷ Te πεζῷ ἅμα τῶν
em his §«=—- χευγῶν- ἡμῶν πειρᾶν καὶ ταῖς ναυσὶ 10 2. ἔκ re] τε οι. Μ.---ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ M. 8. χρήσεσθαι M; χρήσασθαι C; χρῆσθαι Cobet. —dava- λωκυῖας Μ. 12 1. ἔτι καὶ στρατιὰν MT; καὶ σ. ἔτι Β.
ΞΎΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z (11—13) 13
8 κατὰ θάλασσαν. καὶ δεινὸν μηδενὶ savice (- πίστις
a hoc παθητικ ; ὑμῶν δόξῃ εἶναι Gi καὶ κατὰ θά. B. With the vy \ ea object of leading λασσαν.. τὸ γὰρ ναντικὸν ἡμῶν, upto thet . ( » which is ἧπερ κἀκεῖνοι πυνθάνονται, TO μὲν cither to recall pe, oa A a , the armament or πρῶτον 1K, ζε καὶ τῶν νεῶν TH send largerein- 15 εν Ν . ‘ » ~ forcements ἢ OTNTL καὶ τῶν πληρωμάτων τῇ (=xions λογικὴ a Ψ ἡπων ον ἢ , ΟΥ̓ πραγματική). τηρίᾳ" νῦν δὲ al τε νῆες διά- ον τ “ a , ¥ >, erie. oe ee ὄχοι, τοσοῦτον χρόνον ἤδη θαλασδεύουσαι, , 4 \ \ 4xal τὰ πληρώματα (ἔφθαρται. τὰς μὲν yap ναῦς οὐκ ἔστιν ἀνελκύσαντας διαψῦξαι διὰ τὸ 20 ἀντιπάλους τῷ πλήθει καὶ ἔτι πχείους τὰς “πὶ. ΝΥ 9 ὃ ζῶν πολεμίων οὔσας αἰεὶ (προσδοκίαν παρ- ὅ έχειν ὡς ἐπιπλεύσονται. avepal δέ εἰσιν UA ἀναπειρώμεναι, καὶ ai ἐπιχειρήσεις ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις, A \ ’ ca 3 καὶ ἁποξηρᾶναι τὰς σφετέρας μᾶλλον ἐξουσία" 95 qe a : . » 18 οὐ γὰρ ἐφὸρμοῦσιν ἄλλοις. ἡμῖν δ᾽ ἐκ πολλῆς “ ΝᾺ “A n XV ---.- ἂν(περιουσίας νεῶν μόλις τοῦτο ὑπῆρχε Kal μὴ ἀναγκαξομένοις ὥσπερ νῦν πάσαις φυλάσσειν. εἰ γὰρ(ἀφαιρήσομέν τι καὶ βραχὺ τῆς "τηρήσεως, τὰ ἐπιτήδεια οὐχ ἔξομεν, παρὰ τὴν ἐκείνων 5 ᾽ὔ A . } “σ΄ 9 ὰ δὲ 2 πόλιν χαλεπῶς καὶ νῦν ἐσκομιζόμενοι. τὰ OE πληρώματα διὰ τόδε ἐφθάρη τε ἡμῖν Kab ἔτι νῦν φθείρεται, τῶν ναυτῶν [τῶν] μὲν “διὰ φρυγᾶνισ- ee tne. στ μῶν καὶ ἁρπαγὴν μακρὰν καὶ ὑδρείαν ὑπὸ τῶν ἱππέων ἀπολλυμένων". οἱ δὲ θεράποντες, ἐπειδὴ 10 “ —
--
8. καὶ ἐκεῖνοι M. 4, διαψύξαι ΝΜ. ---καὶ τῷ πλήθει Μ, Hu.—éri πλείους M. 5. ἀποπειρώμεναι Μ.---τὰ σφέτερα Μ. ---ἐξουσία om. M, and so Sta., Η νν.---ἀλλήλοις M. 13 2. νῦν ἔτι Μ.---[τῶν] Pp., Hw., Sta., Hu., Sitz.; τῶν μὲν ναυτῶν Fr, Miiller, Widmann.
14 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
ἐς ἀντίπαλα καθεστήκαμεν, αὐτομολοῦσι, καὶ οἱ Ee a ee ee 3 2 »4ΔᾺ ξένοι ot μὲν ἀναγκαστοὶ ἐσβάντες εὐθὺς κατὰ , . — a ᾿ τὰς πόλεις ἀποχωροῦσιν, οἱ δὲ ὑπὸ μεγάλου μισθοῦ τὸ πρῶτον ἐπαρθέντες καὶ οἰόμεναι χρηματιεῖσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ μαχεῖσθαι, ἐπειδὴ 15 Tapa. γνώμην ναυτικόν τε δὴ καὶ τἄλλα ἀπὸ τῶν πολεμίων ἀνθεστῶτα ὁρῶσιν, οἱ μὲν ἐπ᾽ 3 | a, is ae. 5 e 1 κ αὐτομολίας προφάσει ἀπέρχονται, οἱ δὲ ws ἕκαστοι δύνανται: πολλὴ δ᾽ ἡ Σικελία: εἰσὶ δὲ οὗ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐμπορενόμενοι ἀνδράποδα Ὕκ- 20 καρικὰ ἀντεμβιβάσαι ὑπὲρ σφῶν πείσαντες Da ) a a τοὺς τριηράρχους τὴν ἀκρίβειᾶν “τοῦ ναυτικοῦ 9 ’ 9 ᾽ | a) lA ΦΨ 14. ἀφήρηνται.) ἐπισταμένοις δ᾽ ὑμῖν γράφω ὅτι βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ πληρώματος καὶ ὀλύγοι τῶν a A re re) ναυτῶν ot ἑξορμῶντές τε ναῦν καὶ ξυνέχοντες Ὡ τὴν εἰρεσΐαν. τούτων δὲ πάντὼν ἀπορώτατον τό τε μὴ οἷόν τε εἶναι ταῦτα ἐμοὶ κωλῦσαι τῷ 5 στρατηγῷ “(χαλεπαὶ γὰρ αἱ ὑμέτεραι φύσεις ἄρξαι), καὶ ὅτι οὐδ᾽ ὁπόθεν ἐπιπληρωσόμεθα Τὰς ναῦς ἔχαμεν, «ὃ τοῖς πολεμίοις πολλαχόθεν ες; ’ > 9 2 99> 4 ” ~~ " ὑπάρχει, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάγκη ad ὧν ἔχοντες ἤλθομεν , : / τά te ὄντα καὶ ἀταναλισκόμενα γύγνεσθαι" ai τὸ γη : Ne el πα πα ως γὰρ νῦν οὖσαι πόλεις ξύμμαχοι ἀδύνατοι Νάξος
2. αὐτομολίας M. ‘Conjecta sunt αὐτονομίας [Passow, Sta., Hu., Sitz.]; σιτολογίας [Pluygers]; ἀσχολίας [Meineke]; αἰχμαλω- τίας [Madvig] ; ἀργυρολογίας [Hw.]’ ; αὐτοστολίας Naber ; ἀντι- βολίας Widmann ; ἀπομισθίας Gertz; αὐτουργίας Marchant, 1.6. ‘on the ground that they have to work their land themselves, and cannot leave it to slaves.’ Badham brackets οἱ δὲ ; ‘ scripsi of [δὲ], reponere non ausus of δὴ. ~Nec male haberet of ἂν... Sivwrrat.’” Hw.—atrod M; αὐτοὶ B.
ΞΎΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z (13—15) 15
8 καὶ Κατάνη. εἰ δὲ προσγενήσεται ἐν ἔτι τοῖς πολεμίοις, ὥστε τὰ τρέφοντα ἡμᾶς χωρία τῆς Ἰταλίας, ὁρῶντα ἐν ᾧ τε ἐσμέν, καὶ buav μὴ ἐπιβοηθούντων, πρὸς ἐκείνους χωρῆσαι, Svamre-15_ πολεμήσεται αὐτοῖς ἀμαχεὶ (ἐκπολϊορκηθέντων. ἡμῶν [ὁ πόλεμος]. oa one
4 Tovtwov ἐγὼ ἡδίω μὲν ἂν εἶχον ὑμῖν ἕτερα ἐπιστέλλειν, οὐ μέντοι χρησιμώτερά γε, εἰ δεῖ σαφῶς ὑμᾶς εἰδότας τὰ ἐνθάδε βουλεύσασθαι. 2 καὶ ἅμα τὰς φύσεις ἐπιστάμενος ὑμῶν, βουλο- μένων μὲν τὰ ἥδιστα ἀκούειν, αἰτιωμένων δὲ ὕστερον, ἤν τι ὑμῖν ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν μὴ ὁμοῖον ἐκβῇ, ἀσφαλέστερον ἡγησάμην τὸ ἀληθὲς δηλῶσαι.
15 καὶ νϑμλῶς ἐφ᾽ ἃ μὲν ἤλθομεν τὸ πρῶτον᾽ καὶ τῶν στ corr καὶ τῶν ἡγεμόνων ὑμῖν μὴ μεμπτῶν γεγενημένων». οὕτῳ. τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε" ἐπειδὴ δὲ Σικελία τε ἅπασα ξυνίασταται καὶ ἐκ Πελοποννήσου ἄλλη στρατιὰ "προσδόκιμος 5
3 ν᾿ 4 v ¢ A 3
αὐτοῖς, βουλεύσασθε ἤδη ὡς τῶν γ᾽ ἐνθάδε μηδὲ τοῖς παροῦσιν ἀνταρκούντων, GAN ἢ τούτους μεταπέμπειν δέαν ἢ ἀλκὴν στρατιὰν μὴ ἐλάσσω ἐπιπέμπειν καὶ πεζὴν καὶ ναυτικήν, καὶ χρή- ματα μὴ ὀλίγα, ἐμοὶ “δὲ διάδοχὸόν τινα, ὡς 10 ἀδύνατός εἰμι ,διὰ ᾿ νόσον «γεφρῖτιν παραμένειν.
2 ἀξιῶ δ ὑμῶν Evy din τυγχάνειν" καὶ γὰρ ὅτ᾽ ἐρρώμην πολλὰ ἐν ἡγεμονίαις ὑμᾶς εὖ ἐποίησα:
14 8, [ὁ πόλεμο:] Kr., Sta., Hw., Widmann. The Schol. did not read it.
1. αὐτοὶ βουλεύσασθε B; the rest αὐτοῖς βουλεύεσθε. ---αὐταρ- κούντων Μ.---πεζικὴν Μ,
16
Ὅ τι δὲ μέλλετε, ἅμα τῷ ἦρι εὐθὺς καὶ μὴ ἐς 15
III. ἐπίλογος, consisting of— a. abrief λόγος προτρεπ- τικός, ὃ. an ἀνάμνη- σις τῶν εἰρημένων.
39
Tal.
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
* December, 414 B.c.
3 \ ᾽ ς A . Ὡψαβολὰς πράσσετε, ὡς τῶν πολε- 9
μίήᾷΔων τὰ μὲν ἐν Σικελίᾳ δι’ ὀλίγου πρριουμένων, τὰ δ᾽ ἐκ Πελοποννήσου
4 , 4 > a A σχολαίτερον μέν, ὅμως δ᾽, ἢν μὴ προσὲ
»
16 Ἢ μὲν τοῦ Νικίου ἐπιστολὴ τοσαῦτα ἐδήλων.
‘The A. resolved —not to send for the present armament, but to reinforce it— they insisted on continuing N. in command ; pass- ing a vote, how- ever, to name Menander and Euthydemus joint com- manders.—They sent Eurymedon speedily in com- mand of 10 triremes to Syr., carrying 120 talents of silver, together with assurances of coming aid.— And they re- solved to equip a formidable force, under Demosth. and
e \ 3 A 9 4 > A \ ot δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀκούσαντες αὐτῆς τὸν μὲν Νικίαν οὐ παρέλυσαν τῆς ἀρχῆς, 3 3 3 a of 4 ἀλλ᾽ αὐτῷ, ἕως ἂν ἕτεροι ξυνάρχοντες αἱρεθέντες ἀφίκωνται, τῶν αὐτοῦ ἐκεῖ δύο προσείλοντο, Μένανδρον καὶ Ey- ᾽ὔ @ \ ὅ > ‘9 f θύδημον, ὅπως μὴ μόνος ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ ταλαιπωροίη: στρατιὰν δὲ ἄλλην ἐψηφίσαντο πέμπειν καὶ ναυτικὴν / > “fs 3
καὶ πεΐξήν, ᾿Αθηναίων τε ἐκ κατα- λόγου καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων. καὶ ἕυν- ᾽ 3 a ¢ / άρχοντας αὐτῷ εἵλοντο Δημοσθένη τε τὸν ᾿Αλκισθένους . καὶ Ἐύρυ- μέδοντα τὸν Θουκλέους. καὶ τὸν \ 3 A 29+ . \ ey, / μὲν Evpupédovra εὐθὺς περὶ
‘
Eurymedon.’ τροπὰς τὰς χειμερινὰς" ἀποπέμπου- σιν ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν. μετὰ δέκα νεῶν, ἄγαντα ¥ \ e \ 4 > ί ὶ [4 εἴκοσι « καὶ ἑκατὸν > τάλαντα ἀργυρίου, καὶ ἅμα 2 a a 7-2 ὦ ef 4 θ Ὶ 3 ἀγγελοῦντα τοῖς ἐκεῖ OTe ἥξει βοήθεια καὶ ἐπι-
Ν
»
\ , x / τε THY γνώμην, τὰ μὲν λή- ec a σ σουσιν ὑμᾶς, ὥσπερ K
Fo eed
20
al πρότερον, τὰ δὲ φθήσον- |
3. πράττετε M. 1. wefixhy Μ.---Δημοσθένην M. 2. καὶ ἑκατὸν wanting in all the best MSS., was read by Valla.
16
EYTTPA®HE Z (15—17) 17
17 μέλεια αὐτῶν ἔσται. 0 δὲ Δημοσθένης ὑπομένων δ παρεσκευάζετο τὸν ἔκπλουν, ὡς ἅμα ‘The Syr. war now no longer
fa) J , τῷ “ποιησόμενος, OTOATLAVY ΤΕ stands apart, é np ¢ DLT OEY Ss par but becomes ab-
ἐπαγγέλλων ἐς τοὺς ξυμμάχους καὶ sorbed in the
, > ,»9.δΔ. a ιν. ie , general war χρήματα αὐτόθεν καὶ ναῦς καὶ οπλί- rekindling ughou 2 τας ἑτοιμάζων. πέμπουσι δὲ καὶ περὶ Greece.—D. \ = 7 ε9 » ν exerted himself τὴν Πελοπόννησον ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι εἴκοσι all the winter to get together the
“ σ 4 4 ? \ ναῦς, ὅπως φυλάσσοιεν μηδένα ἀπὸ second arma. , \ a ͵ ment for early KopivOov καὶ τῆς Ἰ]Πελοποννήσον spring.’ ὃ ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν περαιοῦσθαι. οἱ γὰρ Κορίνθιοι, a ν angen, A ὡς αὐτοῖς οἱ πρέσβεις ἧκον καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ βελτίω ἤγγελλον, ᾿ νομίσαντες οὐκ ἄκαιρον καὶ τὴν προτέραν πέμψιν τῶν νεῶν twenty other
ποιήσασθαι, πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἐπέρ- Fore sont το the Ἢ ς , . / station of Nau- ρωντο, καὶ ἐν ὁλκάσι παρεσκευά- sektus to pre.
> 7 2 ge -ελοῦ “πλί vent any Cor. OVTO avToL τε ἀποστελοῦντεξ οπλί- Fontorcoments
τας ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν καὶ ἐκ τῆς ἄλλης brthe cor’ οὐ
Πελοποννήσου οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, τῷ θυ The Cor. 4 αὐτῷ τρόπῳ πέμψοντες. ναῦς τε οἱ Pr! triremes, Κορίνθιοι πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν ἐπλή- Oitty te the Ψ , ᾽ 4 _ transports nour, ὅπως ναυμαχίας τε ἀποπειρά- carrying their
TWOL, I τὴν ἐν τῇ Ναυπάκτῳ
," e —_ A φυλακήν, καὶ τὰς ὁλκάδας PUTwY ἧσσον οἱ ἐν τῇ Ναυπάκτῳ ᾿Αϑηναῖοι κωλύοιεν ἀπαίρειν, πρὸς
17 3. αὐτοῖς of wp. B; the rest of τε πρέσβεις αὐτοῖς, which would require a contrast to of πρέσβεις in the next clause.— πολλὰ Μ.---πέμψαντες M ; [wéuyorres] Hw., Hu. ; the addition of a comma after Λακεδαιμόνιοι explains the insertion; for πέμψοντες is not co-ordinate with ἀποστελοῦντες.
4, εἴκοσι M.—év rn N. Cf. 2 above. Thuc. does not else- where use ἐν with φυλακή without a verb ; the words may have got in from οἱ ἐν τῇ Ν. ᾿Α.
σ
18
18
τὴν σφετέραν ἀντίταξιν. τῶν τριήρων τὴν φυλα- 2%
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ °
UA κὴν ποιούμενοι. Παρεσκευάξάντο δὲ καὶ τὴν ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν
‘War with Sparta had be- come inevitable. The peace, though in- directly broken in many ways, still subsisted i in name—the Lac. knew that the reach of peace had been on their side at the beginning of the war ; attributing to this fault their capital mis- fortune.—A. also
' 2 had avoided
8 ἄλλη αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο.
18
direct violation of the Lac. territory. But ner reserve on
is point gave
way auri uring the
present summer. —The Syr. and Cor. vehemently pressed their claims; Alkibi- ades also re- newed his in- stances for the occupation of Dekeleia.’
ἐσβολὴν οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ὥσπερ τε προεδέδοκτο αὐτοῖς καὶ τῶν Συρα- κοσίων καὶ Κορινθίων ἐναγόντων, ἐπειδὴ ἐπυνθάνοντο τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων βοήθειαν ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν, ὅπως δὴ ἐσβολῆς γενομένης διακω- λυθῇ. καὶ ὁ ᾿Αλκιβιάδης προσκεί.- μενος ἐδίδασκε τὴν Δεκέλειαν τευχί- ζἕειν καὶ μὴ ἀνιέναι τὸν πόλεμον. μάλεστα δὲ τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις éye-
γένητό τις ῥώμη, διότι τοὺς ᾿Αθη-.
. 4 . A / vatouvs ἐνόμιζον διπλοῦν τὸν πόλεμον Μ ,ὔἬ a \ , ἔχοντας, πρός τε σφᾶς καὶ Σικελιώ- τᾶς, εὐκαθαιρετωτέρους ἔσεσθαι, καὶ σ \ \ “ / ὅτι τὰς σπονδὰς προτέρους λελυκέναι ἡγοῦντο αὐτούς" ἐν γὰρ τῷ προτέρῳ
\ / πολέμῳ σφέτερον τὸ παρανόμημα “μᾶλλον γενέσθαι, ὅτι τε ἐς Πλάταιαν
ἦλθον Θηβαῖοι ἐν σπονδαῖς, καὶ εἰρημένον ἐν 30 ταῖς πρότερον ξυνθήκαις ὅπλα μὴ ἐπιφέρειν, ἢν δίκας ἐθέλωσι διδόναι, αὐτοὶ οὐχ ὑπήκουον ἐς
δίκας προκαλουμένων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων.
καὶ διὰ
a > ἢ A > / \ 2 τοῦτο εἰκότως δυστυχεῖν τε ἐνόμιζον καὶ ἐνεθυ- μοῦντο τήν τε περὶ Πύλον ξυμφορὰν καὶ εἴ τις
ἐπειδὴ δὲ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
2. ἐγένετο M.—re after ὅτι om. Μ.---θέλωσι Μ.---ἐγένετο Μ,
Sta., Sitz.; γένοιτο CAEFG, Cl., Bh., Hu. ;
ἐγεγένοιτο B.
ἐγεγένητο Hw. ;
25
(19) *
19
* OL 91, 8. pc
21,3. 2c ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z (17—19)
19
a e ταῖς τριάκοντα ναυσὶν ἐξ "Ἄργους ὁρμώμενοι ᾿Επιδαύρου τέ τι καὶ ἸΙρασιῶν καὶ ἄλλα ἐδήωσαν
\ 2 Us ef “ λ ε , ’
καὶ ἐκ Πύλου ἅμα ἐλήστευον, καὶ ὁσάκις περί του διαφοραὶ γένοιντο τῶν κατὰ τὰς σπονδὰς ἀμφισ- βητουμένων, ἐς δίκας προκαλουμένων τῶν Λακε-
4 δαιμονίων οὐκ ἤθελον ἐπιτρέπειν, τότε δὴ οἱ
’
Λακεδαιμόνιοι νομίσαντες τὸ παρανόμημα ὅπερ καὶ σφίσι πρότερον ἡμάρτητο, αὖθις ἐς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους τὸ αὐτὸ περιεστάναι, πρόθυμοι ἦσαν
2 \ μ ‘9 A a , 4 ἐς τὸν πόλεμον. καὶ ἐν τῷ χειμῶνε τούτῳ σίδη- pov τε περιήγγελλον κατὰ τοὺς ξυμ-
‘Never was any
μάχους, καὶ τἄλλα ἐργαλεῖα ἡτοίμα- τα em. Ν / A i Cov és τὸν ἐπιτειχισμόν. καὶ τοῖς Beem a. : a so? ς 9 , ations as the ἐν Τῇ Σικελίᾳ ἅμα ὡς ἀποπέμψοντες Winter of 40 414-413 B.c.’
3 a e ’ὔ 3 / > 4 εν TALS ολκάσιν επικουρίαν αὕτοι TE
ἐπόριζον καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους Πελοποννησίους προσ-
ηνάγκαζον.
\ ς Ἁ 9 , Voy καὶ ὁ χειμὼν ἐτελεύτα, καὶ ὄγδοον
καὶ δέκατον ἔτος τῷ πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα τῷδε ὃν
,--Ξϑουκυδίδης ξυνέγραψεν.
πρῴτατα δὴ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν ἐσέβαλον" ἡγεῖτο δὲ Ἄγις ὁ ᾿Αρχιδάμου, Λακε- δαιμονίων βασιλεύς. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν τῆς χώρας τὰ περὶ τὸ πεδίον ἐδήω-
ΝΜ 3 4 \ σαν, ἔπειτα Δεκέλειαν erety Cov, κατὰ
CR eae’ ἵ:
Tod δ᾽ ἐπυγυγνομένου ἦρος εὐθὺς ἀρχομένου
.Αὖ the earliest moment of spring—most important of all was the re-in- vasion of Attica. —The plain in the neighbour- hood of A. was first laid waste, after which the “ἢ
é
3. ἐξ “Apyous and re after ᾿Επιδαύρου are only in Β. ---ἐλήο-
τευον B; the rest ἐλῃστεύοντο. 1. πρώτατα M ; πρωιαίτατα B ; πρῴτατα Cl., Sta., Hu., Bh.
mpwirara M in marg., T in marg. ;
45
20 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
: / / \ » 3 » Qinvaders το. πόλεις διελόμενοι τὸ ἔργον. ἀπέχει ceede eir “ special purpose δὲ ἡ Aexeheva σταδίους μάλιστα τῆς of erecting ἃ κ , ] fortified post at τῶν Αθηναίων πόλεως εἴκοσι καὶ τὸ Dekeleia.’ e ; ; \ \ > ἑκατὸν, παραπλήσιον δὲ [Kal ov A Ἁ a a πολλῷ πλέον] καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βοιωτίας. a: ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ, a a “ γ΄ eve Vigil πεδίῳ καὶ τῆς χώρας τοῖς κρατίστοις ἐς τὸ KAR. Μ A a \ a ‘ ουργεῖν φκοδομεῖτο τὸ τεῖχος, ἐπιφανὲς μέχρι “A A 3 ’ ’ \ e \ b A 8 τῆς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πόλεως. Kal οἱ μὲν ἐν TH τὸ 5 a / e Us 9 i Αττικῇ Πελοποννήσιοι καὶ ot ξύμμαχοι ἐτείχι- ‘From C. Tae Cop: οἱ ὃ ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ ἀπέ- narus in Laconia an 7 ra embarked a force στέλλον περὶ TOV: αὐτὸν χρονον ταῖς of 600 Lac. hop- ς , Le , > Ν ΝΕ lites, and 300 ὁλκάσι TOUS ὁπλίτας ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν, 3oeotian hop- ͵ a lites. Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν τῶν te Εἱλώτων 20 ἐπιλεξάμενοι τοὺς βελτίστους καὶ τῶν νεοδαμ- οῶμ- adeav, ξυναμφοτέρων ἐς ἑξακοσίους ὁπλίτας, καὶ Ν 4 ¥ \ \ Exxperov Σπαρτιάτην ἄρχοντα, Βοιωτοὶ δὲ e τριακοσίους ὁπλίτας, ὧν ἦρχον Ἐξένων τε καὶ n A 4 Νίκων Θηβαῖοι καὶ “Hynoavipos Θεσπιεύς. οὗτοι 95 A A € a μὲν οὖν ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι ὁρμήσαντες ἀπὸ τοῦ , δ a. 2 δ , 5 a! Ταινάρου τῆς Λακωνικῆς és τὸ πέλαγος ἀφεῖσαν" μετὰ δὲ τούτους Κορίνθιοι οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον e ᾿ \ an πεντακοσίους ὁπλίτας, τοὺς μὲν ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς Kopiv- <a -
2. παραπλήσιον δὲ καὶ οὐ B; [π. δὲ καὶ οὐ πολλῷ πλέον καὶ] Kr., Hw. ; π. δὲ [οὐ πολλῷ πλέον] Hu. ; for ἀπὸ read by Valla, the best MSS. have ἐπὶ, and so Kr., Hw.—f[és τὸ κακουργεῖν} Kr., Sta., Hw., Hu.
ὃ. βελτίους Μ.---τῶν before νεοδαμωδῶν om. M.—és before ἑξακοσίους om. M.
4, ἐν ταῖς πρώτοις Μ.---ἀφῆκαν MSS.—perd δὲ τούτοις M.— dm’ αὐτῆς Κορίνθον Cl., Hw., with B; it is better than ἐκ, which the rest have, as ἀπὸ expresses the origin from which the troops were derived, not merely the place from which they came im- mediately. Cf. ἀπ’ ἀνδρῶν ἐκ τῆς Κατάνης ἥκειν vi. 64, and
SYTTPA®HS Z (19—20) 21
θου, τοὺς δὲ προσμισθωσάμενοι ᾿Αρκάδων, καὶ 30
ἄρχοντα ᾿Αλέξαρχον Κορίνθιον προσ- «at the same
, time a body of τάξαντες ἀπέπεμψαν. ἀπέστειλαν 709 hoplites de-
e , arted from th δὲ καὶ Σικυώνιοι διακοσίους ὁπλίτας RY or om the
ΜΝ h ὁμοῦ τοῖς Κορινθίοις, ὧν ἦρχε Σαρ- seine e mouth
for Sicily—th ὅ yeds Σικνώνιος. αἱ δὲ πέντε καὶ Gime” 35
“A ΝᾺ e Le tehi th εἴκοσι νῆες “τῶν Κορινθίων at τοῦ wnt they were
Ἀ . the A. χειμῶνος πληρωθεῖσαν ἀνθώρμουν Pee moi, ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ναυπάκτῳ εἴκοσιν ᾿Ατ- Naupaktus. τικαῖς, ἕωσπερ νύτοῖς οὗτοι οἱ ὁπλῖται ταῖς
ὁλκάσιν ἀπὸ TiS. ᾿Πελοποννήσον ἀπῆραν" οὗπερ. 4. ἢ 4
ἕνεκα καὶ τὸ “πρῶτον ἐπληρώθησαν, ὅπῳς μὴ ο . ᾿Αθηναῖοι πρὸς τὰς ὁλκάδας μᾶλλον Paani οἱ τριήρεις τὸν νοῦν ἔχωσιν.
20 ἘἜΝν δὲ τούτῳ τούτῳ καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἅ ἅμα τῆς Δεκε-
λείας τῷ τειχισμῷ καὶ τοῦ ἦρος εὐθὺς «τς read with
’ ἀρχομένον περί τε Πελοπόννησον that while this
ναῦς τριάκοντα ἔστειλαν καὶ Χαρι- ᾿αροτίδοι work
Ψ e i --: - κλέα τὸν ᾿Απολλοδώρου ἄρχοντα, ᾧ Sueoe eA: δ
[1 εἴρητο καὶ ἐς “Apyos ἀφικομένῳ κατὰ priv ence’ οἴ 80
Q ‘ n° ΠΟΥ͂ the coasts τὸ ξυμμαχικὸν παρακαλεῖν ᾿Αργείων corel. but also
2 [τε] ὁπλίτας ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς, καὶ τὸν eT enon they Δημοσθένη ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν, ὥσπερ ρα τορι ρα ἔμελλον, ἀπέστελλον ἑξήκοντα μὲν Pemosth.’ 10 ναυσὶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ πέντε Χίαις, ὁπλίταις δὲ ἐκ καταλόγου ᾿Αθηναίων διακοσίοις καὶ χιλίοις, καὶ
αὐτὸς ἀφ᾽ ἑαντοῦ τὰ πολλὰ τεχνᾶται ὁ πόλεμος i. 122. ---προμισθω- σάμενοι M. 5. αὐτοῖς B: the rest omit it.—wpdrov] all but B have apérepov.—ras before ὁλκάδας om. M. 20 1. τῆς Bonly.—re after περί B only.—-[re] edd., after Reiske.
22 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
A Ψ e , / 39 @ / νησιωτῶν ὅσοις ἑκασταχόθεν olov τ᾽ ἦν πλείστοις χρήσασθαι, καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων ξυμμάχων τῶν
/ ὑπηκόων, εἴ ποθέν τι εἶχον ἐπιτήδειον ἐς τὸν 15 Ψ a πόλεμον, ξυμπορίσαντες. εἴρητο δ᾽ αὐτῷ πρῶτον μετὰ τοῦ Χαρικλέους ἅμα περιπλέοντα ξυστρα- 8 ‘The two fleets τεύεσθαι περὶ τὴν Λακωνικήν. καὶ joined at e \ , 3 \ " Aegina. o μὲν Δημοσθένης és τὴν Αἴγιναν 4 ἴον 4 ’ e Li πλεύσας τοῦ στρατεύυματὸς TE εἴ TL VITENENELTTTO 20 / \ / \ 3 / περιέμενε Kal τὸν Χαρικλέα τοὺς ᾿Αργείους παρα- λαβεῖν. 2 ἜΝ δὲ τῇ Σικελίᾳ ὑπὸ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους 4 Ὁ Φ e VA - φ 3 A τούτου τοῦ ἦρος καὶ ὁ Τύλιππος ἧκεν ἐς τὰς A ’ . Συρακούσας, ἄγων ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων ὧν ἔπεισε ’ στρατιὰν ὅσην ἑκασταχόθεν πλείστην ἐδύνατο. \ 2 aviippusre Kal ξυγκαλέσας τοὺς Συρακοσίους 5
cainthe” §«=— ἔφη χρῆναι πληροῦν ναῦς ws Suvav-
ly in th , τας. ταῦ πλείστας καὶ ναυμαχίας ἀπό- Interior it eas πείραν λαμβάνειν: ἐλπίζειν γὰρ ἀπ᾽
: . a ” ” A 4 eure" avtod τι ἔργον ἄξιον τοῦ κινδύνου és
with Hermo- 7X ,
8 Fates, toinepire TOV πόλεμον κατεργάσεσθαι. ἕυν- 10 Coueyeforfignt. ἀνέπειθε δὲ καὶ ὁ “Ἑρμοκράτης οὐχ ing the Aon = KLoTa, τοῦ ταῖς ναυσὶ μὴ ἀθυμεῖν
ἐς ΕἸ a H) 16 A. (said ἐπιχειρῆσαι, πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους
\ been ἴα. λέγων οὐδὲ ἐκείνους πάτριον THY
they ere once ἐμπειρίαν οὐδὲ ἀίδιον τῆς θαλάσσης 15
2. ποθέν rec M pr., error for π. rt; ποθέν τοι m. 3. ὑπελέλειπτο] ὑπελείπετο MSS. ; cor. Sta. 21 2. κατεργάσασθαι MSS.
3. ξυνανέπειθε δὲ καὶ 6‘E. οὐχ ἥκιστα τοῦ ταῖς ναυσὶ μὴ ἀθυμεῖν ἐπιχειρήσειν πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, λέγων οὐδὲ ἐκείνους Vulg. ; ἐπιχειρῆσαι Dobree ; οὐχ ἥκιστ᾽ αὐτοὺς Sta. ; οὐχ ἥκιστα τὸ Kr. ; M omits τοῦ and gives ξυνέπειθε and ἐκείνοις ; [ἐπιχειρήσει») Sta., Cl., Hw.
BYTTPA®HS Z (20—22)
ἔχειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἠπειρώτας μᾶλλον τῶν Συρακοσίων ὄντας καὶ ἀναγκασθέν- e \ / \ ,
τας ὑπὸ Μήδων ναυτικοὺς γενέσθαι. καὶ πρὸς ἄνδρας τολμηρούς, οἵους καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους, τοὺς ἀντιτολμῶντας χα- λεπωτάτους ἂν [αὐτοῖς] φαίνεσθαι" φ \ 2 vad \ ‘Xa bd ὃ 4
ᾧ yap ἐκεῖνοι τοὺς πέλας, ov δυνάμει
UA ἔστιν ὅτε προύχοντες, τῷ δὲ θράσει
23
Iandsmen. They have often by their audacity daunted enemies of greater real force than them- selves, and they must now be taught that 20 others can play the same game with them.”’
ἐπιχειροῦν-
τες, καταφοβοῦσι, καὶ σφᾶς ἂν τὸ αὐτὸ ὁμοίως 4 τοῖς ἐναντίοις ὑποσχεῖν. καὶ Συρακοσίους εὖ 25
εἰδέναι ἔφη τῷ τολμῆσαι ἀπροσδοκήτως πρὸς τὸ
3 a
Αθηναίων ναυτικὸν ἀντιστῆναι πλέον τι, διὰ τὸ
τοιοῦτον ἐκπλαγέντων αὐτῶν, περυγενησομένους
UA \
ἢ ᾿Αθηναίους τῇ ἐπιστήμῃ τὴν Συρακοσίων
bd / \ / 2 2 > / 3 \
ἀπειρίαν βλάψοντας. ἱέναι οὖν ἐκέλενεν ἐς τὴν 80
“ A A 3 a e
ὅ πεῖραν Tov ναυτικοῦ Kal μὴ ἀποκνεῖν. καὶ οἱ
/ a μὲν Συρακόσιοι, τοῦ τε Γυλίππου
καὶ “Eppo-
4, Ν ’ Ψ 4 κράτους καὶ εἴ του ἄλλου πειθόντων, ὥρμηντο τε 22 ἐς τὴν ναυμαχίαν καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἐπλήρουν. ὁ δὲ
Γύλιππος, ἐπειδὴ παρεσκεύαστο τὸ ναυτικόν, ἀγαγὼν ὑπὸ νύκτα πᾶσαν τὴν στρατιὰν τὴν πεζὴν αὐτὸς μὲν τοῖς ἐν τῷ Πλημμυρίῳ τείχεσι κατὰ γῆν ἔμελλε προσβαλεῖν, αἱ δὲ τριήρεις τῶν Συρακοσίων ἅμα καὶ ἀπὸ ξυνθή- ματος πέντε μὲν καὶ τριάκοντα ἐκ τοῦ μεγάλου λιμένος ἐπέπλεον, αἱ δὲ
‘Gylippus marched out his land-force secretly by night, over Epipolae and round by the right bank of the Anapus, to the neighbour- hood of the fort of Plemmyrium. With the first dawn, the Syr. fleet sailed out.
ao
3. ἂν [αὐτοῖς] Badham, Hw. ; some edd. omit ἂν and retain
αὐτοῖς, others omit both ; καὶ αὐτοὺς Cl.
4, τι B only.—epr-yevnoopuévous B ; the rest περιεσομένους.
. 22 11. παρεσκευάσατο Μ.
24 GOYKYAIAOY
—TheA.,though πέντε καὶ τεσσαράκοντα ἐκ τοῦ 10 unprepared, — ͵ e 4 \ \ , completely de- ἐλάσσονος, οὗ ἦν καὶ τὸ νεωρίον feated them.’
αὐτοῖς, [καὶ] περιέπλεον, βουλόμενοι πρὸς τὰς ἐντὸς προσμεῖξαι καὶ ἅμα ἐπιπλεῖν τῷ Πλημμυρίῳ, ὅπως οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀμφοτέρωθεν
2 θορυβῶνται. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι διὰ τάχους ἀντι- πληρώσαντες ἑξήκοντα ναῦς ταῖς μὲν πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι πρὸς τὰς πέντε καὶ τριάκοντα τῶν Συρα- κοσίων τὰς ἐν τῷ μεγάλῳ λιμένι ἐναυμάχουν, ταῖς δ᾽ ἐπιλοίποις ἀπήντων ἐπὶ τὰς ἐκ τοῦ
ὃ νεωρίου περιπλεούσας. καὶ εὐθὺς πρὸ τοῦ στό- ματος τοῦ μεγάλον λιμένος ἐναυμάχουν, καὶ ἀντεῖχον ἀλλήλοις ἐπὶ πολύ, οἱ μὲν βιάσασθαι 28 βουλόμενοι τὸν ἔσπλουν, οἱ δὲ κωλύειν. ἐν τούτῳ δὲ ὁ Τύλιππος, τῶν ἐν τῷ Πλημμυρίῳ ᾿Αθηναίων πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν ἐπι-
‘ But this victory , \ a , A counter. than καταβ GVT@V Kat T) ναυμαχίᾳ THY balanced by the γνώμην mpoceyovTwv, φθάνει προσ- 5 breperable loss Y μη “ ρ xX Ψ ᾿ φ δί “ A
0 emmyrium. 7FEC@MYVY a T €@) ALtL@VLtLOl@ TOL During the first pa 7 ἐς φ 5 5
excitement, the garrison went to the water's edge, little suspecting the presence of their enemy on the land-side. Gylippus at-
2 tacked the forts, and captured them after a
τείχεσι, Kal αἱρεῖ TO μέγιστον πρῶ- 4 \ N \ , 4 τον, ἔπειτα δὲ Kal Ta ἐλάσσω δύο, οὐχ ὑπομεινάντων τῶν φυλάκων, ὡς εἶδον τὸ μέγιστον ῥᾳδίως ληφθέν. A U καὶ ἐκ μὲν Tod πρώτου ἁλόντος χα-
10
feeble resist- ance.’
‘The garrison sought safety as they could, and rowed across the
1. [καὶ] Bek.
λεπῶς οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ὅσοι καὶ ἐς τὰ πλοῖα καὶ ὁλκάδα τινὰ κατέφυγον, ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐξεκομίξζοντο" τῶν γὰρ Συρακοσίων ταῖς ἐν τῷ μεγάλῳ
2. τὰς δ᾽ ἐπιλοίπους Μ΄: ταῖς δ᾽ ἐπιλοίπαις Τ',
15
SYITPA®HS Z (22—24) 25
λιμένι ναυσὶ κρατούντων TH Vav- Great Harbour μὲ ρα Τῇ to the land-camp
μαχίᾳ ὑπὸ τριήρους μιᾶς καὶ εὖ ofN. on the
ψ > . \ , other side.’ πλεούσης ἐπεδιώκοντο' ἐπειδὴ δὲ
᾽ὔ τὰ δύο τειχίσματα ἡλίσκετο, ἐν τούτῳ καὶ οἱ
᾽ὔ > 9 Mv , e 3 Συρακόσιοι ἐτυγχανον ἤδη νικώμενου, καὶ οἱ ἐξ
δ αὐτῶν φεύγοντες ῥᾷον παρέπλευσαν. ai yap
τῶν Συρακοσίων αἱ πρὸ τοῦ στόματος νῆες ᾿ la! , “A 3 vaupayovoat, βιασάμεναι tas τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ναῦς οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ ἐσέπλεον, καὶ ταραχθεῖσαι περὶ ἀλλήλας παρέδοσαν τὴν νίκην τοῖς ᾿Αθη- 4 Ἧ e.,> Φ A ναίοις. ταύτας Te yap ἔτρεψαν καὶ ὑφ᾽ ὧν TO
A > ἴω 3 A 7 \ @ ὃ \ 4 πρωτον EVLK@YTO ἐν Τῷ λιμένι. KQL EVOEKA μὲν
24
vais τῶν Συρακοσίων κατέδυσαν, Kal τοὺς πολ- λοὺς τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀπέκτειναν, πλὴν ὅσον ἐκ τριῶν νεῶν ods ἐζώγρησαν' τῶν δὲ σφετέρων τρεῖς νῆες διεφθάρησαν. τὰ δὲ ναυάγια. ἀνελ- κύσαντες τῶν Συρακοσίων, καὶ τροπαῖον ἐν τῷ νησιδίῳ στήσαντες τῷ πρὸ τοῦ Ἰλημμυρίου, ἀνεχώρησαν ἐς τὸ ἑαυτῶν στρατόπεδον. |
Οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι κατὰ μὲν τὴν ναυμαχίαν οὕτως ἐπεπράγεσαν, τὰ δ᾽ ἐν τῷ «τμμ5 well-con-
Πλημμυρίῳ τείχη εἶχον καὶ τροπαῖα cared Suprise
¥ a i ἔστησαν αὐτῶν τρία. καὶ τὸ μὲν he captors than
@ “Ὁ a a ἕτερον τοῖν δυοῖν τειχοῖν τοῖν ὕστε- Pee NY
ρον ληφθέντοιν κατέβαλον, τὰ δὲ Moy Rew weny
many made
‘ ὃ 4 ? 4 3 4 wv 2 ὄνο ἐπισκευάσαντες ἐφρούρουν. ἀν- jrisoners—but
28
> 3 an A A ey 7 there were vast θρωποι δ᾽ ἐν τῶν τευχῶν TH ἁλώσει stores of every
ἀπέθανον καὶ ἐζωγρήθησαν πολλοί, tare stock or
2. of before ἐξ om. M. 4, νηΐσιδιωι M.
20
80
- 26 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
oo
25
24
25
money found καὶ Ἵματα πολλὰ Ta ξύμπαντα
within the το. κοί XPIMATG ΤΟΣ | ξύμ , ἑάλω" ἅτε yap ταμιείῳ χρωμένων
΄-ὦ , A / τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τοῖς τείχεσι πολλὰ μὲν ἐμπόρων / \ A 3. oA \ \ \ ἴω χρήματα καὶ σῖτος ἐνῆν, πολλὰ δὲ καὶ τῶν τριηράρχων, ἐπεὶ καὶ ἱστία τεσσαράκοντα τριή-
10
ρων καὶ τἄλλα σκεύη ἐγκατελήφθη, καὶ τριήρεις 15
ἀνειλκυσμέναι τρεῖς. μέγιστον δὲ καὶ ἐν τοῖς πρῶτον ἐκάκωσε τὸ στράτευμα τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
ς “Ὁ A > \ ‘The Syr. were 1 TOU [[λημμυρίον λῆψις: οὐ yap
tne ρον οὗ ἄπ, οὐδ᾽ οἱ ἔσπλοι ἀσφαλεῖς ἦσαν both sides ae [ τῆς ἐπαγωγῆς] τῶν ἐπιτηδείων (ot storechip cout, γὰρ Συρακόσιοι ναυσὶν αὐτόθι ἐφορ- conmoyarda μοῦντες ἐκώλυον, καὶ διὰ μάχης ἤδη battle.’ ἐγίγνοντο ai ἐσκομιδαί), ἔς τε τἄλλα κατάπληξιν παρέσχε καὶ ἀθυμίαν τῷ στρατεύ-
pare, | Mera δὲ τοῦτο ναῦς τε ἐκπέμπουσι δώδεκα οἱ
‘Their position υρακόσιοι καὶ ᾿Αγάθαρχνον ἐπ᾽ av- ‘was so muclyY 2 ρ Y PX
improved—that T@p Συρακόσιον a ἄρχοντα. καὶ αὐτῶν they began even , \ > ; ” to assume the μία μὲν ἐς Πελοπόννησον ὥχετο,
aggressive at , ν β ᾿
sea.’ πρέσβεις ἄγουσα, οἵπερ τά τε / [4 [τ 3 3 ’ 3 Ἁ \
σφέτερα φράσουσιν ὅτι ἐν ἐλπίσιν εἰσὶ καὶ τὸν A / a A °
ἐκεῖ πόλεμον ETL μᾶλλον ἐποτρυνοῦσι γίγνεσθαι
2. ἅτε Bonly, Bek., Hw. ; {86 rest ὥστε ; ὥσπερ Josephus 18, 9, 1, Sta., Hu., ΟἹ. ---τῶν B only ; the rest om.
3. μέγιστόν τε M, Sta., Cl.—rd στράτευμα τῶν BM ; the rest τὸ 0. τὸ τῶν. ---- οἱ before ἔσπλοι om. B, ΟἹ]. ---ἰἝ τῆς ἐπαγωγῆς] Pp.— τὰ ἄλλα MSS., except 6.---παρεῖχε M.
1. οἵπερ CAFG Hu. ; ὅπως B, Kr., Cl, Sta., Bh., Hw., Sitz. ; ὥσπερ E. See MT. 565, 572; on the other side M. L. Earle in Clas, Rev. vi. 98. - φράσωσιν . . ἐποτρύνωσι MSS. ‘Subjunctivus post ὅς. οἵπερ... φράσωσιν . « καὶ ἑποτρύνωσι. Vix dubium quin Ἰορθηαυτη---σουσιν---νοῦσι.᾽ Dobree.—ve after τά B only.
20
25
a
BYTTPAPHS Z (24—25) 27
ai δὲ ἕνδεκα νῆες πρὸς τὴν ᾿Ιταλίαν ἔπλευσαν, , “A a πυνθανόμεναι πλοῖα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις χρημάτων 2 γέμοντα προσπλεῖν. καὶ τῶν τε πλοίων ἐπιτυ- χοῦσαι τὰ πολλὰ διέφθειραν καὶ ξύλα ναυπηγή- σιμα ἐν τῇ Καυλωνιάτιδι κατέκαυσαν, ἃ τοῖς ὃ ᾿Αθηναίοις ἑτοῖμα ἦν. ἔς τε Λοκροὺς μετὰ ταῦτα φ A e A 9 “ , f_-: ἦλθον, καὶ ὁρμουσῶν αὐτῶν κατέπλευσε μία Cal e ᾽ A 3 \ 4 Ν τῶν ὁλκάδων τῶν ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου ἄγουσα ε ) Θεσπιέων ὁπλίτας" καὶ ἀναλαβόντες αὐτοὺς οἱ 4 a Συρακόσιοι ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς παρέπλεον ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. 4 φυλάξαντες δ᾽ αὐτοὺς οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι εἴκοσι ναυσὶ \ anf , , \ a / πρὸς τοῖς Μεγάροις, μίαν μὲν ναῦν λαμβάνουσιν a 3 αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσι, τὰς δ᾽ ἄλλας οὐκ ἐδυνήθησαν, 5 2.» , 3 \ A ἀλλ᾽ ἀποφεύγουσιν ἐς τὰς Συρακούσας. 3 / Ἁ a A 9 5 ἘἨ γένετο δὲ καὶ wept τῶν σταυρῶν ἀκρο- Α 3 A / A e βολισμὸς ἐν τῷ λιμένι, οὗς οἱ Συρα- ‘Since the loss
, \ a i κόσιοι. πρὸ τῶν παλαιῶν νεωσοίκων theA nara”
κατέπηξαν ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ, ὅπως av- fey
a e a \ ς κι ςὶ i τοῖς αἱ νῆες ἐντὸς ὁρμοῖεν καὶ οἱ Drtenanour
9 ΄΄ο» 9 / \ -- Αθηναῖοι ἐπιπλέοντες μὴ βλάπτοιεν Fat me
6 ἐμβάλλοντες. προσαγαγόντες γὰρ Ἔν pa spe
ναῦν μυριοφόρον αὐτοῖς of ᾿Αθηναῖοι, seertinities of πύργους τε ξυλίνους ἔχουσαν καὶ Siesonas
παραφράγματα, ἔκ τε τῶν ἀκάτων Mermiehes om ὥνευον ἀναδούμενοι τοὺς σταυροὺς frmeunge
καὶ ἀνεῖλκον, καὶ κατακολυμβῶντες through the κς
1, χρημάτων γέμοντα B only ; the rest γέμ. χρημ.
2. ἕτοιμα M. 4, ἠδυνήθησαν M. 5. ἐντὸς Μ.
6. ἀνεῖλκον Widmann, cf. ii. 76, 4, where Rutherford made the same alteration ; ἀνέσπων Cl., Hw., from the schol. ; ἀνέκ- λων MSS. .
10
15
20
25
98 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ͂ “
ὅγε. dockyard — ἐξέπριον. οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι ἀπὸ τῶν little by it.’ νεωσοίκων ἔβαλλον" οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς 35 ὁλκάδος ἀντέβαλλον' καὶ τέλος τοὺς πολλοὺς 7 τῶν σταυρῶν ἀνεῖλον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι. χαλεπωτάτη δ᾽ ἦν τῆς σταυρώσεως ἡ κρύφιος: ἦσαν γὰρ τῶν σταυρῶν ods οὐχ ὑπερέχοντας τῆς θαλάσσης κατέπηξαν, ὥστε δεινὸν ἦν προσπλεῦσαι, μὴ οὐ 40 προιδών τις ὥσπερ περὶ ἕρμα περιβάλῃ τὴν ναῦν. ἀλλὰ καὶ τούτους κολυμβηταὶ δνόμενοι ἐξέπριον μισθοῦ. ὅμως δ᾽ αὖθις οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐσταύρω- 8σαν. πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα πρὸς ἀλλήλους, οἷον εἰκὸς τῶν στρατοπέδων ἐγγὺς ὄντων καὶ ἀντι- 45 τεταγμένων, ἐμηχανῶντο καὶ ἀκροβολισμοῖς καὶ πείραις παντοίαις ἐχρῶντο. (9) Ἔπεμψαν δὲ καὶ és τὰς πόλεις πρέσβεις οἱ ‘Envoys went Συρακόσιοι Κορινθίων““Καὶ ᾿Αμπρα-
from Syr.—to <_
visit the cities «iwTtav Kal Λακεδαιμονίων, aryyéd- 50 in the interior. ῶ μ ᾿
ΤΠΘΥ͂ made λοντας τήν τε τοῦ Πλημμυρίου prodigious nt λῆψιν καὶ τῆς ναυμαχίας πέρι ὡς
° “A ὋΝ ‘ 4 “
in Syracusan οὐ TH τῶν πολεμίων' ἰσχύι μᾶλλον ἢ strenuously τῇ σφετέρᾳ ταραχῇ ἡδσηθεῖεν, τά pleaded for " Ν “Sy , Ψ 3 further aid to Te ἄλλα [αὖ] δηλώσοντας ὅτι ἐν 55 delay.’ ἐλπίσιν εἰσί, καὶ ἀξιώσοντας Evp-
΄-“ > 9 3 \ \ A e βοηθεῖν ἐπ᾽’ αὐτοὺς καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ, ὡς καὶ ra ϑ / / δ bd “ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων προσδοκίμων ὄντων ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ, ᾿ / καί, ἣν φθάσωσιν αὐτοὶ πρότερον διαφθείραντες a ’ τὸ παρὸν στράτευμα αὐτῶν, διαπεπολεμησόμενον. 60 καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ ταῦτα ἔπρασσον.
9. [αὖ] omitted by ΒΟΜ.---διαπεπολεμησόμενον B only ; the rest διαπολεμησόμενον. .
BYTTPA®PHS Z (25—27) 29
| 267 ὋὉ δὲ Δημοσθένης, ἐπεὶ ξυνελέγη αὐτῷ τὸ
7 ΝΜ ΝΜ > \ στράτευμα ὃ ἔδει ἔχοντα ἐς τὴν «The fests [οἵ
Σικελίαν βοηθεῖν, ἄρας ἐκ τῆς Αὐγί. Demeninenes νης καὶ πλεύσας πρὸς τὴν Πελο»όν- ἰρδιοιδα some”
νῆσον τῷ τε Χαρικλέΐ καὶ ταῖς τριά- devastations on 5
κοντα ναυσὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ξυμ. ers δοιὰ
μίσγει, καὶ παραλαβόντες τῶν ᾿᾽Αρ- Bong Porton
e A A yelwv ὁπλίτας ἐπὶ τὰς vais ἔπλεον σαι τα ἰο
/ Ν A \ 2 ἐς τὴν Λακωνικήν" καὶ πρῶτον μὲν yeeertion among
τῆς ᾿Βπιδαύρου Tt τῆς Λιμηρᾶς Cherikies re. 10 ἐδήωσαν, ἔ ἔπειτα σχόντες ¢ ἐς τὰ καταν- med while D.
armament
τικρὺ Κυθήρων τῆς Δακώνικῆς, ἔνθα roum Pel. to τὸ ἱερὸν τοῦ Ἀπόλλωνός ἐστι, τῆς Korky τε γῆς ἔστιν ἃ ἐδήωσαν. καὶ ἐτείχισαν ἰσθμῶδές τι χωρίον, ἵνα δὴ οἵ τε Εἵλωτες [τῶν Λάκεδαι- 15 μονίων] αὐτόσε αὐτομολῶσι καὶ ἅμα λῃσταὶ ἐξ
, αὐτοῦ, ὥσπερ ἐκ τῆς Πύλου, ἁρπαγὴν ποιῶνται.
8 καὶ ὁ μὲν Δημοσθένης εὐθὺς ἐπειδὴ Συγκατελαβες τὸ χωρίον παρέπλει ἐπὶ τῆς Κερκύρας, ὅπως rR τῶν ἐκεῖθεν ξυμμάχων παραλαβὼν τὸν ἐς τὴν 30 Σικελίαν πλοῦν ὅτι τάχιστα ποιῆται" ὁ δὲ Χαρικλῆς περιμείνας ἕως τὸ χωρίον ἐξετείχισε καὶ καταλιπὼν φυλακὴν αὐτοῦ ἀπεκομίζετο καὶ αὐτὸς ὕστερον ταῖς τριάκοντα ναυσὶν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου καὶ οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι ἅμα. 25
27 ᾿Αφίκοντο δὲ καὶ [τῶν] Θρᾳκῶν τῶν μαχαι-
Lis
26 1. és om. M. 2. τί for τι M twice.—xar’ ἀντικρὺ M.—[rdv Aax.] Hw.— ἅμα B only ; the rest omit. . 8. ἐπέπλει M.—éws B only ; the rest ws. 27 411. [τῶν] om. BG.
2
ΤΟΙ, 91, 8-4.
30 - ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
/ “ ce)
popopwy τοῦ Διακοῦ γένους ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας ‘There had been πτελτασταὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέρους τούτου engaged on hire ͵ \ ao» a 1500 peltasts TPlAKOTLOL καὶ χίλιοι, ods ἔδεε τῷ (ποτὰ Thrace ;— A 6 ; > \ Σ ,
ut thesemen Δημοσθένει ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν Evp- did not arrive in a ew 9 ae Φ
time.’ πλεῖν. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὡς ὕστερον ἧκον, διενοοῦντο αὐτοὺς πάλιν ὅθεν ἦλθον [ἐς \ Θράκην] ἀποπέμπειν. τὸ yap ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν ἐκ τῆς Δεκελείας πόλεμον αὐτοὺς πολυτελὲς
an
ἐφαίνετο’ δραχμὴν yap τῆς ἡμέρας ἕκαστος 10
8 ἐλάμβανον.
>
ἐπειδὴ yap ἡ Δεκέλεια τὸ μὲν [οὶ [ \ J A ΜᾺ 4 ΄Ν / πρῶτον ὑπὸ πάσης τῆς στρατιᾶς ἐν τῷ θέρει
‘The A. now underwent the fatal experience of a hostile garrison within 15 miles of their city ; an ex- perience peculiarly painful this summer,” as well from its novelty, as from the extra- ordinary vigour which Agis dis- played.—No part of Attica was secure or could be rendered pro- ductive.’ ;
4 a σ \ τούτῳ τειχισθεῖσα, ὕστερον δὲ dpov- a a 4 pais ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων κατὰ διαδοχὴν / a χρόνου ἐπιούσαις TH χώρᾳ ἐπῳκεῖτο, πολλὰ ἔβλαπτε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, καὶ ἐν τοῖς πρῶτον χρημάτων τ᾽ ὀλέθρῳ 3 4 Aa 3 ’ δ καὶ ἀνθρώπων φθορᾷ ἐκάκωσε τὰ 4 πράγματα. πρότερον μὲν yap Bpa- A / e 93 Α \ δ χεῖαι γιγνόμεναι αἱ ἐσβολαὶ τὸν ἀλ- λον χρόνον τῆς γῆς ἀπολαύειν οὐκ > » / \ a 9 ἐκώλνον" τότε δὲ ξυνεχῶς ἐπικαθη- μένων, καὶ ὁτὲ μὲν καὶ πλειόνων 9 / εν 2 9 3 4 A »Ν ἐπιόντων, ὁτὲ δ᾽ ἐξ ἀνάγκης τῆς ἴσης
20
φρουρᾶς καταθεούσης τε τὴν χώραν καὶ λῃστείας 25 , A a ποιουμένης, βασιλέως τε παρόντος τοῦ τῶν Aa- / wv a 2 3 / \ / cedatpovimv” Aytoos, ὃς οὐκ ἐκ παρέργου τὸν πόλε-
1. τοῦ αὐ. θέρους τ. B only ; the rest ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ θ. τ. 2. [ἐς Θράκην] Bothe, Ἦν. ---ἐλάμβανον B; the rest ἐλάμ-
βανε(»).
8. ἀπὸ B only; the rest ὑπὸ. --- πρῶτον before χρημάτων Bekker ; πρώτοις MSS. ; πρώτη Dobree, Hw.
EYTTPA®HS Z (27—28) 31
pov ἐποιεῖτο, μεγάλα ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐβλάπτοντο. τῆς τε γὰρ χώρας ἁπάσης ἐστέρηντο, καὶ ἀνδρα-
an
πόδων πλέον ἢ δύο μυριάδες ηὐτομολήκεσαν, Kal :
τούτων τὸ πολὺ μέρος χειροτέχναι, πρόβατά τε ἀπωλώλει πάντα καὶ ὑποζύγια" ἵπποι τε, ὁση- μέραι ἐξελαυνόντων τῶν ἱππέων, πρός τε τὴν Δεκέλειαν καταδρομὰς ποιουμένων καὶ κατὰ τὴν χώραν φυλασσόντων, οἱ μὲν ἀπεχωλοῦντο ἐν γῇ ἀποκρότῳ τε καὶ ξυνεχῶς ταλαιπωροῦντες, οἱ δ᾽ 28 ἐτιτρώσκοντο. 4 τε τῶν ἐπιτηδείων παρακομιδὴ
4 “A 9 / 4 3 A ἐκ τῆς Εὐβοίας, πρότερον ἐκ TOD igo terribion
ρωποῦ κατὰ γὴν διὰ τῆς Δεκελείας weaved by
, \ i θάσσων οὖσα, περὶ Σούνιον κατὰ the increased
\ κ . θάλασσαν πολυτελὴς ἐγίγνετο: τῶν suey of import
e / “a a . τε πάντων ὁμοίως ἐπακτῶν ἐδεῖτο i wes Teduced
/ a / i ἡ πόλις, καὶ ἀντὶ τοῦ πόλις εἶναι Toa wilitecy / \ A ᾿ ὁ φρούριον κατέστη. πρὸς γὰρ τῇ Ἐπ᾿ > / \ \ e / \ ὃ ὃ \ e ἐπάλξει τὴν μὲν ἡμέραν κατὰ διαδοχὴν οἱ ral \ ᾿Αθηναῖοι φυλάσσοντες, τὴν δὲ νύκτα καὶ ξύμ- δ a e / e \ 279 @& TavrTes πλὴν τῶν ἱππέων, ol μὲν ἐφ ὅπλοις e 3 ἴοι που, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦ τείχους, καὶ θέρους καὶ 8 χειμῶνος ἐταλαιπωροῦντος μάλιστα δ᾽ αὐτοὺς 3 7 ag ὃ ’ / [4 i \ 3 ἐπίεζεν ὅτι δύο πολέμους ἅμα εἶχον, καὶ ἐς
5. τὸ πολὺ B; the rest om. τὸ.---ἀπωλώλει πάντα B only; π΄. ἀπολώλει ΟΜ. ---ὁ ποζύγια] B only has ζεύγη ; cf. Herod. ix. 39 λαμβάνουσι ὑποζύγιά τε πεντακόσια, καὶ ἀνθρώπους of εἵποντο τοῖσι ζεύγεσι. .
28 1. θᾶσσον ΑΜ, Kriiger, Classen, Bohme, Sitz. ; θᾶσσον ἰοῦσα Badham.
2. ἐφ᾽ 8 πον B, Cl., Sta., Bh., Hw., Sitz.; the other MSS. ἐφ᾽ ὅ. ποιούμενοι, for which πονούμενοι Kr., πολούμενοι Rauchen- stein, κοιμώμενοι Miil.-Str. See Appendix II.
10
32 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ
φιλονικίαν καθέστασαν τοιαύτην ἣν πρὶν yevéo- θαι ἠπίστησεν ἄν τις ἀκούσας, τό γ᾽ ἄν, αὐτοὺς πολιορκουμένους ἐπιτειχισμῷ ὑπὸ Πελοποννη- σίων, μηδ᾽ a> ἀποστῆναι ἐκ Σικελίας, ἀλλὰ ἐκεῖ Συρακούσας τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ ἀντιπολιορκεῖν,
15
/ 3 Ἁ ’ 9 / 3 ς Ἧ A πόλιν οὐδὲν ἐλάσσω αὐτήν ye καθ᾽ αὑτὴν τῆς 2
3 \ A 7 [οὶ A
Αθηναίων, καὶ τὸν παράλογον τοσοῦτον ποιῆσαι a ff A
τοῖς “ἕλλησι τῆς δυνάμεως καὶ τόλμης, ὅσον
«οἱ μὲν» κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς τοῦ πολέμου, οἱ μὲν
4 7 6 \ [4 4 Ἁ mn 49 A 3 N
ἐνιαυτόν, ot δὲ δύο, οἱ δὲ τριῶν ye ἐτῶν οὐδεὶς
’ ,
πλείω χρόνον, ἐνόμιζον περιοίσειν αὐτούς, εἰ οἱ
Πελοποννήσιοι ἐσβάλοιεν ἐς τὴν χώραν, οἱ δὲ
» e , A v4 9 Α
ἔτει ἑπτακαιδεκάτῳ μετὰ τὴν πρώτην ἐσβολὴν
ἦλθον ἐς Σικελίαν, ἤδη τῷ πολέμῳ κατὰ πάντα
’ τετρυχωμένοι, καὶ πόλεμον οὐδὲν ἐλάσσω προσ-
a 4 ‘The attacks @etNoVTO Tod πρότερον ὑπάρχοντος
/ > /. broughtine” ἐκ Πελοποννήσου. δι’ ἃ καὶ τότε
inte notive, ὑπό τε τῆς Δεκελείας πολλὰ βλαπ-
8. MSS.. have ἣν πρὶν γενέσθαι ἠπίστησεν ἄν τις ἀκούσας. τὸ γὰρ αὐτοὺς πολιορκουμένους ἐπιτειχισμῷ ὑπὸ Πελ. μηδ᾽ ὡς ἀπο- στῆναι. .. καὶ τὸν παράλογον τοσοῦτον ποιῆσαι. . . ὅσον κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς τοῦ π. . .. ἐς τὴν χώραν" ὥστε ἔτει κιτιλ. For γὰρ Bothe reads γε, Badham γ᾽, Sitz. καὶ ; Sta. corrects γὰρ αὐτοὺς to παρ᾽ αὑτοῖς ; Shil. on i. 25 proposes to render γὰρ ‘namely’; Holden makes the infins. exclamatory, which few will consider appropriate either to yap or to the context or to the author ; Cl. supposes an anacoluthon, the verb to τὸ γὰρ x.7.d. not being inserted.—avrijy ye] all the best MSS. have αὐτήν τε. — ἐποίησε for ποιῆσαι Pluygers.—For ὅσον, Badham, Hu., Madvig read ὅσοι; Sitz. οἵπερ; Sta. and others make only ὥστε cor- relative to τοσοῦτον, and render ὅσον ‘inasmuch as.’ — « οἱ μὲν > has dropped out in consequence of (a) of μὲν following, (δ) the resemblance of OCONKAT to OCONOIMENKAT. See note. —ol 5¢] MSS. ὥστε ; Cl. ὅμως δὲς My argument will be found in Class. Rev. vi. (1892), p. 808 f.
4, διὸ Μ.--- τε B only ; the rest omit.
25
29
2 ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν βλάψαι.
29
ΞΎΥΓΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z (28—29)
τούσης καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἀναλωμάτων μεγάλων προσπιπτόντων ἀδύνατοι ἐγένοντο τοῖς χρήμασι. καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν ὑπὸ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον τῶν κατὰ θάλασσαν ἀντὶ τοῦ φόρου τοῖς ὑπηκόοις ἐπέθεσαν, πλείω νομίζοντες ἂν σφίσι χρήματα οὕτω προσιέναι. αἱ μὲν γὰρ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως καὶ πρίν, ἀλλὰ πολλῷ μείζους καθέστα-
33
embarrassment, With a view of increasing her revenues, she altered the principle on which her subject-allies had hitherto been assessed. — She now re- quired from them payment of a duty of
5 p. 6. on all imports and exports by sea.’
85
ς / e / σαν, ὅσῳ καὶ μείξων ὁ πόλεμος ἦν, αἱ δὲ πρόσ-
οδοι ἀπώλλυντο.
Τοὺς οὖν Θρᾷκας τοὺς ὑστερήσαντας, διὰ τὴν παροῦσαν ἀπορίαν τῶν χρημάτων οὐ βουλό- μενοι δαπανᾶν εὐθὺς ἀπέπεμπον, προστάξαντες κομίσαι αὐτοὺς Διει- τρέφει καὶ εἰπόντες ἅμα ἐν τῷ παρά- πλῳ (ἐπορεύ tp δι’ Ἐρίπου)
᾿ ρεύοντο yap δι Εὐρίπου καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους, ἤν τι δύνηται,
τῷ Δημοσθένει
‘The A. placed the Thracian mercenaries under the com- mand of Diitrephés, to conduct them 5 back—with in- structions to do damage to the Beotians, as opportunity might occur.’
e δὲ Μ \ τ /
Ο 0€ ἔς TE THY Lavaypatay 3 7 3 \ e / 3 , ἀπεβίβασεν αὐτοὺς Kal ἁρπαγήν τινα ἐποιήσατο
10
διὰ τάχους, καὶ ἐκ Χαλκίδος τῆς Εὐβοίας ἀφ᾽
«. 4 ’ \ wv \ 3 ,
ἑσπέρας διέπλευσε τὸν Εὔριπον καὶ ἀποβιβάσας
2 \ / » A ? ,
és τὴν Βοιωτίαν ἦγεν αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ Muxadnaocor.-
\ \ 4 \ \ n e /
8 καὶ τὴν μὲν νύκτα λαθὼν πρὸς τῷ ‘Eppaip
ηὐλίσατο (ἀπέχει δὲ τῆς Μυκαλησσοῦ ἑκκαίδεκα 1ς 7 ./ Ψ Ἁ e , A ’
μάλιστα σταδίους), ἅμα δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ πόλει
4, ἐπέθεσαν] ἐποίησαν, MSS.; cor. by Hw., Badham.
1. δύνηται B only ; the rest δύνωνται.
2. re Bonly; the rest omit.—Tdvaypay MSS. ; cor. Cl.
3. ηὐλίσατο B only ; ηὐλίζετο the rest, Hu. D
80 ἀδόκητός τε ἐπέπεσεν αὕτη καὶ δεινή. οἱ δὲ —
90
34
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
προσέκειτο, οὔσῃ οὐ μεγάλῃ, καὶ αἱρεῖ ἀφυλάκ- τοῖς τε ἐπιπεσὼν καὶ ἀπροσδοκήτοις μὴ ἄν ποτέ τινα σφίσιν ἀπὸ θαλάσσης τοσοῦτον érrava- βάντα ἐπιθέσθαι, τοῦ τείχους ἀσθενοῦς ὄντος 530 ’ A καὶ ἔστιν ἦ καὶ πεπτωκότος, τοῦ δὲ βραχέος ὠκοδομημέ ἡ πυλῶν ἅμα διὰ τὴν ἄδεια ¢ μημένουν, Kal πυλῶν ἅμα ” y
4 ‘In his way through the Euripus—he iuarched up some distance from the sea to Mykaléssus.— Not only were all the houses, and even the temples,
lundered—but
he Thracians further mani- raging thirst
ng for blood which seemed inherent - in their race.’
3 3 / ς
ἀνεῳγμένων. ἐσπεσόντες δὲ οἱ
Θρᾷκες ἐς τὴν Μυκαλησσὸν τάς τε
> » \ ς 9 /
οἰκίας καὶ τὰ ἱερὰ ἐπόρθουν καὶ 2
\ 3 , >, / /
τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐφόνευον φειδόμενοι
οὔτε πρεσβυτέρας οὔτε νεωτέρας
ς / 3 ’ὔ Ca Ψ
ἡλικίας, ἀλλὰ πάντας ἑξῆς, ὅτῳ
ἐντύχοιεν, καὶ παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας
κτείνοντες, καὶ προσέτι καὶ ὑποξύγια 30
καὶ ὅσα ἄλλα ἔμψυχα ἴδοιεν. τὸ / \ A A e a
yap γένος [τὸ τῶν Θρᾳκῶν), ὁμοῖα
τοῖς μάλιστα τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ, ἐν ᾧ ἂν θαρσήσῃ, , / ΕΣ \ , ¥ \ 5 hovixwtatov ἐστι. Kal TOTE ἄλλη τε ταραχὴ 3 9 / 2N 7 aA 7 9 / οὐκ ὀλίγη καὶ ἰδέα πᾶσα καθειστήκει ὀλέθρου, 85 3 4 / / ¢ καὶ ἐπιπεσόντες διδασκαλείῳ παίδων, ὅπερ “ μέγιστον ἦν αὐτόθι καὶ ἄρτι ἔτυχον ot παῖδες ἐσεληλυθότες, κατέκοψαν πάντας" καὶ ξυμφορὰ a 4 a a τῇ πόλει πάσῃ, οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων, μᾶλλον ἑτέρας
‘The succour brought from The bes—arrived only in time to avenge, not to
Θηβαῖοι αἰσθόμενοι ἐβοήθουν, καὶ καταλαβόντες προκεχωρηκότας ἤδη 4 “ > \ 4 f τοὺς Θρᾷκας ov πολὺ τήν τε λείαν
3. οὐ B only; the rest οὔ. ---τινρα. . ἐπαναβάντας Μ. 4, [τὸ τῶν Θρᾳκῶ»] Sta. ; τὸ om. Β. . ὅ. καθεστήκει Μ.
1. Θρᾶκας προκεχωρηκότας Μ.
ge
~
EYITPA®HS Z (29—31) 35
\ , in- ἀφείλοντο καὶ αὐτοὺς φοβήσαντες Mya ὅδ ἴα δ
καταδιώκουσιν ἐπὶ [τὸν Εὔριπον καὶ] τὴν θάλασ-
2 σαν, οὗ αὐτοῖς τὰ πλοῖα ἃ ἤγαγεν ὥρμει. καὶ ἀποκτείνουσιν αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ ἐσβάσει τοὺς πλεί- στους, οὔτε ἐπισταμένους νεῖν, τῶν τε ἐν τοῖς
, ε es 3 a ~ ¢ / 4 πλοίοις, ὡς ἑώρων τὰ ἐν TH γῇ, ὁρμισάντων ἔξω 10 , “A 3 ‘ Ν) a ¥ τοξεύματος τὰ πλοῖα, ἐπεὶ ἔν ye TH ἄλλῃ ἀναχωρήσει οὐκ ἀτόπως οἱ Θρᾷκες πρὸς τὸ τῶν Θηβαίων ἱππικόν, ὅπερ πρῶτον προσέκειτο, ͵ προεκθέοντές τε καὶ ξυστρεφομενοι ἐν ἐπιχωρίῳ , \ \ 3 Le] 3 f 3 A τάξει τὴν φυλακὴν ἐποιοῦντο, καὶ ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν 15 ἐν τούτῳ διεφθάρησαν. μέρος δέ τι καὶ ἐν τῇ , aA > e δ , 3 , πόλει αὐτῇ du ἁρπαγὴν ἐγκαταληφθὲν ἀπώλετο. e 4 A fa’ 4 ot δὲ ξύμπαντες τῶν Θρᾳκῶν πεντήκοντα καὶ 3 3 διακόσιοι ἀπὸ τριακοσίων καὶ χιλίων ἀπέθανον. 8 διέφθειραν δὲ καὶ τῶν Θηβαίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 20 4 3 4 e ἤ οἱ ξυνεβοήθησαν ἐς εἴκοσι μάλιστα ἱππέας τε ς ld € A A “Ὁ καὶ ὁπλίτας ὁμοῦ καὶ Θηβαίων τῶν βοιωταρχῶν Σκιρφώνδαν: τῶν δὲ Μυκαλησσίων μέρος τι 4 ἀπανηλώθη τὰ μὲν κατὰ τὴν ‘This scene was Ἢ , , novel and revolt- Μυκαλησσὸν πάθει χρησαμένην ing.’ 3 Ἁ e ? ; a Ἁ “ οὐδενὸς ὡς ἐπὶ μεγέθει τῶν κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον σσον ὀλοφύρασθαι ἀξίῳ τοιαῦτα ξυνέβη. ‘O δὲ Δημοσθένης τότε ἀποπλέων ert τῆς Κερκύρας μετὰ τὴν ἐκ τῆς Λακωνικῆς τείχισιν,
25
1. [καὶ τὴν θ.1 Badham, Hw., Hu. ; [τὸν Εὔριπον καὶ] Sta. 2. τοξεύματος Valla; τοῦ ζεύματος B; τοῦ ζεύγματος CAEFM. -- προσεκθέοντες M.—re B only ; the rest omit.—ovorpepduevor AEFM. 3. ἱππέας μάλιστα M.—re om. M. 4. χρησαμένην Reiske, for MSS. χρησαμένων. 81 11. ἐπὶ B only; the rest ἐκ.
wo
36 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
e e A A
ὁλκάδα ὁρμοῦσαν ἐν Ded τῇ ᾿Ηλείων εὑρών, ἐν e a
ἡ οἱ Κορίνθιοι ὁπλῖται: ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν ἔμελλον
περαιοῦσθαι, αὐτὴν μὲν διαφθείρει, οἱ δ᾽ ἄνδρες 5
ἀποφυγόντες. ὕστερον λαβόντες ἄ ἄλλην ἔπλεον. wy
2, καὶ μετὰ τοῦτο ἀφικόμενος ὁ Δημοσθένης “és ἣν
Ζάκυνθον καὶ Κεφαλληνίαν ὁπλίτας τε παρέ-
“ Demosth. pro- ceeded to Zakynthus and Kephallenia— and to Anak- torium.—It was here that he was met by Eury- medon—who was returning to act as colleague to D. The news brou ht by Eur. is- conraging. Yet the two admirals were under the necessity of sparing ten triremes to rein-
force Konon at .
Naupaktus.’
νεῖται
δὲ καὶ Ναυπάκτου, ἀγγέλλων ὅτι αἱ νῆες τῶν Κορινθίων αἱ σφίσ οὔτε κατρκνοῦσι ~ ° τὸν πόλεμον
λαβε καὶ ἐκ τῆς Ναυπάκτου τῶν Μεσσηνίων μετεπέμψατο, καὶ ἀντυπέρας ἥπειρον τῆς ᾿Ακαρνανίας διέβη, "és ᾿Αλύξειάν τε καὶ ᾿λνακ- τόριον, ὃ αὐτοὶ εἶχον. ὄντι, δ᾽ αὐτῷ
A 9 , Nag one περὶ ταῦτα “ὁ Εὐρυμέδων ἀπαντᾷ. ἐκ
ἣν τὸ
τῆς Σικελίας ἀποπλέων, ὃ ὃς τότε᾽ τοῦ 15
χειμῶνος τὰ χρήματα ᾿ἄγων τῇ στρατιᾷ ἀπεπέμφθη, καὶ ἀγγέλλέι
τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ὅτι πύθοιτο κατὰ
πλοῦν ἤδη ὧν τὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων Κόνων παρ᾽
/ EANWKOS. ‘ 4
αὐτούς,
3
ἀφικ- A a° ὃς ἦρχε πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι
ἀνθορμοῦσαι / ναυμαχεῖν τε
μέλλουσι" πέμπειν ‘ody ἐκέλευεν αὐτοὺς ναῦς, ὡς
οὐχ
1. εὑρὼν B only ; the rest omit.
. sod ἱκανὰς ἑαυτῶν πρὸς τὰς ἐκείνων aévres Kat
οὔσας ᾿ δυοῖν δεούσας εἴκοσι τὰς
εἴκοσι
ἵἽ
4, καταλύουσι τὸν πόλεμον MSS. ; Madvig, Sta., Hu. bracket
Tov πόλεμον ;
πουσι τὸν πορθμόν ; Naber καταλύουσι τὸν σταθμόν ; πλοῦν ; Meineke καταπαύουσι. ἐσπλεῖν αὐτούς"
Hw. καταλύουσι τὴν φυλακήν : Badham καταλεί-
Herbst τὸν
Cf. ἢ. 94 ἐνόμιζον. . ὅσον οὐκ
ὅπερ ἄν, εἰ ἐβουλήθησαν μὴ κατοκνῆσαι, ῥᾳδίως ἂν
ἐγένετο. ---δὲ οὔσαις Μ.---τὰς ἑαυτῶν B only ; the rest ταῖς é.
Πλημμύριον ὑπὸ ᾿
SYTTPA®HS Z (31—32) 37
5 ναυμαχεῖν. τῷ μὲν οὖν Κόνωνι δέκα ναῦς ὁ Δημοσθένης καὶ ὁ Ἐὐρυμέδων τὰς ἄριστα σφίσι πλεούσας ἀφ᾽ ὧν αὐτοὶ εἶχον ἔμπουσι πρὸς 30 τὰς ἐν τῇ Ναυπάκτῳ" αὐτοὶ δὲ τὰ περὶ τῆς στρατιᾶς τὸν ξύλλογον ἡτοιμάξοντθ" Εὐρυμέδων μὲν ἐς τὴν Κέρκυραν πλεύσας καὶ πεντεκαίδεκά τε ναῦς πληροῦν κελεύσας αὐτοὺς καὶ ὁπλίτας eee (ξυνῆρχε γὰρ ἤδη Δημοσθένει 35
oTpaTrouevos ὥσπερ καὶ ἡἠρέθη), Δημοσθένης δῦ τα εκ τῶν Se ty ᾿Ακαρνανίαν χωρίων σφεν- δονήτας τε καὶ ἀκοντιστὰς ξυγαγείρων. 982 Οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν Συρακουσῶν τότε μετὰ τὴν τοῦ ἸΪλημμυρίον ἅλωσιν πρέσβεις ‘The envoys
[see 6. 25 § 9]
3 4 4 \ la 4 \ olyouevot ἐς τὰ ὄλεις ἐπειδὴ Ἀδὰ found them- ‘x μ 5 5 ω“ 5 7 selves almost
ἔπεισάν τε καὶ ξυναγείραντες ἔμελλον everywhere well
, oe , received.—But ἄξειν τὸν στρατόν, ὁ Νικίας προπυθό- part of their δ , , A a , scheme was μενος πέμπει ἐς τῶν Σικελῶν τοὺς frustrated by N. -- e
\ Φ τὴν δίοδον ἔχοντας καὶ σφίσι Evp- tribes —were pre- . val μάχους, Κεντόριπάς te καὶ ᾿Αλικυαί- attack the
approaching
,
ovs καὶ ἄλλους, ὅπως μὴ διαφρή- enemy. σωσι τοὺς πολεμίους, ἀλλὰ ξυστραφέντες κωλύ- τὸ σωσι διελθεῖν: ἄλλῃ γὰρ αὐτοὺς οὐδὲ πειρά- δῇ 3 ? A σειν" ᾿Ακῥαγαντῖνοι γὰρ οὐκ ἐδίδοσαν διὰ 2 τῆς ἑαυτῶν ὁδόν. πορευομένων δ᾽ ἤδη τῶν Σικελιωτῶν οἱ Σικελοί, καθάπερ ἐδέοντο οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἐνέδραν τινὰ [τριχῇ] ποιησάμενοι, 15
5. ἀρίστας Μ.
382 1. τοῦ om. Μ.---σφίσι om. ΜΤ. ---διαφρήσωσι] διαφήσωσι CM ; ,διαφήσουσι BAEFG; διαφρήσουσι Dobree.—xwrtowor CMT ; κωλύσουσι BAEF.
2. τριχῇ om. M; rwaom. B; τριχῆι τινὰ T.
33
38 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
ἀφυλάκτοις τε “καὶ ἐξαίφνης ἐπιγενόμενοι διέφ- θειραν ἐς ὀκτακοσίους μάλιστα καὶ τοὺς πρέσ- βεις πλὴν ἑνὸς τοῦ Κορινθίου πάντας" οὗτος δὲ τοὺς διαφυγόντας ἐς πεντακοσίους καὶ χιλίους ἐκόμισεν ἐς τὰς Συρακούσας. 20 Kai περὶ tas αὐτὰς ἡμέρας καὶ οἱ Kapa- ‘The Greek ριναῖοι ἀφικνοῦνται αὐτοῖς βοηθοῦν-
The Greek ; ee οἶνος aa de TES, πεντακόσιοι μὲν ὁπλῖται, τρια-
,ἅὄ t βου μα Ὁ kocvoL δὲ ἀκοντισταὶ καὶ τοξόται ’ ᾿ ς Katana), re- τριακόσιοι. ἔπεμψαν δὲ καὶ οἱ 5 a S A the winning © Γελῷοι ναυτικὸν τε és πέντε vais
cause. καὶ ἀκοντιστὰς τετρακοσίους καὶ
2 ἱππέας διακοσίους. σχεδὸν γάρ τι ἤδη πᾶσα
ἡ Σικελία, πλὴν ᾿Ακραγαντίνων (οὗτοι δ᾽ οὐδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων ἧσαν), οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ἐπὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναΐ- 10 ous μετὰ τῶν Συρακοσίων οἱ πρότερον περιορώ- μενοι ξυστάντες ἐβοήθουν.
Καὶ οἱ μὲν Συρακύσιοι, ὧς αὐτοῖς τὸ ἐν τοῖς Σικελοῖς πάθος ἐγένετο, ἐπέσχον τὸ εὐθέως τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐπιχειρεῖν" ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης καὶ 15 ‘Demosth. had Εἰὐρυμέδων, ἑτοίμης ἤδη τῆς στρατιᾶς
crossed the ¥ 9 a 7 > δ a
Ionian sea—and οὔσης ἐκ τῆς Κερκύρας καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς
Thorii. | Here ἠπείρου, ἐπεραιώθησαν ξυμπάσῃ τῇ [ Me a 3
self cordially στρατιᾷ τὸν Ἰόνιον ἐπ᾽ ἄκραν Ἰαπυ-
welcomed ; for é
4 the philo-Athen- γίαν: καὶ ὁρμηθέντες αὐτόθεν κατ- 20
99
ian party was in full ascendency.” ἔσχουσιν ἐς τὰς Χοιράδας νήσους
3 / } 2 ΄“- Δ a Ἶ ’ Ιαπ υγίας, Καὶ AKOVTLOTaAS TE τινᾶς [τῶν aT U-
8. ἐπέσχον τὸ CM ; ἐπέσχον, τὸ, T; ἐπέσχοντο the rest.—évy πάσῃ Ν. ---Ἰώνιον Μ. 4. [τῶν ᾿Ιαπύγων] Hw., Sta.
“May, 4185... ἘΎΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z (32—34) ; 39
yov| πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν τοῦ Μεσσαπίου ἔθνους ἀναβιβάξονται ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς, καὶ τῷ "Apta, ὅσπερ καὶ τοὺς ἀκοντιστὰς δυνάστης ὧν 35 παρέσχεν αὐτοῖς, ἀνανεωσάμενοί τινα παλαιὰν φιλίαν, ἀφικνοῦνται ἐς Μεταπόντιον τῆς ᾽Ἶτα- 5 λίας. καὶ τοὺς Μεταποντίους πείσαντες κατὰ τὸ ξυμμαχικὸν ἀκοντιστάς τε ξυμπέμπειν τριακο- σίους καὶ τριήρεις δύο καὶ ἀναλαβόντες ταῦτα 90 παρέπλευσαν ἐς Θουρίαν. καὶ καταλαμβάνουσι νεωστὶ στάσει τοὺς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐναντίους 6 ἐκπεπτωκότας: καὶ βουλόμενοι τὴν στρατιὰν αὐτόθε πᾶσαν ἁθροίσαντες εἴ τις ὑπελέλειπτο ἐξετάσαι, καὶ τοὺς Θουρίους πεῖσαι σφίσι ἕξυ- 85 στρατεύειν τε ὡς προθυμότατα καί, ἐπειδήπερ ἐν τούτῳ τύχης εἰσί, τοὺς αὐτοὺς ἐχθροὺς καὶ φίλους τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις νομίζειν, περιέμενον ἐν τῇ Θουρίᾳ καὶ ἔπρασσον ταῦτα. 84 Οἱ δὲ Πελοποννήσιοι περὶ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον τοῦτον ἢ οἱ ἐν ταῖς πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι. + yeanwhile the
» ry e fo! h f th ναυσίν, οἵπερ τῶν ὁλκάδων ἕνεκα τῆς Gor uit again
és Σικελίαν κομιδῆς ἀνθώρμουν πρὸς Pecame we.)
τὰς ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ vais, παρασκευα- (one iook κα
/ - e ? \ up its station on σάμενοι ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίᾳ καὶ προσ- τ coast of , A -- πληρώσαντες ἔτι ναῦς, ὥστε ὀλίγῳ Ae Alter ἐλάσσους εἶναι αὐτοῖς τῶν ᾿Αττικῶν ἴδιαν, ihe Cor. ra) e A νεῶν, opulfovrar κατὰ “Epivedy τῆς Ptack, the 2°Ayalas ἐν τῇ Ῥυπικῇ. καὶ αὐτοῖς Ranta, 10 4. ὥσπερ Μ. 5. πέμπειν ξυνπέμπειν Μ. 84. 1. περὶ Β only; the rest καὶ οἱ περὶ.
3
4
5
6
40. GOYKYAIAOY
thought itself a / a. ἊΝ Δι» 4 entitled to erect TOD χωρίου μηνοειδοῦς ὄντος ἐφ᾽ ᾧ
δ trophy.’ ὥρμουν, ὁ μὲν πεζὸς ἑκατέρωθεν προσβεβοηθηκὼς τῶν τε Κορινθίων καὶ τῶν αὐτόθεν ξυμμάχων ἐπὶ ταῖς ἀνεχούσαις ἄκραις παρετέτακτο, αἱ δὲ νῆες τὸ μεταξὺ εἶχον ἐμφράξ- 15 ασαι' ἦρχε δὲ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ Πολυάνθης ἸΚορίν- θιος. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκ τῆς Ναυπάκτου τριά- κοντα ναυσὶ καὶ τρισίν (ἦρχε δὲ αὐτῶν Δίφιλος) ἐπέπλευσαν αὐτοῖς. καὶ οἱ Κορίνθιοι τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἡσύχαζον, ἔπειτα ἀρθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ 30 σημείου, ἐπεὶ καιρὸς ἐδόκει εἶναι, ὥρμησαν ἐπὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ ἐναυμάχουν. καὶ χρόνον ἀντεῖχον πολὺν ἀλλήλοις. καὶ τῶν μὲν Κοριν- θίων τρεῖς νῆες διαφθείρονται, τῶν δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων κατέδυ μὲν οὐδεμία ἁπλῶς, ἑπτὰ δέ tives ἄπλοι 36 ἐγένοντο, ἀντίπρῳροι ἐμβαλλόμεναι καὶ ἀναρρα- “The captains of γεῖσαι τὰς παρεξειρεσίας ὑπὸ τῶν
. A ᾽ Ν fe) folly ware arn’ Κορινθίων νεῶν ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸ τοῦτο παχυ-
ota etic πέρας τὰς ἐπωτίδας ἐχουσῶν. ναυ-
͵ \ had modifed the μαχήσαντες δὲ ἀντίπαλα μὲν καὶ os 30
Corer ner a. αὐτοὺς ἑκατέρους ἀξιοῦν νικᾶν, ὅμως ingly. δὲ τῶν ναυαγίων κρατησάντων τῶν 3 7 \ mn > ff 54 ‘2 A Αθηναίων διά τε τὴν τοῦ ἀνέμου ἄπωσιν αὐτῶν ἐς τὸ πέλαγος καὶ διὰ τὴν τῶν Κορινθίων οὐκέτι ἐπαναγωγήν, διεκρίθησαν ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων, καὶ δίωξις 35 3 / > / »Q> ν 3 ’ ς οὐδεμία ἐγένετο, οὐδ᾽ ἄνδρες οὐδετέρων ἑάλωσαν" e \ \ / 4 \ οἱ μὲν yap Κορίνθιοι καὶ Πελοποννήσιοι πρὸς τῇ γῇ ναυμαχοῦντες ῥᾳδίως διεσῴζοντο, τῶν δὲ
2. προσβεβοηθηκὼς B only ; the rest προσβεβοηθηκότες. 5. ἀναρριγεῖσαι Μ.---τῶν before Κορινθίων om. M. 6. ῥᾳδίως B only ; the rest καὶ.
7
SYTEPASHS Z (34—35) Δ
A / ᾿Αθηναίων οὐδεμία κατέδυ ναῦς. ἀποπλευσάντων δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐς τὴν Ναύπακτον οἱ Κορίνθιοι εὐθὺς τροπαῖον ἔστησαν ὡς νικῶντες, ὅτι πλείους
a A , τῶν ἐναντίων ναῦς ἄπλους ἐποίησαν, καὶ vopi-
35
σαντες αὐτοὶ οὐχ ἡσσᾶσθαι δι’ ὅπερ οὐδ᾽ οἱ ἕτεροι νικᾶν" οἵ τε γὰρ Κορίνθιοι ἡγήσαντο κρατεῖν εἰ μὴ καὶ πολὺ ἐκρατοῦντο, «The real feeling οἵ τ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐνόμιζον ἡσσᾶσθαι fronae οα ὅτι οὐ πολὺ ἐνίκων. ἀποπλευσάν- Forinthsand των δὲ τῶν Πελοποννησίων καὶ τοῦ ‘Be side of A. πεζοῦ διαλυθέντος οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἔστησαν τρο- παῖον καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν τῇ ᾿Αχαΐᾳ ὡς νικήσαντες, ἀπέχον τοῦ "Epwveod, ἐν ᾧ οἱ Κορίνθιοι ὥρμουν, ὡς εἴκοσι σταδίους. καὶ ἡ μὲν ναυμαχία οὕτως ἐτελεύτα. ) :
Ὃ δὲ Δημοσθένης καὶ Εὐρυμέδων, ἐπειδὴ
, a , ξυστρατεύειν αὐτοῖς οἱ Θούριοι Tape-—Thurii equipped a force
€ / 42.--“κενάσθησαν ἑπτακοσίοις μὲν ὁπλί- of roo hoplites
ταῖς, τριακοσίοις δὲ ἀκοντισταῖς, τὰς faconpary”
μὲν ναῦς παραπλεῖν ἐκέλευον ἐπὶ Demosth. _ , > . , ‘Kroton forbade τῆς Κροτωνιάτιδος, αὐτοὶ δὲ τὸν the access to
\ , 5 ͵ A their territory : πεζὸν πάντα ἐξετάσαντες πρῶτον upon which he 3 aA ͵ a Ὁ \ got on ship- ἐπὶ τῷ Συβάρει ποταμῷ ἤγον διὰ board, and pur-
. ‘ sued his voyage
2 τῆς Θουριάδος γῆς. καὶ ὡς ἐγένοντο southward.’
85
2. δ ae fal > a e fal
ἐπὶ τῷ Ὑλίᾳ ποταμῷ, καὶ αὐτοῖς οἱ Κροτωνιᾶται
προσπέμψαντες εἶπον οὐκ ἂν σφίσι βουλομένοις 7. αὐτοὶ Cl., Sta., Hw., Sitz. ; αὐτὸ B; the rest &¢ αὐτό.----
ἡττᾶσθαι M.—xal before πολὺ B only; the rest omit.—é8re οὐ with B only, Cl., Sta. (ed. ster.), Hw., Bh., Sitz. ; the rest εἰ μὴ. ᾿
8. ξυμμαχία M.
2, κροτωνιάται BAEFGT ; xporwviarai (sic) CM.
40
45
a
10
42 ᾿ς ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ͂
A fo} A N Ἁ 3 3 εἶναι διὰ τῆς γῆς σφῶν τὸν στρατὸν ἰέναι, ἐπι- καταβάντες ηὐλίσαντο πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ τὴν ἐκβολὴν τοῦ Ὑλίον: καὶ αἱ νῆες αὐτοῖς ἐς
\ > \ 3 4 ᾿ A > ε ’ 3 ’ τὸ αὐτὸ ἀπήντων. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἀναβιβασά- 15 μενοι παρέπλεον, ἴσχοντες πρὸς ταῖς πόλεσι πλὴν Λοκρῶν, ἕως ἀφίκοντο ἐπὶ Πέτραν τῆς ε [4
Ῥηγίνης. ,
86 Of δὲ Συρακόσιοι ἐν τούτῳ πυνθανόμενοι > A \ 3 “Ὁ \ 3 αὐτῶν τὸν ἐπίπλουν avers ταῖς, ναυσὶν ἀπο-
ς a 3 ’ A Ν “Phe captains of πειρᾶσαι ἐβούλοντο καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ
Syr. altered tho 5. ποῦ πεζοῦ, fueto ἃ construction of παραᾶσκε τοῦ recto νπερ ἐπ their triremes :— ps v7 7 "» ἢ ρ they shortened αὐτὸ τοῦτο πρὶν ἐλθεῖν αὐτοὺς φθά- 5 the prow, but ye
2 made it heavy | t βουλόμενοι ξυνέλεγον. παρ- nozzles were = nevdoawre δὲ τό τε ἄλλο ναυτικὴν made peculiarly
thick—and pro- ὡς ἐκ. τῆς προτέρας ναυμαχίας τι they served to πλέον νεῖδον σχήσοντες, καὶ τὰς enemy.’ πρῴρας τῶν. γεῶν ξυντεμόντες ἐς τὸ ἔλασσον στεριφωτέρας ἐποίησαν, καὶ τὰς ἐπωτίδας ἐπέθεσαν ταῖς πρῴραις παχείας, καὶ ἀντήριδας ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν. ὑπέτειναν πρὸς τοὺς τοίχους ους ὡς ἐπὶ a πήχεις ἧς, ἐντός τε καὶ ἔξωθεν" | ὅπερ τρόπῳ καὶ οἱ Κορίνθιοι πρὸς τὰς ἐν τῇ τὸ Ναυπάξτῳ vais’ ἐπισκευασάμενοι πρῴραθεν ἐ ἐναυ-
8 μάχουν. ἐνόμισαν yap p οἱ “Συραζδστοι" πρὸς τὰς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ναῦς οὐχ ὁμοίως ἀντινεναυπηγη- “" fd μένας, ἀλχὰ λεπτὰ τὰ πρῴραϑεν ἐχούσας δ ἐς το μὴ ἀντιπρῴροις μᾶλλον αὐτοὺς ἢ ἐκ περίπλου 2
᾿ / 86 22. rod τείχους M. 8. ἀντὶ νεναυπηγημένας Μ.---ἀντιπρώροις γὰρ Reiske, and most edd., for MSS. ἀντίπρωροι yap.
, . BYTTPA®H® Z (35—36) 43
ταῖς ἐμβολαῖς χρῆσθαι, οὐκ ἔλασσον σχήσειν, ἐν. A
καὶ τὴν ἐν τῷ μεγάλῳ λιμένι ναυμαχίαν, οὐκ ἐν
πολλῷ πολλαῖς ναυσὶν οὖσαν, πρὸς ἑαυτῶν
ἔσεσθαι" ἀντιπρῴροις γὰρ ταῖς ἐμβολαῖς χρώ-
μενοι ἀναρρήξειν᾽ τὰ πρῴραθεν αὐτοῖς, στερίφοις 2% wep a a
Kal παχέσι pos Kotha gal ἀσθενῆ παίοντες Tors
* , a \’ fat ort ~ >
4 ἐμβόλοιζ, τοῖς. δὲ Αθηναίοις οὐκ «The Α. were
Ν ] ἔσεσθαι σφῶν ἐν στενοχωρίᾳ οὔτε Cooper NP cose.
. i i περίπλουν οὔτε διέκπλουν, ᾧπερ τῆς so that they
τέχνηξ μάλιστα ἐπίστευον αὐτοὶ του τοὶ ΡΟ 80 γὰρ κατὰ τὸ δυνατὸν τὸ μὲν οὐ oOaki Cher back δώσειν διέκπλουν, τὸ δὲ τὴν στενο- thos durer met . χωρίαν κωλύσειν ὥστε μὴ περιπλεῖν. Comenesrshore. ὅ τῇ τε πρότερον ἀμαθίᾳ τῶν κυβερνητῶν δοκούσῃ ᾿ a e halt ~ ’ εἶναι, τῷ ἀντίπρῳρ ν ξυγκρόῦσαι, μάλιστ ἂν ss . a f +A dvrol χρήσασθαι᾽ πλεῖστον yap ἐν αὐτῷ σχήσειν᾽ τὴν γὰρ Ran κεν yn ἔσεσθαι τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐξωθουμέκροις ἄλλοδε ἢ ἐς τὴν γῆν, ‘+ > mE Ny Woe. 5, , 2 γν καὶ ταύτην ε δι᾿ ὀλύγου καὶ ἐς ὀλίγον, KAT αὐτὸ δ τὸ στρατόπέδον τὸ ἑαυτῶν: τοῦ δ᾽ ἄλλου 40 λιμένος αὐτοὶ κρατήσειν, καὶ ξυμφερομένους αὐτούς, ἤν πη βιάξωνται, ἐς ὀλίγον τε καὶ Ww, ’ \ > » δ 9 , πάντας ἐς τὸ αὐτό, προσπίπτοντας ἀλλήλοις , ,.. a... ” ° , \ ταράξεσθαι" ὅπερ καὶ ἔβλαπτε μάλιστα τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἐν ἁπάσαις ταῖς ναυμαχίαις, οὐκ 45 8. παίοντες B only ; the rest.rapéxovres ; προσέχοντες Hu. 4. διέκπλουν B only; the rest διεκπλεῖν ; [dcexrdetv] and [ὥστε μὴ περιπλεῖν] Cobet, Sta., Hw., Hu. δ. τῷ for MSS. τὸ (τὸν AF) Kr., Cl., Hw., Sitz.—dvrlapwpous T ; ἀντίπρῳροι Kr. ; εἶναι ἀντιπρώρῳ ξυγκρούσει Sta. ; εἶναι és τὸ ἀντίπρῳρον ξυγκρούσει Madvig.—ovyxpovoa: MT; συγκρούσει AEF ; ξυγκρούσει CG.
44 - BOYKYAIAOY
a a “ἢ οὔσης αὐτοῖς ἐς πάντα τὸν λιμένα τῆς ἀνακρού- - ae A e fal \ σεως, ὥσπερ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις" περιπλεῦσαι δὲ
\ - , (The Syr. relied ἐς τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν, σφῶν ἐχόντων
οἱ ὑπο πβττου. γὴν ἀχίπλευσιν ἀπὸ Fou πελάγους
, ‘ 3 / space. τε καὶ ἀνάκρηυσιν, ov δυνήσεσθαι 50 > sf γγ- = “ 77 αὐτούς, ἄλλως τε Kal τοῦ ἸΪλημμυρίου πολεμίου τε αὐτοῖς ἐσομένου καὶ τοῦ στόματος οὐ μεγάλον ὄντος τοῦ λιμένος. 37 T a ε > t \ \ € a οἰαῦτα of Συρακόσιοι πρὸς, τὴν ἑαυτῶν
‘Their land fores ἐπιστήμην τε καὶ δύναμιν ἐπινοή- was marched ou ; A under G. to σαντες, Kal ἅμα τεθαρσηκότες μᾶλλον eaten one ᾿ ‘sideofthe A. ἤδη ἀπὸ τῆς προτέρας ναυμαχίας lines, while the 7 Ἶ ΞΞ5 τὴ ᾿ ρ ρα . μ x" Μ᾿ cavalry and the ἐπεχείρουν Τῷ TE πεξῷ apa καὶ ταῖς 5 Trison Ο e . ° 2diym. marched ναυσί, καὶ τὸν μὲν πεζὸν ὀλίγῳ up to the other , ᾿ς 9 κα -. Se es side.’ πρότερον TOV ἐκ τῆς πόλεως; Tur ὑπ-
πος προεξαγὰγὼν προσῆγε τῷ τείχει TOV 4 7 = 3 ef A / Ν 5 a ᾿Αθηναίων, “καθ᾽ ὅσον Πρὸς τὴν πόλιν αὐτοῦ
. . - ᾿ f e ~ ἑώρα᾽ καὶ οἱ ἀπὸ Τοῦ Ολυμπιείου, οἵ τε ὁπλῖται 10 ὅσοι ἐκεῖ ἦσαν καὶ οἱ ἱππῆς καὶ ἡ γυμνητεία τῶν
a ~ a . Συρακοσίων ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ θάτερα προσήει τῷ τείχει αἱ δὲ νῆες peta τοῦτο εὐθὺς ἐπεξέπλεον τῶν Hes μὲτᾷ τοῦτο εὐθὺς a yee - y ’ e 9 a 8 Συρακοσίων καὶ ξυμμάχων. καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
ὸ Δ τοὺς οἰόμενοι τῷ πεζῷ 15 ‘The A. when Τὸ πρῶτον αὐτοὺς οἰόμενοι τῷ ¢
th h / 4 ΄, . . Q Sip flestenling μόνῳ πειράφειν, ὁρῶντες, δὲ καὶ τὰς
nr Β - - ἃ . sction went Lads ἐπιφερομένας ‘ave, , ; eDopy-
coe the Θρῦνγο, καὶ of μὲν͵ ἐπὶ τὰ ἀξίχη καὶ
\ 6. λιμένα κρούσεως M. 37 ἽΣ1. τεθαρρηκότες M. 2. τὸν after πρότερον om. M.—obre for of τε Ν..---ἐπεξέπλεον B only ; the rest ἐξέπλεον. | 3. ἄφνωι M.
EYITPA®HS Z (36—38) 45
πρὸ τῶν τειχῶν τοῖς προσιοῦσιν ἀν χρέα akin
ἀντιπαρετάσσοντο, οἱ δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ™*>’ 80 ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ὀλυμπιείου καὶ τῶν ἔξω κατὰ τάχος χωροῦντας ἱππέας τε πολλοὺς καὶ ἀκοντιστὰς ἀντέπεξῇσαν, ἄλλοι δὲ τὰς ναῦς ἐπλήρουν, καὶ ἅμα ἐπὶ τὸν aiy αλὸν , ταρεβοήθουν, καὶ ἐπειδὴ πλήρεις ἦσαν av γον πέντε καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα 25 ναῦς" καὶ" τῶν tg πᾶτε, ἦσαν ὀγδοήκοντα 98 μάλιστα. κε} δὲ ἡμέ épas ἐπὶ πολὺ προσπλέοντες καὶ ἀνακρονυόμενοι [eal] πειράσαντες ἀλλήλων καὶ οὐδέτεροι δυνάμενοι ἄξων τι τι λόγου παραλα- βεῖν, εἰ μὴ ναῦν flav ἢ δύο τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οἱ Συρακόσιοι καταδύσαντες, διεκ :κρίθησαν" καὶ ὃ 5 πεζὸς ἅ ἅμα ἀπὸ τῶν τειχῶν ἀπῆλθε. 2 “Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι ἡσύχαζον, οὐδὲν δηλοῦντες ὁποῖόν τι τὸ μέλλον «Tough on the
ποιήσουσιν" ὁ δὲ Νικίας ἰδὼν ἀντί- Bex mate no
“παλα τὰ τῆς ναυμαχίας ᾿γενόμενα Novement, yet 19 καὶ ἐλπίζων αὐτοὺς αὖθις ἐπιχειρή- to repair ebat
damage his ship σξίν, τούς τε τριηράρχους ἠνάγκαξεν had sustained ;
and even took ἐπισκευάξειν τὰς ναῦς, εἴ τίς Tl the precaution
of further secur-
ἐπεζοκεὶ, καὶ ὁλκάδας προ ὥρμισε ino his naval
πρὸ τ σφετέρου "ς “σταυρώματος, ὃ, Station.
αὐτοῖς πρὸ τῶν νεῶν ἀντὶ λιμένος κλῃστοῦ ἐν 8 τῇ θαλάσσῃ ἐπεπήγει. ᾿ διαλειπούσας δὲ τὰς ὁλκάδας ὅσον δύο πλέθρα ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων κατέ- στησεν, ὅπως, εἴ τις βιάξοιτο ναῦς, εἴη κατά-
15
3. dyrerapardacovro M.—ol δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι M.
38 1. [καὶ] Cl., Sta., Bh., Hw., Hu., Sitz. 2. τι after τίς om. Μ. ---προώρμησε Μ. ---κλειστοῦ M. ὃ. διαλιπούσας M. ᾿
46 | COYKYAIAOY
φευξις ἀσφαλὴς καὶ πάλιν καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν ἔκπλους. 20 παρασκευαζόμενοι δὲ ταῦτα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν διετέλεσαν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι μέχρι νυκτός.
890 Ἐ) δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ Συρακόσιοι τῆς μὲν ὥρας ‘Nextday— πρῴτερον; δὲ ἐπιχειρήσει τῇ ἀν Πρ αὐτῇ Tod γέ πεζοῦ καὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ
τα προσέμμόγον τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, καὶ the Ser, length ἀνχικατάαστάντες ταῖς ναυσὶ τὸν δ
ἊΝ fhe city The αὐτὸν tporrov αὖθις ἐπὶ πολὺ διῆγον
Α.---28δ8ὐρροβίηρ a ef , 3 , . thedaredaty τῆς ἡμέρας πειρώμενοι ἀλλήλων,
atanendt’ πρὶν δὴ ᾿Αρίστων ὁ Πυρρίχου Kop- ΟΥ̓ ΣῊ ΩΝ ίνθιος, ἄριστος ὧν κυβερνήτης τῶν they wee pera Συρακοσίων, ποίθει ᾿ τρὺς 10 Se ee feet σφετέρους τοῦ ναυτικοῦ ἄρχοντας, sailing back.— πέμψαντας ὡς τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει The skirmishing ἐπιμελομένους, κελεύειν ὅτι τάχιστα again com: 5 τὴν ἀγορὰν τῶν πωλουμένων παρὰ the A captains” τὴν θάλασσαν μεταστῆσαι κομί- 15
the action ‘ow ” Ὁ ὦ feneral. το σαντας, καὶ ὅσα τις ἔχει ἐδώδιμα, general victory ith ted eh Sa ἢ
Brthe Syr. Was yras ἐκεῖσε φέροντας ἀναγκάσαι
complete.’ πωλεῖν, ὅπως avreis ἐκβιβάσαντες τοὺς ναύτας εὐθὺς παρὰ τὰς ναῦς ἀριστοποιή- 9 . σωνται, καὶ δι’ ὀλίγον αὖθις καὶ αὖ δημερὸν 20 40 ἀπροσδοκήτοις τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐπιχειρῶσι. καὶ ee e \ / ΝΜ # e of μὲν πεισθέντες ἔπεμψαν ἄγγελον, καὶ ἡ ἀγορὰ παρεσκενάσθη, καὶ οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐξαίφ- yns πρύμναν κρουσάμενοκ πάλιν πρὸς τὴν ---- .
39 1. πρότερον all but B, which has πρωΐτερον 4 τὸ πρότερον. 2. μὲν for μετὰ Μ. --- ἀριστοποιήσωντα, Μ᾿; ἄριστον ποιήσωνται Β ; the rest ἀριστοποιήσονται. ---αὖθις καὶ twice Μ.
EYTTPA®H®. Z (38—41) 47
πόλιν ὄπλευσαν, καὶ εὐθὺς ἐκβάντες αὐτοῦ
2 ἄριστον ἐποιοῦντο" οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι νομίσαντες
αὐτοὺς ὡς ἡσσημένους σφῶν πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἀνακρούσασθαι, καθ᾽ ἡ συχίαν ἐκβάντες τά τε ἄλλα διεπράσσοντο καὶ τὰ ἀμφὶ τὸ ἄριστον, ὡς τῆς γε ἡμέρας ταύτης οὐκέτι οἰόμενοι ἂν ναυ-
8 μαχῆσαι. «ἐξαίφνης δὲ οἱ Συρακόσιοι πληρώ-
σαντες τὰς ναῦς ἐπέπλεον αὖθις. οἱ δὲ διὰ πολλοῦ θορύβου, καὶ ἄσιτοι οἱ πλείους, οὐδενὶ
4 κόσμῳ ἐσβάντες μόλις ποτὲ ἀντανήγοντο. καὶ
, , χρόνον μέν τινα ἀπέσχοντο ἀλλήλων φυλασ- , ΝΜ ? 29 / a. » 2 e σόμενοι" ἔπειτα οὐκ ἐδόκει τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ὑπὸ
A a , σφῶν αὐτῶν διαμέλλοντας κόπῳ ἁλίσκεσθαι, 3 > 9 a Ψ / 3 ) ἀλλ᾽ ἐπιχειρεῖν ὅτι τάχιστα, καὶ ἐπιφερόμενοι
ὅ ἐκ παρακελεύσεως ἐναυμάχουν. οἱ δὲ Συρα-
A1
40
/ , \ a 3 t
κόστοι δεξάμενοι καὶ ταῖς [τε] ναυσὶν ἀντιπρῴροις 4 [τ ὃ 40 σι 2 μ a χρώμενοι, ὥσπερ διενοήθησαν, τῶν ἐμβόλων TH παρασκευῇ ἀνερρήγνυσαν τὰς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ναῦς ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς παρεξειρεσίας, καὶ οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν καταστρωμάτων αὐτοῖς ἀκοντίζοντες μεγάλα ἔβλαπτον τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, πολὺ δ᾽ ἔτι μείξω οἱ ἐν τοῖς λεπτοῖς πλοίοις περιπλέοντες τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ἔς τε τοὺς ταρσοὺς ὑποπίπ- τοντες τῶν πολεμίων νεῶν καὶ ἐς τὰ πλάγια παραπλέοντες καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐς τοὺς ναύτας a / ἀκοντίζοντες. τέλος δὲ τούτῳ TO τρόπῳ κατὰ A /
κράτος ναυμαχοῦντες οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐνίκησαν,
2. ἡσσημένων Μ. .
8. μόλις B only ; the rest μόγις.
5. τε hefore ναυσὶν om. AFGM.—éufSortOv MSS. Cor. Abresch (Diluc. p. 691).
10
20
48 OOYKYAIAOY
: καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τραπόμενοι διὰ τῶν ὁλκάδων τὴν κατάφευξιν ἐποιοῦντο ἐς τὸν ἑαυτῶν ὅρμον.
2 αὶ δὲ τῶν Συρακοσίων νῆες μέχρι μὲν τῶν δ ὁλκάδων ἐπεδίωκον᾽ ἔπειτα αὐτοὺς at κεραῖαι ὑπὲρ τῶν ἔσπλων αἱ ἀπὸ τῶν ὁλκάδων δελ-
8 φινοφόροι ἠρμέναι ἐκώλυον. δύο δὲ νῆες τῶν Συρακοσίων ἐπαιρόμεναι τῇ νίκῃ προσέμειξαν αὐτῶν ἐγγὺς καὶ διεφθάρησαν, καὶ ἡ ἑτέρα τὸ
αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἑάλω. καταδύσαντες δ᾽ οἱ Συρακόσιοι τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἑπτὰ ναῦς καὶ κατατραυματίσαντες πολλάς, ἄνδρας τε τοὺς μὲν ζωγρήσαντες τοὺς δὲ ἀποκτείναντες, ἀπεχώρη- σαν, καὶ τροπαῖά τε ἀμφοτέρων τῶν ναυμαχιῶν 15 ἔστησαν, καὶ τὴν ἐλπίδα ἤδη ἐχυρὰν εἶχον ταῖς μὲν ναυσὶ καὶ πολὺ κρείσσους εἶναι, ἐδόκουν δὲ καὶ τὸν πεζὸν χειρώσεσθαι. καὶ οἱ μὲν ὡς ἐπιθησόμενος κατ᾿ ἀμφότερα παρεσκευάζοντο αὖθις. 20
42 ‘Ev τούτῳ δὲ Δημοσθένης καὶ Ἐῤρυμέδων ‘Alltheir eal. ἔχοντες τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ctsponded how. βοήθειαν παραγίγνονται, ναῦς τε home etthe a. Τρεῖς καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα μάλιστα ξὺν ἔνα bythe Ταῖς ξενικαῖς καὶ ὁπλίτας περὶ 5
Donnsth, and πεντακισχιλίους ἑαυτῶν τε καὶ τῶν
Gt Harton — ξυμμάχων, ἀκοντιστάς τε βαρβάρους
i cd At the sight of cal” EAXnvas οὐκ ὀλίγους καὶ odev-
f \ ere γι. δονήτας καὶ τοξότας καὶ τὴν ἄλλην
\ e 7 A Ἁ 2 δοηθάοιοοο παρασκευὴν ἱκανήν. καὶ τοῖς μὲν το
41 2. διὰ τῶν ὁλκάδων δελφινοφόροι M, om. 28 words. 4, καὶ before τὸν πεζὸν B only ; the rest om.
BYTTPA®H®S Z (41—42) 49
Συρακοσίοις καὶ ξυμμάχοις κατά- their recent . riumph. πληξις ἐν τῷ αὐτίκα οὐκ ὀλίγη ἐγένετο, εἰ πέρας μηδὲν ἔσται σφίσι τοῦ ἀπαλλαγῆναι τοῦ κινδύνου, ὁρῶντες οὔτε διὰ τὴν Δεκέλειαν τειχιξομένην οὐδὲν ἧσσον στρατὸν 15 ¥ 4 lal ’ 2 ἤ ἴσον καὶ παραπλήσιον τῷ προτέρῳ ἐπεληλυθότα τήν τε τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων δύναμιν πανταχόσε \ / A 7 4 πολλὴν φαινομένην. τῷ δὲ προτέρῳ στρατεύ- A 2 a pare τῶν Αθηναίων ὡς ἐκ κακῶν ῥώμη τις 8 ἐγεγένητο. ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης ἰδὼν ὡς εἶχε τὰ 2 4 / 3 ΐπ ατα, καὶ νομίσας οὐχ οἷόν τε Ρ al ᾿ ͵ μ \ x " 2 ‘D. came pene- εἶναι διατρίβειν οὐδὲ παθεῖν ὅπερ ὁ trated with the
deplorable
Νικίας ἔπαθεν (ἀφικόμενος yap To effects which 5 ( φ μ 5 Y ρ had resulted
πρῶτον ὁ Νικίας φοβερός, ὡς οὐκ from the mis- εὐθὺς προσέκειτο ταῖς Συρακούσαις ᾿ 25 ἀλλ᾽ ev Κατάνῃ διεχείμαξεν, ὑπερώφθη τε καὶ ἔφθασεν αὐτὸν ἐκ τῆς Ἰ]ελοποννήσου στρατιᾷ ὁ Γύλιππος ἀφικόμενος, ἣν οὐδ᾽ ἂν μετέπεμψαν οἱ Συρακόσιοι, εἰ ἐκεῖνος εὐθὺς ἐπέκειτο" ἱκανοὶ γὰρ αὐτοὶ οἰόμενοι εἶναι ἅμα τ᾽ ἂν ἔμαθον 80 ἥσσους ὄντες καὶ ἀποτετειχισμένοι ἂν ἦσαν, ὥστε μηδ᾽ εἰ μετέπεμψαν ἔτι ὁμοίως ἂν αὐτοὺς ὠφελεῖν), ταῦτα οὖν ἀνασκοπῶν ὁ Δημοσθένης καὶ γυγνώσκων ὅτι καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν τῷ παρόντι τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μάλιστα δεινότατός ἐστι τοῖς 85 ἐναντίοις, ἐβούλετο ὅτι τάχος ἀποχρήσασθαι τῇ
4 παρούσῃ τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐκπλήξει. καὶ ὁρῶν τὸ παρατείχισμα τῶν ᾿ Συρακοσίων,
4.2 2, σφίσιν ἀπαλλαγῆναι Μ.---πολλὴν πανταχόσε Μ. 8. γινώσκων Μ.
E
50 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
‘The counter. @ ἐκώλυσαν περιτεινίσαι, σῴφᾶ wall built by ‘ ρ x φ 5
the Syr. Was a τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, ἁπλοῦν [τε] ὃν καί, 40 his progress.’ εὖ κρατήσειέ τίς τῶν τε Εἰπιπολῶν τῆς ἀναβάσεως καὶ αὖθις τοῦ ἐν αὐταῖς στρα-. τοπέδου, ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν (οὐδὲ yap ὑπομεῖναι ἂν σφᾶς οὐδένα), ἠπείγετο ἐπιθέσθαι τῇ πείρᾳ, καί ot ξυντομωτάτην ἡγεῖτο διαπο- 45
ὅ λέμησιν' ἢ γὰρ κατορθώσας ἕξειν Συρακούσας ἢ ἀπάξειν τὴν στρατιὰν καὶ οὐ τρίψεσθαι ἄλλως ᾿Αθηναίους τε τοὺς Evotpatevopévous καὶ τὴν ξύμπασαν πόλιν.
6 - Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν τήν τε γῆν ἐξελθόντες τῶν 50 ‘He began by Συρακοσίων ἔτεμον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι περὶ
trying—to storm
itin front; but— τὸν “Avarrov καὶ τῷ στρατεύματι every attempt ᾿
oe : \ fal was repulsed. ἀηεκράτουν, ὥσπέρ TO πρῶτον, τῷ There remained .
wont A : only the second Te “Τεζῷ Kal ταῖς ναυσίν (οὐδὲ yap method—to turn . eo. e , ΝΙΝ A the wall.’ καθ᾽ ἕτερα οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἀντεπεξῇ- 55 AIP ΘΑ σαν ὅτι μὴ τοῖς «ἱππεῦσι καὶ ἀκοντισταῖς ἀπὸ 48 τοῦ ᾿Ολυμπιείου)" ὁ ἔπειτα μηχαναῖς ὄδοξε τῷ , CLE 9 Δημοσθένει πρότερον ἀποπξιβᾶδαι τοῦ mapa- / e >a ἢ τειχίσματος. ὡς δὲ αὐτῷ προσαγαγόντι κατε- : A \ ‘A ° καύθησάν τε ὑπὸ τῶν ἐναντίων ἀπὸ τοῦ τείχους ε \ Ν ἀμυνομένων αἱ μηχαναὶ καὶ τῇ λλῃ στρατιᾷ 5 { πολλαχῆ προσβάλλοντες ἀπεκρούοντο, οὐκέτι 7 “------ὸ ἐδόκει διατρίβειν, ἀλλὰ πείδας τόν τε Νικίαν — a 4 ; . , καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους Evvdpyovtas, ws ἐπενόει, καὶ τὴν 3 / Le 3 Ὁ > “ = \ ¢ / 2 ἐπιχείρησιν τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν ἐποιεῖτο. Kat ἡμέρας 4, ἁπλοῦν τε ὃν all but Β.---τε before ᾿Επιπολῶν B only. — οἱ B only.
5. τρίβεσθαι all but B. 43 1. ὡς before ἐπενόει B only ; the rest om.
ἘΥΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z (42—43) 51
0 μὲν privat ἐδόκει εἶναι λαθεῖν προσελθόντας τὸ τε καὶ ἀναβάντας, παραγγείλας. δὲ «put the march
Ξε ecessary πέντε ἡμερῶν σιτία καὶ τοὺς λεθο- dimcult thathe
“λόγους «καὶ τέκτονας πάντας λαβὼν toatempta Kat ἄλλην παρασκευὴν τοξευμάτων night-surprise.’ te καὶ ὅσα ἔδει δὴν κρατῶσι τειχίξοντας ἔ ἔχει, 15 αὐτὸς μὲν ἀπὸ πρώτου ὕπνου καὶ Εὐρυμέδων καὶ Mivavdpos ἀναλαβὼν τὴν πεζὴν στρατιὰν. ἐχώρει πρὸς τὰς ᾿Επυπολάς, Νικίας δὲ ἐν τοῖς 8 τείχεσιν ὑπελείπετο. καὶ ἐπειδὴ & ἐγένοντο πρὸς αὐταῖς κατὰ τὸν Εὐρύηλον, ἡ ἧπερ καὶ . ‘He reached,
without bein;
ν ἡ προτέρα στρατιὰ τὸ Πρῶτον ἀνέβη, discovered, the
yr. λανθάνουσί τε - τοὺς φύλακας “Τῶν fort on the high , ground—and Συρακοαίῶν καὶ προσβάντες τὸ captured it.’ τείχισμα ὃ ἦν. αὐτόθι τῶν Συρακοσίων αἱροῦσι Ὧ 4 καὶ ἄνδρας τῶν φυλάκων ἀποκτείνουσιν" οἱ δὲ 96 “πλείους διαφυγόντες εὐθὺς πρὸς τὰ στρατόπεδα, ἃ ἦν ἐπὶ τῶν ἘΠπιπολῶν τρία ἐν mpor γίσμασιν, ay μὲν TOV Συρακοσίων, ὃν δὲ τῶν ἄλλων ὧν Σεκε- λιωτῶν, ὃν δὲ τῶν ξυμμάχων, ἀγγέλλουσι τὴν ἔφοδον, καὶ τοῖς ἑξακοσίοις τῶν Συρακοσίων, δὲ 30 καὶ πρῶτοι κατὰ τοῦτο τὸ μέρος τῶν ᾿ἘἜσπιπολῶν 5 φύλακες ἦσαν, ἔφραξον. οἱ δ᾽ ἐβοήθουν τ᾽ εὐθύς; καὶ αὐτοῖς ὃ Δημοσθένης καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν- τυχόντες ἀμυνομένους. προθύμως ἔτρεψαν. καὶ αὐτρὶ μὲν εὐθὺς ἐχώρουν ἐς τὸ πρόσθεν, ὅ ὅπως τῇ 8.
ἰδ “ame +
2. ἀδύνατα B only; the rest ἀδύνατον. -- πεζὴν Wolfflin ; πρώτην B; πᾶσαν the rest; πολλὴν Ρρ.---ἐπιπολλάς Μ. ---ὗπε- λείπετο B only ; the rest ὑπελέλειπτο.
4, ἐν προτειχίσμασιν B only ; the rest om.
52 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
e A A e παρούσῃ ὁρμῇ τοῦ περαίνεσθαι ὧν ἕνεκα ἦλθον
\ ὃ a 7 ο.ο » 2 \ ‘But bothhe #9) Spa εἷς γένωνται " ἄλλοι δὲ ἀπὸ and his men, too _- AL KY E Biba muuch flushed Τῆς πρώτης» Τὸ παρατείχισμα To
Matenegie ? Συρακοσίων, οὐχ ὑπομενόντων τῶν
viet hae” φυλάκων, ἥρουν τε καὶ τὰς ἐπάλξεις 40 6 victory. Their ὁ πέσυρον. οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ
ἀρὰ sothat ξύμμαχοι καὶ ὁ Γύλιππος καὶ οἱ μετ᾽
phey Wiuonto αὐτοῦ ἐβοήθουν ἐκ τῶν προτειχισμά- tthe Becotian τῶν, καὶ ἀδοκήτου τοῦ τοχμήματος hoplites. ἐν νυκτὶ σφίσι γενομένου προσ- 45 «ἐβαλόν τε τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐκπεπληγμένοι καὶ / e 3 > A Ἁ a ~~) , . βιασθέντες ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν TO πρῶτον ὑπεχώρησαν. wf A a - A 7 προϊόντων δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐν ἀταξίᾳ μᾶλλον ” ν᾿ κα oe « 7 φ---- ° ἤδη ὡς κεκρατηκότων καὶ βουλομένων διὰ παν- ν . TOS τοῦ μήπω μεμαχημένου τῶν ἐναντίων ws 50 ΦΟΙΨΕΝΝ, . - τάχιστα διελθεῖν, ἵνα μὴ ἀνέντων σφῶν τῆς ἐφ- ,ὔ 2 a e Ἢ —_ > a όδου αὖθις ξυστραφῶσιν, οἱ Βοίωτοὶ πρῶτοι αὐτοῖς Wine , ‘ “_ τ ἀντέσχον καὶ προσβαλόντες ἔτρεψάν τε καὶ ἐς ad φυγὴν κατέστησαν. ry bh a ” 9 a A \ 44, Καὶ ἐνταῦθα ἤδη ἐν πολλῇ ταραχῇ καὶ
“wwe o
: 5 ° A ‘The lightof ἀπορίᾳ ἐγίγνοντο οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἣν the moon . ery ἢ er 202 9 4? rendered objects οὐδὲ πυθέσθαι ῥάδιον ἦν οὐδ᾽ ἀφ visible, without. ς΄, ae, “yt , being sufficient ετέρων OT@ TPOTTM ἕκαστα Evy VE On. to distinguish
friend from foe.” ἐν μὲμ γὰρ ἡμέρᾳ σαφέστερα μέν, 5 (ὅμως δὲ οὐδὲ ταῦτα οἱ παραδενόμένοι πάντα
πλὴν τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἕκαστος μόλις οἶδεν" ἐν δὲ νυκτομαχίᾳ, [ἢ μόνη δὴ στρατοπέδων μεγάλων
- ΄
5. τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης παρατείχισμα BCAEFG ; cor. Goller ;
τὸ om. MT. 6. ἐβοήθουν τὲ ἐκ ΝΜ. ---προσέβαλόν Εἰ ; the rest προσέβαλλόν.
BYITPA®HS Z (48—44) 53
Ν a “a / > ἢ “ 4 ἔν ye τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ ἐγένετο, γτῶς ἄν τες 2 σαφῶς τι ἤδει ; ἦν μὲν γὰρ σελήνη λαμπρά, τὸ > ἑώρων δὲ οὕτως ἀλλήλουδζ ὡς ἐν σελήνῃ εἰκὰς τὴν μὲν ὄψιν τοῦ σώματος προορᾶν, τὴν δὲ [οἱ “Ὁ A ““ ,@ a γνῶσιν τοῦ οἰκείου ἀπιστεῖσθφι, ὁπλῖται δὲ 3 pam 9 3 > , ἀμφοτέρων οὐκ ὀλέψοι ἐν στενοχωρίᾳ ἄνεστρέ- “A 3 / ᾿ \ » 3 a 8 dovto.. καὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οἱ μὲν ἤδη ἐνωοῶχτο, 15 ς Ν) a , 22 / wa _ - : οἱ δὲ Ete τῇ πρώτῃ ἐφόδῳ ἀήσσητοι «the fugitives of ἐχώρουν. πολὺ δὲ Kal τοῦ ἄλλου frevewa® a ,v— i - στρατεύματος αὐτοῖς "τὸ μὲν ἄρτι- ον advancing 9 , Ἁ 32 ” behind.’ ἀνεδεβήκει, τὸ δ᾽ ἔτι προσανήεῇ, (ΟΣ
“ , ony” > " ιν. πὸ ree ὁ’ ὦ ς @MOT Οὐκ ἩἨπΠΙστΤανΡντο σρος O Τι ΧΡΉ χώρησαι. 20
ἤδη yap τὰ πρόσθεν τῆς τροπῆς γεγενημένης ἐτε- τάρακτο πάντα καὶ χαλεπὰ ΝΣ ὑπὸ τῆς βοῆς
σμμῆναι) καὶ ἅμα τοὺς προσφερομένους ἐδέχοντο - ΓΝ ~~ . . “¢" ; Υ te ᾿Αθηναῖοι ea? Te σφᾶς αὐτοὺς Kal Tay τὸ ἐξ ἐναντίας, καὶ εἰ Pidsoy εἴη τῶν ‘The whole
“ --------- , , > ἢ ἤδη πάλιν φευγόντων, πολέμιον ἐνὸ- one seene of x , . clamour an μίξον, καὶ τοῖς ἐρωτήμασι τοῦ Evy- confusion. 80 ς -
ws » θήματος A pear eter διὰ τὸ [μὴ εἶναι ἄλλῳ ch WOr ey , Keer yvopidat, σφίσι. τε αὐτοῖς ἤόρυβον πολὺν παρεῖχον ἅμα πάντες ἐρωτῶντες, Καὶ τοῖς πολε-
/ ee a, Coins aii, L399 207 2 ὅ μίοις σαφὲς αὐτὸ κατέστησαν" τὸ δ᾽ ἐκείνων οὐχ ὁμοίως ἠπίσταντο, διὰ τὸ κρατοῦντας αὐτοὺς καὶ ss . o , so 3 a ° Ψ > 9 \ μὴ διεσπασμένους ἧσσον ἀγνοεῖσθαι, ὥστ᾽ εἰ μὲν S δου Ὁ ᾽ν 44, 1. ἔν γε Bonly; the rest om. γε. 3. γενομένης M. 4, rd ἐξ ἐναντίας] τὸ ἐναντίον Μ.
΄-.
54 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
ἐντύχοιέν τισι κρείσσους ὄντες τῶν πολεμίων, διέφευγον αὐτοὺς ἅτε ἐκείνων ἐπιστάμενοι τὸ ξύν- θημα, εἰ δ᾽ αὐτοὶ μὴ ὑποκρίνοιντο, διεφθείροντο. β μέγιστον δὲ καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα ἔ ane ὃ παιανισ- pos: ἀπὸ. γὰρ ἀμφοτέρων παραπ' λήσιος ὧν ἀπο- ρίαν παρεῖχεν. οἵ τε γὰρ ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ οἱ Kep- κυραῖοι καὶ ὅσον Δωρικὸν per ᾿Αθηναίων ἦν ὁπότε παιανίσειαν, φόβον πα ἀρεῖχε τοῖς ᾿Αθη-
7 ναίοις, οἵ τε πολέμιοι ὁμοίως. ὥστε rehay iu: ὦ
πεσόντες αὑτοῖς κατὰ πολλὰ τοῦ στρα; πέδου, ᾿ ἐπεὶ ἅπαξ ἐταράχθησαν, φίλοι τε φίλοις καὶ πολῖται πολίταις, οὐ μόνον ἐς φόβον κατέστησαν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐς χεῖρας ἀλλήλοις ἐλθόντες μόλις ἀπε: ἀπε- λύοντο. καὶ διωκόμενος κατά τε τῶν κρημνῶν 50 ac πολλοὶ ῥίπτοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἀπώλλυντο, στενῆς οὔσης τῆς ἀπὸ τῶν Ἐ“στιπολῶν πάλιν καταβάσεως, καὶ ἐπειδὴ ἐς τὸ ὁμαλὸν οἱ σῳζόμενοι ἄνωθεν ‘With terrible καταβαῖεν, οἱ μὲν πολλοὶ αὐτῶν καὶ
eit the Av at ὅσον ἦσαν TOV προτέρων στρατιωτῶν 55
length found refuge in their ἐμπ' εἰρίᾳ͵ μᾶλλον τῆς χώρας ἐς τὸ
_ own tines.’ στρατόπεδον. διεφύγγανον, οἱ δὲ ὕστερον ἥκοντες εἰσὶν οἱ διαμαρτόντες τῶν ὁδῶν
oo
0
δ. ἐντύχοιε M; -Ν in margin. - ὕοκρίνοιντο] κρίνοιντο B; ““ὑποκρίνοιντο pro dwoxplvowro omnes tuentur veteres gram- matici, quanguam Eustathius eam formam maxime ionicis scriptoribus vindicat.”—Haacke.
6. παιωνισμός and παιωνίσειαν Μ.
7. αὐτοῖς Μ. --ἀλλήλοις om. Μ.
8. κατὰ τῶν κρημνῶν ῥίπτοντες] of. ο. 45, 2. “‘Aliquem de saxo dare praecipitem dicitur ῥίπτειν, ὠθεῖν τινά, βάλλειν, ἀφιέναι τινὰ κατὰ πέτρας, non ἀπὸ πέτρας." Cobet, V.L. 277. Hence Eur. H.F. 320 ἱέναι πέτρας ἄπο should probably be altered.— [ot] Bloomfield. Neither Plutarch nor Valla seems to have found it.—xaraBater, οἱ μὲν B; the rest καταβαίνοιεν.
ΞΎΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z (44—47) 55
κατὰ τὴν χώραν ἐπλανήθησαν" οὕς, ἐπειδὴ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, οἱ ἱππῆς τῶν Συρακοσίων περρῥελάσαντες 60 διέφθειραν. 23 ΩΝ 46 Τῇ) δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι δύο τροπαῖα ἔστησαν, ἐπί τε ταῖς ᾿Επιπολαῖς ἡ ἡ. πρόσβασις καὶ κατὰ τὸ χωρίον ἣ οἱ Βοιωτοὶ πρῶτον ἀντέ- στησαν" οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοὺς νεκροὺς ὑποσπόν- 9 > 3 “9 3 7 aA 2 Sous ἐκομίσαντο. ἀπέθανον δὲ οὐκ ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν 5 - ὶ «ἘΠ 4 4 f_” Ν , A Te καὶ Tov ξυμμάχων, ὅπλα μέντοι ETL πλείω ἢ \ A / φ A a ΄ “τὰ γϑοὺς νεκροὺς ἐλήφθη“ οἱ γὰρ κατὰ τῶν κρημνῶν᾽ βιασθέντες ἅλλεσθαι ψιχοὶ [ἄνευ τῶν ἀσπίδων] οἱ μὲν ἀπώλοντο, οἱ δ᾽ ἐσώθησαν. 46 Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο of μὲν Συρακόσιοι ὡς ἐπὶ ἀπροσδοκήτῳ εὐτραγίῷ πάλιν αὖ ἀναρρωσθέντες,
oe / e* ft Ym) \ 9 ,7, =~ ὥσπερ καὶ προτερον, € vy Axpa- ‘Again masters ρ βοτέρον, ἐξ μὲ Pa- eine field, the
yavTa στασιά a πεντεκαίδεκα, 8. again in- dulged the hope
ναυσὶ Σικανὸν ἀπέστειλαν, ὅπως of storming the δ ἐπαγάγοιτο τὴν πόλιν εἰ δύναρτο" went to obtain pe ‘ ΚΝ \ ν additional rein- Γύλυππος δὲ κατὰ γῆν és τὴν ἄλλην forcementa.’ Σικελίαν- ὥχετο αὖθις, ἄξων στρατιὰν ἔτι, ὡς ἐν ta 7, AM, ΜΝ εν» ἐλπίδι ὧν καὶ τὰ τείχη τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων αἱρήσειν βίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ τὰ ἐν ταῖς "πιπολαῖς οὕτω ξυνέβῃ. 10 ᾿ fe) 3 3 47 OF δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοὶ ἐν Τούτῳ ἐβουλεύοντο “πρός τε τὴν γεγενημένην ξυμφορ ν καὶ πρὸς τὴν παροῦσαν ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ κατὰ πάντα ἀρρωστίαν. τοῖς τε γὰρ ἐπιχειρήμασιν a
8. διέφθειρον Μ. 465 5. [ἄνευ τῶν ἀ.} Ηδοΐκο. ----ἀπώλοντο Cobet for MSS. ἀπώλ.- λυντο. 46 ἐπαγάγοιτο Pluygers for MSS. ὑπ- --- ἄλλην Β only; rest om.
56 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
ἑώρων οὐ κατορθ οῦντες καὶ τοὺς στρατιώτας δ
2 ἀχθο ἔνους τῇ μονῇ. νόσῳ τε γὰρ ἐπιέζονζο
κ ρα, τῆς τε ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ThuTys ——— οὔσης ἐν ἡ ἀσθενοῦσιν ἄνθρωποι μάλιστα, καὶ \ / [4 3 2 ’ ey, α τὸ χωρίον ἅμα ἐν ᾧ ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο ἑλῶδες καὶ χαλεχὸν ἦν' τά τε ἄλλα [ὅτι] ἀνέλπιστα 10 ~~,
.» 8 αὐτοῖς ἐφαίνετο. τῷ οὖν Δημοσθένει αὐκ ἐδόκει
Ν A ’ Σλλ᾽ [2 Ἁ ‘Painfulevi. ἔτη χρῆναι μένειν, a ἅχσερ καὶ creasing diner. διανοηθεὶς ἐς τὰς ᾿Επιπολὰς διεκιν-
ἱ y / . \ 4 gaan ony δύγευσεν; ἐπειδὴ ἔξῥαλτο, ἐξιέναι strenuous in 2 / \ 4 enforcing the ἐψηφίζετο καὶ μὴ διατρίβειν, ἕῳς 15 ngthe = , " τοϑοι σίου τρίς ἔν, TO πέλαγος οἷόν τε περαιοῦσθαι,
A 7 “A a oeteek on al τοῦ στρατεύματος ταῖς γοῦν
EP came ἰἐπελθούσαις ναυσὶ κρατεῖν. καὶ τῇ turning home.’
πόλει ὠφελιμώτερον ἔφη εἶναι πρὸς τοὺς ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ σφῶν ἐπιτειχίζοντας τὸν πόλε- 30 μον ποιεῖσθαι ἢ Συρακοσίους, obs οὐκέτι ῥάδιον
4 Ἅ 9 Ὁ» s ¥ »
εἶναι χειρώσασθαι! οὐδ᾽ αὖ ἄλλως χρήματα πολλὰ δαπανῶντας εἰς 3 εἶναι προσκαθῆσθαι.
48 καὶ ὁ μὲν Δημοσθένης τοιαῦτα ἐγύγνωσκεν' ὁ δὲ
47 48
Νικίας ἐνόμιξε μὲν καὶ αὐτὸς πόνηρα σφῶν τὰ
> , πράγματα εἶναι, τῷ δὲ λόγῳ οὐκ ἐβούλετο αὐτὰ 3 A 3 ὃ 4 3 0. 3 a“ ἀσθενῆ ἀποδεικνύναι, οὐδ᾽ ἐμφανῶς
‘This pro- vovein ptorily σ φᾶς ψηφιζομένους Nz ἑτὰὶ πολλῶν 5 opposed by N.’
τὴν ἀναχώρησιν τοῖς πολεμίοις κατ- αγγέλτους γίγνεσθαι" λαθεῖν γὰρ ἄν, ὁπότε 4
1. κατορθοῦντες GM ; -as BCAEF.
2: [ὅτι] om. A only ; ὅτι ἀνελπιστότατα Reiske.
3. διακινδυνεῦσαι ALF M.—éredOot M.
1. πονηρὰ M, which means ‘ wicked.’—drodecxvivac Μ. ---ἄἂν om. M.
AYTTPAPHS Z (47—48) 57
2 βούλοιντο, τοῦτο ποιοῦντες πολλῷ ἧσσον. τὸ δέ τι καὶ τὰ τῶν πολεμίων, ἀφ᾽ ὧν. ἐπὶ πλέον ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι ἠσθάνετο αὐτῶν, ἐλπίδος τι ἔτι παρεῖχε 10 πονηρότερα τῶν σφετέρων ἔσεσθαι, ἣν καρτερῶσι προσκαθήμενοι" χρημάτων γὰρ ἀπορίᾳ αὐτοὺς ἐκτρυχῴσειν, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἐπὶ πλέον ἤδη ταῖς ὑπεξζεὔῥαις ναυσὶ θαλασσοκρατούντων. καί (ἦν γάρ τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις βουλόμενον τὸ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις τὰ πράγματα ἐνδοῦναι) ἐπεκηρυ-
8 Κεύετο ὡς αὐτὸν καὶ οὐκ εἴα ἀπανίστασθαι. ἃ ἐπιστάμενος τῷ μὲν ἔργῳ ἔτι ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα ἔχων καὶ διασκοπῶν ἀνεῖχε, τῷ δ᾽ ἐμφανεῖ τότε λόγῳ οὐκ ἔφη ἀπάξειν τὴν στρατιάν. εὖ γὰρ εἰδέναι 20 ὅτι ᾿Αθηναῖοι σφῶν ταῦτα οὐκ ἀπτο- «The A. people δέξονται ὥστε μὴ αὐτῶν ψηφισαμέ- orate such ἃ νων ἀπελθεῖν. καὶ γὰρ οὐ τοὺς αὐ- Proceeding: τοὺς ψηφιεῖσθαί τε περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν καὶ τὰ πράγματα ὥσπερ καὶ αὐταὶ ὁρῶντας καὶ οὐκ 25 ἄλλων ἐπιτιμήσει ἀκούοντας γνώσεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἐξ ὧν ἄν ὅτις "eb λέγων διαβάλλῃ, ἐκ τούτων
Ἁ αὐτοὺς πείσεσθαι. τῶν τε παρόντων στρατιω-
2. δέ τι] δ᾽ ἔτι M, with BAEF.
3. περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν MSS., Kr., Hw., Bh., Hu. ; περὶ σφῶν [αὐτῶν] Bekker, Cl., Sta., Mijl., Sitz.: σφῶν αὐτῶν must apply either to τοὺς αὐτοὺς, or to Nicias and the troops. But taken with τοὺς αὐτοὺς it is absurd, since the argument, which is clearly ‘they will be severe on us,’ thus becomes ‘they will be severe on themselves’; and if made to apply to the army, it implies that another party is mentally contrasted with the army ; which is certainly not the case. But to remove αὐτῶν greatly weakens the sentence. 1 think Ν is made to say οὐχ οἱ αὐτοὶ ψηφιοῦν- ται περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν, meaning, ‘ We, no doubt, shall be the same body ; but then the voters will be different.’—dxovovras BM ; rest ἀκούσαντας.---διαβάλλῃ Sta. for MSS. -os.
58 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
τῶν πολλοὺς καὶ τοὺς πλείους ἔφη, οἱ νῦν βοῶσιν ‘Even the citi: ὡς ἐν δεινοῖς ὄντες, ἐκεῖσε ἀφικομέ- 30 zens now serv- °
ing would alter vous τἀναντία βοήσεσθαι ὡς ὑπὸ their tone when
’ ε they were safe ἄτων καταπροδοντες οἱ στρα- in the public ΧΡΊΜ > aA L " 5 , ρ assembly.’ τηγοὶ ἀπῆλθον. οὔκουν βούλεσθαι > ἢ 3 ’ὔ 3 4 αὐτὸς ye ἐπιστάμενος tas ᾿Αθηναίων φύσεις 9 3 3 a 3 2O/ ¢ » 3)
ἐπ᾿ αἰσχρᾷ τε αἰτίᾳ καὶ ἀδίκως ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων 35 9 ’ Δ A ee Τα / 3 a ἀπολέσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ UTO τῶν πολεμίων, εἰ δεῖ, κινδυνεύσας τοῦτο παθεῖν ἰδίᾳ. τά τε Συρα-
/ ¥ a” yy Ψ A
‘If their affairs κοσίων ἔφη ὅμως ἔτι ἥσσω τῶν σφε- Teoce cr δθά, τέρων εἶναι" καὶ χρήμασι γὰρ αὐτοὺς
fnerforeei ἫΘ ξενοτροφοῦντας καὶ ἐν περιπολίοις 40
vised to remain.” «,,.( ἀναλίσκοντας, καὶ ναυτικὸν πολὺ ἔτι ἐνιαυτὸν ἤδη βόσκοντας, τ ν ἀπορεῖν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι ἀμηχανήσειν’ δισχίλια τε γὰρ τάλαντα ἤδη ἀνηλωκέναι καὶ ἔτει πολλὰ a a ἤν τε καὶ ὁτιοῦν ἐκλίπωσι τῆς νῦν πάρασκευῆς τῷ 45 μὴ διδόναι τροφήν, φθερεῖσθαι αὐτῶν τὰ πράγ- ματα, ἐπικουρικὰ μᾶλλον ἢ δι’ ἀνάγκης ὥσπερ 6Ta σφέτερα ὄντας τρίβειν οὖν ἔφη χρῆναι προσκαθημένους, καὶ μὴ ήμασιν, ὧν πολὺ κρείσσους εἰσί, νικηθέντας ἀπιέναὶ 50 49 ὋὉ μὲν Νικίας τοσαῦτα λέγων μἐσχυρίξετο, αἰσθόμενος τὰ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις ἀκριβώς, καὶ τὴν τῶν χρημάτων ἀπορίαν, καὶ ὅτι ἦν αὐτόθι
σι
4, τὰ ἐναντία Μ.
5. ὁμοίως for ὅμως Μ. ---ἔτι before ἐνιαυτὸν (bracketed by Cl.) should perhaps be ἐπὶ ; cp. ii. 25, 3; 86, 5.—re after δισχίλια B only. —dvadwxévac MSS.—#v re οὖν M.
6. χρῆναι om. M.—dév B; the rest ws. The conjectures are ols Coraes, ἕως Sta., ᾧ Pp., ἐν ¢ Gertz.
AYTTPA®HS Z (48—49) 59
πολὺ τὸ βουλόμενον τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐνδίδοσθαι τὰ πράγματα, καὶ ἐπικηρυκευόμενον πρὸς αὐτὸν 5
ὥστε μὴ ἀπανίστασθαι, καὶ ἅμα ταῖς γοῦν ναυσίν,
τ / 224 / / e \ /
ἡ πρότερον, ἐθάρσει [xparnGeis|. ὁ δὲ Δημοσθέ- νης περὶ μὲν τοῦ πῤῥοσκαθῆσθαι οὐδ᾽ both D, and ὁπωσρῦν ἐνεδέχετο" εἰ δὲ δεῖ μὴ τα Το. insisted, ἀπάγειν τὴν στρατιὰν ἄνευ ᾿Αθη- on quitting this "10
‘ ᾽ \ / 3 λλὰ τ εἰν αὖ- urged an iin- ναίων ψηφίσματος, a iB yay mediate transfer
A Ν A a 4 Ν τοῦ, ἔ χρῆ ν Θάψον οἵ their camp to Α ᾿ φη Η Τῇ , ve Thapsus or ανασταντας TOVTO TOLELY Ὦ ES THV Katana.
Κατάνην, ὅθεν τῷ τε πεξῷ ἐπὶ πολλὰ τῆς χώρας ἐπιόντες θρέψονται πορθοῦντες τὰ τῶν πολεμίων 15 καὶ ἐκείνους Rather ταῖς τε ναυσὶν ἐν πελάγει καὶ οὐκ ἐν στενοχωρίᾳ, Ae Πρὸς τῶν πολεμίων μᾶλλόν ἐστι, τοὺς ἀγῶνάς ποιήσονται, GAN ἐν
3 7 3 2 aA 3 / / εὐρυχωρίᾳ, ἐν ἡ τά Te τῆς ἐμπειρίας χρή
σφῶν ἔσται καὶ ἀναχωρήσεις καὶ ἐπίπλους οὐκ ἐκ βραχέος καὶ περυγραπτοῦ ὁρμώμενοί τε καὶ
49 1. που τὸ B; the rest om. ποὺ; πολὺ τὸ Linwood. The passage καὶ ὅτι ἦν. . . xparnOels is corrupt: [καὶ ὅτι ἣν. .. ἀπανίστασθαι) Bothe; [καὶ ὅτι ἣν. . KparnOels] Hw.—rots ᾿Αθη- ναίοις γίγνεσθαι MSS. ‘‘Solum γίγνεσθαι cum dat. idoneam sententiam non praebet neque huc pertinent exempla a Class. adscripta iii. 28, 5; v. 55, 8; viii. 57, 1, ubi γίγνεσθαι con- tingere, evenire valet,” Sta., who reads τοῖς ’A. - ὑποχείρια :» γίγνεσθαι, comparing iii. 86, ef σφίσι δυνατὰ εἴη τὰ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ πράγματα ὑποχείρια γενέσθαι. Naber reads <éwi> τοῖς ᾿Α. γίγ. : but, as this passage is very similar to 48, 2, I have sub- stituted ἐνδίδοσθαι for γίγνεσθαι. ---γ᾽ ἂν for γοῦν Μ.---ἢ πρότερον θαρσήσει κρατηθείς M ; θαρρῶν ἢ πρ. ἐθάρσησε x. B; ἣ Sta. for MSS. 4; ἐθάρσει Gertz for θαρσήσει οὗ CAEFGM; those who read ἢ insert μᾶλλον before it.—[xparnGels] I bracket ; κρατήσειν Badham, Rauchenstein; <xal> κρατηθείς Cl., Hu. ; κρατυνθείς Bauer, Bothe.
2. αὐτοῦ Kr. for MSS. αὐτούς, --- θρέψονται B only; rest τρέψονται.---τὰς τῶν πολεμίων Μ,
κὸ
60 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
, “ , ΄ : 2 δα ᾿ \ 8 καταίροντες ἕξουσι. | τὸ Te ξύμπαν εἰπεῖν, οὐδενὶ é a a τρόπῳ οἱ ἔφη ἀρέσκειν ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ἔτι μένειν, . [——_,, ' ἀλλ᾽’ ὅτε τάχιστα ἤδη ἐξανίστασθαι καὶ μὴ 2 ε 3 7 3 A A μέλλειν. καὶ ὁ Kvpupédwv αὐτῷ ταῦτα Eyvy- os / * ° fe) 4 «NK refused to xopever. ἀντιλέγοντος δὲ τοῦ Νικίου
_—Th ἐραϑθηῦ Thee ὄκνος τις καὶ μέλλησις ἐνεγένετο, καὶ
στον τ, ΜῈ. ΜΝ ἅμα ὑπόψρια μή τι καὶ πλέον εἰδὼς active.’ ὁ Νικίας ἰσ υρίξηται. καὶ οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ διεμέλλησάν.͵ τε καὶ 30 κατὰ χώραν ἔμεγον.
50 ὋὉ δὲ Γύλιππος καὶ ὁ Σικανὸς ἐν τούτῳ ‘G.retumea Waphoav ἐς τὰς Συρακούσας, ὁ μὲν Mblefoeet τ Σ κανὸς ἁμαρτὼν τοῦ ᾿Ακράγαντος Bicitian Greeks.” (ἐν Τέλᾳ γὰρ ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἔτι ἡ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις στάσις [és] φιλία ἐξεπεπτώκει), ὁ 5 δὲ Γύλιππος ἄλλην τε στρατιὰν πολλὴν ἔχων ἦλθεν ἀπὸ τῆς Σικελίας καὶ τοὺς ἐκ τῆς Πελο- ποννήσου τοῦ ἦρος ἐν ταῖς ὁλκάσιν ὁπλίτας ἀποσταλέντας, ἀφικομένους ἀπὸ τῆς Λιβύης ἐς
2 Σελινοῦντα. ἀπενεχθέντες yap ἐς Λιβύην, καὶ yo δόντων Κυρηναίων τριήρεις δύο καὶ τοῦ πλοῦ ἡγεμόνας, καὶ ἐν τῷ παράπλῳ Eveorepirats πόλιο “ορκουμένοις ὑπὸ Λιβύων ξυμλαχήσαντες καὶ νικήσαντες τοὺς Λίβυς, καὶ αὐτόθεν παραπλεύ- σαντες ἐς Νέᾳν πόλιν, Καρχηδονιακὸν ἐ ἐμπόριον, 1.
3. ἐξανίστασθαι, placed after μέλλειν in the MSS., was trans- ferred by Haase. 4. ἐγένετο for éveyévero BM.
50 1 ἁμαρτῶν Μ.---φιλία Bauer for és φίλια (AEFM) or és φιλία (B) or és φιλίαν (6).---πολλὴν ἄλλην M ; ἔχων πολλὴν Β. ---ἀπο- σταλέντας ὁπ. M.
2. ἀπενεχθέντων all but Β. ---εὐεσπερείταις all but B.
*Ang. 27th. BYTTPA®HS Z (49—50) 61
ὅθενπερ Σικελία ἐλάχιστον. δύο ἡ ἡμερῶν καὶ νυκ- τὸς πλοῦν ἀπέχει, καὶ ἀπ᾽ τοῦ ᾿περάιωθέντες, 8 ἀφίκοντο ἐς Σελινοῦντα. καὶ οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι εὐθὺς αὐτῶν ἐλθόντων παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς ἐπι- θησόμενοι Kat ἀμφότερα αὖθις τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, 2
4 A 3 καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ" οἱ δὲ τῶν AON- <p, now again ς A d f im- ναίων στρατηγοὶ ὁρῶντες στρατιάν Mediate de-
n .—N. did TE ἄλλην σροσγε ημένην αὐτοῖς, fot venture to
\ A . 5 ist.—H καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἅμα οὐκ ἐπὶ τὸ βέλ- Persist. He
“Ὁ — τιον χωροῦντα ἀλλὰ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν Seed thal he 95
τοῖς πᾶσι χαλᾳχώτερον ἴσχοντα, Ori 68
μάλιστα δὲ τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ τῶν ἀνθρώ." ready at a given Tov πιεζόμενα, μετεμέλοντό Te πρό- “8
τερον οὐκ ἀναστάντες, ‘Kal ὡς αὐτοῖς οὐδὲ ὁ Νικίας ἔτι ὁμοίως ἐνηντιοῦτο, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ μὴ φανερῶς 80 γε ἀξιῶν [μὴ ἡ ψηφίξεσθαι, προεῖπον ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα ἔκπλουν ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου πᾶσι, 4 καὶ παρασκευάσασθαι ὅταν τις σημήνῃ. καὶ μελλόντων αὐτῶν, ἐπειδὴ ἑτοῖμα ἣν, ἀποπλεῖν, ω σελήνη ἐκλείπει" ἐτύγχανε γὰρ «The gods 85 πανσέληνος οὖσα, καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι fhemselves in-
Ὁ ἘΞ Σλείους ἐπισχεῖν ἐκέλευον τοὺς Pid departure.’ στρατηγοὺς ἐνθύμιον ποιούμενοι, καὶ ὁ Νικίας (ἦν γάρ τι “καὶ ἄγαν θεασμῷ τε καὶ τῷ τοιούτῳ προσκείμενος) οὖδ᾽ ἂν διαβουλεύσασθαι ἔτι ἔφη, 40
2. ὅθεν πρὸς Σικελίαν MSS., cor. ΒΏ. ---δυοῖν Β. ---πλοῦς all but Β.
8. μᾶλλον for μάλιστα Ν.---ἔτι om. Μ.--- ἠναντιοῦτο MSS.— ἀλλ᾽ ἢ Steph., for MSS, ἄλλο εἰ. ἄλλ᾽ ἢ Ηι.---[μὴ] om. Steph. — ἠδύναντο Μ.---παρεσκευάσθαι for παρασκευάσασθαι Abresch. See note.
4, θεασμῷ for θειασμῷ Cobet.
62
πρίν, ὡς οἱ
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
--7 . ss,
μάντεις ἐξηγοῦντο, τρὶς ἐννέα ἡμέρας
a , ST a μεῖναι, ὅπως ἂν πρότερον κινηθείη. καὶ τοῖς μὲν
᾿Αθηναίοις μελλήσασι διὰ τοῦτο ἡ
pont, ἐγεγένητο.
‘ Aa,
Οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ αὐτοὶ τοῦτο πυθόμενοι
‘The fact, which speedily came to their knowledge, that the A. had resolved to make a furtive escape, em- boldened the 8. to crash them as they were in the Gt. Harbour.
G. practised for several days.—A desperate action took place.— Eur. was slain, —and the entire A. fleet was beaten.’
ἀναγκάσαι
πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἐπηρμένοι ἦσαν μὴ
3 ’ A 9 7 - e ἀνιέναι τὰ τῶν ηναίων, ὡς καὶ Grav κατεγνωκότων ἤδη μηκέτι Kpeva cova Fa σφῶν μήτε ταῖς ΒΕ, a a 3 \ Ἁ ναυσὶ μήτε τῷ πεξῷ (οὐ γὰρ ἂν τὸν ἔκπλουν ἐπιβουλεῦσαι), καὶ ἅμα οὐ ’ 'πἃ ταῦ. bd ὔ aA βουλόμενοι αὑτοὺς ἄλλοσέ ποι τῆς Σικελίας καθεζομένους χαλεπωτέρους n > 3 3 A e εἶναι προσπολεμεῖν, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὡς τάχιστα καὶ ἐν ᾧ σφίσι ξυμφέρει αὐτοὺς ναυμαχεῖν. τὰς οὖν ναῦς
ἐπλήρουν καὶ ἀνεπειρῶντο ἡμέρας ὅσαι αὐτοῖς
4 ἐδόκουν ἱκαναὶ εἶναι.
ἐπειδὴ δὲ καιρὸς ἦν, τῇ
μὲν προτέρᾳ πρὸς τὰ τείχη τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων / Υ̓ [ \ 2 προσέβαλλον, καὶ ἐπεξελθόντος μέρρυς τινὸς οὐ πολλοῦ καὶ τῶν ὁπλιτῶν καὶ τῶν ἱππέων κατά τινας πύλας ἀπολαμβάνουσί τε τῶν ὁπλιτῶν τινας καὶ τρεψάμενοι καταδιώκουσιν" οὔσης δὲ « στενῆς τῆς ἐσόδου οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἵππους τε ἐβ- , 3 , n ¢ 7, > δομήκοντα ἀπολλύασι Kal τῶν ὁπλιτῶν οὐ πολ.- 52 λούς. καὶ ταύτῃ μὲν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἀπεχώρησεν ἡ ύς. κα ῃ μὲν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἀπεχώρησεν ἡ A ’ 3 e A στρατιὰ τῶν Lupaxociov: τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ταῖς
51 1, αὐτοὶ MSS. . αὐτίκα Sitz.; ὁ Γύλιππος ΚΙ.---ἐπηρμένοι B ; ἐγηγερμένοι Byp. CAEFM.—rais before ναυσὶ om. CAEFM ; τῷ before πεζῷ om. C. °
2. ἀνεπαύοντο all but Β.---αὐταῖς Μ.---προτεραίᾳ Β.---ἐφόδου
ΜΝ. ---ἀπολλύουσι MSS. ; cor. Bk.
BYTTPA®HS Z (50—53) 63
τε ναυσὶν ἐκπλέουσιν οὔσαις ἐξ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα, καὶ τῷ πεζῷ ἅμα πρὸς τὰ τείχη ἐχώρουν. οἱ δ' ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀντανῆγον ναυσὶν ἕξ καὶ ὀγδοήκοντα 5 2 καὶ προσμείξαντες ἐναυμάχουν. καὶ τὸν Evpv- μέδοντα ἔχοντα τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ βουλόμενον περικλήσασθαι τὰς ναῦς τῶν ἐναντίων καὶ ἐπεξάγοντα τῷ πλῷ πρὸς τὴν γῆν μᾶλλον, νικήσαντες οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ -οἱ Evp- τὸ payor τὸ μέσον πρῶτον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ἀπολαμ- βάνουσι κἀκεῖνον ἐν τῷ κοίλῳ [καὶ μυχῷ] τοῦ λιμένος, καὶ αὐτόν τε διαφθείῤδύσι. καὶ τὰς μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ναῦς ἐπισπομένας᾽ ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ τὰς πάσας ἤδη ναῦς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων κατεδίωκόν τε 16 53 καὶ ἐξεώθουν ἐς τὴν γῆν. ὁ δὲ Γύλιππος ὁρῶν τὰς ναῦς τῶν πολεμίων νικωμένας «Most of the καὶ. ἔξω, τῶν σταυρωμάτων καὶ τοῦ δοἰδαιοα ships ἤν: ἀντι τὰ οι oe eed own βουλόμενος διαφθείρειν τοὺς ἐκβαί- Penrose 5 νοντας καὶ τὰς ναῦς ῥᾷον τοὺς Συρα- fe 40.Br en
κοσίους ἀφέλκειν͵, τῆς γῆς φιλίας te crews’ Ν peat ἥδ 7 Φι ΄ Ν οὔσης, παρεβδήθει ἐπὶ τὴν χηλὴν μέρος τι͵ ἔχων
2 τῆς στρατιᾶς. καὶ αὐτοὺς Ὧι Tup- cone tyrnenian
, 4 22 / ~. troops sallied σηνοί (οὗτοι yap ἐφύλασσον τοῖς ιν ἐμοῖσι 10 3 4 e A
Αθηναίοις ταύτῃ) ὁρῶντες ἀτάκτως hem pert ὅδε
, ἢ , drove them away προσφερομένους, ἐπεκβ οηθήσαντ ἐς from the shore
, a : , καὶ προσπεσόντες τοῖς πρώτοις τρέ- ‘ the marsh.
52 1. προσμίξαντες MSS. 2. περικλείσασθαι ΒΑΟΜ. ---ἐξάγοντα all but, Β.---[καὶ μυχῷ] Bothe : C om. xal.—vais ἤδη all but B. 53 1. ναῦς τῶν Συρακοσίων Ν.---παρεβοήθη Μ. 2. ταύτῃ B only; the rest om.
-
64 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
πουσι καὶ ἐσβάλλουςιν ἐς τὴν λίμνην τὴν Λυσι- 8 μέλειαν καλουμένην. ὕστερον δὲ πλείονος ἤδη 15 a ! a τοῦ στρατεύματος παρόντος τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ 7 e939 A 9 , \ ξυμμάχων, καὶ ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπιβοηθήσαντες καὶ δείσαντες περὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐς μάχην τε κατέ- στησαν πρὸς αὐτοὺς καὶ νικήσαντες ἐπεδίωξαν ς / 3 \ 3 / Kal ὁπλίτας Te οὐ πολλοὺς ἀπέκτειναν Kal τὰς 20 ναῦς τὰς μὲν πολλὰς διέσωσάν τε καὶ ξυνήγαγον κατὰ τὸ στρατόπεδον, δυοῖν δὲ δερύσας εἴκοσιν οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ΄ ἔχαβον αὐτῶν, 4 καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας πάντας ἀπέκτειναν. καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐμπρῆσαι βουλόμενοι ὁλκάδα πα- 95 / \ , 9 \ λαιὰν κληματίδων καὶ δᾳδὸς γεμίσαντες (ὖν γὰρ ' f 3 aA ἐπὶ τοὺς “᾿Αθηναίους ὁ ἄνεμος οὔριος) ἀφεῖσαν [τὴν ναῦν] πῦρ ἐμβαλόντες. καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι δείσαντες περὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἀντεμηχανήσαντό TE σβεσ στήρια κωλύματα καὶ παύσαντες τὴν φλόγα 80 καὶ τὸ μὴ προσελθεῖν ἐγγὺς τὴν ὁλκάδα, τοῦ 54 κινδύνου ἀπηλλάγησαν. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο Συρα- κόσιοι μὲν τῆς τε ναυμαχίας τροπαῖον ἔστησαν καὶ τῆς ἄνω τῆς πρὸς τῷ τείχει ἀπολήψεως τῶν ς a "sf \ \ Ψ 3 a ὁπλιτῶν, ὅθεν καὶ τοὺς ἵππους ἔλαβον, ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ἧς τε οἱ Τυρσηνοὶ τροπῆς ἐποιήσαντο τῶν δ A 3 \ / ‘ Φ > A A » πεζῶν ἐς τὴν λίμνην καὶ ἧς αὐτοὶ τῷ ἄλλῳ στρατοπέδῳ. 55 = Teyevnuévns δὲ τῆς νίκης τοῖς Συρακοσίοις ‘Except for this λαμπρᾶς ἤδη καὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ (πρό- ἐμοῦ on ands τερον μὲν γὰρ ἐφοβοῦντο τὰς μετὰ
8. δυοῖν δὲ οὔσας Μ.---εἴκοσι ἃς CAEFM. 4. [τὴν ναῦν] Bothe, then Badham, then Ἦν. ---ἀἀντεμηχανή- σαντό τε K.T.»., altered by many edd. Cf. Pollux i. 168.
EYTTPA®H® Z (53—56)
τοῦ Δημοσθένους vais ἐπελθούσας), e ἣ 3 a 9 \ \ 9? /
οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν παντὶ δὴ ἀθυμίας
ἦσαν καὶ ὁ παράλογος αὐτοῖς μέγας \ \ / Ν A /
ἦν, πολὺ δὲ μείζων Ere τῆς στρατείας
2ὺ μετάμελος. πόλεσι γὰρ ταύταις
/ Ν ε 4 3 , μόναις ἤδη Opotoyporrats ἐπελθόντες, δημοκρατουμέ
65
fleet would have been destroyed. —Sickness of 5 the whole enter- prise, and re-
ntance for
ving under- taken it now became upper- most.’
[4 3 φι ἐς τε, ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτοί, καὶ ναῦς 10
καὶ ἵππους, καὶ μεγέθη ἐχούσαις, οὐ δυνάμενοι
οὔτε ἐκ πολιτείας τε μεταβολῆς τὸ
διάφορον αὐτοῖς, ᾧ προσήγοντο ἄν, οὔτ᾽ ἐκ παρασκευῆς πολλῷ κρείσσονος, σφαλλόμενοι δὲ τὰ πλείω, τά τε πρὸ αὐτῶν ἠπόρουν καὶ ἐπειδή 15 γε καὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐκρατήθησαν, ὃ οὐκ ἂν ᾧοντο, 56 πολλῷ δὴ μᾶλλον ἔτι. οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι τόν τε
λιμένα εὐθὺς παρέπλεον ἀδεῶς καὶ 4 δὰ “A τὸ στύμα αὐτοῦ διενοοῦντο κλῇσειν, ’ ὅπως μηκέτι μηδ᾽ εἰ βούλοιντο λάθοι- 3 \ e 3 a 3 4 ev αὐτοὺς οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκπλεύσαν- 2 τες. οὐ γὰρ περὶ τοῦ αὐτοὶ σωθῆναι 4 A μόνον ἔτι τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν ἐποιοῦντο, > ,. @ 3 / UA ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅπως ἐκείνους κωλύσουσι, , A νομίζοντες, ὅπερ ἦν, ἀπὸ τε τῶν παρ- / A ὄντων πολὺ σφῶν καθνπέρτερα τὰ πράγματα εἶναι, καί, εἰ δύναιντο κρατῆσαι ᾿Αθηναίων τε καὶ τῶν ξυμ-
‘The 8. deter- mined to close up and guard the mouth of the harbour. — Their pride swelled when 5 they reflected on the Pan-Hellenic importance which the siege had now ac- quired, and when they "ὦ counted up the number and variety of Greek 10 warriors now fighting on one side or the other.’
μάχων καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν, καλὸν σφίσιν ἐς τοὺς “Ελληνας τὸ ἀγώνισμα φανεῖσθαι"
2. κρείσσους CAEFGM ; κρείσσονς ὄντες Β ; κρείσσονος Schol.
δ6 1. κλείσειν BAEM. 2. κωλύσουσι C only ; the rest κωλύσωσι.
F
64 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
πουσι καὶ ἐσβάλλουσιν ἐ ἐς τὴν λίμνην τὴν Λυσι- 8 μέλειαν καλουμένην. ὕστερον δὲ πλείονος ἤδη 15 τοῦ στρατεύματος παρόντος τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ , e¢ 9 a 3 / \ ξυμμάχων, καὶ ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπιβοηθήσαντες καὶ δείσαντες περὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐς μάχην τε κατέ- στησαν πρὸς αὐτοὺς καὶ νικήσαντες ἐπεδίωξαν ς / bd Ἁ 3 ’ \ \ Kal ὁπλίτας τε οὐ πολλοὺς ἀπέκτειναν καὶ τὰς 20 ναῦς τὰς μὲν πολλὰς διέσωσαν τε καὶ ξυνήγαγον κατὰ τὸ στρατόπεδον, δυοῖν δὲ δερύσας εἴκοσιν οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἔλαβον αὐτῶν, 4 καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας πάντας ἀπέκτειναν. καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐμπρῆσαι βουλόμενοι ὁλκάδα πα- 25 / \ / 9 \ λαιὰν κληματίδων καὶ | δῳδὸς γεμίσαντες (ἦν γὰρ 2 ba 3 ἴω ἐπὶ τοὺς “Αθηναίους ὁ ἄνεμος οὔριος) ἀφεῖσαν \ ce) A 3 , ¢ » A [τὴν ναῦν] πῦρ ἐμβαλόντες. καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι δείσαντες περὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἀντεμηχανήσαντό TE σβεστήρια͵ κωλύματα καὶ παύσαντες τὴν φλόγα 80 καὶ τὸ μὴ προσελθεῖν ἐγγὺς τὴν ὁλκάδα, τοῦ 54 κινδύνου ἀπηλλάγησαν. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο Συρα- κόσιοι μὲν τῆς τε ναυμαχίας τροπαῖον ἔστησαν καὶ τῆς ἄνω τῆς πρὸς τῷ τείχει ἀπολήψεως τῶν ε a “7A \ \ ¢ > a ὁπλιτῶν, ὅθεν καὶ τοὺς ἵππους ἔλαβον, ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ἧς τε οἱ Τυρσηνοὶ τροπῆς ἐποιήσαντο τῶν δ πεζῶν ἐς τὴν λίμνην καὶ ἧς αὐτοὶ τῷ ἄλλῳ στρατοπέδῳ. δδ Γεγενημένης δὲ τῆς νίκης τοῖς Συρακοσίοις ‘Except for this λαμπρᾶς ἤδη καὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ (πρό- neces on and, τερον μὲν γὰρ ἐφοβοῦντο τὰς μετὰ
8, δυοῖν δὲ οὔσας Μ.---εἴκοσι ἃς CAEFM. 4. [τὴν ναῦν] Bothe, then Badham, then Hw.—dvreunyxary- σαντό τε κιτ.λ., altered by many edd. Cf. Pollux i. 168.
56 πολλῷ δὴ μᾶλλον ἔτι.
ἘΥΤΤΡΑΦῊΣ Z (53—56)
τοῦ Δημοσθένους vais ἐπελθούσας), οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν παντὶ δὴ ἀθυμίας ἦσαν καὶ ὁ παράλογος αὐτοῖς μέγας ἦν, πολὺ δὲ μείζων ἔτι τῆς στρατείας 2 ὁ μετάμελος. πόλεσι γὰρ ταύταις f v € μόναις ἤδη opot δημοκρατουμέ
65
fleet would have been destroyed. —Sickness of the whole enter- prise, and re-
mtance for
ving under- taken it now became upper- most.’
or
διάφορον αὐτοῖς, ᾧ προσήγοντο ἄν, οὔτ᾽ ἐκ παρασκευῆς πολλῷ κρείσσονος, σφαλλόμενοι δὲ τὰ πλείω, τά τε πρὸ αὐτῶν ἠπόρουν καὶ ἐπειδή τ. γε καὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐκρατήθησαν, ὃ οὐκ ἂν ᾧοντο,
λιμένα εὐθὺς παρέπλεον ἀδεῶς καὶ ’ a n TO στύμα αὐτοῦ διενοοῦντο κλήσειν, Ψ 3 3 U , ὅπως μηκέτι pnd εἰ βούλοιντο λάθοι- 9 \ e989 wn 4 , ev αὑτοὺς ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκπλεύσαν- 2 τες. οὐ γὰρ περὶ τοῦ αὐτοὶ σωθῆναι / A μόνον ἔτι τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν ἐποιοῦντο, 3 \ @ 3 ’ 4 ἀλλὰ Kal ὅπως ἐκείνους κωλύσουσι, ’ A νομίζοντες, ὅπερ ἦν, ἀπὸ τε τῶν παρ- / A ὄντων πολὺ σφῶν καθυπέρτερα τὰ πράγματα εἶναι, καί, εἰ δύναιντο κρατῆσαι ᾿Αθηναίων τε καὶ τῶν ξυμ-
οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι τόν τε
‘The 8. deter. mined to close up and
the mouth of the harbour.— Their pride swelled when 5 they reflected on the Pan-Hellenic importance which the siege had now ac- quired, and when they « . counted up the number and variety of Greek 10 warriors now fighting on one side or the other.’
μάχων καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν, καλὸν σφίσιν ἐς τοὺς “λληνας τὸ ἀγώνισμα φανεῖσθαι"
2. κρείσσους CAEFGM ; 1. κλείσειν BAEM. 2. κωλύσουσι C only; the rest κωλύσωσι.
F
κρείσσους ὄντες B ; κρείσσονος Schol.
66 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
τούς τε γὰρ ἄλλους “EAAnvas εὐθὺς τοὺς μὲν ἐλευθεροῦσθαι, τοὺς δὲ φόβου ἀπολύεσθαι (οὐ eee aa \ \ ε» ᾽ γὰρ ἔτι δυνατὴν ἔσεσθαι τὴν ὑπόλουπον ᾿Αθη- ναίων δύναμιν τὸν ὕστερον ἐπενεχθησόμενον 4 9 “a \ 3 \ / 3 “A y¥ πόλεμον ἐνεγκεῖν), καὶ αὐτοὶ δόξαντες αὐτῶν at- 4 4 LU “A » 3 4 . e:_n τίοι εἶναι ὑπό τε τῶν ἄλλων ἀνθρώπων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ἔπειτα πολὺ θαυμασθήσεσθαι. καὶ ἦν δὲ Ν e » N 4 “A \ Ψ > \ " ἄξιος ὁ ἀγὼν κατά τε ταῦτα καὶ ὅτι οὐχὶ ᾿Αθη- ναίων μόνων περιεγίγνοντο, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων πολλῶν ξυμμάχων, καὶ οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὶ αὖ μόνοι, ἀλλὰ καὶ μετὰ. τῶν ξυμβοηθησάντων σφίσιν, ἡγεμόνες τε γενόμενοι μετὰ Κορινθίων καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων, καὶ τὴν σφετέραν πόλιν ἐμπαρασχόντες προ- κινδυνεῦσαί τε καὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ μέγα [μέρος]
4 προκόψαντες. ἔθνη γὰρ πλεῖστα δὴ ἐπὶ μίαν
57
57
πόλιν ταύτην ξυνῆλθε, πλήν ye δὴ τοῦ ξύμπαν- τος ὄχλου τοῦ ἐν τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ «-πολεμοῦντος:-
15
i)
5
80
/ πρὸς τὴν ᾿Αθηναίων τε πόλιν καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων.
Τοσοίδε γὰρ ἑκάτεροι ἐπὶ Σικελίαν τε καὶ a / ‘Greeks conti. περὶ Σικελίας, τοῖς μὲν ξυγκτησόμε- in- \ f ᾿ A wine tonic, «=: VOL: τὴν χώραν ἐλθόντες, τοῖς Se
Doric, and Aeolic—auto- nomous and de- pendent —volun-
4 > ΔΝ ’ ξυνδιασώσοντες, ἐπὶ Συρακούσαις 3 7 9 A ἐπολέμησαν, ov κατὰ δίκην τι panr-
2. <dv> ἐλευθεροῦσθαι Ἣν .--- ἐπενεγκεῖν M.
8. μόνων Sta. for MSS. μόνον.--- ἀλλὰ καὶ. . μόνοι om. Μ. ; μόνοι Madvig for MSS. μόνον .---[ μέρος] Kr.
4. ὄχλου Kr. for MSS. λόγου. See Appendix II. Cf. c. 75, ὅ.---πολέμῳ «πολεμοῦντος» is my conjecture. Sta. shows (1) that ξυνελθόντος cannot be supplied from ξυνῆλθε, (2) that, if it could, it would not give sense. He thinks ξυστάντος, or some- thing similar, is lost after τοῦ.
1. ξυνδιασώσαντες M.—Zupaxovoas Bauer for MSS. -as. -
ες
EYTTPA®HE Z (56—57) 67
λον οὐδὲ κατὰ ξυγγένειαν μετ᾽ ἀλλή- teers and mer- , mands @¢ Ψ ~ cenaries—ffon λων στάντες, ἄλλ, ὡς ἕκαστοι τῆς Miletus and cast K τὰ τὸ ξυμφέρον ἢ to Selinus in the ξυντυχίας ἢ κα ἕξ ρον ἢ acm bee a K ἔσ OV. ound ;— vary ἢ ἐσχ , “ » κ᾿ 8||50 the barbaric ᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν αὐτοὶ “Iwves ἐπὶ Sikels, ge. 10 Δωριέας Συρακοσίους ἑκόντες ἦλθον, rhenians, and
4 4 A A > « aA / lapygians.’ καὶ αὐτοῖς τῇ αὐτῇ φωνῇ καὶ vopi- ” 4 A / \ ad |
pots ére χρώμενος Λήμνιοι καὶ Ἴμβριοι καὶ 3 A A / Ν . 4 Αἰγινῆται, οὗ tore Αἴγιναν εἶχον, καὶ ἔτι “Ἑστιαιῆς οἱ ἐν Εὐβοίᾳ [Ἑστίαιαν οἰκοῦντες], 15 ΝΜ Ν) ’ A \ Ν 8 ἄποικοι ὄντες, ξυνεστράτευσαν. τῶν δὲ ἄλλων e e / e δ᾽ 3 Ἁ 3 ’ οἱ μὲν ὑπήκοοι, οἱ δ᾽ ἀπὸ ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοι, 4 εἰσὶ δὲ καὶ of θοφό i ὶ εἰσ καὶ of μισθοφόροι ξυνεστράτενον. κα
ζω e / / e “ ? A τῶν μὲν ὑπηκόων Kal φόρου ὑποτελῶν Eperprijs καὶ Χαλκιδῆς καὶ Στυρῆς καὶ Καρύστιοι ἀπ᾽ Ἐῤ- 30 βοίας ἦσαν, ἀπὸ δὲ νήσων Κεῖοι καὶ ἔΑνδριοι καὶ Τήνιοι, ἐκ δ᾽ Ἰωνίας Μιλήσιοι καὶ Σάμιοι καὶ «Χῖοι. τούτων Χῖοι οὐχ ὑποτελεῖς ὄντες φόρου, ναῦς δὲ παρέχοντες, αὐτόνομοι ξυνείποντο" καὶ τὸ πλεῖστον Ἴωνες ὄντες οὗτοι πάντες καὶ ἀπ᾽ 2% ᾿Αθηναίων πλὴν Καρυστίων (οὗτοι δ᾽ εἰσὶ Δρύοπες), ὑπήκοοι δ᾽ ὄντες καὶ ἀνάγκῃ ὅμως
1. ὡς ἑκάστοις. . ἔσχεν CAEFM ; ἕκαστοι. . ἔσχεν B; ἔσχον Steph. ; ἕκαστος. . ἔσχεν Kr. ; ἕκαστοι. . ἔσχον Bh.—dydyxn CAEG ; ἀνάγκης Β.
2. of for of M.—[‘E. οἰκοῦντες) Kr.
4. [καὶ φόρου ὑποτελῶν] Sta., because the Chians are included and are said below to be οὐχ ὑποτελεῖς φόρου. But the clause below is a correction. Cf. ii. 70, 3 ξυνέβησαν ἐξελθεῖν αὐτοὺς καὶ “παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας καὶ τοὺς ἐπικούρους ξὺν ἑνὶ ἱματίῳ, γυναῖκες δὲ ξὺν δυοῖν. ---ΦΟΦτυρεῖς Μ.---Κεῖοι ΓΑνδριοι Μ, καὶ omitted. —Typior Β ΝΣ Τήιοι AEFGM ; Ἰηΐοι C. - ξυνάσποντο all the good
68 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
ὅ Ἴωνές γε ἐπὶ Δωριέας ἠκολούθουν. πρὸς δ᾽ αὐτοῖς Αἰολῆς, Μηθυμναῖοι μὲν ναυσὶ καὶ οὐ φόρῳ ὑπήκοοι, Τενέδιοι δὲ καὶ Αἴνιοι ὑποτελεῖς. 50 οὗτοι δὲ Αἰολῆς Αἰολεῦσι τοῖς κτίσασι Βοιωτοῖς [μετὰ Συρακοσίων] κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην ἐμάχοντο, Πλαταιῆς δὲ καὶ ἄντικρυς Βοιωτοὶ Βοιωτοῖς
ὃ μόνοι εἰκότως κατ᾽ ἔχθος. Ῥόδιοι δὲ καὶ Κυθή- prot Δωριῆς ἀμφότεροι, οἱ μὲν Λακεδαιμονίων 85 ἄποικοι, Κυθήριοι, ἐπὶ Λακεδαιμονίους τοὺς ἅμα Γυλέίππῳ μετὰ ᾿Αθηναίων ὅπλα ἔφερον, “Ῥόδιοι δέ, ᾿Αργεῖοι γένος, Συρακοσίοις μὲν Δωριεῦσι, Γελῴοις δὲ καὶ ἀποίκοις ἑαυτῶν οὖσι, μετὰ Συρακοσίων στρατευομένοις, ἠναγκάζοντο πο- 40
ἡ λεμεῖν. τῶν τε περὶ Πελοπόννησον νησιωτῶν Κεφαλλῆνες μὲν καὶ Ζακύνθιοι αὐτόνομοι μέν, κατὰ δὲ τὸ νησιωτικὸν μᾶλλον κατειργόμενοι, ὅτι θαλάσσης ἐκράτουν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ξυνείποντο: Κερκυραῖοι δὲ οὐ μόνον Δωριῆς ἀλλὰ καὶ Kopiv- 45 θιοι σαφῶς ἐπὶ Κορινθίους τε καὶ Συρακοσίους, τῶν μὲν ἄποικοι ὄντες, τῶν δὲ ξυγγενεῖς, ἀνάγκῃ
3 fe) > a / \ μὲν ἐκ τοῦ εὐπρεποῦς, βουλήσει δὲ κατὰ ἔχθος 8 τὸ Κορινθίων οὐχ ἧσσον εἵποντο. καὶ οἱ Μεσσή- ΄“ 4 2 ’ \ 3 + νίοι νῦν καλούμενοι ἐκ Ναυπάκτου καὶ ἐκ IvaAov δὲ
ς 393 » / 3 9 A , rote ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων ἐχομένης ἐς τὸν πόλεμον παρελήφθησαν. καὶ ἔτι Μεγαρέων φυγάδες οὐ
“Ἴωνές τε all but B.
δ [μετὰ Z.] I bracket ; Βοιωτοῖς <rofs> μετὰ Σ. Lindan.— καὶ ἄντικρυς Bh. for MSS. καταντικρὺ Which is always local in - Attic.
6. ἄποικοι [Κυθήριοι] Bothe ; but ef. c. 86, 8.
8. ἐκ Ναυπάκτου B only ; rest ἐν N αὐπάκτῳ; ; hence ἐν N. ἐκ Ν. Cl. ; <ol> ἐκ Ναυπάκτου [καὶ] Kr.
1
ἘΥΓΤΡΑΦΗΣ Ζ (57) 69
πολλοὶ Μεγαρεῦσι Σελινουντίοις οὖσε κατὰ ξυμ-
9 φορὰν ἐμάχοντο. τῶν δὲ ἄλλων ἑκούσιος μᾶλ-
λον ἡ στρατεία ἐγίγνετο ἤδη. ᾿Αργεῖοι μὲν γὰρ 55 ϑ ΄- A A A ov τῆς ξυμμαχίας ἕνεκα μᾶλλον ἢ τῆς Λακεδαι- μονίων τε ἔχθρας καὶ τῆς παραυτίκα ἕκαστοι ἰδίας ὠφελίας Δωριῆς ἐπὶ Δωριέας μετὰ ᾿Αθη- / yy 7 3 ’ a \ yw . ναίων ᾿Ιώνων ἠκολούθουν, Μαντινῆς δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι ᾿Αρκάδων μισθοφόροι, ἐπὶ τοὺς αἰεὶ πολεμίους 60 σφίσιν ἀποδεικνυμένους εἰωθότες ἰέναι, καὶ τότε τοὺς μετὰ Κορινθίων ἐλθόντας ᾿Αρκάδας οὐδὲν ἧσσον διὰ κέρδος ἡγούμενοι πολεμίους, Κρῆτες δὲ καὶ Αἰτωλοὶ μισθῷ καὶ οὗτοι πεισθέντες" ξυνέβη δὲ τοῖς Κρησὶ τὴν Γέλαν “Ῥοδίοις ξυγ- 6 / \ \ ζω 3 2 > » \ κτίσαντας μὴ ξὺν τοῖς ἀποίκοις, GAN ἐπὶ τοὺς 9 ’ e 7 σι A ποίκους ἑκόντας μετὰ μισθοῦ ἐλθεῖν. καὶ ᾿Ακαρνάνων τινὲς ἅμα μὲν κέρξει, τὸ δὲ πλέον 7 ’ > > ’ U4 Δημοσθένους φιλίᾳ καὶ Αθηναίων εὐνοίᾳ ξύμμα- ot ὄντες ἐπεκούρησαν. καὶ οἵδε μὲν τῷ ‘lovin: κόλπῳ ὁριζόμενοι: ᾿Ιταλιωτῶν δὲ Θούριοι καὶ Μεταπόντιοι, ἐν τοιαύταις ἀνάγκαις τότε στα- σιωτικῶν καιρῶν κατειλημμένοι, ξυνεστράτενον, καὶ Σικελιωτῶν Νάξιοι " “καὶ Καταναῖοι, βαρ- βάρων δὲ ᾿Ἐγεσταῖοί τε, οἵπερ ἐπηγάγοντο, Kal’ feria Σικελῶν τὸ πλέον, καὶ τῶν ἔξω Σικελία vpon- νῶν τέ τινες κατὰ διαφορὰν Συρακοσίων καὶ
9. yap om. all but Β.---οὖν for οὐ Μ.--- ὠφελίας om. all but B.—dkxovras for ἑκόντας all but B.
11, ᾿Ιωνίων Μ.---στρατιωτικῶν AEFM.—xarethnupévor Reiske for MSS. -μένων. ----ῆ4 ικελιωτῶν om. Μ.---τε after ’Evyeorato: om. all but B.
70 BOYKYAIAOY
Ἰάπυγες μισθοφόροι. τοσάδε μὲν μετὰ ᾿Αθη-
αίων vacbion δὲ ἂν (8) Συρακ ίοις δὲ ἀντεβοήθησαν Καμαριναῖοι
μὲν ὅμοροι ὄντες καὶ Τελῷοι οἰκοῦντες pet’. av- τούς, ἔπειγα “AK ἐῥάναντίνων ἡσυχαζόντων Ἰέν τῷ.
ἃ ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖν ἐδρυμένοι Σελινούντιοι. καὶ οἷδε μὲν τῆς Σικελίας τ τὸ pos Διβύην μέρος τετραμμένον 5 νεμό Evol, Ἵμεραῖοι δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ πρὸς τὸν Τυρση- νικὸν πόντον μορίου, ἐν ᾧ καὶ μόνοι “Ἑλληνες οἰκοῦσιν" οὗτοι δὲ καὶ ἐξ αὐτοῦ μόνοι ἐβοήθησαν.
8 καὶ "Ελληνικὰ μὲν ἔθνη τῶν ἐν Σικελίᾳ τοσάδε, Δωριῆς τε καὶ [or] αὐτόνομοι πάντες, ξυνεμάχουν, 10 βαρβάρων δὲ Σικελοὶ μόνοι» ὅσοι pn ἀφέστασαν πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους" τῶν δ᾽ ἔξω Σικελίᾷς " Ελ- λήνων Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν ἡγεμόνα Σπαρτιάτην
νον a Ne On
παρεχόμενδί, νεοδαμώ εἰς δὲ τοὺς ἄλλους καὶ Εἴλωτας [δύναται δὲ τὸ νεοδαμῶδες ἐλεύθερον 15 ἤδη εἶναι], Κορίνθιοι δὲ καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ μόνοι παραγενόμενοι καὶ Λευκάδιοι καὶ ᾿Αμ- πρακιῶται κατὰ τὸ ξυγγενές, ἐκ δὲ ᾿Αρκαδίας μισθοφόροι ὑπὸ Κορινθίων ἀποσταλέντες, καὶ Σικυώνιοι ἀναγκαστοὶ Ἰστοὶ στρατεύοντες, καὶ τῶν 20 4 ἔξω ᾿ Πελοποννήσου ον Βοιωτοί. pe τοὺς ἐπελθόντας τούτους οἱ ἘΝ αὐτοὶ oe πλέον κατὰ πάντα “παρέσχοντο, ἅτε, μεγάλας πόλεις οἰκοῦντες" καὶ γὰρ ὁπλῖται “πολλοὶ καὶ
2. μεραῖοι for ‘Ipepaior M.
98 3. pees M.—[ol] Bk.—[8dvarac . . εἷναι] Portus. The Schol. did not find these words, for he notes νεοδαμώδης ὁ ἐλεύ- θερος παρὰ τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις. For ἤδη ‘lately’ in Scholia ef. viii. 48, 5 σαφῶς ἔφη εἰδέναι ὅτι οὔτε al ἤδη ἀφεστηκυῖαι προσ- χωρήσουσιν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον, οὔτε αἱ ὑπήκοοι βεβαιότεραι ἔσονται.
ΕΥΡΡΡΑΦΗΣ Ζ (57—60) 71
νῆες καὶ ἵπποι καὶ ἄλλος | ὅμιλος ἄφθονος ξυν- 2s ελέγη. καὶ πρὸς ‘GHavras αὖθις ὡς εἴπεῖν τοὺς ἄλλους Συρακόσιον αὐτοὶ πλείω ἐπορίσαντο διὰ μέγεθός τε πόλεως καὶ ὅτι ἐν μεγίστῳ κινδύνῳ ἦσαν.
(8 59) Καὶ αἱ μὲν ἑκατέρων ἐπικουρίαι τοσάδε ἕννε:
‘ δι fee, »
--..., . λέγησαν, καὶ τότε ἤδη πᾶσαι ἀμφοτέροις παρῆσαν καὶ οὐκέτι οὐδὲν οὐδετέροις ἐπῆλθεν.
2 Οἱ δ᾽ οὖν Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι εἰκότως
ἐνόμισαν καλὸν ἀγώνισμα σφίσιν mes. might ὅ
well feel a con- εἶναι͵ ἐπὶ τῇ γεγενημένῃ νίκῃ THS sciousness of the
ναυμαχίας ἑλεῖν Te τὸ στρατόπεδον Free wees staat
ἅπαν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τοσοῦτον dy, © *ke- \ y ᾽ ’ὔ , Ῥ» , καὶ μηδὲ καθ᾽ Erepa αὐτούς, μήτε διὰ θαλάσσης / “an A , ὃ μήτε΄ τῷ WElO, γγεῖν. ἔκλῃον οὖν TOV TE 10 Ζ..,, 70\ \ , Ν ἽΝ / 3 ‘ λιμένα εὐθὺς τὸν μέγαν, ἔχοντα τὸ στόμα ὀκτὼ σταδίων μάλιστα, τριήρεσι πλαχίαις καὶ πλοίοις καὶ ἀκάτοις, ἐ ° ἢ ἦν ἔτι ναυμαχεῖν ot ᾿Αθηνᾳῖδι τό μῆσωσὰ "σκευάζοντο, καὶ ὀλύγον οὐδὲν ἐς οὐδὲν ἐπενόουν." 60 τοῖς δὲ ᾿Αθηναίοις τήν τε ἀπόκλῃσιν ὁρῶσι καὶ A a τὴν ἄλλην διάνοιαν αὐτῶν αἰσθομένοις βουλευτέα 407 \ ’ Ψ N \ e 2 ἐδόκει. καὶ ξυνέλθοντες οἵ τε στρατηγοὶ καὶ ot ταξίαρχοι πρὸς τὴν παροῦσαν ἀπορίαν τῶν τε Ν ἣν \ 3 ἠδ A > ν Ν 9 ἄλλων καὶ OTL TA ἐπιτήδεια οὔτε αὐτίκα ETL ELYOV
| ?
σι
4͵ συνελέγη all but Β.---αυρακο(υ)σίους all but Β. ---τε after μέγεθος B only, which also has γὰρ after d71.—kal . . ἦσαν om.
59” 2. re οὖν MSS., cor. Kr.—xail of ξύμ. B only ; ; rest om., and so Hu. - ἀγώνισμα B only ; rest ἀγῶνα. ---καθ᾽ ἑκάτερα AEF GM. 3. ἔκλειον BAGM. 60 1. ἀπόκλεισιν BAEGM.
72
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
(προπέμψαντες γὰρ ἐς Κατάνην ὡς ἐκπλευσόμε- vot ἀπεῖπον μὴ ἐπάγειν) οὔτε τὸ λοιπὸν ἔμελλον ἕξειν, εἰ μὴ ναυκρατήσουσιν, ἐβουλεύσαντο τὰ μὲν τείχη τὰ ἄνω ἐκλιπεῖν, πρὸς δὲ αὐταῖς ταῖς
‘N. and his colleagues now evacuated the upper portion of their lines ; confining them- selves to a limited space close to the shore. They then made ready every trireme which could be rendered ever so imperfectly sea- worthy, con- straining every © fit man to serve, without distinc- tion of age, rank, or country.’
ναυσὶν ἀπολαβόντες διατειχίσματι ὅσον οἷόν τε ἐλάχιστον τοῖς τε σκεύεσι καὶ τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν ἱκανὸν γενέσθαι, τοῦτο μὲν φρουρεῖν, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ ἄλλου πεζοῦ τὰς ναῦς ἁπάσας, ὅσαι ἧσαν καὶ δυναταὶ καὶ ἀπλοώ- τεραι, πάντα τινὰ ἐσβιβάξοντες πληρῶσαι, καὶ διαναυμαχήσαντες, ἢν μὲν νικῶσιν, ἐς Κατάνην κομέ- ἕεσθαι, nv δὲ μή, ἐμπρήσαντες τὰς ναῦς πεζῇ ξυνταξάμενοι ἀποχωρεῖν
ἡ ἂν τάχιστα μέλλωσί τινος χωρίου ἢ βαρβαρι-
3 κοῦ ἢ ᾿Ελληνικοῦ φιλίου ἀντιλήψεσθαι.
μόν, ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς ταῦτα, καὶ ἐποίησαν" ἔκ τε γὰρ τῶν ἄνω τειχῶν ὑποκατέβησαν καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἐπλήρωσαν πάσας, ἀνωγκάσαντες ἐσβαίνειν 25 ὅστις καὶ ὁπωσοῦν ἐδόκει ἡλικίας μετέχων ἐπι-
4 τήδειος εἶναι.
a [4 4 e 4 / > 3 πᾶσαι δέκα μάλιστα καὶ ἑκατὸν" τοξότας τε ἐπ αὐτὰς πολλοὺς καὶ ἀκοντιστὰς τῶν τε ᾿Ακαρ- νάνων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ξένων ἐσεβίβαξον καὶ 80
4 ς ’» 2.4 2 3 / \ , τἄλλα ws οἷον τ᾽ ἦν ἐξ ἀναγκαίου τε καὶ τοιαύτης
2. ἀσθενέσιν) ἀσθενοῦσιν Β.---ἀπάσας] πάσας all but Β.---ἐσβιά- ζοντας for ἐσβιβάζοντες AEFM. 8, [ἡλικίας μετέχων] Hw.
4, ἐξ ἀναγκαίον τε καὶ τοιαύτης 6.] Cf. vi. 37, 2 ἐκ σκηνιδίων καὶ
ἀναγκαίας παρασκευῆς, where however Hw. proposes καὶ - ἀπ᾽:
καὶ οἱ
καὶ ξυνεπληρώθησαν νῆες αἱ
10
15
20
EYITPAPHS Z (60—61) 73
5 διανοίας érropicavto. ὁ δὲ Νικίας, ἐπειδὴ τὰ
61
πολλὰ ἑτοῖμα ἦν, ὁρῶν τοὺς στρατιώ- ἐκ, saw ναὶ too
. inly th τας τῷ τε παρὰ TO εἰωθὸς πολὺ ταῖς plainly that the tual to A. on
ναυσὶ κρατηθῆναι ἀθυμοῦντας, καὶ shipboard was διὰ \ a ? Sel , ς . extinct.’ la τὴν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων σπάνιν ὡς τάχιστα βουλομένους διακινδυνεύειν, ξυγκαλέσας Φ ͵ A ἅπαντας παρεκελεύσατό τε πρῶτον καὶ ἔλεξε τοιάδε. “ἾΑνδρες στρατιῶται ᾿Αθηναίων τε καὶ τῶν rAX 4 e \ > Ν e aN ἄλλων ξυμμάχων, 0 μὲν ἀγὼν ὁ μέλ- «He did his best ξ — - λων ὁμοίως Kowds ἅπασιν ἔσται ἘΣ ρος
περί τε σωτηρίας καὶ πατρίδος ἑκά- "ir asker, c. 61 e
OTOLS οὐχ ἧσσον ἢ τοῖς πολεμίοις" ἢν Soming
, a / tt] i f yap κρατήσωμεν viv ταῖς ναυσίν, plese
ἔστι τῳ τὴν ὑπάρχουσάν που οἰκείαν —POrpanee-
πρόθεσις
’ nw 2 πόλιν ἐπιδεῖν. ἀθυμεῖν δὲ od χὴ SERB Δ 3 7 of ες» / down- οὐδὲ πάσχειν ὅπερ οἱ ἀπειρότατοι eared. τῶν ἀνθρώπων, of τοῖς πρώτοις “ἰρμανο
61
dv. π. Here, too, Thuc. perhaps wrote ἐξ ἀναγκαίου τε κἀπὸ τοιαύτης 6. Cf. v. 11, 2 διὰ τὸ μὴ ἐκ παρατάξεως, ἀπὸ δὲ τοιαύτης ξυντυχίας τὴν μάχην γενέσθαι.
5. καὶ τοὺς στρατιώτας all but Β.
1. [ἑκάστοις οὐχ ἧσσον ἢ τοῖς π.] Cl., Sta., Sitz.; ἑκάστοις [οὐχ ἧσσον ἣ τοῖς π.) Hw., Hu. The words are considered absurd, because the Syr. were no longer in doubt about their safety ; whereas the A. had lost all hope of success and wanted only to return home. But Th. means: ‘‘ Before, the enemy only fought περί re σωτηρίας καὶ πατρίδος ; now we too are fight- ing for our country,” 1.6. to secure our return. Miiller-Stru- bing, who reads ἑκάστοις « ἡμῶν:, points out that there is a different nuance in πατρὶς as used of the Syr. and A. Asa word is required which will emphasize the contrast between the circumstances of the present and those of the past, it may be that ἤδη is lost after ἧσσον ; but perhaps ὁ μέλλων is intended to hint at this contrast.
74 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΊΔΟΥ
i- a \ Cissitades ἀγῶσι σφαλέντες ἔπειτα διὰ παντὸς
.. Yor have τὴν ἐλπίδα τοῦ φόβου ὁμοίαν ταῖς
3 numbers. ξυμφοραῖς ἔχουσιν. ἀλλ᾽ ὅσοι τε ᾿Αθηναίων πάρεστε, πολλῶν ἤδη πολέμων ἔμ- metpot ὄντες, καὶ ὅσοι τῶν ξυμμάχων, ξυστρα- τευόμενοι αἰεί, μνήσθητε τῶν ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις παραλόγων, καὶ τὸ τῆς τύχης κἂν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν ἐλπίσαντες στῆναι καὶ ὡς ἀναμαχούμενοι ἀξίως τοῦδε τοῦ πλήθους, ὅσον αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἐφορᾶτε, παρασκευάξεσθε.
62 “A δὲ ἀρωγὰ ἐνείδομεν ἐπὶ τῇ τοῦ λιμένος II. πίστις (C 62- στενότητι πρὸς TOV μέλλοντα ὄχλον
Reasons τῶν νεῶν ἔσεσθαι καὶ πρὸς τὴν why courage is ἴο be ea ἐκείνων ἐπὶ TOY καταστρωμάτων f a) Num. παρασκευήν, ols πρότερον ἐβλαπτό- 6150 ra a A archers μεθα, πάντα καὶ ἡμῖν νῦν ἐκ τῶν and da ; a a oss GD: παρόντων μετὰ τῶν κυβερνητῶν ἐσ- -) improve- 2 “ments in κεμμένα ἡτοίμασται. καὶ yap τοξ- eships , ($§8,4). oTas πολλοὶ καὶ ἀκοντισταὶ ἐπι-
20
βήσο ὶ ὄχλος ᾧ ναυμαχίαν μὲν ποιούμενο ἥσονται καὶ ὄχλος ᾧ ναυμαχίαν μ μενοι 10
ἐν πελάγεϊ οὐκ ἂν ἐχρώμεθα διὰ τὸ βλάπτειν ἂν τὸ τῆς ἐπιστήμης τῇ βαρύτητι τῶν νεῶν, ἐν δὲ τῇ ἐνθάδε ἠναγκασμένῃ ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν πεζομαχίᾳ ὃ πρόσφορα ἔσται. ηὕρηται δ᾽ ἡμῖν ὅσα χρὴ
A \ A ἀντιναυπηγεῖσθαι, καὶ πρὸς τὰς τῶν ἐπωτίδων 15
a 4 αὐτοῖς παχύτητας, ᾧπερ δὴ μάλιστα ἐβλαπτό- μεθα, χειρῶν σιδηρῶν ἐπιβολαί, αἱ σχήσουσι τὴν πάλιν ἀνάκρουσιν τῆς προσπεσούσης νεώς,
869 1. πάντα καὶ ὑμῖν BAEFM. 3. μὴ for χρὴ all but Β. ---δὴ after ᾧπερ B only ; rest on.
BYTTPA®HE Z (61—63) 75
a \ 3 Ἁ lA e 9 Ul e A 3 4 ἣν τὰ ἐπὶ τούτοις οἱ ἐπιβάται ὑπουργῶσιν. ἐς
τοῦτο γὰρ δὴ ἠναγκάσμεθα ὥστε πεζομαχεῖν ἀπὸ 30 τῶν νεῶν, καὶ τὸ μήτε αὐτοὺς ἀνακρούεσθαι μήτ᾽ ἐκείνους ἐᾶν ὠφέλιμον φαίνεται, ἄλλως τε καὶ τῆς γῆς πλὴν ὅσον ἂν ὁ πεζὸς ἡμῶν ἐπέχῃ πολε-
68 μίας οὔσης. ὧν χρὴ μεμνημένους διαμάχεσθαι
ὅσον ἂν δύνησθε, καὶ μὴ ἐξωθεῖσθαι 5 Advice how to ἐς αὐτήν, ἀλλὰ ξυμπεσούσης νηὶ νεὼς Wi under the
μὴ πρότερον ἀξιοῦν ἀπολύεσθαι ἢ 6%) (c. 68-
τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ πολεμίου καταστρώ- “ior hop- b. to the
ς Ὁ 2 ματος ὁπλίτας ἀπαράξητε. καὶ ταῦ. “ ocr
a e a Ta τοῖς ὁπλίταις οὐχ ἧσσον τῶν «. Yo the A.
ναυτῶν παρακελεύομαι, ὅσῳ τῶν snecially wv Aa Ν σ΄ ἄνωθεν μᾶλλον τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο’ (5.
ὑπάρχει δ᾽ ἡμῖν ἔτι νῦν ye τὰ πλείω τῷ πεζῷ 10
8 ἐπικρατεῖν. τοῖς δὲ ναύταις παραινῶ καὶ ἐν τῷ
3 A A \ , A 3 “A ra αὐτῷ τῷδε Kai δέομαι μὴ ἐκπεπλῆχθαί τι ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς ἄγαν, τήν τε παρασκευὴν ἀπὸ τῶν καταστρωμάτων βελτίω νῦν ἔχοντας καὶ τὰς
A f 3 / \ e \ 3 a ναῦς πλείους, ἐκείνην τε τὴν ἡδονὴν ἐνθυμεῖσθαι 15 ὡς ἀξία ἐστὶ διασώσασθαι, of τέως ᾿Αθηναῖοι νομιξζόμενοι, καὶ μὴ ὄντες, ἡμῶν τῆς τε φωνῆς τῇ ἐπιστήμῃ καὶ τῶν τρόπων τῇ μιμήσει ἐθαυ- μάξεσθε κατὰ τὴν “Ἑλλάδα, καὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς τῆς
ἡμετέρας οὐκ ἔλασσον κατὰ τὸ ὠφελεῖσθαι ἔς τε 2 Ν \ val ς / \ \ \ 3 A τὸ φοβερὸν τοῖς ὑπηκόοις Kal TO μὴ ἀδικεῖσθαι
68
4, φαίνηται ΒΜ. ---ἐπέχει EFM.
1. ἀξιοῦν B only ; rest ἄξιον. ---ἣν for ἢ CAFM. 2. ἡμῖν] MSS. ὑμῶν ; cor. Bk.
3. βελτίωι Μ.---ὑμῶν for ἡμῶν all the best MSS.
4
64
76 OOYKYAIAOY
πολὺ πλεῖον μετείχετε. ὥστε κοινωνοὶ μόνοι ἐλευθέρως ἡμῖν τῆς ἀρχῆς ὄντες δικαίως [ἂν] αὐτὴν νῦν μὴ καταπροδίδοτε, καταφρονήσαντες δὲ Κορινθίων τε, ods πολλάκις νενικήκατε, καὶ Σ a 4 3 δ᾽ 3 a 9a YN σ΄ LKEMLWTOV, ὧν οὐδ᾽ ἀντιστῆναι οὐδεὶς ἕως ΝΜ \ ‘ ec oA gos 3 4 ἤκμαξε τὸ ναυτικὸν ἡμῖν ἠξίωσεν, ἀμύνασθε 3 \ / Ψ 3 3 / \ αὐτοὺς καὶ δείξατε ὅτι καὶ pet’ ἀσθενείας καὶ ξυμφορῶν ἡ ὑμετέρα ἐπιστήμη κρείσσων ἐστὶν > ἑτέρας εὐτυχούσης ῥώμης. τούς τε ᾿Αθηναίους ὑμῶν πάλιν αὖ καὶ τάδε ὑπομιμνήσκω, ὅτι οὔτε n 3 a / ¥ ¢ Π a ναῦς ἐν τοῖς νεωσοίκοις ἄλλας ὁμοίας ταῖσδε e A οὔτε ὁπλιτῶν ἡλικίαν ὑπελίπετε, εἴ τε ξυμβήσε- ταί Tt ἄλλο ἢ τὸ κρατεῖν ὑμῖν, τούς τε ἐνθάδε / >0\ 9 > 3 a , ‘ πολεμίους εὐθὺς ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνα πλευσομένους καὶ
A 3 a 6 , e Ὁ 3 / 3 , ‘Tous ἐκεῖ ὑπολοίπους ἡμῶν ἀδυνάτους ἐσομένους
’ 9 a \ Α 2 / 2 ’ἤ τούς τε αὐτοῦ καὶ τοὺς ἐπέλθοντας ἀμύνασθαι. e \ e \ 3 A καὶ οἱ μὲν ἂν ὑπὸ Συρακοσίοις εὐθὺς γίγνοισθε, οἷς αὐτοὶ ἴστε οἵα γνώμῃ ἐπήλθετε, οἱ δ᾽ ἐκεῖ ὑπὸ é ‘ ;
2 Λακεδαιμονίοις. “Ὥστε ἐν ἑνὶ τῷδε ὑπὲρ ἀμφο-
64
8. [πολὺ πλεῖον] Kr., and many subsequent edd. Th. makes N. exaggerate the advantages enjoyed by the ναυτικὸς ὄχλος through belonging to the A. empire, and representing its majesty before the outside world. Cf. Junghahn, Studien ’86, p. 50/7.
4, δικαίως ἂν. . xarampodidore] δικαιώσατε. . μὴ καταπρο- διδόναι Bh., and so Hw., Hu., Sitz. ; δικαιοῦσαν αὐτὴν Sta., τι πταίουσαν for δικαίως ἂν Widmann. After all it seems best to bracket ἂν with Bk. and others; for δικαίως is probably in- tended to form an antithesis to ἐλευθέρως : ‘we show towards you a liberal spirit ; do you show towards us a just one.’ For μὴ καταπροδίδοτε we might have had σώσατε: but (1) the nega- tive expression contains a stronger appeal, (2) it connects the appeal with τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖσθαι, (3) it makes παρονομασία with καταφρονήσαντες.
1, ἡμῶν CAEFGM ; ἡύμῶν 1}. ---πλευσομένους BFM; rest -ounévous.—ola (sic) γνώμη Μ, ᾿
a
65
2
3
65
ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z (63—65) 77
τέρων ἀγῶνι καθεστῶτες καρτερήσατε, εἴπερ ποτέ, καὶ ἐνθυμεῖσθε καθ᾽ ἑκάστους τε καὶ ξύμ- παντες ὅτι οἱ ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν ὑμῶν τι. ξπίλονος. On νῦν ἐσόμενοι καὶ πεζοὶ τοῖς ᾿Αθη- fr issue depend 15 ναίοις εἰσὶ καὶ νῆες καὶ «ἡ» ὑπό- “Ahr
λουπος πόλις καὶ τὸ μόγα ὄνομα τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν, περὶ ὧν, εἴ τίς τι ἕτερος ἑτέρου προφέρει ἢ ἐπιστήμῃ ἢ εὐψυχίᾳ, οὐκ ἂν ἐν ἄλλῳ μᾶλλον καιρῷ ἀποδειξάμενος αὐτός τε αὑτῷ ὠφέλεμος 30 γένοιτο καὶ τοῖς ξύμπασι σωτήριος."
‘O μὲν Νικίας τοσαῦτα παρακελευσάμενος εὐθὺς ἐκέλευε πληροῦν τὰς ναῦς. ‘Very different τῷ δὲ Γυλέππῳ καὶ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις prevalent, and
a \ 3 ’ Cc oa \ παρῆν μὲν αἰσθάνεσθαι, ὁρῶσι καὶ the burning
pm F » OP words uttered
αὐτὴν THY παρασκευήν, ὅτι vav γ- on the sea-board 5 ΡΣ veer. Be σουσιν ot ναῖοι, πτροηγγέ atation.—G. sen 0 » ™P ayy q the fleet out
αὐτοῖς καὶ ἡ ἐπιβολὴ τῶν σιδηρῶν with the usual χειρῶν, Kal πρός Te τἄλλα ἐξηρτύ- harangue.” σαντο ws ἕκαστα καὶ πρὸς tovTo’ τὰς yap πρῴρας καὶ τῆς νεὼς ἄνω ἐπὶ πολὺ κατεβύρσω.- 10 σαν, ὅπως ἂν ἀπολισθάνοι καὶ μὴ “ἔχοι ἀντι- λαβὴν ἡ χεὶρ ἐπιβαλλομένη. καὶ ἐπειδὴ πάντα ἑτοῖμα ἦν, παρεκελεύσαντο ἐκείνοις οἵ τε στρατη- γοὶ καὶ Γύλιππος καὶ ἔλεξαν τοιάδε.
2. [καὶ vijes] Badham ; καὶ ἱππῆς Gomperz. Cf. Miad vi. 429 Ἕκτορ, ἀτὰρ σύ μοι ἔσσι πατὴρ καὶ πότνια μήτηρ ] ἠδὲ κασίγ- vyros. Hw. reads ὅτι ἐν rots ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν ὑμῶν viv ἐσομένοις, 1.6. ex tis pendent, comparing Eur. Jph. A. 1379 κἀν ἐμοὶ πορθ- pbs τε ναῶν καὶ Φρνγῶν κατασκαφαί.---ἡ Valla; MSS. om.—n om. Μ.---αὐτῶ(ι) CAEFGM ; ἑαυτῶι Β.
2. καὶ ὅπως Ν.--- ὅπως [av] Hw.—éxn BM.
3. ἕτοιμα πάντα B.
66
67
66
67
78 - BOYKYAIAOY
““Ὅτι μὲν καλὰ τὰ προειργασμένα καὶ ὑπὲρ
a A / I. gh προοίμιον καλῶν τῶν μελλόντων ὁ ἀγὼν ἔσται, is , all in'the form ὦ Συρακόσιοι καὶ ξύμμαχοι, of τε
a. Whatwe πολλοὶ δοκεῖτε ἡμῖν εἰδέναι (οὐδὲ have already
done is yap ἂν αὐτῶν οὕτως προθύμως ἀντε- ζε1, 3. λάβεσθε) καὶ εἴ τις μὴ ἐπὶ ὅσον δεῖ σον δεῖ
ὃ. The enemy’s Bn
hopes are ἤσθηται, σημανοῦμεν. ᾿Αθηναίους 5. Ourhopes yap ἐς τὴν χώραν τήνδε ἐλθόντας
ὦ ΙΝ πρῶτον μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς Σικελίας κατα- δουλώσει, ἔπειτ᾽, εἰ κατορθώσειαν, καὶ τῆς Πελοποννήσου καὶ τῆς ἄλλης Ἑλλάδος, καὶ ἀρχὴν τὴν ἤδη μεγίστην τῶν τε πρὶν “Ἑλλήνων καὶ τῶν νῦν κεκτημένους, πρῶτοι ἀνθρώπων ὑποστάντες τῷ ναυτικῷ, ᾧπερ πάντα κατέσχον, τὰς μὲν νενικήκατε ἤδη ναυμαχίας, τὴν δ᾽ ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος νῦν νικήσετε. ἄνδρες γὰρ ἐπειδὰν ᾧ ἀξιοῦσι προύχειν κολουθῶσι, τό γ᾽ ὑπόλοιπον αὐτῶν τῆς δόξης ἀσθενέστερον αὐτὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἐστιν ἢ εἰ pnd φήθησαν τὸ πρῶτον, καὶ τῷ Trap ἐλπίδα τοῦ αὐχήματος σφαλλόμενοι καὶ παρὰ ἰσχὺν τῆς δυνάμεως ἐνδιδόασιν" ὃ νῦν ᾿Αθηναίους εἰκὸς πεπονθέναι. ἡμῶν δὲ τό τε ὑπάρχον πρότερον, ᾧπερ καὶ ἀνεπιστήμονες ἔτι ὄντες ἀπετολμήσαμεν, βεβαιότερον νῦν, καὶ τῆς δοκή- σεως προσγεγενημένης αὐτῷ τοῦ κρατίστους εἶναι εἰ τοὺς κρατίστους ἐνικήσαμεν, διπλασία
1. οὕτως αὐτῶν all but B.
2. [ἤδη] μεγίστην ΟἹ. ---ἤδη before ναυμαχίας B only ; rest 0 om.
3. κολουσθῶσι CEFGM.—ré for τῴ M; οὕτω Sitz.—drvy%- ματος for αὐχήματος Hw.
1. ὑμῶν MSS.—r1d κρατίστους MSS. ; cor. Kr.
qn
EYTTPA®HS Z (66—67) 79
ἑκάστον ἡ ἐλπίς᾽ τὰ δὲ πολλὰ πρὸς τὰς ἐπι- χειρήσεις ἡ μεγίστη ἐλπὶς μεγίστην καὶ τὴν προθυμίαν παρέχεται.
Τά τε τῆς ἀντιμιμήσεως αὐτῶν τῆς παρα- σκευῆς ἡμῶν τῷ μὲν ἡμετέρῳ τρόπῳ ξυνήθη τέ
ἃ ἐστι καὶ οὐκ ἀνάρμοστοι πρὸς ἕὅκα-
II. πίστις (6. 67,
a f - στον αὐτῶν ἐσόμεθα" οἱ δ᾽, ἐπειδὰν 24) THEA. e “A . πολλοὶ μὲν ὁπλῖται ἐπὶ τῶν κατα- «Αγ δατο pre- , ὰ \ θ \ 4 pared to
πολλοὶ δὲ καὶ ἀκοντισταί, χερσαῖοι ὕμνος
ς 3 a9 A as δ » § 2); ὡς εἰπεῖν Axkapvaves τε. Kat ἄλλον 5, ‘me'num. ἐπὶ ναῦς ἀναβάντες, οἱ οὐδ᾽ ὅπως Pereon
΄. \ \ / a καθεξομένους χρὴ τὸ βέλος ἀφεῖναι hen ραν 4 A ἴω
εὑρήσουσι, πῶς οὐ σφαλοῦσί τε TAS “ἀνα ταπιθοτ ναῦς καὶ ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς πάντες, = Sipe will
᾽ ? aA ean / 4. more harm οὐκ ἐν τῷ αὑτῶν τρόπῳ κινούμενοι, than good
7 4 \ a / bd
tapafovrat; ἐπεὶ καὶ τῷ πλήθει 4 THei are
A A a τῶν νεῶν οὐκ ὠφελήσονται, εἴ τις ἜΡΩΣ δ
(8 4).
4 ig fa) 4 3 ΝΜ καὶ τόδε ὑμῶν, ὅτι οὐκ ἴσαις vav- 4 μαχήσει, πεφόβηται' ἐν ὀλίγῳ. γὰρ πολλαὶ A ἀργότεραι μὲν ἐς τὸ δρῶν τι ὧν βούλονται ἔσον- Ca \ ? Α 4 3 3. φ e A ται, ῥᾷσται δὲ ἐς TO βλάπτεσθαι ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἡμῖν παρεσκεύασται. τὸ δ᾽ ἀληθέστατον γνῶτε, ἐξ Φ e ral 47 ral 7 Α ς ὧν ἡμεῖς οἰόμεθα σαφῶς πεπύσθαι' ὑπερβαλ-
la a) A a) ’ λόντων γὰρ αὐτοῖς τῶν κακῶν καὶ βιαζόμενοι :
ὑπὸ τῆς παρούσης ἀπορίας ἐς ἀπόνοιαν καθε- στήκασιν οὐ παρασκευῆς πίστει μᾶλλον ἢ τύχης 1. τὰ δὲ. , ἐλπὶς Β only ; rest om.
2. ἕκαστον B only; rest τὴν ἑκάστην ; τὴν ἑκάστην τέχνην Hu. ---αὑτῶν] αὐτῶι EGM; αὐτῶν ACF; ἑαντῶν Β.
el
0
80 BOY KYAIAOY
ἀποκινδυνεῦσαι οὕτως ὅπως δύνανται, iy ἢ βια- σάμενοι ἐκπλεύσωσιν ἢ κατὰ γῆν μετὰ τοῦτο τὴν ΄΄ὸ A ’ 9 ἀποχώρησιν ποιῶνται, ὡς τῶν γε παρόντων. οὐκ ἂν πράξαντες χεῖρον. 68 Πρὸς οὖν ἀταξίαν τε τοιαύτην καὶ τύχην IIL. ἐπίλογον, ἀνδρῶν ἑαυτὴν παραδεδωκυῖαν πολε- a. . ‘ A Justice ison μιωτάτων, ὀργῇ προσμείξωμεν, καὶ our 8166. . Ὁ. 88. Suc. vouiowpey ἅμα μὲν νομεμώτατον cess now : willmake εἶναί πρὸς τοὺς ἐναντίους, οἱ ἂν ὡς us secure . , . , once forall. ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ τοῦ προσπεσόντος δι- A a 4 \ καιώσωσιν ἀποπλῆσαι τῆς γνώμης TO θυμούμενον, 4 7 a ἅμα δὲ ἐχθροὺς ἀμύνασθαι ἐκγενησόμενον ἡμῖν / \ “ ,ὕ ay 9 e A ὁ καί, TO λεγόμενον που, ἥδιστον εἶναι. ὡς δὲ ἐχθροὶ καὶ ἔχθιστοι πάντες ἴστε, οἵ γε ἐπὶ τὴν “ ἡμετέραν ἦλθον δουλωσόμενοι, ἐν ᾧ, εἰ κατώρ- ΟΝ θωσαν, ἀνδράσι μὲν ἂν τὰ ἄλγιστα προσέθεσαν, παισὶ δὲ καὶ γυναιξὶ τὰ ἀπρεπέστατα, πόλει δὲ a VA A 3 / 9 “ 3 > φ- 4 8 τῇ πάσῃ. τὴν αἰσχίστην ἐπίκλησιν. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν μὴ fe) 4 ’ δὲ \ 9 , μαλακισθῆναί τινα πρέπει μηδὲ τὸ ἀκινδύνως ἀπελθεῖν αὐτοὺς κέρδος νομίσαι. τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ ς / καὶ ἐὰν κρατήσωσιν, ὁμοίως δράσουσι" τὸ δέ, A / 4 πραξάντων ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος ἃ βουλόμεθα, τούσδε τε κολασθῆναι καὶ τῇ πάσῃ Σικελίᾳ καρπουμένῃ A “A καὶ πρὶν ἐλευθερίαν βεβαιοτέραν παραδοῦναι,
4, ἀποκινδυνεύσει MSS. ; cor. Duker.—frafsuevoe for βιασά- μενοι Μ.--- ποιοῦνται CEFM.—mpdtovres BCEGM. 68 1. πῶς for πρὸς Μ.-- ἐκγενησόμενον B only; rest ἐγγενη- σόμενον.---[καὶ] Reiske and subsequent edd., taking ἥδιστον εἶναι as dependent on λεγόμενον. But the construction is probably ἐκγενησόμενον καὶ ἥδ. εἶναι, while τὸ A. που is absolute, as in ὁ, 87, 6, and as it regularly is. 3. πραξάντων ἡμῶν Β. ---τοὺς δέ re καὶ M.
35
ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦῊΣ Z (67—69) 81
ΜΈ oy \ / 2 ΄ , καλὸς ὁ ἀγών. καὶ κινδύνων οὗτοι σπανιώτατοι οἱ ἂν ἐλάχιστα ἐκ τοῦ σφαλῆναι βλάπτοντες πλεῖστα διὰ τὸ εὐτυχῆσαι Mpedaosy.
69 Καὶ οἱ μὲν τῶν Συρακοσίων otfarnyol καὶ Γύλιππος τοιαῦτα καὶ αὐτοὶ τοῖς σφετέροις στρατιώταις ee ap ἀντεπλήρουν τὰς
a >a\ τρίς t 9 , ναῦς εὐθὺς ἐπειδὴ καὶ Tous Αθηναίους ἠσθάνοντο.
2 ὁ δὲ Νικίας ὑπὸ τῶν παρόντων ἐκπεπληγμένος 5 καὶ ὁρῶν οἷος ὁ κίνδυνος καὶ ὡς ἐγγὺς ἤδη [Hv], ἐπειδὴ καὶ ὅσον οὐκ ἔμελλον a ἄγε- , LN., feeling more
᾿ Gan JY
.,’ keenly than any
σθαι, καὶ νομίσας, ὅπερ πάσχουσιν man the in- -- - tensity of thie
3 A lA 3 “A “w wir ἐν τοῖς μεγάλο σι, WavTa ΤΕ last death 5 (5 ἀγῶσι, struggle,— still
¥ 4 ΄΄- ? ἔργῳ ἔτι σφίσιν ἐνδεᾶ εἶναι καὶ thought that he 10
> a PO. Se a λόγῳ αὐτοῖς οὕπω ἑκανὰ εἰρῆσθαι, enough. He A now renew αὖθις τῶν τριηράρχων ἕνα ἕκαστον his appeal
ἀνεκάλει, πατρόθεν. τε ἐπονομάξων the trlerareha. καὶ αὐτοὺς ὀνομαστὶ καὶ φυλήν, ἀξιῶν τό τε καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, ᾧ ὑπῆρχε λάμπρότητός τι, μὴ 15 προδιδόναι τινὰ καὶ τὰς πατρικὰς ἀρετάς, ὧν ἐπιφανεῖς ἦσαν οἱ πρόγονοι, μὴ ἀφανίζειν, . πατρίδος τε τῆς ἐλευθερωτάτης ὑπομιμνήσκων * καὶ τῆς ἐν αὐτῇ ἀνεπιτάκτον πᾶσιν ἐς τὴν δίαυταν ἐξουσίας, ἄλλὰ τε λέγων ὅσα ἐν τῷ 2 τοιούτῳ ἤδῃ τοῦ Καιροῦ ὄντες dvOpartar οὐ πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν τινι ἀρχαιολογεῖν φυλαξάμοενοϊ" εἴποιεν ἄν, καὶ ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων παραπλήσια ἔς τε
3. ὠφελοῦσι all but Β.
69 2. [ἦν] is rightly omitted in B.—épya M.—ér: om. AEFM.— [καὶ αὐτοὺς ὀνομαστὶ] Philippi, Sta., Sitz.; but, if any change is necessary, it would be better to read ὀνομάζων for ἐπ-.---ἠἀτιμάζειν Μ..---ὄντος all but B.—veva for reve Μ.
G
82 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
γυναῖκας καὶ παῖδας καὶ θεοὺς πατρῴους προ- φερόμενα, GAN ἐπὶ τῇ παρούσῃ ἐκπλήξει ὠφέ- 25 Aya νομίξοντες ἐπιβοώνται.
ὃ Καὶ ὁ μὲν οὐχ ἱκανὰ μᾶλλον ἢ καὶ ἀναγκαῖα ‘Heatlength γομίσας παρῃνῆσθαι, ἀποχωρήσας
sengen ᾿ ΤΩ self to loave off ἦγε τὸν πεζὸν σρος τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ
το πὰ ne: παρέταξεν ὡς ἐπὶ πλεῖστον ἐδύνατο,.
Ν — qq ny a a Bee the, OTS OTL μεγίστη τοῖς ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν 5
4 ara pro ©6@pedria ἐς τὸ θαρσεῖν γίγνοιτο. ὁ
Pisced near the δὲ Δημοσθένης καὶ Μένανδρος καὶ
th,—whil a7 e n the rect were, Εὐθύδημος (οὗτοι yap ἐπὶ τὰς vais
he re τον distributed τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοὶ ἐπέβησαν) harbour.’ ¥ ap na e a ἄραντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ἑαυτῶν στρατο- τὸ πέδου εὐθὺς ἔπλεον πρὸς τὸ ζεῦγμα τοῦ λιμένος N \ , / ; ’ καὶ τὸν παρακλῃσθέντα διέκπλουν βουλόμενοι
ae ee
\ - 4 , 70 βιάσασθαι ἐς τὸ ἔξω. δ προεξαγαγόμενοι δὲ οἱ i 4 Συρακόσιοι καὶ ot ξύμμαχοι ναυσὶ παραπλησίαις / ‘ Tov ἀριθμὸν καὶ πρότερον, κατά τε τὸν ἔκπλουν / > A 4 4 \ \ μέρει αὕτων ὑλασσόν καὶ KaTa τὸν ἄλλον oe , κύκλῳ λιμένα, ὅπως πανταχόθεν ἅμα προσπίπ- 5 σ΄ € \ A τοιεν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, καὶ ὁ πεζὸς ἅμα αὐτοῖς
᾽ \ e A 4 4 παρεβοήθει ἧπερ καὶ αἱ νῆες eae Kae
fo) A “A p> oe δὲ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις Σιζαενὸς μὲν
8. μᾶλλον ἢ B; μᾶλλον καὶ the rest; μᾶλλον 4 καὶ Hu. ; μᾶλλον ἣ <ovx> Hw.
4, εὔδημος all but Β.---παρακλῃσθέντα])] παραλειφθέντα CAEFM. Schol., Dion. Hal. ; καταλειφθέντα Β ; παραληφθέντα G3; κατα- ληφθέντα inferior MSS., Valla and several edd. ; περιλειφθέντα Bk. ; [καὶ τὸν καταλειφθέντα δ.) Hw. The variants point to some rarer word which they have displaced, and this word is probably a compound of κλήω. Cf. c. 72, 3. See note.
70 11. προεξαναγόμενοι Dion. Hal.—avrois ἅμα all but B.—zap- εβοήθει Dion. Hal. ; παραβοηθεῖ CM ; παραβοηθῇ B.
Ν Kat
ΞΎΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z (69—70)
83
᾿Αγάθαρχος, κέρας ἑκάτερος τοῦ παντὸς
ἔχων, Πυθὴν δὲ καὶ οἱ Κορίνθιοι τὸ μέσον. 2 ἐπειδὴ δὲ οἱ ἄλλοι ᾿Αθηναῖοι προσέμισγον τῷ ξεύγματι, τῇ μὲν πρώτῃ ῥύμῃ ἐπι- “The A. fleet
πλέοντες ἐκράτουν τῶν τεταγμένων νεῶν πρὸς αὐτῷ, καὶ ἐπειρῶντο λύειν τὰς κλήσεις" pera δὲ τοῦτο παντα- χόθεν σφίσι τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ξυμμάχων ἐπιφερομένων οὐ πρὸς τῷ ξεύγματι ἔτι μόνον ἡ ναυμαχία ἀλλὰ κἂξ--κατὰ τὸν λιμένα ἐγίγνετο, καὶ ἦν καρτερὰ καὶ οἵα οὐχ ἑτέρα τῶν
3 προτέρων.
πολλὴ μὲν γὰρ ἑκατέροις
προθυμία ἀπὸ τῶν ναυτῶν ἐς τὸ' ἐπι- πλεῖν ὁπότε κελευσβείη ἐγίγνετο, πολλὴ δὲ ἡ ἀντιτέχνησις τῶν κυβερνητῶν καὶ
ἀγωνισμὸς πρὸς ἐθεράπευον, λείπεσθαι
made directly for the barrier.— They were al- y attempt- ing to sever its connecting
bonds, when the enemy crowded
in upon them
and forced them to desist. —On both sides a fierce and des- perate courage was displayed,— the skill of the steersmen shone conspicuous.— After a time, all sort of order be- came lost.’
“ἄλλης τέχνης" πᾶς τέ τις ἐν ᾧ προσετέτακτο
αὐτὸς
ἕκαστος
ἦπε bye TO πρῶτος
φαίνεσθαι.
25
f ed ἀλλήλους" οἵ Te ἐπιβάται e / a ὁπότε προσπέσοι ναῦς νηί, μὴ \ ce) a - τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος τῆς
4 ὑμπεσουσῶν δὲ ἐν ὄλίγῳ πολλῶν νεῶν (πλεῖσται 90 γὰρ δὴ αὗται ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ ἐναυμάχησαν" βραχὺ γὰρ ἀπέλιπον ξυναμφότεραι. διακόσιαι γενέσθαι), αἱ μὲν ἐρβολαὶ διὰ τὸ μὴ εἶναι τὰς ἀνακρούσεις καὶ διέκπλους ὀλίγαι ἐγύγνοντο, αἱ δὲ π σβολαί, ὡς τύχοι ναῦς νηὶ προσπεσοῦσα ἢ διὰ τὸ ὁ φεύγειν 86
2. οἱ ἄλλοι om. BM; ἐπειδὴ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι Dion. Hal. ; ἐπ. δὲ καὶ οἱ ἅ. E.—xndeloes ΟΜ. ---ἣν ἡ ναυμαχία Β. 4. ἐκβολαὶ BAFGM, Dion. Hal. —¢vyet AEFM, Dion. Hal.
84 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
δ ἢ ἄλλῃ ἐπιπλέουσα, πυκνότεραι ἦσαν. καὶ ὅσον μὲν χρόνον gr poo ἔροιτο ναῦς, οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν κατα- στρωμάτων τοῖς ἀκοντίοις καὶ τοξεύμασε καὶ λίθοις ἀφθ ἐπ᾿ αὐτὴν ἐχρῶντο: ἐπειδὴ δὲ προσμει με τα, ἐπιβάται ἐς χεῖρας ἰόντες 40 ἐπειρῶντο ταῖς ἀλλήλων ναυσὶν ἐπιβαίνειν.
6 ξυνετύγχανέ τε πολλαχοῦ διὰ τὴν στενοχωρίαν τὰ μὲν ἄλλοις ἐμβεβληκέναι, τὰ δὲ αὐτοὺς ἐμβεβλῆσθαι, δύο τε "Wept μίαν καὶ ἔστιν ἧ καὶ πλείους ναῦς κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην Eup ιρξῦσθος. ταὶ καὶ 45 τοῖς κυβερνήταις τών μὲν φυλακὴν τών βουλήν, μὴ pad! ἕν ἕκαστον, κατὰ πολλὰς δὲ πανταχόθεν, περιεστάναι, καὶ τὸν κτύπον μέγαν ἀπὸ πολλῶν νεῶν ξυμπιπτουσῶν ἔκπληξίν τε. ἅμα καὶ ἀποστέρῃσιν τῆς ἀκοῆς ὧν οἱ K ἐλευσταὶ 50
7 φθέγγοιντο "παρέχεϊν. πολλὴ γὰρ δὴ 7 “tapas, ‘Emulousex- κέλευσις καὶ βοὴ a ἑκατέ ων “σοῖς
hortations were
poured forth, κελευσταῖς κατά τε τὴν τέχνην κα with reproach ἢ wi Sut t
and sarcasm πρὸς τὴν αὐτίκα φιλονικίαν" ἔγὶ ἐγίγνετο, addressed to any
ship which τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίοϊς Bid βιάξεσθαί τε TOV 55 appeare
flinching.’ ἔκπλουν ἐπιβοώντες καὶ τερὶ τῆς ἐς
τὴν πατρίδα σωτηρίας νῦν, εἴ, ποτε καὶ αὖθις, προθύμως ἀντιλβίσθαις Τοῖς δὲ Συρακοσίοις καὶ ξυμμάχοις καλὸν εἶναι κωλῦσαί τε αὐτοὺς διαφυγεῖν καὶ τὴν οἰκείαν ἑκάστους πατρίδα, eo 8 νικήσαντας ἐπαυξῆσαι. καὶ οἱ στρατηγοὶ προσ--
Σ δε
5. els CAFGM. δ ἐφθέγγοντο Dion. Hal. ; φθέγγοντο (sic) Β. ἡ before παρακέλευσις B ‘only ; ; rest om.—re before τὴν τέχ. B and Dion. Hal. only ; ; rest om. —éxdorov M, Dion. Hal.
SYTTPA®HE Z (70—71) 85
ἔτει ἑκατέρων, εἴ τινά που ὁρῷεν μὴ κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην πρύμναν κρουόμενον, ἀνακαλοῦντες ἢ \ ae ae > , e ὲ Ἄ ὀνομαστὶ τὸν tpinpapyov ἠρώτων, οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθη- ναῖοι, εἰ τὴν πολεμεωτάτην γῆν οἰκειοτέραν ἤδη 65 a > QP , ,ὕ τῆς οὐ δι ὀλίγου πογνου κεκτημένης θαλάσσης ς ’ ς δι e \ , t 3 ἡγούμενοι ὑποχωρρῦσιν, οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι, εἰ ods σαφῶς ἴσασι tpobupoupévous [᾿Αθηναίους] παντὶ τρόπῳ διαφυγεῖν, τούτους αὐτοὶ φεύγοντας φεύ- 71 γουσιν. ὅ τε ἐκ τῆς γῆς πεζὸς ἀμ- ‘According as é Jc oppé 5 las εὐἰοᾶ, so followed ated, φοτέρων ἰσορρόποῳ, τῆς ναυμαχίας sted tlle καθεστηκυίας ὁλὺν τὸν ἀγῶνα καὶ wailings of the Evoracw τῆς γνώμης εἶχε, φιλονικῶν ashore.’ μὲν ὁ αὐτόθεν περὶ τοῦ πλείονος ἤδη καλοῦ, 5 δεδιότες δὲ οἱ ἐπελθόντες μὴ τῶν παρόντων ἔτι 2 χείρω πράξωσι. πάντων γὰρ δὴ ἀνακειμένων τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐς τὰς ναῦς “ὅ᾽ τε φόβος ἣν ὑπὲρ τοῦ μέλλοντος οὐδενὶ ἐοικὼς καὶ διὰ τὸ « ἀνώ- μαλον > τῆς ναυμαχίας ἀνώμαλον καὶ τὴν ici 8 ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἠναγκάξοντο ἔχειν. δι᾿ ὀλίγου γὰρ οὔσης τῆς θέας καὶ οὐ. πάντων ἅμα ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ σκοπούντων, εἰ μέν τινες ἴδοιέν πῃ τοὺς σφετέ- ρους ἐπικρατοῦντας, ἀνεθάρσησάν τε ἂν καὶ πρὸς ἀνάκλησιν θεῶν μὴ στερῆσαι σφᾶς τῆς σωτηρίας τὸ 3 , e 3 9. δ Ν ς , / ἐτρέποντο" ot & ἐπὶ τὸ ἡσσώμενον βλέψαντες 8. πόνου is wanting except in B, Schol., Dion. ΗΔ]. ---ἀποχω- ροῦσιν all but B.—[’A@nvalovs] Duker ; then Cl. and subsequent edd. —gevyouew] ἔχουσιν M. 71 42. διὰ τὸ ἀνώμαλον καὶ τὴν ἔποψιν τῆς ναυμαχίας MSS. ; cor. Wolfflin, and so Hw., Sitz. Cf. Plut. Nic. 25 διὰ τὴν παντὸς ἐπίβλεψιν τοῦ ἔργον ποικίλας μεταβολὰς λαμβάνοντος. ---διὰ τὸ
ἀνώμαλον καὶ τὴν ἔποψιν τῆς ναυμαχίας ἐκ τῆς γῆς - εἶναι, ἀνω- μάλως:» ἠναγκάζοντο ἔχειν Gertz. 3. ἂν om. B.
86 SOYKYAIAOY
ὀλοφυρμῷ τε ἅμα peta Bons ἐχρῶντο καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν δρωμένων τῆς ὄψρεως καὶ τὴν γνώμην par- λον τῶν ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ ἐδουλοῦντο- ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ ‘ 3 , / a ——- of > ὃ / 5 \ πρὸς ἀντίπαλον τι τῆς vadjiaylas ἀπιδόντες, διὰ 20 70 ἀκρίτως ξυνεχὲς τῆς ἁμίλλης καὶ τοῖς σώ- pati αὐτοῖς ἴσα τῇ δόξῃ περιδεῶς ξυναπονεύ- οντες ἐν δῖ χαλεπώτατα διῆγον" αἰεὶ γὰρ παρ᾽ 4 ὀλίγον ἢ διέφευγον ἢ ἀπώλλυντο. ἦν τε ἐν τῷ ‘Among (ἢ αὐτῷ στρατεύματι τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, 2 the A. station, ἕως ἀγχώμαλα ἐναυμάχουν, πάντα "τ e a ~ , emotion might O00 ἀκοῦσαι, ὀλοφυρμος, βοή, νε- be seen exagger- a , moeroenyy, 7% a2 > ated into agony. κωντες, κρατούμενοι, ἄλλα OG ἂν ἐν -- σα 7 - ΄ f victory began to μεγάλῳ κινδύνῳ μέγα στρατόπεδον of the 8.’ πολυειδῆῇ ἀναγκάξοιτο᾽ φθέγγεσθαι. 30
ὃ παραπλήσια δὲ “καὶ οἱ ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν αὐτοῖς P λα , \ ε , \ ὃ ge ἔπασχον, πρίν ye δὴ οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ Evp- μαχοι ἐπὶ πολὺ ἀντισχούσης τῆς ναυμαχίας
Lox? ἔτρεψάν Te τοὺς "hOnvalous καὶ ἐπικείμενοι Ὁ A “A ~~ [4 λαμπρῶς, πολλῇ κραυγῇ καὶ διακελευσμῷ χρώ- 35 6 μενοι, κατεδίωκον ἐς τὴν γῆν. τότε δὲ ὁ μὲν » Ν ¥: σν- \ / ναυτικὸς TTPATOS, ἄλλος ἄλλῃ, Oot μὴ μετέωροι πων. ΟὟ ἑάλωσαν, κατενεχθέντες ἐξέπεσον ἐς τὸ στρατό- _* φ πέδον: ὁ δὲ πεζὸς οὐκέτι διαφόρως, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ “ΝᾺ e A 3 Ly apelin ἤ ‘The diverse μιᾶς opus οἰμω} } τε καὶ στοόνῷῳ 40
manifestations / ~ ‘ft : a , among the A. TTQAVTES, UT AVATNETOUITES τὰ yeyvo-
were NOW ex- rn ee a ος A F changed for one EVA, οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ Tas ναῦς παρεβοή-
e \ ἃ \ \ A shriek of θουν, of δὲ πρὸς τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ
8. αὐτῆς for αὐτοῖς M.
4, ἐν τῷ στρατεύματι AEFM, Dion. ΗΔ]. ----βοή, ὀλοφυρμός Elmsley, ‘ut gradatio sit a minore ad τηδἦιβ.᾽---ὅσα ἐν MSS. ; cor. Hw. 6. ὁρμῆς] ὀργῆς M.
EYTTPA®H® Z (71—72) 87
τείχους ἐς φυλακήν, ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ feapek IN,
οἱ πλεῖστοι ἤδη περὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς Tere the shiPt 45 καὶ ὅπῃ σωθήσονται διεσκόπουν. Set wells’
7 ἦν τε ἐν τῷ παραυτίκα οὐδεμιᾶς δὴ τῶν ν, yp” φορών ἐλάσσων ἔκπληξις. παραπλήσϊά τ ἐπεπόνθεσαν καὶ ἔδρασαν αὐτοὶ ἐν Πὐλῳ᾽ δια- φθαρε γεισῶν γὰρ τῶν νεῶν τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις 50 προσαπώλλυντο αὐτοῖς καὶ οἱ ἐν τῇ νήσῳ ἄνδρες διαβεβηκότες, καὶ τότε τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἀνέλ- πιστον ἦν τὸ κατὰ γῆν σωθήσεσθαι, ἢν μή τι παρὰ λόγον γίγνηται. ᾿ ΝῃᾳΗῊΝΣΝ
“
72 °° Tevouerns δ᾽ ἰσχυρᾶς τῆς ναυμαχίας καὶ πολλῶν νεῶν ἀμφοτέροις καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἀπο- λομένων οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμ- (της 8. had payor ἐπικρατήσαντες τά τε ναυάγια Severcly.—In καὶ τοὺς νεκροὺς ἀνείλοντο καὶ ἀπο- δ campotthe πλεύσαντες πρὸς τὴν πόλιν τροπαῖον WOVEN Or μο 2 ἔστησαν. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὑπὸ μεγέ- oe sattag fore θους τῶν παρόντων κακῶν νεκρῶν μὲν δε πέρι ἢ vavaryionw οὐδὲ ἐπενόουν αἰτῆσαι ἀναίρεσιν, τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς ἐβουλεύοντο εὐθὺς ἀναχωρεῖν. τὸ 8 Δημοσθένης δὲ Νικίᾳ προσελθὼν Ὁ, proposed to γνώμην ἐποιεῖτο πληρώσαντας ἔτι Neha a δεν. Tas λοιπὰς τῶν νεῶν βιάσασθαι, ἢν Should makes - δύνωνται, ἅμα ἕῳ τὸν ἔκπλουν, λέγων Preek out of the
6. of καὶ πλεῖστοι Ν.---ἤδη [περὶ] σφᾶς αὐτοὺς [καὶ] Hw. ; Kr., Hu, bracket καὶ only ; ὅπῃ καὶ Gertz.
7. ξυμφορῶν B only ; rest ξυμπασῶν .---τ᾽ ἐπεπόνθεσαν M; re πεπόνθεσαν AEFG; re ἐπεπόνθεσαν ΒΟ.---αὐταῖς is wrongly attributed to M. -- παρὰ λόγον Dion. Hal. ; παράλογον MSS.
72 = 1. ἀπολωμένων M. 2. ἐβούλοντο B, Sitz.
4
73
88 OOYKYAIAOY
ed—but ὅτι πλείους ἔτι αἱ λοιπαί εἰσι νῆες not ng could
prevail upon the χρήσι . σφισιν τοῖς πολεμίοις" seamen to go μῶ φί ἢ 5 βιοὺς again on ship. ἦσαν yap τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίοις περί- .—Prepar- a stiong were Ο λούποι ὡς ἑξήκοντα, τοῖς δ᾽ ἐναντίοις ererore made forcommencing ἐλάσσους ἢ πεντήκοντα. καὶ ξυγχω-
their march
that very night.’ ροῦντος Νικίου τῇ γνώμῃ καὶ βουλο- μένων πληροῦν αὐτῶν οἱ ναῦται οὐκ ἤθελον 2 4 \ A a , a @ A ἐσβαίνειν διὰ TO καταπειλῆχθαί τε TH oon καὶ μὴ ἂν ὄτι οἴεαθαι κρατῆσαι. καὶ οἱ μὲν ὡς κατὰ γῆν ἀναχωρήσοντες ἤδη ξύμπαντες τὴν γνώμην εἶχον. ἰ Ἑρμοκράτης δὲ ὁ Συρακόσιος
ὑπονοήσας αὐτῶν τὴν ᾿διάνοιαν καὶ νομίσας
ΕΘ
78
εἰνὸν εἶναι εἰ τοσαύτη στρατιὰ κατὰ γῆν
ὑποχωρήσασα Kal καθεζομένη ποι τῆς Σικελίας ’ Ν 4 ] “A fa: A
Bovancerat αὖθις σφίσι τὸν πόλεμον ποιεῖσθαε,
‘ Hermokrates— ἐσηγεῖται ἐλθὼν τοῖς ἐν τέλει οὖσιν pressed the
15
ee. Pthoritiesto Ὅς OU χρεὼν ἀποχωρῆσαι τῆς νυκτὸς.
with, and Dik, αὐτοὺς περιιδεῖν, λέγων ταῦτα & καὶ
up the PThoaeh αὐτῷ ἐδόκεϊ, ἀλλὰ ἐξελθόντας ἤδη
senaible of the aravTas Συρακοσίους καὶ τὸὺς ξυμ-
sonereis thought μάχους τάς τε ὁδοὺς ἀποικοδομῆσαι er
it aoretecntatle Me vied to καὶ τὰ στενόπορα τῶν χωρίων προ-
fdevtivde” φθάσαντας φυλάσσειν. οἱ δὲ Euve- προ δ. ῴγνωσκαν μὲν καὶ αὐτοὶ οὐχ ἧσσον
night.’. ταῦτα ἐκείνου, καὶ ἐδόκει ποιητέα
4 \ \ 3 , e , 3 Α
εἶναι, τοὺς δὲ. ἀνθρώπους. ἄρτι σμένουσ ἀπὸ Η re before τῇ ἥσσῃ B only ; rest om. -- ἀναχωρήσαντες ΟΜ.
1, [λέγων. ἐδόκει) Bloomfield.—raira] ταὐτὰ ΚΥν.---ἃ καὶ]
καὶ ἃ ME; ἅπερ Sitz. ; [καὶ] ΟἹ. ---ὐτῷ] αὐτοῖς Bauer ; Γυλίππῳ
or αὐτῷ τῷ δ Τυλίππῳ Dobree. --ππροφθάσανταΞ] διαλαβόντας Β, Sitz. 2. ἁσμένους. This must be the spelling, owing to ἥδομαι.
10
EYTTPA®HS Z (72—74)
89
ναυμαχίας τε μεγάλης ᾿βναπεπαυμένους καὶ ἅμα
| ἑορτῆς δὕσης (ἔτυχε ‘yap αὐτοῖς Ηρακλεῖ ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν θυσία οὖσα) οὐ δοκεῖν ἂν ῥᾳδίως
ἐθελῆσαι ὑπακοῦσαι ἠδ ὑπὸ γὰρ τοῦ
περιχαροῦς 80
τῆς viens πρὸς πόσιν τετράφθαι τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, καὶ. πάντα μᾶλλον ἐλπίξειν ἂν σφῶν. πείθεσθαι αὐτοὺς ἢ ὅπλα λαβόντας ἐν τῷ-
8 ταρόντι ἐξελθεῖν.
ὡς δὲ τοῖς ἄρχουσι ταῦτα
λογιζομένοις ἐφαίνετο ἄπορα καὶ οὐκέτι ἔπειθεν 5: αὐτοὺς ὁ ‘Eppoxpdrns, αὐτὸς ἐπὶ τούτοις τάδε μηχανῶται, δεδιὼς μὴ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν προφθάἄσωσιν ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ διέλθόντες τὰ χαλε-
πώτατα “Fey χωρίων" πέμπει τῶν ἑταίρων τινὰς ΄ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ μετὰ ἱππέων πρὸς to: τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων’ στρατόπεδον ἡνίκα -. ξυνεσκόταξεν' ol προσελάσαντες ἐξ ὅ ὅσου τις ἔμελ.- λεν ἀκούσεσθαι καὶ ἀνακαλεσάμενοί τινας ὡς ὄντες τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπι- τήδειρι σαν γάρ τινες τῷ Νικίᾳ διάγγελοιν τῶν ἔνδοθεν) ἐκέλευον
φράξειν Νικίᾳ μὴ ἀπάγειν τῆς νυκτὸὲξ τὸ στράτευμα, ὡς Συρα- κοσίων τὰς ὁδοὺς φυλασσόντων, ἀλλὰ Kal? lay τῆς ἡμέρας παρασκευασάμενον ἀποχωρεῖν. καὶ οἱ μὲν. εἰπόντες ἀπῆλθον, καὶ οἱ
ἀκούσαντες διήγγειλαν τοῖς στρατη-
‘He sent some friends to the A. wall.—The private corre- “ spondents of N. in 8. had sent to warn him (they affirmed) not to decaimp durin the bight, as the 8. had already occupied the roads. This 35 fraud was suc- cessful. The generals deter- mined also to stay the next day,—that the army might away as much of their baggage as sible. G. thus time to occupy all the positions convenient for obstructing the A. march.’
40
74. yots τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων": οἱ δὲ στρὸς τὸ ἄγγελμα
2. » Α , ‘ots 3 > wat ἐπέσχον THY νυκτα, νομι VTES ουκ “ΤΩΤΉν
XN ~
90 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ Φ
4 Α 3 A A > ? Ἁ Ψ ᾿ εἶναι. καὶ ἐπειδὴ καὶ ὡς οὐκ εὐθὺς ὥρμησαν,
a) 4 ΄ μεῖναι, ὅπως ξυσκευάσαιντο ὡς ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν 5 ξ OTe ' aT οἱ στρατιῶται STL χρησιμώχᾳτα, Kal τὰ μὲν a ’ ἄλλα πάντα καταλιπεῖν, ἀναλαβόντες δὲ χυτὰ
-ὅσα περὶ τὸ σῶμα ἐς δίαιταν ὑπῆρχεν ἐπιτήδεια
2
78
2
74
78
a) . ’ . - n ἀφορμᾶσθαι. Συρακόσιοι δὲ καὶ ΤΓύλυπατος τῷ \ ““ oA , , ἐν \ \ μὲν πεζῷ προεξόλθοντες Tas τε ὁδοὺς τὰς κατὰ 10 τὴν χώραν ἡ εἰκὸς ἦν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἰέναι ἀπεφάργνυσαν, καὶ τῶν ῥείθρων καὶ [τῶν] ποτα- ro eee 1. “" ᾿ μῶν τὰς διαβάσεις ἐφύλασσον καὶ ἐς ὑποδοχὴν a , . oe ν Φ΄ ἃ), fmm τοῦ στρατεύματοϊ’ ὡς [κωλύσοντες ἡ ἐδόκει ἔτάσ. - σοντο᾽ ταῖς δὲ ναυσὶ προσπλεύσαντες τὰς ναῦς 15 τῶν ᾿Αθηνάίΐων ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰγιαλοῦ ἀφεῖλκον > 7 t 5. / σ ( Enc (ἐνέπρησαν δέ τινας ὀλίγας, ὥσπερ διενοήθησαν, αὐτοὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναΐοὶ), τὰς δ᾽ ἄλλας καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος ὡς. ἑκάστην ποι ἐκπεπτωκυῖαν / ἀναδησάμενοι ἐκόμιξον ἐς τὴν πόλιν. \ 20 \ \ A 3 \ 2 7 “A / \ eva δὲ τοῦτο, ἐπειδὴ ἐδόκει τῷ Νικίᾳ καὶ
4 2 a \ \ 3 a ec Ὁ |
ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς καὶ τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν περει- A / φ A 4 \ e
[τῷ] Δημοσθένει ἱκανῶς παρεσκευάσθαι, καὶ ἡ
‘The next day ἀνάστασις ἤδη τοῦ στρατεύματος but one after / e fs > \ A , ; the defeat N. TPLTH ἡμέρᾷ αἼΤῸ τῆς ναυμαχίας i \ 3 9 4 - τὰ Ὁ Phnotion. ἐγίγνετο. δεινὸν οὖν ἦν οὐ καθ᾽ ἕν 5 i / ra . 4 5 Τὰ was not until μόνον τῶν πραγμάτων, τς τάς τε Ι } ; ; begun its march μῆς ἀποχωλεκότες πάσας ἀπεχώ- | measure of ν 2.3 “ / \ | wretchedness βουν Kat ἀντι μεγάλης ἐλπίδος. καὶ ' 1. ds GM; ὡς BAEF; ὧς C; [καὶ ἐπειδὴ] καὶ ὡς Sta,—
συσκευάσωνται Μ.
2. προσεξελθόντες all but Β.---ἀπεφράγνυσαν MSS. ; cor. Hu. Meisterhans p. 145.—[rév] wanting in B.—ddethov M.
1. [τῷ] is wanting in B. .
9 A Ἁ αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀλλὰ καὶ
ἘΥΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Ζ
(74—75)
᾿ς , , ἡ πόλις κινδυνεύοντες, ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει
τοῦ
στρατοπέδου ξυνέβαινε τῇ τε ὄψει
8 ἑκάστῳ ἀλγεινὰ καὶ τῇ γνώμῃ αἰσθέσθαι.
91
was felt and manifested.— The scenes of woe passed endurance.’
10
τῶν
\ a > 9 Ν ¢ ef #
Te yap νεκρῶν ἀτάφων ὄντων, ὁπότε τις ἴδοι τινὰ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων κείμενον, ἐς λύπην μετὰ
4 ν / φόβου καθίστατο, καὶ ot Caves καταλειπομενοί 15 τραυματίαι τε καὶ ἀσθενεῖς πολὺ τῶν τεθνεώτων
“ a / @ . .- \ 3 ‘ / τοῖς ζῶσι λυπηρότεροι ἦσαν καὶ τῶν ἀπολωλότων πρὸς ᾿γὰρ ἀντιβολίαν καὶ ὀλοφυρ- μὸν τρὰπόμενοι ἐς ἀπορίαν καθίστασαν, & ἄγειν τε
rly
σφᾶς ἀξιουντὲ καὶ -ἕνα ἕκαστον ἐπιβοώμενοι, εἴ 20
4 ἀθλιώτεροι.
τινά πού τις͵ ge ἢ ἑταίρων. h oixelay, τῶν τε ξυσκήνων ἤδη ἀπιόντων ἐκκρέμαι i é anew
ννυμένοι
καὶ
ἐπακολρυθοῦντες ὅσον δύναιψτοϊ ε εἶ τῳ δὲ προ- λίποι ἡ ῥώμη. καὶ τὸ σῶμα, οὐκ ἄνεν ὀλίγω y
ἐπιθεασμῶν καὶ οἰμωγῆς ἀπολευπόμενοϊ᾽
ὥστε 20
δάκρυσι πᾶν τὸ στράτευμα πλησθὲν καὶ ἀπορίᾳ απερ ἐκ πολε-
τοιαύτῃ μὴ ῥᾳδίως ἀφορμᾶσ
μίας τε καὶ μείζω ἢ κατὰ δάκρυα τὰ
θότας ἤδη, τὰ δὲ περὶ τῶν ἐν ἀφαγεῖ
κατήφειά τέ THs ἅμα καὶ
δ πάθωσι.
WV αὐτῶν ᾿πολλὴ ἦν.
A KATQAME tae
οὐδὲν yap ἀλλο ἢ πόλει ἐκ πεπολιοῤ- man.
μὲν πεπον- δεδιότας μὴ;
‘A downcast 30
stupor and sense
of abasemen possessed eVery
3. [rots ζῶσι] Sta.; [rots ζῶσι] or τοῖς ὁρῶσι Cl.; rots ἀπιοῦσι Hw. ; τ. ἐξιοῦσι Naber ; τ. ops or σωσὶ Hu. ; τ. ἡβῶσι or ὁρμῶσι
Widmann.
4, που τίς M.—és ὅσον Β.---προλείποι CAEFM ; προλείπει G. ---ἄνευ] μετ᾽ 5102.---ὀλέγων οὐκ ὀλίγων Mil.-Str.; λυγρῶν Heil-
mann ; συχνῶν Pp. ;
ἀλόγων Madvig; οἰκτρῶν Hw. ;
Ary éwy
Koth ; ὠμῶν Hu. ; [ὀλίγων] Sta. See note. - ἐπιθ(ελιασμῶν MSS. ; cor. Cobet V.L.2 : Ρ. ὅ90.---ὁπολειπόμενοι Β. ---μή τι all but Β,
92 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
κημένῃ ἐῴκεσαν (spodeuyoven, καὶ ταύτῃ ov σμικρᾷ" opiates yap rod ξύμπαντος ὄχλου οὐκ ἐλάσσους τεσσάρων ἅμα ἐπορεύσντος καὶ τού- 35 των οἵ τε ἄλλοι πάντες ἔφερον. ὅ τι τις ἐδύνατο ἕκαστος χρήσιμον, καὶ οἱ ὁπλῖται καὶ οἱ ἱππῆς ‘Many had little παρὰ τὸ εἰωθὸς αὐτοὶ τὰ σφέτερα
3 “Ἢ ON aA Se Ργονϊδίομα; auTa@y σιτίᾳ ὑπὸ τοῖς ὅπλοις, οἱ μὲν
who had every, ἀπορίᾳ ἀκόζούθων, 7 δὲ ἀπιστίᾳ" 40
own—either
Without slaves, ἀπηὐτομολήκ σὰν yap πάλαι τε καὶ
or knowing that ς λεῖ ; ” - δὲ
no slaveceuld Οὗ πλεῖστοι παραχρῆμα. ἔφερον δὲ
be trusted. οὐδὲ ταῦτα ἱκανά" σῖτος γὰρ οὐκέτι a / 9
86 ἦν ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ. καὶ μὴν ἣ «τ᾽ > ἄλλη αἰκία καὶ ἡ ἰσομοιρία τῶν κακῶν, ἔχουσά τινα 45
---- ὦ \ {- a , 20)» A ς 7
ὅμως TO μετᾶ “πολλῶν κούφισιν, οὐδ᾽ ὡς. ῥᾳδία
ἐν τῷ παρόντι ἐδοξάξετο, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἀπὸ οἵας \ 3 a A“ , 3
λαμπρότητος καὶ αὐχήματος τοῦ πρώτου és οἵαν 8, \ 9 / /
7 τελευτὴν καὶ ταπεινότητα ἀφίκατο. μέγιστον γὰρ δὴ τὸ διάφορον τοῦτο [τῷ] Ἑλληνικῷ 50 στρατεύματὶ ἐγένετο, οἷς ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ ἄλλους
᾿ ᾿ “4 “A . ΄ὰ δουλωσομένους ἥκειν αὐτοὺς τοῦτο μᾶλλον
ΝΥ
5. ἔφερον πάντες Β.---ἄκαστος B; the rest κατὰ τὸς [κατὰ τὸ] Hu., perhaps rightly; κατὰ τὸ <owua> ογίΖ.---αὐτοί τε τὰ σφέτερα AEFGM ; αὐτοί τε καὶ τὰ σ. Ο ; αὐτοὶ τὰ σ. B; αὐτοί γε τὰ σ. Bothe; αὐτοί γε καὶ τὰ σ. Ἠὰ.---ὑπὸ] ἐπὶ Bothe; then Pluygers and several 666. ---ἀπηυτομολήκεισαν ΟΜ.
6. ἥ -τ᾽» ἄλλη. ΟἿ c. 77,7. I have added 7’ because ἡ ἰσομοιρία τῶν κακῶν is part of the alxia, with which it makes one expression (see note); καὶ μὴν <xal> ἡ & Gertz; [ἡ 4. alxia] Cl. ; after alxia Sta. thinks that something is lost.—[xal ἡ] ἰσομοιρίᾳ Dobree.—[%] ἰσομοιρία ; [καὶ ἢ ἰσομοιρία τών x. } Sitz. [τὸ μετὰ πολλῶν] Badham, Ηυ.--- ἄλλως τε καὶ « ἐνθυμουμένους > Ην.---ἀφίκατο] ἀφῖκτο MSS. ; cor. Badhain.
7. [τῷ] Schol. ; rw Pp.—vods ἄλλους for τοῦ ἄλλους M.—av- τοὺς om. M.
ἘΥΤΤΡΑΦΗ͂Σ Z (75—77) | 93
δεδιότας μὴ πάθωσι ξυνέβη ἀπιέναι, ἀντὶ δ᾽ εὐχῆς τε Kal παιάνων, μεθ᾽ ὧν ἐξέπλεον, πάλιν τούτων τοῖς ἐναντίοις ἐπιφημέσμασιν ἀφορμᾶσθαι, 55 πεζούς τε ἀντὶ ναυβατῶν πορενομένους καὶ ὅὁπλι- τικῷ πρ οσέχοντας “μᾶλλον ἢ ναυτικῷ. ὅμως δὲ ὑπὸ μεγέθους τοῦ ἐπικρεμαμένου ἔτι κινδύνου πάντα ταῦτα αὐτοῖς οἰστα ἐφαίνετο. ΄
76. ὋὉρών δὲ ὁ Νικίας "τὸ στράτευμα ἀθυμοῦν καὶ ἐν μεγάλῃ μεταβολῇ ὄν, ἐπιπαριὼν ἐΝ; displayed 8
ὡς ἐκ TOV UITAa ἀρχόντων ἐθάρσυνέ τε degree Of energy καὶ παρεμυθεῖτο, “βρῇ τε χρῴμενος fever before ἔτι μᾶλχον᾽ ἑκάστοις καθ᾽ οὖς γίγ- ses He was vouTo ὑπὸ προθυμὶας καὶ βουλόμενδς heartening ue” ὡς ἐπὶ πλεῖστον γεγωνίσκων ὦφε- δεῖν dejection.’ λεῖν.
7 “Ἔχτι καὶ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ
΄
ὕμμαχοι, ἐλπίδα χρὴ ἔχειν (ἤδη πρόθεσις---
of καὶ ἐκ δεινοτέρων ἢ τοιῶνδε jon. thie : ay), μηδὲ καταμέμφεσθαι Ce τα μοαῦ ὑμᾶς ἄγαν αὐτοὺς μήτε "Ταῖς Eup "τ myself οραῖς μῆτε ταῖς παρὰ τὴν ἀξίαν = sere hopem 2viv κακοπαθίαιξ. κἀγώ Tot ovdevds ἢ ΣῊ ὑμῶν οὔτε ῥώμῃ προφέρων (ἀλλ᾽ δ ὁρῶτε δὴ ὡς" ιἄκειματς ὑπὸ τῆς [πὸ gods will νόσου) οὔτ᾽ εὐτυχίᾳ δοκῶν mov. vout 9); ὕστερός του εἶναι κατά τε᾿ τὸν ἴδιον = Punreraare
βίον ἱκαὶ ἐς τὰ ἄλλα, νῦν ἐν τῷ = Foren?
b oe CAEFM.—rwefors δὲ all but B. —mpooxdvras all
ut
77 1. καταμέμψασθαι all but Β.---κακοπαθείαις BAG. Meister- hans p. 42. 2. κατά re B only; rest om. re.
5
10
94 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
reach a αὐτῷ κινδύνῳ τοῖς φαυλοτάτοις aiw- friendly ~- ," ζ \ naw place if you ροῦμαι" καίτοι πολλὰ μὲν ἐξ Ἰθδεοὺς keep up — 7 r \ 1 >» 5 your spirit γόμιμα δεδιήτημαι, πολλὰ δὲ ἐς ἀν- 15 an 1801- - — pline ρώπου ixata καὶ ἀνεπίφθονα.
8 EEO ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἡ μὲν ἐλπὶς ὅ ws θρασεῖ
ἡ μὲ pos θρασεῖα
} τοῦ μέλλοντος, αἱ δὲ ξυμφοραὶ oy κατ᾽ ἀξίαν δὴ φοβοῦσι. τάχα δ᾽ ἂν καὶ λωφήσείάν. ἱκανὰ γὰρ τοῖς τε “"ποχεμίοις ηὐτύχηται καί, εἴ τῳ θεῶν 90 ἐπίφθονοι ἐστρατεύσαϊμεν, ἀποχρώντως ἤδη τετι.-
4 μώρήμεθα. ἦλθον γάρ που καὶ ἄλλοι τινὲς ἤδη ἐφ᾽ ἑτέρους, kat ἀνθρώπεια δράσαντες ἀνεκτὰ ἔπαθον. καὶ ἡμᾶ os viv τά. τε ἀπὸ τοῦ θείου now few πότερα a ἕξειν" (οἴκτου yap ἀπ᾽ 2 αὐτῶν [4 ἀξιώτεροι a ἢ. φθόνου), καὶ ὁρῶντές ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς οἷοι ὁπλῖται ἅμα καὶ ‘boos ξυντεταγμένοι, ὡρεῖτε “μὴ καταπέπληχθε ἄ ἄγαν, Xo γίξ, θε δὲ ὅτι aust Te πόλις εὐθύς ἔστε ὅποι ἂν etait 1b ena Bek Καὶ ἄλλη o ὑἠδεμία ὑμᾶς τῶν ἐν 30 Σιμαλῖρ οὔτ᾽ ἀπ ἐπιόντας δέξατο, ῥᾳδίως οὔτ᾽ ἂν
5 ἱδρυθέντας που ἐξαναστήδέιε ΤῊΝ δὲ πορείαν ὥστ᾽ ἀσφαλῆ καὶ εὔτὦκτον εἶναι αὐτοὶ φυλάξατε, μὴ ἄλλο τι ἡγησάμενος ἕκαστος ἢ ἐν. ᾧ ἂν ἀναγκασθῇ χωρίῳ μάχεσθαι, τοῦτο καὶ - πατρίδα 85
6 καὶ τεῖχος κρατήσας ἕξειν. ᾿ 'σπουδὴ δὲ ¢ οίως καὶ νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν ἔσται τῆς ὁδοῦ" τὰ" γὰρ ἐπιτήδεια βραχέα ἔ ἔχομεν, καὶ ἢν ἀντιλαβώμεθά του φιλίου χωρίου τῶν Σικελῶν (οὗτοι yar γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ τὸ Σ Συρακοσίων δέος ἔτι βέβατσϊ εἰσιν), ἤδη 40
3. φοβοῦσαι Μ : φοβοῦσαι τάχ᾽ ἂν Sta. 4, θείου] θεοῦ MSS. ; cor. Kr. 5. ἂν om, all but B.
AYTTPA®HS Z (77—78) 95
vowitere ἐν τῷ ἐχυρῷ εἶναι. προπέπε πεμπται δ᾽ ὡς αὐτούς, καὶ ἀπαντᾶν εἰρημένον καὶ σιτία ἅμα κομίξειν..
ὁ τε ξύμπαν γνῶτε, ὦ ἄνδρες στρατιῶται, ἀναγκαῖόν τε ὃν ὑμῖν ἀνδράσιν ἀγα- ἐπίλογος. You 45
ἐ pl Bois γίγνεσθαι, ὦ ὡς μὴ ὄντος χωρίου man thas only
can you see your
ὃ the state. θεῖτε, καὶ ἢν νῦν διαφύγητε, τε TOW
πολεμίους, οἵ τε ἄλλοι πτυξύ νενοί ὧν ἐπιθυμεῖτέ που ἐπιδεῖν καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναίοι΄ τὴν μεγάλην δύνα- 50 μιν τῆς πόλεως καίπερ πεπτωκυΐαν ἐπανορθώ- σοντες" ἄνδρες γὰρ Πόλις, “καὶ οὐ τείχη οὐδὲ νῆες ἀνδρῶν κεναί.
78 - Ὁ μὲν Νικίας τοιάδε παρακελευόμενος ἅμα ἔπει τὸ στράτευμα, καὶ εἴ πῃ δρῴη διεσπασ- a καὶ μὴ ἐν τάξει χωροῦν “ὐάδων καὶ
ἐστάς, καὶ ὁ Δημοσθένης͵ οὐδὲν ἧσσον τοῖς καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν τοιαῦτά τε καὶ παραπλήσια λέγων. 2 τὸ δὲ ἐχώρει ἐ ἐν πλαισίῳ τεταγμένον, πρῷτον μὲν ἡγούμενον τὸ Νικίου, ἐφεπόμενον δὲ «rhe army was
τὸ Δημοσθένους" τοὺς δὲ σκενοφόρους peer puted in το
A a - καὶ τὸν πλεῖστον ὄχλον ἐντὸς εἶχον Herero
~T
[os]
e nA A ° ’ 3 οἱ ὁπλῖται. καὶ ἐπειδὴ [τε] ἐγένοντο “eTarbyD. |, a? ° ἐπὶ τῇ διαβάσει τοῦ ᾿Ανάπου ποτα- taney we ehed
μοῦ, ηὗρον ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ παρατεταγ- ποτ ar ahe
μένους τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ξυμ- the poosagen
6. ὀχυρῷ all but Β.--προπέμπετε all but B.—dua] ἄλλα MSS. ; cor. Reiske. 7. τὸ δὲ ξύμπαν all but B. 78 2. πλαισίῳ] διπλασίωι all but B. resi μὲν ἡγούμενον om. all but B. 3. [re] K
96 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
ἡ accom- plished about μάχων, καὶ τρεψάμενοι αὐτοὺς καὶ
5 miles.’ κρατήσαντες͵ τοῦ πύρου ἐχώρουν ἐς
τὸ πρόσθεν" οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι παριππεύοντές τε προσέκειντο καὶ ἐσακοντίζοντες οἱ ψιλοί. Kal ταύτῃ μὲν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ προέλθόντες oTadious
Second Day. τεσσαράκοντα nurs Second Day. ὥς ρ ἡ ῃ ντο πρὸς
15
after about λόφῳ τινὶ οἱ ,᾿Αθηγῇ ἴοι" τῇ δ᾽ 90
iniles, Tillage, e , \ \
rerted village ὑστεραίᾳ πρὼ ἐπορεύοντο καὶ a The 8. profited . ρ “ ρ 6 ρ , Ν ρ ο- by this to Mov ὡς εἴκοσι σταδίους, καὶ κατ-
occupy the --- Akraean clift’ έβησαν ἐς χωρίον ἄπεδόν τι καὶ
ere ee
αὐτοῦ ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο, βουλόμενοι ἔκ τε τῶν οἰκιῶν λαβεῖν τι ἐδώδιμον (ὠκεῖτο γὰρ ὁ χῶρος)
καὶ ὕδωρ μετὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν φέρεσθαι αὐτόθεν"
6
6
-
ἐν γὰρ τῷ πρόσθεν ἐ ἐπὶ πολλὰ στάδια ἡ ἔμελλον
25
ἰέναι οὐκ ἄφθονον ἦν. of δὲ Συρακόσιοι ἐν -
τούτῳ προελθόντες τὴν δίοδον τὴν ἐν τῷ πρόσ-
θεν ἀπετείχιξον". ἦν δὲ δ λόφος καρτερὸς καὶ.30
ἑκατέρωθεν αὐτοῦ χαράδρα κρημνώδης,᾿ ἐκαλεῖτο
δὲ ᾿Ακραῖον λέπας. = ~ Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ. οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι προῇσαν, καὶ «οἱ.
Third Day. TOV Συρακοσίων par ξυμμάχων αὖ-
‘Even to reach this pass was) = TOUS ἱπρῆς τ καὶ-- ἀκοντισταὶ ἄντες
— hey were πολλοὲ; Τξκατέρωθεν ἐκώλυον, καὶ retreat to thelr Lonel τε καὶ παρίππευον. καὶ night before.’ χρόνον μὲν πολὺν ἐμάχοντο οἱ ᾿Αθη- ναῖοι, ἔπειτα ἀνεχώρησαν πάλιν ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ στρατόπεδον" καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια οὐκέτι τι Soles ἦν UI
εἶχον. οὐ γὰρ ἔτι “ἀποχωρεῖν οἷόν T ὸ
τῶν ἱππέων. AL “
4, προσελθόντες all but Ὁ. ---οἰκιῶν GM ; rest οἰκείων. 5. ἔμπροσθεν M. 6. αὐτῶν M. - ἑκάτεροι all but B.
35
40
EYTTPA®PHE Z (78—79) 97 79 Πρῷ δὲ ἄραντες ἐπορεύοντο αὖθις, καὶ ἐβιά-
σαντο πρὸς τὸν λόφον [ἐλθεῖν τὸν Fourth Duy.
έ ἀποτετειχισμένον, καὶ Ἰὗρον πρὸ tie foot of ἑαυτῶν ὑπέρ" τοῦ ᾿ἀποτειχίσματος the Akracen
τὴν πεξὴν. στρατὶὰν παρατετωγμέ- thie position”
vay οὐκ. ἐπ᾿ ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων: στενὸν Vere vain.’
2 γὰρ ἦν τὸ χωρίον. καὶ προσβαλόντες. οἱ ᾿Αθη- ναῖοι ἔτει ομάχουν, ‘Kat βαλλόμενοι ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ λόφου ἐπάντους γὄντος (διικνοῦντο (yep ῥᾷον οἵ ἄνωθευλ. -καὶ- “ab ϑυνάμεποις, βιάσασθαι 10
8 ἀνεχώρουν πάλιν καὶ ἀνεπαύοντο. ἔτυχον δὲ
καὶ βρονταί τινες ἅμα γενόμεναι καὶ ‘They were yet further dis-
ὕδωρ, οἷα τοῦ ἕτους πρὸς μετόπω heartened by "190 ὄντος φιλεῖ γίγνεσθαι" “ἃ V , they construed rtents. ᾿Αθηναῖοι μᾶλλον ἔτε ἠθύμουν, ἘΝ tell back— 15 καὶ ἐνόμειξον ἐπὶ τῷ τῷ σφετέρῳ ὀλέθρῳ εβροάπε μοὶ Pe see , 4 καὶ ταῦτα πάντᾳ γί veo Gat. we AUG- open plain. | πανομένων δ᾽ αὐτῶν) Tunes καὶ οἱ Συρα- κύσιοι πέμπουσι μέρος τι τῆς στρατιᾶς ἀποτει.- χιοῦντας αὖ ἐξ τοῦ. ὄπισθεν αὐτοὺς ἡ προέλη- 20 λύθεσαν' ἀντιπέμψαντες 88 κἀκεῖνα σφῶν αὐτῶν ~~ 5 τινὰς διεκώλυσαν. καὶ. μετὰ ταῦτα πάσῃ τῇ στρατιᾷ ἀναχωρήσαντες πρὸς τὸ 'πεδίον μᾶλλον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ηὐλίσαντο. Τῇ 8 ὑστεραίᾳ πρου χώρουν, καὶ οἱ Συρακό- Ὡς σιοι προσέβαλλόν TE πανταχῆ αὐτοῖς Fifth Day. κύκλῳ καὶ πολλοὺς κατέτραυμάτι- ἈΡΩ͂ οἰλοτορίοά
once more the Sov, καὶ εὖ μὲν ἐπίοιεν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι » K b fp » Akraean cliff.—
or
march over the
70 si. [ἐλθεῖν] Κι. 4, αὖ om. 411. ναὶ Β. 5. προσέβαλόν GM.
98 BOYKYAIAOY
harassed that ὑπεχώρουν, εἰ δ᾽ ἀναχωροῖεν, ἐπέ:
scosmplish one KELVTO, “καὶ μάλιστα τοῖς ὑστάτοις 80 mile.’ προσπίπτοντες, εἴ πως κατὰ βραχὺ 6 τρεψάμενοι πᾶν τὸ στράτευμα φοβήσειαν. καὶ rl ποχὺ μὲν τοιούτῳ τρόπῳ ἀντεῖχον οἱ "A@n- vaio, ἔπειτα προελθόντες πέντε ἢ ἔξ LaSiow
ἀνεπαύοντο ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ" ἀνεχώρησαν δὲ καὶ οἱ a Συρακόσιοι ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐς τὸ ἑαυτῶν στρατόπεδον, 80 Τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς τῷ Νικίᾳ καὶ Δημοσθένει ‘They resolved ἐδόκει, ἐπειδὴ κακῶς σφίσι τὸ στρά-
to make off dur- ing the night τεῦμα ele TOV TE ἐπιτηδείων πάν-
towards southern coast.’ τῶν ἀπορίᾳ ἤδη καὶ κατατετραυ- ματισμένοι ἦσαν πολλοὶ ἐν πολλαῖς προσβολαῖς 5 τῶν πολεμίων γεγενημέναι ἃ πυρὰ καύσαντες. as: πλεΐαρα “ἀπά ἀπάγειν τὴν στρατιάν, μηκέτι τὴν αὐτὴν ὁδὸν a διενοήθησαν, ἀλλὰ τοὐναντίον ἢ οἱ 4 Συρακόσιοι, ἐ ἐτή υν, πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν. ἣν δὲ ἡ ὑμπασα" ‘Ss ἄστη οὐκ ἐπὶ ὶ Κατάνης τῷ 10 στρατεύματι, ἀλλὰ κατὰ τὸ ἕτερον μέρος τῆς. Σικελίας τὸ πρὸς Καμάριναν καὶ Γέλαν καὶ τὰς ταύτῃ πόλεις καὶ Ἑλληνίδας καὶ βαρβάρους. 8 καύσαντες οὖν πυρὰ πολλὰ ἐχῴρουν ἐν τῇ νυκτί. ΠΑ ΣΝ Ἃ καὶ αὐτοῖς, ,olov φιλεῖ καὶ πᾶσι τὸ and alarm.’ στρατοπέδοις, μάλιστα δὲ τοῖς μεγί- στοις, φόβοι καὶ , δείματα ἐγγίγνεσθαι, ἄλλως τε καὶ ἐν νυκτί τὲ καὶ διά ποκεμίας καὶ [ἀπὸ]
πολεμίων οὐ πολὺ ἀπεχόντων Ἰοῦςιν, ἐμπίπτει
Nee oem πώ τὉ ~
80 1. τῷ Δημοσθένει Μ.---καύσαντας BAEFM.—4] 4B; #C; ἢ n Κι. ; ef. Herod. ix. 56 ἤισαν τὰ ἔμπαλιν ἢ Λακεδαιμόνιοι. 3. [ἀπὸ] Reiske,
AYTTPA@HS Z (79—81) 99
4 ταραχή" καὶ τὸ μὲν Νικίου στράτευμα, ὥσπερ 2 ἡγεῖτο, ξυνέμενέ τε καὶ ᾿“προύλαβε πολλῷ, τὸ δὲ Δημοσθένους: Τὸ ἥμισυν μάλιίιατα καὶ πλέον, ἀπεσπάσθη τε καὶ ἀτι ξτότερον ἐχώρει.
ΓΑ ae a A δ "Apa δὲ τῇ ἕῳ ἀφικνοῦνται ὅμως πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ ἐσβάντες ἐς τὴν ὁδὸ Day. 95 τὴ ED at aX ,- - 2 we front under ωὡρινὴν καλουμένην érro . by daybrea ἥ Re) -ουμενῆ reached the
ovto, ὅπως,.ἐπειδὴ γένοιντο ἐπὶ τῷ Helorine road.’ ποταμῷ τῷ Κακυπάρει, παρὰ τὸν ποταμὸν ἴοιεν
΄ “᾿.....ἕὄ Pn, ἄνω διὰ μεσογείας" ἤλπιξον yap καὶ ἐλ the Κατ a pe as. τοὺς BKedouvsravTy ods μετέπεμψαν detachment —" 80 . ys” αἱ -, forcing his 6 ἀπαντήσεσθαι. ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ ἐγένοντο way, marched
a a straight to the ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ, ηὗρον καὶ ἐνταῦθα E- J, ἣν A / 9 f lA φυλακήν τινὰ τῶν Συρακοσίων ἀποτειχίξουσάν ry “~ ὔ a Te καὶ ἀποσταυροῦσαν τὸν "πόρον. καὶ βιασά- μενοι αὐτὴν διέβησάν τε τὸν ποταμὸν καὶ ἐχώρουν 95 42 Ἢ Ww Vy! py ys , , Ὁ αὖθις πρὸς ἄλλὸν ποταμόν, τὸν ᾿Ερινεόν' ταύτῃ γὰρ οἱ ἡγεμόνες ἐκέλενον. / , , 81 Ev τούτῳ δ᾽ οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι, ὡς ἥ τε ἡμέρα ἐγένετο καὶ ἔγνωσαν. smog in pur. ‘ / Gra τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἀπεληλυθοότας, ἐν there UA iria τε οἱ πολχοὶ τὸν Γύλιππον “Ven. 9 e f/f 3 κι 4 3 , \ \ εἶχον ἑκόντα ἀφεῖναι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, -καὶ κατὰ 5 mans τάχος διώκοντες, ἣ οὐ χαλεπῶς ἠσθάνοντο κεχωρηκότας, καταλαμβάνουσι περὶ ἀρίστου quan, id ‘ “a Φ᾽ [οἱ 2 ὥραν. ᾿ καὶ ὡς προσέμειξαν τοῖς μετὰ τοῦ Δημοσθένους, ὑστέροις τε οὖσι καὶ σχολαίτερον
4, ὥσπερ] grep Dobree.—rd πλέον all but B. ΩΝ 5. ἑλωρίνην ΟΑΛΕΟΝ. ---ἐπὶ] παρὰ all but B. 6. re after ἀποτειχ. om. all but B.
81 2. ws BM; the rest ὥσπερ. ---τ᾽ οὖσι M; ἰοῦσι Kr,
99160"
100 BOYKYAIAOY
καὶ ἀτακγχύτερον χωροῦσιν, ὡς τῆς νυκτὸς τότε τὸ ξυνεταράχθῆς σάν, εὐθὺς προσπεσόντες ἐμάχοντο, καὶ οἱ ἱππῆς τῶν Συρακοσίων ἐκυκλοῦντό Te ῥᾷον αὐτοὺς δί adh ὄντας καὶ ἱ(ξυνῆγον ἐ ἐς ταὐτό.
8 τὸ δὲ Νικίοῦ δτράτευμα ἀπεϊχεν ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν καὶ πεντήκοντα σταδίοᾳς θᾶσσόν τε γὰρ ὁ τὸ Νικίας ἦγε, νομίξων. ν ao" τὸ ὑπομένειν ἐν. τῷ τοιούτῳ ἑκόνταςζεῖ CElagh eal. udyer das) owtnplay, ἀλλὰ τὸ ὡς τάχιστα υ ὄχωρεϊν, τοσαῦτα μαχο-
4 μένους ὅσ᾽ ἂν ἀναγκάζωνται. ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης͵
“They found ἐτύγχανέ τε τὰ πλείω ἐν πόνῳ ξυν- 20 themselves en- 5 oe ve closed in a ,ἐχεστέρῳ ὦ ὧν δία τὸ ὑστέρῳ ἀναχω-
-olive- EFL ke 6, ound They ροῦντι atte πρώτῳ ἐπικεῖσθαι τοὺς
wrelmed with πολεμίους καὶ τότε γνοὺς τοὺς Συρα- hostile missiles.” οσίους ᾿διώκοντας οὐ προυχώρει, μᾶλλον ἢ ἐς μάχην ξυνετάσσετο, ἕως ἐνδια- 25 τρίβων κυκλοῦταί τε ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν καὶ ἐν" πολλῷ θορύβῳ αὐτός τε καὶ οἱ pet αὐτοῦ [᾿Αθηναῖοι] ἦσαν" ἀνειληβέντες γὰρ ἔς τι χωρίου(ᾧ κύκλῳ μὲν τειχίον περιῆν, ὁδὸς δὲ ὲ ἔνθεν, ; “Oey, ᾿ἐλάας δὲ οὐκ ὀλίγας εἶχεν, “ἐβάλλοντο περι- 80 5 σταδόν. τοιαύταις δὲ προσβολαῖς καὶ οὐ ξυστα- . δὸν μάχαις οἱ Συρακύσιοι εἰκότως ἐχρῶντο" τὸ ᾿
γὰρ ἀποκινδυνεύειν πρὸς ἀνθρώπους. ἀπρνενοη- μένους οὐ! “πρὸς ἐκείνων μᾶλλον ἦν ἔτι ἢ πρὸς
8. ἔμπροσθεν ΜΝ.----ὅσ᾽ ἂν] ὅσα MSS. ; cor. Dobree. —dvayxd- ζονται all but C. ες 4, ἐν πόνῳ re all but B.—7? ἐς μάχην ἢ ξυνετάσσετο M.—éy before πολλῷ om. all but B; κἂν Ἠυ.--- ᾿Αθηναῖοι] Kr.—évdev τε καὶ ἔνθεν CM, which is possible, though rarer than ἔν. καὶ ἔν. ---ἐβάλλοντό re AEFM ; ἔβαλλον τότε C.
SYTTPA®PHS Z (81—82) 101
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, καὶ ἅμα φειδώ τέ τις ἀγύγμετο 85 a τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, μα΄ ς ἐγίγ 4. 3 > , ” a \ Game a ; ἐπ᾿ εὐπραγίᾳ ἤδη σαφεῖ μὴ προαναλωθῆναί τῳ καὶ ἐνόμιζον καὶ ὡς ταύτῃ τῇ ἰδέᾳ καταδαμα- 82 σάμενοι λήψεσθαι αὐτούς. XK ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ οὖν δι᾿ ἡμέρας βάλλοντες πανταχόθεν τοὺς ‘Pereeiving
their condition,
a μ Oo G. sent a herald ; ᾿Αθηναίους mal ξυμμάχ υς ἑώρῳ V presently, 8
δ TETANG ae Oo τοῦ ΤῈ larger negotia- um Wh ys 5 tion ended by τραύμασι καὶ" GAA κακώσει," the entire di- 5
vision capitu- κήρυγμα “ποιοῦνται Τύλιππος. Kat lating.—They
πω were conveyed Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι, m πρῶτον to 8.’ ᾿ μὲν τῶν νῆσι ὡτῶν εἴ τις βούλεται. en ἐλευθερίᾳ ὡς σφᾶς ἀπιέναι" κἀὶ ἀπεχώ ἡρησάν τινες πόλεις “-Ὰ 2 οὐ πολλαί, eres δ᾽ ὕστερον καὶ πρὸς τοὺς 10 ἄλλους ἅπαντας τοὺς μετὰ Δημοσθένους μος, λογία γίγνεται ὥστε ὅπλα TE παραδοῦναι καὶ μὴ ᾿ἀποθανεῖν μηδένα μήτε (βιαίως. μήτε δεσμοῖς. 8 μήτε Τῆς ἀναγκαιοτάτῆς. en δείᾳ Das παρέδοσαν οἱ πάγτες σφᾶς αὐτοὺς TE οί 15 καὶ Ta ἀργύριον ὃ εἶχον ἅπαν κατέθεσαν ἐσβα- λόντες ἐς ἀσπίδας ὑπτίας, καὶ ἐνέπλησαν. ἀσπίδας τέσσαρας. καὶ τούτους μὲν εὐθὺς ἀπε-
, . 3 Ἁ ’ \ e 3 κομίξον ἐς τὴν πόλιν. Νικίας δὲ καὶ οἱ μετ αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ τὸν 20 ποταμὸν τὸν ᾿Ἐρινεόν, καὶ διαβὰς πρὸς μετέωρόν τι καθῖσε τὴν στρατιάν.
5. τὸ τῶν ᾿Α. AEFM.—éyévero all but B.—kai ds] καὶ ὡς BCAEFG ; ὡς καὶ M.
82 1. δ᾽ οὖν] γοῦν MSS. ; cor. Dobree. 2. μετὰ rod A. M. 3. αὐτοῦ] αὐτὸν ΔΕ. --- ἀφικνοῦνται αὐτῆ(ι) τῆ() ἡ. all but
M; τῇ αὐτῇ ἡ. Hw., Hu.—xadeicoe CAFGM : καθεὶς E; ᾿ἐκαθεῖσε Β.
83
102
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
e / a e , , Οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ καταλαβόντες ς
Seventh Day. “6. overtook N. on the right bank of the Erineus.—N. could not bring himself to sub- mit to the same terms as D.— Accordingly the
αὐτὸν ἔλεγον ὅτι ot μετὰ Anpo- ’ , A 3 ’ σθένους παραδεδώκοιεν σφᾶς αὐτούς, κελεύοντες κἀκεῖνον τὸ αὐτὸ δρᾶν᾽ ὁ δ᾽ ἀπιατῶν σπένδεται ἱππέα πέμ-
/ “ἀρῶ, ¢ ’ > ἢ Wat σκεψόμενον. ὡς. δ᾽ οἰχόμενος a ἀπήγγειλε πάλιν παραδεδωκότας, ἐπικηρυκεύεται Γυᾶυλίππῳ καὶ Συρα- κοσίοις εἶναι ἑτοῖμος ὑπὲρ ᾿Αθηναίων ξυμβῆναι, Ψ 3 , , ’ 9 Ἁ ὅσα ἀνήλωααν χρήματα Συρακόαιοι ἐς τὸν πολε- ~~ a * a μον, ταῦτα ἀποδοῦναι, ὥστε τὴν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ στρα- τιὰν ἀφεῖναι αὐτούς" μέχρι οὗ δ᾽ ἂν τὰ χρήματα ἀποδρθῇ, ἄνδρας δώσειν ᾿Αθηναίων ὁμήρους, ἕνα 8 κατὰ τάλαντον. οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ ἔζλυσπος 3 a \ , > ov προσεδέχοντο TOUS λόγρυς, ἀλλὰ προσπε- σόντες καὶ περιστάντες πανταχόθεν ἔβαλλον Ν , ᾿ , ΠΣ ρος δὲ \ 2 4 yet τούτους μέχρι Org. οοὐχὸν O€ | οὗτοι πονήρῳς--σίτου Te καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἀπορίᾳ. “ \ a ca Wee et , 3 e “+ ὅμως δὲ τῆς νυκτὸς φυλάξαντες τὸ ἡσυχάξον ¥ ρων; --π ν΄, , , ᾿ ἔμελλον πορεύεσθαι. καὶ ἀναλαμβάνουσί τε τὰ 30 Ψ A e 4 3 / 9 ᾽ ὅπλα καὶ οἱ Συρακόσιοι αἰσθάνονται καὶ ἐπαιάνι- > ad δ σαν. γνόντες δὲ of ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὅτι ov AavOdvovet, J κατέθεντο πάλιν πλὴν τριακοσίων μάλιστα ἀν- δρῶν᾽ οὗτοι δὲ διὰ τῶν φυλάκων βιασάμενοι ἐχώρουν τῆς νυκτὸς ἡ ἐδύναντο. β
S. recommenced their attacks.’
25
"»ὄ ~ . 84 Νικίας δ᾽ [πεὶ ἢ ἡμέρα ἐγένετοὶ ἦγε τὴν Kighth and οι στρατιάν" οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοϊ καὶ οἱ
day. “Ν. at-
e Q \ texpted afresh ξύμμαχοι προσέκειντο τὸν αὐτὸν
88
1. μετὰ τοῦ A. Μ. 2. ὑπὲρ] ὑπὸ Δ]. --- μέχρι δ᾽ οὗ B; οὗ] Dindorf.
EYTTPAPH? Z (83—85) 103
τρόπον πανταχόθεν βάλλοντές Te march, to get to the Asinarns.—
2 καὶ κατακοντίξζοντες. καὶ οἱ ᾿Α(θη- The march was δ
a» ΜΡ \ ΜΝ , accomplished, vatot πεΐγοντο “ τὸν ᾿Ασσίναρον in spite of in- 7 pP os To p cessant attacks
ποτα ov Oo “Τὺ from the 8. μὸν, sua, μὲν βιαζό μενοι ὑ from the B
τῆς πάνξανόθεν προσβολῆς ἱππέων got to the river ἧς x ρ β ms fore the A.’ τε πολλῶν Kal τοῦ ἄλλον ὄχλου,
’ ’ a οἰόμενοι ῥᾷόν τι σφίσιν ἔσεσθαι, ἢν διαβῶσι τὸν 10
ποταμόν, ἅμα. δὲ ἡ ὃ . τῆς. ταλαιπωρίας καὶ τοῦ 8 πιεῖν ἔπιθυ ὡς δὲ γύγνονται ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, ἐσπίπ-
-ττουσιν oddert κόσμῳ ETL, ἀλλὰ πᾶς TE «ποιὸ the
ion of τις διαβῆναι αὐτὸς πρῶτος βουλό- The tncitives
μενος καὶ οἱ πολέμιοι ἐπικείμενοι gave way ; tor 45
χαλεπὴν ἤδη τὴν διάβασιν ἐποίουν" thirst they ne ἁθρόοι γὰρ ἀναγκαζόμενοι χωρεῖν ford all at once.
ey guage ἐπτέπιπτόν τε ἀλλήλοις καὶ κατεπά- arent ured
TOUY, περί τε τοῖς δορατίοις καὶ huddled mass . σκεύεσιν οἱ μὲν εὐθὺς διεφθείροντο, ™ssiles. 30 οἱ δὲ ἐμπαλασσόμξενοτ κα κατερβέον. ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θάτερά τε "ToD ποταμοῦ παραστάντες οἱ Συρα- κόσιοι (ἦν δὲ κρημνῶδες) ἔβαλλον ἄνωθεν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, πίνοντάς τε τοὺς πολλοὺς ἁσμένους καὶ ἐν κοίλῳ ὄντι τῷ ποταμῷ ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς 25 5 rapa σόμένους. οἵ τε Πελοποννήσιοι ἐπικατα-
yee ney
βάντες FOS < ἐν τῷ ποταμῷ μάλιστα ἔσφαζον. καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ εὐθὺς δεέφθα ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲν ἧσσον ἐπίνετό τε ὁμοῦ τῷ πηλῷ WE Spivey Kal περι-᾿ 85 μάχητον ἦν τοῖς πολλοῖς. τέλος “δὲ νεκρῶν τε 84 5 Soparlas] φορτίοις Naber. 4. τοὺς before πολλοὺς om. M.—dopeévous] ἀσμένως B.
5. Πελοποννήσιοι) Συρακόσιοι Longinus περὶ ὕψους c..38. So Naber. --ἐπίνετο ὁμοῦ C, Longinus.
104 ᾿ς ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ
πολλῶν ἐπ᾽ ἀλλήλοις ἤδη κειμένων ἐν τῷ ποταμῷ
‘N. surrendered καὶ διε ἀρμένου τοῦ σ τρατεύματος himself to G.
é to be dealt with τοῦ “μὲν, κατὰ τὸν ποταμόν; -τοῦ -δὲ
at the discretion
of that general καί, εἴ TL διαφύγοι, ὑ ὑπὸ, τῶν ἱππέων, 5 and the L.—G.
gave orders that Νικίας Γυλίώπτπῳῴ ἑαυτὸν παραδίδωσι no more should
be killed, but πισπεύσας μᾶλλον αὐτῷ ἢ τοῖς Yupa-
that the rest 7 \ e A \ /
should be 'κοσίοις" καὶ ἑαυτῷ μὲν χρήσασθαι secured as
captives.’ ἐκέλευεν ἐκεῖνόν χε καὶ Λακεδαι-
μονίους ὅ τι βούλονται, τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους στρατιώ- τὸ 2 τὰς παύσασθαι φονεύοντας. καὶ ὁ Τύλιππος μετὰ τοῦτο ζωγρεῖν ἤδη ἐκέλευε" καὶ τούς τε λοιποὺς ὅσογς μὴ ᾿ἀπεκρύψαντο (πολλοὶ δὲ οὗτοι ἐγένοντο) ξυνεκδμίσὰν ξἕῶντας, καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς τριακοσίους, οὗ τὴν φυλακὴν διεξῆχθον τῆς 1 νυκτός, πέμψαντες τοὺς διῳφξομένους ξυνέλαβον. | ὃ τὸ μὲν οὖν ἁθροισθὲν τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐς τὸ κοινὸν οὐ πολὺ ἐγένετο, τὸ δὲ{διακλαπὲν πολύ, καὶ διεπλήσθη πᾶσα Σικελία αὑτῶν, ἅτε οὐκ ἀπὸ ξυμβάδεως ὥσπερ τῶν μετὰ Δημοσθένους 20 4 ληφθέντων. μέρος δέ τι οὐκ ὀλίγον καὶ ἀπέθανε" πλεῖστος γὰρ δὴ φόνος. οὗτος καὶ οὐδενὸς ἐλάσ- σὼν τῶν ἐν τῷ [WKENLK@] πολέμῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο. καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἄλλαις προσβολαῖς ταῖς κατὰ τὴν
πορείαν συχναῖς γενομέναις οὐκ ὀλύγοι ἐτεθνή- 25 τς ἃ
85 1. χρῆσθαι all but Β ; cf. ii. 4,7 4, Andoc. i. 26 χρήσασθέ μοι ὅ τι βούλεσθε, Hyperides IIL. xxxlii. 17 χρησάσθωσαν αὐτῷ ὅ τι βούλονται, Dem. 19, 108 ἐμοὶ χρήσασθ᾽ ὅ τι βούλεσθε. When ὅ τι βούλονται and not ὅ τι ἂν βούλησθε is used, the aor. is usual and more forcible.
2. per’ αὐτοῦ M; μετὰ τοῦ AF.—évvexdmucar] ξυγκομίσας all but B. - 3. μετὰ τοῦ Δ, M. 4. [Σικελικῷ] Dobree.—2pocBodais om. CAEFM(G).
ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z (85—86) 105
κεσαν. πολλοὶ δὲ ὅμως καὶ διέφυγον, οἱ μὲν καὶ παραυτίκα, οἱ δὲ καὶ δουλεύσαντες «μην contrived καὶ διαδιδράσκοντες ὕστερον" τού- Κλ, τοῖς & ἦν ἀναχώρησις ἐς Κατάνην.
86 ΒἘΞυναθροισθέντες δὲ οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι, τῶν τε αἰχμαλώτων ὅσους ἐδύναντο “πλείστους καὶ τὰ σκῦλα" ἀναλαβόντες, ἀνεχώρη-
2 σαν ἐς τὴν πόλιν. καὶ τοὺς μὲν ἄλλους ᾿Αθη-
ναίων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων ὁπόδους ἔλαβον κατε- 5 βίβασαν ἐς τὰς λιθοτομίας, ἀσφαλε- «Those who στάτην εἶναι νομίσαντες τήρησιν, Breen Νικίαν δὲ καὶ Δημοσθένη ἄκοντος Pine stone. Γυλίππου ἀπέσφαξαν. ὁ γὰρ Γύλιπ- Bre eed. | Tos καλὸν τὸ ἀγώνισμα ἐνόμιξέν οἱ Povuttodeath, |, εἶναι ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄλλσις καὶ τοὺς ἀντι- “scoutent οἵ 6.
8 στράτηγοῦξ 'κομίσαι Λακεδαιμονίοις. ξυνέβαινε δὲ τὸν μὲν πολεμιώτατον αὐτοῖς εἶναι, Δημο- σθένη. ΧΑ τὰ ἐν τῇ νήσῳ καὶ Πύλῳ, τὸν δὲ διὰ
\ τὰ αὐτὰ ἐπιτηδειότατον: τοὺς γὰρ ἐκ τῆς νήσον 15 Ἰἄνδρας τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ὁ Νικίας προυθυμήθη, ; σπονδὰς πείσας τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ποιήσασθαι, ὥστε ἀφεθῆναι. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν οἵ τε Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἦσαν αὐτῷ προσφιλεῖς κἀκεῖνος οὐχ ἥκιστα διὰ τοῦτο πιστεύσας ἑαυτὸν τῷ Γυλίππῳ παρέδωκεν. 320
4 ἀλλὰ τῶν Συρακοσίων τινές, ὡς ἐλέγετο, οἱ μὲν
’ \ 4 δείσαντες, ὅτε πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐκεκοινολόγηντο, μὴ tall
w eli Le .
86 1. συναθροισθέντες all but Β.---λαβόντες AEFM. 2. λιθοτομίας M; συρακόσσας m.—dogareordrny <Tavrny > Madvig ; cf. c. 42, 4.—rovs ἄλλους ἀντισ. Μ. 3. δημοσθένην MSS. —6éia τοῦτο om. all but B.
106 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ
ὃ ὰ Ν A \ f 9 βασανιξόμενος διὰ τὸ τοιοῦτο ταραχὴν σφίσιν ἐν ψ.“1-ἰφινν , : εὐπραγίᾳ ποιήσῃ, ἄλλοι δέ, καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα οἱ / \ ’ A Κορίνθιοι, μὴ χρήμασι δὴ πείσας τινάς, OTE 25 ΄ 4 3 a 4 , , πλούσιος ἦν, ἀποδρᾷ καὶ αὖθις σφίσι νεώτερόν τι ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ γένηται, πείσαντες τοὺς ξυμμάχους , : ὅ ἀπέκτειναν αὐτόν. καὶ ὁ μὲν, τοιφώτῃ ἢ ὅτε ’, ἢ ᾿ , ἐγγύτατα τούτων αἰτέα-ἐτέθνηκει, ἥκιστα δὴ ¥ A a » > 9 a a , 3 a_* ς ἄξιος dv τῶν ye ἐπ᾽ ἐμαῦ λήνων ἐς τοῦτο 80 δυστυχίας ἀφικέσθαι διὰ τὴν πᾶσι ἐς ἀρετὴν ἢ 87 νενομισμένην ἐπιτήδευσιν..-" τοὺς δ ἐν ταῖς
-: ! ἐπ τὰ . The miserable λιθοτομίαιί( : οἱ Συρακόσιοι χαλεπῶς prisoners—
de
ea , without the τοὺς πρώτους χρόνους μετεχείρισαν.
- ἐν Pe abe tection orcon- ἐν γὰρ κοίλῳ χωρίῳ ὄντας καὶ ὀλύγῳ venience—re- + oy. - - aA mained for70 πολλοὺς οἵ τε ἥλιοι τὸ πρῶτον καὶ 5 days.—Many , ἮΝ ᾿ 9
speedily died.’ τὸ (τνῖγος ἐλύπει διὰ τὸ IEEE. 4 ~ keg . . “ 5 - ͵ γαστον, καὶ αἱ νύκτες ᾿ἐπυγυγνόμεναι τοὐναντίον ( \ \ ᾿ a nan 2 ἢ f ετοπωρρναὶ καὶ at τῇ μεταβολῇ ἐς ἄσθέ- μετοπωρμναὶ καὶ ψυχραὶ τῇ μεταβολῇ ἐς ac
fy ong o ;
oa
ἜΝ ͵ ΘΠ ΓΠῈ}Ὲ}8ῸῈὋῈ}ῈΟοΟ. «4 “3A Ἁ 2 νειαν]ἐνεώτέριξον, Tavta te ποιούντων αὐτῶν διὰ ᾿ “ “ " a a στενοχωρίαν ἐν 7@ αὐτῷ καὶ προσέτι τῶν νεκρῶν 10 a ο ᾿ / ¢ ὁμοῦ ἐπ᾽ ἀλλήλοις ξυννενημένων, of Ex Te τῶν \ A A A A τραυμάτων καὶ dia τὴν μεταβολὴν καὶ τὸ τοιοῦ- ν 2 , 4 Ν ~ τον ἀπέθνῃσκον, καὶ ὀσμφὶ ἦσαν 6UK ἀνεκτοί, % τ . ty .- ἡ λιμῷ 4 ὶ δίψῃ; ἐπιέξοντο (ἐδίδοσαν ya καὶ λιμῷ ἅμα καὶ δίψῃ) ἐπί ν γὰρ ' ἢ “πο ar ᾿ αὐτῶν ἑκάστῳ ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ μῆνας κοτύλην ὕδατος 16 \ ᾽ὔ / , bd v~ 9 \ 3 καὶ δύο κοτύλας woe ἄλλα TE ὅσα εἰκὸς ἐν a ’ , 3 ’ A τῷ “τοιούτῳ χωρίῳ ewirtTToOKOTAS κακοπαθῆσαι,
4, δὴ om. all but Β.---πείσαντές τε all but B. 5, πᾶσαν és ἀρετὴν B Schol. ; rest om. 87 1. καὶ ὀλίγῳ om. all but B. 2. ξυνενηνεγμένων ΒΜ.---τοιοῦτο AEFGM.—- δίψει MSS.—7@
before τοιούτῳ om. all but B.
SYTTPA®HS Z (86—87)
3 οὐδὲν ὅ TL οὐκ ἐπεγένετο αὐτοῖς. A ε ὃ A ° , ᾿ Ψ ὃ , μὲν ἐβ ομῇμκροντά τινὰς οὕτω διῃτ
107
\ ς / καὶ ἡμέρας
e ’ σαν ἁθροοι" ἔπειτα πλὴν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ εἴ τινες οἰ ελιωτῶν 30 Ott ΎΙΝ
ἢ ᾿Ιταλιωτῶν ξυνεστράτευσαν, τοὺς ἄλλους ἀπέδοντο. ἐλήφθησαν δὲ οἱ , tens) , \ \ ξύμπαντες, ἀκριβείᾳ μὲν χαλεπὸν
> a Ψ *@\ ? ἐξειπεῖν, ὅμως ᾿δὲ οὐκ ἐλάσσους ᾿ Υ̓́
ἑπτακισχιλίων. ξυνέβη τε ον “A Ν τοῦτο [Ἑλληνικὸν] τῷν͵“κατὰ ‘TOV ’ / πόλεμον τόνδε μέγφότον γενέσθαι, a > ¥ \ Δ > a ¢ δοκεῖν δ᾽ ἔμοιγε καὶ ὧν axon “EX-
‘The citizens now removed
all the surviving prisoners, ex- cept the A. and the few Italian or Sicilian Greeks. Those removed were sold.—Such was the close.— Never in Grecian history had ruin so complete been witnessed.’
25
A . ‘ a / ληνικῶν ἴσμεν, καὶ τοῖς τε κρατήσασι λαμπρό- sg! . : τατον καὶ τοῖς διαφθαρεῖσι δυστυχέστατον᾽ κατὰ 80 . . ’ πάντα yap πάντως νικηθέντες καὶ οὐδὲν ὀλίγον
ἐς οὐδὲν κακοπαθήσαντες πανωλεθρίᾳ
‘ \ ἢ ‘TO
om λεγόμενος καὶ πεζὸς καὶ νῆες καὶ οὐδὲν δ΄ τι οὐκ ἀπώλετό, ‘Kal ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου
/ ἀπενόστησαν. ’ γενόμενα.
3. οἱ ἀθρόοι M.
δ. [Ἑλληνικὸν] Kr., Cl.,
ταῦτα μὲν τὰ περὶ Σικελίαν 35
Sta., Hu. etc.
NOTES
§11. 1. ‘O—the art. added because this is a continuation of | the narrative from vi. 104. Contrast c. 2, 1, where the art. is omitted because there is a transition to new points,
TéAurwos—son of Cleandridas, who had settled at Thurii, on which see c. 33, 6 note. His appointment to command in Sicily was the immediate result of Alcibiades’ advice. Nothing is known of his previous history. (‘His character is in some points not Spartan. He is quick: enterprising, full of resource, able to adapt himself to men and to all circumstances.’ Freeman. This character reminds us of the description which Pericles gave of the Athenians. )
é—the art. again because the persons are thought of separately. Contrast c. 80, 1 τῷ N. καὶ A. ἐδόκει.
IIvéjv—Corinthian captain. Syr. envoys had gone to Corinth in the winter of 415, and Corinth had at once re- solved to assist her colony.
τοῦ T.—T. has been all genders. In Attic it is masc., on the analogy of all nouns in -pas; in Alexandrine writers it became fem. ; the Romans made it neut.
Tépavros—Gyl. had been driven by foul weather to seek shelter there. T.—regnata Laconi rura Phalanto—was founded circ. 705 B.c. after the first Messenian war.
2. érerxebacav—vi. 104 τὰς ναῦς ἐπεσκεύαζεν. Diod. ΧΙ. 1 Tas ναῦς ἐπεσκεύασαν. . . τριήρεις κατεσκεύασαν. . . . τοῦ στόλον παρεσκευασμένου. To the Latin sense of apparatus παρασκευὴ corresponds ; while κατασκευὴ has the English sense of the same word. |
8. Aoxpots—founded about 690 Β.0. on land belonging to the Sicels. Now Gerace.
5, 48n—they had received several false reports that Syr. was entirely shut in. :
110 OOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
7. κατὰ τὰς °"E.—via: cf. 11. 76, 4 κατὰ χῶμα προσάγειν. Epipolae includes all the high ground west of Achradina which was not inclosed in the fortifications of the city.
8. orpariua—dat. of accompaniment, only used in naval and military expressions.
éBovAcbovro— because before they had supposed that the only chance of getting into Syr. was by eluding the A. fleet.
9. ἐν δεξιᾷ AaBévres—except here Thuc. always uses ἔχειν ἐν &., ἐν ἀριστερᾷ.
10. διακινδυνεύσωσι᾽ιν .---80 11. 4 ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται. Thuc. does not use πότερον. . F. He | uses πότερον twice, viz. I. 80 πῶς χρὴ. . ἐπειχθῆναι; πότερον ταῖς ναυσίν ; and Vi. 88 τί καὶ βούλεσθε; πότερον ἄρχειν; In both cases ἀλλὰ follows (ὑποφορά), as in Andoc. 1. 148 τίνα “γὰρ ἀναβιβάσωμαι; τὸν πατέρα; ἀλλὰ τέθνηκεν. ἀλλὰ τοὺς ἀδελφούς ; ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ εἰσίν.
διακινδυνεύσωσιν ἐσπλεῦσαι--οὗ the compounds of κινδυνεύω, ἀνα-, ἀπο-, δια-, παρα- are found with infin. ; ἐπι-, προ-, συγ- are not.
11. ‘Ipépav—founded 646 B.c. from Zancle, to be a strong- hold against Phoenician Panormus. It was destroyed for ever by the Carthaginians in 408.
12, αὐτούς---τοὺς Ἱμεραίους, the name of the people implied in the name of their city, as constantly.
13. ots—after the collective στρατιάν.
§ 21.14. καὶ Bofev—cf. vir. 8 ἐβουλεύοντο, καὶ ἔδοξε πρῶτον ἐς Χῖον πλεῖν αὐτοῖς.
16. Spews—in spite of his previous indifference; vi. 104 ὑπερεῖδε TO πλῆθος . . . Kal οὐδεμίαν φυλακήν ww ἐποιεῖτο.
ὡς ... @méorade—aor. for plup. in dependent clause, as constantly.
πυνθανόμενος. . . elvat—generally πυνθάνομαι and αἰσθάνομαι take the partic.
18. @vAaxiv—concrete, as in φυλακὰς καθίστασθαι τι. 24.
περαιοῦνται Sid—cf. 1. 107 διὰ τοῦ κόλπου περαιοῦσθαι. The accus, is the ordinary constr.
τοῦ πορθμοῦ--ἰν. 24 ἔστι δὲ ὁ πορθμὸς ἡ μεταξὺ ‘Prrylov θάλασσα καὶ Μεσσήνης.
19, σχόντες ᾿Ρηγίῳ---σχεῖν is also constructed with ἐς and κατά. (Bekker Anecd. 1. 173 σχών, Sorixy: Θουκυδίδης ἑβδόμῳ.)
Meoohyy—its older name was Zancle; from Sicel Danklon, a reaping-hook, = ἀγκών.
831. 20. rots re ‘Ipepalovs—co-ordinate with καὶ τοὺς Σελι- νουντίους ἐκέλευον.
21. καὶ αὐτούς --[ἢ6 καὶ is epexegetic, introducing the ex- planation of ξυμπολεμεῖν.
NOTES 111
25. dveAxvorav—so that the oarsmen were available as infantry.
τοὺς 2. πέμψαντες éx&tevov—observe (1) that when a partic. and verb apply to a common object, the object follows the constr. required by the partic. ; (2) that πέμπω is a regular exception to this rule in such phrases as κήρυκα, πρέσβεις, ἀποίκους, πέμψαντες, as they are so frequently used absolutely that the object is generally not accommodated to the partic. at all: cf. 11. 27 τὴν Αἴγιναν πέμψαντες ἐποίκους ἔχειν : VII. 40 ᾿Αστύοχον πέμψαντες ἐκέλευον. Contrast c. 3 μέρος τι πέμψας πρὸς τὸ φρούριον αἱρεῖ : c. 85 ἐπὶ τοὺς τριακοσίους πέμψαντες ξυνέλαβον.
Tavorparia—Selinus only sent ψιλούς τινας καὶ ἱππέας (§ 5), as it was at war with Segesta. (Thuc. is fond of thus contrast- ing great projects with meagre performances. Cf. 11. 93.)
27. xoplov—meanings (1) a strategical position, (2) a farm.
8 4]. 28. Σικελῶν reves—the S. were a Latin tribe, and were driven from Latium into Bruttium, whence they were again driven over to Sicily by the Opicans.
29. wpooxwpetyv—the greater part of the S. had supported the Athenians through enmity with Syracuse since 451 B.o., when the Sicel leader Ducetins had defeated the combined forces of Acragas and Syracuse.
30. ’ApxwviSov—he had aided Ducetius in founding Calacte on the N. coast of Sicily. When D. died in 440, Syracuse feared that A. would revive the power of the Sicels, and so made war on them.
31. rabry—i.c. those of Northern Sicily.
32. τινῶν---Α. was prince of Herbita, and his territory, or at least his influence, probably extended to Calacte on the north coast.
34. ἐκ Aak. . .. fxew—here ἥκω expresses ‘come duly to their assistance,’ as in βοήθεια ἥξει 111. 4; ο. 16; ὠφελία ἥξει VI. 98. Cf. vi. 78 és τὴν Λακεδαίμονα πρέσβεις ἀπέστειλαν ὅπως ξυμμαχία αὐτοῖς παραγένηται. The word ἥκω is constantly so used in drama, esp. in addressing persons who have come to bring help.
προθύμως---οὗ, vi. 18 π. παραγίγνεσθαι, and c. 66 and 70 π. ἀντιλαβέσθαι.
8 δ]. 35. nal—‘ and so,’ giving the result, as often.
36. oderfpov—éavrod would be more correct here and in c. 3, 4; but the whole side is meant.
41. ἐς xwAlovs—direct object of ἀναλαβών. A prep. and its case may stand for subj. or obj. of a verb.
42. τοὺς πάντας-- πᾶς preceded by the art. gives the sum total. Cf. 11. 7 és τὸν πάντα ἀριθμόν. (The Sicels were always a number of isolated atoms except only when united under Ducetius and to some extent under Archonides. )
112 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®HE Z
2 . §11. 1, Aeveddos—Gylippus and Pythen had left the Cor. here with fifteen ships, and had sailed out with four, hoping to prevent Italy from joining Athens, but despairing of Sicily.
2. ὡς εἶχον raxous—cf. c. 57 ws ἕκαστοι τῆς ξυντυχίας ἔσχον. vi. 97 ὡς ἕκαστος τάχους εἶχε. Tac. An. xv. 58 ut quisque audentiae habuisset accurrerunt is a conscious imitation of this. Xen. Hel. 4, 5, 15 ws τάχους ἕ. εἶχε. Herod. vi. 116 ws ποδῶν εἴχον.
5. &ptxvetrat—having entered by the Little Harbour (called Laccius), eluding the A. fleet which commanded the Great Harbour.
8. μέλλοντας éxxAnoidoev—there is no evidence to prove that ‘it was the very day,’ as Freeman says, ‘which had been | fixed for the discussion.’ Thuc. only says that they intended to discuss the question of peace.
12, Aax. drooreAdvrav—Kriiger notes that the gen. abs. is often thus placed qualifying a verb. Cf. v. 4 τρίτος αὐτὸς ᾿Αθηναίων πεμπόντων ἐξέπλευσε.
§ 21. 16. yoOdvovro—by message from him.
§ 31]. 16. "lerds—Steph. Byz. says Philistus referred to it as φρούριον Σικελίας ; but it is quite unknown.
rére—Classen refers this to ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ, but as Thue. never uses τότε with reference to the period implied in a temporal expression, Poppo rightly refers it to of Συρακόσιοι ἐξῆλθον.
τεῖχος. . . τῶν Σικελῶν -- [6 perversion of the natural order adds emphasis to τῶν Σικελῶν. Cf. 11. 5, 5 ἐν σπονδαῖς σφῶν πειραθέντες καταλαβεῖν τὴν πόλιν, where σφῶν belongs to
τὴν πόλιν. Cf. onc. 17, 8, 4, and 18, 1.
εἶν τῇ παρόδῳ--ο 1. 126; cf. ἐν ὁδῷ εἶναι, ‘to be on the road.’
17. ἑλών, καὶ Evv.—when two partic. are joined by καί, the
action of the one generally precedes that of the other in time,
or gives the cause of it. The former may be the case here.
(Hw. and Sta. bracket καί.)
19. EdpénAov — it is strange enough that the Syr. should not have established an outpost on the point of the ‘ Broad Nail’ in the winter of 415 when the fortifications were ex- tended ; but still stranger that G. should have found Euryelus now undefended by the Athenians.
20. μετὰ τῶν &., they had joined him by marching through the open space north of the A. lines.
§ 41.21. ἔτνχε.... AOdv—with the aor. of τυγχάνω, φθάνω, λανθάνω the aor. partic. expresses time not antecedent to, but coincident with the time of the verb. To express time ante- cedent to the time of these verbs, either (1) the pres. or imperf.
NOTES 113
of these verbs must be used, or (2) if the aor. is used, the perf. partic. is necessary. Cf. onc. 4, 3.
22. κατὰ τοῦτο τοῦ Katpot—cf. c. 69 ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ τοῦ καιροῦ ; c. 88 ἐν τούτῳ τύχης. Cf. also the idiom εἰς τοῦτο (τοσοῦτο) ἐλθεῖν (ἀφικέσθαι, ἥκειν) with gen. ; id temporis; eo ( furoris) venire. (Phrynichus says that the noun of éime requires the art., but ‘no such rule was known to Attic authors, the art. being employed or omitted according to the whim of the writer or as the meaning required.’ Rutherford.)
23. ἑπτὰ... 4 éxrd—it would be about seven to the fort on the κρημνός, about eight to the κύκλος, as far as the building was then completed. (Those who think that the κύκλος was further north, and that the wal] between it and the κρημνὸς was double —Classen, Holm, Lupus, Miiller—are forced to bracket ἑπτὰ
. σταδίων, as the length of the double wall must then be considerably greater. See Intr. p. xii.)
pev—answered by τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ. The double wall, as nearly completed, is contrasted with the northern wall, very incom- plete. (Fr. Miiller and Oeltze de particularum μέν et δέ usu Halle ’87 place μὲν between és and τὸν below.)
v—gen. of measure; cf. 11. 13 τὰ μακρὰ τείχη τεσ- σαράκοντα σταδίων. The position of the gen. is due to the antithesis, which often causes a disturbance of the natural order. See onc. 17, 3.
ἀπετετέλεστο---οἡ the question whether Thuc. here neglects to take account of the wall between the κύκλος and the κρημνός, see Intr. p. xiii.
24. ἐς τὸν... Ausva—it crossed three levels, (1) a short portion of Epipolae, (2) τὸ paddy, the level just below the κρημνός, (3) τὸ ἕλος, the marshy ground about Lysimeleia.
25. Surdotv—' contra exteriorem etiam hostem,’ Justus Lipsius. Cf. Lucian Ver. hist. 1. 19. Endymion the king of the moon made war on Phaethon k. of the sun, because the latter had prevented Endymion from colonising Hesperus. The Nephelo- centaurs in Phaethon’s service build a wall ὥστε μηκέτι τὰς αὐγὰς ἀπὸ τοῦ nou πρὸς τὴν σελήνην διήκειν. τὸ δὲ τεῖχος ἦν διπλοῦν, ὥστε σαφὴς ἔκλειψις τῆς σελήνης ἐγεγόνε. This pro- duced peace.
26. τὸ πρὸς τὴν 0.—epexegetic of τι. Cf. ΥὙΠ|. 21 ἐς διακο- σίους τινὰς τοὺς πάντας.
27. τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ - ἄνω: τοῦ κ.---΄ the remainder of the wall north of the fort’; the same as τὸ πρὸς βορέαν τοῦ κύκλου τεῖχος in vi. 99. Cf. Herod. 1. 72 of the course of the Halys ῥέων ἄνω πρὸς βορέην. (So in vi. 99 κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου = south of the κ., as Sitzler explains. Without ἄνω there are two ways of taking the text: (1) τῷ ἄλλῳ = ἑτέρωθι ‘on the other side of,’
I
114 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
of which meaning there is no example ; or (2) making πρὸς τὸν Tpurytkov govern τοῦ κύκλου ‘for the rest of the wall on the Trogilus side of the «.,’ but, from the analogy of other pre- positional phrases, it is clear that even so τοῦ κύκλου must be ‘partitive’; cf. rv. 108, 1 τὰ (τοῦ ποταμοῦ) πρὸς ᾿Ηιόνα ; Iv. 5 τοῦ χωρίου τὸ πρὸς ἤπειρον. This would necessitate taking κύκλος here to mean the whole circumference of the walls, as in 11. 13; but «x. ‘must mean a central point between the two pieces of wall spoken of,’ as it clearly does in all the other passages— vi, 98, 99, 101, 102.)
80. ἔστιν ἃ... τὰ St—for τὰ μὲν, . τὰ He...
καὶ ἡμίεργα. . . καὶ &epyacpéva—the first καὶ marks the antithesis between τῷ πλέονι and ἔστιν d, the second that be- tween ἔστιν ἃ and τὰ δέ. ᾿
31. παρὰ τοσοῦτον---οὗ, VIII. 88 παρὰ τοσοῦτον ἐγένετ᾽ αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, and παρὰ ὃν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Herod. ΙΧ. 88. .
82. pév—in transition, as often, like μὲν δή ; 11. 4 οἱ μὲν δὴ οὕτως ἐπεπράγεσαν. οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι ; 111. 24.
8 81]. 1. aldviSlws—Thuc. uses ἄφνω, αἰφνιδίως, ἐξαίφνης, and, in the earlier books, ἐξαπίνης and ἐξαπιναίως. The last two are Tonic.
2. eplow—indirect reflexive, not referring to the subj. of its own clause, but to that of the main clause. Hence σφεῖς is re- gularly used only in subord. sentences, But (1) Thuc. some- times uses σφᾶς like Ionic writers, for σφᾶς αὐτοὺς or ἑαυτούς, as II. 65 αὐτοὶ ἐν σφίσι. . . ἐσφάλησαν. (2) He uses ἑαυτῶν, like Attic writers, for σφῶν or oderépas, as 11. 7 οἱ Λακ. πόλεις 'ξυμμαχίδας ποιούμενοι ὅσαι ἦσαν ἐκτὸς τῆς ἑαυτῶν δυνάμεως, where ἑαυτῶν refers to Λακεδαιμόνιοι.
émdvreav—as Thuc. has given no hint that Gyl. had as yet passed the Athenian lines, and as the Syr. had gone out to meet him, we may assume that he was still on the west side of the lines.
3. ἐθορνυβήθησαν piv. . . παρετάξαντο é—sharp antithesis, as IIT. 101 ὁμήρους μὲν ἔδοσαν, ἠκολούθουν δὲ οὔ.
4, θέμενος τὰ ὅπλα---Ἰ1ἴ. ‘having grounded arms,’ ‘ taken up ἃ position,’ cum constitisset.
5. éyyts—apparently in the plain, before the διπλοῦν τεῖχος.
προσπέμπει---ἰῃ this use of πέμπω the historic pres. is commoner than the aor. If the negotiation is elaborate, the imperf. is used.
6. Aéyovra—contrast 11. 85 πέμπουσι ξυμβούλους κελεύοντες. The nom. and accus. are both used. Cf. 111. 52 προσπέμπει αὐτοῖς κήρυκα λέγονται. (Meineke and Hw. λέγων or λέξοντα. Kr. thinks λέγοντα may be spurious.)
NOTES 115
el BotAovrar—formal expression in proposing terms ; 6.9. IV. 37 ἐκήρυξαν εἰ βούλοιντο τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι.
7. hpep@v—any time within the period, like νυκτός, ἡμέρας.
8. ἑτοῖμος --- ἃ5 though λέγων had preceded. Cf. v. 41 οὐκ ἐώντων μεμνῆσθαι περὶ αὐτῆς, ἀλλ᾽ εἰ βούλονται σπένδεσθαι, ἑτοῖμοι εἶναι ; VIII. 48, 6. ᾿
8.21. 9. ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ποιεῖσθαι---80. αὐτά, the proceeding, as in Iv. 5 ἑορτὴν ἔτυχον ἄγοντες καὶ ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ἐποιοῦντο. Cf. ἐν with ἔχω, τίθεσθαι, εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, as 1. 35 ἐν ἀδικήματι θήσονται : Aesch. P. V. 289 ἐν οἴκτῳ προθέμενος ; ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχειν, etc.
10. οὐδὲν daroxptvdpevor—Plutarch says the soldiers asked whether the coming of a single Spartan had so emboldened them. Cf. Isocr. Archid. 52 ἀναμνήσθητε ὅτι εἰ πολιορκουμένῃ τινὶ τῶν πόλεων εἷς μόνος Λακεδαιμονίων βοηθήσειεν, ὑπὸ πάντων ἂν ὡμολογεῖτο παρὰ τοῦτον γενέσθαι τὴν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς.
12, ἀλλήλοις--- Δα αοα to show that the subj. is no longer οἱ δέ.
8.8]. 14. ἐπανῆγε —i.e, further westwards, away from the Athenian lines, and in the review ground west of Lysimeleia. Gyl. had apparently not yet entered Syr. (The edd. say eastwards, and assume that Gy]. had passed between the Athenian lines and the walls of Syr. As Freeman says, such evpvxwpla could have been found only to the west of the A. ‘wall. But he too thinks that Gyl. had been east of the lines till now, and had to march out round the north of the lines, not venturing to meet the A. in the narrow space between their fort and the city walls. Diodorus says nothing; but Plutarch Nic. 19 has προσῆγεν εὐθὺς ὁ Γύλιππος ἐξ ὁδοῦ wapa- τεταγμένος.)
15. padAov—with τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν ‘the more open ground.’ Cf. 111. 107 ἐν τῷ εὐωνύμῳ μᾶλλον.
16. ἡσύχαζε---[ῃο opposite of πολεμῶ, and so means to abstain from acts of hostility. Cf. ὁ. 12, 1.
. 17. éavrév—plur., as inc. 1, 5. τείχει---ἰ, 6, τὸ διπλοῦν τ΄ ΝΜ" —ére is used when two acts are represented as simultaneous ; ἐπειδὴ when the act of its verb precedes that of the main verb ; ὡς when no connection between the time of the two acts is expressed.
18. aafyyaye—by marching round the northern extremity of the Athenian lines.
19. Tepevtrcv—it had been taken into the city and fortified in the preceding winter.
§ 41. 22. Sres—by.far the commonest final particle in Thuc., and rather commoner than ἵνα in Xen. In all other authors ἵνα very greatly predominates. (See table in M.7. p. 398.)
116 BOYKYAIAOY ΞἘΎΓΓΡΛΦΗΣ Z
&dXooe—esp. to Labdalum.
23. mwépyas—back by the way by which he had come.
τὸ φρούριον --ἃ5 Gyl. intended to build his cross-wall along the north of Epipolae, it was necessary first to get possession of Labdalum.
τὸ AdBSadov—in 111. 97 the name means the neighbour- hood so called, but here it is the fort built there. Nicias had made no use of L., and did not even keep up proper communi- cations with it. After Gyl. had passed it, 10 should have been abandoned.
24. αἱρεῖ καὶ... ἀπέκτεινεν ---οαἷ. 11. 67 ξυλλαμβάνει.. καὶ ἐκέλευσεν ; tb. 69 ἀποθνήσκει. . . καὶ διέφθειρε.
25. οὐκ érubavés—because the ridge on which the fort stood was lower than the centre of Epipolae.
§ δ]. 27. τριήρης . . . addoxerat—an event of importance, as this was the first Syracusan success at sea. ‘The Syr. were be- ginning to think of regaining control of the Great Harbour which they had lost since the A. fleet sailed thither from Thapsus.
29. &hoppotoca—sent out from the A. fleet to the mouth of the Harbour.
4 §11.1. érexifov-—his ‘main object now is to hinder them from carrying their north wall to the edge of the cliff, and down to the water on that side. A wall running east and west was to be built.’ Freeman. This is the third Syr. counterwork.
2. διὰ rév’Emurodév . . . éyxdpovov—four expressions are here given in order to fix the direction: (1) διὰ τῶν ’E. shows that the wall was to run along E.: (2) ἀπὸ τῆς π. ἀρξάμενοι shows that it was to run from east to west: (3) ἄνω ‘north of the κύκλος, as VI. 99 κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου ‘south of’ it; cf. on c. 2,4; (4) πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον ‘at an angle’ to the north wall of the A. (The meaning of ἄνω is much disputed: (a2) Freeman says it means that ‘the wall was carried westwards, up the slope,’ with which the note in Jowett agrees. SoStahl. In this case ἄνω adds nothing new, but—as often—only gives the general direction which is further defined by the words follow- ing it—viz. πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον ; (b) Classen renders ‘along the northern height’ and Fr. Miiller ‘north of the xvxXos,’ which is much the same thing. This is better, because (1) it enables us to give the same meaning throughout the description to ἄνω, viz. ‘north’ (cf. c. 4, 8) of the place specified ; (2) if ἄνω does not mean ‘north,’ there is nothing to show on which side of the κύκλος the new wall ran. This can indeed be inferred from what follows, but in the case of the other counterworks Thue. states clearly that the one was κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλον, the other διὰ τοῦ ἕλους ; (3) ἄνω thus gives a new indication of direction and does not merely repeat the other expressions. )
NOTES 117
4, πρὸς τὸ éyxdpovov—adverbial, ‘cross-wise’: with preposi- tional phrases used adverbially the article is rarely found.
5. ..- εἱ μὴ δύναιντο᾽. . . μηκέτι οἷοί τε dovv—when ἐὰν and subj. is changed into εἰ and opt., the subj. in ἃ final clause is regularly changed into opt. ; the only exceptions in Thue. are this passage and Iv. 120 ὅπως, εἰ. . . περιτνγχάνοι, ἡ τριήρης ἀμύνῃ (ν. 1. ἀμύνοι).
7. aworaxloar.—‘ to invest the city,’ by completing the northern wall.
§ 21.7. of re’ A. ἀνεβεβήκεσαν ... .xaloT.... érja—ef. 11. 59 ἥ re γῇ αὐτῶν ἐτέτμητο τὸ δεύτερον καὶ ἣ νόσος ἐπέκειτο. The A. had lately (ἤδη) gone up when Gyl. made his attack ; τε
. καὶ are paratactic and describe nearly simultaneous events.
8. τὸ ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ---ἰ.6. they had finished the small piece re- ferred to inc. 2, 4. Thuc. always writes ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ, and so the orators unless some particular sea is referred to, as Demosth. vi. 12 τῆς ἐπὶ τῇ 6. ἀρχῆς.
10. qv γὰρ κιτιλ.---οὗ c. 48 καί (ἣν γάρ τι. . .; 1. 187 καί (ἦν γὰρ ἀγνὼς...
te(xovs—the northern wall.
8 81. 12. ἔτυχον... αὐλιζόμενοι --- imperf. partic. of pro- longed action ; the A. were bivouacking by chance outside their fortress, on the east side. ἐτύγχανον αὐλισάμενοι Would mean ‘they had bivouacked by chance.’ Cf. on c. 2, 4.
13. ὡς Jo@ovro—the regular periphrasis for αἰσθόμενοι when the partic. would be inelegant.
14. oderépovs—after 6. See onc. 1, 5.
πάλιν ---ἰβ placed after the verb when not emphatic. It is esp. common after ἀπάγειν and ἀναχωρεῖν.
15. tynAdérepov—pred. ; cf. τι. 75 ἤρετο μέγα.
16. &AAovs—exclusive ; cf. c. 61, 1.
18. &kacrot—this word is frequently put into the relative . Clause, like quisque, instead of in the principal clause.
§ 41.19. τὸ Πλημμύριον.---“ the A. fleet was now. . . in the north-western corner of the harbour, near the swamp of Lysi- meleia. .. Now that the Syr. were beginning to stir by sea, such a position gave them no command of the harbour in general... . Everything now had to come by sea, at a great disadvantage, as long as the A. had no command of the mouth of the harbour.
. . N. therefore determined to occupy Plemmyrion.’—Free- man.
20. avrurépas—the view from it takes in the whole extent of Ortygia and Achradina.
28. ῥᾷον---ῥᾷων would be expected ; but ἡ ἐσκομιδὴ ἔσται is treated as passive of τὴν ἐσκομιδὴν ποιήσομαι, so that ἔσται
118 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
would more naturally be γενήσεται, as in I. 18 χαλεπῶς ἡ ἀνάστασις ἐγίγνετο. Cf. c. 28, 1 (γίγνεται and ἐστὶ are fre- quently qualited by an adv. in such phrases as κακῶς γίγνεται =t turns out badly for ; so that ῥᾷον here is not opposed to Gk. idiom.)
24, δι᾽ &docovos—local, as in δι᾿ ὀλίγου 36, 5; at a shorter distance from the Syracusan fleet.
25. πρὸς τῷ λιμένι---οἴ, VIII. 94 τοῦ πολέμου... . πρὸς τῷ λιμένι ὄντος, of a battle closé to Piraeus. The phrase means ‘near the mouth of the harbour.’ The fleet would now be drawn up just inside the harbour, and there would be less danger of disasters like that related in c. 3, 5 when provisions were to be brought in..
27. ἐκ puvxod—the north-western corner, close to the point at which the double wall touched the harbour.
τὰς éravayoyas—putting out against an enemy ; ἐπαγωγή, conveyance of provisions, as c. 24.
28. ποιήσεσθαι. --560 index, 8. ν. ποιεῖσθαι.
ἤν Te... κιγῶνται-- -[ῃο full sentence is εἰ τειχισθείη, ἐφαίνετο οὐκ. .. ποιήσεσθαι, ἤν τι ναυτικῷ κι ; hence there are two protases, both οἵ which, in the recta, are subj. with ἥν. In these cases, the first protasis is the principal condition, the second the subordinate. Cf. Andoc. 1. 149 ἐὰν rots ἐχθροῖς πεισθῆτε, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ ὑμῖν μεταμελήσῃ, οὐδὲν ἔτι πλέον ποιήσετε. ;
Kwovrat—{1) sc. οἱ Συρακόσιοι. Thuc. changes the subject more rapidly than we should do. Cf. 11. 3 ὅπως μὴ προσφέ- ρωνται (ol ΠλαταιῆΞ) καὶ σφίσιν ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου γίγνωνται (οἱ Θηβαῖοι); (2) passive voice, as usual with verbs used reflexively, the purely reflexive use of the mid. being quite rare. Cf. v. 8 ws εἶδε κινουμένους τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους.
προσεῖχέ re—‘in fact he was now disposed to give more attention to naval warfare.’
30. ἐπειδὴ ---ἰῃ temporal sentences where the indic. was used in the Recta, it is always retained in the Obliqua.
ἧκεν---οὗ, c. 1, 4.
8 δ]. 31. orparvav—‘ troops’; the greater part of the army was still encamped along the walls.
32. ppotpua—‘ N. built three forts, a greater and two smaller. .. . The new station, standing apart from the constant fighting which went on around the walls on Epipolae, was thought to be a safer resting-place for provisions and stuff generally.’— Freeman.
33. oxedn—‘stores’; cf. c. 24, 2.
%cerro—Thuc. always uses the simple verl instead of ἀπό- κειμαι in this sense,
NOTES 119
84. τὰ μεγάλα---ἰ. 6. transports.
861], 35. dore—quamobrem. In Homer ὥστε is used onl in a comparative and causal sense. In tragedy, when used with the indic. (not found in Aesch.), ὥστε nearly always = quam- obrem, and this use is common in Thuc., as 11. 87, and other prose authors.
wAnpoparav-—one of the many nouns in -μα which is used in a concrete sense, of persons. They are esp. common in tragedy, as δούλευμα, slave, πτῶμα, fallen body.
36. κάκωσις éyévero—pass. of κάκωσιν ποιεῖσθαι. Thue. is
esp. fond of abstract nouns in -ors, as δήλωσις, ὀλόφυρσις,.
ξύλωσις, and probably coined some himself.
37. xpepevot.—causal, joined to ὁπότε ἐξέλθοιεν. Such juxtaposition of dissimilar expressions is far commoner in Thuc. ‘than in other authors. Tacitus imitates the rhannerism.
byyi@ev—adv. joined to adj. σπανίῳ, as VIII. 48 ἄκριτοι καὶ βιαιότερον ἀποθνήσκειν, and often.
38. ἐπὶ φρυγ. . . . ἐξέλθοιεν.---ἐπὶ with accus. after verbs of motion corresponds to the supine in -wm.
39. τῶν lrwéwv—having gone round the west end of
Epipolae. 42. Svpaxoolois—as the subject, μέρος ἱππέων, of the plu-
perf. pas. is personal, the dat. is ethic rather than dat. of the.
agent. Contrast ταῦτα πέπρακταί wo. (When the subject of the perf. pas. is personal, the agent is regularly expressed by ὑπό.)
48, ἵνα μὴ. . ἐξίοιεν---οροχοροίίο of διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ Π., as in I. 99 διὰ τὴν ἀπόκνησιν τῶν στρατειῶν, ἵνα μὴ ἀπ᾽ οἴκον ὧσι.
44, ᾿Ολνμπιείῳ---ἰ}}18 includes (a) the τέμενος of the god, (δ) the adjacent land. There are still two gaunt pillars of the temple standing.
45. wodlyvy—later this was turned into a proper name.
érerdxaro—cf. ddixaro c. 75. The termination is Ionic, but is occasionally found in other Attic prose writers ; 6.5. Xen. Anab. iv. 8, 5 ἀντιτετάχαται. (Moeris wrongly says ἐτετάχατο ᾿Αττικῶς ᾿ τεταγμένοι ἦσαν ᾿ Ἑλληνικῶς.)
8 71. 48. dpyro—regular word of military instructions.
50. νανλοχεῖν atrds—‘to lic in wait for them.’
81]. 3. wpowapeBddovro—‘had previously laid in a line for use,’ 1.6. for the wall from the circle to Trogilus.
odlow—for σφίσιν αὐτοῖς or ἑαυτοῖς. Cf. onc. 3, 1. Thue. often uses σφᾶς thus as a primary reflexive, referring to the subj. of its own clause ; but not when the reflexive is emphatic ' or in antithesis.
4, τοῦ rayloparos—the cross-wall which he was building. § 21.7. Apxe—‘ was first to’ )( ἤρχετο ‘ began to.’
5
120 BOYKYAIAOY ᾿ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
9. TeXtoparev—the invomplete Athenian wall and the- Syracusan cross-wall.
10. χρῆσις 4v—another case of simple abstract nouns (esp. in -σις and "μα) with εἰμί, γίγνομαι. Cf. c 4, 6; 16, 2.
8.81. 15. οὐκ ἔφη. . ἐκείνων GAN ἑαντοῦ --- [16 general principle in Gk. antithesis is that the more emphatic clause comes second. (The rule might be broken in the case of ἔφη, to get the neg. before it.)
.. 10. apdprnpa—to add to the disaster Gongylus had fallen ; _ 850 Plutarch relates,
18. τῇ rdfe—explained by ἐντὸς. . ποιήσας, and causal.
19. évrds—zi.e. μεταξὺ τῶν τειχισμάτων.
ποιήσας --80. τὴν τάξιν. The usual phrase is ἐντὸς ποιεῖσθαι. The act, is used because he actually drew up (constructed) the line of battle. Contrast ξύλλογον ποιεῖν, of ἃ στρατηγός, with ξύλλογον ποιεῖσθαι, of the men attending.
§ 41. 21. διανοεῖσθαι obras—‘to convince themselves that they would find their resources ample, and that they would be guilty of intolerable lack of determination unless.’
22. τῇ μὲν παρασκενῇ )( τῇ δὲ γνώμῃ, the material con. trasted with the moral resources. A common antithesis, which we should not make so prominent. γνώμῃ goes with ἀξιώσουσι.
29. εἰ μὴ ἀξιώσουσι--“ unless they mean to bind themselves.’
24. Πελοποννήσιοι. . Δωριῆς, "Iévev . . νησιωτῶν-- chiasmus. Πελοποννήσιοι is addressed to the Syracusans by their allies, thus reminding them of the origin of which they were very proud. Cf. Theocritus 15, 90 Συρακοσίαις ἐπιτάσ- σεις; | ws εἰδῇς καὶ τοῦτο, Κορίνθιαι εἰμὲς ἄνωθεν, [ ὡς καὶ ὁ Βελ- λεροφῶν " Πελοποννασιστὶ λαλεῦμες "| δωρίσδεν δ' ἔξεστι δοκῶ τοῖς Δωριέεσσι. The Athenians, on the contrary, did not at all care for the title ‘ Ionians.’
25. γησιωτῶν -- [116 Syracusans regarded themselves as ἠἤπει- ρῶται. Cf. ο. 21.
ξυγκλύδων.-- οἵ, Livy 22, 43 milites miztos ex conluvione omnium gentium. The word is rare in Attic, but is common in late authors. (Cf. Photius συγκλύδων συμμίκτων, ἐπηλύδων.)
κρατήσαντες eeAdoacPar—when partic. and verb govern a different case, a common object will nearly always follow the construction required by the partic.
26. &Adcacba.—the mid., which is unusual, is found also in Iv. 35.
6 gilaed. μὴ ἐθέλοιεν... elvar—the Recta would be ἐὰν μὴ ἐθέλωσι. . ἐστι, but ἐὰν is future, not iterative. ‘Even if the enemy should hesitate.’
Ἰ.
NOTES 121
éxetvor.—used of ‘the enemy,’ as dften ; sometimes even when a different pronoun is required by strict grammar.
5. περιορᾶν παροικοδομούμενον. {πὸ pres. partic. because the details of the building operation are thought of.
9. ταὐτὸν ἐποίει---“1ὖ would probably come to the same thing whether they fought a series of battles with unbroken success, or did not fight at all.’ τε. . καὶ are alternative, as often, and the infins. form the subject to ταὐτὸν ἐποίει.
10. vikav—why could not Nicias have attacked the cross- wall if he won a series of victories? Thuc., speaking in his own person, seems to represent Nicias as quite blind to this possibility.
11. διὰ παντὸς ---΄ continually.’
otv—resuming after a long parenthesis. See onc. 42, 3.
§ 21.13. ἔξω τῶν τειχῶν---ἰ 6. north-west of the κύκλος. With προάγειν ἔξω cf. ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκστρατεύεσθαι ἔξω.
ἄλλον ἣ wpdérepov—‘and not as previously.’ Before, they had fought μεταξὺ τῶν τειχισμάτων. (This use of μᾶλλον is a com- non metosis. Cf. 11. 41, 2 οὐ κόμπος μᾶλλον ἢ ἔργων ἀλήθεια.)
14. προαγαγὼν ---5 to the exact scene and formation of the battle edd. are unable to agree. The question is of no im- portance.
15. ἐκ mAaylov—so as to take the A. left in flank. Contrast κατὰ πρόσωπον 1. 106.
88. 20. 8¢ αὐτὸ-- Το. constantly uses αὐτὸ thus to de- note something which he has just described. So too αὐτὸ δρᾶν or ποιεῖν are idiomatic.
21. xarnpdxOn—this verb κατ-αράσσω is often used by Dio Cassius ; and is found in other late authors, but with pp.
§ 4]. 22. vuxrl— words expressing time do not need ἐν. Thuc. extends this rule to words like ἐσβολὴ and πόλεμος, which are quasi-temporal.
23. ἔφθασαν rapoicodopqoavres—notice the rule that with φθάνω, τυγχάνω and λανθάνω the aor. partic. does not denote past time relatively to the leading verb.
καὶ trapeAOdvres—‘and so they passed.’ The whole of the passage from this to the end of the c. is an explanation of the words παροικοδομήσαντες.
25. μηκέτι phre—more emphatic than μήτε. . ἔτι.
μήτε... re—so neque .. et.
26. αὐτῶν, éxelvous—applying to the same persons, as often |
in all Attic prose. So Aic and ille in Cic. de Fin. 4, 16, 48. 27. ἀπεστερηκέναι. . μὴ--οἴ τι. 101 ἀπιστοῦντες μὴ ἥξειν. The perf. denotes the completion of the act. ἀπεστερηκέναι. . μὴ ἂν. . amorax(oat—virtually oblique for οὐκ ἂν ἀποτειχίσειαν.
7
122 OBOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
§11. 1. at re—answered by καὶ ὁ Γύλιππος below.
2. καὶ ᾿Αμπρακιωτῶν---[ἢο art. (ai) is not repeated, as often in Thue. ; cf. c. 14 τά re ὄντα καὶ ἀπαναλισκόμενα.
6. τὸ Aourdv—with τοῦ ἐγ. τείχους.
7. μέχρι τοῦ EvpvfAov—it was carried so far to prevent an enemy from approaching by the western ascent to Epipolae.
§21. 9. ἐς τὴν ἄλλην Σ ἐπὶ σ. Sxero—Cf. Herod. vir. 198 ἐπὶ τὸ κῶας ἔπλεον és Alay.
στρατιάν re—answered by καὶ τῶν πόλεων.
10. καὶ ναυτικὴν .---“ intending to collect one both naval and inilitary.’
11. μὴ πρόθυμος ἦν--τὰς μὴ π. οὔσας, ‘any that were not (then) eager.’ Cf. [Dem.] 11, 4 τῶν φίλων . . . τοὺς δὲ μηκέτι προθύμους εἷναι συναγωνίστας.
8 8]. 18. &Aow—exclusive use, ῳ πρέσβεις being contrasted with Gylippus.
15. τρόπῳ ᾧ dv—for ᾧ ἂν τρόπῳ ; unusual order, found also in [Dem. ] 47, 33 τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν δυνώμεθα.
17. éewperarepropévov—‘sending for fresh troops.’ Cf. ἐπιπέμπειν c. 15.
§ 41. 19. ἐπλήρουν καὶ dverapavro—so c. 51; Dem. 51, 5 ἐπεπλήρωτό μοι καὶ πάντες ἑωρᾶθ᾽ ὑμεῖς ἀναπειρωμένην τὴν ναῦν. Diod. 18, 8 τὰς ἀναπείρας ἐποιοῦντο. The technical ex- pression for practising manceuvres.
21. éréppwvro—opposite of ἀρρωστεῖν. Both have a physical and a moral sense. Cf. 11. 8 ἔρρωντο és τὸν πόλεμον.
§11. 4. ἕπεμπε. . ἀγγέλλων --80 11. 81 ἔπεμπον κελεύοντες. The partic. is generally in the nom. with πέμπω in Thuc. The imperf. here is probably intended to represent the details of an elaborate act (as often with πέμπω) : thus it will suit both πολλάκις μὲν and μάλιστα δὲς Seec. 3, 1 on λέγοντα.
6. καθ᾽ ἕκαστα .--ἃ prepositional phrase replacing the object (of ἀγγέλλων), as often with ἐπὶ πολύ.
8. Sevots—regular word for the difficulties of war.
εἰ μὴ. . μεταπέμψουσιν —the construction, εἰ with fut., expresses merely the logical dependence of the apodosis on the protasis, whereas ἣν with subj. shows. that the speaker hopes or fears the fulfilment of the condition. Thus Thuc. here puts the matter in a scientific form.
10. εἶναι - ποἱ ἔσεσθαι. Cf. Lysias 21, 25 ἡγουμένους αἰσχρὸν εἶναι εἰ ἀναγκασθησόμεθα. (The logical expression is sacrificed to effective rhetoric. )
8 4}. 11. κατὰ rot λέγειν G8uvacrlay—the omission of τὴν after κατὰ shows that Nicias did not know that they actually were incompetent.
12. &8vvaciav—this form, in place of the commoner ἀδυ-
NOTES 123
vada, is found in Herod., and was perhaps used also by Anti- hon.
yryvépevor—notice that in expressing the two causes, Thuc.
varies the construction (κατὰ and causal participle).
13. πρὸς xdpw—cf. 11. 65, 8 πρὸς ἡδονήν τι λέγειν, and πρὸς ὀργήν τι ἀντειπεῖν. The phrases are useful.
τὰ Svra—‘ the facts.’
14, érurrodfv—-litteras. In Lat. down to the empire epi- stula means a private letter. (Contrast the verbosa et grandis epistula from Capreae. )
16. ἐν τῷ ἀγγέλῳ ---ἰὰ the hands of, i.e. through. Cf. Aeschines 2, 104 ἐν ἡμῖν ἀποκιδυνεύειν. Common both in prose and verse.
μαθόντας -- μαθεῖν xal—so that μάλιστα belongs to μαθόντας as well as to βουλεύσασθαι.
17. βουλεύσασθα.----“ come to a decision.’
8 31. 18. kal—‘and so,’ a use frequent also in Aeschylus.
φέροντες --ἃ5 in Soph. 47. 735 ἥκει φέρων Αἴαντος ἡμῖν πρᾶξιν.
20. διὰ φυλακῆς. . ἔχων---οὗ, διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν, δι᾿ ὀργῆς ἔ. οἰοι Ξε ξυνεχῶς φυλάσσων. τὰ κατὰ τὸ σ. is object of ἔχων. ‘Superintended the army by keeping it in a state of defence instead of running self-imposed risks.’ So Dio Cass. 47, 36 αὐτοί re διὰ φυλακῆς μᾶλλον ἢ διὰ κινδύνων τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐποιοῦντο, taken from this passage. Isaeus 7, 14 ὃν ἤσκει καὶ δι’ ἐπιμελείας εἶχεν.
21. δὲ ἑκουσίων xwSivev—Classen supplies ἔχων ; Stahl takes the words with ἐπεμέλετο as an adverbial phrase. Either way will do, since ἔχων is itself almost equivalent to an adv. here, implying continuance.
22. éresé\ero—absolute.
3. Elepd(xxov—Perdiccas II., son of Alexander the Phil- hellene. His shifty policy gave great trouble to Athens in the war.
(1) Before 482 he was in alliance with Athens.
(2) In 482 he encouraged the revolt of Potidaea, because Athens was in alliance with his brother and enemy Philip. :
(3) In 481 he was reconciled to Athens.
(4) In 429 Athens projected an expedition against him, but was unable to undertake it.
(5) In 424 he encouraged Brasidas to invade Thrace.
(6) In 424 autumn, owing to differences with Brasidas, he made terms with the Athenians, but lent no
᾿ assistance.
(7) In 418 winter, he again joined Sparta, after the battle of Mantinea. The Athenians blockaded him in 417.
124 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®H: Z
(8) He is now again on terms with Athens, but Thuc. has omitted to explain this new change.
The condition of Macedon was much improved after the accession of Archelaus in 413.
én’ ’Apdlrrodkw—founded 437 by Hagnon (strategus 440, 430, 429). It passed over to Sparta in 424, and was never regained by Athens, though it should have been given back under the terms of the Peace of Nicias. In 358 Philip added it to Macedon. It was the central city of one of the four con- federacies into which Rome divided Macedon in 168, after the fall of Perseus.
4, τὴν μὲν πόλιν οὐχ elAcy—the neg. put first in parataxis, as often when the chief object of an action fails; cf. v. 6 Σταγείρῳ προσβάλλει. . . Kal οὐχ εἷλεν, Γαληψὸν δὲ λαμβάνει.
10 1]. 1. fixowres—‘came in due course.’ Note that ἥκω has the meaning (1) ‘to appear duly ’—in court, of litigants, (2) ‘to return’ from an errand, (8) ‘to reach’ one’s destination.
2. ὅσα τε d&wd—‘the oral message.” ἀπὸ describes the means. Cf. Aristoph. Hg. 539 ἀπὸ κραμβοτάτου στόματος μάτ- των ἐπινοίας ; Vesp. 656 λογίσαι μὴ ψήφοις, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ χειρός.
ὃ. εἴρητο. Cf. ο. 4, 7.
. &rnpota—why is the indic. usedshere ? Probably because Thuc. refers only to one occasion, though many asked questions on that occasion.
5. ὁ ypapparets—sc. τοῦ δήμου. Cf. Arist. Ath. Pol. c. 54 χειροτονεῖ δὲ καὶ ὁ δῆμος γραμματέα τὸν ἀναγνωσόμενον αὐτῷ καὶ τῇ βουλῇ, καὶ οὗτος οὐδενός ἐστι κύριος ἀλλὰ τοῦ ἀναγνῶναι.
6. rots ᾿Αθηναίοι4---ἰ.6. in the ecclesia. Probably, if we may infer from the decision arrived at, a special summons (κατάκλησι5) had been issued to the country population, among which Nicias found his chief support.
SyArotoay—regular word with ἐπιστολή, ψήφισμα, νόμος, στήλη.
rovase—the letter is in the form of a set speech. (It is entitled in F (Augustanus) πρὸς τοὺς ἐν ᾿Αθήναις Νικίου ἐπιστολή. Cf. T. Its full description would run, according to the rules of Hermogenes, which are followed throughout the rhetorical scholia of Thuc., ἡ στάσις πραγματική, λογική (or aypados), συμβουλευτικοῦ εἴδους, κεφάλαιον ἔχουσα τὸ συμφέρον. Cf. the third letter of Isocrates, written after Chaeronea to Philip.)
11 81]. 2. ἐν ἄλλαις ---Ἴθτοὸ ἐν contains the meaning ‘on account of,’ ‘thanks to,’ which it often suggests, just as in Eng. ‘we could not find our way ὧν the dark.’ Cf. onc. 8, 2.
3. paddvras—cf. τί μαθών, παθών.
4. ἐν @—describes the circumstances, a8 very often in Thuc., in quo sumus statu. Cf. onc. 29, 4.
τ NOTES 125
BovActioacGar—' to come to a decision ’"—again ingressive.
§21. 5. κρατησάντων yap—the διήγησις (narratio). (This excellently illustrates Aristot. Aheé. I, 16, 11 ἐν δὲ δημηγορίᾳ ἥκιστα διήγησίς ἐστιν, ὅτι περὶ τῶν μελλόντων οὐθεὶς διηγεῖται. ἀλλ᾽ ἐάν περ διήγησις 7, τῶν γενομένων ἔσται, ἵν᾽ ἀναμνησθέντες ἐκείνων βέλτιον βουλεύσωνται περὶ τῶν ὕστερον.)
μάχαις ταῖς πλείοσι--- ΨΥ this order? to emphasize the adjective. Cf. 11. 2, 2 ἄνδρας τοὺς ὑπεναντίους,
6. Lupaxoolovs—Classen notes on I. 108 that Thue. con- structs κρατεῖν with accus. when it is connected with μάχῃ or μαχόμενος (or when one of them is clearly implied in context) ; otherwise with gen. This rule is generally observed, for κρατεῖν with gen.=«xpeloowv γενέσθαι. Cf. Demosth. 8, 32 ὃν κρατήσαντας τοῖς ὅπλοις ; 19, 319 Φωκέας ἐκράτησε (sc. μάχῃ). [Demosth.] 18, 17 ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις κρατεῖν τῶν ἐχθρῶν is bad.
ἐφ᾽ οὖς ἐπέμφθημεν -- 18 remark is intended as a defence, by reminding the Athenians of the original plan of campaign. Hence ἐπέμφθημεν, not ἐστρατεύσαμεν.
9. ἔκ re. . . καὶ dwd—one of the commonest interchanges
- of prepositions, esp. in Isocrates. In some uses ἐκ and ἀπὸ are different ; 6.0. of descent, ἐκ is used of direct, ἀπὸ of indirect descent. Even as used here, ἐκ generally expresses the more important or immediate cause.
10. ἔστιν dv—in the nom. plur. always εἰσὶν (ot, at); in. oblique cases always ἔστιν (ὧν, ols, etc.) in Thuc., except when words intervene, as in 6. 25 ἦσαν τῶν σταυρῶν obs.
11. νικᾶται. .. ἀνεχωρήσαμεν for the hist. pres. followed by aor., cf. on c. 3, 4. (Notice the extreme simplicity and beauty of the style here. ) |
τῇ δ᾽ torepalg—se. μάχῃ, as in ur. 91. In 1. 44,1 ἐν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ = in the next day’s assembly ; and so in v. 46, 1. But when no noun precedes, ἡμέρα is meant.
12, ἀκοντισταῖς PracOévres—in c. 43 βιασθέντες ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν. The dat. is not ‘agent,’ but that used in military and naval phrases, of the general’s wapacxevj. Hence ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ is to be supplied. Note also that with βιάζομαι and all verbs denoting force, brd.and gen. is common with non-personal agents, as βιασθεὶς ὑπὸ τῆς νόσουι See one. 18, 2.
88]. 15. πλῆθος---οὗ superior numbers, as often.
Hovxdfopev—regular word to denote abstention from hostile operations, So quwiescere.
17. μέρος re—the addition of τι indefinitely extends the force of μέρος.
19, ὥστε μὴ elvar—the infin. with ὥστε here expresses some- thing which has actually occurred (it being the xatwral result), asin 11, 4 ras πύλας ἔκλῃσεν ὥστε μηδὲ ταύτῃ ἔτι ἔξοδον εἶναι.
126 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®PHS Z
The more energetic indic. construction with ὥστε is far commoner in Xenoplron and the Orators than in Herod., Thuc. and Tragedy. .
περιτειχίσαι αὐτούς --ο might have said περιτείχισιν αὐτῶν. Cf. IV. 181 οὐκ ἐγίγνετο σφῶν περιτείχισις.
21. ἐπελθὼν --' attack,’ here with accus., παρατείχισμα being common object to partic. and verb.
8 4]. 22. Ἐξυνβέβηκε «ον, δοκοῦντας --- ὙΠῸ ξυμβαίένει and infin. either dat. or accus. is used, dat. when the case precedes the infin., as 11. 61 ξυνέβη ὑμῖν πεισθῆναι dxepators.
ve—‘and so,’ giving the result of preceding details.
23. αὐτοὺς "ἄλλον: “ ourselves instead.’
ὅσα ye—dumiaxat, ‘as far as concerns,’ as in Iv. 48 ὅσα ye κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον τόνδε. Demosth. 21, 18 τούτων, ὅσα γ᾽ ἐν τῷ δήμῳ γέγονεν ; Plato, Rep. v. 14 ὅσα ἄνθρωποι. Thue. very often omits parts of εἰμί, γίγνομαι after ὅσος.
24. τοῦτο wdoxev—passive of τοῦτο ποιεῖν or Spay, the re- gular phrases for referring to an action just described : 1. 5, 2; 6,5; 11. 11, 8; 49, 5.
οὐδὲ yap—here begins the description of the difficulties of Nicias.
τῆς Xepas—put in a prominent position because it further emphasizes ὅσα γε κατὰ γῆν. Thue. constantly inverts the natural order for the sake of emphasis, esp. the order of the
n. δ᾽ 25. ἐπὶ πολὺ---᾽50α here of space ; less often of time.
12 §11. 1. πεπόμφασι δὲ Kal... καὶ... ofyerat—chiasmus is very common in Thue., and is quite a feature of his style.
4, τὰς μὲν. . . ἀπὸ δὲ rSv—the regular, but not universal order when a preposition occurs with ὁ μὲν or ὁ δὲ is that the particle should follow the preposition immediately ; e.g. Andoe. I, 29 περὶ μὲν τῶν μυστηρίων... περὶ dé τῶν ἀναθημάτων. In vi. 76, 4 οἱ μὲν is in a remarkable position.
καὶ πείσων... καὶ orpariav—the double καὶ marks the balancing of the clauses, as in ὥσπερ καὶ. . . οὕτω καὶ.
§21.9. τῶν τειχῶν .. rapav—the act. and mid. are equally used in this sense, 11. 8] ὅπως πειρῴντο τοῦ τείχους. (Eustathius on Hom. A 166 τὸ πειρᾶσθαι παθητικὸν ᾿Αττικοὶ λέγουσιν ἀντὶ τοῦ ποιεῖσθαι ἀπόπειραν. Ὅμηρος μέντοι τὸ πειρᾶσθαι πειρᾶν ἐνταῦθα φησὶν ἐνεργητικῶς . . . καὶ Θουκυδίδης δὲ “τῶν τειχῶν ἡμῶν πειρᾶν.) See also on c. 82, 1.
§3 1.11. δεινὸν. . . S6&y—passive of δεινὸν ποιεῖσθαι ‘to consider incredible.’ δεινὸν ποιεῖν denotes the outward expres- sion of surprise, and is often used by Herod. and Thuc. But often in the Orators δεινὸν ποιεῖν means ‘to act disgracefully ’ ; as Lys. 3. 7, 26.
NOTES 127
12. ὅτι xal—for the ellipse after ὅτι, cf. [Demosth.] 47, 41 ἃ πεπονθὼς ἣν εἶπον καὶ ὅτι εἰσπράττων τῇ πόλει τὰ σκεύη.
14. κἀκεῖνοι---ἐκεῖνος of ‘the enemy,’ asc. θ, 1. In. 1. 11, 6 ὅταν ὁρῶσιν ἡμᾶς δῃοῦντάς τε καὶ τἀκείνων φθείροντας, we expect τὰ ἑαυτῶν, but Thuc, makes Archidamus refer to the enemy as ἐκεῖνοι.
τὸ πρῶτον ---᾿ though at first.’
τὸ μὰν πρὸ .. « ξηρότητι--οἴ 11. 20 ἀκμάζοντες νεότητι.
17. σωτηρίᾳ ---΄ soundness.’
νῦν S¢—the contrast of Past with Present is among the commonest of rhetorical devices. Aristotle remarks that the efficacy of Antithesis results from its having the appearance of being a Proof; Bain that it is a consequence of the law that ‘we are affected only by change of impression.’
§ 41. 20. ἀνελκύσαντας διαψῦξαι- οἵ. Herod. vir. 59 ras νέας ἀνέψυχον ἀνελκύσαντες ; Xen. Hell. 1. 5, 10 ἀνελκύσας ras ναῦς ἡσυχίαν ἦγεν ἐπισκενάζων καὶ ἀναψύχων.
21. καὶ ἔτι wAclovs—the corrective use of καί, as Demosth. in the third Philippic, ἀπόλωλε καὶ νενόσηκεν ἡ Ἑλλάς.
23. φανεραὶ δέ elow—cf. δῆλός εἰμι. A periphrasis of ποιῶ, εἶμι, or γίγνομαι with an adj. is very common, esp. in Herod. See Stein on Herod. v. 63, 5. Cf. Isocr. Paneg. 122 πολλοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκδότους ἐποίησαν.
25. paddov—i.c. ἢ ἡμῖν, ellipse with the comparative being very common.
fa—the idiom ἐξουσία ἐστι or γίγνεται with plain infin. occurs frequently.
$11.1. ἐκ πολλῆς περιουσίας --- “48 the result of a great superiority,’ 1.6. ‘if we had a great numerical superiority.’ For the use of ἐκ cf. 11. 62, 5 ἡ ξύνεσις τὴν τόλμαν ἐκ τοῦ ὑπέρ- ῴρονος éxupwrépay παρέχεται. The phrase ἐκ περιουσίας occurs also in vi11. 45 ; Demosth. 18, 3; 45, 67.
2. Kal μὴ dvayxafopévors—on the use of the partic. here see note on c. 18, 1.
4. εἰ... ἀφαιρήσομεο ---866 on ὁ. 8, 1.
τῆς τηρήσεως--[Π6 use of these verbal nouns in -τῆς and «σις, 80 common in Thuc., is a means of giving dignity to the expression.
§ 21. 7. ἔτι viv—both ἔτι viv and νῦν ἔτι are found. φθεί- ρεσθαι is the opposite of αὐξάνεσθαι.
8. διὰ φρνγανισμὸν---οἴ, lignatwm, pabulatum, aquatum ire.
10. ἀπολλυμένων... . abropodoto.—anacoluthon, the partic. being exchanged for a finite verb, as in 11. 47, 3 λεγόμενον μὲν «ον οὐ μέντοι éuynuovedero, (Anacoluthon is common in Thuc., but many falsely explain the solecisms that appear in the vulgate as anacolutha.)
18
128 BOYKYAIAOY ἘΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
11. ἐς ἀντίπαλα καθεστήκαμεν ---ἰἶ) 11. 89 ἀντίπαλος is con- trasted with ὑποδεέστερος. As long as the fleet was intact, the attendants had felt the superiority of the Athenian force: but now the two sides were to contend on equal terms.
18. ὑπὸ... μισθοῦ. . . ἐπαρθέντες --- [6 verbs which in prose commonly have ὑπὸ with things are such as νικῶμαι, βλάπτομαι, διαφθείρομαι, ἀναγκάζομαι, ἡττῶμαι, πείθομαι. Lysias also uses ἑπαίρομαι with ὑπός The thing so used must be such as can easily be personified, 6.0. (1) natural phenomena, χειμών, ἄπλοια, σεισμός, (2) caternal circumstances, κίνδυνος, συμφορά, πληγαί, δεσμοί, κέρδος, χρήματα, νόμος, (3) emotions, ἡδονή, φθόνος, (4) words that imply a person, λόγοι, πράγματα, δύναμις, when the person is often inserted (as ὑπὸ τῆς τοῦ ῥήτορος Sewéryros), and all the topics of rhetoric, as ὑπὸ τῶν εἰκότων, ὑπὸ τοῦ dtxalov. The construction is optional in these cases ; 6.0. Isocr. 5, 40 says τὰς πόλεις ὡμαλισμένας ὑπὸ τῶν συμφορῶν, but 6, 65 ὡμαλισμένοι ταῖς συμφοραῖς.
1 γνώμην---(1) here ‘unexpectedly’; (2) may mean also ‘ unreasonably.’
17. ἔπ’ αὐτομολίας προφάσει — ‘taking the opportunity afforded by desertion’ is probably the meaning, as perhaps in Demosth. 16, 25 ἐπὶ τῇ προφάσει τῇ Πλαταιῶν καὶ Θεσπιῶν τὰς οὔσας πόλεις ἀναιρεθείσας περιιδεῖν. Elsewhere ἐπὶ προφάσει means ‘on pretext.’ Some, he says, desert to the enemy ; others simply go away. (Classen says ‘on any opportunity of deserting’; but πρόφασις certainly does not mean ‘an oppor- tunity of doing something,’ but an opportunity which is afforded by something.) '
18. ὡς ἕκαστοι Sivavrar—‘as they find a chance,’ 1.6. with- out joining the enemy. Hence he adds πολλὴ ἡ Σικελία. CF. 11. 16, 3 ws ἕκαστός που ἐδύνατο. '
19, πολλὴ δ᾽ uN ZueAla—the remark has more point than appears at first sight; for there must have been many in the Ecclesia who still had a very vague notion of the size of Sicily.
20. ᾿Ὑκκαρικὰ --- Hyccara (now Carini) was a Sicanian town between Phoenician Panormus and Elymian Segesta. The Athenians captured it shortly after arriving in Sicily. Lais, who became one of the most famous and most exacting of the Beauties of antiquity, was captured there and sent to Corinth. A pathetic episode in the life of Alcibiades is his love for Timandra, mother of Lais.
21. ἀντεμβιβάσαι ὑπὲρ σφῶν --οἴ. Herod. 111. 14 ὑπὲρ ἀνδρὸς ἑκάστον δέκα ἀνταπόλλυσθαι.
22. τὴν ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ ναντικοῦ--οἴ, Arrian, Anab. 1. 2,7 τὴν ἀ, τῆς διώξεως ἀφείλοντο.
NOTES 129
§11. 1. ἐπισταμένοις δ᾽ ὑμῖν ypade—‘ you do not need to be told that.’ Both in Greek and, still oftener, in Lat. a Ist pers. sing. is used where we prefer to avoid it. With the perf. in Gk., the impers. pass. 1s preferred to the lst pers. sing. act.
2. Xela ἀκμὴ wAnpoparos—generally taken to mean ‘the efficient part of a ship’s crew is small’; and this accords well with the next clause. But the Schol. says οὐ πολλῷ χρόνῳ ἀκμάζει ἡ ναντικὴ δύναμις, with which agrees Plutarch, Caes. 40 παρεσκεναδμένος ἄριστα πᾶσι πρὸς τὸν χρόνον ἠξίου τρίβειν καὶ μαραίνειν τὴν τῶν πολεμίων ἀκμὴν βραχεῖαν οὖσαν. The Schol. is probably right, though βραχὺς in Thuc. often =‘ small.’
καὶ ὀλίγοι τῶν vavrév— ‘it is but few of the sailors that both start the ship, and (then) keep rowing (all the time).’ ἐξορμᾶν means that the sailors start ‘working,’ ξυνέχειν that only few of them continue to work, ξυνεχῶς τὴν εἰρεσίαν ποιοῦν- ται. Too many of those who work at first ‘get slack’ after a short time: others reserve themselves at the start.
§ 21. 4. rovrev—Thuc. is very fond of putting the ‘ parti- tive’ τούτων first in the sentence.
πάντων ἀπορώτατον ---ποΐο the idiom. Demosth. 8, 35 πάντων ἀνθρώπων φαυλότατοι ; tb. 58 dvonréraros πάντων ; 9, 10 πάντων evnOécrara; 3, 16 πάντων αἴσχιστα; tb. 81 πάντων ἀνδρειότατον.
5. τό τε μὴ... εἶναι... καὶ ὅτι--ἃ clause with ὅτι is often combined with a clause in different construction, e.g. Demosth. 19, 203 ἐπιδεῖξαι καὶ ὅτι ψεύσεται καὶ τὴν δικαίαν ἥτις ἐστὶν ἀπολογία.
6. χαλεπαὶ. .. ἄρξαι---οἷ vi. 42 εὐκοσμότεροι καὶ ῥάᾷους ἄρχειν.
- αἱ ὑμέτεραι dices—the common complaint that with Athenian freedom was mingled ἀταξία. The opponents of democracy ascribed the defect to ignorance. It was, however, mainly caused by the too rapid development of the Athenian polity after the Persian wars; the people acquired democratic institutions before they had mastered the lesson of obedience. Only exceptional men like Themistocles and Pericles were able to remedy the defect.
7. émumdnpwoodpeda—the fut. expressing possibility after the rel. in primary sequence, the only construction in Attic prose, except where the delib. subj. is possible. Homer uses also the subj., generally with κέν.
9. dd’ ὧν. ... ylyver8ar—‘ both the men that we have and the men that we lose come of necessity from the men that we brought out with us.’
10, τά τε ὄντα refers to ὀλίγοι τῶν ναυτῶν above: though
Κ
14
130 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
but few of the sailors in the ship are really efficient, yet we cannot turn the crews out and supply their places with others —or, if we do, we must draw on the reserves we brought; but they are badly needed to supply our losses.
ve. . . kal—two distinct things are here joined without repetition of the art., as in Eur. Jon 7 τά τ’ ὄντα καὶ μέλλοντα θεσπίζων del.
καὶ ἀπαναλισκόμενα — refers to βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ πληρώματος above. Sickness, exhaustion, and death remove many men in the crews: such losses represent a dead loss on the total sent out, since there is no source of supply except the reserves. Notice (1) the chiastic arrangement here—fpayeia ἀκμὴ. .. ὀλίγοι... τὰ ὄντα. . . ἀπαναλισκόμενα ---οὗ which Thuc, is very fond: (2) the neut., used because totals are being dealt with.
al γὰρ viv—for al γὰρ πόλεις αἱ νῦν οὖσαι ξυμ.
11. Νάξος καὶ Kardvn—Naxos, though the oldest Greek city in Sicily, was never important. It was destroyed in 403 B.C. Pausanias says that no traces of it remained in his day (a slight exaggeration). The site is now occupied by an orange
rove. Catana was a colony from Naxos. It is an uninterest- ing town, the ancient remains having been buried by earth- quakes and volcanic eruptions ; but it is now the second city in Sicily in point of size.
§31.12. & ἔτι... ὥστε--ἴ.6. ‘if they only succeed in gaining over the Italian cities’; the ὥστε clause being epexe- getic of ἕν. Cf. Herod. v. 31 εἰ γὰρ τοῦτό ye δοκέει ὑμῖν εἷν αι χρηστὸν ὥστε τυραννεύεσθαι τὰς πόλις ; Theocr. 14, 58 εἰ δ᾽ οὕτως ἄρα τοι δοκεῖ ὥστ᾽ ἀποδαμεῖν.
.18. τῆς *Iradlas—already before the Peloponnesian war both the Athenians and Spartans had made alliances in Italy, by which they understood only the S.W. corner of Italy, from Heraclea on the east and the Laus on the west.
14. ὁρῶντα. . . ἐπιβοηθούντων.--οὗ 11. 25 ὄντι ἀσθενεῖ καὶ ἀνθρώπων οὐκ ἐνόντων.
ἐν @—see c. 11, 1.
15. διαπεπολεμήσεται -- they will bring the war to an end without striking a blow.’
§ 41.18. ἡδίω μὲν Av—Demosth., in the 38rd Olynthiac, says that the old orators, Aristides, Pericles, Nicias, used to speak the truth, not try to please. So Thuc. says of Pericles. Cf. Livy 22, 38 contio verior quam gratior.
23. ἣν τι... ph—‘should the event fail to correspond ’ with the pleasant anticipation aroused in you by the evil habit some orators have of speaking πρὸς χάριν, πρὸς ἡδονήν.
24. doaddo-repov—strikes the key-note of Nicias’ policy.
NOTES 131
§ 11. 1. ὡς ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἤλθομεν--- and so, as concerns the original 15 object of the expedition, consider that,’ etc. ws with gen. abs. is often used thus with διανοοῦμαι and such words. See 27. 7. 918. Plat. Rep. p. 523 c ὡς ἐγγύθεν ὁρμωμένους λέγοντός pou διανοοῦ. ᾿
8. οὕτω τὴν γνώμην Exere—cf. Demosth. 18, 291 οὐχ ὡς ἂν εὔνους καὶ δίκαιος πολίτης ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην. <A patriot’s part is to deplore the misfortune of his country, but not to attack the statesmen unless they are really culpable.
. ἀνταρκούντων . . . Séov—the change is necessary because the 2nd partic. is impersonal. Cf. 25, 9 ὄντων. . . διαπε- πολεμησόμενον.
8. μεταπέμπειν. . . ἐπιπέμπειν---ραγοποηιαβία, as 11. 60, 1 κακοτυχῶν ἐν εὐτυχούσῃ, 98, 1 ἀπεγίγνετο μὲν οὐδέν, προσεγίγνετο δέ. (It is one of the σχήματα λέξεως first taught. by Gorgias. )
11. &80varos—recalling the technical term for οἱ τὸ σῶμα πεπηρωμένοι at Athens.
§ 21.13. πολλὰ. . . ὑμᾶς εὖ drolqoa—rather unusual for πολλὰ ὑμᾶς ἀγαθὰ ἐποίησα. Demosth. 19, 41, quoting Philip, ἡλίκα τὴν πόλιν εὖ ποιήσω ; ἰδ. 220 μείζον᾽ ἢ κατ᾽ ᾿Αμφίπολιν εὖ ποιήσειν τὴν πόλιν. It was one of the stock devices of orators to dwell on their services to the state.
§ 31. 15. ere—sc. πράσσειν.
μὴ és ἀναβολὰς wrpdcoere—Herod. viii. 21 οὐκέτι és ἀναβολὰς ἐποιεῦντο Thy ἀναχώρησιν ; Isocr. Zp. 1, 10 δηλώσομεν δ᾽ οὐκ els ἀναβολάς. Cf. οὐκ és μακράν.
17. τὰ μὲν ἐν Σικελίᾳ.---“ help in S.’
δι᾽ ὀλίγον ποριονμένων ---“ will quickly obtain.’ δι’ ὀλίγον is common in Thuc., both temporal and local. Demosth. 19, 186 χρόνος ἐν ᾧ ποριοῦνται ὧν ἂν δέωνται.
19. σχολαίτερον pév—se. ποριουμένων.
20. τὰ μὲν Afrovow—=sc. πορισάμενοι, and so with φθήσονται. There is anacoluthon here, the partic. ποριουμένων being replaced by the finite λήσουσι, φθήσονται. Cf. 11. 47,3 λεγόμενον μὲν... ov μέντοι ἐμνημονεύετο.
8 1]. 8. παρέλυσαν --- “το]ϊοαϑοᾶ.᾽ Cf. Herod. vir. 88 τῶν 16 παίδων ἕνα παράλυσον τῆς στρατηίης. Lucian has παραλύειν τῆς δίκης.
5. αὐτοῦ éxet—pleonasm with αὐτοῦ is common: e.g. Homer Tl. 19, 380 αὐτοῦ ἐνὶ Τροίῃ; Od. 20, 159 αὐτοῦ κατὰ δώματ᾽. Herod. 1. 82 αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇσι Oupégo.. Plat. Ale. p. 109 B αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ Εὐρώπῃ.
6. Svo—thus the places of Alcibiades and Lamachus were filled, but it was a great error to restore the ‘debating club’ method of command. Cf. Macaulay on Argyle’s expedition, KE. H. 1. 5.
17
132 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPASHY Z
7. μόνος ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ +.—the chief emphasis is on μόνος. Take ταλαιπωρεῖν to mean exceptional distress as usual. It is often used of sickness and of the hardships of a protracted or unfortunate expedition.
10. ᾿Αθηναίων . . . ἐκ karadéyou—the fourth class (Ores) was excluded from the muster-roll, and regularly served as ἐπιβάται, being exceptionally employed, ἔξω τοῦ καταλόγου, in the infantry.
12. AnpooSévn—his record: (1) 426, Aetolian expedition, which, after a bad start, resulted in the total defeat of the Aetolians and Ambraciots at Argos Amphilochicum: (2) 425, established Pylus: (8) 424, successful expedition against Megara, but subsequent failure in Boeotia. He had figured as prosecutor in the courts.
13. Etpupéovra—his record: (1) 427, commanded the fleet sent to Corcyra, but took no action: (2) 426, commanded the land force in a successful attack on Boeotia: (8) 425, com- manded the first fleet sent to Sicily by Athens, and, on the way, aided in the extermination of the Corcyrean aristocrats. For his want of success in Sicily in 425 he was fined.
§ 21.19. fige—see c. 1, 4.
ἐπιμέλεια ἔσται---80 Demosth. proem 54 ἡ ἡμετέρα yéyor" ἐπιμέλεια. Periphrases of abstract nouns with elul, γίγνομαι are very idiomatic.
§ 11.1. dropévov—remaining behind, esp. in a place of danger or duty. Hence often used by litigants who might have avoided trial by flight: also of troops in action.
3. στρατιὰν érayyAdov—cf. 11|. 16 κατὰ πόλεις ἐπήγγελλον νεῶν πλῆθος. Technical word for sending out a formal notice, which may amount toa command. Cf. περιαγγέλλω.
5. atré0ev—from Attica.
§ 21. 6. πέμπουσι---Β60 on c. 8, 1. So pergo is constantly used in hist. pres.
περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον ---ἰ[ἢΐ8 system of cruising was started by Pericles, it being impossible for Athens to spare sufficient troops for an invasion of the Pel.
8. φυλάσσοιεν μηδένα. . . περαιοῦσθαι--- Μ΄ 7. 724 ‘verbs of caution may be followed by an infin. (with or without μή), which sometimes has the art.’
§31. 11. τὰ ἐν τῇ Σ. BeArlo—se. εἶναι. dyyéddw ordinarily follows the same rule as λέγω, 1.6. it takes ὅτι, etc., and moods when it implies no command ; infin. when it implies command : but Thuc. does not keep strictly to these rules. dyyé\\w some- times takes partic. on analogy of verbs of showing. Demosth. has Φίλιππος ἠγγέλθη ἀσθενῶν.
18. πέμψιν. . . ποιήσασθαι---ἴοῦ the periphrases of noun
NOTES 133
and ποιοῦμαι and its pass. γίγνομαι, see Index. προτέραν refers to the sending of Gylippus and Pythen.
15. ἐν 6Axaor—order perverted for the sake of emphasis, as often. The sending of troops in merchant ships was unusual.
παρεσκευάζοντο. . . dwoore\otvres—the omission of ws with παρασκευάζομαι is very rare except in Thuc., who has it several times. Xen. Hel. 1v. 1, 41 wapeoxevdfero πορευσόμενος.
18. τῷ αὐτῷ τ.---ἰ.6. ἐν ὁλκάσι, with πέμψοντες.
§ 41. 19. ναῦς--ουὐ first for the sake of the antithesis with ἐν ὁλκάσι. Soin 11. 7 πρὸς ταῖς αὐτοῦ ὑπαρχούσαις ἐξ ᾿Ιταλίας καὶ Σικελίας τοῖς τἀκείνων ἑλομένοις ναῦς ἐπετάχθη διακοσίας ποιεῖσθαι, where ἐξ ᾿Ιταλίας καὶ Σ. ought to follow τοῖς, but is put first to contrast it with αὐτοῦ.
21. ὅπως... ἀποπειράσωσι. . . kwdbovev—‘as the two forms are equally correct, we sometimes find both in the same sentence. ’—Goodwin.
22. τὴν ἐν τῇ N. hvAaxhy—the station was first established under Phormio in the autumn of 430 in order to close the mouth of the Corinthian Gulf. Trans. ‘against the ships stationed at N.’
23. abrév—should be σφῶν.
24-5. πρὸς τὴν σφετέραν dvrlratiw—‘ by having to watch their line of war-ships which would be opposing them’; 1.6. the attention which the A. would have to bestow on the Cor. triremes would give the merchant ships a chance,“
81]. 1. παρεσκενάζοντο &—this epanaphora of παρασκευά- ἕομαι completes the account of the preparations on the part of (1) Demosthenes, (2) the Corinthians and Lac., (3) the Lac. Cf. 11. 7 of ᾿Αθηναῖοι παρεσκευάζοντο, παρεσκενάζοντο δὲ καὶ ol Λακεδαιμόνιοι.
τὴν... éxBoAtv—there had been no invasion of Attica since 425.
2. ὥσπερ τε προεδέδοκτο. . . évayévrwy—the circumstantial partic. is joined with any expression of similar import in another construction ; ‘in accordance with their own previous determination and at the instigation of.’ Thus the peace of Nicias was finally breaking down after some eight years of half peace.
5. ἐπειδὴ ἐπυνθάνοντο---8.. the Cor. and Syr.
τὴν . .. βοήθειαν és τὴν DexeAlayv—Cf. 11. 52 ἡ ξυγκομιδὴ ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν ; Herod. 111. 7 οἱ τὴν ἐσβολὴν ταύτην παρασκευά- σαντες ἐς Αἰγύπτον ; v. 63 ὁ πρῶτος στόλος ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος. This omission of art. before the prep. is common with verbal substantives. If the prep. and case precedes the art., as in καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἡ τέρψις (cf. on c. 17, 4) 11. 38, 1, the object is to produce antithesis.
18
134 OOYKYAIAOY BYTTPA®HS Z
7. 8j—giving the actual reason, as in Vv. 85 al.
8. προσκείμενος SacKxe—‘ urgently advised them.’
9, Δεκέλειαν ---ἰῦ commands the road from Athens to Oropus, and thus to Euboea, whence came a great part of the corn supplies of Athens. Of similar strategical importance were Phyle and Qenoe.
§ 2 1.17. wporépm—the Archidamian war.
19. Πλάταιαν ---ἰ was an ally of Athens since 520 8.6. 111. 68, 5.
21. wpérepov—the thirty years’ truce, 445 B.c.
22. €é\wor—the form θέλω is archaic, and in Attic prose occurs only in the phrase ἣν θεὸς θέλῃ.
διδόναι δίκας --- ‘submit to a judicial decision’; contrast δίκην δοῦναι.
24, εἰκότως ---" deservedly.’ Cf. εἰκός éore=decet.
éveupotyro— began to think over’—z.e. began to think it had been deserved.
25. τὴν πρὶ Πύλον Evpdopav—in 425 B.c.
§ 31. 28. ’"Emdatpov = E. Limera, in Laconia. There are ruins of the town. The A. had ravaged it in 414, and thus broken the terms of the peace.
IIpacrév—also in Laconia, and ravaged at the same time as Epidaurus. It had been destroyed by the A. in 430. It suffered severely, and its fate is a proof how effective the method of Pericles was.
80. τῶν κατὰ τὰς σπονδὰς &.—‘about disputed points in the treaty of 421,’ after περί του.
82. érurpérew—Pollux says ἡ δίαιτα (arbitration) ἐκαλεῖτο ἐπιτροπή.
τότέ δὴ --- co-ordinate with ἐπειδὴ above, introducing the decisive moment.
34. odlow—the subject of the perf. or pluperf. pass. not being Personal, the agent is necessarily in dative.
fpaprnro—cf. Plat. Rep. p. 544 D ἡμαρτημένας πόλεις.
35. τὸ abrd—rendering τὸ παρανόμημα still clearer. The sentence of which this section consists is in every way a model of style, and will repay careful attention.
wéepeotravar—‘shifted round’ like a wheel, as Cicero says of politics orbis reipublicae est conversus (ad At. τι. 9).
§ 41. 36. olSnpov—‘ iron tools.’
87. περιήγγελλον ---ἃ5 in 11. 85 ναῦς περιήγγελλον κατὰ πόλεις. We expect παρασκευάζεσθαι or πέμψαι to follow.
39. ἐπιτειχισμόν-.--ο Decelea.
41. émiuxovplay—esp. used of a foreign (or mercenary) force.
42, rpoonvayxafov—sc. πορίζειν, the same brachylogy as with διανοοῦμαι V. 80, οἶμαι ὁ. 66, 3, ὁρῶ v. 80.
NOTES 135
48, ὄγδοον καὶ Sicarov—contrast vill. 6 ἑνὸς δέον εἰκοστόν. The periphrastic forms are preferred in prose, esp. for 19, 29, ete.
44, ἐτελεύτα rede—the epanaphora of the verb in this formula is prob. accidental. The formal close is in accordance with the Gk. habit of ending quietly.
§ 11. 1. ἐπιγιγνομένου ---᾽οιδοα of natural phenomena, whether ordinary or unexpected.
4. ἡγεῖτο---ἡγεμὼν is the regular word for a Spartan king or regent in the field, and for the supreme commander of any foreign expedition.
*Apx Sapov—had died in 427 B.c.
5. πρῶτον μὲν. . . drara—Thuc. has πρῶτον (πρῶτα) μὲν ... ἔπειτα twenty-eight times, while he adds δὲ only eight times. If καὶ follows ἔπειτα, δὲ is regularly added, even if “πρῶτον is without μέν.
6. τὰ περὶ τὸ weSlov—‘ the country about the (Attic) plain.’
7. κατὰ πόλεις διελόμενοι---ἃ common practice.
§ 21.10. εἴκοσι καὶ éxarédv—if the text is right, Thuc. reckons in the case of Boeotia from Oropus, which belonged to Athens and from which ran the road to Decelea and Athens, through the demes of Aphidna and Cephisia. Otherwise the distance would be much less. But from ἀπέχει te Βοιωτίας
may be spurious, like some others of the geographical data in -
Thuc.
11, [καὶ od π. πλέον]--- οὐ not much more’; but καὶ added in B is prob. only a correction. When an adscript is brought into the text, it is frequently joined on with xal.
12, ἐπὶ δὲ τῴ --᾿ for the control of,’ in speaking of forts, etc., which by their position threaten a locality; 6.0. v. 7 ἐθεᾶτο τὴν θέσιν τῆς πόλεως ἐπὶ Θράκῃ ws Exo. Cf. the Chateau Gaillard.
13. rots xparto-rots—‘the richest parts,’ the soil of Attica as a whole not being rich. The land about Cephisia is noted for its vegetation.
és τὸ kaxoupyciyv—with gxodouetro, expressing purpose. Cf. Demosth. 31, 13 παρεσκεύασεν els τὸ λέγειν τι δοκεῖν.
8 31.18. ταῖς ὁλκάσι---τὶῦπουὺ ἐν, asc. 7, 3.
21. ἐπιλεξάμενοι --- .6. placing them among the hoplites. They were first so used by Brasidas in Thrace. Before this they had only attended their masters in the field. One as θεράπων was his master’s armour-bearer. The rest were used either as light-armed troops, or as sappers, engineers, or carriers. The king often ordered them to carry booty.
veoSapoSwv—helots emancipated as a reward for military services since 424 B.c.
23. &pxovra—not ἡγεμών, as it was not a general expedition
19
136 OOYKYAIAOY ἘΥΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Ζ
under the king. Contrast ὃ 1. So Brasidas is always called ἄρχων or στρατηγός.
Bowwtol—loosely reckoned among οἱ ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ, as though he had said only οἱ δὲ Πελοποννήσιοι, which generally in Thue. includes all the allies of Sparta. When in 11. 9 he says Πελοποννήσιοι πάντες πλὴν ᾿Αργείων καὶ ᾿Αχαιῶν, he uses II. in the strict geographical sense, in contrast with the Greeks ἔξω Πελοποννήσον.
8 4], 26. ἐν rots πρῶτοι---ἰ same idiom c. 24, 3; 27, 3; 71, 8. It is constantly corrupted in the MSS. of Thuc., as the scribes did not understand it.
opphoravres—generally ὁρμῶμαι is used in this sense.
27. ἐς τὸ πέλαγος toav—a frequent idiom ; e.g. Herod. vil. 193; Aristoph. £q. 432 ἀφήσω κατὰ κῦμ᾽ ἐμαντὸν οὔριον. θάλασσα cannot be used in this phrase; only Plutarch and Pausanias do so.
28, μετὰ δὲ τούτους Κορίνθιοι---[ 9 still refers to of δ᾽ ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ above, which is in fact divided into Λακεδαι- μόνιοι μὲν. . . Βοιωτοὶ δὲ... Κορίνθιοι. . . Σικυώνιοι, but the sense requires that the imperf. ἀπέστελλον should be given up for the aor. ἀφεῖσαν, ἀπέπεμψαν, ἀπέστειλαν. (The form of this passage, like many others, shows how Thuc. is in a transition stage between the elpouévy Aééis—running style of Herod.—and ᾿ the artificial periods of Isocrates. )
31. dpxovra—governed by both partic. and verb.
33. Luxcvevvor—now dissatisfied with Sparta because early in 417 an aristocratic government had been forced upon it. This aristocracy, however, subsequently got the upper hand, and Sicyon aided Sparta after the battle of Leuctra, 371. But in 369, the democrats revived and Sicyon joined Thebes. In 367 or 6, after violent dissensions and the tyranny of Euthy- phron, it passed again into the hands of Sparta.
8 5 1. 39. éeomep—rare, except in Plato. It occurs in Xen. Hel. vi. 5, 12; vir. 2, 23 (Dindorf); Cyrop. vit. 5, 39; Demosth. 54, 3; Plat. Lach. p. 188 B; “οἷ. p. 29D; Protag.
op. 825 a; Rep. p. 342 B, 488 B; Phaedr. p. .248 EB; Theaet. p. 177 τ, 200 c; Meno p. 97 c; Parmen. Ὁ. 144 c; Sophist. p. 235 c. .
avrots—‘ they found that ’—dat. of interest.
43. τὸν νοῦν twoww—distinguish from νοῦν ἔχειν = to be sensible.
§ 11. 3. περί re—answered by καὶ τὸν Δημοσθένη.
δ, & εἴρητο... ἀφικομένῳ. . . wapaxadetyv—same con- struction c. 20, 1. The other constr. —the partic. in the accus.—is found also in c. 20. Cf. vi1r. 89 εἴρητο αὐτοῖς és Μίλητον ἀφικομέν ous ξυνεπιμελεῖσθαι.
NOTES 137
7. τὸ ξυμμαχικὸν — Argos was neutral throughout the Archidamian War, having a treaty with Sparta. It finally joined Athens in 417.
αλεῖν. . . érl—amilitary phrase ; cf. παραβοηθεῖν ἐπὶ c. 87, 3; 53, 1; 71, 6.
§21. 10. a&wéoreAXov—imperf. representing the details of an elaborate business, as constantly with ‘sending’ verbs ; cf. on c. 8,1.
11. Xlats—the only island in the Aegean besides Lesbos then retaining the position of an independent ally of Athens. Hence it supplied a contingent of:ships and paid no tribute.
12. "A@nvalov—after 5. καὶ x., partitive. See onc. 16, 1.
13. vyowwrév—i.e. the other Aegean islands; it was their duty to supply πεζὸν καὶ χρήματα.
14. χρήσασθαι -- ingressive, ‘obtain for service’—a sense almost confined to first aor. forms.
ov—viz. those of Ionia, Hellespont, and Thracian Chalcidice. They also were Hable to supply infantry, if re- quired. (This incident illustrates the encroachments of Athens on the rights of her allies. They were not originally liable to personal service after they commuted their contingents for a money payment ; much less were they bound to supply any- thing Athens might require. )
15. εἶχον --- subject, the Athenians.
16. Euptroplcavres—joined by καὶ to the datives above, as all express attendant circumstances of some kind.
17. KaptxAdovgs-—he had been one of the commission, ζητηταί, appointed to inquire into the mysterious mutilation of the Hermae in 415. (Like Pisander, he started as a democrat, but went over to the oligarchs in 412, becoming one of the Four Hundred. He fled to Decelea when the Four Hundred were deposed, and assisted in the ruin of Athens. He returned along with Critias and other exiles under the terms of peace imposed by Sparta. He was active in promoting the establish- ment of the Thirty, of whom he became one. When Thera- menes opposed the violent measures of Critias, and the party split into two factions, Charicles followed Critias and shared with him the authorship of the worst deeds of the Thirty. His demeanour was servile to Lysander, but overbearing towards his countrymen. )
§ 31: 21. καὶ τὸν «.7.A.—the clause is object of περιέμενε. Cf. 111. 2, 2.
§11. 2. 4xev—‘returned’ from his expedition into the interior. 21
4, ἑκασταχόθεν---ἰῃ the rel. clause, 88 c. 20, 2.
821. 7. ἀπόπειραν λαμβάνει «---οἵ. Herod. VIII. 9 ἀπόπειραν ποιήσασθαι.
138 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
8. ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ---ἰ, 6. ἀπὸ τοῦ ναυμαχίας ἀπόπειραν d. : there is the same use of id, hoc, φιιοά, quae, in Lat., as Cic. de Leg. 11. 33 exemplorum nostra est plena respublica ex augurum praedictis multe vera cecidisse. Neque enim . . id (i.e. augurandi con- suetudinem) ad hoc tempus retinuissent.
9. ἄξιον τοῦ κινδύνου --- worth the risk,’ something which would be cheap at the price, a good return.
§ 31.10. ξννανέπειθε S¢—very difficult: ‘Moreover H. earnestly supported his advice (καὶ only emphasises ξυν-), so that they might not lack spirit to attack by sea, saying as a retort to the A. that even they had no hereditary right to naval skill, nor yet would it last for ever.’ The imperf. and the -ay- both denote the dificulty of persuading them. They had before thought of peace.
11. ‘Eppoxparns—the Themistocles of Syracuse.
12. τοῦ. . . μὴ &0upetv—expresses purpose, a construction rare outside Thuc. (So Goodwin ; but edd. rightly deny that the words can go directly with ξυνανέπειθε. The remedy is surely to comma them off, not to alter τοῦ.)
ταῖς vavol—not ‘attack the A. fleet,’ but ‘attack with their own fleet’; cf. c. 7, 4.
13. ἐπιχειρῆσαι---ἰῃ 9 MSS. have the fut., but the abbrevia- tions for the aor. and fut. were indistinguishable. (If it is bracketed, rats ναυσὶ must go with ἀθυμεῖν.)
πρὸς τοὺς ’A.—it is always assumed that this goes with ἐπιχειρῆσαι, but there are no instances of ἐπιχειρεῖν πρὸς (L. and 8. cite this wrongly as 7,51): hence we take it with λέγων, as in σκοπεῖν, βουλεύεσθαι πρός. Cf. Andoc. 1, 48 λέγει πρός με, ‘he says, meaning me. . ’; Aeschines 2, 42 μνημονικῶς εἰπεῖν πρὸς τὰ. .. ‘in answer to... ’; Demosth. 24, 190 πρὸς τοὺς τοιούτους λόγους προακηκοέναι μικρά. (Τὺ is well known how fond Thuc. is of making the leaders of opposing forces answer one another. Here we may imagine Nicias reminding the A. of their naval record, and Hermocrates making this retort.) For πρός ef. Steup on 11. 48, 2.
15. &&vov—Classen understands this of the future, probably rightly. Cf. τι. 41, 5 πανταχοῦ μνημεῖα ἀίδια ξυγκατοικίσαντες, that will ‘last for ever.’
16. &dA’—bracketed needlessly by Stahl and Classen. Do not supply ἔχειν, as edd. say, or you will get no antithesis to πάτριον and ἀίδιον.
ἠπειρώτας. -ἰ.6. not a naval power. The word is often used of Syr. and indeed of Sicily generally.
18. ὑπὸ MfSev—because Themistocles persuaded them to build a fleet at the time of the Persian wars. ;
yevéoOar—does not go after dvayxacGévras, as it is commonly
NOTES 139
taken, but is parallel with ἔχειν. Thus ναυτικοὺς y. gives the antithesis we wanted.
19. πρὸς ἄνδρας x.r.A.—it is a fact well known in business that ‘bounce’ is best answered with ‘bounce.’ ‘In dealing with daring men . . . those who in turn show daring appear most formidable.’
otovs—attracted, as often with short clauses. So in Oratio Obliqua short rel. clauses are sometimes attracted into the infin. χαλεπὸς = ‘dangerous,’ as in 111. 42, 3.
21. [atrots]|—prob. spurious, since πρὸς ἄνδρας τ. seems to be put first so as to refer to all that follows.
22. @—resumed by τὸ αὐτὸ.
éxetvow—t.e. ἄνδρες τολμηροί.
οὐ δυνάμει ἔστιν Sre—for the omission of μὲν cf. c. 1, 2, 1. 80.
23. wpotxovres—this is the Attic word. Thuc. also uses προφέρειν which is Ionic in this sense ὁ, 64, 2; 77, 2.
to~—‘ their.’
24. odas—when a plur. subj. of infin. includes the subj. of the main verb as here, whether in whole or in part, it is put either in nom. or accus. at will. Cf. α. 48, 1 ὁ Ν. ἐνόμιζε. .. λαθεῖν ἂν... ποιοῦντες. Andoc. 1, 82 has ἐψηφίσασθε. .. δοκιμάσαντας ἀναγράψαι, part of the voters being subj. of the infin.
25. trooxetv—we expect rather παρασχεῖν : a rare sense of ὑπ-. See L. and S.; Hesych. ὕπεχε" πάρεχε.
§ 41. 25. καὶ Zupaxoolovs—‘and so he knew that by their unexpected boldness in resisting the A. fleet, the S. would gain much more through the amazement with which their conduct would strike the enemy, than they would lose by their in- feriority to the A. in naval skill.’
27. πλέον τι-- ἢ 11. 11 both πλέον τι and ἀμελέστερόν τι are found; the τι indefinitely increasing the range of the adv. μᾶλλόν τι is common.
τὸ rovotroyv—such conduct as has been described ; a regular use of τοιοῦτος, very common in Aristotle, and a cause of obscurity in his style.
29. ἐπιστήμῃ . . . &treplayv—stock antithesis in Thuc.
§ 51. 33. t του ddA\ov—attraction, as Soph. Ο. C. 734 πρὸς πόλιν δ᾽ ἐπίσταμαι | σθένουσαν ἥκων, ef rw’ Ἑλλάδος, μέγα.
811.1. Ὃ δὲ Τ΄---ρυῦ first for emphasis though the subj. 22 changes below at αἱ τριήρεις. This is fairly common in Gk. and Lat.: cf. Cic. ad At. 11. 9 Quintus frater quum ex Asia decessisset,. . . valde fuit et properandum.
4, αὐτὸς pev—‘ while he,’ paratactic.
6. αἱ δὲ τριήρεις --- [86 subj. is presently subdivided into thirty-five and forty-five.
140 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
9. al δὲ wévre—‘ the other forty-five of them,’ the art. being . often thus added with the items of a sum total.
11. τὸ ve@prov—the docks in the Great Harbour were pro- bably built by Gelon (485-476). ‘It is less clear whether he had any hand in the other haven of the warships, in the Little Harbour. . . . It was only by Dionysius that it was brought to perfection,’ after 405. Freeman.
12. περιέπλεον---ἴ.6. round the south point of Ortygia.
BovAdépevor—after τριήρεις, applying to the men in the ships as usual.
18, évrds—sc. τοῦ μεγάλου λιμένος.
14. apdorépwlev—better, as Classen, = ‘by sea and land’ ; but Freeman says: ‘the plan was that the one division should sail across the Great Harbour, while the other sailed round the Island, so as to attack the A. fleet unexpectedly on both sides at once.’
§ 21. 15. &vrierAnpdcavres—antithesis to ἐπλήρουν c. 21,
end. Abresch compares βάλλειν and ἀντι- ο. 25, πολιορκεῖν and
ἀντι- c. 28, παρατάσσειν and ἀντι- ο. 5.
16. tats pev—again the art. in giving the parts of a whole.
811. 3. ἐπικαταβάντων. “βοπο down to the shore to watch the battle.
5. mpoomrerdy—before the garrisons left in them and the men on the shore could arm.
7. wp@rov—adjective (for nothing further happens to τὸ μέγιστον). .
8.2}. 11. τοῦ πρώτου ἁλόντος ---᾿ that which was first taken,’ πρώτου being predicate in spite of its order. Cf. c. 18, 2.
14, στρατόπεδον --- ‘here means the space between the A. walls on the other side of the harbour.’ Freeman.
éEexop(towro—‘ were getting away.’
19. ἡλίσκετο. . . ér’yxavov—the two imperfects mark the events as simultaneous. This would not be so with ἐπειδὴ if aor. were used. See note onc. 3, 3.
20. of ἐξ αὐτῶν φεύγοντες --- οἷ. Andoc. οἱ ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἔφευγον. Attraction of the preposition is very rare in Latin ; e.g. Cic. ad Fam. vii. 1 ex illo cubiculo, ex quo . . . tempora consumpseris, for in illo...
21. παρέπλευσαν ---᾿ sailed past,’ and so across the harbour.
§ 31. 23. vavpaxotoat—this order of the attributive partic. is only possible when the noun has other attributes besides the partic. ; here πρὸ τοῦ o.
25. περὶ ἀλλήλας -- prepositions with ἑαυτοὺς, σφᾶς αὐτοὺς, ἀλλήλους are used to express reciprocity unless there is a com- pound of διὰ available.
π av—‘ gave away.’
NOTES 141
26. καὶ ὑφ᾽ Sv—for καὶ ἐκείνας ὑφ᾽ ὧν. The antecedent can always be omitted, but the rel., unless it be either in the nom. or else governed by a prep., is regularly attracted. Thus in 11. 61 for ἐγκαρτερεῖν ἃ ἔγνωτε we should prob. read é. ols ἔγνωτε.
§ 41. 29. πλὴν 8c0ov—sc. τῶν ἀνθρώπων Fv, a part of εἰμι being constantly omitted after ὅσος.
33. νησιδίῳ--- the ceremony was gone through on one of the small islets off Plemmyri6én ; but it was the last act of the invaders on that side of the Syr. harbour.’ Freeman.
34. orpardémredov—as ]. 14 above.
§11. 2. οὕτως érempayegav—used of a bad result, as in 11. 4,
3. τροπαῖα ἔστησαν atroév—the regular construction.
7. ἐπισκενάσαντες ---566 on 6. 1, 1.
§21. 8. ἐν τῶν τειχῶν τῇ ἁλώσει — Classen notes that Herod. and Thuc. are fond of inserting the gen. between a prep. and its case.
10. Χρήματα: bona, non pecuniae.’ Haacke.
12. πὸ μὲν. .. πὸ 8t—Thuc. does not use this anaphora so elaborately as most writers. The instances in him are simple, like εἰ μὲν. . εἰ δέ, dua μὲν. . . ἅμα δέ. For πολλαὶ μὲν. .. πολλαὶ δέ cf. vi. 20, 4. Eur. Rhes. 311 has a fourfold anaphora with πολύς.
ἐμπόρων ---80Π160 from Greece, some from Sicily.
15. €yxareAfpOn—similar compounds in Thuc. are éyxara- λείπω, ἐγκαθέζομαι, ἐγκαθίστημι, ἐγκαθορμίζομαι, ἐγκατοικοδομεῖν, ἐγκατασκήπτειν.
§ 31. 19. οἱ EomAow—because the S. now commanded the mouth of the harbour.
22. διὰ μάχης. . . ἐγίγνοντο -- οὗ. διὰ μάχης ἱέναι 11. 11; Eur. Helen. 978. See also on c. 8, 8. (See Wecklein on Aesch. !}, V. 121.)
23. ἔς re—the τε is not correlative with either of the pre- ceding negs., but simply joins the sentences, this being a use of re that gradually fell out of Attic prose.
§11.5. οἵπερ. . . dpdcovow—purpose.
6. ἐν ἐλπίσιν eol—cf. below § 6, and ἐν ἐλπίδι c. 46. The opposite is ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ or ἀπορίᾳ εἶναι.
§ 21.10. τῶν τε π. ἐπιτυχοῦσαι---ΤΏο. uses the dat. also with ἐπιτυγχάνω.
12. KavAwvidri8t—‘ neighbourhood of Caulonia’ in Bruttii. The whole of this region was wodvdevdpos, and contained ξύλα ἄφθονα, vi. 90. Pythagoras lived there when driven from Croton.
8 4]. 18. dvAdEavres—for this sense, cf. c. 83 τῆς νυκτὸς ¢. τὸ ἡσνχάζον.
24
142 BOYKYAIAOY BYTTPA®HS Z ~
19. Meyadpors—Hyblaean M. : it was the fourth site on which settled the emigrants from Megara in Greece.
21. dmrodetyovoww—sudden change of subj.; cf. on c. 4, 4.
8 6 1. 3. vewoolkwv—prob. built by Gelon, the second founder of Syracuse. See onc. 22,1,1.11. The piles had been driven in during the winter of 415.
§ 61. 29. pvproddpov—‘ of 10,000 talents’ burden,’ assuming with Arnold that a talent was the ordinary unit of weight: but the matter is not certain. Lobeck conj. μυριαμφόρον, but the form is well attested.
32. Svevov—‘ drew up with windlasses’ (ὄνοι).
36. ὁλκάδος--ἰ.6, the vais pupiopdpos. Notice again the attraction of ἐκ.
§ 71. 38. τῆς σταυρώσεως ἡ xptdvos—‘the hidden part of the stockade,’ the adj. assimilated, as with πολύς, ἡμισύς, some- times ὅσος.
ἦσαν... obs—see onc. 11, 2, 1. 10.
40. Seavdyv—‘ dangerous.’
pi)... wepBdAq—epexegetic of προσπλεῦσαι, and so depend- ing on δεινὸν ἦν.
41. περὶ ἕρμα---οὗ. the fine lines of the Furies in Aesch. Eum. 554 δι᾽ αἰῶνος δὲ τὸν πρὶν ὄλβον ἕρματι προσβαλὼν δίκας ὥλετ᾽ ἄκλαυστος. Anacreon ἀσήμων ὑπὲρ ἑρμάτων φορεῦμαι.
8 8]. 44. πολλὰ δὲ καὶ GAAa—M. W. Humphreys examines this phrase in Class. Rev. v. 431, and concludes that καὶ is not needed in connecting ἄλλος with πολύς, and that when it is inserted, it means ‘also.’ He shows that ἄλλοι πολλοὲ is very common and πολλοὶ ἄλλοι not rare.
οἷον elxds—note the phrase and cf. εἰκότως.
47. welpais— ‘stratagems.’ Bloomfield notes that πεῖρα implies.trickery. Cf. Soph. Aj. ἃ πεῖράν rw’ ἐχθρῶν ἁρπάσαι.
891. 48. πόλεις---οὗ their allies in Sicily.
πρέσβεις... Κορινθίων ---ποῦ Syracusans, in order that greater credence might be given to the message (Haacke).
50. a&yyé\Aovras—see on c. 3, 1.
52. τῆς vavpaxlas wépt—they would of course not send an embassy round to report the defeat (this would be τὴν vav- μαχίαν), but, as the news was sure to spread, to give explanations.
55. S8nAdoovras—the constr. changes from pres. to fut., as in 11. 44 οὐκ ὀλοφύρομαι μᾶλλον ἢ παραμυθήσομαι ; cf. Tac. An. I. 18 interficietis quam desciscitis.
57. ἐπ’ atrots—‘ against the A.’
60. Statrerodeunospevov—the accus. abs. joined to gen. as in 6. 15, 1, and Pisto. Rep. p. 604 B ws οὔτε δήλου ὄντος. . . οὔτε és τὸ πρόσθεν οὐδὲν προβαῖνον. Cf. Livy 23, 13 debellatum fore (fut. perf. infin. pass.), st adnitt volwissent.
NOTES 143
61. ἔπρασσον---οὗ negociation or diplomacy, as often.
§11. 1. ξννελέγη adrg—continues from c. 20, 8. It is likely that the dat. in this construction is by origin a dat. of possession, like ἐστί μοι, Just as much as the dat. of the ‘agent’ with perf. passives ; since we find occasionally such a phrase as τὰ πραχ- θέντ᾽ αὐτῷ for ‘his acts’ instead of τὰ πεπραγμέν᾽ αὐτῷ. So we can trans. ‘ when his forces had mustered.’
5. Kapucdei—seeo c. 20.
§ 21. 10. "Ewdatpov—cf. ο. 18, 3. This descent on ΕἸ. re- peated and emphasized the A. action of the preceding year.
11. τὰ καταντικρὺ — ‘at a point on the Laconian coast opposite K., at a spot marked by the temple of Apollén,’ as Freeman says. Grote (see margin) wrongly says ‘on the island.’
§ 31.18. Evyxaré\aBe—with Charicles.
§ 11.1. paxatpopdépwv—the wearing of dirks is a well-known custom of some of the Thracian tribes.
2. τοῦ Ataxot—the Dii were independent and lived mostly in the region of the Rhodope or Despoto mountains.
4, οὖς %e—‘should have,’ according to arrangement. Af.7. 415.
§ 21. 6. ὕστερον --- ‘too late,’ as in ὕστερον παρεγένοντο, 7ῆλθον.
7. S8ev—antecedent omitted, as in Demosth. 45, 81 ἀνάγειν ὅθεν εἴληφας. Andoc. 1, 64 ἔλαβον ὅθεν ὁρμώμενοι ταῦτ᾽ ἐποίουν.
8. ἔχειν---“ keep.’
τὸν ἐκ τῆς Δ. wéAquov—‘the incursions from D.’; not the same as ὁ Δεκελεικὸς πόλεμος, as ancient authors call the war meray w—double the ord hopl
10. v—double the ordina of a hoplite.
881. TT ered yap—‘ from the time that D. was occupied for the injury of the country, at first by the whole army, after being fortified by it during this summer, and afterwards by garrisons relieving one another at fixed intervals.’ (This trans. takes ὑπὸ πάσης τῆς o. both with τειχισθεῖσα and with ἐπῳκεῖτο, not, as is usually done, with τειχισθεῖσα only.)
13. pats—replacing the gen. with ὑπό.
16. &6Aamre—the subj. to be supplied is ἡ A. τειχισθεῖσα.
17. ὀλέθρῳ---α strong word, ‘devastation,’ like the vastitas Ttaliae which Hannibal saw ina vision. ὄλεθρος is not generally used with things ; it is as though a pest were destroying their resources.
§ 41.19. Bpaxetar—the average duration of the previous invasions had only been about a month, 1.6. as long as pro- visions held out.
28. ὁτὲ μὲν. . . ὁτὲ St—does not occur elsewhere in good
26
27
144 BOYKYAIAOY ἘΎΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z
Attic prose. Xen. Hier. 1, 5 has ἔστι μὲν ὅτε. . . ἔστι δ᾽ ὅτε, and the edd. compare Plato, Phaedo, Ὁ. 59 a ὁτὲ μὲν. . . ἐνίοτε δὲ and Theaet. p. 207 D ὁτὲ μὲν. . . τοτὲ δέ.
πλειόνων ἐπιόντων .- νἱΖ. arriving from the Peloponnese to overrun Attica. The Spartans expected the occupation of Decelea would at once cripple the A. in Sicily. It did not do so: therefore special efforts were from time to time made by sending extra troops. The A. had done much the same at the beginning of the war in the case of Potidaea.
24. ἐξ dvayxyns—‘ of necessity,’ to provision the garrison.
tons dpovpas—‘the normal garrison’; in ἴσης he is thinking of the successive garrisons.
27. οὐκ ἐκ mapépyou—non obiter. His father Archidamus had been accused of slackness in his conduct of the war.
8 δ]. 29. τῆς. .. χώρας... ἐστέρηντο --- στερεῖν is to withhold something forcibly or fraudulently from its owner ; as Demosth. speaks of himself as ἐστερημένος τῶν πατρῴων by his guardians.
35. ἐν γῇ ἀποκρότῳ--- ἢ ἀπεχωλοῦντο ; the two causes being expressed in different constructions, as often. Xen. in his treatise on riding refers to the rqughness of the ground in parts of Attica, and gives advice to riders.
36. ξυνεχῶς ταλαιπωροῦντες---“ by continual fatigue.’
28 §11. 3. ᾿Ωρωποῦ- αὐ this time Ὁ. belonged to Athens. It fell into the hands of Boeotia in 412.
5. wodvreAtjs—the question of finance was now becoming serious. Want of money finally ruined A. in the war.
τῶν τε wavreav—‘so all that the city needed had to be imported, and thus it ceased to be a city and became ἃ fortress.’
§ 21. 8. τῇ érddfea—collective, as in 11. 18. So Livy 23, 16, 8 uses vallum ferre for vallos 7.
11. ἐφ᾽ ὅπλοις wov—‘ at camping-stations here and there.’ ὅπλα are military posts within the city, as distinct from τὸ τεῖχος, which stands for the fortifications generally, being used collectively. (One must agree with Miiller-Striibing that που is whimsical and poor. If it is genuine, Thue. is at fault. )
§ 31.16. τό γ᾽ &v—the following clauses, (1) ἀποστῆναι, (2) ἀντιπολιορκεῖν, (3) ποιῆσαι, are in explanatory apposition to the preceding ἥν, which=q@uovcxlay. ‘The ἂν belongs to all three clauses. Hence what would have seemed incredible is this: εἰ αὐτοὶ πολιορκοῖντο. . . , οὐδ᾽ ἂν ὡς ἀποσταῖεν ἐκ Σ., ἀλλὰ . . « ἀντιπολιορκοῖεν ἄν, καὶ τοσοῦτον dy τὸν παράλογον ποιήσειαν κιτιλ. Hence, trans. literally, ‘And yet (though they had two wars) their pertinacity was such that no man before it was experienced would have believed the account of it, that, even if they were themselves besieged by the Ῥ, by means of a
NOTES 145
permanent occupation, they would not even so withdraw from S., but would in turn lay siege in the same manner to Syr. (a city which taken alone is as large as A.) and would astonish the Greeks with such a display of strength and audacity that, whereas at the beginning of the war the Greeks generally supposed that they would hold out perhaps for a year, perhaps for two years, possibly for three, but certainly not longer than three, if the P. should invade Attica, they on the contrary in the seventeenth year after the first invasion should actually go to 8. . . . and voluntarily take on themselves another war.’
18. μηδ’ &s—os (- οὕτως) only appears in prose in καὶ ὥς, οὐδ᾽ ὥς, μηδ᾽ ὥς ; occasionally before οὖν, as 111. 37, 5.
20. αὐτήν ye καθ’ atriv—i.e. without reckoning Sparta at all; that is to say, Syr. would have been a big city for A. to besiege even if she were not herself in difficulties at the time. (Others think this means (a) without counting the Athenian empire, (δ) without reckoning allies on either side.)
21. rorotrov—answered by ὅσον.
22. 8cov—when two things, persons, or sets of persons are compared by means of τοσοῦτον. . . ὅσον, there are often two clauses following the ὅσον : these two clauses are then them- selves contrasted by μὲν and dé—here <oi μὲνΞ- . .. οἱ δὲ ἔτει —and they describe the extent of the difference between the two things compared in the τοσοῦτον clause. (See Appendix 11.) Here ‘the A. astonished the Greek world so much that the Greek world thought they would hold out a year or two, whereas the A. after all these years undertook the Sicilian expedition.’
28. «οἱ pev>...of μὲν... of δὲ... of SE... ye... οἱ &—when these particles are thus repeated, it is usual to find the extremes contrasted ; as here <ol μὲν» and the last οἱ δέ, i.e. the Greeks at large and Athens. The first <ol μὲν; is subdivided in the clauses that follow it.
24, of δὲ τριῶν ye érdv—dé ye or δὲ. . . ye caps a previous statement. οὐδεὶς is in limiting apposition to οἱ δὲ, and τριῶν ἐτῶν is gen. of comparison.
27. τὴν πρώτην ἐσβολὴν ---ἰῃ June 431.
28. ἦλθον--- ΤΏ. here proceeds as if he had said τοσοῦτον τὸν παράλογον ἐποίησαν instead of τοσοῦτον τὸν π. ποιῆσαι ἃν--- shifting the point of view which was that of a person hearing of such vigour before he actually witnessed it.
τῷ πολέμῳ... . . τετρυχωμένοι---αὐ the time of the expedition A. had been recovering for seven years ; but Thuc. here thinks of the state of A. in 415 as contrasted with her state in 431.
§ 41. 31. δι’ &—the plur. because he sums up all the causes that led to their impoverisation, namely the losses of individuals
L
29
146 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
and the losses of the ¢reaswry resulting from the φιλονικία above described.
καὶ rére—other causes of impoverisation are now added, namely those resulting from the fortification of Decelea. ‘For these reasons and because of the serious damage which was being then caused by D. and the other expenses that fell heavily'on them.’
82. ὑπὸ τῆς A... . BAatrrovons—this construction, in which the partic. has the force of a verbal subst., is less common in Gk. than in Latin (ante urbem conditam). It seems that it is not used unless the noun and prep. would make sense without the partic.; the only exception being ἅμα with expressions of time. Cf. c. 42,2 διὰ τὴν Δεκέλειαν τειχι- fopévnvy ; 11. 49 μετὰ ταῦτα λωφήσαντα. It is oftenest found with dua, μετὰ with accus., and éri with gen., as Herod. 1. 15 ἐπὶ τούτου rupavvevovros. (See Gildersleeve in 4. J. P. July
88. τῶν. . . προσπιπτόντων --- gen. abs., the two causes being again differently expressed.
84. ἀδύνατοι. . . τοῖς xpfpact—on the analogy of δύνατος and δύναμαι with dat.
35. τὴν exoortv—a tax of five per cent on all imports and exports within the A. empire. Probably this system lasted, with the exception of Chalcedon (ἢ others), to the end of the war. εἰκοστολόγοι were appointed to collect it in the different ports, and, according to Aristophanes, they sometimes carried on smuggling on their own account; and Aegina seems to have become a sort of depot for contraband goods smuggled out of Attic territory to the Peloponnese. Aegina was a free port. (Cf. Gilbert, Bettrdge zur innern Geschichte Athens, p 286.) The establishment of the εἰκοστὴ is the beginning of important financial reforms.
40. καὶ wolv—‘as before.’
41. πολλῷ μείζους. . . ὅσῳ καὶ μείζων---ἃ double compar. or superl. is the way to express proportion. Cf. 1. 68 προσήκει ἡμᾶς οὐχ ἥκιστα ἐϊπεῖν, ὅσῳ καὶ μέγιστα ἔγκλήματα ἔχομεν ; c. 41,3.
81]. 1. τῷ Δ. torephoavras—‘ who came too late for D. to use them.’
5. Διειτρέφει--- Pausanias 1. 28 describes a statue at Athens of D. pierced with arrows, presumably in the act of regaining his ship (see c. 30, 1) after the barbarous slaughter of the
‘children of Mycalessus. The inscribed base of this statue is
extant.
6. εἰπόντες . . . βλάψαι.---λέγω is constructed with accus. and infin. regularly (@) when it = κελεύω, as here: (δ) when used in the sense of ferunt, fertur. It is then oftener in the
f
{
“=~,
Ἐς
Ὺ
NOTES 147
pass., but the act, is found so. When Thuc. wants to imply that a statement is false, he says λέγεται ws. Instances of λέγω with accus. and infin. in the sense of φημὶ are not common.
§ 21. 11. Χαλκίδος — after ravaging the country round Tanagra, they had crossed to Euboea.
” ἑσπέρα9---οἷ. ἀπὸ πρώτου ὕπνου ὁ. 43, 2.
18, Μυκαλησσόν --ἰῃο destruction of this town, so ancient that its foundation was said to be contemporary with Cadmus, was in every way disgraceful and revolting. Pausanias says the place was in ruins in his day, and there are still consider- able remains both of the acropolis and of the lower town.
§ 31. 14. ‘Eppate—‘shrine of H.’ on the road from the coast to Thebes. .
18. ἀπροσδοκήτους -Ξ- οὐ προσδεχομένοις, active. Many adj. have both an act. and pass. meaning, 6.9. φοβερός, ἀδεής, προστρόπαιος, and so in Lat. formidolosus, etc. Sallust, Cat. 39, 2. Cf. onc. 42, 3, line 24.
21. ἔστιν i. . . τοῦ &—cf. c. 2, 4.
βραχέος φκοδομημένου---οἵ 11. 34, 8 βῆμα ὑψηλὸν πεποιη- μένον.
§ 41. 26. τοὺς dvOpérovs—Pausanias says that a man would have searched in vain in his day for descendants of the inhabi- tants of Mycalessus.
28. πάντας... ὅτῳ -- like ἕκαστας, οὐδείς, πᾶς τις, Tis re- ferring to a plur. |
82. dpota—for ὁμοίως, as several times in Herod., but in no other Attic prose author. Thuc. also has ἴσα for ἴσως.
88. τοῖς μάλιστα ---ϑ86. φονικοῖς. This idiom is found also in Herod. and in late writers. Josephus speaks of a man called by the Jews Θρᾳκέδαν διὰ τὴν τῆς ὠμότητος ὑπερβολήν. .:
ἐν ᾧ av— ‘whenever,’ ἐν ᾧ describing all the attendant circumstances.
-—ingressive
8 δ]. 35. ἰδέα waoa—Thuc. is fond of this expression.
37. καὶ ἄρτι Ervxov—notice that the rel. is dropped in the second clause, as very often. Generally, however, a demon- strative is added instead, as in 11. 4 ὃ ἣν τοῦ τείχους καὶ ai θύραι ἔτυχον ἀνεῳφγμέναι αὐτοῦ. Cf. Hooker in the Hecles. Pol. ‘Whom although to know be life, and joy to make mention of His name.’ Also ‘Whose fan is in His hand and He will throughly
purge His floor.’ Livy, 28, 8 Cum quo .. . steterat, nec ewm ... patria majestas sententia depulerat. 37-8. Ervxov . . . éreAnAvOdres—the perf. is necessary to
make the partic. precede ἔτυχον (ἔλαθον ἔφθασα) in time; as in 11. 4 ἔτυχον. . . ἀνεφγμέναι. 38. κατέκοψαν mavras—Freeman well says that this ‘deed
148 GOYKYAIAOY ἘΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
of blood outdid all crimes of Greek against Greek, and sent a shudder through all Hellas.’ But, after all, Napoleon IIT. got the throne of France by acts as infamous. ἐυμφορὰ .. . abrn—‘ this was a calamity to the whole city un- paralleled in severity, and fell upon it with singular suddenness and horror.’ Each of the expressions appended to ξυμφορὰ adds a new point: (a) it was universal—7doy, (Ὁ) it was greater than others—ovdemias ἥσσων, (c) it was quite sudden and very horrible.
39. οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων --ἰἴ.6. “greater than any,’ as in Aesch. P.V. 1018 (αὐθαδία) αὐτὴ καθ᾽ αὑτὴν οὐδενὸς μεῖζον σθένει -Ξ “1688 than anything.’ Demosth. 1, 27 ἡ τῶν πραγμάτων αἰσχύνη οὐδεμιᾶς ἐλάττωμ ζημίας τοῖς γε σώφροσι. Cf. cc. 71 and 88. Note that ἥσσων ἢ μηδὲν would mean ° less than (the abstract idea of) nothing.’
μᾶλλον érépas—a common idiom in place of a superlative.
30 §11. 3. mpoxexwpyxdras—on the return march to the coast.
5. ἀφείλοντο... καταδιώκουσιν.---860 on c. 3, 4.
8.41. 8. ἐν τῇ ἐσβάσει τοὺς whelo-rovs—it appears below that, out of 1200, the number of those killed was 250. Hence the sense ‘most of those who were killed fell whilst embarking.’
10. ἔξω rogedparos—‘ out of range,’ Xen. Cyr. 1. 4, 23, like ἔξω βελῶν. Eur. Orest. 1531 εἴσω ξίφους. Livy, 22, 15, 8 priusquam ad conjectum telt ventret.
11, dre ἕν ye τῇ AAAQ—‘ whereas elsewhere in the retreat they ran forward from the line and closed in together and protected themselves with skill after the fashion of their country against the Th. cavalry. . ., and so only a few of them fell during this.’
“16. ἐν robrm—neut., like ἐν wc. 29, 4.
18. τῶν Opguav-—depenss on πεντήκοντα Kai δ.
19. &md—cf. c. 87, 6 ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν.
92. Bowwrapx ov—Thebes elected two of the eleven chiefs of the Boeotian confederacy.
26, ὡς ἐπὶ peyla—pro civitatis magnitudine, Portus: but it is uncertain whether τῆς πόλεως or τοῦ πάθους should be supplied. See Classen on ὁ. 118, 4.
27. ὀλοφύρασθαι &flw—in Lat. with dignus, aptus, the infin. is used only in poetry and Silver prose. Also the pass. infin. is used, while in Gk. the act. or mid. is regular.
31 §11. 1. rére—refers toc. 26, ὃ.
2, ἐκ τῆς Aakwvucts—the prep. is attracted to ἀποπλέων.
8, dag—now Katakolo, the landing-place for visitors to Olympia.
6. ἔπλεον---" proceeded on the voyage.’
821.8. Ζάκυνθον καὶ K.—the policy and interests of
‘
NOTES 149
Zacynthus coincided with those of Corcyra. In 430 Sparta made an effort to obtain Z., but failed. Cephallenia, after remaining for a time neutral, joined Athens in the autumn of 431. Pericles had seen that the possession of the islands which lay on the road to Sicily was of extreme importance, and already in 433 he began to form alliances with them. This was not. with a view to invading Sicily, but to prevent Sparta from obtaining help from Syracuse, her ally, and from con- trolling the route to Sicily.
9. τῶν Meronvlwv—sc. ὁπλίτας.
11. * Axapvavlas—all Acarnania, except Oeniadae, had made an alliance with Athens in the autumn of 430, and Demosthenes himself had taken Oeniadae into the alliance in 424.
12. *AAbfevav—near the coast of Acarnania. Here Timotheus, son of Conon, set up his trophy in 375 during his successful voyage to restore Athenian supremacy in the north-west.
*Avaxrépiov—had been an ally of Sparta; but it was seized by the Athenians at Naupactus and the Acarnanians in 4265. Hence αὐτοὶ -- οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι.
8 8], 14. περὶ radra— ‘occupied in this.’ περὶ is much commoner in this sense than ἀμφί, which prep. occurs only twice in Thuc. and not at all in the Orators.
15. rére—seo c. 16, 2. τότε is often used in referring back to what has been already mentioned. Cf. c. 31, 1; 81, 2.
18. κατὰ wdotv—cf. καθ᾽ ὁδόν, κατὰ τὴν πορείαν, κατὰ τὴν στρατηγία».
§ 41. 21. Kévoyv—the admiral and statesman who opposed Thrasybulus at the end of the war. After Aegospotami he lived in exile in Cyprus. In 394 he won the battle of Cnidus after which he rebuilt the walls of Athens. He was probably sent to Naupactus in 414.
24. κατοκνοῦσι---ἰῃ9 MSS. καταλύουσι is not appropriate, because there could be no question of bringing the war to an end, since the fortification of Decelea. (Classen’s explanation is that war was not yet declared between Athens and the Peloponnesians. But, if not, between whom is ὁ πόλεμος ἢ It certainly had not been declared between the Corinthian ships and the A. squadron. )
25. πέμπειν .---ἰ]ιο request points to the decline of Athenian naval supremacy.
_ a... otoas—‘even the partic. of personal verbs some- times stand with their nouns in the accus. abs. . . if they are preceded by ws or ὥσπερ. M.7'. 853. ᾿ 26, δνοῖν δεούσας εἴκοσι — the number of A. ships at Naupactus was generally twenty.
8 δ]. 31. τῆς στρατιᾶς τὸν & —cf. c. 24,2. περὶ governs τὸν ξ.
150 OOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®HS Z
36. ἀποτραπόμενος --- ‘turning back’ from his homeward voyage. Fr. Miiller renders ‘after his return from Sicily.’ __
ὥσπερ καὶ ὑρέθη “το as στρατηγός, which office he had held since Hecatombaeon 414, while the election was probably early in 414, but as colleague, ξυνάρχων, of Demosth. in this expedition.
82 §11.1. of δὲ. . . mpéoPeas—the subj. is again placed first for emphasis, in spite of ὁ Νικίας below. Cf. 111. 4,1. It is not common.
vére—as in c. 31, 3.
pera τὴν rod Π. &\wow—why would not μετὰ Πλημμύριον ἡρημένον do? See onc. 28, 4, 1. 32.
3. olxdpevot—attributive, though not under the art.
6. τοὺς τὴν ὃ. txovras—‘ who commanded the route.’
8. Kevrépumas — Centuripa, now Centorbi, a very ancient Sicel town 8.W. of Etna, of which it commands a splendid view.
’AXtxvalovs—the only Alicyae known in Sicily is in the N.W. and cannot be meant here.
9. διαφρήσωσι ---δ rare word, but well attested by the explanations given of it by ancient grammarians.
11. wepdoev—see onc. 12, 2. In Attic reppipa:=conari, and only Herod. and Thuc. among prose authors use the act.= conart.
12, ᾿Ακραγαντῖνοι --- [Π6 great Sicel leader Ducetius had attacked Acragas, which sought aid from Syr. 451. But Ducetius defeated the two. Then he was defeated by Syr., and sent to live at Corinth. He was allowed to return in 446, bo the disgust of Acragas, which now retained its jealousy of
ἧς 21.16. ἀφυλάκτοις τε καὶ ἐξαίφνης --- [ὴ6 circumstances are differently expressed, 88 ἴῃ ὁ. 18,1. Cf. Tacitus An. 1, 23 jletu e pectus atque os manibus verberans.
38 §11. 1. Kapapwato.—C. had previously been neutral. Its relations with Syr. had not been satisfactory. Originally an outpost of Syr., it had revolted from its mother-city and had been destroyed circ. 550. Subsequently it became part of Gela. In 484 Gelon transferred its population to Syr. ; and in 461 it was re-colonised by Gela.
6. T'eAgor—they had previously promised to send στρατιὰν ov πολλήν c. 1, 4. In 498 Hippocrates, tyrant of Gela, defeated the Syr. : his successor Gelon transferred his seat to Syr.
8. σχεδόν r.— ‘almost,’ since some towns still remained faithful to A. : see c. 57, 11. .
§ 21. 9. οὐδὲ μεθ᾽ érépov—regular phrase for ‘ neutral.’
10. οἱ δ᾽ &AAoi—this resumes the subject πᾶσα ἡ Σικελία
NOTES ᾿ 151
after the parenthesis. Cf. Andoc 1. 78, in the psephism of Patroclides, ὅσα ὀνόματα τῶν τετρακοσίων τινὸς ἐγγέγραπται. . .
πλὴν ὁπόσα ἐν στήλαις γέγραπται. .. τὰ δὲ ἄλλα πάντα ἐξ- αλεῖψαι. . ᾿ 88}. 14. ἐπέσχον rd... ἐπιχειρέῖν --- ‘refrained from
attacking.’ (Some edd. wrongly compare 11. 81, 4 οὔτ᾽ ἐπέσχον τὸ στρατόπεδον καταλαβεῖν, where if the text is sound the sense must be ‘did not intend to occupy the camp,’ not ‘did not refrain from occupying a camp.’)
19. τὸν ᾿Ιόνιον---8.. κόλπον.
84]. 21. Xowpddas—two islands off Tarentum.
23. Μεσσατπίονυ — one of the three divisions of Iapygia, Messapia, extended from Tarentum to Brundisium.
25. “Apra—he seems to have been a man of note in his day; for Athenaeus refers to him as μέγας καὶ λαμπρός.
—suggested a foreign, un-Greek form of govern- ment. Hence the bad sense of δυναστεία, which is used, for instance, of the Thirty.
27. Merarévrvov—there are ruins of a temple on the site. The Romans destroyed it for having sided with Hannibal. Fausanias saw a theatre and walls standing. Pythagoras died
ere.
8 δ]. 30. ἀναλαβόντες ratra—‘ taking these with them’ ; the neut. is used as inc. 14, 2.
31. @ovplav—on the site of Sybaris. In 193 B.c. it became a Latin Colony—called Copia—after the great extension of the ager Romanus in Bruttii. Thurii was colonised by Athens in 443. Herodotus was among the colonists.
34. εἴ τις ὑπελέλειπτο.---οϑὺ taken with ἁθροίσαντες.
36. ἐν τούτῳ réxns—the expulsion of the anti- Athenian party would make an offensive and defensive alliance possible.
811. 8. τῶν ddxdSav—depends on κομιδῆς.
6. ὧς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίᾳ --- Τυο. uses also ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίαν. Similarly ἐπὶ is used with either the gen. or dat. of place in the same phrases.
7. &n—of additional ships.
8. ἐλάσσους... τῶν ᾿Αττικῶν veov—this might have been é. τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, i.e. ἢ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις. Cf. VIII. 53 vais οὐκ ἑλάσσους σφῶν ἔχουσι.
9. κατα ’Kowedv—east of Rhium, which, with Antirrhium on the opposite coast, commanded the entrance to the Gulf. Had the Corinthians been superior in numbers, they would have lain off Rhium, S.W. of Naupactus, and have tried to shut in the A.
§ 21. 10. καὶ atvrots—the dative is put early to contrast it with of δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι below.
34
152 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®H= Z
14, αὐτόθεν --- from Achaea, which had originally been neutral, but in 417 joined Sparta.
dvexotoaus—see L. and S., B.; cf. Herod. vii. 123 πάσης τῆς Παλλήνης ἀνέχει μάλιστα. The meaning is common in Pausanias.
16. IloAvév@ns—prob. the same as the P. to whom, accord- _ ing to Xenophon, Tithraustes sent a bribe in order to bring about a war against Sparta.
§31.17. τριάκοντα... καὶ τρισίν --- ἰπ c. 81, 4 the number is given as eighteen. Demosth. had added ten ; and the rest must have come with Diphilus.
8 δ]. 25. ἁπλῶς---ἱ [ἢ κατέδυ, ‘absolutely.’ (Holden takes this with οὐδεμία, but there is no reason for emphasising this.)
ἑπτὰ δέ tives—the τινες shows he was not certain of the exact number.
26. éuBadrAdpevar—technically the ἐμβολὴ was a charge broadside with the ἔμβολον ; προσβολὴ a charge prow to prow.
29. ἐπωτίδας- τὰ ἑκατέρωθεν πρῴρας ἐξέχοντα ξύλα, Schol. The anchors hung from them.
8 61]. 30. &vr(radka — internal accus., defining the verb. Hence =dyriranov ναυμαχίαν. The plur. presents the details.
ws—the only case in which Thue. uses ws for ὥστε. The use is common in Aescbylus, Sophocles, Herod., Xen.
31. αὐτοὺς éxarépovs—the nom. would be more regular ; but the subjects are not really identical, since the infin. clause is meant to be general. It appears from what follows that the A. did not finally consider themselves victors.
33. αὐτῶν --τῶν vavayluy. For the two gens. cf. 1. 25 xara τὴν Φαιάκων προενοίκησιν τῆς Κερκύρας. See Classen on 111. 116, 6.
84, otxért—note (1) the adv. qualifying the noun: it is common with the neg., and verbal nouns often take the con- struction of the verb, as 11. 65 ὑπὸ τοῦ πρώτου ἀνδρὸς ἀρχή : (2 the use of οὐκέτι, denoting a change of purpose or a disappoint- ment of expectation.
§ 71. 48. of repor.—sc. ἐνόμισαν.
44, οἵ τε... of r’—the double τε shows that the two clauses are exactly parallel. Thuc. is fond of this re... re joining two concurrent acts.
45. κρατεῖν εἰ μὴ «.7.A4.—this is not a mere subtlety. The naval superiority of the A., esp. at Naupactus, had been so repeatedly acknowledged that the Cor. rightly considered that not to be beaten constituted a victory.
47. ὅτι οὐ π. évixav—the indic. shows that Thuc. states this as a fact: νικῴεν would mean that the A. reflected οὐ νικῷμεν.
811. 2. wapecxevacOnoav— ‘had been induced.’ This is
NOTES 153
undoubtedly the meaning, and it is common in the Orators, though there it generally implies underhand dealing. £.g. Demosth. 20, 145 πεισθεὶς ὑπὸ σοῦ διεγράψατο ἢ καὶ ὅλως ὑπὸ σοῦ παρεσκευάσθη ; and παρασκευὴ constantly has a bad sense.
6. τὸν πεῖζὸν---ἴὉ τὸν π. στρατόν. The ellipse of a masc. non-personal noun is rare. This one is found only in Herod. and Thue.
8. τῷ Σ.: worap@—it gave its name to the ancient Sybaris, on the site of. which Thurii now stood. Cf. the Gelas and Gela. The art. is usual when ποταμὸς is inserted with names of rivers. It is, however, often omitted by Herod. and now and then by Thuc.
§ 21.11. otk ἂν. . . βουλομένοις elvat—the same idjom is found in Lat. with volenti esse. The only instance of any other verb than volo is in Tac. An. 1. 59 ut quibusque bellum invitis aut cupientibus erat.
12. elvac—rare use of infin. after λέγω in O.O.: even here εἶπον implies a formal notice, as also in 11. 18 λέγων τὴν ἰσχὺν αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τούτων εἶναι. But the infin. is occasionally used loosely with λέγω.
ἐπικαταβάντες . . . πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν---[8 object of partic. and verb is, as usual, accommodated to the partic.
17. Aoxpév—they had refused to receive the A. from the first.
Πέτραν = Leucopetra.
§ 11. 2. at0ts—referring to the previous sea-fight.
3. ἄλλῃ---ἰ as well,’ cf. c. 4, 3.
4, wapacKkevy—‘ force.’
τοῦ we{od—what is called the gen. of material. Rutherford Syn. § 106.
5. πρὶν &Oetv—depends on φθάσαι. πρὶν regularly takes aor. infin. unless continuance or attempt is implied.
6. Evv&Aeyov—equivalent to pluperf. in a rel. clause. It is like the historic pres. for aor.
§ 21. 8. ds—‘in such a manner as would give them the advantage according to what they had learned frem the former battle.’
8-9. τι πλένν. . . oxfoowres—cf. πλέον τί ἐστι with dat., and πλέον τι ποιεῖν. Cf. on § 5, 1. 36.
9. ἐνεῖδον =‘ to learn by experience’ in action.
10. ξυντεμόντες ἐς ἔλασσον ---΄ shortening.’
18. ἀντήριδας ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν ---αἴδγΒ of timber which extended from the cat-heads through the sides of the ship, and projected nine feet both ways, inside and outside.
14. rotxos—wall of a building: τεῖχος wall of a town. For a similar distinction cf. τέμαχος slice of fish : τόμος slice of meat.
154 OOYKYAIAOY ἘΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
16. πρῴραθῳ --- ἢ ἐπισκευασάμενοι, ‘strengthening them at the prow.’ |
§31. 19. διὰ τὸ μὴ---“ because they rowed round and struck the enemy broadside, and did not meet him prow to prow.’
22. οὐκ ἐν wokAg—for ἐν οὐ πολλῷ : cf. 11. 102, and μὴ ἐπ᾽ ἀγαθῷ τι. 17, 2.
28. πρὸς ἑαντῶν ---80 πρὸς τῶν πολεμίων c. 49, 2. Not ἃ common use.
26. πρὸς kotha—sc. τὰ ἔμβολα. -
§ 41. 28. oddv—with περίπλουν οὔτε 5. For the order cf. 11. 5, 5 σφῶν πειραθέντες καταλαβεῖν τὴν πόλιν. It is put in contrast with ᾿Αθηναίοις.
29." περίπλουν---[ῃ manceuvre of rowing round and ‘boring’ the enemy’s vessels into a small space, so as to throw them into confusion.
SuxrAovv—the maneeuvre of ‘rowing through the intervals of the adversary’s line, and thus getting in their rear, . . . and before the ship of the adversary could change its position, of striking it either in the stern, or in some weak part.’ Grote. It is first heard of in Herod, vi. 12.
ᾧπερ τῆς réxvns—‘ which were the very manceuvres on which they depended most.’
30. αὐτοὶ yee k.7.’.—‘ for they themselves as far as possible would not, on the one hand, give them a chance of breakin their line, while the want of pace, on the other hand, woul prevent them from boring them in.’
31. τὸ μὲν... τὸ Sé—adverbial, as τὰ μὲν. . . τὰ δέ, τοῦτο μὲν. .. τοῦτο δέ.
οὐ δώσειν διέκπλουν .---80 11. 88, 5 οὐ διδόντες διέκπλουν.
33. κωλύσειν ὥστε---ἰἶη Thuc. verbs of advising, prevent- ing, and agreeing—as πείθειν, εἴργειν, EvuBalveew—most com- monly take ὥστε among verbs that can take the simple infin, ἡ
§ δ]. 34. τῇ τε πρότερον --- ‘they would purposely employ the system of charging prow to prow, which was before con- sidered want of skill in their pilots.’ τὸ ἀντίπρῳρον ξνγκροῦσαι is put as the supposed definition of ἀμαθία τῶν κυβερνητῶν, and the form of the sentence is an example of the effect which Thuc. produces by emphasising single words—here ἀμαθίᾳ. Thue. much prefers giving definitions to giving examples ; whereas in later oratory examples, παραδείγματα, are commoner. For the example, cf. τί. 42, 2, δοκεῖ δέ μοι δηλοῦν ἀνδρὸς ἀρετὴν (‘virtue in a man,’ as ἀμαθίᾳ κυβερνητοῦ here)... ἡ νῦν τῶνδε καταστροφή.
35. avelpppov—agreeing with the indef. subject of ξυγ- κροῦσαι.
NOTES 155
£vyxpotcora:r—probably trans., as elsewhere in classical Greek. It is easy to supply τὴν ναῦν.
86. πλεῖστον. . . oxfoav—as there is no other case of the superl. with ἔχειν, Kriiger wishes to read πλέον for πλεῖστον, Stahl περισχήσειν for σχήσειν. But πλεῖστον σχήσειν does not mean ‘they would be very superior to,’ but rather ‘they would find very great (advantage). The phrase may be compared with Aristoph. Acharn, 474 ἐν ᾧπέρ ἐστι πάντα μοι τὰ πράγ- ματα. Thuc. rather affects ἔχω in place οὗ ἐστι, as in 11. 4 ἐμπείρους ἔχοντες τοὺς διώκοντας instead of ἔμπειροι ἦσαν αὐτοῖς οἱ δι; and here the other cofstruction immediately follows. So too the phrases πλέον ἔχω and πλέον ἐστι are the same. Aristoph. Plat. 531 τί πλέον πλουτεῖν ἐστιν ;
37. τὴν yap avaxpovo.y—‘ for if driven back the A. would not be able to back in any direction except on to the shore, and that only through a short distance and to a small part, namely in the coast-line of their own camp.’ ἀνάκρουσις means ‘backing for a new attack.’
38. ovpévois—technical word for being thrust back or ashore in a sea fight, and driven back in a land battle.
39. ταύτην---Βο. τὴν γῆν. Both the distance to the land and the stretch of coast in their power would be small.
8 6}. 41. ξυμφερομένους .. . ἐς 6Alyov—‘ forced to meet in a small space.’
44. eoGa.— passive in sense, ταραχθήσομαι not being used until late Greek.
47. περιπλεῦσαι S¢—‘the enemy would not be able to sail round them into the open water, since they had power to charge from the open sea and to retire.’
48. edpvy wplav—outside the harbour, Ξε τὸ πέλαγος.
49. τὴν ἐπίπλευσιν. . . τε kal dvaxpovotw—first to charge, and then, when the enemy attempted to sail round them, to retire with the intention of charging again. The two words need not be part of the same movement, although the art. is not repeated.
51. wodeplov—even if by quick sailing the A. had it in their power to sail round the Syr., yet they would be caught between the retiring Syr. and the hostile posts at the mouth.
52. οὐ peydAov—thus Plem. and Ortygia controlled the whole width of the mouth.
811. 1. πρὸς τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἐπιστήμην---' in accordance with,’ 37 according to the standard of ‘their science and strength.’ a pos = pro.
5. érexelpovy—' proceeded to attack.
.§21. 6. xal—‘ accordingly.’ 9. καθ᾽ ὅσον. . . αὐτοῦ-- κατὰ τοσοῦτο αὐτοῦ ὅσον .. . ἑώρᾳ
156 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
‘at that part which faced the city.’ Gylippus would attack the inner side of the A. lines, the troops from the Olympieium the outer side. ὁρᾶν πρὸς = spectare ad. For οἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ ’O. see 6. 4, 6.
11. ἡ γυμνητεία = οἱ γυμνῆτες. They were armed with swords. So Eur. Androm. 1119 uses ἀτευχὴς of one who has laid aside his weapons of defence, but retains his sword.
12, wpooye—attracted into the number of γυμνητεία.
§ 31. 15. olépevor—the sentence would be more symmetrical with ᾧοντο.
18. ἐπὶ τὰ telxn—‘ mounting on the walls.’
22, twréas—Freeman remarks that it is strange that we hear nothing of the A. cavalry.
811]. 1. τῆς δὲ hpépas—‘ after testing each other for a great part of the day by advancing and retiring.’ σπροσπλέοντες καὶ ἀ. gives the manner in which they tested each other.
3. mwapadaBety—‘ win.’ .
4, εἰ ph... καταδύσαντες--οὗ Eur. Med. 369 δοκεῖς yap ἄν με τόνδε θωπεῦσαί ποτε | εἰ μή τί xepdalvovcay ἢ τεχνωμένην ; It is not necessary to supply παρέλαβον.
§ 21. 9. a&vr(wada—that the result of the fighting had been indecisive.
11. &wl{ov—‘ expecting.” N. did not desire a fresh en- gagement; but he knew that the slight success won by the Syr. would prompt them to renew the attack before the A. reinforcements should arrive. Freeman says that it was ‘the obvious A. policy to avoid further action till those reinforce- ments came.
12. tpinpdpxovs—Diodorus ΧΙ. 10 says the trierarchs were eager for a fresh battle. Plutarch Nic. 20 says the new generals, Menander and Euthydemus, were eager to achieve distinction before Demosthenes should arrive.
14, érerovfxe—Pollux gives κακοῦσθαι as an equivalent.
15. oravpéparos—this had been made in the spring of 414.
16. λιμένος KAQo-rod—such ‘closed harbours’ were common in Greece. Col. Leake Top. of Athens p. 311 says that ‘the walls, being carried down to either side of the harbour’s mouth, were prolonged from thence across the mouth upon shoals, or artificial moles, until a passage only was left in the middle for two or three triremes abreast between two towers, the opening of which might be further protected by a chain.’ The three harbours of Piraeus—Cantharus, Munichia, Zea—were so closed in 429 B.o.
8.31. 17, SvaAeurotoas—the transports, two hundred feet apart, were so stationed as to guard the gaps in the σταύρωμα. See on c. 41, 1.
NOTES 157
20. καθ᾽ hovx(av—‘undisturbed,’ the regular meaning of the phrase in Thuc. Cf. κατὰ oxédrov=clam.
21. παρασκεναζόμενοι. . . διετέλεσαν ---[ἢ8 only instance of διατελῶ with partic. in Thuc. διατελῶ, τυγχάνω, and φαίνομαι are often constructed with adjectives alone, as ἀσφαλέστατος ἂν διατελοίη 1. 34, 2.
22. μέχρι νυκτὸς ---ἰῃθ art. omitted as usual with words denoting time.
$11.1. rhs. . . ὥρας mpgrepov—lit. ‘earliet in point of 39
time,’ as in τότε τοῦ χειμῶνος. «2, ἐπιχειρήσει---" mode of attack.’
8. πρὶν di—introduces the decisive moment, as δὴ often does.
᾿Αρίστων. . . ἄριστος Sv—a curious paronomasia. It is not probable that it is accidental, since Thuc. is clearly rather fond of this ‘figure’ (σχῆμα λέξεως), as may be seen from a few instances in this book: (1) 6. 70, 8 φεύγοντας φεύγουσιν (this is traductio) ; (2) c. 85, 8 οὐ πολὺ. . . πολύ ; (8) ὁ. 55, 1 μέγας
. μείζων, and 68, 2 ἐχθροὶ καὶ ἔχθιστοι ; (4) α. 70, 4 ἐμβολαὶ
. προσβολαί ; (δ) c. 81, 5 ἀποκινδυνεύειν . . . ἀπονενοημένους ; (6) c. 21, 3 τολμηροὺς. . . ἀντιτολμῶντας, 42, 2 παρατείχισμα . . . περιτείχισμα, 69, 2 ἐπιφανεῖς. . . ἀφανίζειν ; (7) below in 2, αὖθις καὶ αὐθήμερον. The present ex. may be compared with the frequent plays on names in the Tragedians, e.g. Pentheus and πένθος Eur. Bac. 367.
12. τοὺ. . . ἐπιμελομένους --- i.e. the ἀγορανόμοι. Of Athens, Aristot. Ath. Pol. c. 51 says κληροῦνται δὲ καὶ ἀγορα- νόμοι. . . τούτοις δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν νόμων προστέτακται τῶν ὠνίων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι πάντων.
14, τῶν wwodovpévov—‘ provisions for sale.’ Cf. Polyb. 1, 18 παῤείλετο τὰς ἀγορὰς καὶ τὴν τῶν ἀναγκαίων χορηγίαν.
14-15. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν μεταστῆσαι---ΒΕΚΚΟΙ, Arnold, and edd. generally read μεταναστήσαντας ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν κομέσαι, with B; some alter μεταναστήσαντας to μεταστήσαντας. Bloomfield rightly objects. παρὰ with accus., it is true, ‘personam indicat—non rem—ad quam aliquid movetur’; but ἵστασθαι, τίθεσθαι, ἔζεσθαι are certainly used with παρά, where previous motion is implied. May not the words mean ‘to move and place on the shore’ ἢ
18. atrots—it hardly seems necessary to alter this to αὐτοῦ with the edd., following Portus. It may be ethic, applying to πάντας.
81]. 1. καὶ οἱ pév—the style here becomes animated, the 4.0 quick succession of events being described in short co-ordinate sentences joined by καί. In 11. 21, 3 there is a similar series with τε..
41
42
158 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
§21. 9. τὰ ἀμφὶ ---ἀμφὶ is not used freely by any prose author but Xen. It is not found in inscriptions, except in metre, and in Aristoph. only when he imitates tragedy. It is used twice by Thuc.
§ 8]. 12. διὰ πολλοῦ CopvBov — adverbial phrase, as in Aristoph. Vesp. 929 διὰ κενῆς = ἄλλως.
§ 41.15. gvAaccdpevor—‘ watching each other.’ This is of course not a pure reciprocal use of the middle; the sense of reciprocity cémes from ἀλλήλων.
17. Svapé&\Aovras—the change from dat. to accus. does not affect the sense.
κόπῳ ἁλίσκεσθαι ---" seized,’ or ‘overcome with weariness.’ So Aesch. Hum. 67 ὕπνῳ ἁλίσκεσθαι. Madvig’s ἀναλίσκεσθαι is unnecessary.
19. ἐκ παρακελεύσεωθ---οὗ 11. 92, 1 ἀπὸ ἑνὸς κελεύσματος ἐμβοήσαντες.
8 δ]. 21. ἐμβόλων---ποὐ from ἐμβολή.
28. ἐπὶ πολὺ ---ἰ far into the bows.’
24. atrois—ethic, sc. τοῖς Συρακοσίοις.
26. wepurdéovres—attributive.
27. rapoots—properly of the banes in a bird’s wing ; hence used of any similar series, as the banks of oars, as here. It is often so used by Polyb. and later authors. The word is fre- quently referred to by the Atticists. |
29. αὐτῶν-- τῶν πλοίων.
81]. 3. διὰ τῶν ὁλκάδων--- ΘΔ 0ἢ of these vessels commanded one of the ἔσπλοι in the σταύρωμα, which, as we infer from c. 38, 2, were 200 feet apart. Many edd. ridiculously suppose that the ‘dolphins’ extended over a space of 200 feet, under- standing ἔσπλοι to mean the spaces between the transports. But really they are the gaps left in the σταύρωμα, and they were only wide enough to admit a single vessel.
§ 21. 7. Seddivoddpo.—the ‘dolphins’ served the purpose of the chains by which λιμένες κλῃστοὶ were closed. The κεραῖαι are here beams, not yard-arms.
§ 31. 10. αὐτῶν éyyts—near the transports.
11. atrots—this dat. is not used outside of naval and military expressions except with αὐτός.
§ 41. 15. dpdorépwv—i.c. the action just ended and that of two days earlier.
16. τὴν ἐλπίδα. . . ἐχυρὰν εἶχον -- felt confident.’
ταῖς μὲν vavol—strictly τὸν δὲ πεζὸν ought to follow.
19. κατ᾽ aphdérepa—‘every preparation was making for another and more decisive attack which should complete the defeat of the invaders by sea and land.’ Freeman.
§ 11. 1. ἐν rotr@—while the Syr. preparations were making.
NOTES 159
3. ‘yvovrat—Plutarch, in a well-known passage, Nic. 21, describes the entrance of the new force into the harbour θεατρικῶς καὶ πρὸς ἔκπληξιν πολεμίων. It is impossible to say why the Syr. did not fight them at the harbour mouth. Perhaps some facts are omitted here.
4. τρεῖς kal ἑβδομήκοντα pddcora—the numbers previously given bring the total to seventy-three exactly ; but it is un- necessary to omit μάλιστα with B, since Thue. allows for any
ossible error in the previous data. Sixty-five sailed from
thens ; fifteen from oreyra 5 two from Metapontum ; one with Eurymedon ; total eighty-three ; but ten had been given to Conon.
ξὺν rats fevixats—‘ including,’ the regular Attic meaning, except only in the old phrase σὺν (τοῖς) θεοῖς. σὺν 18 very rare with persons and never implies a willing connection, in Attic prose after Thuc.; he has ξὺν fairly often with persons, and in cases implying will, viz. c. 57; 11. 58; 11. 90. The latter use is common in tragedy and Xen. In ordinary Attic σὺν is the word for adding together the items of a sum total. ξὺν (rots) ὅπλοις seems to be an old military phrase.
8. “HAAnvas. “EAAny can only be used as an adj. with persons.
821 13. εἰ πέρας μηδὲν ἔσται --- “1 there is to be no end.’ Cf. Eur. Med. 931 εἰσῆλθέ μ᾽ οἶκτος εἰ γενήσεται.
τοῦ ἀπαλλαγῆναι--Δοῆπο8β πέρας, an end consisting in de- liverance, as in Pindar Pyth. 1X. τερπνὰν γάμου κραίνειν τελευτάν, and in the Homeric τέλος θανάτοιο, γάμοιο.
14. épé@vres—anacoluthon, as though the preceding clause had been ol Σ. κατεπλάγησαν. Cf. 11. 53 νόμος οὐδεὶς ἀπεῖργε, τὸ μὲν κρίνοντες, for ὑπ᾽ οὐδενὸς νόμου ἀπείργοντο. Such a slight irregularity is not uncommon in tragedy, as Kur. Hee. 971 αἰδώς μ᾽ ἔχει. . . τυγχάνουσα. Plato Phaedo p. 81 a ὑπάρχει αὐτῇ εὐδαίμονι εἶναι. . . διάγουσα.
14-5. διὰ τὴν Δ. τειχιζομένην.---866 on c. 28, 4, 1. 32.
16. ἴσον καὶ παραπλήσιον.---οἴ, c. 78 τοιαῦτά τε καὶ παρα- πλήσια.
17. wavtaxdoe—i.c. in whatever direction it was exerted, whether in Attica itself or outside it. So πανταχόθεν in 11. 53, 3 means ‘from whatever source it was obtained.’
18. πολλὴν φαινομένην ---[ἢ. same omission of the partic. as in 6. 21, 3; 27, 1 al.
19. ὡς ἐκ κακῶν popn—z.e. as compared with their troubles, it was positive ῥώμη ; cf. c. 76 ws ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων ἐθάρσυνε. ἐκ here describes the source of the ῥώμη ; ὡς is ‘ considering that.’
§ 81. 21. οὐχ οἷόν τε elvat—prob. Thuc. meant to say ‘it
160 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPAPH? Z
was impossible for him to delay without experiencing’ ; this would require either οὐχ οἷόν re εἶναι διατρίβειν μέν, παθεῖν δὲ μή, or οὐχ οἷόν τε εἶναι διατρίβοντα μὴ οὐ παθεῖν. But the words as they stand mean ‘it is impossible to delay and to suffer,’ and this, after all, is more incisive than ‘it is impossible to delay, and then not to suffer.’
24. hoBepds—with ἀφικόμενος. The act. sense of φοβερός, ‘causing terror,’ is the commoner. The passive meaning ‘timid’ occurs in 11. 8, 4; Iv. 128, 4; Soph, O7. 158 φοβερὰν φρένα δείματι πάλλων.
82. atrods—object of ὠφελεῖν, the subject of which is τὸ μεταπέμψαι.
99. tatra—there is a similar parenthesis followed by ταῦτα δὲ πάντα σκοπῶν in Andoc. 1. 58 fol.
otv—resumes after the long parenthesis, just as igitwr, sed, autem are commonly used, 6.9. Cic. pro Mur. 50 meministis enim, cum illius nefarii gladiatoris voces percrebrwissent . . . tum igitur, his rebus auditis meministis.
34. τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μάλιστα Seavdéraros—this is labelled as an instance of the double superl., as in Eur. Med. ὦ μέγιστον ἐχθίστη γύναι, but Classen nightly takes μάλιστα closely with τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ, for ‘especially on the first day’; but, if he understood the passage, he did not make it clear. Why are there three superlatives, πρώτῃ, μάλιστα, devdraros? Thuc. surely means that D. saw after his arrival that the nearer the day of his arrival was the greater was the awe he inspired. Hence trans. ‘realising that at present, while his arrival was quite recent, he filled the enemy with awe.’ .
35. padAtora—serves to bring the two superlatives, πρώτῃ and δεινότατος, into relation. The whole is an example of his love of elaborate, composite, and co-ordinate expressions instead of subordinate clauses. For the use of superlatives in such ex- pressions, cf. 11. 11, 1 ἐπὶ πόλιν δυνατωτάτην viv ἐρχόμεθα, καὶ αὐτοὶ πλεῖστοι καὶ ἄριστοι στρατεύοντες, and perhaps the constant use of μάλιστα in ‘ proportions,’ as in II. 47, 4 μάλιστα ἔθνῃσκον ὅσῳ καὶ μάλιστα προσῇσαν.
86. ὅτι τάχος- -[οὐπα also in Herod. 1x. 7, and equivalent to ws rdxos=ws τάχιστα.
§ 41. 42. ad@is—‘ then.’
44, ὑπομεῖναι --- often contrasted with φεύγειν, either of soldiers or litigants who stand a trial ; sometimes it is joined with καρτερεῖν. It generally implies danger.
ιθέσθαι τῇ welpa—a graphic expression for setting to work with a will.
45. ot—the only case of the sing. of this pron. at all frequent in prose. Even this is usually avoided by the Orators.
NOTES 161
ομωτάτην «.t.A.—‘he thought that (therein) lay the means of finishing the war most quickly.’ (Classen rightly objects to inserting ταύτην after ξυντομωτάτην with Madvig. It is perfectly natural to supply τὸ ἐπιθέσθαι τῇ πείρᾳ with ἡγεῖτο.)
8 51. 46. ἢ ἀπάξειν---ἴ 6 suppression of the alternative to ab aie is @ fine effect.
47. t—passive.
§ 6 153. ἐπεκράτουν. had the upper hand.’ Freeman.
54. οὐδὲ καθ᾽ ἕτερα = κατ᾽ οὐδέτερα.
56. ὅτι py—‘ except.
81]. 1. pyxavate—Freeman says ‘it is strange that we have heard so little of engines of this kind during the whole war’ in Sicily. ‘They have not been mentioned before except when Nicias used them as materials for a fire’ (v1. 101).
2. waparex(oparos—N. in his letter had said that it was necessary to capture the ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος πολλῇ στρατιᾷ ἐπελθών. The first attack was made on the south side.
8. Evvdpxovras—Eurymedon, Menander, Euthydemns.
ὡς ἐπενόει, καὶ ---καὶ marks the carrying out of the plan that had been formed. In this idiom the rel. sense of ws, ‘as,’ is hardly distinguishable from the temporal.
τὴν émxelpynow—‘ they were to strive to win their way on the north side by the path by which he (Nicias) had first made
43
a lodgment for the invaders on the hil! of Syracuse.’ Freeman.
§ 21.10. &48¢vara—the plur. marks the details of a com- plex action.
12. *pepév—gen. of measure, as constantly in expressions of magnitude,
14, rofevxpdrov—we expect rather a mention of some engine used in the destruction of walls, and it is just possible that τόξευμα here denotes a machine of some kind. The proposals are μοχλευμάτων Madvig, λαξευμάτων Meineke, τειχομάχων Widmann.
15. ἢν κρατῶσι --- [86 pres. is used because κρατεῖν = ‘to be master,’ like νικῶ: Otherwise the aor. would be necessary.
16. ἀπὸ πρώτου barvov—concubia nocte; cf. περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον II. 2, 1 ; ἀπὸ τρίτης ὥρας Acts xxiii. 23. When the art. is omitted with expressions of time, a preposition is usually present, except with νυκτός, ἡμέρας.
17. τὴν wetdjv—i.ec. the foot at large who were able to take part. Some were left to guard the works. (The true reading πεζὴν comes from Plut. Nic. 21.)
18. ἐν τοῖς relxeotv—it has been generally assumed that, since the completion of the Syr. cross-wall, the A. had abandoned the κύκλος altogether, and held only the low
M
162 BOYKYAIAOY ΕΞΥΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z
ground at the south; but there is no evidence for this, and probably Freeman is right in assuming that N. still guarded the Fort. .
19. dredelrrero—Classen well says that the imperf. refers to his task of guarding the lines.
§ 3 1. 20. περ καὶ ἡ wporépa—referring to the ascent of the A. in the spring of 414.
-23. τὸ τείχισμα---ἰ. 6. a fort on Euryelus, built by Gylippus and forming the western extremity of his cross-wall.
§ 41. 27. wporaxlopactv—defensive ‘outworks’ on the north side of the cross-wall.
30. rots &axoolous—a chosen band of hoplites now under the command of Hermocrates. They had been appointed to keep a look-out on Epipolae in 414.
$51. 34. &pvvopévovs—accus. because it is object of ἔτρεψαν only. Contrast ὁ. 53, 2 προσπεσόντες τοῖς πρώτοις τρέπουσι.
36. τοῦ περαίνεσθαι ---΄ ὑμαΐ by means of the present impulse they might not be slow in the execution of the purpose for which they had come.’ The infin. is passive and depends on βραδεῖς γένωνται: ὑστερήσωσι.
87. ἄλλοι δὲ---ἰ.6. others than Demosth. and his division.
ἀπὸ τῆς wporys—temporal, ‘in the first instance.’ If rd ἀπὸ τῆς w. παρατείχισμα be retained with the MSS., the mean- ing is ‘the original cross-wall’; but there seems to be no reason why the cross-wall should be so qualified. There is no subsequently built wall with which it is contrasted.
861]. 41. of δὲ Lvpaxdéoror—‘ while the invaders were still engaged on their attempt on the wall (qpow . .. καὶ... ἀπέ- gupov), the garrisons of the other forts came forth to attack them.’ Freeman. .
§ 71. 49. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ μήπω pepaxnpévov—'those parts of the army which had not yet come into action’; neut. collective, as often.
51. διελθεῖν --- ‘force their way through.’ ‘They feared,’ says Freeman, ‘lest, if they relaxed for a moment, the whole force of the defenders should turn and come together against them.’
δῶ. of Βοιωτοὶ---ἰ. 6. the Thespians who in a single ship had met the Syracusan fleet at Locri (c. 25, 3). The majority of the three hundred Boeotians referred to in c. 19, 3 had not yet reached Syr. See c. 50, 1.
44 §11. 2. 4v—‘with reference to which,’ accus. de quo.
8. wv0éo8a.—referring to his own investigations in Sicily.
οὐδ᾽ ad’ érépwv—cf. ο. 42, 6.
4, ἕκαστα--- (86 details.’ ἕκαστος is as usual in the subor- dinate clause, and so is nom., though it is in apposition to ἦν.
NOTES 163
νέχθη-- ξυνέβη. The word is Ionic in this meaning. Cf. ey ooph The use is found in Herod., Thuc., and late authors like Lucian, Appian.
5. σαφέστερα pév—se. ἐστὶν ἕκαστα.
7. oev—sense requires the sing. here, because οἱ παραγενό- μενοι are considered separately ; but when the individuals all act alike, the verb with ἕκαστος is in plur.
9. ἔν ye τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ ---ἰ.6. as contrasted with other wars; whereas ὁ πόλεμος ὅδε implies no antithesis.
πῶς ἄν rus—another question comes in 67, 2. The question is one of the σχήματα dvavolas—tigures of thought—like irony, oxymoron. They are not common in early prose ; far less so than the σχήματα Aétews—figures of speech—like antithesis, paronomasia—which themselves become commoner later.
§ 21.11. ἑώρων. . . οὕτως... ds... εἰκὸς τὴν μὲν ὄψιν «ον προορᾶν, τὴν δὲ γνῶσιν. .. dmorreioGar—though we have no such idiom, yet in Greek there is certainly not an ellipse of ὁρᾶν after εἰκός, as the edd. say. In the case of correlatives, the explanation which we put in earlier is often deferred to the relative clause. So here the contrast between ὄψιν and γνῶσιν is deferred to the ws clause. Trans, ‘as was natural for them to see in the moonlight, they saw the outline of a figure in front without being able to distinguish. whether it was that of a friend.’ This idiom is very common with τοσοῦτον . . . ὅσον, and is often misunderstood. (Cf. v. 95 οὐ τοσοῦτον ἡμᾶς βλάπτει ἡ ἔχθρα ὑμῶν ὅσον ἡ φιλία μὲν ἀσθενείας, τὸ δὲ μῖσος δυνάμεως παράδειγμα τοῖς ἀρχομένοις δηλούμενον, where a reference to 7 φιλία is at first sight expected in the τοσοῦτον clause. The idiom with οὐχ ὥσπερ is similar, as Aristoph. Hy. 784 οὐχ ὥσπερ ἐγὼ ῥαψάμενός σοι τουτὶ pépw= ‘he does bring you this as I do.’)
12. ὄψιν---“ outline.’ Cf. Plat. Rep. p. 376 B ὄψιν φίλην καὶ ἐχθρὰν διακρίνει.
12-8. τὴν δὲ γνῶσιν τοῦ οἰκείον dmoretoOar—lit. ‘that their recognition of friends should be distrusted.’ τοῦ οἰκείου is neut. collective, as inc. 43, 7. Classen takes it to mean ‘what was peculiar’ in contrast to τοῦ σώματος.
88]. 16. τῇ πρώτῃ &d5q—‘ with their first impulse.’
20. πρὸς ὅ τι χρὴ χωρῆσαι---“ which division they should join.’ χρὴ after rel. words is very common; 6.9. 11. 4 9 χρὴ σωθῆναι.
21. τὰ πρόσθε--- [086 in front had become completely disorganised and were difficult to distinguish.’ Cf. c. 14, 2 χαλεπαὶ ἄρξαι.
8 41. 24. κραυγῇ. . . χρώμενου--8ο0 c. 71, 5 and 11. 4, 2. There are κεκραγμός, κέκραγμα and κρανγή in Attic.
164 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®HS Z
27. of re >AOynvatoc—answers οἵ τε γὰρ 2. above.
πᾶν τὸ ἐξ évavrlas—‘all who came towards them.’ For the neut. collective with adverb cf. 11. 45, 1 τὸ μὴ ἐκποδὼν. .. τετίμηται.
28. τῶν ἤδη πάλιν φευγόντων --΄“ belonging to those who were already in flight.’
84. αὐτὸ -- τὸ ξύνθημα.
8 δ]. 84. éxelvowv—applying to the enemy, as often. Both ἐκεῖνος and αὐτὸς here and again in 1. 38 are used of the same people. This is very common.
37. ἐντύχοιεν---86. οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ; Sdhevyov—sc. οἱ πολέμιοι.
89, ὑποκρίνοιντο---- answer’; only herein Thuc. Itis Ionic; common in Herod.: Aristoph. Acharn. 401, and late authors.
8 61. 44. φόβον παρεῖχε---80. αὐτὸ, 1.6. τὸ παιανίζειν.
45. οἵ τε πολέμιοι--- ταῦ is to be supplied ?
§ 71. 47. φίλοι re hfAots—polyptoton. . .
§ 81.50. κατὰ. . . κρημνῶν --ῥίπτειν ἀπὸ is found only in late Greek.
52. πάλιν karaBdoews—cf. c. 62 τὴν πάλιν ἀνάκρουσιν.
58. τὸ Spaddv—‘ the flat ground between the hill and the bay of Trégilos. The men of the first armament, who had learned the lie of the land on both sides of the hill, knew the roads, and contrived to make their way round to the A. quarters. Freeman. They had ascended Epipolae in 414.
57. Sveptyyavov—The form φυγγάνω is occasionally found even in the Orators.
45 81]. 2. 4 ἡ wpdoPacis—sc. ἐστί, 1.6. where the ascent to E. is. For fhe omission of the verb in rel. clauses cf. ο. 11, 4.
§ 21. 6. 8wAa—here ‘shields’; it is often so used by Herod. So arma in contrast with tela.
46 2 at—‘again’ referring to c. 41, 4 τὴν ἐλπίδα ἤδη ἐχυρὰν εἶχον.
8. ᾿Ακράγαντα --ἰῦ was neutral. See ὁ. 33. There was now a party favourable to Syracuse in the city; hence the mission of Sicanus, who had been appointed general with Hermocrates in the winter of 415. Acragas did not however join Syr. See ce. 50.
8. ad0us—he had gone once before ; see 6. 7. .
ἐν ἐλπίδι Ov—cf. c. 25, 1. Here it is constructed as ἐλπίζω.
47 81]. 2. πρός re—‘ with reference to.’ Freeman well says that we must remember the old εὐτυχία of Nicias. This re- membrance it was which increased the vexation of the troops.
4, dppworlayv—medical term. Here in moral sense, as in m1. 15, 2.
6. &xSopévovs—two reasons are given: (1) νόσῳ ἐπιέζοντο, (2) τὰ ἄλλα ἀνέλπιστα. . . ἐφαίνετο.
NOTES 165
§21 6. védoq~—esp. those encamped between the double walls below the cliff. ;
7. κατ᾽ duddérepa—‘ for two reasons,’ which are then given, viz. (1) the season, (2) thé place.
8. otons .. . χαλεπὸν qv—see on c. 13, 2.
10. xaXewdv— ‘unhealthy,’ like βαρύς, gravis. The un- healthiness of the marshy ground made it difficult to lay siege to Syracuse by land. The Romans found this out in 212, Livy XXIV. 26 tempore autumni et locis natura gravibus, multo tamen magis extra urbem quam in urbe, intoleranda vis aestus omnium Jerme corpora movit.
h ἀνέλπιστα--ἴμο pessimism that usually accompanies bad ealth.
§ 31.13. ἐς τὰς ’E. διεκινδύνευσεν.---[ῃ edd. compare 111. 36, 2 és Ἰωνίαν παρακινδυνεῦσαι.
17. τοῦ orpatebparos—‘ partitive ’ after ναυσί : ‘so long as it was ossible to prevail at least with that part of the feet that had come to reinforce them.’ ;
§ 41. 20. ἐν τῇ xdpqa—at Decelea.
21. Zupaxoorlovs—the preposition omitted in the second clause after a comparative. Cf. v. 111 αἰσχύνην αἰσχίω per’ ἀνοίας 4 τύχης προσλαβεῖν.
ots . . . ῥάδιον elvar—cf. 1. 91, 5 ὅσα per’ ἐκείνων βουλεύεσ- θαι ; 1. 18, 5 οἷς χρήσεσθαι, and 102 Aéyerar .. . ὅτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι. This attraction of short rel. clauses in Oratio Obliqua into infin. is less rare in Greek than in Lat. (qui=et is is different).- Thuc. has nine instances. Cf. Roby, 11. § 1677.
23. εἰκὸς elvar—decere.
§11. 2. ἐνόμιζε pev—Freeman says rightly, ‘They were, he 48 allowed, in evil case; but it would not So openly to proclaim the fact.’ In his speech in the council N. did not disguise his opinion. Hence in ἐνόμιζε μὲν. . . τῷ δὲ λόγῳ the antithesis is not so much between what he thought and what he said, as between what he both thought and admitted in the council and the impression which he wished his words to produce outside the council. His admission was to be kept secret.
arévnpa—‘ here bears the sense calamitous, dangerous, like our word evil, as in the phrase in evil case.’ Bloomfield. See not. crit., for the accent.
3. τῷ δὲ Adyo—‘ by his speech,’ with ἀποδεικνύναι. It was not to be publicly known that he felt they were in evil case ; nor was a report to reach the enemy that they were openly voting for a retreat.
4. éuhavas—with ψηφιζομένους. This seems to be merely a plea for secrecy by Nicias. He urged that if they voted for
166 OOYKYAIAOY ἘΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
retreat, every one would know of it and so the enemy would hear about it.
5. μετὰ wroAAGv—has been thought to refer to a subsequent and larger council to be held, at which the taxiarchs would attend ; but prob. N. only means that if they voted for retreat, their vote would accord with the opinion of many in command, and that the enemy would hear that this was so.
6. καταγγέλτους ylyveorGar—cf. 111. 30, 1 ἐκπύστους γενέσθαι, γίγνομαι making a passive with verbal adjs.
7. Aaletv—antithesis to ἐμφανῶς and=ph φανεροὶ γενέσθαι.
8. τοῦτο ποιοῦντες --- the edd. all say this means dvayw- podyres. But it should be ψηφιζόμενοι τὴν ἀναχώρησιν. N. urges that no formal vote may be now taken, because every one must know of it. ‘Let us wait, and decide the matter in secret and informally should retreat become necessary.’ He is not at present dealing with the question of retreating im- mediately, but is arguing on the assumption that an immediate retreat is impossible. Cf. c. 50, ll. 30, 31.
ποιοῦντες---ἐβούλετο is here lost sight of, and the Obliqua is used. Nicias is part of the subject, and so the nom. is possible.
§ 21. 8. τὸ δέ —Thuc. has told us why N. objected to an open vote, and now proceeds to explain why N. thought an immediate retreat unnecessary, and indeed impossible. This is shown below by ἣν καρτερῶσι προσκαθήμενοι as distinct from οὐδ᾽ ἐμφανῶς σφᾶς ψηφιζομένους x.7.d. above. ᾿
9. ἀφ᾽ év—‘judging from private (ἐπὶ πλέον ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι) information that he received of them.’ ἀφ᾽ wy... αὐτῶν ἀπ’ ἐκείνων ἃ αὐτῶν, and αὐτῶν is neut., referring to τὰ τῶν πολεμίων.
10. ἐλπίδος τι-- οἵ. c. 69 λαμπρότητός τι.
12, χρημάτων yap—‘ they would wear out the Syr. by want of supplies.’
14. θαλασσοκρατούντων.---80. σφῶν ; the gen. abs. in spite of the subject being the same as that of ἐκτρυχώσειν. This thas the effect of strongly emphasising the participial clause and of contrasting the position of the A. with that of the Syr. (Hw. here reads θαλασσοκρατοῦντες ; Stahl inserts σφῶν, and it is not quite clear that any of the passages where this construction occurs are parallel to this one.) The same phenomenon appears in Latin ; eg. Livy xx111. 24, 10 pontem fluminis petentes, obsesso ante ab hostibus ponte.
15. ἦν yap τι-- οἵ, c. 4, 2.
h 16. τὰ πράγματα evSotvar—‘ place the government in their ands,’ . ἐπεκηρνκεύετο.----ἰ6 subject must be taken from the paren-
NOTES 167
thesis, just as the object is in 111. 70, 3 καί (fw γὰρ Πειθίὰς . . .) ὑπάγουσιν αὐτόν. °
17. οὐκ εἴα---“ urged him not.’
§ 31.17, ἃ ἐπιστάμενος --- 50}}5 up the motives that prompted Nicias. Cf. 1. 42 ὧν ἐνθυμηθέντες ; VI. 60 ὧν ἐνθυμούμενοι.
18. τῷ μὲν ἔργῳ. .. τῷ δ᾽ & ... Adyp—the antithesis occurs about fifty times in Thuc. .‘In reality he held back, inclining both ways and considering, but in his public speech at the time.’
ἐπ᾽ a ἔχων---ΟὨ the analogy of ἔχειν with adverbs.
19. τῷ δ᾽ éucdhavet—then follows the summary of his official speech. As Thuc. has such a clear knowledge of the motives given above, we may assume that Nicias began by making admissions which he did not wish to be taken as part of his ἐμφανὴς λόγος. (We could scarcely suppose that Thuc., sym- pathising with N., merely inferred his motives.)
21. σφῶν---᾿ ἴῃ them’ ; for the constrn. Fr. Miiller compares θαυμάζειν τί τινος.
22, éore—introduces the epexegesis of ταῦτα ; cf. 11. 40, 3 διαφερόντως γὰρ καὶ τόδε ἔχομεν ὥστε τολμᾶν, ‘namely that they should depart without an order from them.’
23. καὶ γὰρ od τοὺς atrots—‘ we shall not,’ he said, ‘then have the same body of persons both voting about ourselves and making up their minds from seeing the facts with their own eyes as we do instead of merely hearing them from the fault- finding of others.’ For τῶν αὐτῶν cf. 1. 22, 3 οὐ ταὐτὰ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν ἔλεγον, ἀλλ᾽ ws ἑκατέρων τις εὐνοίας ἢ μνήμης“ ἔχοι ; 111. 56, 7.
25. ὥσπερ καὶ atrol—sc. dpdcw. But the accus. might be used with ὥσπερ, corresponding with ὁρῶντας. -
27. ἐξ ὧν ἄν rus—‘ they will let themselves be persuaded by the calumnies of a clever speaker.’ With εὖ λέγων διαβάλλειν ef. καλῶς ἐπιτιμᾶν 111. 88, 4 ; εὖ διαβαλὼν I. 42, 2.
8 41. 29. xat—immo.
31. ὑπὸ χρημάτων ---“ been bribed to turn traitors and depart.’
34. émordpevos—the timidity of Nicias in this matter is in marked contrast with the outspoken boldness of Pericles. Thirlwall doubted whether N. really feared the A. so much as he professed to do.
35. ἐπ᾿ αἰσχρᾷ τε alrla—viz. on a γραφὴ “προδοσίας, which might be brought by any citizen even against a general by means of an impeachment (εἰσαγγελία) in the Ecclesia. The
nalties were very severe, involving death, confiscation, and urial outside the state, ἀτιμία for the convict’s descendants, and the entry of the man’s name on a black list. The case would be tried before the Thesmothetae, who also superintended the εὔθυναι---ϑορουχιΐϑ ποῦ retiring στρατηγοί, and a Court of eliasts,
168 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
36. μᾶλλον 4 x.7.A.—‘he would sooner run the risk, and die on his own ‘account at the hands of the enemy, if die he must.’
37. 18(a—there is no need to suspect this word with Kr. and Hw. ; ‘to die at the hands of the public executioner’ is δημοσίᾳ ἀποθανεῖν ; N. desires to die otherwise. There is also abundant evidence that difficulties arising at Athens out of the στρατηγία were regarded as especially δημόσια.
§ 51. 38. &py—when long passages of Oratio Obliqua are attempted in Greek, the verb of ‘saying’ is frequently re- peated. The structure of this c. is similar to 11. 13.
40. £evorpododvras—these mercenaries were partly Sicel, partly Arcadian. Mercenary service was traditional among the Arcadians. It only became general in Greece after the Pel. war. The Pel. employed many—probably 3000—in 426
inst Demosthenes in Aetolia, and Brasidas had 1000 in hrace. Cf. c. 19, 4.
ἐν qeptrroAlous—forts for the protection of the open country, with home-garrisons, as distinct from orpareal. Cf. v1. 45 of the Syr., és τὰ περιπόλια τὰ ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ φρουρὰς ἐσεκόμεζον.
42. ἕτι---“ besides.’
βόσκοντας--- το used of men, βόσκειν implies contempt or trouble. Cf. Herod. vi. 89 βόσκων ἐπικούρους. The parti- ciples belong to ἀπορεῖν and ἀμηχανήσειν alike.
τὰ μὲν ἀπορεῖν x.7.A.—‘ were in difficulties, and would here- after be at a loss.’ ἀπορεῖν refers to want of money, ἀμηχανήσειν to the diminution of their παρασκευὴ which would result from
this ἀπορία.
48. tr. — with the future is used thus in threats and prophecies,
44, ἤν τε... &kAlrwot—contrast ὁ. 13, 1 εἰ ἀφαιρήσομέν
τι καὶ βραχὺ τῆς τηρήσεως, and see on ὁ. 8, 1 for the difference in the protasis. h depend
45. viv παρασκενῆς---“ their present forces,’ dependin on ‘rote Of course the forces would fall off if the ray were not forthcoming.
47. &ruovptxd—mercenaries would serve for anyone that hired them. But the Athenians served δι᾽ ἀνάγκης, as men compelled by law and duty.
8. 6]. 48. tp(Bav—‘remain’; cf. c. 49, 2.
"49. καὶ μὴ χρήμασιν, dv «.7.A.—‘and not to leave defeated by the money of an enemy than whom they were far better off.’ χρήμασιν, ὧν = χρήμασιν ἐκείνων ὧν. Nicias has alluded in χρήματα only to the financial straits of the enemy, and adroitly says ‘are we to let ourselves be beaten by an enemy who, even if he is for the moment stronger, is yet so much poorer that he
NOTES 169
must lose if we remain?’ (Other edd. take χρήμασιν differently. Most reject ὧν of B and either render ὡς ‘since,’ or alter it. Thuc. does not use ws ‘since’ with indic. elsewhere. )
@v—antecedent omitted. This cannot be connected with νικηθέντας, as νικᾶν with gen. is exclusively poetical.
πολὺ xpelooovs—Herbst says that πολλῴ κρείσσους is always used by Thuc. for ‘to be much better off,’ and that πολὺ κρείσσους Ξενικᾶἂν. But here νικᾶν is itself used in a metaphorical sense, of being beaten by money. And Nicias chooses words which will bear both senses, as they help to disguise the weakness of the A. . -
811. 1. loxuplpero—‘spoke confidently.’ 49
2. αἰσθόμενος. . . ὅτι--ἃ substantive clause after αἰσθά- voua is not very common; cf. 1. 50; 11. 88, 1; the partic. is far commoner.
6. Sore—see on ὁ. 48, 3.
καὶ dua—the construction is again changed from partic. to finite verb. Cf. c. 47, 2.
ταῖς γοῦν vavoly—‘in the fleet at least he retained his old confidence.’
7. [κρατηθείς]---ἰῦ is not likely that Thuc. said this of Nicias, who had taken no part in the night attack. Nowhere else does he use κρατεῖν except of a general actually leading his men. We should also require parallels ἴο. ἐθάρσει κρατηθείς for ‘he felt confident though he had been defeated.’ As the passage is clearly corrupt, we may safely omit the word. (Widmann reads -- μᾶλλον > θαρσήσας ἢ πρότερον κρατηθείς, and Sitzler «μᾶλλον > θαρσῶν, ἢ πρότερον ἐθάρσησε κρατηθείς.)
§ 21.10. ἄνεν ᾿Α. ψηφίσματος ---οἷ, ἄνεν Λακεδαιμονίων 1. 128 ; οὐ μετὰ τοῦ πλήθους ὑμῶν 111. 66.
11, τρίβειν adro$—‘ remain in Sicily.’
12. Θάψον... 4... Kardvnv—‘there they would have the open sea and all the advantages which the open sea gave to the A. tactics. There they would . . . maintain themselves by harrying the territory of the enemy.’ Freeman.
17. οὐκ... &AN’—cf. Eur. Jon 131 οὐ θνατοῖς ἀλλ᾽ ἀθανάτοις.
19. τὰ τῆς ἐμπειρίας x.—‘the advantages of skill will be theirs.’
20. ἀναχωρήσεις «.t.A.—chiasmus, ἀναχωρήσεις correspond- ing to xaralpovres, ἐπίπλους to ὁρμώμενοι.
22. xatalpovres—sc. és βραχὺ καὶ περιγραπτόν.
§ 31.25. p&AAcw—cf. Eur. Heracl. 182 σὸν δὴ τὸ φράζειν ἐστὶ μὴ μέλλειν τ΄.
8 41. 27. p&AAnow—cf. Aristoph. dv. 639 οὐχὶ νυστάζειν ἔτι | ὥρα ᾽στιν ἡμῖν οὐδὲ μελλονικιᾶν.
iveyévero—cf. VIII. 9 διατριβῆς ἐγγιγνομένης.
170 OOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
28. ὑπόνοια pf—as though ὑπόνοια were φόβος. Cf. 111. 53 ὑποπτεύομεν μὴ οὐ κοινοὶ ἀποβῆτε. .
81. κατὰ χώραν ἕμενον --- ἃ common phrase. (Stein on Herod. 111. 188, Kock on Aristoph. Zy. 1354.)
50 §11.1. Γύλιππος---866 c. 46.
4, ἡ τοῖς 2 στάσις φιλία --ἴΟΥ the order cf. on c. 23, 3. ‘The party favourable to the S. had been expelled.’ Cf. Aesch. P.V.127 φιλία γὰρ ἅδε τάξις ; Choeph. 458 στάσις δὲ πάγκοινος ἅδ᾽ ἐπιρροθεῖ.
7. τοὺς ἐκ τῆς Π.---866 c. 19, 8.
§ 21. 10.: &mevexOévres—by bad weather.
12. Hveorrep(rats—afterwards one of five towns called the Pentapolis of Cyrene. In 401 it was again attacked by Libyans, and offered citizenship to any Greek who would come to its aid. Many of the Messenians, expelled from Naupactus by the Spartans, went there. Paus. Iv. 26; Diod. XIV. 34.
16. δύο 4.—gen. of measure and epexegetic of ἐλάχιστον.
§ 31. 24. ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον xwpotvra—‘ improving.’
26. χαλεπώτερον toxovra —a substitute for χαλεπωτέρως ἔχοντα.
80. dpolws—‘as before.’
ἀλλ᾽ ἢ--- except.’
μὴ φανερῶς. .. ψηφίζεσθαι.---800 on c. 48, 1. No formal vote was to be passed.
31. προεῖπον ὡς ἐδύναντο x.7.A. — ‘they gave notice as secretly as possible to all.’
33. twapackevdoacbar.—‘to prepare (to depart) when the sign was given.’ The sentence would be clearer if he had said ws ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα παρασκενάσασθαι ἔκπλουν ποιησομένους ὅταν τις o.; but it is easy to supply ἐκπλευσομένους from ἐκπλοῦν after παρασκευάσασθαι. (The preliminary arrangements are not denoted by παρασκευάσασθαι but are implied clearly enough in προεῖπον ἔκπλουν. So in vi. 65 προεῖπον πανδημεὲ πᾶσιν ἐξιέναι Συρακοσίοις. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἑτοῖμα αὐτοῖς καὶ τὰ τῆς παρασκευῆς ἣν x.7.d.; there too προεῖπον ἐξιέναι implies pre- paration for the expedition. Here παρασκευάσασθαι applies to such final arrangements as can only be made when the final order is given. There is no need to alter the aor. into the perf., as some of the edd. do.)
vis—added to σημήνῃ because the sign was to be given no by herald, but secretly.
8 41. 35. ἡ σελήνη éxdelre.—eclipses of sun or moon were deemed ominous. Plut. Nic. 23 says that even οἱ πολλοὶ knew in the time of Nicias that eclipses of the sun were a natural phenomenon ; but this is very doubtful. What was known
NOTES 171
about them was due to the teaching of Anaxagoras. Plut. Per. 35 ; de superstit. c. 7.
ἐτύγχανε... odoa—Thuc. uses the imperf. of τυγχάνω with pres. or perf. ; with aor. only in vil. 105. See onc. 4, 3.
38. ἐνθύμιον ποιούμενοι---- took it to heart.’
39. ἣν... wpooxelpevos—the tense of εἰμὲ must precede the participle in this periphrasis, as it is emphatic, re resenting a state of things existing at the time referred to. Cf. τι. 67 ἢν
. πολιορκοῦν ; 11. 80 ἦσαν. . . ξυμπροθυμούμενοι.
τι καὶ ἄγαν «.7.A.—cf. Intr. p. xxxv. Plutarch says that Stilbides had lately died.
40. οὐδ᾽ ἂν διαβουλεύσασθαι.---- “Βο would not even enter into any further discussion as to how he should move until...’
41. πρὶν. .. petvac—here πρὶν has the infin., though a negative precedes. This happens when something positive is insisted on ; as here the fact that he would remain so long.
᾿ ἐξηγοῦντο --- [ΘΟ 1608] word for interpretation by priests. Cf. Andoc. 1. 116 ἐξηγῇ Κηρύκων dv, οὐχ ὅσιον ὄν.
τρὶς évvéa—Plutarch says that the priests only required nine days, but Nicias insisted on staying for a whole revolution of the moon.
43. peAAfjoaci—refers to the delay that had been rendered necessary by the eclipse, before they had decided how long to remain. ἡ μονὴ on the contrary refers to the definite stay of twenty-seven days, But they had only stayed a few days when they were attacked. ‘And so the A., after delaying for this reason, had resolved to remain.’
811, 2. ἐπηρμένοι foav—‘ felt encouraged.’
μὴ ἀνιέναι τῶν ᾿Α.--- ποῦ to relax their. hold upon the A.,’ 4. to keep them busy instead of disregarding them. Hence—§ 2---τὰς vais ἐπλήρουν. Cf. v1. 18 τοῖς μὲν ἐπιβουλεύειν, τοὺς δὲ μὴ ἀνιέναι ; τι. 18 τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν.
4, αὐτῶν κατεγνωκότων ---΄ since they had themselves come to the conclusion that they were no longer superior to them (σφῶν).᾽ καταγιγνώσκειν is used for forming an adverse opinion. κατάγνωσις has a similar sense. Cf. 111. 45, 1.
7. émBovdcioa:—‘ made plans.’ Cf. 111. 109, 3 τὴν ἀνα- χώρησιν ἐπιβουλεύειν.
καὶ &yua—adds another reason.
§ 21. 13. ἐπλήρουν καὶ d.—see onc. 7, 4.
14, ἐπειδὴ δὲ «.7.A.—‘ the first attack was made by land on: the A. wall, clearly on the outer side, by the horsemen and others from the Olympieion.’ Freeman, who views the whole engagement as fought south of Epipolae. But c. 54 1. 3 and c. 60, 2 1. 9 prove that the attack began on Epipolae.
19. otens δὲ o-revijs—the pursuit was prob. near the Harbour.
52
53
172 OBOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
‘In that swampy ground the solid path was narrow, and so was the entrance to the A. camp.’ Freeman.
20. trwovs—apparently he does not know how many riders were killed. Doubtless in the confusion some escaped.
8 11. 2. rats τε vavoly—the Syr. had not ventured to attack the A. by sea since the arrival of Eurymedon and Demosthenes.
§ 21. 7. τὸ δεξιὸν xépas—this was at the south and therefore projected towards Dascon bay.
9. érddyovra—‘as he was drawing off’ so as to surround the enemy’s left. Bloomfield.
11. ἀπολαμβάνουσι--- ἴον defeating the A. centre, the Syr. centre was able to join in the attack on Eurymedon.
12. xofAw—z.e. Dascon bay.
13. τὰς per’ αὐτοῦ v. ἐἔπισπομένας --- cf. μετὰ ᾿Αθηναίων ἠκολούθουν c. 57, 9. Diodorus says that seven A. ships were here sunk. -
81]. 1. Γύλιππος — he had remained on shore, where Demosthenes kept a look-out on him.
ὃ. ἔξω τῶν cravpwpdarwv—i.c. to the south-west of their palisade ; ‘they were chased to the muddy shore and the shallow waters between it and the promontory of Daskén.’ Freeman.
7. τῆς γῆς φιλίας οὔσης--ἰ.6. that part of the land which lay south-west of the A. lines, and so the very part on to which the A. ships were being carried.
8. τὴν χηλὴν --ἃ mole running along the coast between the shore and the marsh Lysimeleia.
§ 21. 9. of Tuponvol—the Etruscans were old enemies to Syracusan trade and naval power, and had consequently sent aid to Athens in the expedition.
11. ravry—close up by the A. lines where they reached the mole.
§ 31.17. ἐπιβοηθήσαντες καὶ δείσαντες -- fearing for their ships and coming to their aid.’ Thuc. often thus co-ordinates effect and cause, placing the causal partic. second, as in VIII. 7, 1 ἐπειγομένων τῶν Χίων ἀποστεῖλαι τὰς vais καὶ δεδιότων μὴ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι αἴσθωνται.
21. ξυνήγαγον κατὰ τὸ o. — ‘brought them within the shelter of their lines,’ 1.6. within the stockade.
§ 41. 26. κληματίδων καὶ δᾳδὸς---ἃ collective sing. is some- times thus joined with a plur., as in 11. 4, 2 λίθοις καὶ κεράμῳ. Cf. Theognis 1360 κληματίνῳ πυρί.
27. av—see onc. 19, 4]. 27.
29. περὶ ταῖς νανσὶν ---περὶ with dat. is rare in prose outside Thuc., who uses it often with verbs of fearing.
NOTES 173
ἀντεμηχανήσαντό re... kal παύσαντες--- [ἢ 6 co-ordination of an act and its result by τε. . . καὶ 18 poetical.
80. σβεστήρια xodAtpara—this collocation is awkward, but Pollux has σβεστηρίοις κωλύμασιν éxp@vro. Hw. first thought’ of σβεστήρια καὶ xw., but rightly rejected it.
wratvcavres . . . TO μὴ προσελθεῖν---Β66 on c. 33, 8.
8, τῆς dve—that related in 6. 51. We must remember 54 that ἄνω means ‘on the higher ground away from the Harbour’ only in a relative sense. See crit. note on c. 2,4. The en- gagement referred to need not have been, and probably was not, wholly on Epipolae, but, as compared with the fight on the mole and in Lysimeleia, it was ἄνω. See onc. 51, 21. 14.
4. &ev—‘ by which.’
81]. 2. Aapwpas—cf. 11. 7, 1 λελυμένων λαμπρῶς τῶν 55 σπονδῶν.
kal—the A. army having been defeated already in the night- attack.
3. pév—there is no δὲ to answer this, but the antithesis is obvious.
5. ἐν παντὶ δὴ G0uplas—cf. on c. 2, 4 1. 22.
6. ὁ wapdXoyos—see Intr. p. xxxiii. The A. were as much
- astonished at their own failure as the rest of Greece had been
at their undertaking the expedition. Cf. c. 28, 3.
7. τῆς στρατείας ὁ p.—‘ regret about the expedition.’
§ 21..9. ὁμοιοτρόποι9---ἃ remarkable tribute to the advanced state of institutions in the Greek cities of Sicily when we re- member. Pericles’ panegyric of Athenian τρόποι.
10. vats—this consideration had rendered the acquisition of influence in Sicily very important at the beginning of the Pel. war. Sparta made great efforts to obtain a large fleet there.
11. trrovs—the Sicilian horses were of proverbial excellence.
peyéOn—the plur. is often found, though not in Thue. else- where ; cf. Herod. 11. 10; vir. 103.
12. ἐκ πολιτείας. . . peraBodfis—but Alcibiades had urged before the expedition that the cities of Sicily, being populated by motley crowds, ῥᾳδίας ἔχουσι τῶν πολιτειῶν τὰς μεταβολάς, vi. 17, 2. It was the invasion that united the various classes sufficiently to prevent revolutions.
a.—Classen makes this adverbial; Stahl makes it object of ἐπενεγκεῖν. Then Classen makes τὸ διάφορον object of ἐπενεγκεῖν ; whereas Stahl places comma after μεταβολῆς and makes τὸ δ. object of προσήγοντο. Translate, with Classen’s construction, ‘seeing that of the cities which they had attacked these were the only ones then having institutions similar to their own, governed by democracy and possessing fleets and horses and importance, and as they were unable either through
174 ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟῪ ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
a change in their constitution in any respect, or by a greatly superior force to make them feel the difference, by which they might have gained power over them, and as they failed oftener than they succeeded, they had before this been in difficulties, and now that they had been defeated by sea as well—which would never have occurred to them—they were in much greater despair.’
τὸ διάφορον — variously explained as ‘internal discord’ (Heilmann), ‘change of attitude’ (Classen), ‘the opposite
rty’ (Stahl). But the context is decidedly in favour of ‘the
ifference between the two sides,’ which in this case the A. had no means of bringing home to the enemy, either by causing a revolution in favour of democracy or by coercing them with superior force. For the sense cf.c. 75, 7. (If τὸ διάφορον is separated from ἐπενεγκεῖν with Stahl, ἐπενεγκεῖν τι becomes decidedly obscure, nor is its bearing on ἠπόρουν clear. One of the reasons of the ἀπορία was that the A. found they could not make the cities see a difference— or balance—in favour of Athens. )
18. αὐτοῖς --- δον ἐπενεγκεῖν, though πόλεσι precedes, the inhabitants being substituted for the cities. Stahl takes it with τὸ διάφορον.
ᾧ προσήγοντο ἄν---80. τὰς πόλεις, Cf. the advice of Nicias at the beginning of the expedition τῶν ἄλλων τινα πόλεων προσαγαγέσθαι, VI. 47. (Freeman says ‘the reference must be mainly or wholly to Syracuse.’ There is no ground for this assumption. ) ng vast : ΜΝ
κ παρασκενῆς πὸ K.—Just as ἐκ πολιτείας μεταβολῆς refers to eommething which the A. had not been able to do to ἐκ π. πολλῷ x, refers to something which they had not possessed : for, besides being under democracies, the cities had ‘ fleets and horses and greatness.’ Hence δημοκρατουμέναις corresponds with ἐκ πολιτείας μεταβολῆς, and καὶ vais etc. with ἐκ π. πολλῷ κρείσσονος. Thuc. is referring to the whole course of the ex- pedition from the start. For the facts alluded to, compare (a) what Hermocrates is made to say before the A. landed—ov πλείους τῶν ἐνοικούντων καὶ ἀστυγειτόνων ἔρχονται, πάντα yap ὑπὸ δέους ξυνίσταται, vi. 88, (b) what Athenagoras is made to say—iyyooua .. . τὴν ἡμετέραν πόλιν αὐτὴν τῆς viv στρατιᾶς ... καὶ εἰ δὶς τοσαύτη ἔλθοι, πολὺ κρείσσω εἶναι, V1. 37, (c) what Thuc. says above in c. 28 of the relative size of Syracuse and Athens.
14, σφαλλόμενοι δὲ τὰ wrelo—cf. 11. 65, 12 σφαλέντες ἐν Σικελίᾳ ἄλλῃ παρασκενῇ. He is thinking of the turn which the siege had taken. Cf. 1. 69, 5.
. 15. τά τε πρὸ atrav—i.e. before the sea-fight,—the sense of
NOTES 175
αὐτὰ being as often supplied from the context. (The brevity of this passage renders it very obscure. The sense of κρείσ- govos and πλείω is, I believe, uncertain. κρείσσονος might mean ‘larger than that brought by Demosthenes and Eury- medon’; πλείω might imply ‘since the arrival of Demosth. and Eur.’ The above explanation is only offered as an approximation to the probable meaning. )
17. padAAov—sec. ἠπόρουν.
81]. 2. &8es—even past the A. station.
; 8. διενοοῦντο KAyjoav—‘were resolved that they would close.’
§ 21. 6. περὶ τοῦ... σωθῆναι. . . τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν ---Ἰἰκὸ ἀγών, κίνδυνος περὶ with noun.
8. ἐκείνουφ---ραὶπ notice this use οὗ ἐκεῖνος.
9. ἀπό τε τῶν παρόντων --- “1 consequence of the present circumstances.’ _
13. καλὸν σφίσιν «.7.A.—‘ the success would appear to the Greeks glorious to them.’ There is a metaphor here from the Olympic games. és τοὺς Ἕλληνας is used with φανεῖσθαι just as it is with λέγειν when large bodies are addressed. e Greeks are here spectators of the contest.
16. ἐλευθεροῦσθαι.---ἰΠ6 pres. is here used in a vivid sense for the future.
οὐ γὰρ ér.—this did not prove to be the case at once. Cf. 11. 65, 12 ὅμως δέκα ἔτη ἀντεῖχον.
19. καὶ αὐτοὶ---οο-οτάϊπαΐο with τούς τε γὰρ 1. 15.
atrév—neut., used as inc. 55, 2]. 15.
§ 31. 21. καὶ ἦν St—cf. 11. 36 καὶ πρέπον δὲ dua. In this idiom δὲ is the connecting particle, while καὶ emphasises the statement. This is a remark added by Thuc. on his own account. ᾿
22. οὐχὶ ᾿Αθηναίων --- it was not the A. only that they were going to conquer, but many of their allies as well, and not by themselves either, but in compan with those who had come to their aid—having taken the lead with . . . and having put forward their city in the struggle to take the post of danger and having made a great advance with the fleet.
23. wepreylyvovro—the imperf. of γίγνομαι and its compounds is frequently thus used when something about to happen is anticipated. So with δίδωμε and compounds. Cf. Andoc. I. φονεὺς ἐγιγνόμην τοῦ warpés=‘I was near becoming my father’s murderer.’ ᾿
τῶν ἄλλων πολλῶν ξυμμάχων---ἴΠ0} would be defeating as well their own enemies in Sicily.
24, οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὶ at pévor—Kriiger objects that it would detract from the glory of ὅσ, to say that they won with the help of
56
57
176 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
others ; but Thuc. here states with exactness the nature of the success, and is not concerned either to enhance or to detract from it. Their distinction was (a) to have fought side by side with Corinth and Sparta, (δ) that Syr. had borne the brunt of the struggle, (c) that thus it had been the chief instrument in destroying the A. empire. ‘It was Syracuse, that day the equal yoke-fellow of Cor. and of Sparta, going forth at the head of a crowd of allies, but with Syr. herself the centre and object of the strife, that was called on to strike the blow.’ Freeman.
27. ἐμπαρασχόντες ---ἰ.6. παρασχόντες ἐν τῷ ἀγῶνι. ἐν in compounds has often an adverbial force ; as in 11. 44, 1 ἐνευ- δαιμονῆσαι = εὐδαιμονῆσαι ἐν τῷ βίῳ.
προκινδυνεῦσαί re—the τε, as Herbst rightly says, joins προκόψαντες with ἐμπαρασχόντες, and προκινψδυνεῦσαι is in this order because it is an integral part of the phrase.
28. τοῦ ναντικοῦ. . . mpoxdWavres— having opened the way for the navy, by shewing that the A. were not invincible by sea. Cf. Eur. Hippol. 23; Xen. Hipparch. 6, 5.
8 41. 29. éri—‘ to,’ whether as friends or as enemies.
31. <oXenotvros>—without some such word we should have to supply ξυνελθόντος, but the ellipse is very awkward, and, as Stah! says, the sense ad urbem convenire is absurd.
81]. 1. ἐπὶ 2. καὶ περὶ 2.—belongs to ἐπολέμησαν, which is ingressive, = ‘ went to war.’
4. ἐπὶ Zvpaxotcais—Holden retains the MSS. ἐπὶ Zupa- κούσας, and takes it with ἐλθόντες ; but (1) the order is against this ; (2) ἐπὶ Συρακούσας then impedes the progress of the sentence, since ἐπὶ Σικελίαν τε καὶ περὶ 2. is supplied with ἐλθόντες (Herbst agrees with Holden ; and he thinks that the form of the sentence is improved).
5. οὐ κατὰ δίκην «.t.A.—‘ joining one another not so much from a sense of right . . ., but rather as circumstances united the several states either through interest or on compulsion.’
τι paddov—often used together, or in the form μᾶλλόν τι. It is stronger than μᾶλλον. μᾶλλον... ἀλλὰ for μᾶλλον... 4; only found after a neg., gives greater emphasis to the second clause.
6. κατὰ Evyyévecav—it will be seen in § 2 fol. that very few of the allies of either side took their side in the war from this motive.
μετ᾽ ἀλλήλων ordvres—the usual construction ; but ἵστασθαι πρός Twa is also found.
7. ὡς ἕκαστοι. . . Exyxov—cf. c. 2, 1 ὡς εἶχον τάχους.
τῆς ξυντυχίας --- ‘circumstances’ which result in decisive action. Here these circumstances are themselves the result of
NOTES 177
interest or necessity. Hence the ‘circumstances’ are feelings that prompt the different states to unite. Cf. 1. 33, 3. (No doubt this is what Classen meant by rendering ws τῆς ξ. ἔσχον ‘as they came into a closer relationship.’)
§ 21. 10. ᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν x.7.A.—chiasmus again.
12. avrots—after τῇ αὐτῇ.
18. &ru—with νομέμοις.
ΔΛήμνιοι---[ῃθ allies of Athens are enumerated thus: (1) Colonists § 2; (2) Euboea § 4; (3) Cylades § 4; (4) Asia Minor 88 4-6; (5) the islands off north-west coast of Greece § 7 : (6) Peloponnesians and μισθοφόροι §§ 8-10; (7) allies in Italy and Sicily § 11. Lemnos and Imbros were secured for Athenian cleruchs by Miltiades; and these two with Scyros were re- garded as very peculiarly the possessions of the A. in the north.
14. of τότε Αἴγιναν exov—i.c. the A. cleruchs placed there in 431 B.c., when the Aeginetans were expelled by A., and settled by Sparta in Thyrea, the border-land between Argolis and Laconia.
15. ‘Eo-rvatfis—taken by A. for cleruchs after the reduction of Euboea by Pericles in 445.
16. ἄποινοι---ἰ, 6. the κληροῦχοι had by now quite supplanted the older population and taken its name, and were regarded as owners, like the possessores.
eorparevoay—ingressive, ‘took the field with them.’
8 381.17. of μὲν twhxoo.—Stahl notes that there are two classes of these perpetual and subject allies, viz. (1) ὑπήκοοι καὶ φόρου ὑποτελεῖς, (2) ὑπήκοοι of ναυτικὸν παρεχόμενοι or αὐτόνομοι, enjoying their own constitution ; viz. Methymna, Chios. These are both distinct from of ἀπὸ ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοι, like Corcyra, Zacynthus, Cephallenia.
§ 41.19. ὑπηκόων καὶ φόρον $.—subdivided into those from (1) Euboea, (2) vijcoc=the Cyclades, (3) Ionia. In the latter Chios is included, but Thuc. adds an explanation that it was not ὑποτελής.
*Eperpifis καὶ Χαλκιδῆς.-- ἰ6 two most important towns of Euboea ; in early times they were rivals. Chalcis is still the capital of the island, but Eretria is now quite insignificant.
21. vfjrwv—often used in a restricted sense for the Cyclades. Cf. 1. 18, 6; 11. 104, 2.
Keto.— cf. Herod. virr. 46 Κήιοι ἔθνος ἐὸν ᾿Ιωνικὸν ἀπὸ ᾿Αθηνέων.
28. robrev—asyndeton with demonstr., as Herod. 1x. 26 with τότε. ᾿ 25. τὸ πλεῖστον. . . πάντες --- ‘all being Ionians in the main.” There were some Dryopians among the Styrians, and in the Cyclades there were Carians,
N
178 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
ἀπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων --- there was an unfounded tradition that Chalcis and Eretria were founded by Athens. As for Ionia and the Cyclades, cf. 1.12 Ἴωνας μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ νησιωτῶν τοὺς πολλοὺς ᾧκισαν.
26. Καρνστίων --- Herod. says that the Dryopians had originally fived in Doris and had been driven out through the early migrations.
27. Spws— with Ἴωνές ye. Though they served under obligation, yet it was natural for them to be on the side of A.
§ 51. 29. Mn@vpvato.—the only Lesbians who retained their autonomy after the revolt of 428. The Aeolians colonised six places in Lesbos.
30. Altvio. — at the mouth of the Hebrus, colonised by Aeolians from Mytilene.
31. Βοιωτοῖς --- the Aeolian colonisation proceeded from Thessaly and Boeotia.
33. καὶ dvricpvs—‘ though outright.’ The Plataeans meant are those who escaped at the time of the siege. Athens had given Scione to them for a home.
§ 6 1. 34. 'Ῥόδιοι-- Rhodes was a tripolis, and very early acquired great wealth by its trade, and remained rich until debased by Rome.
Kv@fpro.—seized by Nicias in 424. Athens had retained Cythera contrary to the terms of his peace.
_ § 71. 41. τῶν περὶ Πελοπόννησον ---ΤΘρΊ]Δ expression for the N.W. islands. Cf. vi. 85 νησιώτας ὄντας. . . ἐν χωρίοις ἐπικαίροις περὶ τὴν II. ; Isocr. xv. 108 τίς οὐκ olde Κόρκυραν ἐν ἐπικαιροτάτῳ καὶ κάλλιστα κειμένην τῶν περὶ II. ;
42. Κεφ. μὲν... adr. μέν, κατὰ δὲ. . . Kep. δὲ --- the extremes and the means dre contrasted, as usually with this double use of μὲν. . . δέ. For the islands see on 6. 31, 21. 8.
48. κατὰ δὲ τὸ v.—‘ as islanders.’
μᾶλλον-- [0 edd. supply ἢ οἱ ἠπειρῶται, following Aemilius Portus. It is not easy to detect hereabouts any antithesis between the condition of the islanders and mainlanders. Thuc. means μᾶλλον ἢ ἑκόντες. Freeman says ‘the practical effect of a formally equal alliance between a stronger and a weaker power is well set forth.’ (My explanation of μᾶλλον is strongly supported by οὐχ ἧσσον sc. ἢ ἀνάγκῃ below.)
45. ζορίνθιοι σαφῶς — ‘actually Corinthians.’ In 492 Corcyra had helped Syracuse against Hippocrates of Gela, and once again helped her in the days of Timoleon.
47. Evyyevets—Corinth being the mother-city of both.
48. ἐκ τοῦ ebmperots—the obligation under which Corcyra stood to Athens made ἃ πρόφασις εὐπρεπὴς for sinking her obligation to respect her mother-city.
NOTES 179
49, ewovro—the simple verb following the compound of 1. 44 is idiomatic.
§ 8]. 49. of Μεσσήνιοι viv «.—i.e. not the inhabitants of Messenia or of Messana in Sicily, but of ἐκ N. καὶ ἐκ II., ‘those whom we in our day call Messenians.’ They were descended mostly from of παλαιοὶ Μεσσήνιοι 1. 101 f. (Stahl says that Thuc. alludes to the fact that some of them were really helots ; but it is more likely that he alludes to their change of home at the end of the third Messenian war and in 425 B.c.)
50. viv—means the time at which he writes, From τότε it looks as if Pylus was then no longer in the hands of the A. : if so this sentence was written after A. lost Pylus in 409 B.c.
52. Μεγαρέων vyddes—expelled in the party struggle of 424 8.0., when Brasidas saved Megara from falling into the hands of A.
ὅ8. Σελινουντίοις---3. was a colony from Hyblaean Megara.
ἐνμφορὰν- i. their exile. Cf. calamitosus.
. 55. 4$yn—‘ from this point,’ as in 11. 96, ὃ.
7 apydor—the alliance with A. had been renewed in June 417 B.C.
57. ἔχθρας --- Argos, long the rival of Sparta, had been humbled by her in 495 B.c.
παραντίκα ἕκαστοι ἰδίας &.—generally understood to mean that they were mercenaries; but the plur. ἕκαστοι is against this. Possibly Haacke rightly refers to Spartan and anti-Spartan factions in Argos.
60. ᾿Αρκάδων --- already heard of as mercenaries in the Persian wars. Herod. VIII. 26.
atel—‘at any time.’
62. οὐδὲν ἧσσον---ἰ.6. though they belonged to the same
65. Κρησὶ... Evyxrlcavras—the same change as in 6. 40, ἷ
67. μετὰ μισθοῦ ἐλθεῖν---οὗ, Isocr. xvil. 46 μετὰ ποίας ἂν ἐλπίδος ἦλθον ἐπὶ τοῦτον ;
8 10]. 69. Δημοσθένους --οὈ͵θοῦίνο. They remembered the victory which they had won in 426 under his lead. See on ce. 16,11. 12.
etvo(a—most of the Acarnanians had been allies of A. since 480. See onc. 31, 21. 11.
§ 11]. 71. «éAr@—is sometimes omitted with ὁ Ἰόνιος.
Θούριοι καὶ M.—see c. 33, 5.
72. ἐν τοιαύταις «.7.A.—‘ who, when the Athenians came, had been reduced to such straits by a revolution.’ With ἐν ἀνάγκαις cf. ἀνάγκαις raicd’ ἐνέζευγμαι Aesch. P. V. 109. τοιαύταις means ‘such as induced them to join the A.’ τότε
180 BOYKYAIAOY BYTTPA®PH? Z
refers to c. 33, 5, where we found that Thurii had to be per- suaded, while Metapontum in addition had passed through a crisis (καιροί). Now we find that Thurii also had suffered in the same way. (τοιαύταις was first explained thus by Bauer. It is obscure. Did Thuc. write ταῖς αὐταῖς ; or did he mean by τοιαύταις that the στασιωτικοὶ καιροὶ of Thurii ‘were such as I have described in the case of Metapontum’ ?)
73. kareAnppévor—deprehensi, sc. ὑπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων.
74. Νάξιοι καὶ K.—c. 14, 2.
75. ’Hyeorato.—Segesta, as its coins and the Romans call it, was chief city of the Elymians, who were thought to be Trojans. It was perpetually at war with Selinus. Life was difficult in the W. corner of Sicily owing to the constant rivalry of the Carthaginians and the Greeks there. In 409 Segesta joined Carthage in an attack on Selinus which destroyed for ever the greatness of that city.
οἵπερ ἐπηγάγοντο ---ἰὐ is indicative of the falling off of high sentiment at Athens that she had consented to aid the barbarian against a Greek town.
76. Σικελῶν τὸ πλέον ---ἰ is easy to see why the majority of the Sicels joined A. They did so early in the campaign of 414, about June, when the 2nd Syracusan counter- wall had failed to check the A. circumvallation and the besieging fleet had command. of the Great Harbour, when Syr. was in terror and peace was being discussed there. See also on 6, 1, 4. The Sicels hoped to use Athens as a means for diminishing Greek influence in Sicily, and ever since A. had first interfered in Sicily, they had shown a strong tendency to support her. °
ρσηνῶν --οἴ, c. 53, 2.
78. τοσάδε. . . %@vy—it must have been very hard to get
all these different elements to work with a common will. 58 §11. 1. Καμαριναῖοι---866 on c. 33, 1, as also for Γελῷοι.
8. ’Axpayayrlyvev—Girgenti, ‘the fairest of mortal cities’ (Pind. Pyth. x11. 1), remained neutral throughout. Cf. on c. 82, 1. The life of Empedocles of Acragas, 484-424, about covers the greatest period in the history of Sicilian art.
ἐν τῷ ἐπ᾿ ἐκεῖνα = μετ᾽ αὐτοὺς above.
§ 21. 4. οἵδε pév—here ὅδε refers to what precedes. This is very rare in prose except in Herod. and Thuc. Cf. c. 58, 2. So with τοσόσδε in c. 57, 11; 58, 8; 59,1; 78, 1.
6. ‘Ipepator—see on ὁ. 1, 11. 11.
7. pévot—t.e, they are the only Greeks there.
8. otxofo.w—used elsewhere in proximity to νέμεσθαι. These small things show how ancient authors, like modern ones, un- consciously have their mannerisms.
NOTES" 181
§ 3 1. 9. €vy—of small communities, but referring to difference of origin. ν
11. Σικελοὶ μόνοι--πο Elymians, Sicans, or Phoenicians joined Syr.
14. νεοδαμώδεις --- see on c. 19, 3. With the helots they numbered 600 hoplites ; Eccritus, a Spartan, had been sent in command of them, but he must have returned.
17. pévor—the C. alone sent both ships and infantry. The Leucadians and Ambraciots sent ships only.
Δευκάδιοι kal’ A.—were allies of Sparta. Corinth was their mother-city.
20. &vayxacrol—see on c. 19, 41. 88, and Index s.v.
§ 41. 21. wpds—‘ in comparison with.’
23. peyadas—not that they were greater than Corinth and Sparta, but because their cities were large they needed less support from outside.
25. ἄλλος Sprros—light-armed troops. ὅμιλος is confined to poetry, Herod., Thuc., and late authors. Thuc. uses it often.
§11. 3. οὐκέτι οὐδὲν «.7.A.—the object of this emphatic 59 statement is to show that now the deciding struggle—the ἀγὼν péytoros—was at hand.
§ 21. 4. δ᾽ obv—resumes from c. 56.
5. καλὸν ἀγώνισμα... εἶναι--οἴ, c. 56, 2; 86.
6. éri—‘ as a consequence of.’
7. ἑλεῖν τε τὸ o.—‘ to capture the whole of that vast army, στρατόπεδον being the besieging force wherever it was stationed.
9. μηδὲ καθ᾽ Erepa = κατὰ μηδέτερα.
8 31. 10. ἔκλῃον --- apparently they left a narrow opening (dtéxwdouvs) which was guarded by chains.
14, #v—‘ in case,’ like ef πως, εἰ dpa.
15. ὀλίγον οὐδὲν x.7.A.—cf. 11. 8 ὀλίγον ἐπενόουν οὐδὲν ἀμφό- repo; Aristoph. Hg. 387 μηδὲν ὀλίγον ποίει. νῦν γὰρ ἔχεται μέσος ; Plut. Demetr. 48 μικρὸν οὐδὲν ἔτι ἐφρόνουν.
811. 2. τὴν ἄλλην διάνοιαν---΄ their ulterior purpose.’ 60
BovAevréa—the plur. of the verbal replacing the sing. is esp. common in Thuc.
§ 21. 4. ταξίαρχου---ποὐ usually present at the council.
6. ἐκπλευσόμενοι---ἰ.6. before the eclipse.
7. €e\Aov—here introduces Oratio Obliqua.
9. τὰ dvw—Epipolae was to be abandoned. There is nothing to show that they had quitted it before this, as Arnold thought.
10. διατειχίσματι. Ὁγ fencing round a space at the end of the double wall.
14. τοῦ &AXAov—those who were not needed to guard the narrow space,
182 OBOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
22. dvrirfer8ar— ‘gain’; the word implies secure pos- session. So with ἀντίληψις, seizure, grip, objection.
83}. 23. ὡς... xal—see onc. 43, 1
26. καὶ éracodv—with ἐπιτήδειος.
ἡλικίας peréxov—i.c. not altogether ἐν τῷ ἀχρείῳ τῆς ἡλικίας (11. 44, 4), and so fit for military service. This must mean that non-combatants were to be used, for none of the regular troops could have been otherwise than 7. μετέχων.
érirfSecos—opposite of ἀχρεῖος or ἄχρηστος, in a military sense.
§ 41. 27. nal—‘ and so.’
31. ἐξ dvayxalov—‘in desperate straits’; best taken alone as an adverbial phrase. (Some edd. make dy. fem. agreeing with διανοίας, but rocadrys is then very awkward.) Adverbial phrases with ἐκ are very common.
τοιαύτης--80. ἐκ, ‘from the nature of their plan,’ 1.6. con- sidering the difficulties that it involved.
8 δ]. 35. kparnOAvar—alluding to cc. 52-3.
61 811. 2. wv—see 6. 4, 3.
ὁ μὲν dyov—‘in the coming struggle every one of us will be fighting for country and for life just as much as the enemy. If we win this battle at sea, every individual may see again his own home, wherever it may be.’ There is a different nuance in πατρίδος as applied to the A. and the Syr. For the use of τῳ cf. Eur. Heraclid. 826 καὶ τῇ τεκούσῃ νῦν τιν᾽ ἀρκέσαι
χρεών.
§ 21. 8. ἀθυμεῖν δὲ «.7.A.—‘ but we must not despair, nor must we allow ourselves to feel like raw recruits, for whom a defeat in their first battle fills all the future with foreboding of similar misfortunes.’ τὴν ἐλπίδα is defined by rod φόβου as ‘an expectation that falls in the sphere of fear.’ Cf. Plat. Laws p. 644 ο κοινὸν μὲν ὄνομα ἐλπίς, ἴδιον δὲ φόβος μὲν ἡ πρὸ λύπης ἐλπίς, θάρρος δὲ ἡ πρὸ τοῦ ἐναντίου. ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς means the reverses they have met with.
881]. 18, ἀλλ᾽ ὅσοι τε--- πο ; all of you who are A., with the experience of many wars, all of you who are allies, our constant companions in arms, remember how calculation is baffled in war, and, in hopes that fortune may yet be with us, and resolved, as you see your army before you, to renew the struggle in a manner worthy of your numbers, prepare.’
. eore—occasionally the 3rd person is found in such rel, clauses; 6.0. Andoc. 1, 46 ὁπόσοι ὑμῶν παρῆσαν, ἀναμιμνή- σκεσθε; Lys. 12, 97. So in Latin poets, as Ovid Trist. u1. 4, 75 et qua quisque potest aliqua mala nostra levate. See also on ὁ, 64, 2
16. τῶν ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις rapaddyov—Thuc. insists on the
NOTES 183
uncertainty, the inconsequence, of war so often because he regards history, under normal conditions, as effect following ascertainable causes. He introduced into history the notion of aw.
17. τὸ τῆς réxns— denoting a power acting by some in- scrutable method. Cf. Eur. Ale. 785 τὸ τῆς τύχης ἀφανὲς ol προβήσεται. τὰ THs τύχης are the manifestations of this power.
κἂν μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν... oriva—ef. c. 77, 3 ἱκανὰ yap τοῖς πολεμίοις ηὐτύχηται. Other statements by Nicias of a like nature, show- ing how firmly he believed in the distribution during life of rewards and punishments, are found in v. 16,1; vr. 11, 6; 28, 3. It is the idea that meets us in Aeschylus and Herodotus.
18. dvapayovpevor—generally with an accus., as Plato Hip. Maj. p. 286 D ἰέναι πάλιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐρωτήσαντα, ἀναμαχούμενος τὸν λόγον.
19. ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ---αἰϊγαοϊοα into the rel. clause, like ἕκαστος.
81}. 1. “A δὲ ἀρωγὰ «.7.A.—‘we on our side have dia- 62 cussed with the pilots and have provided all the means in our power which we found would help us in the narrow space of the harbour against the difficulties that gave us trouble before, namely the crowding of the vessels and the enemy’s men on
eck.’
ér\—describes the circumstances, as in 11. 17 wpopde μὴ ἐπ᾽ ἀγαθῷ ποτε αὐτὸ κατοικισθησόμενον.
ὅ. wapaokeviy—force. For the fact see c. 40, 5.
ols—neut., referring to ὄχλος and παρασκευή.
6. ἐκ τῶν rapévrev—cf. c. 77, 1.
§ 21. 8. καὶ γὰρ τοξόται «.r.A.—‘ there will be many archers and javelin men on board and very many whom in a battle out at sea we should not have thought of using, since the overweighting of the ships would impede our skill; but here being forced to fight a land battle aboard ship, we shall find the plan convenient.’
11. διὰ τὸ βλάπτειν Av—frequent use. of the infin. with art.. is a mark of the speeches and the higher style.
14. xpécgopa—the rel. ᾧ is lost sight of. Cf. Herod. rx. 21 τῇ te ἐπιμαχώτατον ἦν. . . καὶ πρόσοδος μάλιστα ταύτῃ ἐγίνετο. For the plur. cf. c. 48, 2.
§31. 14. ηὔρηται δ᾽ ἡμῖν «.r.A.—‘we have worked out all the plans needed on our side in the construction of our vessels, and to meet the thick beams on the enemy’s prows which gave us most trouble, we have arranged iron grapnels, which when thrown at them will prevent any ship that has struck us from backing, if the marines work well afterwards.’ ηὕρηται ἡμῖν, like ἡτοίμασται above, is another example of the preference for the impers. pass. in Gk.
184 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
16. waxtryras—the plur. of the abstract used distributively, as also ἐπιβολαί. ᾧπερ is like ἐν @ referring to a preceding clause.
18. τῆς προσπεσούσης. “ἑκάστης π᾿ ; οἷ, ο. 65, 2 τῆς νεώς.
19. τὰ ἐπὶ robrous—‘ what follows,’ 1.6. boarding the ships. Cf. Aristoph. Eccles. 82 τἀπὲ τούτοις δράσομεν.
8 41. 19. ἐς τοῦτο γὰρ «.t.A.—‘in fact we have, as I said, been forced into fighting.’ For és τοῦτο. . . ὥστε cf. c. 48, 3.
23. ὅσον ἂν... ἐπέχῃ --- “80 much as our troops will occupy.’ .
63 §11.1. ὧν χρὴ «.r.A.—‘Bear this in mind, and fight to the end with all your strength ; and do not be driven ashore, but when two ships strike, do not let them drive you off until you have cleared the heavy troops from the enemy’s deck.’
4, πρότερον... 4. . . ἀπαράξητε--πρότερον .. . ἢ occasion- ally stands for πρότερον. . . πρὶν with subj., indic. or infin. in Herod. and Thuc., but very rarely in other authors, as Demosth. 31, 12 (early speech) πρότερον τοὺς ὅρους ἔστησεν ἣ ἐκεῖνον τὴν δίκην ὀφλεῖν. The subj. without ἂν in temporal sentences—after πρὶν, πρὶν ἢ, uéxpt—is also a mark of early prose.
6. ε--οὗ c. 6, 81]. 21.
§ 21. 6. καὶ ταῦτα «.7.A.—‘I am now addressing not so much the sailors as the soldiers, as it is on the men on deck that this duty mainly falls: and at present we have still the advantage of them in most points with our infantry.’ The last clause betrays the speaker’s want of confidence.
8 83}. 11. rots δὲ ναύταις - Sailors, I urge, nay more, I entreat you, not to be in any way too overcome by your mis- fortunes; you have now better arrangements above, and a greater number of ships. Think, I beg you, how well worth preserving is the pleasant feeling that, being thought Athenians so long even if you are not so, by your knowledge of our language and your imitation of our institutions you were admired in Greece, and—as far as advantages go—had as great a share as we in our empire, while, in the matter of respect from our subjects and immunity from wrong, you had much more than we.’ This § appears to start with the 3rd pers., which is changed for the 2nd in ἐθαυμάζεσθε (1. 18); but the Gk. orators habitually mingle statements about people with direct address to them in this way.
12. rQSe—i.¢. ἐν τῷ περαινεῖν.
15. τὴν ἡδονὴν ---[Π 6 pleasure which he describes in the rel. clause following.
16. ot—the antecedent, ὑμῖν, is omitted. The sentence ἀξία ἐστὶν ἡ ἡδονὴ διασώσασθαι οἷ... ἐθαυμάζεσθε is constructed like τὸ δ᾽ εὐτυχές, of ἂν. . . λάχωσιν in 11. 44, 1.
NOTES 185
᾿Αθηναῖοι νομιζόμενοι --- he means the ξένοι and μέτοικοι serving as γαῦται ; at the same time he lays stress on the in- fluence of the Athenian ὄχλος vaurixés. So in [Xen.] Ath. Pol. I. 2 οἱ κυβερνῆται καὶ ol κελευσταὶ καὶ . . . οἱ πρῳρᾶται καὶ οἱ νανπηγοί, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ τὴν δύναμιν περιτιθέντες τῇ πόλει πολὺ μᾶλλον ἣ οἱ ὁπλῖται καὶ οἱ γενναῖοι καὶ οἱ χρηστοί. There was promotion from the lowest position as a rower to the highest as κυβερνήτης. There would be few true-born Athenians amongst the ναῦται now owing to the disasters in Sicily. Prob. many θῆτες, who ordinarily served as sailors, were employed as hoplites.
18. τῇ erortpy—causal with θαυμάζω, as Iv. 85, 3; with φοβοῦμαι I1. 89, 6.
τῶν τρόπων ---ἰῃδ private habits as contrasted with the πολιτεία, the public institutions, of Athens. The A. prided themselves both on their πολιτεία and on their τρόποι.
ἐθαυμάζεσθε kara τὴν ‘EAAdSa—Thuc., owing to his own exile and his travels, would have good reason to know the fact and to appreciate the value of the ἡδονή. 9
20. ἔς τε τὸ φοβερὸν τοῖς drynxdow—some of the μέτοικοι whom N. is supposed to be addressing must have been ὃν origin ὑπήκοοι, so that Thuc. prob. means that those of them who had served in the A. fleet were regarded with awe in their own cities. φοβερὸν = ‘causing fear’; cf. onc. 42, 3.
22. πολὺ wAetov—chiasmus with οὐκ ἔλασσον. ‘This passage, besides containing an exaggeration (see crit. note), seems rather lacking both in taste and in tact, even when we remember that most of the doubtful supporters of A. had deserted. But it must be remembered that none of the speeches in Thuc., and least of all the military harangues, could possibly have been delivered. See Appendix I.
§ 41. 22. ὥστε κοινωνοὶ «.r.A.—‘ with you alone we freely share our empire ; it is but just that you should not betray it now ; rather, filled with scorn of the Corinthians whom you have often defeated and of the Sicilian Greeks, not one of whom even dared to face us so long as our fleet was at its best, repel them, and show that in spite of sickness and disaster your science is superior to another’s confidence while succeed- ing.
23. &evOépes—always understood to mean ‘while retaining your freedom’ and compared with vi. 85, 2 ἐλευθέρως ξυμμα- χοῦντες. It implies this too; but it is meant as an allusion to the generous spirit in which A. had treated them. Cf. 11. 37, 2 ἐλευθέρως τὰ πρὸς τὸ κοινὸν πολιτεύομεν.
24. Karadpoviicavres—paronomasia with preceding word. The aor. is ingressive.
186 OOYKYAIAOY BYTTPAPHS Z
27. ἤκμαζε τὸ vavrixdv—the decline of the naval power of Athens meant the decline of her empire over the imagination of Greece.
30. érépas—for ἑτέρων, but preferred so as to correspond with ὑμετέρα.
εὐτυχούσης — contrasted with καὶ per’ ἀσθενείας καὶ ἕ, Observe this very common use of μετὰ with abstract nouns.
64 81]. 1. τούς τε A. «.7.A.—‘ Those of you who are A. I once again remind that you have at home no ships in the docks like these, no men fit for service, and that in the event of any other issue than victory, your enemies here will im- mediately sail thither, and our friends who are left there will not be strong enough to repel our enemies on the spot together with the invaders. And so, while you will immediately be at the mercy of Syr.—and you know yourselves the purpose you had in attacking them—your countrymen will be at the mercy of Sparta.’ |
δ. οὔτε γαῦς--αὖῷ the beginning of the Pel. war, the A. had 300 ships ready, and shortly afterwards ἃ reserve fleet of 100 ships was created. The normal strength of the fleet during the war was over 300.
4. hAulav—concrete, like νεότης, and juventus. The abstract term represents the young men as a power in the state.
5. τι ἄλλο ἢ τὸ Kparetyv—Euphemism in alluding to defeat is very common, and Gk. authors habitually avoid close re- ference to the scene of a disaster.
6. ἐπ᾽ éxeiva—alluding, like ἐκεῖ, to Athens; both words were often so used by persons abroad.
§ 21.11. “Ὥστε «.7.A. — ‘Therefore, in this one struggle having to defend both yourselves and them, stand firm now, if ever, and reflect each and all that you who are now to embark are also to the Athenians infantry and ships and all that remains of the state, and the great name of Athens. In defence of these, if any man excel in skill or courage, let him show them now; he could not find a better chance to display them for his own benefit and for the safety of all.’ In this epilogue the end proposed by the speaker (τὸ τέλος Arist. Rhet. B. 19, 26 ; τελικὸν κεφάλαιον Hermogenes calls it) is τὸ συμφέρον, having before been τὸ καλόν. These two topics (τόποι) are ex- tremely common in military harangues. ͵ ὑπὲρ dpdorépwy—alluding to of μὲν in 1. 9 and οἱ δ᾽ in
10.
12. καθεστῶτες --- with ἐν as in Herod. vir. 139, but far commoner with és. Cf. παρεστάναι ἐν τῇ γνώμῃ Andoc. I. 24.
18. καθ᾽ ἑκάστους re καὶ €.—the mass is to act as a whole, and yet each individual is to feel that the safety of the mass
NOTES 187
rests with him. It is again brought out below in αὐτός τε αὑτῷ . .. καὶ rots ξύμπασι.
14, ὑμῶν... eot—with ‘ partitive’ gen. 1st or 2nd person, the verb is generally in the 3rd pers.
16. καὶ vijes—the statement οἱ ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ νῆες εἰσί is not very sane. Apparently Thuc. has in mind that the ships which are to take part and which cannot be replaced will not manceuvre—tvaykdopela πεζομαχεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν vewy—so that the A. would be depending much less than usual on their ships and much more on their men. A ship when manned was to the Gks. a living thing. Here the ships will be manned, and yet will be inert. Before condemning the words right out we must notice the train of thought that has led Thuc. to write them. (The speech from c. 63, 3 to the end is not a good example of composition, See Appendix I.)
17, τὸ μέγα Svopa-—Isocr. 6 § 110 μὴ καταισχυνθῆναι τὸ τῆς Σπάρτης ὄνομα.
18. περὶ év—prob. neuter, applying to πεζοὶ καὶ νῆες, etc.
προφέρει-Ξ- προέχει, but used so only by Herod., Thuc., and
oets. P 81]. 4. παρῆν μὲν x.7.A.—‘as they saw the arrangements 65 actually being made, could see that the A. intended to fight.’
7. 4 ἐπιβολὴ---“ the device for flinging.’
§ 21. 9. ὡς &aora—this use of ἑκάτερος and ἕκαστος with ws and without a verb, after appearing in Herod. and Thuc., first reappears in Aristotle.
10. ἐπὶ woAd—as often, this replaces an accus. of the object.
11. ὅπως ἂν ἀπολισθάνοι ---ὅπως ἂν appears with opt. in final clauses in Homer, Herod., only here in Thuc., and four times in Xen., and in Aesch. 4g. 364.
811. 1. “Ort μὲν καλὰ «.7.A.—‘ That our past exploits have 66 been glorious, that it is a glorious future for which we are about to fight, most of you, we think, know: otherwise you would not have devoted yourselves with such enthusiasm to your task. But if any man has not so clear a perception of this as he should have, we will make it plain.’ αὐτῶν = τῶν προειργασμένων καὶ τῶν μελλόντων.
§ 21.7. ᾿Αθηναίους γὰρ x.r.A.—‘ the A., who came to this country intending first to enslave S. and then, if they succeeded, the Pel. as well and the rest of Greece—the A. who possess an empire at present the largest of all that belong or ever have belonged to Greeks, you, the first to withstand their navy that gave them all their power, have already defeated in several battles by sea and are probably going to defeat again now.’ Observe the construction of this admirable sentence, and esp. the order.
67
188 COYKYAIAOY ZYITPA®PHS Z
10. ἔπειτ᾽ ---88 καὶ follows, we should perhaps read ἔπειτα δέ with B, since ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ is the regular formula.
14. τῷ vavrixg—for the dat. after ὑφίστασθαι see L. and S.
This is the only instance in Thuc., since in 11. 61, 4, which edd. compare, ξυμφορὰς τὰς μεγίστας ὑφίστασθαι is the true reading. § 3 ἵ 16. ἄνδρες γὰρ «.7.A.—‘ for when men are humbled in that wherein they claim to excel, what remains of their self- respect is more thoroughly weakened than if they had not thought to excel (sc. προύχειν) from the first, and while re- ceiving a check from the unexpected outcome of their boast, they give way even more than their real strength necessitates. This we may suppose to be the case with the A. now.’
18. αὐτὸ éavrob—a rhetorical device for exhibiting the change in the condition of a thing, which none the less retains its identity.
19. τῷ παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα τοῦ atx fparos—if taken together, with Classen and Bohme, this balances rapa ἰσχὺν τῆς δυνάμεως better than if τοῦ αὐχήματος is put with σφαλλόμενοι, and τῷ wap’ ἐλπίδα (= unexpectedly) taken alone, with Bloomfield, Arnold, and Stahl. See Appendix IT.
21. ὃ viv—‘the speaker shows that while they themselves might well anticipate victory, their enemies will look forward to nothing but defeat, and consequently will fail to exert the power which they have.’ Bloomfield.
81]. 1. ἠμῶν δὲ «.7.A.—‘with us the spirit which we had before, in which while still inexperienced we made a desperate venture, is now surer, and as we have added to it a conviction that we must be the strongest if we have defeated the strongest, every man’s hope is doubled ; and as a rule, in any enterprise, the greater a man’s hope the greater is his readiness.’ ἡμῶν τὸ ὑπάρχον is our natural spirit, ὑπάρχω being habitually used of a nation’s qualities and mental characteristics. ἡμῶν is emphatic. .
3. Soxhoews—this word is found only in Herod. and Thuc. among prose authors.
4, τοῦ κρατίστους elvar—here, as in c. 36, 5 and vitl. 87, the MSS. give τό, but it is unlikely that Thuc. alone, and in these three places only, should have put the accus. to explain a gen. or dat. See Appendix II. κρατίστους. . . κρατίστους is traductio.
§21. 9. Τά τε τῆς x.7.A.—‘ The counterfeits of our method which they have devised are customary in our mode of fighting, and we shall be prepared for every one of them. But they will have a number of heavy infantry on deck contrary to custom, and a number of javelin men from Acarnania and elsewhere,
NOTES 189
mere landsmen aboard ship for the most part, who will not even find out how to discharge their javelins in a sitting position. Must they not endanger the ships and be thrown into utter confusion when they do not move in their usual manner ?’
14. τὸ καθεστηκὸς ---ἴ 6 ‘established custom’ of all navies.
15. χερσαῖοι, ὡς elrety—most commentators since Bauer say that ws εἰπεῖν ‘so to speak’ is added because χερσαῖος is used esp. of animals. This is very improbable: elsewhere in Thuc. ws εἰπεῖν qualifies an universal statement, as 11. 51; 111. 38, 39, 82; vi. 30; vir. 5, 96. There is no passage in which it is certainly used in any other sense; nor is it clear that χερσαῖος necessarily suggests animals.
18. καθεζομένουε--- τοῦ. literal, and not merely ‘cramped’ as Goller thought.
22. rapafovrar—see on ὁ. 36, 6. So ὠφελήσομαι is often used in pass. sense.
§ 31. 22. ἐπεὶ καὶ «.7.A.—‘for the number of their ships will be no advantage to them, in case any of you are alarmed about your numerical inferiority in the coming battle. In a small space many will be slower in accomplishing their object, and completely exposed to injury from our devices.’
πλήθει----οἴὔθῃ used of superior numbers.
27. ἐς τὸ βλάπτεσθαι.---[ἢθ construction, as Classen says, is influenced by és τὸ δρᾶν. Elsewhere ῥάδιος takes plain infin. Cf. 11. 11,5 πρός re τὸ ἐπιέναι εὐψυχότατοι, πρός τε τὸ ἐπιχειρεῖσθαι ἀσφαλέστατοι.
ἀφ’ dv—for ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνων &—i.e. the nom. of the rel. is attracted. This is very unusual, and this is the only instance in Thue.
8 4]. 28. τὸ 8 ἀληθέστατον x«.r.A.—‘ assure yourselves of a plain fact from information which we think to be clear: it is because their distress is overpowering and because they are forced by their present misery that they are reduced to the desperate expedient of risking a battle as best they can, trust- ing more to fortune than to orderly preparation. Their purpose is either to force their way out by sea or to retreat by land after the battle; for they know that their plight could not possibly be worse than it is.’
e 80. βιαζόμενοι drd—see on c. 131. 13.
παρασκενῆς. . . TOxns—the same antithesis in Iv. 55. So γνώμη and τύχη are very often contrasted. Thuc. thinks of Nicias. But παρασκευὴ is not ‘actual force’ here, as Bloom- field and Arnold say, but it is τὸ παρεσκευάσθαι, the opposite of ἀταξία inc. 68, 1.
§11. 1. [pds οὖν ἀταξίαν «.r.A.—‘ Therefore against such 68
190 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
disorderly and such bitter enemies whose fortune has already submitted, let us advance with eagerness, and let us think that men act lawfully towards an enemy, when purposing to retaliate upon the aggressor they determine to satisfy their heart’s animosity, and also that we shall have the delight of repelling our foes, and that this is proverbially most pleasant.’
ἀταξίαν... καὶ rixnv—referring back to παρασκενῆς and τύχης.
4. νομιμώτατον εἶναι. .. of €v—this kind of combination is idiomatic and occurs throughout Attic. Cf. on ο.. 68, 3 1. 16. From the analogy of other constructions in Gk., and froma comparison of the instances, it is more likely that the idiom is based on a brachylogy than on a combination of two construc- tions. Cf. Xen. Hel. τι. 8, 51 νομίζω προστάτου ἔργον εἶναι οἵου δεῖ, ὃς ἂν. .. μὴ ἐπιτρέπῃ.
5. ὡς ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ--ἐπὶ and a noun frequently take the place of a final clause.
6. Stxardoworv—an Ionic and old Attic word.
7. ἀποπλῆσαι---οαγζεγο, as τὴν φιλονικίαν ἐκπιμπλάναι IIT. 82, 8.
τῆς γνώμης τὸ Cupodpevov—cf. 1. 90 τὸ βουλόμενον τῆς γνώ- bys; 11. 59 τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς y. ; It. 10, 1 τὸ διαλάσσον τῆς 7-3 V.9 τὸ ἀνειμένον ris y. For τὸ θυμούμενον ‘ wrath’ cf. Eur. Hec, 299.
8, ἐκγενησόμενον --- the partic. depends on voulowuer, in spite of the infin. δίκαιον εἶναι (and ἥδιστον εἶναι). But then with the partic. νομίσωμεν = εἰδῶμεν.
9. cal. . . ἥδιστον elvar—sc. τὸ ἐχθροὺς ἀμύνασθαι. They are to think that their conduct (1) νομιμώτατον elvac—is in accordance with custom and right, (2) ἥδιστον εἶναι --- ἰΒ in accordance with the proverb that expresses that custom. (I am unable to accept the interpretation hitherto given of this passage. See crit. note.)
τὸ λεγόμενόν wov—this is in accordance with the ancient love of revenge; but Thuc., like Euripides, had reason to know that there was something better. Cf. Eur. Bacchae 877 τί τὸ κάλλιον | παρὰ θεῶν γέρας ἐν βροτοῖς | ἣ χεῖρ᾽ ὑπὲρ κορυφᾶς | τῶν ἐχθρῶν κατέχειν ; For the proverb cf. Juv. 18, 180 aé vindicta bonum vita jucundius ipsa, where Mayor refers to Iliad xvitt. 108.
§21. 9. ὡς δὲ ἐχθροὶ «.7r.A.—‘ that they are our enemieg, nay our bitterest enemies, you all know: for they invaded our land to make us slaves ; and had they succeeded in that, they would have inflicted on our men the worst penalty (7.e. death), on our wives and children the worst indignities (i.e. slavery), on the whole city the most disgraceful reproach (1.6. depend. ence).’
-NOTES 191
§31.14. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν μὴ «.7.A.—‘ wherefore no man should feel for them, nor think it gain that they should depart without danger to us. That is all they will do even if they win the battle ; but the prize—to punish them when we have gained our desire, as we probably shall do, and to confirm for the whole of Sicily the liberty which she already enjoyed—is a glorious one. How few ventures there are in which the loss in case Of failure is as small as the gain through success is great.’
15. rwa—cf. c. 61, 1.
axivSives—certainly not ‘without doing us further harm’ (Holden) ; which would involve a paradox that would scarcely be convincing to men who had suffered so much ; but ‘ without our having to run (a further) risk,’ as is shown by ἀγών and, above all, by κινδύνων below.
18. πραξάντων---8ο. ἡμῶν. Beside εὖ (κακῶς, etc.) ποιεῖν, «πράττειν, neut. plur. adj. are regularly used with ποιεῖν, πράττειν.
ἃ βουλόμεθα---80. πρᾶξαι, not, as Kriiger, the fate which we wish for them, but for ourselves. Victory is meant.
19. καὶ τῇ πάσῃ Σ --- Confirmed the charters that were yours before ;— | No parleying now! In Britain is one breath.’ Wordsworth, 70 the Men of Kent.
20. βεβαιοτέραν wapadoivai—ithe language is taken from the tenure of property. καρποῦσθαι is in contrast with the BeBaorépa κτῆσις which is to be bestowed (παραδοῦναι) on them. The subject changes at παραδοῦναι.
21. καλὸς ὁ dyév—notice that ὁ ἀγών is in apposition with τὸ. .. κολασθῆναι. . . καὶ παραδοῦναι, for this is the right way of taking the words, instead of making τὸ κολασθῆναι καὶ παραδοῦναι subject and ὁ ἀγών part of the pred., as the edd.
κινδύνων «.7.A.—the speech ends with a γνώμη, or general trath, a form of close of which Thuc. is very fond. Cf. c. 77 end.
orayieratro.—again we have the accumulation of super- latives noticed at c. 42, 3 ]. 34. .
22. σφαλῆναι βλάπτοντες---σφάλλω and βλάπτω are often near neighbours. |
§11 1. Καὶ of pév—the description of the last battle has 69 been much admired both in ancient and in modern times. Dionysius Hal. quotes much of it and praises it warmly ; it is also commended by Lucian, and by Gibbon, Gray, Macaulay.
4, 4orOdvovro—sc. πληροῦντας τὰς vais.
g2, 8. ὅπερ whorxovow—sc. of ἄνθρωποι, which is very often omitted thus ; 6.0. Plat. Crat. p. 887 ο ὀνομάζοντες γάρ που λέγουσι τοὺς λόγους.
10. σφίσιν---ἰἶ, 6. Nicias and his men.
192 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΤΤΡΑΦΗΣ Z
11. avrots— prob. =‘to them,’ 1.6. rots στρατιώταις - but Classen takes it to mean ‘by them,’ 1.6. τοῖς orparnvyois.
13. ἀνεκάλει---“ called by name,’ )( ἀποκαλεῖν.
πατρόθεν τε rrovopdtov—‘ mentioning the father’s name as well (ér-).’ Cf. Arist. Ath. Pol. c. 21 ταύτας ἑἐπονομόσας τριττῦς.
14, αὐτοὺς dvopacri—does not add any fresh information, but heightens the impressiveness of the description.
Afy—men were Officially addressed by the name of their deme; but here the tribe is chosen because of its military character.
τό τε καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν K.7.A.—‘admonishing those who had any reputation of their own not to be false to it.’ τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαντόν is taken as object of προδιδόναι, and the schol. explains it as τὴν οἰκείαν ἀρετήν ; but elsewhere in Thuc. τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν means either (1) in person, used adverbially, as in Demosth. 21, 140 τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ὅπως δύναται, Aristoph. Lg. 513 χορὸν alroln καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, or (2) his own division; and it may well be used in the former sense here. But it should be connected with what follows, in the sense ᾧ ὑπῆρχε λαμπρότητός τι τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, the order being modified for the sake of the antithesis with ras π. ἀρετάς.
17. of wpdéyovor—observe the sentiment in which the last appeal of Nicias is grounded. Thuc. knew well that the reverence felt by his countrymen for the past was excessive ; cf. 1. 22 below. Pericles also certainly discouraged this excess and tried to direct the A. to the future. But Thuc. is right in making N. lay stress on the glory of the past here, and no doubt N. really did so. ἀρετὰς is ‘deeds of valour’ as usual.
adav(few—contrasted with ἐπιφανεῖς.
18. πατρίδος τῆς ἐλευθερωτάτης —the order puts emphasis on the adj., and the statement is true of Athens itself; but she had unduly neglected the claims of her subjects and thus enabled Sparta to raise the cry of ἐλευθερία by which a great part of Greece was deluded.
trropusvyoKkov—this word is often used when people are re- minded of something dear to them and absent, for which they feel a longing (πόθος).
19. τῆς ἐν αὐτῇ κιτιλ. = “ὅτι ἑκάστῳ ἐν αὐτῇ ἀνεπιτάκτως διαιτᾶσθαι ἔξεστι.’ Classen. “Τί is noteworthy that this special feature of the great democracy should be the one picked out at such an hour as this as the thing which had gone further than anything to endear Athens to her children.’ Freeman. Pericles in the Funeral Oration says ‘In our daily intercourse we are as tolerant as in our public life. . . we are not angry with our neighbour for doing as he pleases.’ 11. 37, 2.
a τε--τε joins λέγων to the preceding words.
a NOTES 193
21. τοῦ xatpot—cf. c. 2 1. 22.
οὐ πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν «.t.A.— ‘all that men would say, not guarding against seeming to talk commonplaces, and urging what does duty on all occasions (ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων) to the same effect about wives and children and ancestral gods; still because they think it to be useful, they appeal to it.’
23. καὶ imtp—with this καὶ supply εἴποιεν ἄν, but not ὅσα, since the influence of the relative is as usual lost in the second member of the sentence ; and so Thuc. ceases to tell us directly what Nicias said, and instead tells us what men always say under such circumstances. And so ἐπιβοῶνται (see note below) is added at the end. (Hitherto there have been two explana- tions of this καί : (1) Goller, followed by most modern edd., takes καὶ as ‘though,’ so that the following words are in ‘ apposition to ὅσα ; (2) xal=‘and,’ joins προφερόμενα to the idea contained in od πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν. . . φυλαξάμενοι, which virtually = ἀρχαῖα, note in Jowett. Both explanations require that ἐπιβοῶνται should be considered grammatically dependent on ὅσα ; but this is not likely, and καὶ ὑπὲρ «.r.A. comes in very awkwardly on either of the two suppositions.) The lit. rendering is ‘and they would say things which are brought forward on all occasions.’
Traparvfova—pred. to προφερόμενα.
ts τε yuvatkas—cf. ἐς after many verbs of saying, as adew, αἰνίττεσθαι, ποιεῖν (‘ to compose ἢ).
24. θεοὺς warpgovs—esp. Apollo and Zeus; prob. also Athena.
25. &A\’—the influence of ὅσα being entirely lost, ἀλλ᾽... ἐπιβοῶνται is contrasted with ὅσα. . . εἴποιεν ἂν οὐ φυλαξάμενοι
. o> καὶ (εἴποιεν ἂν). . . προφερόμενα.
20. ἐπιβοῶνται---8.. 7a .. . προφερόμενα. So 111. 59, 2 θεοὺς ἐπιβοώμενοι ; VIII. 92 ἐπιβοωμένου. . . μὴ ἀπολέσαι τὴν πατρίδα. This meaning of ἐπιβοᾶσθαι ‘to invoke ’ -- ἐπικαλεῖσθαι is not to be found in Attic prose outside Thue.
8 8]. 1. dvayxata—what would just suffice.
3. weLov—see c. 60, 2.
841]. 12, τὸν παρακλῃσθέντα διέκπλουν — ‘the openin that had been closed,’ with chains. When the ζεῦγμα ha been formed by the Syr., they must have left a gap in the centre to admit their own ships. Doubtless this gap could be closed.with chains, as in the case of λιμένες κλῃστοί. See 6. 70 L 15. (None of the MSS, readings yield a satisfactory sense ; παραλειφθέντα is strongly supported, but there is no sign in the narrative that there was a gap left open. In any case Thuc. has here, as elsewhere, neglected to tell us something which he should have told us.)
OQ
70
194 OOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
§11. 1. mpodayayspever—‘ putting off before them.’
3. Kkal=atgue.
7. αἱ viies—sec. τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων.
8. τοῦς Συρακοσίοις- -(οο8 the dat. with ἄρχειν answer the question ‘where,’ or ‘for whom’? Cf. 11. 2, 1 Πυθοδώρου ἄρχοντος ᾿Αθηναίοις.
8.2}. 11. οἱ &\Aow—‘the A. on their part’; ἄλλος being exclusive.
18. τῶν τεταγμένων νεῶν πρὸς abrq—this order of the prep. and case is not very uncommon in the best prose.
16. odlow—should be αὐτοῖς, as of ᾿Αθηναῖοι is not the subj. of the principal verb (ἐγίγνετο).
17. οὐ πρὸς τῷ ζεύγματι «.r.A.— ‘the fight, the fiercest fight of the whole war, .became general, not in the shape of two great fleets meeting each other in ordered array, but in that of a crowd of separate battles going on everywhere at once, over the whole surface of the Great Harbour.’ Freeman.
8 81. 26. ἐθεράπενον--- ἐπεμελοῦντο.
ἡ λείπεσθαι--- that these on deck should not fall behind the rest in skill,’ the combatants being contrasted with the sailors and pilots. With τῆς ἄλλης τέχνης cf. ἑτέρας εὐτυχούσης ῥώμης c. 63 1. 80.
28. ré— ‘in fact,’ summing up the preceding details. ‘Chacun enfin, ἃ sa poste, brilait de paraitre le premier.’ Girard. )
§ 41. 33. ἐμβολαὶ. . . rpocPoAal—the distinction drawn in note on 6. 34 1. 25 accords with Poppo. But the explanation of Arnold fits the passage better: ἐμβολὴ, Arn. says, is the attack made by a ship with her beak, in the regular manner. Προσβολὴ is more general. Here it denotes accidental collisions. But elsewhere it means a regular charge.
ἀνακρούσεις. . . διέκπλους---866 on 6. 36, 4 ll. 29, 87.
36. pase. νηί. ἜΝ
851. 87. π ovro —opt. of indef. frequency again.
41. breBalvey —- ere with simple dat. + usually with ἐπὶ and accus.; or, meaning ‘to set foot in,’ with gen. Cf. the use of ἐπὶ with either gen. or dat. in a local sense.
§61. 42. ξννετύγχανέ re—‘and so it happened . . . that.’
43. τὰ μὲν ἄλλοις «7.4. — ‘while on the one side they struck others, on the other they were themselves struck.’
46. τοῖς κυβερνήταις «.r.A.—‘the pilots found themselves forced to guard against one party and make plans against another, and not singly, but at many points on every side,’ ὁ.6. having to deal with several enemies at the same time.
§ 71. 53. κατά re τὴν τέχνην.--- 48 their work required it and in the excitement of the moment.’
ee ee --ρ--- ——
NOTES 195
56. émBodvres—anacoluthon after πολλὴ. . . ἐγίγνετο, as in c. 42,2. Badham and Herwerden bracket it on the ground that Thuc. would have written ἐπιβοώμενοι. But it is quite
ssible to consider the xeNevoral as a separate body from the ἐπιβάται and other combatants, who are indicated by τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις.
περὶ τῆς--- in defence of,’ περὶ standing in the sense οὗ ὑπέρ, as often in Demosth.
57. εἴ wore καὶ αὖθιε---΄ if ever again.’
58. avruvaBéoGar—absolute, as in 11. 8, 1.
61. ἐπανξῆσαι ---- means to add to the importance of a person or thing.
§81 62. μὴ κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην --- ‘unnecessarily.’ Cf. οὐ δι ὀλίγου below. How is the difference of neg. accounted for ?
69. φεύγοντας hebyourw—traductio, for the sake of heighten- ing the contrast.
§11. 1. 8 τε ἐκ τῆς yfs—the following vivid description of 71 the behaviour of the troops on shore exhibits a curious approxi- mation to the romantic spirit, but it wants the pathos and the freedom of romanticism ; and, fine as it is, the choice and the presentment of the details serve to show how entirely foreign to Thucydides’ genius the romantic spirit was. This ‘living picture’ is finely imitated by Gibbon in his account of the siege of Constantinople by Mahomet II. in 1458.
3. πολὺν τὸν ἀγῶνα. . . eye—cf. 111. 49, 1 ἦλθον ἐς ἀγῶνα
τῆς δόξης.
4. tww—synonym οὗ ἀγών.
φιλονικῶν ---- les Siciliens désiraient obtenir une gloire plus grande, et les Athéniens redoutaient un sort plus triste encore que leur condition présente.’ Girard.
82]. 7. ἀνακειμένων. . . ἐς τὰς ναῦς -- ‘as everything depended on the fleet.’ Cf. Eur. Hec. 802 ὃς εἰς σ᾽ ἀνελθὼν εἰ διαφθαρήσεται κ.τ.λ.
9. οὐδενὶ douxds—cf. on c. 29 1. 39.
διὰ τὸ < dvd >—‘as the fortune of the battle varied, so they received of necessity varying impressions.’ (Valla supposed that there is a reference in this passage to ‘the un- evenness of the ground’; but this is not likely either from what follows or from the condition of the coast. Being close to the water, they could not get a view of the whole.)
§ 31. 11. δι’ dAlyou—local ; of. c. 36, 5.
14. ἀνεθάρσησαν av—this is the only example in Thuc. of the iterative ἂν with indic. aor. or imperf. (On this construction sec Mr. Seaton in Classical Review 111. p. 348 ol.)
16. ἐπὶ τὸ ἡσσσώμενον -- τοὺς ἡσσωμένους. Cf. Eur. Sup. 706
196 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®H? Z
ἣν δ᾽ ἀγὼν ἰσόρροπος. . . οὐ yap τὸ νικῶν τοῦτ᾽ ἑκήδευεν, μόνον | ἀλλ᾽ ᾧὥχετ᾽ ἐς τὸ κάμνον οἰκείου στρατοῦ.
17. ἀπὸ τῶν δρωμένων τῆς ὄψεως --- ἀπὸ belongs to τῆς ὄψεως, the order being the same in ὁ. 20, 1; 24, 2; 31, 5; 32, 1. But, when the art. is inserted with both nouns, this order is very rare in Attic prose outside Thuc. It occurs often in Herod.
19. τῶν ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ = τῶν μαχομένων.
21. τὸ ἀκρίτως fuvexts — ‘the continued uncertainty. ἀκρίτως γενομένης τῆς ἁμίλλης. Schol. Notice the freedon. with which nouns can be qualified by adverbs.
22. ἴσα τῇ SdEQ—‘ according to their feelings.’
28. ἐν τοῖς xaXerérara—cf. c. 19, 4.
παρ᾽ éd(yov—cf. c. 2, 4 1. 31, and the idiom παρὰ μικρόν παρ᾽ οὐδὲν ἐλθεῖν with infin.
8 4]. 26. πάντα ὁμοῦ ἀκοῦσαι---οἴ. Eur. Sup. 710 ἔρρηξε ὃ αὐδήν, ὥσθ᾽ ὑκηχῆσαι χθόνα" | ὦ παῖδες, εἰ μὴ σχήσετε στερρὸν δόρυ
σπαρτῶν τόδ᾽ ἀνδρῶν, οἴχεται τὰ Παλλάδος : and Heraclid. 888 ἣν δὲ δύο κελεύματα, | ὦ τὰς ᾿Αθήνας, ὦ τὸν ᾿Αργείων γύην | σπεί- ροντες, οὐκ ἀρήξετ᾽ αἰσχύνην πόλει; and ib. 1. 882 πόσον τιν᾽ αὐχεῖς πάταγον ἀσπίδων βρέμειν | πόσον τινὰ στεναγμὸν οἰμωγήν
ὁμοῦ;
27. ὀλοφυρμός - apposition to πάντα. The accus. might have been used as object of ἀκοῦσαι.
vixdyres, kparodpevor—as though ἦσαν ἀκοῦσαι had preceded. The cries would be νικῶμεν, κρατούμεθα.
28. &\Aa—instead of r&\Xa. So alia is common in Livy in place of cetera. The asyndeton heightens the effect.
ὅσ᾽ ἂν... ἀναγκάζοιτο---ὅσ᾽ ἂν for ὅσα of MSS. is necessary because the clause does not apply to the A. only, but contains a reference to the cries that any army would utter εἰ ἐν μεγάλῳ κινδύνῳ εἴη.
8 δ]. 81. atvrots—t.c. τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις.
82. πρίν γε δὴ--οἴ on c. 39 1. 8.
35. λαμπρῶς ---΄ decisively,’ with κατεδίωκον. Cf. c. 55, 1; and 11. 7, 1 λελυμένων λαμπρῶς τῶν σπονδῶν : VIII. 66, 8 ; 765, 2.
86 1. 37. peréopor—used similarly in 11. 91, 3 referring to the middle of the Corinthian Gulf.
88. xarevey Oévres—like καταφερομένας in c. 68, 1. Contrast προσφέρεσθαι c. 70, 5. The corresponding sentence in Diodorus makes this clearer: τῶν δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων ὅσοι μὴ μετέωροι διεφθάρη.- σαν, ἐπεὶ πρὸς τὰ βράχη προσηνέχθησαν, ἐκπηδῶντες ἐκ τῶν νεῶν ἀπολομένων εἰς τὸ πεζὸν στρατόπεδον ἔφενγον.
89. οὐκέτι διαφόρως --- ἴ.6. no longer with the variety of feeling mentioned above,
40. éppfis—of passionate impulse, as in 111. 36, 2.
NOTES 197
οἰμωγῇ τε καὶ ordve—with παρεβοήθουν. Dative of manner. See Rutherford, Syntax p. 66.
41, Svcavac xerobvres—Pollux 111. 130 says that this word was first used by Thuc. ; it is fairly frequent in late authors.
τὰ γυγνόμενα--- Kriiger compares φθονεῖν τί τινι.
48. τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ τείχους -- τὸ διατείχισμα.
45. περὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς. .. διεσκόπουν.---οἴ. Lycurgus 107 περὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ποιητὰς οὐδένα λόγον ἔχοντες.
8 71. 47. ξυμφορῶν --- preferable to ξυμπασῶν, which is colourless and adds nothing to οὐδεμιᾶς. ‘The consternation was the greatest of their misfortunes.’
49. xal—after παραπλήσια as in c. 70, 1.
51. προσαπώλλυντο---ἰῃο imperf. of ὄλλυμει is often used as here of that which is in danger of happening. Cf. γίγνομαι, δίδωμι. It here corresponds with ἀνέλπιστον ἦν σωθήσεσθαι.
éy-—the perf. partic. of a verb of motion implies rest in, and so ἐν can be used.
§ 21. 8. νεκρῶν μὲν πέρι v.—proleptic of αἰτῆσαι ἀναίρεσιν. This neglect is very significant because (1) it was considered a most solemn duty to bury the dead; (2) Nicias was esp.
unctilious in this matter ; (3) the same neglect after Arginusac ed to the execution of some of the στρατηγοί.
§ 31. 12. γνώμην ἐποιεῖτο = ἐγίγνωσκε ‘ proposed.’
16. ἔτι--' yet again.’
vijes Xpfiowpat—is regarded as one word. Hence the order.
§ 41. 23. ἂν én—with κρατῆσαι.
81}. 2. ὑπονοήσαφ---ὑπονοεῖν, like ὑποπτεύειν, sometimes = ‘to view with suspicion,’ sometimes ‘ to conjecture.’
7. ἀποχωρῆσαι... περιιδεῖν — the infin. with περιορᾶν occurs only in Herod. and Thue.
8. λέγων ταῦτα ἃ καὶ αὐτῷ Gdéne—probably this means ‘saying what he personally thought they ought to do.’ This interpretation is strongly supported by ol δὲ ξυνεγίγνωσκον μὲν καὶ αὐτοὶ and ἐδόκει ποιητέα εἶναι below, with which καὶ αὐτῷ brings our clause into connexion. (The recent edd. who retain these words offer several suggestions; but all except Classen give alternatives and say that the meaning cannot be determined. Classen says ‘saying that which seemed to him from his own conjecture probable,’ thus agreeing with Haacke, Goller, and Arnold. But Bloomfield rightly says that the Syr. knew that the A. would retreat even before the battle—c. 67. Stahl and Herwerden reject the words. I think that the edd. have all mistaken the meaning of ἐδόκει, which refers not to the knowledge of Hermocrates, but to his advice. Valla translates ‘Commemorans haec et alia quae ipsi videbantur,’ which, whatever he read, is certainly not what Thuc. meant. )
72
73
198 OOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
11, dwouodopfoas—se. χρεών.
12. τὰ στενόπορα --ἰΠο86 among the hills west of Syr.
προφθάσαντας --- Classen, Bohme, and Widmann prefer διαλαβόντας of B, and it is perhaps right. That διαλαμβάνω does not occur elsewhere in Thuc. does not count, as this part of the narrative contains several rare words and ἀγωνισμός, ἀντιτέχνησις, δυσανασχετῶ, and ἐπιφήμισμα, which are not found again in Thuc. προλαμβάνοντες is explained by the schol. φθάνοντες, ὥστε μὴ καταλαμβάνεσθαι at IV. 38. Possibly Thuc. wrote προδιαλαβόντας.
f § 21. 13. Evveylyvwoxov—the prep. here has an adverbial orce.
16. aopévous . . . dvatreravpévous—so Sallust Jug. 53, 5 lati quierant, Postgate’s certain correction of laetique erant.
17. dvatreravpévous . . . éo otons—cf. c. 51, 1.
18. Ἡρακλεῖ... Ovola—the Syr. set great store by the fact that the battle fell on a day sacred to Heracles, whose temple was on the hill close to the point at which the A. double wall touched it. Plut. Nic. 25 says that their μάντεις had reported that Heracles required that they should not begin the action. (For the speculations of Timaeus in after times see Plut. Nic. 1.)
19. οὐ Soxetv—the verb of ‘saying’ has to be supplied from ξυνεγίγνωσκον by an idiom common in Gk. Oratio Obliqua. ἂν with ἐθελῆσαι.
21. πρὸς πόσιν rerpddbar.—the metaphorical meaning of τρέπεσθαι πρὸς is much commoner than the literal.
23. edav—the gen. with πείθομαι is frequent in Herod. but is not found anywhere else in Attic prose. πείθεσθαι is here synonymous with ὑπακοῦσαι of 1. 20; and the gen. is also helped by πάντα.
24, &e&AGetv—depends on πείθεσθαι, which takes sometimes infin., sometimes ὥστε with infin.
8 81]. 26. ἐπὶ rovrous—‘ in consequence.’
27. καθ’ ἡσυχίαν---566 on c. 38, 3.
29. πέμπει — asyndeton after a demonstrative is fairly common.
33. ἐξ ὅσον = ἐς τοσοῦτον ἐξ ὅσου, the antecedent being omitted as in Plat. Phaedo Ὁ. 788 ὅθεν ἀπελίπομεν ἐπανέλθωμεν, and often with relative adverbs.
37. Svayyeko.—one would have thought that it was high time for even Nicias to be somewhat sceptical. Moreover he had played a similar trick on the Syr. early in 414. It is strange too that any man who had appeared in the δικαστήρια should not have understood the art of lying. But their suffer- ings prob. unnerved the A. for the time.
NOTES 199
τῶν tvSobev—neut.
§11. 1. πρὸς τὸ AyyeApa—how near this use of πρὸς is to διὰ with accus. may be seen from ὁ. 60, 2 πρὸς τὴν παροῦσαν ἀπορίαν. . . ἐβουλεύσαντο ἐκλιπεῖν as compared with ὁ. 29, 1 διὰ τὴν παροῦσαν ἀπορίαν. . . οὐ βουλόμενοι δαπανᾶν.
' 2. οὐκ érarny—together, as in τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν of 1. 1387.
3. καὶ ds—i.c. even after waiting that night.
4, τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν tpdpay—insequentem diem.
5. ὡς ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν ---΄ 28 best they could.’
7. ἀναλαβόντες --4ϑ though διενοήθησαν had preceded.
αὐτὰ 8oa—‘only so much as.’
§ 21.11. εἰκὸς ἦν... Uvar—‘it was natural for the A. to go,’ ἱέναι being present, as is usually the case with the paradigm of εἶμι except in Oratio Obliqua.
18. trodox}v—of a hostile reception, as accipio in Cic. ad At. 1. 18 hune ego accept in senatu ut soleo ‘I gave him a warm reception.’
17. ὥσπερ διενοήθησαν --Ἔ866 c. 60, 2.
19, ὡς éxdo-rnv—see on ὁ. 65, 2.
ποι éxmrerraxviay—‘had been driven ashore anywhere.’
20. éxéptfov—the A. dead, whom Nicias had left as they fell, were afterwards buried by the Syr. on Plemmyrium, where their graves and bones have been recently found. (See Free- man Hist. Sic. 111. p. 365.)
§11. 2. waperxevéaco8a.—impersonal.
καὶ dvacracis—elsewhere this καὶ always follows ws wd, not ἐπειδὴ postqucn.
§21. 5. δεινὸν οὖν ἦν x.7.A.—probably this passage, which all edd. admit to be exceedingly obscure, means lit.: ‘not only in respect of one point in their condition was it terrible that they were departing after losing all their ships and, in contrast with their high hopes, having to face danger, both to themselves and their city, but also at the same time, as they left the camp, every man encountered things that were painful both to look upon and to think of.’ (The meaning of καθ᾽ ἕν τῶν πραγμάτων is not certain, and the words might safely be ‘skipped.’ Classen thinks that they may be, and Stahl is certain that they are corrupt. Sitzler reads ἐκεῖνο for καθ᾽ ἕν. Only Bohme-Widmann are entirely satisfied, taking καθ᾽ ἕν τῶν πραγμάτων as subject of δεινὸν #v—which I agree with Stahl is impossible—and understanding, with Haase, in unum contracta rerum gestarwm summa. )
καθ᾽ &y—means generally (1) in detail, singly ; but some- times (2) in one respect, for one reason, as in 11. 89, 7. Thue. is contrasting ἕν with πολλά, and means ‘the fact that they
74
75
200 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
were leaving with loss and danger was terrible not on one account only, but for many reasons,’ and the many reasons are expanded into the clause ἀλλὰ καὶ, etc., which again is de- veloped in §§ 3, 4, through which the general idea δεινὸν Fv ov καθ᾽ ἕν runs—but the subject clause, ὅτι... κινδυνεύοντες, is lost sight of. καθ᾽ ὃν γίγνεσθαι = in unum cogi.
6. τῶν wpaypdrwy—expresses the sphere of circumstances in which there were many points of horror, and the circum- stances are those of the ἀποχώρησις.
ὅτι τάς τε x.t.A.—Haase and Rauchenstein alone take this as subject of δεινὸν ἦν, but the notes will show that they are prob. right.
10. ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει--- (}}18 being a guasi-temporal word, Thuc. might perhaps have omitted ἐν, as he does with πόλεμος, ἐσβολή.
8 31.13. νεκρῶν ---566 on c. 741. 20.
14. éBov—partly because they had neglected a duty so sacred as burial, partly because the dead if unburied were likely to haunt the living, partly because they had not gone through the rites of self-purification.
15. of . . . καταλειπόμενοι --- ‘those who were being left behind alive.’ Cf. of λειπόμενοι Ξε: ‘ the survivors.’
17. τοῖς {aGo01—observe that we require here an antithesis to τοῖς KaTaderouévois—hence the various alterations proposed. But Thuc. may have been guilty of a false antithesis here, as his admirer Lucretius very often is. There is a similar error in Cic. de legibus 11. 44 quod constat et ex vexandis vivorum animis et ea fama mortuorum, ut eorum exitium et judicio vivorum et gaudio comprobetur—unless for the second vivorum we should read donorum, as proposed by P. Thomas.
τῶν ἀπολωλότων abAwrepoi—the antithesis between the peace of honourable death and the misery of disgraced life became a stock theme of the schools.
§ 41.19. nabloracav—se. αὐτούς.
28. ὅσον --- quantum. This seems more expressive than the Vatican és ὅσον, quousque, which is generally adopted.
to—the dat. with προλείπειν is unusual.
24. popn—‘spirit.’ It suggests high nervous tension—with which Athenians were rarely troubled-—as in 11. 43, 6.
οὐκ ἄνευ 6Alyov—Valla wrongly renders non sine mudtis obtestationibus, and all the edd. have mistaken the meaning. The wounded and weak did not stop until they were so utterly exhausted both in body and mind that they could utter only a few appeals and groans. So far from there being no sense in ὀλίγων, there is a terrible amount of sense in it, both as a description of the scene and as an indication of the tempera- ment of Thuc. as a man and as an artist. .
NOTES 201
25. éreaopav—Cobet has shown that this is the true orthography, not ἐπιθειασμῶν. Hesych. ἐπιθεάζει" θεοὺς ἐπικαλεῖται.
ἀπολειπόμενοι --- ‘being parted from them,’ ἐν τῇ ἀπο- λείψει τοῦ στρατοπέδου, 1. 10. Cf. on lL. 27. The preference which most edd. show for the Vat. ὑπολειπόμενοι is inexplicable.
ὥστε x.7.4.—this gives the consequence of all the ἀλγεινὰ of Ἰ. 12, and thus carries us back to δεινὸν ἦν.
26. Sdxpvo.— the dat. with πίμπλημι, instead of gen., is poetical.
arop(a—causal dat.
27. ἐκ πολεμίας ---85.. ἀφορμωμένους. ἀφορμᾶσθαι shows that this sentence recalls ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει τοῦ o. It is interesting to notice that the whole passage from § 2 to § 4, though it con- tains statements of fact, happens to be arranged in the form of a rhetorical enthymeme, and is therefore very characteristic of Thue.
28. ἢ κατὰ Sdxpva—Herod. 111. 14 μέζω κακὰ ἢ ὥστε dva- κλαίειν. ‘In gravissimo maerore ne lacrimis quidem locus.’ Haacke.
29. τῶν ἐν adavet—in such passages we have the best in- dication of the historian’s own religious views as purely negative. In this matter he was in accord with Protagoras, and, as in other matters, with Euripides, at least until the poet’s recantation in his old age. Cf. onc. 86, 5.
ἢ δ]. 30. xarhped—‘exprime un sentiment de honte qui fait baisser les yeux.’ Didot. Cf. Eur. Med. 956 ri δὴ κατη- gets ὄμμα, καὶ daxpuppoets ; Having completed the description of the ἀλγεινὰ in the form of an enthymeme, Thuc. now goes back to the grammatical subject of δεινὸν οὖν ἣν § 2, viz., dre τάς τε vais ἀπολωλεκότες πάσας ἀπεχώρουν Kal ἀντὶ μεγάλης ἐλπίδος... κινδυνεύοντες. These two aspects of the ἀποχώρησις —viz., the loss and the change which the loss involved to all —are dealt with in 88 5, 6, 7, so as to exhibit their effect on the appearance of the army and on the minds of the men, and they are considered together from two points of view, the κατήφεια which they involved and besides (καὶ μὴν, § 6) the ἰσομοιρία which they involved. Thus the whole chap. from § 2 forms a chiasmus, as regards the matter, and it is a perfect example of composition. Macaulay said of ‘the Retreat’ that there was no prose composition in the world that he placed so
igh. 33. trodevyotoy—the comparison has lost its force for us ; but the phenomenon referred to was not a rare one in those times.
89, ὑπὸ τοῖς ὅπλοις---ἐπὶ ‘in addition to,’ in place of ὑπό,
202 OOYKYAIAOY HYTTPA®HE Z
has been generally accepted, but Widmann rightly says that the change is unnecessary. It is not easy to say how else hoplites could have carried food but in the left hand, and so of necessity beneath the shield.
40. ἀκολούθων----ἰ. ὁ. θεραπόντων.
42. παραχρῆμα---80. ἀπηυτομόλουν.
§ 61. 44. καὶ μὴν---ἰ πἰχοαυοίηρ a new point in the descrip- tion. Thuc. uses καὶ μὴν only in speeches and the more highly wrought parts of the narrative.
<7’ 5 ἄλλη αἰκία κ.τ.λ.--- 11, ‘the degradation generally and especially the universality of the suffering, though it had some
eviation in the fact that it was shared by many, was never- theless at that moment thought intolerable.’ ἡ ἰσομοιρία is the special part of the alxia singled out for comment: in this case the universality of the suffering is designated aixia because hoplites and knights were suffering the same hardship as the meanest slave. (Junghahn has rightly explained this passage ; but the wiaiion of +r’ is necessary in order to get the sense
uired. ἐντὶ τὸ μετὰ πολλῶν --Οἷο. ad At. χι. 6, 1 meus dolor non modo non minuitur, cum ϑοοίμην sili adjungit dolorem tuum, sed etiam augetur. ‘General evils,’ Machiavelli says, ‘are endured more easily than private ones.’ .
47. ἀπὸ ofas—an exclamation, the donble οἷος being used as so often in tragedy to express a marked contrast. Trans. ‘especially considering that they ’ etc.
49. ddl(xaro—the plur. suits αὔχημα much better than the sing. ἀφῖκτο, even if it could be used impersonally.
8 71. 50. τὸ διάφορον --- reverse.’
51. οἷς -- ὅτι αὐτοῖς.
ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ. . . ἥκειν---Ηογοᾶ,. has this idiom twice with- out the article.
52. Sovkworopévovs—for the change from dat. to acous. cf. c. 40, 4; 57, 9.
totro—object of πάθωσι.
56. vavBarév—found in Herod., Thuc., and tragedy only.
ὁπλιτικῷ προσέχοντας μᾶλλον ἣ vavTing—‘ trusting, not to a fleet, but to hoplites.’ This was a bad omen for the queen of the sea.
16 1, 8. ὡς ἐκ τῶν &.—‘as well as he could,’ with ἐθάρσυνε.
4. βοῇ τε x. «.7.A.—‘raising his voice louder and louder still as he went from one Jine to another.’ So the note in Jowett, taking ἔτι μᾶλλον with ἑκάστοις, which is much better than understanding a reference hack to the previous speech c. 69, 2, as there is not much point in saying that he spoke even louder than he had spoken two days before.
NOTES 203
5. ylyvorro—why optative ?
7. yeyouienav—a poetical word for yéywva. ,
81}.1. Ἔτι καὶ ἐκ «.r.A.—‘even as things are, you must 77 hope on (men have been saved from terrors even greater than these), and you must not reproach yourselves either for your disasters or for your present undeserved sufferings.’ The speech is based upon the same topics that have been handled in 6. 75, 88 5, 6, 7, viz., the κατήφεια, κατάμεμψις, and ἰσομοιρία.
5. Evupdopats—of the battles that had been lost.
§ 21. 7. κἀγώ τοι «.7.4.—‘ You know that I too, who am as weak as the weakest of you (yes, you see how I am suffering), whose success both in private and in public life is, I think, considered equal to any man’s, am now In the same danger and suspense as the humblest of you. Yet have I rendered with exactness my duty to the gods, and just and inoffensive dealing to men,’ In this rendering the antithesis, to our taste excessive, is modified. Notice the close correspondence of οὔτε ῥώμῃ, etc. and οὔτ᾽ εὐτυχίᾳ, etc.
8. προφέρων ---5866 on c. 64, 2.
10. edrux(g—Intr. p. xxxvii. A great deal is to be learned about this word and its relation to εὐδαιμονία in the tragedians, esp. in Euripides. Cf. Arist. Eth. 1. 9 πολλαὶ μεταβολαὶ γίνονται καὶ παντοῖαι τύχαι κατὰ τὸν βίον, καὶ ἐνδέχεται τὸν μάλιστ᾽ εὐθηνοῦντα μεγάλαις συμφοραῖς περιπεσεῖν ἐπὶ γήρως. Nicias here propounds his doctrine that the gods repay the good and the bad with good and ill fortune in this life. His belief was the same as that of Herodotus.
§ 31.17. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν «.7.A.—‘ therefore I am yet strong in hope for the future, and our misfortunes lose some of their terror. Perhaps they may even cease. For the enemy have had enough success, and if any of the gods was offended at our enterprise, we have now received sufficient punishment.’
18. od κατ᾽ ἀξίαν δὴ φοβοῦσι---ἰ.6. (φοβοῦσιν) ἐλασσόνως ἢ κατ᾽ ἀξίαν Antiphon ¢eér. I’. δ 6, lit.: ‘not in accordance with their assumed importance.’ (There are several ways of taking these words. Classen says ‘terrify you more than they ought to do.’) .
19. λωφήσειαν--- οὗ the cessation of pain or trouble, as in 11. 49,5. Plat. Phaedrus 251 c λωφᾷ τῆς ὀδύνης.
ἱκανὰ yap—contrast with this Eur. Sup. 226 κοινὰς yap ὁ θεὸς Tas τύχας ἡγούμενος | τοῖς τοῦ νοσοῦντος πήμασιν διώλεσε | τὸν οὗ νοσοῦντα κοὐδὲν ἠδικηκότα.
84]. 22, ἦλθον γάρ πον κ-.ταλ. --- ‘others besides us have attacked their neighbours before now, and after doing what men will do have endured what men can bear. So now it is reasonable for us to hope that the gods will relent towards us
204 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
(for we deserve their pity now rather than their envy), and do vou, seeing what fine troops you are and how great the numbers that march in your ranks, be not excessively alarmed,’ etc.
23. ἀνθρώπεια «.r.A.—cf. Eur. Heraclid. 424 ἀλλ᾽ ἣν δίκαια
δρῶ δίκαια πείσομαι. Cic. Tuse. 1, 72 humana vitia= ἀνθρώπινα κακα. . _ 24. τά τε ἀπὸ τοῦ Oelov—the whole of this passage is very characteristic of Nicias. Cf. Herod. 111. 40 ἐμοὶ δὲ ai σαὶ μεγάλαι εὐτυχίαι οὐκ ἀρέσκουσι, τὸ θεῖον ἐπισταμένῳ ws ἔστι φθονερόν.
25. ἠπιώτερα---ἰὰ the old sense, expressing a father’s pity for his children, and hence transferred to the gods. Cf. the meanings of ἐπισκοπεῖν.
26. καὶ opevres—the transition from τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ θείου is purposely made abrupt, so as to exhibit the close connexion between the gods and men.
28. καταπέπληχθε -- strictly this should have been xara- πεπλῆχθαι after ra re ἐλπίζειν.
31. S&acro—‘ resist.’
ὃ 5 1. 32. τὴν δὲ πορείαν «.7.A.—‘do you yourselves look to your safety and discipline on the road ; let every man think that the ground on which he is forced to fight will be his country and fortress if he wins it.’
§ 61. 36. σπουδὴ δὲ---΄ we shall hurry.’
42. edpypévov—accus. ubs.
8 1]. 45. ἀναγκαῖόν τε Sv—argumnents drawn from τὸ ἀναγ- καῖον are common in Greek rhetoric.
49. of re dAAow—still depends on γνῶτε.
52. ἄνδρες γὰρ πόλις--- ἃ similar γνώμη occurs in many authors. Soph. 0.7. 56 ws οὐδέν ἐστιν οὔτε πύργος οὔτε ναῦς | ἐρῇμος ἀνδρῶν μὴ ξυνοικούντων ἔσω.
78 811}1.1. &pa—with παρακελευόμενος.
4, οὐδὲν ἧσσον --86. ἐπήει.
§ 21. 6. τὸ δὲ---8ο, στράτευμα. Apparently each of the two divisions formed its own square.
§31.10. καὶ ἐπειδὴ éyévovro—-the object of the A. before the last battle had been to reach Catana. Holm and Lupus think that they had given up all hope of reaching it. The alternative to Catana was some friendly town, west or south. Freeman and Grote think that, as long as they were trying to reach the Acraean rock (see c. 80), they still hoped to get to Catana, though of course by an indirect route. The Acraean rock is due west of Syr.
11. τῇ διαβάσει---ἰ,ο. where the regular route crossed the river.
15. és τὸ πρόσθεν---ἰιρ the ascent that leads to Floridia. They were now following the modern road.
NOTES 205
§ 41. 22. κατέβησαν — although the ἄπεδον, level ground
about Floridia, is higher than the road, yet Freeman thinks that this word is consistent with the ‘state of the ground immediately south of Floridia. Holm however thinks that either Thuc. has made a slip or the text is wrong.
§ δ]. 32. ᾿Ακραῖον Aéras—a height near Floridia, with broken rocks covered with straggling verdure. The position was very favourable to the Syr.
8 6]. 34. atrots—for the order cf. 111. 61, 1 wa μήτε ἢ ἡμετέρα αὐτοὺς κακία ὠφελῇ.
40. dpolws—‘as before.’
41. ἀποχωρεῖν---ἰ, ε. from the main body, for the purpose of foraging. 7
§11. 1. ἐβιάσαντο rpds—‘ forced their way to.’
6. οὐκ ἐπ’ ὀλίγων dowSev—‘in a deep line’; οὗ, 11. 90 ἐπὶ τεσσάρων ταξάμενοι τὰς ναῦς. The gen. is commoner than the accus., which is also used in these military phrases ; Xen. Hel, vi. 4, 12 ἐπὶ πεντήκοντα ἀσπίδων συνεστραμμένοι ; Aristoph. Frag. ἵστασθ᾽ ἐφεξῆς ἐπὶ τρεῖς ἀσπίδας.
8.4]. 9. διικνοῦντο--- βάλλοντες.
§ 31. 18. πρὸς perdwwpov—Aristoph. Eccles. 20 πρὸς ὄρθρον ἐστίν.
16. ἐπὶ τῷ σφετέρῳ 6.—cf. ἐπὶ κακῷ γίγνεσθαι.
8 4]. 20. ἐκ τοῦ ὄπισθον--ἰ, 6. ‘between their halting-place and their camp of the night before.’ Freeman.
8 δ]. 23. πρὸς τὸ πεδίον paddov—rather south of the halting- place of the two previous nights.
25. mpovxepovv—in what direction was this advance? ‘the generals now gave up the thought of forcing their way to that
rticular (Acraean] cliff by that particular pass [above
loridia]. Their object seems now to have been to find some other road, some other pass, in the same neighbourhood, which might lead them to the high ground [to the west], and which the Syr. might not have occupied.” Freeman. (The progress of the fifth day should not be marked in the plans by a line running straight to the south, but should bend away to the west with the ‘bend in the brook that forms the southern branch of the Cyane. )
26. πανταχῆ. . . κύκλῳ---ἰο be taken close together.
§6 1. 35. dveratovro—a little south of the camp of the previous night. :
79
811. 8. τῶν τε ἐ,... ἀπορίᾳ... καὶ... joav—these are 80
the two reasons given for κακῶς εἶχε, the principal clause re- placing a subordinate.
8. robvayrlov—i.e. no longer westwards, with no further attempt to reach the high ground.
206 OBOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
§ 21. 10. 4 ξύμπασα o5¢s—Holm says that this refers to the whole of the march ever since they left Lysimeleia. Freeman however refers it to what immediately precedes about πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν. He thinks that it was the road leading eventually to Catana that the Syr. had specially blocked. But neither view is satisfactory. It is clear that ἡ ξύμπασα ὁδὸς αὕτη (1) is contrasted with τὴν αὐτὴν ὁδὸν 5 διενοήθησαν, (2) implies nothing of necessity as to their previous purpose, being a geographical note about ἡ πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν ὁδός. Thuc. does not say that the A. no longer hoped to reach Catana, but that this road did not lead ultimately in that direction. The intention of the A. was throughout the same— ἀποχωρεῖν ἣ ἂν τάχιστα μέλλωσί τινος χωρίου. . . φιλίου ἀντι- λήψεσθαι c. 60, 2, whether circumstances offered Catana or any other place, (It is futile to discuss whether they intended ultimately to reach Catana or not. Probably the question was never discussed by them.)
§ 31.17. φόβοι καὶ δείματα éy.—epexegesis of οἷον. Note δεῖμα ‘panic,’ δέος ‘apprehension,’ φόβος ‘fear.’
18. [ἀπὸ]---ἃ dittography of the syllable that follows. If this were genuine, we should have amoiiow. Moreover ‘si quis ἀπό τινος ἔρχεται, quodam modo cum eo conjunctus fuisse et nunc ab eo segregari cogitatur.’ Sobolewski.
19. lotow—with αὐτοῖς.
8 δ]. 24. ἀφικνοῦνται — sc. τὸ Nexlov στράτευμα. ὅμως means notwithstanding the trouble caused by the disorder of Demosthenes’ division.
πρὸς τὴν @.—‘near to the coast.’
25. τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν ᾿Ιλωριγνὴν ---[Π6 ancient road from Syr. to its dependency Helorus, which had been seized from the Sicels in order to prevent them from reaching the S.E. corner of Sicily. N. reached the road at some point north of the Cacy paris.
27. ὅπως --- presumably this arrangement had been made with Demosthenes.
28. Kaxvwape—the Cassibile.
29, &ve—‘inland.’ They still hoped to reach the hill country of the Sicels.
#Amtov—Holm says that this sentence refers to c. 77, 6 προπέπεμπται ws αὐτούς etc., and that this proves that the <A. had not intended to get to Catana, since they had ordered the Sicels to meet them on the Cacyparis. But if they had pursued their original route over the Acraean rock, they might have come out somewhere near the source of the Cacyparis, but quite fourteen miles from where they now crossed the river. If they meant to follow the river up to some point which they
and
NOTES | 207
had been trying to reach from the first, still nothing is proved with regard to their ultimate intentions. Freeman thinks that Nicias had sent fresh messages to the Sicels when he changed his route. But it is quite likely that he assumed that the Sicels would march down the stream when they failed to find him higher up.
§ 6 1. 36. ἜἘρινεόν- τι is not certain what stream is meant ; but it is generally thought to be the Cavallata.
37. éxéXevov—sc. xwpetyv—this was done in the hope that they might find some way into the interior that was unoccupied by the enemy.
§11. 2. ἡ fppépa—z.c. the day referred to above.
3. iva . . . εἶχον -Ξ ἠτιῶντο.
§ 21.9. ὑστέροις oto.—it is not known whether Demosth. crossed the Cacyparis or not.
10. rére—referring to c. 80, 4.
18. δίχα δὴ Svras—sc. ἀπὸ τῶν μετὰ Νικίου.
8 8]. 16. θασσόν re—this is answered by ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης below, τε. . . δέ replacing μὲν... δέ, as often in tragedy. Cf. 111. 52 τούς re ἀδίκονς κολάσειν, παρὰ δίκην δ᾽ οὐδένα. ΑΒ for τε γὰρ meaning namque, there is no certainty that it occurs in good Attic. Several passages cited by Shilleto on Demosth.
. 7. 176 are corrupt, and the rest are. prob. instances of anacoluthon. Generally where re is not answered by καὶ there is a parenthesis, which interrupts the construction, as in Plat. Gorg. p. 524 B where τό re σῶμα is eventually answered by ταὐτὸν δή μοι δοκεῖ. . . καὶ περὶ τὴν ψυχήν.
16. ἐν τῷ rovotre—this phrase is used of circumstances of any kind.
17. ἑκόντας εἶναι---εἶναι is infin. of limitation, and in this phrase is almost confined to neg. sentences.
19. ὅσ᾽ ἂν ἀναγκάζωνται --- δὲ C has ὅσα ἀναγκάζωνται, Dobree’s correction, by which the sense is much improved, should be accepted.
8 4]. 20. τὰ wAdw—plerumque.
25. ἐνδιατρίβων ---υἱΖ. ἐν τῷ ξυντάσσεσθαι. Note the word, which is useful.
28. dveAnOévres—synonym of συστραφέντες.
ts τι xoplov—Plutarch says this was the estate that had belonged to Polyzelus, probably the brother of Gelon, Hiero, hrasybulus, the tyrants.
29. ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν--- οὐ both sides.’ (Leake, Grote, and Freeman wrongly translate as though it were ἄντικρυς.)
30. weptoradév—found, except here, only in Herod. and poets.
8 δ]. 31. ξνσταδὸν pdxats—adverb qualifying verbal noun, as ce. 84, 6, 1. 34; 71, 3.
208 BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦῊΣ Z
35. φειδώ τις éylyvero—with τῳ = πᾶς τις ἐφείδετο.
36. ἐπ᾿ . --κὸ in. The μὴ is inserted because hindrance is implied.
Ὁ §11. 8. τῶν νησιωτῶν — who might he expected to be willing to desert. Cf. c. 57, 4.
εἴ τις βούλεται -- τὸν βουλόμενον. No infin. is then added.
ἐπ᾽ ἐλευθερίᾳ.“ ὀχ pressing the terms, as in ἐπὶ τούτοις, etc.
10. οὐ wodAal—we cannot be sure that it was loyalty to Athens that prevented more from going over, though Grote seems to assume it.
§ 21.11. ὁ. γίγνεται do-re—the active in 111. 28, 1 ποιοῦνται ὁμολογίαν wore. This use of ὥστε is very common.
§ 31.17. ἐς ἀσπίδας trrlas—Aristoph. Lysist, 185 θὲς és τὸ πρόσθεν ὑπτίαν τὴν ἀσπίδα.
18. rotrovs—Philistus of Syracuse, a contemporary historian, related that Demosth. attempted to commit suicide, but was prevented by the enemy. The fact is reported by Plutarch and Pausanias.
22. καθῖσε τὴν o.—observe that Thuc. uses the earlier form of the augment whenever there are two ways of augmenting a verb: 6.0. χρῆν, not ἐχρῆν ; καθῖζον, not ἐκάθιζον ; ἐνηντιούμην, not ἠναντιούμην ; see Rutherford New Phryn. p. 81; and for the Attic uses of καθίζω 4b. p. 336.
83 81]. 5. σπένδεται--- [6 middle expresses reciprocity. πέμψαι--- σπένδομαι can also take fut. infin.
8.81. 16. tBadAdAov—Plutarch adds πρὸς ὕβριν καὶ μετ᾽ ὀργῆς ἀπειλοῦντες.
17. καὶ robrovs—as they had done before to Demosth.
§ 41.19. pvddgavres—cf. 11. ὃ φυλάξαντες ἔτι νύκτα =‘ wait- ing for the time when it was still night.’
τὸ hovxdtov—cf. c. 68, 1 1. 7.
20. dvadapBdvovel re... xal—parataxis, as often with re... kal, kal... καὶ, μὲν. .. δὲ,
8 δ]. 25. éxapovv—they were afterwards caught; c. 85, 2.
84 811.1. 4ye—still along the Helorine road, hoping to find an unguarded way to the right.
§ 21.6. “Acolvapov—the name only occurs in the accounts - of the retreat. It is identified as the Falconara.
7. Gua μὲν Bratdpevor— ‘because, being harassed by the cavalry and: the light-armed, they thought that they would be somewhat better off if they crossed the river, and also owing to their suffering and thirst.’ One cause of ἠπείγοντο is οἰόμενοι, the other is ὑπὸ τῆς ταλαιπωρίας. The rest, βιαζόμενοι... ὄχλον, is subordinate to οἰόμενοι. So Bauer, Kriiger, Classen, Fr. Miller. Poppo made βιαζόμενοι depend on ἠπείγοντο, and οἰόμενοι as well ; but in all other cases in which two participles
NOTES 209
stand thus in the same relation to the verb, Thue. either joius them by καὶ or places the verb between them. Stahl places οἰόμενοι. . . ποταμόν after ταλαιπωρίας, and this greatly im-
proves the sense, since it is hard to see the bearing of
βιαζόμενοι on οἰόμενοι. Why should the attacks diminish after they had crossed the river? Perhaps the A. thought they would then turn off to the right and shake off the enemy to some extent. (In any case the sentence is not a good one.)
8 31.19. περί τε... StebOelpovro—cf. πίπτειν, πταίειν and σφάλλεσθαι περὶ with dat. ; but the construction is poetical and Ionic.
20. oxeverryv—‘ accoutrements.’
21. ἐμπαλασσόμενοι = ἐμπλεκόμενοι. The word occurs no- where else in Attic.
§ 41. 21. ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ Odrepa—regarded as one word.
23. tv—the subject to be supplied from the context.
25. ko(Aw—with a deep bed ; a meaning that occurs several
times in Plutarch, 6.0. Lucul. c. 24.
§5 1. 26. érucaraBdvres—both banks of the Assinarus are steep, and the water, as usual in Sicily, does mot fill the whole of its bed, which is wide. The Pel. went down the bank into the bed and cut down the A., while the Syr. stood on the opposite bank to prevent the A. from getting across.
28. εὐθὺς 8iébGapro—the plup. is occasionally thus used with εὐθὺς to express a result hastily arrived at, esp. in com- bination with the imperf., eg. Demosth. 19, 154 τότ᾽ εὐθὺς ἐγνώκειν καὶ προεωρώμην. :
29, ὁμοῦ τῷ wnrdg—with ἐπίνετο.
8 1]. 4. τοῦ μὲν. . . τοῦ &—apposition to διεφθαρμένου.
7. πιστεύσας paddov—‘N. had always been, as far as his duty allowed him, a friend of Sparta.’ Freeman.
8. σασθαι... ὅ τι BotAovrar—regular formula for an unconditional surrender.
11. dovevovras—an Ionic word, found often in tragedy and Herod., and four times in Thuc. See Rutherford, New Phryn. p- 15.
§ 21, 13. ἀπεκρύψαντο ---8.. of Συρακόσιοι, ‘hid for their own purposes,’ to keep or to sell.
16. τοὺς Siwfopévouvs—the fut. partic. with art.—not a very common construction—refers to no definite person.
§ 31.17. τὸ. . . ἁθροισθὲν.---ἴον the neut. cf. c. 48, 7.
és τὸ kowwdv—just as τὸ κοινὸν is used of the state treasury, since the prisoners became state property.
20. ἀπὸ EupBdorews—cf. c. 82, 2 ὁμολογία γίγνεται. In the case of Demosth. there were definite terms and his men surrendered to the state.
Ρ
868
210 ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦῊΣ Z
§ 41. 28. ἐντῷ.... πολέμῳ τούτῳ---[θγ6 have been from early times two ways of understanding this passage: (1) the scholiast thinks that Thuc. is comparing the disaster at the Assinarus with those of the Pel. war generally : accordingly he thinks Σικελικῷ is wrong. So Kriiger, Stahl: (2) Valla understands him to be comparing this disaster with other battles of the Sicilian war. The scholiast is probably right, since there is no other instance of great carnage, φόνος or σφαγή, in the Sicilian war with which the last disaster could be aptly compared ; and as Thuc. was writing the history of the Sicilian expedition, not as a separate work, but as part of his general history, it is strange that he should speak of the Sicilian campaigns only in giving an idea of the extent of the Joss. (Arnold says ‘ it is as if an historian of the French campaign in Russia were to say of their loss at the Beresina, ‘‘that it was greater than on any other occasion throughout this Russian campaign.”’ But, after the losses of 1812, that statement would convey an idea of awful slaughter, whereas this does not.)
27. wapaur(xa—these weresome cavalry, who under command of Callistratus made their escape to Catana, Pausanias vil. 16, 4.
29. ἐς Kardvnv—among these were Tydeus, afterwards one of the generals at Aegospotami, and the sun of Polystratus for whom Lysias wrote the speech ὑπὲρ Πολυστράτου. They con- tinued to fight for Catana against Syr. Lys. 20, 24.
§11. 3. τὰ oxt\a—Plut. Nic. 27 says that the finest trees on the banks of the Assinarus were decked with A. panoplies.
§21. 5. xareB(Bacav—by a decree passed in the assembly at Syr. after a debate of which Diodorus and Plutarch give details. The quarries are among the most striking features of Syracusan topography, most of them running in a long row along the S8.E. side of Achradina. They are now disused and exceedingly picturesque. The date of the sentence is about the middle of September.
8. ἄκοντος Γυλίππου --- Hermocrates also, as Diod. and Plut. relate, spoke against the motion which was proposed by a leader of the democrats.
9. ἀπέσφαξαν — we know from Plutarch that Philistus agreed with Thue. that Demosth. and N. were put to death, and this confirmation by the contemporary Sicilian historian is too strong to be set aside by the story of Timaeus that they were allowed to commit suicide. (The manner of their death is unknown ; in Plut. Mic. c. 28 Δημοσθένην δὲ καὶ N. ἀποθανεῖν Τίμαιος οὔ φησιν ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων καταλευσθέντας (or κελευσθέντας), ὡς Φίλιστος ἔγραψε καὶ Θουκυδίδης, I believe
‘that we should read καταδεθέντας unless καταλευσθέντας could
NOTES : 211
mean ‘cast into the stone quarries,’ as Hesych. explains the word. ) 11. rots &\Aou—se. ἀγωνίσμασι. 8 8]. 14. #—Sphacteria, in 425 3.c. 18. ὥστε vai-—depends on προυθυμήθη : cf. c. 62, 4; 5
77, 5.
8 δ]. 31. διὰ τὴν πᾶσαν «.7.A4.—describe the ethical ex- cellence of N.; for ἐπιτήδευσιν shows that Thue. is not thinking of the military sense of ἀρετή, On the whole he uses ἀρετὴ as Plato does, i.e. as embracing the four cardinal virtues, ἀνδρεία, σωφροσύνη, δικαιοσύνη, φρόνησις, and, though later writers had an idea that N. was a coward, there is nothing to show that he was more than a moral coward. Thuc. himself admits moral cowardice on the part of N. when he attributes super- stition to him. The construction is disputed, but it is natural to suppose that both πᾶσαν and νενομισμένην belong to ἐπιτή- δευσιν, not to ἀρετήν. Trans. ‘because he had directed his course of life wholly in accordance with virtuous principles,’ 2.6. in accordance with elementary ethical principles, not in accordance with any school of philosophy. voulgw=I put into practice ; ἐπιτήδευσις =a theory of lite, on which concrete ἐπιτηδεύματα are based. Thuc. attributes οὐ δημοτικὴ παρανομία to Alcibiades. We recall too the sneer of Plato in Phaedo 82 A ol τὴν δημοτικήν τε καὶ πολιτικὴν ἀρετὴν ἐπιτετηδευκότες, ἣν δὴ καλοῦσι σωφροσύνην τε καὶ δικαιοσύνην, ἐξ ἔθους τε καὶ μελέτης γεγονυῖαν ἄνεν φιλοσοφίας τε καὶ νοῦ.
811. 8. perexepioav—Thuc., like Herod., uses the act. of 87 this word, whereas other authors use the middle.
5. of Avor—the lur. is intensive, as in θέρμαι, καύματα.
8. ἐς ἀσθένειαν ἐνεωτέριζον. Ἴἶκὸ βάλλειν or τρέπειν εἷς, of some enforced change of state; ‘through the change of tem- perature induced disease.’
§21. 10. τῶν νεκρῶν... οὗ... dwéOvyqoxov—it appears that νεκροὶ ἀποθνήσκουσι is possible Greek, as in Plut. Pyr-. rhus c. 21 τραυμάτων πολλῶν γενομένων καὶ νεκρῶν πεσόντων, and perhaps Thuc. 11. 52 νεκροὶ ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοις ἀποθνήσκοντες ἕκειντο.
15, ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ pfivas—sc. daily. This allowance is what was called in c. 82 ἡ ἀναγκαιοτάτη δίαιτα, and is half that which was given toa slave. Diodorus, following the Sicilian acceunt, says that each man received two χοίνικες of meal, ¢.e. four times as much as two κοτύλαι.
16. ἄλλα S0a—for ὅσα ἄλλα, found also in 11. 96, 3.
ἐν τῷ τ... ἐμπεπτωκότας---ἐν is occasionally used with verbs of motion.
18. éweyévero—accidit.
212 BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®HS Z
$31. 20. πλὴν ᾿Α. «.7.A.—comparing 1. 15 we see that these were kept in the quarries some six months longer.
8 δ]. 25. épyov—used in its vague, euphemistic sense, as in τὸ περὶ τὸν Ἴτυν ἔργον.
26. [Ἑλληνικὸν]---[ὁ be omitted, since there is no contrast between the doings of Greeks and of other men.
28. Soxetv—infin. of limitation ; c. 49, 3.
ὧν dxoq—cf. Herod. vir. 170 φόνος Ἑλληνικὸς μέγιστος οὗτος δὴ ἐγένετο πάντων ὧν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν, of the destruction of the Tarentines and Rhegines by the lapyges.
§ 61.30. κατὰ πάντα... wdvrws—paronomasia, to emphasise the statement.
32, πανωλεθρίᾳ --οἴ. πανώλεθρος ἀπόλλυσθαι in tragedy.
34. ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν ---ἃ common collocation.
35. ἀπενόστησαν---ἰ!6 well-known story in Plut. Nic. ο. 29 that some gained liberty or shelter by reciting Euripides is by no means improbable ; for, apart from the great popularity of Euripides, the Athenian slaves, weakened by suffering and unused to manual labour, must have been a burden to their owners. With the Athenian retreat we might compare the retreat of Antony from Parthia in 36 B.c. Cf. Browning Balaustion’s Adventure, and Byron Childe Harold τν. 16
When Athens’ armies fell at Syracuse,
And fetter’d thousands bore the yoke of war,
Redemption rose up in the Attic Muse,
Her voice their only ransom from afar :
See ! as they chant the tragic hymn, the car
Of the o’ermaster’d victor stops, the reins
Fall from his hands, his idle scimitar
Starts from its belt—he rends his captive’s chains, And bids him thank the bard for freedom and his strains.
APPENDIX I] ON THE FIRST HARANGUE OF NICIAS
ce. 61-64
THis speech has gained much admiration from both ancient and modern critics. Dionysius of Halicarnassus, a severe and often unjust censor of Thucydides, rightly praises the vivid- ness of the language and its lucidity. Blass thinks that the greatest of the military harangues written by Thucydides are this and the reply, as we may call it, that Gylippus makes to it ; and Jebb says that it is ‘in a high degree powerful and pathetic.’ Wherein lies the secret of its pathos? It lies in this, that the Athenian army is here taken to be the very city itself. From the opening words of thé Exordium to the last sentence of the Peroration this idea runs through the whole speech. Like their ancestors when they fought at Salamis, the men that are themselves the state are about to stake their all on the recovery of their city and on her very existence.
But great as are the merits of the speech, they should not have blinded the critics to the serious blemishes that mar it. These blemishes are (a) a tendency to excessive subtlety, (δ) an unfortunate refinement on the central idea, (c) excessive compression of thought, (¢) awkward expressions. It is true that these are faults that are admitted to deface many of the speeches. But Thuc. can shake himself free from them when he tries. The last speech of Nicias is entirely free from such defects : and Thuc. should have considered that the occasion on which this first harangue was delivered was too solemn for rhetorical trivialities and tricks of compression.
(a) Excessive subtlety.—Mure points out that this is a very commen fault in Thuc. ; but the last speech of Nicias is a splendid example of its avoidance. It should have been equally avoided here.
214 APPENDIX I
1. C. 61, 1 opens with a subtle comparison between the objects for which the two sides are contending. ‘Both sides are contending περί re σωτηρίας καὶ πατρίδος. This is casuistic, because it is plain that the Syracusans were not contending for these objects in the same sense that the Athenians were. Whatever might be the issue, Syracuse was now safe ; since, even in case of victory, Nicias intended to retreat. The Syracusans had previously been contending for the retention of their city: the Athenians were now to contend for the recovery of theirs.
2. C. 63, 3 καὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς τῆς ἡμετέρας οὐκ ἔλασσον κατὰ τὸ ὠφελεῖσθαι ἔς τε τὸ φοβερὸν τοῖς ὑπηκόοις καὶ τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖσθαι πολὺ πλεῖον perelxere. This statement, made about the sailors, is true ; but it is true only in a sense. While the meaning of the words is plain, the thought that underlies them is far- fetched.
3. C. 64 closes with a subtle argument that is intended to encourage the listeners to put forth all their power. The argument is put in the form of an enthymeme, which is so elaborated that the final appeal is to some extent spoiled by the rhetorical form in which it is made.
(6) There is an unfortunate refinement on the central idea. — Instead of concentrating the attention of his hearers on their common ties and on the essential unity of the Athenian empire, the speaker draws a careful distinction between the Athenians and non-Athenians. This distinction is made at the beginning of the speech in τὴν ὑπάρχουσάν που οἰκείαν πόλιν. It is afterward8 drawn out in c. 63, 3 in a passage that illustrates a remark of Mure that one of the defects in the genius of Thucydides is ‘a deficiency in the faculty of Taste,’ and reminds us rather too forcibly of the errors to which even the greatest are prone when there is as yet no standard of taste in existence. Thuc. has told us that he made his speakers say what it seemed to him most opportune for them to say in view of each situation—that is to say, as Jebb explains, ‘what the occasion required.’ On the other hand, Dionysius declares that the speakers occasionally utter senti- ments which, however just and striking in themselves, are nevertheless inappropriate to the occasion. In another passage, the great critic praises this speech for its freedom from this fault. But is it really appropriate on so solemn an occasion to remind the ξένοι and μέτοικοι that they were not true Athenians, and that they had been in the habit of filling with alarm the ὑπήκοοι of Athens? Even if there were no possibility of giving offence to the ξένοι and μέτοικοι themselves, what would the ὑπήκοοι who stood in the audience think of the statement ?
APPENDIX I 215
In c. 64, 1 the reminder αὐτοὶ ἴστε οἵᾳ γνώμῃ ἐπήλθετε is not wltogether well-timed ; and the same remark applies to the whole of the warning contained in the passage.
This occasional lack of propriety is an error in what the Greek rhetoricians call εὕρεσις, the Romans inventio—that is to say, in the choice of material: and it is right to point out that in this branch of rhetoric Thucydides as a rule excels among Greek orators.
(c) Excessive compression of thought.—The general drift of the speech is perfectly clear. But the unfortunate distinction that has been drawn between Athenians and non- Athenians necessitates that in the appeal to the feelings which the Peroration rightly contains, the speaker should insist on the essential unity of his hearers and on the one object for which they fight. And so a reference to Athens as the centre of every man’s hope must be brought in.
In order to set this object clearly before them and to give point to his appeal Nicias bids them reflect that they now are Athens. But so briefly is the thought expressed that the last sentence of the speech forms a curious commentary on the earlier words ᾿Αθηναῖοι νομιΐζόμενοι, καὶ μὴ ὄντες, There is really no contradiction, but there is undue brevity. What the speaker should have said is surely to this effect: ‘ Finally, my comrades, whether you be Athenians or not, remember that you are all that are left to Athens ; nay, Athenians or no, you are Athens; you represent her majesty ; and in fighting for her, you will be doing the best for yourselves.’ Thus, while bringing the central idea into due prominence at the close, he would not have left his previous distinction in the lurch.
This difficulty is partly caused by the abruptness of the transition from the Proof to the Peroration. Thuc. does not make it clear that the Epilogue is addressed to everybody, and not exclusively to the Athenians,
(α) Awkward ecxpressions—viz. 1. the antithesis between ἐλευθέρως and δικαίως in c. 63, 4. 2. ἐλευθέρως itself and the adjacent words are inappropriate, because they are limited to the ναῦται, and would be likely to cause offence to the ὑπήκοοι. 3. The paronomasia καταπροδίδοτε, καταφρονήσαντες in the context is objectionable. 4. περὶ ὧν in the Peroration is ambiguous, since ὧν may be either neut. or fem. 5. ol ἐν rats ναυσὶ νῆες εἰσί 15 bad. .
APPENDIX II
REMARKS ON CERTAIN PASSAGES
.SincE the notes were printed, the second part of Herbst's Erklérungen und Wiederherstellungen has appeared. The following is a list of the passages in this book in which Herbst has arrived at new results that appear to me to be correct, or, at least, valuable.
C. 14, 1. Classen and Stahl, following some older edd., render βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ πληρώματος ‘the efficient part of a ship’s crew is small.” I have said that βραχεῖα is probably temporal here. By carefully examining the context, Herbst has made it clear that this is the case. | .
C. 27, 4 ὁτὲ μὲν καὶ πλειόνων ἐπιόντων, ὁτὲ δ᾽ ἐξ ἀνάγκης τῆς ἴσης φρουρᾶς καταθεούσης τε τὴν χώραν καὶ λῃστείας ποιουμένης. The interpretation of this passage which is given by Stahl is manifestly erroneous, and was scarcely worth a detailed re- futation. Herbst agrees with the explanation that I have given in the notes, except that he understands ἐξ ἀνάγκης to mean ‘according to fixed arrangement,’ the cities of Peloponnese being bound to send a fixed contingent periodically. But (1) this sense is ill-suited to xaradeovons and ποιουμένης, which allude to operations directed from Decelea, and not to the contingents arriving successively from Peloponnese ; (2) if ἐξ ἀνάγκης meant this, it would apply equally to πλειόνων ἐπιόντων : for κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην, ἐξ ἀνάγκης, etc., when so used apply to the permanent obligation to service that is incurred under a defensive and offensive alliance ; and the Pelopon- nesian allies would be as much bound by their alliance with Sparta to sgnd πλείονας if required, and in fact to send any number of men up to two-thirds of their fighting strength.
C. 28, 2. Herbst defends of μὲν ἐφ᾽ ὅπλοις ποιούμενοι, sc. τὴν φυλακὴν from the preceding φυλάσσοντες. This is probably right, though some of the parallels that he cites are doubtful.
nee ew “πα πππσιιαῖν.
APPENDIX II | 217
C. 28, 8. μάλιστα δ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἐπίεζεν ὅτι δύο πολέμοις ἅμα εἶχον, καὶ ἐς φιλονικίαν καθέστασαν τοιαύτην ἣν πρὶν γενέσθαι ἠπίστησεν ἄν τις ἀκούσας, τὸ γὰρ αὐτοὺς κτλ. Herbst retains τὸ γὰρ (for which I have substituted τό γ᾽ ἄν) and he translates ‘namely that they should.’ This goes back to the explanation of yap given by Shilleto at 1. 25. Herbst maintains that τὸ here, as well as in c. 36, 5, c. 67, 1 (where I have followed Kriiver) and in a large number of other passages that are usually explained otherwise, is itself absolute and does not influence the con- struction of the sentence and was freely used to point, as it were with the finger, to what is coming afterwards. If so, both τὸ and γὰρ fulfil the saine purpose; for both then introduce and emphasise the epexegesis that follows. The ‘absolute use’ of τὸ is to be found in Arnold's notes, but it has very generally been abandoned as being unscientific ; for it is really unexplained—even with the help of all the examples that Herbst has collected—either on the historical or on the logical principle. The objection to γὰρ is of course that it is used with an explanatory infin. here instead of introducing a new sentence.
The proposal to take τὸ γὰρ. . . movjoacas an exclamation, to which reference is made in the notes, was first made by Mr. Wratislaw in the Journal of Philology.
καὶ τὸν παράλογον τοσοῦτον ποιῆσαι... ὅσον Kar ἀρχὰς Tov πολέμου, οἱ μὲν ἐνιαυτόν, οἱ δὲ δύο, οἱ δὲ τριῶν γε ἐτῶν οὐδεὶς πλείω χρόνον, ἐνόμιζον περιοίσειν αὐτούς, εἰ οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι ἐσβάλοιεν ἐς τὴν χώραν, ὥστε ἔτει κιτιλ. Herbst makes ὥστε correlative to τοσοῦτον, and renders ὅσον ‘as,’ taking ὅσον. .. és τὴν χώραν as a parenthesis. But it seems that a sharp contrast between the one or two or three years and the six- teenth year is needed to explain the παράλογος, and that the difference between them gives the measure of τοσοῦτον.
’ He thinks that οἱ δὲ τριῶν γε ἐτῶν οὐδεὶς πλείω χρόνον - 15 elliptic for οἱ δὲ ἡρία ἔτη, τριῶν δέ γε ἐτῶν οὐδεὶς πλείω χρόνον. This is no better than Bubendey’s proposal (in the Hamb. Festschrift written in Herbst’s honour) to omit the second oi δέ, for there is a limit to the amount of sense that even Thucydides can pack into his words.
C. 56, 4. Herbst retains τοῦ ξύμπαντος λόγοι (MSS.; Kr.
N ket
ὄχλου), and thinks it equivalent to τοῦ ξύμπαντος ξνλλόγου.
APPENDIX III
ATHENS FROM JULY 414 TO SEPT. 413
DuRinG the first six of the fourteen months covered by this book, life at Athens proceeded in the ordinary way. A few men whom good democrats regarded as half-crazy, like Meton and Socrates, foresaw that trouble was impending, and many moderate democrats like Aristophanes were fittle satisfied with the current of Athenian thought and manners. But politics were now swayed by the democratic party, to which the political agitation that followed the mutilation of the Hermae had been a great gain. Among the strategi who entered on office in July 414 were Demosthenes, the hero of the Aetolian expedition, Conon, who commanded the squadron that lay off Naupactus, and Charicles, who had been one of the com- missioners appointed to investigate the Hermocopid affair. These were all democrats. So doubtless was the upstart Diitrephes, who in the next summer was in charge of the barbarous attack made on Mycalessus (c. 29). He had been successively phylarch and hipparch. Other ‘strategi, besides Nicias, were Euetion, who in conjunction with Perdiccas, made an attempt to recover Amphipolis, and Eurymedon, who was sent to Sicily in December.
The drama as yet showed no signs of decline. Sophocles, though now over eighty, still retained his powers. Euripides, fifteen years the junior of Sophocles, was busily writing for the stage. Other writers of tragedy now flourishing were Agathon, Iophon the son of Sophocles, Philocles nephew of Aeschylus, aud Xenocles, son of Carcinus, who had gained an unmerited victory over Euripides six months before. The license of the Old Comedy had recently been checked to some extent by a vote of the Ecclesia; yet Aristophanes andl Phrynichus and Pherecrates and many others moved fairly easily in their
APPENDIX III 219
fetters. The Birds had been produced in Dec. 415, and the Amphiaraus of Aristophanes in Feb. 414.
Athenian prose literature had not yet attained its full development. Thucydides was busily collecting materials during his wanderings. Xenophon was about seventeen years old ; and two other fistorians iving in Athens, Herodicus and Cratippus, had probably written nothing at this date. On the other hand, Plato’s uncle Critias, who tried almost every branch of literature with considerable success, had already appeared as an author of prose, and was perhaps responsible for the little tract on the Athenian Constitution which is wrongly ascribed to Xenophon.?
Athenian sculpture, since the death of Phidias in 432, had passed into the hands of his pupils. The most famous sculptor now living—Polyclitus—was an Argive. Of the pupils of Phidias, the most distinguished were Agoracritus and Alcamenes. Agoracritus was a native of Paros, but he seems to have lived at Athens. He made the renowned Khamnusian Nemesis to which a mutilated head in the British Museum is believed to have belonged. Of the works of Alcamenes nothing is known to exist. At this date the adornment of the Acropolis was still incomplete. The temple of Wingless Victory had been finished a few years before ; but the Erechtheum was not finished in 409 B.c. Nevertheless the eastern half of it, which formed the temple of Athena Polias, was now approaching completion.
It may be convenient to add that in 414 8.0. Socrates was fifty-four years of age; Isocrates was twenty-two; Plato was fifteen ; Isaeus was a child. Antiphon was y writing for the courts.
The archon eponymus from July 414 to July 413 was the cowardly Pisander, at present an ardent democrat. He hat been on the board of investigation with Chariclesin 415. Prominent demagogues of the day were Androcles and Cleonymus, both of them active workers against the Hermocopids, and both constantly attacked by the comic poets. Androcles was murdered in 411 B.c., and his place as head of the extreme democrats was then taken by Cleophon, who was already becoming known in political life.
Early in 418 the Spartans invaded Attica and occupied Decelea. Thus the Peace of 421 was formally brought to an end. The grounds for the invasion were that Athens had aided Argos against Sparta in the summer of 414 with a fleet ; they had also made an attack on Epidaurus in Laconia and on other coast towns. The evil consequences of the occupation of
1 A good note on this question will be found in Mr. Dakyns’ excellent translation. .
220 | APPENDIX III
‘Decelea were immediately felt in Athens. They may be readily gathered from the marginal analysis of cc. 27,28. Yet, even while the place was being fortified, Charicles went out with a fleet to harry the coasts of the Peloponnese, and Demosthenes started for Sicily with his powerful armament. This mission of Charicles accords with the regular practice of the Athenians, instituted by Pericles at the beginning of the war. It was impossible for the Athenians, even at the height of their power, to put an army in the field capable of withstanding the acedaemonian invaders, and a system of making descents on the coasts of Peloponnese was the only effective counter-plan that they could adopt. ' But what a strange position for Athens to be in! The docks that had held four hundred ships of war stood almost empty : the fleet on which she relied, the ναυτικὸς ὄχλος that had enjoyed more influence than any other body of the citizens, even her right over the soil of Attica seemed to have melted away from her; she had become a mere fortress crowded with soldiers past their prime or too young for service, and she had not means ready to hand for their support. Yet she managed to bear up under these difficulties, even when aggravated by the destruction of the armament in Sicily.
.The strategi who entered on office in July 413 included in all probability (in addition to Nicias, Demosthenes, and Eurymedon) Aristocrates, Diomedon, Hippocles, Leon, and Strombichides. Of these Aristocrates became a leader of the moderate party among the Four Hundred and an associate of Theramenes. Diomedon, Leon, and Strombichides were all notable democrats shortly after this time ; and two of them, Leon! and Strombichides, were unjustly put to death under the Thirty. Early in 412 Hippocles succeeded in intercepting the Peloponnesian squadron that was returning from Syracuse after the war. One ship was captured and the rest escaped with considerable damage. Another new strategus was Diphilus, who was at once sent to succeed Conon at Naupactus.
Though the oligarchs had been debased of late, yet had their clubs or. associations for political and judicial purposes not ceased to exist. In the following year these clubs, en- couraged by the Sicilian disaster, the Decelean War, the intervention of Tissaphernes on behalf of Sparta, the revolt of the allies, and the intrigues of Alcibiades, will exhibit extra- ordinary energy and boldness. Alcibiades and Andocides,
1 We may assume that it is to Leon the strategus of this year that Andocides 1. 94 alludes. His death was caused by Meletus, one of the accusers of Andocides and perhaps identical with Meletus accuser of Socrates.
APPENDIX III: 221
both of whom were now oligarchs, were in exile. Reference has already been made to Critias and Aristocrates. But two other oligarchs, who afterwards became members of the Thirty, had already gained notoriety. These were Theogenes and Aeschines,! who, it should appear, were men of ability, but, being poor, disgusted people by imitating the follies and extravagance of richer men. Prominent among rich men was the notorious Callias, son of Hipponicus, who was fast ridding himself of the enormous fortune that he had inherited ten years before from his father. A dilettante so idle and careless as Callias can scarcely be said to have belonged to any political party. He was, however, proxenus of Sparta, and the office of torch-bearer at the Eleusinian Mysteries was hereditary in his amily.*
Nicias and Demosthenes lost their lives in Sicily two months after they had entered on office for 413: while Eury- medon had already fallen before the final catastrophe. Accord- ing to a story in Athenaeus (third century A.D.), when the news of the disaster reached Athens, the people were watching a performance of a parody by Hegemon of Thasos, the author who first brought this kind of entertainment on to the Attic stage. The piece was a humorous representation of the scene that Phidias had embossed upon the inside of the shield that rested at the side of his renowned gold and ivory Athena which stood in the Parthenon—the scene of the battle between the giants and the gods. The story is worth recording mainly because it shows that a new kind of spectacle was exhibited just about this time. But probably the dates have been doctored to some extent; for it is unlikely that stage plays were ever exhibited in the autumn during the fifth century, the story is too neat to be accepted on the sole authority of Athenaeus, and it is suspicions that Plutarch does not record a circumstance that might by him have been turned to such good account.
1 To be distinguished from the philosopher and the orator. 2 For other details respecting this interesting man, see Smith’s Dict. of
‘Biography.
GREEK INDEX
x» The numbers in all cases refer to chapter and section. The number of the section is followed hy 7 where the reference is both to the text and to the notes.
A ἁθρόοι χωρεῖν 84, 8, διαιτᾶ- σθαι 87, 2 ᾿Αγάθαρχος, Syr. admiral, 70, 1 ἀθυμῶ καὶ ἐν μεγάλῃ μεταβολῇ ἀγαθοὶ ἄνδρες γίγνεσθαι 77, 7 εἰμί 76; ἐν παντὶ δὴ ἀθυμίας ἀγγέλλω: ἀγγέλλων... ἔπεμπε) εἶναι δῦ, 1 8, 1 π; ἀγγέλλοντας. . . αἰγιαλὸς 87, 8; 74,2, The ἔπεμψαν 25, 9; ἤγγελλον ordinary prose word, but βελτίω τὰ ἐν Σικελίᾳ 17, 3 ἢ not to be used if θάλασσα
ἄγγελμα 74, 1 will do as well *Ays, Spartan king, 19, 1; | ἀίδιος ἐμπειρία 21, 3 27, 4 alxia 75, 6n ἀγορὰ παρεσκευάσθη 40, 1 αἱματῶ : ἡματωμένον ὕδωρ 84, 5 ἀγχώμαλα ναυμαχεῖν 71, 4 αἴρω : ἄρας ‘starting’ by sea or ἄγω: ἄξων παρασκευήν, orpa-| land, 26, 1; 69, 4; 79, 1; Tidy, ᾧχετο 12,1; 46 ἡρμένος ‘raised’ 41, 2
ἀγών : ἀγῶνας ποιεῖσθαι 49, 2; | αἰσθάνομαι (1) with partic. 2, ἄξιος ὁ d. 56, 3; ὑπὲρ καλῶν 2; 69, 1; 81, 1; (2) with 64. 66,1; κοινὸς 6d. 6], 1 :} ὅτι 65, 1 2; (8) with accus. ἐν a. καθεστάναι 64, 2 2;' 8, lal. πολὺν τὸν ἀ. ἔχειν 71, 1 αἰσχρός : ἐπ᾽ αἰσχρᾷ τε αἰτίᾳ
ἀγώνισμα καλὸν 56, 22; 59, καὶ ἀδίκως 48,4; ἡ αἰσχίστη
2; 86, 2 | ἐπίκλησις Ξε ἡ δουλεία ‘ politi- ἀγωνισμὸς κυβερνητῶν 70, 3 cal dependence’ 68, 2 ἀδυνασία τοῦ λέγειν 8, 2 n αἰτεῖν : αἰτῆσαι ἀναίρεσιν νεκρῶν
ἀδύνατος ‘ powerless’ 14, 2 al.;| 72,2 ‘incapable’ 15, 1 2; ἀδύ- αἰτία : ἐν αἰτίᾳ ἔχειν with infin.
νατοι τοῖς χρήμασι 28, 4; 81, ἀδύνατον ὅν 44, 4 αἰωροῦμαι 77, 2 ἀήσσητος 44, 3 ἄκαιρος : οὐκ ad. πέμψιν νεῶν
ἁθροίζω ‘concentrate’ 88, 6; ποιεῖσθαι 17, 8
224
ἀκινδύνως ἀπελθεῖν 68, ὃ n ἀκμάξω: τὸ ναυτικὸν ἀκμάζει with dat. of manner 12, 3 ἀκμὴ πληρώματος βραχεῖα 14,
1» ἀκοῆς ἀποστέρησις 70, 6; ακοῇ εἰδέναι 87, ὅ ἀκόλουθος = θεράπων 75, ὅ n ἀκολουθῶ-Ξ ξυστρατεύω 57, 4, 9 ᾿Ακραγαντῖνοι, neutrality of, 33, 2; 50,1; 58, 1 ’Axpaiov λέπας 78, 5; 79 ἀκρίβεια τοῦ ναντικοῦ 18, 2; ἀκριβείᾳ ἐξειπεῖν ‘to state accurately ’ 87, 4 ἀκρίτως : τὸ ἀκρίτως ξυνεχὲς τῆς . ἁμίλλης 71, ὃ 2 ᾿ ἀκροβολισμός ‘firing’ 25, 5, 8 ἀλγεινὰ αἰσθέσθαι ξυνέβαινε 75,2 | ἄλγιστα : τἄλγιστα προστιθέναι | τινι 68, 2 ᾿Αλέξαρχος, Corinthian officer, | 9, 4 ἀλήθεια ‘true position’: epi | τῆς ad. βουλεύεσθαι 8, 2 ἀληθής : τὸ ἀληθὲς δηλῶσαι 14, 4. γὸ ἀληθέστατον γνῶναι. 67, 4 ᾿Αλκιβιάδης, advice of, 18,1 ! ᾿Αλκισθένης, father of Demo- sthenes, 16 ἀλλά, after negatives, where our idiom is generally dif- ferent, οὐχ ὁμοίως. . . ἀλλὰ 28, 4; 36, 3; οὔτε. .. οὔτε . . ἀλλά 29, 4: οὐκέτι τὴν αὐτὴν ὁδὸν . . . ἀλλὰ 80,1 | οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ ἔτι ἀλλὰ 84, 3; | οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ ἔτι. .. 49, 3; οὐδὲ. . . ἔτι ὁμοίως . ἀλλ᾽ ἢ Sexcept’ 50, 8
ἀλλὰ | ἀναδοῦμαι :
ΘΟΥΚΥΎΔΙΔΟΥ ZYTTPAPHS 7
24,22; μετὰ τὴν τοῦ [{λημ- μυρίου ἅλωσιν 32, 1 ἡ
ἀμαθία 36, 5
ἁμαρτάνω: ὅπερ καὶ σφίσιν ἡμάρτητο 18, 3 2
ἀμαχεὶ διαπεπολεμήσεται αὐτοῖς, sedentrs bellum conficient, 14, 3
ἀμηχανῶ: τὰ μὲν ἀπορεῖν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι ἀμηχανήσειν 48, 5
ἀμφί 40, 2 n
᾿Αμφίπολις, blockade of, 9
ἀμφότερος : κατ᾽ ἀμφότερα ‘ by land and sea,’ 41, 4; ‘in two ways,’ 47, 2
ἀμφοτέρωθεν θορυβεῖσθαι 22, 1 1)
ἄν, with partic., 42, 4; 64, 2: 67, 4; with iterative aor. 71,32; <dy> 28,37
ἀναβολάς : ἐς a. πράσσειν τι ‘to delay,’ 15, 2
ἀναγκαῖος : οὐχ ἱκανὰ μᾶλλον ἢ ἀναγκαῖα 69,32; ἀναγκαιο- τάτη δίαιτα 82, 2; ἐξ ἀναγ- καίου 60, 4 2
ἀναγκαστός, of subject ἕένοι, who, being under obligation fo serve, desert 13, 2; ef. 58, 3
ἀνάγκη, of obligation incurred by an alliance (1) ἀνάγκῃ ἀκολουθεῖν 57, 4n; 7 n; (2) ἐπικουρικὰ μᾶλλον i) dt’ ἀνάγ- kns 48, 2 n; (8) κατ᾽ ἀνάγ- κὴν μάχεσθαι μετά τινος 57, 5; κατ᾽ a. not technical, 70. 6,8. On ἐξ ἀνάγκης 27, 4 " see Appendix I.
ἀναδησάμενοι ἐκό-
pagov 74, 2; cf. ἀναδούμενοι
εἷλκον τί. 60, 6
ἄλλος: ὁ ἄλλος ὅμιλος 58, 8; ἀναίρεσις νεκρῶν 72, 2; ἀναι-
exclusive use of 4,3; 7, 3; ἄλλος ἄλλῃ!
©”) .
36, 1; 43, 2: 71, 6
ἅλωσις : ἐν τῶν τειχῶν TH ἁλώσει.
ρεῖσθαι νεκρούς 5, 3; 72, 1 ἀνακαλῶ, ‘appeal to,’ 69, 2:
70, 8. It is the word for
‘to call by title or officially ’
GREEK INDEX
Ὶ, ἀποκαλεῖν. ἀνακαλεῖσθαι
, 8 ἀνάκειμαι, ‘depend on,’ 71, 2. Steph. quotes Verg. Aen.
12, 59 wm te omnis domus ἀνίημι πόλεμον 18, 1: ἀ.
inclinate recumbit ἀνάκλησις : πρὸς ἀνάκλησιν θεῶν τρέπεσθαι μὴ with inf. 71, 3
ἀνακρούομαι, ‘back,’ 38, 1 ai.;
ἀνάκρουσις 36, 5 al. ἀναλαμβάνω,
‘to take’ on board or by,
land, 1, 5; 25, 4 al. ἀναμάχομαι, ‘retrieve’ ἃ loss,
military term, |
with gen., 43, 3; general, 66, 3 ἀνθορμῶ 19, 5 al. ἀνθρώπεια δρᾶν 77, 4 τὰ τών ᾿Αθηναίων 51, 1; ἀ. τῆς ἐφόδου 48, 7 ἀντανάγω ναῦς 37, 3; ναυσὶ 52, 1; middle, 40, 3 dvrapxw, ‘suffice to meet’ requirements, 15, 1 ἀντεμβιβάζω 18, 2
! ἀντέπειμι 4, ὃ
, ἀντεπέξειμι 37, 3
61, 3 n; used also meta- ἀντηρίδες 36, 2
phorically by Plato ἀναπειρᾶσθαι, ‘to practise,’ 7, 4nal.
“Avamos, river, 42, 6; 78, ὃ ἀνάρμοστος, ‘awkward,’ inha- bilis, 67, 2
ἀναρρώννυμαιε, of moral recovery, 46,1; cf. ῥώννυμαι, of moral vigour
ἀνάστασις 75, 1. ἀνάστασις is an unwilling, μετανάστασις a willing removal
ἀνειλοῦμαι-Ξ- συστρέφομαι 81, 4
ἀνεκτὰ πάσχω 77, 4
ἀνέλκω 1, 3 al. ; ἀνεῖλκον con- fused with ἀνέκλων 25, 6
ἀνεπιστήμων 67, 1
averlraxros és
τὴν δίαιταν
ἐξουσία, of men who are their | ἀντίπαλος :
own masters, 69, 2
ἀνεπίφθονος : δίκαια καὶ ἀνεπί- ῴφθονα διαιτᾶσθαι 77, 2
ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων, ‘without con- sulting,’ 49, 2; οὐκ ἄνευ ὀλίγων ἐπιθεασμῶν ἀπολει- πόμενοι 75, 4 ἢ
ἀνέχω, ‘project,’ 84, 2; ‘hold back,’ 48, 3
ἀνήρ: note ἄνδρες ἀγαθοί, a. τολμηροί ; ‘men’ = crew or force, 31 al.;
dyri: ἀντὶ ev with τοῦ and inf. answered by ἀντὶ δ᾽ εὐχῆς 75, 7
ἀντιβάλλω, following βάλλω, ‘reply to a volley,’ 25, 6
ἀντιβολία : πρὸς ἀντιβολίαν τρέπεσθαι, ‘entreat,’ 75, 4
ἄντικρυς Βοιωτοί 57, 5.
ἀντιλαβὴν ἔχειν 65, 22
ἀντιλαμβάνομαι, ‘gain,’ with .gen., 77, 6. περὶ τῆς owrn- plas... ἀ. ‘work for,’ 70, 7; ef. τῆς σωτηρίας ἀ. 11. 61
ἀντιμηχανῶμαι 58, 4
ἀντιμίμησις : τὰ τῆς ἁ. αὐτῶν τῆς παρασκευῆς ἡμῶν 67, 2
ἀντιναυτηγοῦμαι : νῆες ἀντινε- νανπηγημέναι 36, 3
és ἀντίπαλα καθε- στάναι 18, 2 2; ἀντίπαλα ναυμαχεῖν 84, 6 ; ἀ. γίγνεται τὰ τῆς. ναυμαχίας ᾿38, 2
ἀντιπαρασκενάζομαι 8, 2
ἀντιπαρατάσσω 5, 1
ἀντιπέμπω 79, 4
ἀντιπληρῶ 22, 2
ἀντιπολιορκῶ 28, ὃ
ἀντιστράτηγος 86, 2
ἀντιτάσσω 25, 8; ἀντίταξις 17,
ἄνδρες = τινες," ἀντιτέχνησι: 70, ὃ Q
226
ἀντιτολμῶ πρὸς ἄνδρας τολμηρούς 21, 8
ἄνω: in the direction away from the low ground, away from the harbour, towards the hill, hence ‘ north,’ «ἄνω: τοῦ κύκλου 2, 4 n; 4,1 n, 2; ἡ ἄνω ἡ πρὸς τῷ τείχει ἀπόληψις 54, 1 π; τὰ τείχη τὰ ἄνω θ0, 2 5
ἀνώμαλον, τό 71, 2
ἀξία: ἡ παρὰ τὴν ἀξίαν κακο- πάθεια 77,1; κατ᾽ ἀξίαν 77, ϑδη
ἀπαλλαγὴ πολέμου 2, 1
ἀπαναλισκόμενα, τά, “ losses,’ 14,2 πὶ
ἀπαντῶ (ἔς τι χωρίον ‘at a fixed place’) 1, 3 ai.
ἀπαράσσω 63, 1
ἀπαντομολῶ 79, 5
ἁπλῶς καταδῦναι 34, 5
ἀπό: (1) temporal, ‘after’: ἀφ᾽ ἑσπέρας εὐθύς 29,.2; ἀπὸ πρώτον ὕπνου 48, 2; (2) ‘from’: ἀπὸ ναυμαχίας ἀνα- πεπαυμένοι 73, 2; ἀπὸ οἵας λαμπρότητος . . . ἐς οἵαν τελευτὴν. . . ἀφίκατο; (8) local, of the place from which anything is carried on: ἢ ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν πεῖο- μαχία 62, 2; ἀπὸ τῶν ὁλκάδων αἴρεσθαι 41, 2; ἀπὸ is used thus in place of ἐπὶ when the point of view is that of the spectator, as τὴν wapackevhy ἀπὸ τῶν κατα- στρωμάτων βελτίω ἔχειν 63, 3; cf. τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν κ. παρασκευὴν 62, 1; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώ- ματος ‘the service on deck,’ 70, 8; 40, 5; 70, 53 used thus also by attraction to the verb, 63, 1; (4) ‘out of’: ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν 87,
OOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Ζ
6; (5) origin of persons, interchanged with ἐκ: 33, 8; 57, 4; (6) ‘in conse- quence of’: θαρσεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς ναυμαχίας 87, 1; (7) source of anything: τὰ awd τοῦ θεοῦ 77, 4; ἀπὸ ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοιοδ7, 8
ἀποβιβάζω, exponere, 29, 2
ἀποδείκνυμαι ‘display,’ ‘put into action,’ like ere Jacinus, 64, 2; cf. Herod. 1. 59 ἀποδεξάμενοι μεγάλα ἔργα
ἀποδέχομαι, ‘approve,’ 48, 3
ἀἁποκνῶ, ‘ hesitate,’ 21, 4
ἀπόκροτος γῆ 27, 5
ἀποκρούεσθαι, ‘to be repulsed’ in assault, 48, 1
ἀποκρύπτομαι, ‘conceal with intent,’ 85, 2
ἀπολαμβάνω, ‘intercept,’ 51, 2; ἀπόληγις 54, 1
ἀπολαύω γῆς 27, 4
ἀπολείπω: βραχὺ ἀπολείπειν γενέσθαι, ‘be little short of,’ 70, 4
ἀπόλειψις : ἐν τῇ d. τοῦ στρα- τοπέδου 75, 2
ἀπολύεσθαι φόβον 586, 2
ἀπονενοημένος, ‘desperate,’ 81, 5; ἀπόνοια 67, 4
ἀπονοστῶ 87, 6
ἀποξηραίνω = διαψύχω ἀνελκύ- σας, ‘dry-dock,’ 12, 5
ἀπόπειραν λαμβάνειν 21, 2 2
ἀποπειρῶ ναυμαχίας 17, 4; 4. παρατειχίσματος ‘make an attempt upon,’ 48, 1; abs. 36, 1 w. dat. of manner
ἀποπέμπω, ‘dismiss,’ 3, 2; ‘despatch,’ 16, 2 ἀποπίμπλημι τῆς γνώμης τὸ
θυμούμενον θ8, 1 ἀπορία : ἐς ἀ. καθιστάναι ἴδ, 4 ἀπορώτατον πάντων, ‘the great- est difficulty,’ 14, 2
GREEK
ἀποσπῶμαι, ‘get separated,’
ἀποστερῶ: ἀάπεστερηκέναι μὴ with inf., 6, 4”; ἀποστέρη- σις ἀκοῆς 70, 6
ἀποσύρω 43, 5
ἀποτελῶ : ἀπετετέλεστο 2, 4
ἀποτολμῶ 67, 1
ἀποφάργνυμι, ‘block,’ 74, 2
ἀποφέρομαι és, ‘carried by stress of weather,’ 50, 2
ἀποχρώντως 42, 3
ἀπρεπέστατα, τά, προστιθέναι τινι θ8, 2
ἀπροσδόκητος, active, 29, 3; passive, 46, 1
ἄπωσις : ἡ τοῦ ἀνέμου &. αὐτῶν ἐς τὸ πέλαγος 84, 6
᾿Αργεῖοι, why they joined Athens, 57, 9
ἀργός : ἀργότερος és τὸ δρᾶν τι 67, 3
9 a
ἀρέσκει αὐτῷ οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ 49, 3
ἀρετή 86, ὅ n, in its later, 1.6. moral sense, as understood by Euripides; ἀρεταί, con- crete, 69, 2
ἀριστοποιεῖσθαι 89, 2
᾿Αρκάδες, 8 mercenaries, 19, 4n
ἁρπαγὴν ποιεῖσθαι 26, 2; 29, 2
ἀρρωστία 47,1. οἱ ’Arrixol τὴν ἀρρωστίαν ἐπὶ τοῦ μὴ προθυ- μεῖσθαι μηδὲ ὁρμᾶν πρᾶξαι τιθέασι. Phrynichus
ἀρχαιολογῶ 69, 2; like Cicero’s pervulgata praecepta decan- tare
dpxw, prior capesso, 5, 2; 6, 1; ἄρχειν Ναυπάκτου 31, 4; ‘command,’ 7, 1; ‘control,’
14, 2 ᾿Αρχωνίδης, Sicel chief, 1, 4 2 ἀρωγός, rare in prose, 62, 1 ἄσιτος 40, 3 ᾿Ασσίναρος, Nicias overtaken at the, 84,2 -
INDEX 227
doréyacrov, τό 87, 1
ἀσφαλεστάτη τήρησις 86, 2
ἀταξία: πρὸς ἀ. προσμεῖξαι 68, 1
αὖ: πάλιν αὖ 46,1; θά, 1: οὐδ᾽ αὖ 47, 4; ὅθ, 8 ᾿
αὐθημερόν : αὖθις καὶ αὖθ. 89, 2
αὖθις : νῦν, εἴ ποτε καὶ αὖθις, nunc cum maxime, 70, 7
αὐτόθεν, tlline and αὐτόθι, ἐδὲ, frequent and good
αὐτομολῶ 13, 2; αὐτομολία 13, 22
αὐτόνομοι, of allies of Athens ; (1) ἀντόνομοι καὶ ναυτικὸν παρεχόμενοι 57, 4; (2) αὐτό- νομοι ἀπὸ ξυμμαχίας 57, 3. Some of the latter, though not dvayxacrol (see ἀνάγκη), are described as κατὰ τὸ νησιωτικὸν μᾶλλον κατειργό- μενοι (ἢ ἑκόντες) 57, 7 nn. See Κέρκυρα
αὐτός : αὐτὰ ὅσα, ‘just so much as, 74, 1; αὐτὰ of what has been described, 55, 2 n; 66, la; és ταὐτὸ ξυνάγειν 81, 2: ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ ξυμφέρεσθαι 36, 6; ἐς τὸ αὐτὸ ἀπαντᾶν 35, 2
αὐτόσε 26, 2
αὐτοῦ ἐκεῖ 16, 1 n
αὔχημα 66, 3n; 75, 6
ἀφανής : τὰ ἐν ἀφανεῖ, of the future, 75, 4
dpavifw τὰς πατρικὰς ἀρετάς 69, 2
ἄφθονος ὅμιλος 78, 4 ; ἄφθονον ὕδωρ 58, 4
ἀφθόνως χρῆσθαι 70, 5
ἀφίημι ναῦν 19,47; 58, 4; ἀ. βέλος 67, 2
ἀφίκατο-- ἦσαν ἀφιγμένοι 75, 6
ἀφίσταμαι πολέμου 7, 2; ‘re- volt,’ 58, 3; ἀποστῆναι ἐκ Σικελίας 28, ὃ
ἀφορμῶμαι, ‘start,’ 75, 4
ἀφορῶ πρός τι 71, 3
228
B βαρβαρικόν, τό -Ξ οἱ βάρβαροι 29,
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
or an emphatic word; in epexegesis 67, 4; γὰρ δὴ 62, 4 al.
4; B. χωρίον )( Ἑλληνικόν γέ is used (1) when other par- 0, 2 t
βάρβαροι πόλεις )( Ἑλληνίδες π.
80, 2
βαρύτης νεῶν 62, 2
βασιλεύω, with gen., 1, 4
βέβαιος ἐλευθερία 68, 3 ; ‘loyal,’ 77, 6
βιάζομαι, ‘drive back,’ 23, 3 ; ‘force,’ ἔκπλουν, ἔσπλουν 22, 2; 70, 7; abs., ‘to force a way, 67, 4; 79, 1; pass. 11, 2; 45, 2 al.
βιαίως ἀποθανεῖν 82, 2
βλέπω ἐπὶ τὸ ἡσσώμενον 71, 3
βοήθεια, ἡ ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, 18,1; 42,1
Βοιωτάρχαι 80, 2
Βοιωτοί, first to check the Athenians in the attack on Epipolae, 43, 7
βόσκω ναντικόν 48, 5 n
βούλησις )( ἀνάγκη 57, 7
βούλομαι : τινι 35, 1
βοῶ, ‘clamour,’ 48, 4
βραδὺς γίγνεσθαι, with rod and inf., ‘be slow in,’ 48, 5
βραχύς : βραχύ τι 2, 4; 13,1; ‘short,’ 14, 1; 27, 4; ἐκ βραχέος καὶ περιγραπτοῦ ὁρ- μᾶσθαι 49,2; κατὰ βραχύ, ‘by degrees,’ 79, 5; βραχέα] τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἔχειν 77, 6
βρονταὶ καὶ ὕδωρ, ‘a thunder- storm,’ 79, 3; 8011, 77; VI. 70; Xen. Hel. 1. 6, 28
Γ
γάρ esp. after negs., parts of
, a8 μέντοι... ye 14, 4; δὲ... γε 28,3; 68, 2; ἀλλ’ ἢ. .. ye 50, 3; ὅμως... ye 57, 4; (2) after relative pronouns or adverbs, as ἐπεὶ. . . ye 80, 2; ἐπειδή γε 55, 2; ὅς γε 68, 2; ws... ye 15, 1; 40, 2; 67, 4; ὅσα ye 11, 4; (3) to introduce the qualiji- cation of a general statement (‘as far as concerns,’ ‘if we consider’), as αὐτήν γε καθ᾽ αὑτὴν 28, 3; αὐτός γε 48, 4 ;
'&y γε τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ 44, 1; οἵ ye ἐπ᾽ ἐμοῦ 86, 5; τό γ ὑπόλοιπον 66, 8 ; ; strengthened by δή---πλήν γε δὴ 56, 4; πρίν γε δὴ 71, 5. N.B. γὲ must not be used as equiva- lent to δή
γεγωνίσκω Ξ-- γέγωνα 76 ἢ
icles precede
οὐ βουλομένῳ ἐστί | yeulfw, of a ship, 53, 4
γέμω, of a ship, 25, 1
γίγνομαι as passive οὗ ποιοῦμαι 4. v.; with many military words, as ἀκροβολισμός, ἀνά- στασις, δίωξις, ἐμβολή, vav- μαχία, ὁμολογία, στρατεία, φόνος : κάκωσις, πάθος (‘ dis- aster’) ὠφελία γίγνεταί τινι : ἁμάρτημα, παρανόμημά τινος, τόλμημα, γίγνεται ὃ ;18:; 48; —ylyvouat ἐπὶ with dat., ‘to reach, 35, 2 al.; γ. πρὸς with dat., 43, 3;—of sum totals, as πολλοὶ ἐγένοντο 85, 2;—év χερσὶ γ: ‘come to close quarters,’ 5, 2;--- γ. ὑπό τινι, “ fall into ‘the power of,’ 64, 1
εἰμί, ἤδη, article, preposition, γλῶσσα: ὅσα ἀπὸ γ. εἴρητο 10
GREEK
γνώμη : τῆς y. τὸ θυμούμενον 68, 1; γνώμη )( παρασκενὴ 5,4; γ. γ ὄψις 71, 8; 75, 2; ‘ purpose,’ 64, 1; τὴν γ. προσέχειν 15, 2; 23, 1; γ. ποιεῖσθαι ‘propose,’ 72, 3; τὴν γὙ. ἔχειν ὡς with fut. partic. 72, 4, with gen. abs. 15,1; παρὰ y. ‘unexpectedly,’ 13, 2
γνωρίζω, dgnosco, 44, 4
γνῶσις )( ὄψις 44, 2
Γόγγυλος 2, 1
γοῦν, ‘at any rate,’ 47,3; 49, 1
γραμματεύς 10
Γύλιππος, lands in Sicily, 1; marches to Syr. and sum- mons the A. to quit; takes Labdalum, 3; at first de- feated but afterwards defeats the A., 5, 6; exhorts the S. to attack by sea, 12; takes Plemmyrium, 23; obtains reinforcements, 50;
his harangue before the last δή :
battle, 66-8 ; A., 74-84; N. surrenders to him, 85; 'N. and Demosth. put to "death against his will, 86
γυμνητεία = ψιλοί 37, 2; Herod. Ix. 63 contrasts γυμνῆτες with hoplites
γυναῖκες, παῖδες, θεοὶ πατρῷοι, commonplaces, 69, 2
pursues the
A
δαπανᾶν 29, 1; 47, 4; al ba. |
INDEX 229
δ᾽ οὖν, resuming the narra- tive, 59, 2 al. δεδιέναι with περὶ and gen., 75, 4. Thuc. often uses δεδιέναι περὶ with dat. δεῖ : ws δέον 15,1; ἔδει, of an arrangement made, 8, 3 ai., — this use is particularly common after relative pro- nouns δείματα 80, 32 δεινός : τὰ δεινά, of the horrors or difficulties of war, 8, 2; cf. ξυφορμὰ δεινή 29,5; δεινὸν ἐστὶν εἰ 78, 13 δ. ἐστὶ μὴ 25, 7; 8. ἐστὶν ὅτι 75, 2; 4. δοκεῖ ὅτι 12, 3 Δεκέλεια, fortified by the Lac., 19; results of the fortifica- tion of, 20; 27; 28; 42, 2 δελφινοφόρος 41, 2 δεσμοί : δεσμοῖς ἀποθανεῖν 82, 2 δέχομαι, hostile, τοὺς προσφερο- μένους 44, 4; ἐπιόντας δ. 77, 4 intensifying superlatives, 19, 1; 56, 4; 86, 5; esp. after γάρ 70, 4; 75, 7 ; 85, 4; μόνος δή 44,1 : was δὴ 55,1; - 71, 23 πολὺς δὴ 55, 2; 70, 7; οὐδεμεᾶς δὴ ἐλάσσων 71, 6; following pronouns, 62, ὃ, 4: ἵνα δὴ 26, 2; ἐπειδὴ .. . δὴ 18, 2; ὅπως δὴ 18, 1; πρὶν δὴ 39, 2; “πο doubt,’ ‘of course,’ 77, 2; 81, 2; 86, 4; οὐ κατ᾽ ἀξίαν δὴ 77, 8 π; πανωλεθρίᾳ δὴ 87, 2. δὴ 1 is esp. common after γὰρ preceded by an adj. or pro- noun
πάναι pelfous καθέστασαν 28,4 | dnd, ‘declare,’ 10 2; 16, 1
das 53, 4 2
δέ: answers re 81, 8: τὸ μὲν διά: (1) gen. :
. « - τὸ δὲ 86, 4; τὰ μὲν. . τὰ δὲ 75, 4. "See under μέν.
ημοκρατούμεναι πόλεις 55, 2
de’ ὀλίγου 15, 23 36, 5; 89, 2; 71, 3; δι᾽ ἐλάσσονος 4,1; διὰ παντός,
230
‘throughout,’ 6, 1; 61, 2; διὰ τάχους 22,2; 29, 2; διὰ μάχης γίγνεσθαι 24, 3; διὰ φυλακῆς ἔχειν 8, 8 ; διὰ θορύ- βου 40, 8; δι’ ἀνάγκης 48, 6 m and see ἀνάγκῃ ; δι’ ἑκουσίων κινδύνων 8, 8 n ; (2) accus.: διὰ τὸ with inf. in a long phrase, 12, 4; 36, 3; 44,5; 81, 4; διὰ τὴν Aexé- λειαν τειχιζομένην 42,2; διὰ Thy... οὐκέτι ἐπαναγωγήν 34, 6 n. Note that διὰ is esp. common with neut. pron. in accus.
διαβάλλω, ‘slander,’ 48, 3; in Thuc. also means ‘to cross,’ = διαβαίνειν
διάβασις, ‘ crossing,’ ‘ford,’ 74,
διαβουλεύομαι (δια- prob. re- ciprocal), 50, 4
διάβροχοι νῆες, rimosae, 12, 3
διαγγέλλω, of messages passing between besiegers and be- sieged, 73, 4; διάγγελος 73, 3
διάγω ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς ἡμέρας 39, 2; 6. ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα 71,
84, 8;
διαδοχή : κατὰ δ. χρόνου ἐπιέναι 27, 3; κατὰ δ. 28, 2. διά- δοχός τινι 15, 1
διαιρεῖσθαι κατὰ πόλεις τὸ ἔργον 19,1
διαιτῶμαι : πολλὰ ἐς θεοὺς νό- papa, δεδιήτημαι 77, 2
διάκειμαι ὑπὸ τῆς νόσου 77, 2
διακελευσμῷ χρῆσθαι 71, 5
διακινδυνεύω, with infin., 1, 1; δ. és 47, 3; δ. is also used with mpés; cf. βιάζεσθαι és, πρός
διακλέπτω, ‘make away with,’ 85, 3
διακρίνεσθαι, of combatants, 34, 6; 88,1
OOYKYAIAOY ΞἘΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
διαμαρτάνω τῆς ὁδοῦ 44, 8 διανοοῦμαι, with fut. infin., 56, 1 ’
διαπεπολεμήσεται 14, 3; 25, 9. διαπολέμησις ταχίστη 42, 4 διασκοτῶ : διεσκόπουν περὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς καὶ ὅπῃ σωθήσονται 71,6
διασπῶμαι, ‘am scattered,’ 44, 5
διαφορά, w. objective gen., 57, 11 ; διαφοραὶ γίγνονται 18, 3
διάφορον, τό, ‘the difference,’ δδ, ἃ π; 75, 7. διαφόρως 71, 6
διαφρῶ 32, 1; cf. Aristoph. Birds 193
διαφυγγάνω 44, 8
διδασκαλεῖον 29, 5
Διειτρέφης 29,1 2. Appendix
II.
διέκπλους 36, 4; 70, 4
διικνεῖσθαι, ‘hit,’ of weapons, 79, 2
δικαιῶ 68, 1 2
δίκη : κατὰ δίκην 57, 1; δίκας διδόναι ‘submit to a decision,’ 18, 2
Δίφιλος, succeeds Conon in the command at Naupactus, 413 B.C., 34
δίωξις γίγνεται 34, 6
δοκεῖν δ᾽ ἔμοιγε 87, 6 n
δόκησις προσγίγνεται 67, 1
δουλοῦμαι τὴν γνώμην 71, 8
δρῶ τι 86, 3; δ. τὸ αὐτό 83,1; δρῶ )( πάσχω 71,7; 77, 4--- ἃ common antithesis
δυνάστης 33, 4”
δυνατὴ ναῦς \( ἄπλους 60, 2; κατὰ τὸ δυνατόν 36, 4; ws ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν 74, 1
δυσανασχετώ τὰ γιγνόμενα 71, θπ .
δυστυχῶ 18, 2. δυστυχία 86, 5. δυστυχέστατον ἔργον 87, 5. Intr. p. xxxvii.
GREEK
E
ἑαυτοῦ : ἀσθενέστερος αὐτὸς é. θ6, 8"; αὐτὸς αὑτῷ ὠφέλιμος 64, 2; τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν 44,1; 69, 2
ἐγγίγνεται φόβος 80, 3; ἐ. μέλλησις 49, 4
ἐγγύθεν ὕδατι χρῆσθαι 4, 6
ἐγκατελήφθη, deprehensus est, 24, 2; 30, 2
ἐδώδιμος 39, 2; 78, 4 .
ἔθνη, w. plur. verb, 57, 11; ἐ. of small communities, 58, 3
εἰ: note (1) when εἰ with optat. appears in 0.0., it regularly represents either a. ἐὰν with subj., or ὁ. εἰ with optat. of O.R.; (2) εἰ with indic. of 0.2. remains the same in 0.0. There is no exception to these rules in this bvok.—In 6, 1 ef mapéd- Oo. ταὐτὸν ἤδη ἐποίει αὐτοῖς represents in past time ἐὰν προέλθῃ ταὐτὸν ἤδη ποιεῖ αὐτοῖς, being a remark by Thue.—el του ἄλλου 21, 5. —el πως 79, 5.—el wore καὶ αὖθις 70, 7.—el μή, ‘except,’ in participial clause, 38, 1. —el not really hypothetical, 67,1
εἰκός (ἐστι), with aor., pres., or perf. infin., 47, 4; 66, 3;
74,23 77, 43 ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος
66, 2; 68, 3 εἰκότως 18, 2 Etdwres 19, 3; 26, 1; 58, 3 εἰμί : ἔστιν ὧν etc. 11, 2 n;
ἔστιν ὅτε 21, 8; εἰσὶ δ᾽ οἱ |’
etc. frequently replace οἱ δὲ etc. after of μὲν etc. ; parts of elu: are frequently omitted
after relative words, esp. | éxacros
ὅσος, g.v.
INDEX 231
εἶμι : regularly present in the paradigm, except in 0.0., 21, 4; 35, 2; 57, 9; 74, 2 ns; ἐς χεῖρας ἱέναι 44, 7; 70, 5
εἴπερ wore 64, 2
εἶπον, ‘command,’ 29, 1; ‘say,’ with infin., 35, 2; see also under λέγω. — ὡς εἰπεῖν, qualifyin g antithesis between αὐτοί, ‘alone,’ and ἅπαντες οἱ ἄλλοι 58, 4; qualifying χερσαῖοι applied universally,
εἰρεσίαν, ξυνέχειν τήν, ‘to con- tinue rowing hard,’ 14, 1 ”
els τῶν ἀρχόντων 2, 1; ἕν μὲν -.- & de... & δὲ 48, 4; Ka’ ἕν ἕκαστον )( κατὰ πολλὰ 70, 6; καθ᾽ ὃν μόνον 75, 2
εἰωθός, παρὰ τὸ 60, ὅ : 7ὅ, ὅ
éx: (1) in adverbial phrases ; ἐκ βραχέος 49, 2; ἐκ πλαγίου 6, 2; ἐκ τοῦ ὄπισθεν 79, 4; ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ θάτερα 37, 2; ἐξ ὅσου 78, 3; ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος 66, 2; 68, 2; ἐκ τοῦ εὐπρεποῦς 57, 7; ἐξ ἀνάγκης 27, 43; (2) ἐξ ἀναγκαίου 60, 4; ws ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν 74, 1; ws ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων 763 ἐκ τῶν παρόντων 62, 1; 77, 13 (8) ἐκ παρασκενῆς κρείσσονος 55, 2; ἐκ πολλῆς περιουσίας νεῶν 18, 1 ; (4) ἐκ παρακελεύσεως 40, 4; ἐκ περίπλου 86, 3; ἐκ καταλόγον 16, 1; 20, 2; (5) attraction : μετὰ τὴν ἐκ τῆς Λακωνικῆς τείχισιν 81, 1; οὗ, 4, 4; 25, 6; 71, 1; (6) interchanged with ἀπό, 33, 3; with διά, 87, 2
ἑκασταχόθεν, following ὅσος, 20, 2; 21,1
placed in the rel.
sentence, 4, 3; 18, 2; καθ᾽
232
ἕκαστα τῶν γιγνομένων 8,1; ὡς ἕκαστα 65, 2 n; καθ᾽ ἑκάστους )( ξύμπαντες 64, 2 ἑκατέρωθεν 34, 2; 78, 5. Ad- verbs in rs are very idio- matic, esp. followed by nouns in gen. case; cf. πανταχόθεν, πολλαχόθεν ἐκβαίνω, ‘disembark,’ 40, 1; ἐκβιβάζω, causal, 39, 2 ἐκβολή, ‘river’s mouth,’ 35, 2: cf. ἐκβάλλω ; but Thuc. uses ἐξίημι in this sense ἐκγενησόμενον 68,
ἐκεῖθεν 26, 8 ἐκεῖνος: often used of the enemy, as 6, 1 al.; én’
ἐκεῖνα, to Athens, 64, 1, = ἐκεῖσε of 48, 4; ἐκεῖνος and αὐτὸς applying to the same person, 14, 3
ἐκλείπω, ‘not retain,’ ‘abandon,’ ἐκ. ὁτιοῦν τῆς παρασκενῆς 48, 5n; ἐκ. τὰ τείχη 60, 2
ἑκούσιος στρατειά 57, 9; see ἀνάγκη ; ἑκούσιοι κίνδυνοι 8, 3
ἐκπίπτω, = ‘to be banished,’ 33, 5; ἐξέπεσον és τὸ orpa- rémredov, ‘rushed into the camp,’ 71, 6. Usually ἐκ- πίπτειν és of men at sea = ‘to be washed ashore’
ExT pux® 48, 2
ἑκὼν εἶναι 81, 3
ἔλασσον : οὐκ ἔ. ἔχειν 5,4; 36,
— —
ἐλάχιστα βλάπτειν 68, 3
ἐλευθερία : ἐπ᾽ ἐλευθερίᾳ ἀπιέναι 82,1. ἐλευθέρως κοινωνοὶ εἶναί τινος 63, 4 7
Ἑλληνίδες πόλεις 80, 2. regular form to use with πόλις
Ἑλληνικός : ἔθνη 58, 3; ἔργα 87, 5; χωρίον 60, 2; στρά- τευμα 75, 7
The
a ΄΄΄΄ῤῤ΄ἧἷ΄ἷ΄ἷἕ“... “ΡΨ ΄-΄-..ρ-.΄΄.΄Ἑ. ---Ἐ͵ἘΞἝἶἪΩΛ ΒΘ Θ΄ ΄“΄.-....-ς.....-.:....
ΘΟΥΚΥΔΊΔΟΥ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Ζ
ἐλλιπὴς μνήμης 8, 2
ἐλπίζω, with pres. inf. and ἄν,
- 73, 2; with aor. inf.:and ἄν, 61, 3
ἐλπίς : ἐν ἔλπίδι εἶναι, with fut. inf., 46; ἐν ἐλπίσιν εἶναι 25, 1, 9; τὴν ἐ. ἐχυρὰν ἔχειν, with inf., 41, 4; ἡ ἐ. τοῦ φόβου 61, 2n; τὸ wap’ ἐλ- πίδα τοῦ αὐχήματος 66, 32
ἐμβάλλω, of ships, 25, 5 ad. ; ἐμβολή )( προσβολή 70, 4 n ; ἔμβολον 36, 3; 40, 5
ἐμπαλάσσομαι 84, 37
éumapéxw τὴν πόλιν προκινδυ- νεῦσαι 56, 85
ἐμπειρία : τὰ τῆς ἐ. χρήσιμα 49, 2; πάτριον τὴν ἐ. ἔχειν 21, 3
ἐμπορεύομαι 18, 2
ἐμφανὴς λόγος, ‘public or official statement,’ 48, 3; οὗ ἐμ- φανῶς 48, 15
«μφράσσω 84, 2
(1) in ‘local phrases: ἐν
"ὀλέγῳ 67,3; 70, 4 ; πλεῖσται ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ ἐναυμάχουν 70, 4; ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ μένειν 49, ὃ ; of. 87, 2; ἐν τῷ én’ ἐκεῖνα 58, 1; ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν, ‘in front,’ 78, 4, 5; 81, 8 ; (2) in temporal phrases: ἐν τῷ παραυτίκα 71, 7; ἐν τῷ αὐτίκα 42, 2; ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ 68, 2; ἐν τούτῳ, following ἐπειδὴ with imperf., 28, 2 ; (8) ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ταράσσεσθαι 67, 2; 84, 4; (4) phrases with εἶναι, equivalent to a verb: εἶναι ἐν ἐλπίσιν, ἐλπίδι 25, 1; 4β ; ἐν πόνῳ 81,4; ἐν κινδύνῳ 58, 4; ἐν μεταβολῇ 76; ἐν δεινοῖς 8,1; 48, 4 : ἐν θορύβῳ 81,4; ἐν παντὶ δὴ ἀθυμίας 55, 1; ἐν τούτῳ τύχης 33, 6— with γίγνεσθαι : γίγνεσθαι ἐν χερσί ὅ, 2; ἐν ταραχῇ καὶ
GREEK
ἀπορίᾳ 44, 1—with ἔχειν : ἔ. ἐν αἰτίᾳ 81, 1— with ποιεῖσθαι : π. ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ 8, 2; (5) ἐν ᾧ, of condition under which, 51, 1; 68, 2. — καθεστῶτες ἐν 64, 2 n; ‘owing to,’ 8, 2; ἐν τοῖς, with superlative, 19, 4; 24, 3; 27, 3; 71, 3
évdyew: ὥσπερ προεδέδοκτο αὐτοῖς καὶ .. . ἐναγόντων 18,1 ᾿
ἐναντιοῦμαι, augment of, 50, 8 π
ἐνδείᾳ διαίτης ἀποθανεῖν 82, 2
ἐνδιατρίβω 81, 4
ἔνδοθεν, οἱ, 73, 3
ἐνέδραν ποιεῖσθαι 32, 2
ἕνεκα 19 αἷ., and never χάριν in Thuc., except in v. 70 τοῦ θείου xdpw. Observe that χάριν as prep. is poeti- ca
ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν 81, 47 ἐνθύμιον ποιοῦμαι, ‘take to heart,’ 50, 4
ἐνθυμοῦμαι with accus. ‘to think | -
over,’ 18, 2
ἐνορῶ, ‘judge from experience,’
3 3 >
ἐντός τε καὶ ἔξωθεν 36, 2: ἐ. ἔχειν 78, 2; ἐ. ποιεῖν δ, 8
ἐξανίστημί τινας ἱδρυθέντας που 77, 4
ἐξεῖπον ἀκριβείᾳ 87, 4
ἐξετάζειν στρατιάν etc. 88, 6; 35, 1
ἐξηγοῦμαι 50, 4 ἢ
ἐξορμῶ ναῦν 14,1 ἡ
ἐξουσία (ἐστι), with infin., 12, 5; ἐξουσία ἀνεπίτακτος, of freedom of action, 69, 2
ἐξωθῶ 36,5 π; 52,2; 68,1
ἐπαγγέλλω στρατιάν 17, 1 2
ἐπάγω, of an army, 3, 3; of supplies, 60, 2; ἐπάγεσθαι,
to invite in, 57, 11; gain |
INDEX 233
over, 46; ἐπαγωγή 24, 3; ἐπακτός 28, 1
ἑπαίρομαι ὑπὸ μισθοῦ 13, 2; contrast ἐπ, τῇ νίκῃ 41, 3; with infin., 51, 1
ἔπαλξις, collective of the Long Walls, 28, 2
éwavayuryh 4, 4; 34, 6
ἐπανορθῶ, ‘ restore, 77, 7
ἐπάντης 79, 2
ἐπαύξω 70,7 2
ἐπείγομαι, with infin., 42, 4; 70, 3; with πρός, 84, 2
ἔπειτα (1) without δέ, following
πρῶτον μέν 19, 1; 26, 2;
43, 1; 58, 1; 66, 2; (2)
without δέ, after other
phrases, χρόνον μέν τινα 40,
4; οἵ, 78, 7; 79, 6 ; ἡμέρας
μὲν o 87, 3; (8) ἔπειτα δὲ
καὶ 28, 1; δ2, 2; 82,1; (4)
τὸ μὲν πρῶτον... ἔπειτα
34, 4. Note (1) when καὶ
follows ἔπειτα, δὲ is always
inserted, (2) μάλιστα μὲν is
always followed by ἔπειτα δέ
when ἔπειτα is used, (8) τὸ
(μὲν) πρῶτον ἔπειτα
μέντοι is ἃ more emphatic
formula
ἐπεκβοηθῶ 58, 2
ἐπεκπλέω 37, 2
éwetdyw 52, 2
ἐπεξέρχομαι 51, 2. These with éwexOéw represent the com- pounds of ἐπεκ- used by Thuc. Note their military sense
ἐπερωτῶ 10
ἐπέχω TO. . . ἐπιχειρεῖν, ‘re- frain from attacking,’ 33, 3 n; é, ‘to stop,’ 50, 4; 74, 1; & τὴν γῆν, obtinere, 62, 4
ἐπί: (1) with gen. ; place,— ‘towards,’ as in ἐπ᾽ οἴκου : ‘on,’ as ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν 71, 5;
234
time,—én’ ἐμοῦ 86, 5 ; man- ner,—tn’ ἀγκυρῶν ὁρμέζω vais 59,3; οὐκ ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων παρατάσσω 79, 1; (2) with dat.; place, —‘on,’ as in τὸ ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ τεῖχος 4,2; ‘at,’ ἐφ’ ὅπλοις 28, 2 Ἡ ; circum- stances under which anything is done, often preceded by ws, —éml προφάσει, ‘on an opportunity,’ 13, 2 2; (ws) ἐ. εὐπραγίᾳ 46, 1; 81, 5; οἵ, 59, 2; 62,1; 69, 2; ἐπ᾽ αἰσχρᾷ αἰτίᾳ ἀπολέσθαι 48, 4 ;—‘after,’ τὰ ἐπὶ τούτοις 62, 3;—‘with a view to,’ often preceded by ὡς, as ws ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ 68,1; 78, 3; ἐ. τῷ σφετέρῳ ὀλέθρῳ 79, 3; ἐπὶ τῷ πεδίῳ 19, 2 ;—‘ con- sidering,’ ὡς ἐπὶ μεγέθει 80, 4 ;—‘on condition of,’ ἐπ᾽ ἐλευθερίᾳ ἀπιέναι 82, 1 ;—‘in addition to,’ 86, 2 ;—‘in the power of,’ 12, 5; (3) with accus. ; place — motion to- wards or on to, as ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα Ξξεἐκεῖσε θά, 1: ἐπὶ πολὺ ‘far,’ 11, 4; 40, 5; 65, 2; ἐπὶ πλέον ‘further,’ 48, 2; ws ἐπὶ πλεῖστον (ἐδύνατο) 69, 8; 76 ; τὸ (τὰ) ἐπὶ θάτερα, ‘the other side,’ 87, 2; 84, 4; ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα ἔχω = ἐπαμ- φοτερίζω 48, 3; ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον χωρεῖν 50,3; time—em πολὺ 22, 2; 38,1; 39, 2; 71, 5; 79, 63; extent reached—émi πλέον, ‘more,’ 48, 2; ἐπὶ ὅσον 66, 1; purpose — ἐπὶ φρνυγανισμὸν ἐξελθεῖν 4, 6; ἐπὶ στρατιὰν οἴχεσθαι 7, 2; 12,1; ἐπ’ αὐτὸ τοῦτο 34,5; 36, 1
ἐπιβαίνω, with ἐπὶ and accus., 69, 4; with dat., 70, 5
OOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
ἐπιβάτης 1, 5; 62, 3; 70, 3
ἐπιβοηθῶ 3, 4; 14, 3; 53, 3
éxtBory 62, 3; 65, 1
ἐπιβουλεύω, ‘make plans for,’ with accus., 51, 1
ἐπιβουλὴ νεῶν, ‘a plan against ships,’ 70, 6
ἐπιβοῶ 70, 7; middle, 69, 2; 75, 4
ἐπιγίγνομαι, of seasons, 10; 19, 1; of night, 87, 2; of suffering, 87,1; ‘to attack,’ 32, 2
Ἐπίδαυρος ἡ Acunpd, 18, 3; 26, 1
ἐπιδιδοῦσα, ‘increasing,’ ἰσχύς, 8,1
ἐπιδιώκω 41, 2; ὅ8, 8
ἐπιθεασμός 75, 4
ἐπιθυμῶ ἐπιδεῖν τι 77, 7. θυμία τοῦ πιεῖν 84, 2
ἐπικάθημαι, ‘besiege,’ 27, 4
ἐπικαταβαίνω, πρός τόπον, 28, 1; 35, 2; 84, 5
ἐπίκειμαι, ‘press on,’ 42, 3; 71, 5; 79, 5; 84, 3; with dat., 81, 4
ἐπικηρυκεύομαι, with πρός, 49, 1 ; with ws, 48, 2; with dat., 83, 2
ἐπίκλησις alaxlarn 68, 2 2
émixoupw, of an auxiliary force, 57, 10. ἐπικουρίαν πορίξζω 18, 4; al ἐπικουρίαι ξυλλέ- yovra, 59, 1. ὀἐπικουρικὰ πράγματα, of a power that depends on hired force, 48, 5
ἐπικρατῶ, absol. and instrum. dat., 42, 6; 68, 2; 71, 3; 72,1
ἐπικρεμάμενος κίνδυνος 75, 7 ; cf. 11.54 τιμωρία ἐπεκρεμάσθη
ἐπιλέγομαι τοὺς βελτίστους 19, θη
ἐπίλοιποι νῆες 22, 2
ἐπιμέλομαι absol., 8, 8 ; 39, 2.
ἐπι-
GREEK
ἐπιμέλεια ἐστί twos 16, 2; ἐπιμέλειαν ποιοῦμαι περὶ τοῦ σωθῆναι 56, 2
ἐπιμεταπέμπομαι 7, 3
ἐπιπαρεῖμι 76
ἐπιπέμπω )( μεταπέμπω 15, 1
ἐπιπίπτω, of trouble, 29, 5; ‘to attack,’ 29, 3; ‘to fall on,’ 84, 3
ἐπιπλέω, absol., or with dat., 12, 4 al. ἐπίπλευσις 36, 6. ἐπίπλους 36,1; ἐπίπλουν ἔχω 49, 2
ἐπιπληροῦμαι 14, 2
Ἐπιπολαί 1,12; 2; 4; 5; 6; 42; 43
ἐπιρρώννυμαι, ‘take heart,’ 2, 3; 7, 4; 17, 3
ἐπισκευάζω 1,12; 24, 1; 38, 2; mid. ‘alter construction of,’ 36, 2
ἐπίσταμαι 14, 1 al. ἐπιστήμη 21, 4 al.
ἐπιστέλλω 14, 4. ἐπιστολή 8, 23; 10,1; 11,1; 16,1
ἐπιτειχίζω 47, 4. ἐπιτειχισμός
. 4
ἐπιτήδειος, ‘friendly,’ 73, 3; 75,3; ‘necessary ’ or ‘desir- able,’ 20, 2; 60, 3; τὰ é. 4, 4 al.
ἐπιτήδευσις 86, 5 ἡ
ἐπιτίθημι τὴν εἰκοστήν 28, 4. ἐπιτίθεμαι, ‘attack,’ 41, 4 al. ; ἐ. τῇ πείρᾳ, ‘make the attempt,’ 42, 4
ἐπιτίμησις 48, 3
ἐπιτρέπω 18, 3 ἢ
ἐπιτυγχάνω, ‘fall in with,’ 25,
2
ἐπιφανής, ‘visible,’ 3, 4; 19, 2; ‘famous,’ 69, 2
ἐπιφέρω, military word, 18, 2 ; 37,3; 40, 4; 56,2; 70, 2
ἐπιφήμισμα 75, 7
ἐπίφθονος 77, 3
INDEX 235
ἐπιχειρῶ 7, 4 al. ἐπιχείρημα 47, 1. ἐπιχείρησις 12, 5 al.
ἐπιχωρίῳ τάξει, ἐν 30, 2
ἐποικοδομῶ 4, 8
ἐποικῶ 27, 3
ἐπονομάζω πατρόθεν καὶ αὐτοὺς ὀνομαστὶ καὶ φυλήν 69, 2 ἢ
ἐποτρύνω τὸν πόλεμον ἔτι μᾶλλον γίγνεσθαι 25, 2
ἔποψις ἀνώμαλος 71, 2 π
ἐπωτίδες 84, 5 al.
ἐργαλεῖα, ‘tools,’ 18, 4
ἔργον )( λόγος 48, 3 n; 69, 2; ἔ,. ἄξιον τοῦ κινδύνου 21, 2; ἔ. μέγα 87, 5; --μάχη 71, 3; διελέσθαι τὸ é. 19, 1
’"Epewweds τῆς ᾿Αχαΐας 34, 1; ὁ ’"E. ποταμός 80, 5
ἕρμα 25, 7 n
Ἑρμοκράτης, urges the S. to attack the A. by sea, 21, 3; delays the A. retreat by a trick, 74, 1 -
ἐρωτῶ 44, 4. ἐρωτήμασι πυκ- vos χρῆσθαι 44, 4
és; (1) with nouns and adjs., προθυμία és τὸ ἐπιπλεῖν 70, 3; πρόθυμος ἐς τὸν πόλεμον 18, 3; ἐξουσία ἐς δίαιταν 69 : ἐπιτήδειος ἐς δίαιταν 74, 1: ἐς πόλεμον 20, 2; ὠφελία ἐς τὸ θαρσεῖν .69, 3; ἀργὸς ἐς τὸ δρᾶν 67, 3; ῥάδιος ἐς τὸ βλάπτεσθαι 67, 3; ὕστερος ἐς τἄλλα 77, 2; (2) with καθί- στημι, and similar words; καθιστάναι és φυγήν 48, 7; x. ἐς φόβον 44, 7; καθίστα- σθαι ἐς ἀντίπαλα 18, 2; x. és, φιλονικίαν 28, 8 : κι ἐς μάχην 53, 2; x. ἐς ἀπόνοιαν 67, 4,; xk. és λύπην 75, 3; ἀναγκά- ἕεσθαι és 62, 4; (3) with ἱέναι : ἐλθεῖν ἐς χεῖρας 44, 7; 70, ὅ ; ἐς τὴν πεῖραν 21, 4: ἀφικέσθαι ἐς τελευτήν 75, 6 ;
236
(4) with verbs, describing the end, purpose, or view: ὠφελεῖσθαι ἐς τὸ φοβερὸν καὶ τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖσθαι 63, 3; olxo- δομεῖν ἐς τὸ κακουργεῖν 19, 2; ἐς ἀρετὴν νενομισμένη δίαιτα 86, 5; διαιτᾶσθαι ἐς θεούς, ἀνθρώπους 77,2; ξυντάσσεσ- θαι ὡς ἐς μάχην 2, 8; ef. 8, 2 ; τάσσεσθαι ἐς ὑποδοχὴν τοῦ στρατεύματος 74, 2; πέμπειν ἐς φυλακήν 4, 6; cf. 71, 6; πράσσειν τι ἐς ἀναβολάς 15, 2 ; ἐπινοεῖν ὀλιγὸν οὐδὲν ἐς οὐδέν ὅ9, 8 : κακοπαθεῖν ὀλιγὸν. οὐδὲν ἐς οὐδέν 87, 6. (5) ‘in the presence of,’ 56, 2 ἔσβασις, ‘ embarkation,’ 30, ἐσβιβάζω 60, 4 ἐσεληλυθότες ἔτυχον 29, 5 ἐσηγοῦμαι 73, 1
ἐσκομίζομαι 18, 1. ἐσκομιδή 4, 4; 24,3
ἔσπλους 41, 20
ἕτερος : ἕτερος ἑτέρου προφέρει
64, 2; μᾶλλον ἑτέρας ἀδόκη- tos 29, 5; κρείσσων ἑτέρας ῥώμης 68, 4; μὴ καθ᾽ ἕτερα =xard μηδέτερα 59, 2; οἵ. 33, 2; 44, 1
ἔτι, ‘in addition,’ 7, 8 al. It may qualify a noun
ἑτοῖμα : ἐπειδὴ é. ἣν 50, 4; 60,
Εὔβοια, her importance to A. as a source of supplies, 28,
; inhabitants of, 57, 2 πὶ
εὐκαθαιρετόν 18, 2
εὔνοιά τινος, ‘good- -will towards,’ 57,
abe nee, ἐπ᾽, 86, 4
εὐπρεποῦς, ἐκ τοῦ 57, 7
Εὐρύηλος 2, 3; 48, 8
Εὐρυμέδων, Α. general, 16 ; 31: 33; 35; 42; 49; 52
46; 81,5; ἐν
OOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΡΡΑΦΗΣ Z
εὐρυχωρία 3, 3 al.
εὔτακτος πορεία 77, 5
εὐτυχῶ 68, 4; 68, 8. εὐτυχία 77, 2, RXXVii.
εὐχή 78, ,
εὐψυχίᾳ προφέρειν 64, 2
ἐφορῶ 61,3; ἐπιδεῖν 61, 1 ; 77,
ἐχυρός : ἐν τῷ ἐχυρῷ εἶναι 77, 6; ἐχυρὰν τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχειν 41, 4
3
ἔχω ἕλασσον 5,4; & τι πλέον 86, 2; ἔ. πλεῖστον 86, ὅ n; ἐν αἰτίᾳ ἔ. 81, 1; διὰ φυλα- κῆς €. 8, 3; κακῶς ἔ. 80,1: πονήρως ἔ. 88, 4; ὡς εἶχον τάχους 2,15 ὡς τῆς ξυντυχίας ἔσχον 57,12; σχεῖν, ‘touch at,’ 2,1;
ἕῳ, dy’ 79, 3; ἅμα τῇ 28, 1
ἕως ἔτι οἷόν τε 47, 3
ἕωσπερ 19, 5 πὶ
Z
Ζακύνθιοι, as allies of A., 31, 2 n; 57,77
ζεῦγμα λιμένος 69, 4
nr: ἐζήτουν σφᾶς αὐτούς 44, 4
ζξωγρῶ 28, 4 al. (av καταλείπομαι 75, 8 n;
ζῶντας outa, “of pris- oners, 85, 2
H ἡγοῦμαι, of a general, 19,1 5"; ἡγεμών 15, 13; παρέχομαι ἡγεμόνα 58, 8 ; δίδωμι ἢ. δ0, ; ἢ. γίγνομαι ᾽δ6, 8 0} ‘already,’ describing the circumstances at a given time: note (1) it is much
GREEK
commoner than our ‘al- ready’ ; (2) it is esp. common with the partic., but must only be used with pres. or perf. partic. ; (8) it is com- mon after compar., esp. μᾶλλον --- before now,’ wit aor., 77, 1, 4; ‘at once,’ 15,1; 73, 1
ἡδονήν τινα διασώσασθαι 63, 8
ἡδύς : τὰ ἥδιστα ἀκούειν 14, 4; ἡδίω ἐπιστέλλειν 14, 4: ἥδιστόν ἐστι ἐχθροὺς ἀμώνα- σθαι 68, 1
ἥκιστα δὴ ἄξιος 86, 5; οὐχ ἥκιστα 86, 3; 4 al. ἥκω, ‘arrive, 1,42; 17,3 al.;
‘return,’ a1, Ἴ
ἡλικίας φείδεσθαι 29, 4: ἡ. μετέχειν 60, 8 n; ὁπλιτῶν ἡλικία 64, 1
ἥλιοι 87, 1 2
ἡμέρα γίγνεται 44,8; 81,1; ἅμα τῇ ἡ. 29, 3; δι᾽ ἡμέρας 82,1; ka? ἡ. ‘daily,’ 8 τῆς h. ‘per day, 27, 2; ἧς ἡ. ἐπὶ πολύ 88, 1; τὴν ἐ ἐπιοῦσ. ἡ. 74, 1
ἡμετέρα, ἡ (γῆ) 68, 2
ἡμίεργα ἔστιν ἃ κατελέλειπτο 2, 4
ἥμισυ : τὸ ἥ. μάλιστα καὶ πλέον 80,
ἡνίκα ξυνεσκόταζε 73, 3
ἠπιώτερα ἔχειν 77, 4
Ἡρακλεῖς 78, 2
ἥσσῃ καταπεπλῆχθαι 72, 4
ἧσσον : οὐδενὸς ἧ. 80, 4; οὐχ ἧσσον 61, 1 π,; }1, 1 αἱ. ; οὐδὲν ἧ. 78, 1 al.
ἡσσῶμαί τινος 40, 2
ἥσσων : οὐδεμιᾶς ἥ. 29, 5
ἡσυχάζω 8, 8 π. τῆς νυκτὸς τὸ ἡσυχάζον 88, 4
ἡσυχίαν, καθ᾽ 88, 3 al,
INDEX 237
8
θάλασσα: ἀπὸ 6. 29, 3; διὰ θαλάσσης 59,2; ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ 4,2; κατὰ θάλασσαν 4, 1
θαλασσεύω 12, 3
θαλασσοκρατῶ 48, 2
θαρσῶ : ὠφελία μεγίστη ἐς τὸ θαρσεῖν 69, 8; ἐν ῳ ἃν θαρσήσῃ 29, 4
θάτερα, ἐπί 37, 2; 84, 4
Odyos, A. naval station, 49, 2
θέα, ἡ, δι᾽ ὀλίγου ἐστι 71, 2
θεασμῷ προσκεῖσθαι ἄγαν 50, 4
θεῖον : τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ θ. 77, 4
θεοὶ πατρῷοι, gods of a family, 69, 2; θεῶν ἀνάκλησις 71, 3 θεοῖς ἐπίφθονος 77, 3
θεραπεύω μὴ with inf, 70, 8
Θηβαῖοι 18, 2; 19, 3
θορυβοῦμαι 8, 1 al. θόρυβος : διὰ πολλοῦ 0 40, 3; 6. παρέχειν 44, 4; ἐν πολλῷ θ. εἶναι 81, 4
; | Opixes, barbarity of, 29
θρασεῖα ἐλπὶς τοῦ μέλλοντος 77, ϑ
θυμούμενον, τό 68, 1
᾿Ιαπυγία 33, 8
ἰδέα πᾶσα ὀλέθρον 29, 5
ἰδίᾳ 48, 4 πὶ
ἱδρυθέντας ἐξαναστῆσαι 77, 4
ἱκανός )( ἀναγκαῖος 69, 3 π; ἱκανὰ ηὐτύχηται 77, 8
ἱκανῶς παρεσκεύασται 75, 1
‘Ipépa 1, 3 2
tva, ut, rare in Thuc. compared w. ὅπως : four times in this book
᾿Ιόνιος, ὁ (κόλπος) 38, ὃ
ἱππικόν, τό 30, 2
ἴσα, adverbial, 71,3. See στρατός
238
ἰσθμῶδες χωρίον 26, 2
loonopla κακῶν 75, 6 ἡ
ἵστημι τροπαῖον τῆς νίκης, τροπῆς etc., 5, 3 al.
A
ἰσχυρὰ γίγνεται ἡ ναυμαχία 72, 1
ἰσχυρίζομαι 49, 1
ἰσχύς : παρὰ ἰσχὺν τῆς δυνάμεως ἐνδιδόναι 66, 3
loxw: χαλεπώτερον ἴσχει τὰ πράγματα ὅ0, 8 ; ναῦν ἴ. 35, 2
K
καθάπερ 32, 2
καθέζομαι, of armies, 51, 1 al.
καθίξω στρατιάν 82, ὃ ἡ
καθίστημι. See ἐς. παρὰ τὸ καθεστηκός 67, 2
καθυπέρτερα τὰ πράγματά ἐστι δ6, 2
καί : note the following uses ; (1) corrective, as ἀντίπαλοι τῷ πλήθει καὶ ἔτι πλείους 12, 4; (2) ‘and so,’ very often introducing a sentence; (3) double use in_ balanced clauses, a8 πολλάκις μὲν καὶ G\Aére . .. μάλιστα δὲ καὶ τότε 8, 1. Kal... δέδθ, 3
καιρός ; κατὰ τοῦτο τοῦ κ. 2, 4 N; ἀνάγκαι στασιωτικῶν και- ρῶν δ7, 11 n; ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ ἤδη τοῦ κ. ὄντες 69, 2
κακοπαθῶ 87, 2, ὅ . κακοπα- ‘Ola, ἣ παρὰ τὴν ἀξίαν 77, 1
κακουργῶ 4, 6; 19, 2
κακῶ τὰ πράγματα 27, 3. κωσις γίγνεται 4, 6
καλός : καλὰ τὰ προειργασμένα καὶ ὑπὲρ καλῶν τῶν μελλόντων
κά-
ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
Καμάρινα 83,1 π
καρποῦμαι ἐλευθερίαν 68, 8
καρτερὰ ναυμαχία 70, 2
καρτερῶ προσκαθήμενος 48, 2
Καρύστιοι 57, 4
κατά: with accus., (1) local ; κατὰ βραχύ τι 2, 4; κατὰ τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν 6, 2; κατὰ τὸν ἄλλον κύκλῳ λιμένα 70, 1; κατὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα 68, 3; κατὰ χώραν μένειν 49, 8 π; τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν 44, 1; (2) temporal, time at which; κατὰ τοῦτο τοῦ καιροῦ 2, 4; Kar’ ἀρχάς 28, 3; κατὰ τὴν πορείαν 85, 4; Kk. τὴν ναυμαχίαν 24, 1; (3) ‘owing to’; κατά τε ταῦτα καὶ ὅτι 56, 3; x. Evy- yevelay 57, 1 ; x. τὸ Evyyevés 58, 3; καθ᾽ ὃν μόνον 75, 1 x; x. πάντα 58, 4; 87,6; κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην 57, 1n; x. τὸ Evp- φέρον 57, 1; κατὰ τὸ ἔχθος 57, ὅ ; κ. τὸ νησιωτικόν 57, 7; κι ξυμφοράν 57, 8; (4) ‘according to’; x. τὸ δυνατόν 36, 4; πλείω ἢ κατὰ τοὺς νεκρούς 45, 2; μείζω ἢ κ. δάκρυα 75, 4; τὰ κατὰ τὰς
- σπονδάς 18, 3; αὐτὴν καθ᾽ αὑτήν 28, ὃ ; (5) ‘opposite’ ; κατ᾽ αὐτούς 6,3; κατ᾽ ᾿Βρινεὸν ὁρμέζεσθαι 84, 1; (6) ‘via’; as x. τὰς ᾿Επιπολάς 1,135 x. γῆν, θάλασσαν 28, 1 al.; κ. πλοῦν εἶναι 31, 3; (7) distributive ; as x. διαδοχήν 27, 3; καθ᾽ ἕκαστα 8,1; x. τὰς πόλεις 18, 2; κ. βραχὺ τρέπεσθαι 79, 5; κ. τοὺς ξυμμάχους περιαγγέλλειν 18, 4;—with gen. κατὰ κρημνῶν 44,8
ὁ ἀγὼν ἔσται 66, 1; καλόν | κατάβασις, ἣ πάλιν 44, 8 ἐστι w. inf. 70, 7 al. ; τὸ ] καταβιβάζω ἐς λιθοτομίας 86, 2
πλέον καλόν 71, 1
καταβυρσῶ ἐπὶ πολὺ νεώς 65, 2
GREEK
κατάγγελτος γίγνομαι, with partic., 48, 1
καταγιγνώσκω μὴ κρείσσων εἶναί τινος 51, 1
καταδαμάζομαι 81, 5
καταδουλώσει, ἐπί 66, 2
καταδρομὰς ποιοῦμαι 27, 5
καταθέω τὴν χώραν 27, 4
καταίρω )( ὁρμᾶσθαι 49, 2
κατακολυμβῶῷ 25, 6
καταλαμβάνω (τινα τι ποιοῦντα)
2,1 καταλόγου, ἐκ 16, 1 n; 20, 2 καταμέμφομαι ἐμαυτὸν ταῖς Evp- φοραῖς 77, 1. κατάμεμψις ᾿ σφῶν αὐτῶν 75, 5 Κατάνη 14: 60: 80, 2 π; 8ῦ, 4
καταπροδίδωμι 48, 4
καταράσσω 6, 3 n
karappéw 84, 3
κατατραυματίζω ναῦν 41, 4
κατάφευξις 38, 3; -w ποιεῖσθαι 41,1
κατεργάζομαι ἔργον ἄξιον 21, 2
κατήφεια 75, 5 2
κατίσχω és 33, 4
«κατοκνῶ:- τὸν πόλεμον 31, 4
n
κελευστής 70, 6
κεναὶ ἀνδρῶν νῆες 77, 7
κέρδος, διά 57, 9; κέρδει 57, 10
Κέρκυρα, its support of A., 57, 7”. Corcyra had only an ἐπιμαχία with A., and there- fore was not bound ἀνάγκῃ to send aid; but she pre- tended to be so, and could make out a good case
κληματίδες καὶ das 57, 4 πὶ
κλήσεις, concrete sense of κλῇσις 70, 2, κλῃστὸς λιμήν 38, 27
κοῖλος ποταμός, bed,’ 51, 2
κοινολογοῦμαι 86, 4
‘r. with a deep
INDEX 239
κοινὸς ἅπασιν 61, 1; τὸ κοινόν 85, 3
κοινωνοὶ ἀρχῆς 63, 4
κολούομαι 66, 3
κομιδή, ἡ és Σικελίαν 34, 1
κομίσας μεταστῆσαι 39, 2 ἢ
Κόνων, as commander at Nau- pactus, 31, Cf. Appendix ΠῚ
κόπῳ ἁλίσκεσθαι, 40, 4
Κορίνθιοι, energy of against the A.,7; 17; 19; 31; 34; 39; 58,3; 70; 86, 4
κόσμῳ, οὐδενί 23, 3; 40,3; 84,3
κούφισις 75, 6
κράτιστα, τὰ τῆς χώρας, ‘the richest parts,’ 19, 2
κρατῶ, construction of, 11, 2 n. κράτος, κατά 41, 1
κρανγὴ χρῶμαι 44,4; 71, 5
κρούομαι πρύμναν 40, 1; 70, 8
κρύφιος : ἡ κι. τῆς σταυρώσεως 25, 7
κτείνω 29, 4
κυκλοῦμαι, in military sense, 81, 2, 4
κωλύματα σβεστήρια 53, 4 2
A
Λάβδαλον 3, 4”
Λακεδαιμόνιοι, aid Syr., 1; 17; 27 ; 28; invade Attica and fortify Decelea, 18 ; 19; their relations with Nicias, 86
λαμβάνω ἐν δεξιᾷ τὴν Σικελίαν 1,1; A. ἀπόπειραν = ποιεῖσθαι ἀπόπειραν 21, 2
λαμπρὰ νίκη, ‘decisive victory,’ 55, ln. λαμπρῶς ἐπικεῖσθαι 71, 5. Cf. λαμπρὸς applied to warriors
λαμπρότητός τι ὑπάρχει τινι 69, 2; ἀπὸ οἵας λ, καὶ αὐχήματος 75, 6
240
λέγω, with inf. instead of ὅτι, 21,3; Xr. τι πρὸς χάριν 8, 2; τὸ λεγόμενον, ‘according to the proverb,’ 68, 1 7; 87, 6
λείπομαι τῆς τέχνης 70, 8
᾿ λέπας ᾿Ακραῖον 78, 5
λῃστείας ποιοῦμαι 27, 4
λιθοτομίαι 8θ, 2
λιμὴν κλῃστός 88, 2
λιμῷ πιέζομαι 87, 2
λόγος. See ἔργον. ἄξιον τι λόγου παραλαβεῖν 38, 1
λοιπός, either agreeing with a case or with gen., 72, 3
λωφῶσιν al συμφοραί, medical met., 77, 3
M
μαλακίζομαι 68, 3; μαλακισθεὶς σωθῆναι 77, 7
μάλιστα, among other super- latives, 42, 3 n; of μάλιστα τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ 29, 4
μᾶλλον : οὐ μ. ἢ 25, 9; 36, 3; δ7, 9; 67, 4; 69, 8; 81, 5; οὐ μᾶλλον. . . ἀλλά 57,1; μ. ἤδη 37, 1; 43, 7; 57, 9; ἐπικουρικὰ μ. ἢ δι’ ἀνάγκης 48,5; μ. ἑτέρας 29, ὃ π
μανθάνω ἥσσων dv 42, 3
Μαντινῆς, as mercenaries, 57, 9n
Μεγαρέων φυγάδες 57, 8 π
μέγεθος : ὑπὸ μεγέθους (τοῦ κακοῦ etc.) 72, 2; 75,73; ὡς ἐπὶ μεγέθει 80, 4; πόλεις μεγέθη ἔχουσαι δῦ, 2
μεθιστάναι παρὰ θάλασσαν (ἢ) 39, 2 2
μείζων, double in ἃ proportion, 28,42; μείζω ἢ κατὰ δάκρνα
ὅ, 4 μέλλησις ἐγγίγνεται 49, 4
μὲν. .. μὲν... δὲ. .. δὲ
OOYKYAIAOY ΞΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
. « pero 14, δὲ may be separated by many words, but often μὲν is omitted where this would be the case, as 5, 3 ὁ Γύλιππος (v. 1. 6,1 ὁ δὲ
Μένανδρος, specially appointed general, 16; 43; 69, 4
μεσόγεια : ἱέναι διὰ pecoyelas 80, ὅ μετά: (1) with gen.; con-
current act or state: ὀλο- φυρμῷ μετὰ βοῆς χρῆσθαι ΤΊ, 4; λύπη μετὰ φόβου 75, 3 ; μετ’ ἀσθενείας ἐπιστήμη 63, 4 .---τὸ μετὰ πολλῶν 75, 6 n; ψηφίζεσθαι μετὰ πολλῶν 48, 1 n;—pera μισθοῦ ἐλθεῖν 57, 9; οὐδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων εἶναι, of neutrals, 33, 2. (2) with accus. ; place—olxeiy μετ᾽ αὐτούς 58, 1
μεταβολὴ πολιτείας 55, 2; μεγάλῃ μεταβολῇ εἷναι 76
μετάμελος μέγας τῆς στρατείας 55,
peraxepliw τινα χαλεπῶς 87, 1
μετέχω ἭἽλικίας 60, 3; τῆς ἀρχῆς 68, 8
μετέωροι ἑάλωσαν 71, 6; μετέω- pov τι, locus editus, 82, 3
μετοπωριναὶ αἱ νύκτες ἐπιγίγ- vovra 87,1
μετόπωρος : πρὸς μετόπωρόν ἐστι τὸ ἔτος 79, 8
μέχρι νυκτός 38,3; μ. ὀψέ 83, 3; pg. οὗ ἂν 88, 2
μή: ὑπόνοια wh... 49, 4: εἰ μὴ w. partic. 38, 1: ὅτι μή, ‘except,’ 42,6; uh... τις 68,3; 69,2; 81,5; μὴ κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην 70, 8
μηδὲ καθ᾽ ἕτερα 59,2; μηδ᾽ ds 28, 8π
ἐν
GREEK
μηνοειδὲς χωρίον 34, 2
μήτε. .. μήτε. .. μήτε 82, 2. The usual formula is μήτε. . . μήτε. . . μηδέ
μηχανᾶται τάδε 73, 3
μίμησις τρόπων 63, 3
μισθοῦ, ‘for pay,’ 25, 7; μετὰ μ. 57, 9
μισθοφόροι 57, 3 al.
μνήμης ἐλλιπὴς γίγνεσθαι 8, 2
μονῇ ἄχθεσθαι 47, 1: μονὴ γίγνεται 50, 4
Μυκαλησσός, disgraceful treat- ment of, 29 2
μυριοφόρος ναῦς 25, 6 n
μυχὸς τοῦ λιμένος 4,4; 52, 2
N vauBarns 75, 7 πὶ
ναυκρατῶ 60, 2 ναυλοχῶ, ‘ watch for’ at sea, 4, 7
ναυμαχῶ ἀγκώμαλα 71, 4; ν. ἀντίπαλα 84, 6
Ναύπακτος, A. station at, 17, 4n; 19; 31; 34
νανπηγήσιμα ξύλα 28, 2.
νεκροὶ. .. of ἀπέθνῃσκον 87, 2n
νέμομαι μέρος γῆς 58, 2
νεοδαμώδεις 19, 3; 58, 3
veppiris νόσος 15, 1; p. xxxiv.
νεώριον 22, 1
νεώσοικοι 25, 6
vewrepltw és ἀσθένειαν 87, 1
νεώτερόν τι γίγνεται ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ 86, 4
νησιωτικόν, τό, 57, 7
Νικίας, Intr. § 2
νομίζεσθαι, ‘to be directed,’ 86, 5
νόμιμα, τά 57, 2 νοῦν, τόν, ἔχειν πρός re 19, 5. Neither νοῦς nor φρήν, but
INDEX 241
γνώμη or διάνοια is the ordinary word in narrative prose
νυκτομαχία 44, 1
μ- κ᾿
ξενοτροφῶ 48, ὅ
ξηρότης νεῶν 12, 8
ξυγγένειαν, κατά δ7, 1
ξνγγιγνώσκω τι, ‘agree to,’ 78, 2
ξνγγνώμης τυχεῖν 15, 2
ξυγκαταλαμβάνω 26, 3
ξύγκλυδες ἄνθρωποι 5, 4
ξυγκρούω ἀντίπρῳρος 36, 4
ξυγκτίζω πόλιν 57, 9
ξυγκτῶμαι τὴν χώραν 57, 1
ξύλινος πύργος 25, 6
ξύλλογος 31, 5
ξυμβαίνω : τοιαῦτα ξυνέβη, ‘turn out,’ 80, 4 ; ξυμβαίνει, placed first and followed by inf., 11, 4 al. &, ‘to agree to terms,’ 83, 2
ξυμμαχικόν, κατὰ 76 20,1; 33,5
ξύμπαν, τό, γνῶναι 77, 7; τὸ &. εἰπεῖν 49, 8
ξυμπορίζω εἴ τι ἔχω 20, 2
ξυμφέρον, κατὰ τό δ7, 1. νέχθη = ξυνέβη 44,1 ἢ
ξύν 42, 1 π. Cf. ξυναμφότεροι 1, 5 al.
ξυναγείρω (στρατόν) 82, 1
ξυναθροίζω 86, 1
ξυναναπείθω 21, 3
ξυνδιασῴζω 57, 1
ξυνεχής : τὸ ἀκρίτως ξυνεχὲς τῆς ἁμίλλης 71, 3; ἐν πόνῳ Ew- εχεστέρῳ εἶναι 81, 4
ξυνέχω τὴν εἰρεσίαν, ‘continue rowing,’ 14, 1
ξυνήθη τῷ ἡμετέρῳ τρόπῳ 67, 2
ξυννενημένοι νεκροὲ ἐπ᾿ ἀλλήλων 87, 2
ξυνη-
242
ξυνταράσσομαι 81, 2
ξυντέμνω és ἔλασσον 36, 2
ξυντομωτάτη διαπολέμησις 43, 4
ξυντυχία: ws ἕκαστοι τῆς &. ἔσχον δ7, 1
ξυσκευάζομαι, vasa colligo, 74, 1
ξυσκοτάζει : ἡνίκα ξυνεσκόταζεν 74, 8
ξυσταδόν :
3
ξύστασις τῆς γνώμης, strain,’ 71, 1
ξυστρέφομαι, ‘military term, 30, 2 al.
ov & μάχαις ἐχρῶντο
‘mental
0
ὄγδοον καὶ δέκατον 18, 4”
ὅδε, irregularly referring to something previously men- tioned, 13, 2; this irregu- larity is Bot uncommon in the speeches; ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ τῷδε, ‘at the same time,’ 63, 3
ὅθεν : πάλιν ὅθεν ἦλθον ἀπο- πέμπειν 27,27
οἱ, sibi, 42, 4
οἰκεῖον, τό 44, 2
οἴκου, ἐπ᾿ 25, 4 αἱ. οἶκον, ‘at home’
οἴκτου ἀξιώτερος ἢ φθόνου 77, 4
οἰκῶ is used a. abs., ὦ. w. accus., 6. w. ἐν
οἶμαι must not be constructed with ὅτι
olos: ἀπὸ οἵας... és
. ἀφίκατο 75,6 2; ola=
ws 79, 3 n; οἷος, attracted, 21, 3; μάχη ola οὐχ ἑτέρα τῶν προτέρων 70, 2
ὄκνος ἐγγίγνεται 49, 4
ὄλεθρος χρημάτων 27,3 n; ἐπὶ τῷ σφετέρῳ ὀλέθρῳ γίγνεται 79, 3
Cf. κατ’
οἵαν | ὁ
ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Ζ
ὀλίγος : δι᾽ ὀλίγου, space, 36, 5; time, 15, 2; ἐν ὁ., space, 67, 3; és ὁ. 36, 5; map’ 4., ‘nearly,’ 71, 3; ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν 87, ὅ
ὀλιγωρίᾳ, ete ev 3, 2
ὀλοφυρμῷ μετὰ βοῆς χρῆσθαι 71, 3; πρὸς ὀλαφυρμὸν τραπέσθαι 78, 4
ὁμαλόν, 76 44, 8
ὅμιλος, ὁ ἄλλος 58, 4 2
ὁμοῖα = ὁμοίως 29, 4 ἢ
ὁμοίως : οὐχ ὁ. καὶ πρίν 28, 4; οὐδὲ (unde)... ἔτι ὁμοίως 42,3; 50, 8; 78, 7
ὁμολογία γίγνεται ὥστε 82, 2
ὅμως : σχολαίτερόν μέν, ὅμως δέ 15, 2; ef. 44, 1 al.
ὄνομα, τὸ μέγα 64, 2
ὀνομαστὶ ἀνακαλεῖν 70, 8
ὅπῃ σωθήσονται διεσκόπουν 71,
ὄπισθεν, ἐκ τοῦ 79, 4
ὅπλα τίθεσθαι 8, 1 : ὅ. ἐπιφέρειν 18, 2; ὅ. φέρειν ἅμα τινι 57, 6 ; 8. παραδοῦναι 82, 2; ὅπλα-Ξ: ‘guard-stations,’ 28, 2x; = ‘shields,’ 45, 2
ὁποῖόν τι τὸ μέλλον ποιήσουσιν οὐδὲν δηλοῦντες 88, 2
ὅπως. .. εἰ μὴ δύναιντο oe οἷοί re ὦσι 4,12; ὅπως ἄν, w. opt. in final clause, 65,
n
ὁπωσοῦν, following καί, 60, 3; οὐδ᾽ 49, 2
ὀργῇ προσμεῖξαι. θ8, 1
ρμῇ, Τῇ παρούσῃ 48, 5; ἀπὸ μιᾶς ὁ. 71, 6
ὁρῶ : καθ᾽ ὅσον πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἑώρα 37, 2
ὁσάκις, with opt., 18, 3
ὁσημέραι, ‘daily,’ 27, 5
ὀσμαὶ οὐκ ἀνεκτοί 87, 2
ὅσος : πλὴν ὅσον, with 0 of εἰμί, 28, 4 n; cf. 60,
GREEK
62, 4; 87,2; τοσοῦτον. .. ὅσον 28, 8; προσελάσαντες ἐξ ὅσον τις ἔμελλεν ἀκούσεσθαι 78, 3; ἐπὶ ὅσον 66, 1; οὐχ ἧσσον (= μᾶλλον). . . ὅσῳ μᾶλλον 68, 2; ὅσα ye κατὰ γῆν 11, 4
ore μὲν oo « ὁτὲ δέ 27, 4n
ὅτι τάχος 42, 8. ὅτι w. clause following ᾽διὰ W. accus. , 58, 4; following πρὸς w. accus., 60, 2; following κατὰ w. accus., 56, 2
οὐδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων = μετ᾽ οὐδετέρων 838, 2; οὐδ᾽ ad’ ἑτέρων 44, οὐδ᾽ ὥς 75, 6
οὐδείς : οὐδεμία χρῆσις ἐστί τινος 5, 2; οὐδεμία σωτηρία ἐστι 8, 1; οὐδεμία δίωξις ἐγένετο 84, 6; οὐκέτι οὐδὲν οὐδετέροις ἐπῆλθεν 59, 1 : οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐκ 87, 2; οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων 29, 5n; οὐδενὸς ἧσσον ἄξιος 80, 4; οὐδενὸς ἐλάσσων 85, 4; φόβος οὐδενὶ ἐοικώς 71 ; οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ 28, 8 al.; οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ 49, 3
οὐκέτι : ἡ οὐ. ἐπαναγωγή 34, 6
οὖν, after a parenthesis, 6, 1; 42,37”
οὔριος ἄνεμος 53, 4
οὔτε... . re 80,2; 31, 4 al.
οὗτος, emphatic, 2, 4; 29, 5; 82, 2; οὗτος, in ‘epanalepsis, 42, 3; τοῦτο, w. gen., 2, 4; 86, 5
οὕτως πράττειν 24, 1
ὀψέ, μέχρι 83, ὃ
ὄψις γ( γνώμη 75, 2
II
πάθος γίγνεταί τινι 38, 3; πάθει χρῆσθαι ἀξίῳ ὀλοφύρασθαι 80, 4
INDEX 243
παιανίζω 44, 6; 88, 4. παια- νισμός 44,
πάλι : ἡ π. κατάβασις 44, 8; ἡ πάλιν ἀνάκρουσις 62, 4: πάλιν αὖ 46; 64, 1
πανσέληνος σελήνη 50, 4
πανστρατίᾳ ἐξελθεῖν 2, 2
παντάπασιν ἀφεστάναι πολέμου 7, 2
πανταχῆ προσβάλλειν 79, 5
πανταχόσε πολλὴ φαίνεται ἡ δύναμις 42, 2
παντοῖαι πεῖραι 25, 8
πάντως, κατὰ πάντα 87, 6
1;| παρά : (1) gen. ; παρὰ Νικίου
10 (no other ex. of gen. in this book) ; (2) dat. ; enone 3 (3) accus.; along or past, παρὰ πόλιν ἐσκομίζειν 18, 1; x. ποταμὸν ἰέναι 80, 5; to, παρὰ θάλασσαν μεταστῆσαι (8) 89, 2 π; contrary to, x. γνώμην 18, 2; π. τὸ εἰωθός 60, 5; 75, 5; παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα 66,3 x; π. ἰσχὺν τῆς Suvd- pews 66, 3; π. τὸ καθεστηκός 67, 2; π. τὴν ἀξίαν 77, 1; giving the measure, raph τοσοῦτον ἦλθον, with . 2, 4 π; παρ᾽ ὀλίγον, ‘ y a little,’ 71, 3— opposite of παρὰ πολύ, ‘by much.’ Note that παρὰ with gen. and with dat. is used of persons, not of things; the same is true of παρὰ with accus. meaning ‘to’ w. verbs of motion
παραβοηθῶ 87, 3 al.
παραγίγνομαι 42, 1 αἱ.
παρακαλῶ, military term, 20 1
παρακέλευσις : ἐκ π. ναυμαχεῖν 40, 4 ; πολλὴ ἡ π. γίγνεται ἀπό τινός τινι 70, 7
παρακλῃσθείς (ἢ) 69, 4
244
παρακομιδὴ ἐπιτηδείων 28, 1
παραλαμβάνω οὐδὲν ἄξιον λόγου, ‘obtain no important ad- vantage,’ 38, 1
παράλογον ποιῆσαί τινι, ‘occa- sion surprise to,’ 28, 3; ὁ 7. Tw μέγας ἐστι 55, 13 of ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις παράλογοι 61, 3
παραλύω τινα τῆς ἀρχῆς, “Το- move from command,’ 16, 1
παρανόμημα ἔς τινα περιέστηκε 18, 3
παραπλήσιος : ἴσον καὶ wr. 42,2; τοιαῦτά τε καὶ παραπλήσια 78, 1; παραπλήσια ἐπεπόν- θεσαν καὶ ἔδρασαν 71, 7
παρασκενάζομαι, w. partic., ὡς omitted, 17, 8 πὶ
παρασκευή, ‘force,’ 48, 5 n; ἐκ π. κρείσσονος 55, 2; wa- ρασκευῆς πίστις )( τύχης ἀποκινδύνευσις 67, 4: π. )( γνώμη 5, 4
παρατάσσω 8, 4 al.
παρατείχισμα, 11, 3 al.
mwapaurixa: ἡ π. ὠφελία 57,9; ἐν τῷ π. 71, 7
παρέργου : οὐκ ἐκ w. τὸν πόλεμον ποιεῖσθαι 27, 4
“παρέχω προσδοκίαν ws ἐπιπλεύ- σομαι 12, 4: π. ἀποστέρησιν τῆς ἀκοῆς 70, 6; π. ἀπορίαν, θόρυβον, φόβον 44 (e.9.)
παριππεύω 78, 8
was: ἰδέα πᾶσα καθειστήκει ὀλέθρου 29, 5; ἐν παντὶ ἀθυμίας 55, 1; παντὶ τρόπῳ 70, 8; διὰ παντός, ‘ continu- ally,’ 6, 1; 61, 2
πάσχω τοῦτο, referring to a previous statement, 11, 4 al. ; ἀνεκτὰ π. 77, 4
πατρικαὶ ἀρεταί 69, 2
πατρόθεν ἐπονομάζειν 69, 2
waxurnres, al 62, 3
πεδίον (τὸ ᾿Αττικόν) 19, 1
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
πεζῇ ἀποχωρεῖν 60, 2
πεζομαχῶ 62, 4. 62, 2
πεζός, ὁ (sc. στρατός) 35, 1 n, al.
πεῖρα : ἐπιθέσθαι τῇ π. 42,1; ἐς τὴν π. ἰέναι 21, 4; πείραις παντοίαις χρῆσθαι 25, 8
πειρῶ, W. gen., 12, 2 w; πειρῶ =conor 82,1 5. Thuc. uses both ἐπειρασάμην and ἐπει- ράθην : subsequent prose writers only ἐπειράθην
πέλαγος : és τὸ π. ναῦν ἀφιέναι 19, 4
πέμπω. .. ἀγγέλλων 8, 1 2
πέμψιν νεῶν ποιεῖσθαι 17, 8
πεπτωκυῖαν δύναμιν ἑπανορθοῦν 77,7
πέρας οὐδὲν ἔσται σφίσι τοῦ ἀπαλλαγῆναι τοῦ κινδύνου 42, 27
Περδίκκας, his relations w. A.,
πεζομαχία
95
περί: (1) w. gen. ; περὶ τοῦ σωθῆναι τὴν ἐπιμελείαν ποι- εἶσθαι 56, 2; περὶ τῆς cwrn- ρίας προθύμως ἀντιλαβέσθαι 70, 7; (2) w. dat.; δεῖσαι wept ταῖς ναυσί 53, 4 2; (8) WwW. accus. ; time, 88 περὶ ἡλίου τροπάς 16, 2 ; place, as περὶ ἕρμα ναῦν περιβαλεῖν 25, 7,2; connected with, euphe- mistic, ἡ π. Πύλον ξυμφορά 18, 3; cf. τὸ περὶ τὸν Ἴτυν ἔργον 11. 29
περιαγγέλλω σίδηρον 18, 4 n
περιγραπτός : ἐκ περιγραπτοῦ ὁρμᾶσθαι 49, 2
περιδεῶς 71, 8
περιέστηκε ἐς 18, ὃ
περιιδεῖν, w. inf., 78, 1 »
περιμάχητος 84, 5
περιμένω, ‘wait for,’ 74, 1 al.
περιορῶμαι, ‘wait for events,’ 33, 2
GREEK
περιουσία: ἐκ πολλῆς m ἂν ὑπῆρχεν 18, 1
περισταδὸν βάλλειν 81, 4
. περιφέρω, ‘hold out’ in war, 28, 3
περιχαροῦς, ὑπὸ τοῦ 73, 2
πιέζομαι ἀσθενείᾳ, νόσῳ, λιμῷ, etc. 47, 2; 50, 3
πίμπλαμαι, w. dat., 75, 4 ἡ
πίστις παρασκευῆς, ‘faith in oe ey 67,
πλάγιος : ἐκ πλαγίου τάξαι 6, 2
πλαίσιον : ἐν π. τεταγμένος 78,
πλεῖστον ἔχειν ἐν 36, ὅ 2; ἡ πλείστη τῆς στρατιᾶς 3, 4; στρατιὰν ὅσην πλείστην ἐδύ- varo 21, 1
πλήθει ἀντίπαλοι 12, 1 |
Πλημμύριον 4; 23; 25; 32; 36
πλήν, w. gen., 28, 2 al.; not affecting the construction, 2, 4 al.
πλήρωμα, ‘crew,’ 14, 1 al.
πλοῦν ποιεῖσθαι 26, 3
ποιῶ τοῦτο, referring to a previous statement, 48, 1 al.; ταὐτὸν ἤδη ποιεῖ νικᾶν τε καὶ μή, ‘it makes no difference,’ 6, 1. ποιοῦμαι, with noun as periphrasis for a verb, but in a higher style, ἀγῶνας 7. 49, 2; ἀποχώρησιν 67,4; ἄριστον 40, 1; ἁρπα- viv 26, 2; γνώμην 72, 3;
. ἔκπλουν 17, 13 ἐνθύμιον 50, 4; ἐπαναγωγάς 4, 4; ém- μέλειαν 56, 2; ἐπιχείρησιν 48, 1; xaradpouds 27, 5; κατάφευξιν 41, 13 κήρυγμα 82, 1; λῃστείας 27, 4; vav- paxlay 62,2; πέμψιν 17, 3; πλοῦν 26, 83; πόλεμον 27, 4; τρόπην 54; φυλακήν 17, 4. See γίγνομαι, ποιούμενοι or
INDEX 245
που 28,2, Append. II. ποιη- τέα ἐδόκει εἶναι 73, 2
πολεμία (sc. γῆ) 75, 4
πολιτείας μεταβολή 55, 2
πολίχνα 4, 6
πολλάκις Kal ἄλλοτε 8, 1
πολλαχῇ 43, 1. πολλαχόθεν 14,2. πολλαχοῦ 70,6 |
πολνειδῇ φθέγγεσθαι 71, 4
πολύς : see ἐπί. πλέον τι ἔχειν 86,2
πολυτελὴς ἐγίγνετο ἣ παρακομιδή 28,1
πόνηρος, πονηρός 48, 1 ποί. crit.
πονήρως ἔχειν 88, 4
πόνος : ἐν mw, εἶναι 81, 43 δι᾽ ὀλίγου π. κτᾶσθαί τι 70, 8
πονῶ, of ships, 38, 2
πορεία ἀσφαλής 77, 5
πορθμός, ὁ 1, 2
πόσις, ‘drink’: πρὸς π. τρα- πέσθαι 78, 2
ποτέ : εἴπερ ποτέ 64, 2; μόλις τ' 40, 2; εἴ π. καὶ αὖθις 70,
πράγματα: τὰ π. ἐνδιδόναι 48, 2; see 49, 1
Πρασιαί 18, 3 2
πράσσω τι és ἀναβολάς 15, 3; mw. χεῖρον 67, 4; π. ἔτι χείρω 71,1; π. ἃ βούλομαι 68, 3 π
πρεσβυτέρας ἡλικίας φείδεσθαι 29, 4
3
πρίν γε δή, w. aor. indic. after affirmative clause 71, 5
πρό: τὰ πρὸ αὐτῶν, jam antea, 55, 2
προδοκεῖν : ὥσπερ προεδέδοκτο αὐτοῖς 18, 1
προθυμία γίγνεται πολλή 70, ὃ
προθύμως ἀντιλαβέσθαι, W. gen. of thing or περί 66, 1 ; 70, 7
προκαλοῦμαί τινα ἐς δίκας 18, 2
προκόπτω μέγα τοῦ ναυτικοῦ, ‘make great advance w.,’ 56, 3
246
τρολείπει ἡ ῥώμη καὶ τὸ σῶμα 5, 4 προπέπεμπται ὡς αὐτούς 77, 6 πρός: (1) with gen. ; to the advantage of, πρὸς ἑαυτῶν ἔσεσθαι 36, 3; 49,2; 81, 5; (2) with dat. ; near, as ἴσχειν πρὸς ταῖς πόλεσι 35, 2; be- sides, 57,5; (3) with accus.; place, a8 ὁρᾷ πρὸς τὴν πόλιν 87, 2; ἀπιδεῖν πρός 71, 3; with a view to, πρὸς τἄλλα ἐξηρτύσαντο ws ἕκαστα 65, 2; ἔχειν αὐτοὺς πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον 27, 2; — of intercourse, friendly or hostile, as πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους ὁμολογία γίγνεται 82, 2; χωρεῖ πρὸς ἐκείνους τὰ χωρία, ‘join the enemy,’ 14, 3; ἀγωνισμὸς πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἐγίγνετο 70, 8 ; πρὸς ἀταξίαν προσμεῖξαι 68, 1; πρὸς τὴν ἀντίταξιν τῶν τριήρων τὴν φυλακὴν ποιεῖσθαι 17, 4 --- compared with, πρὸς τοὺς ἐπελθόντας οἱ Σικελιῶται αὐτοὶ πλῆθος πλέον παρέσχοντο 58, 4 ;—with reference to, adapted to, expressive of, τοιαῦτα ἐπινοεῖν πρὸς τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἐπιστήμην τε καὶ δύναμιν 87, 1 ; πολλὴ παρακέλευσις ἐγίγ- vero πρὸς τὴν αὐτίκα φιλο- νικίαν 70, 7 ;--- towards, τοῦ ἔτους πρὸς μετόπωρον ὄντος 79,3. Note: πρός w. accus. with meanings akin to ‘in face of’ is very freely used. πρός is often equivalent to és προσάγομαι πόλιν ‘unite to one- self,’ 7, 2; 55, 2 προσαιροῦμαι ξυνάρχοντας 16, 1 προσαναιροῦμαι πόλεμον οὐδὲν ἔλάσσω τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος 28, 3 προσαπόλλυμαι 71, 7 πρόσβασις, ‘approach,’ 45, 1
BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΎΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
προσγίγνομαι : προσγεγενημένης τῆς δοκήσεως τῷ ὑπάρχοντι, τοῦ (or τὸ) κρατίστους εἶναι 67, 1”
προσδέχομαι τοὺς λόγους 83, ὃ
προσδοκίαν παρέχων ὡς w. fat. ind. 12, 4
προσδόκιμός ἐστιν ἄλλη στρατιά 15, 1; προσδόκιμοί εἰσιν ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ 25, 9
πρόσθεν, ἐν τῷ, local, 78, 4, ὅ : 81, 3; ἐς τὸ π. χωρεῖν 48, 5; 78, 8
πρόσκειμαι, ‘attack,’ 29, 2 al. ; ‘insist,’ προσκείμενος ἐδίδασκε
προσμισθοῦμαι 19, 4
προσοφείλω πολλά, ‘be in debt,’ 48, 5
προστάσσω ἄρχοντα 19, 4
πρότερον ἥ, w. subjun., 63, 1
προύχω, ‘excel,’ 21, 3; ‘pro- ject,’ 4, 4
πρόφασις : ἐπ᾽ αὐτομολίας mpo- φάσει 18, 2 ἡ
προφέρω, ‘excel,’ 64, 2 π; 77, 2; ‘bring forward,’ 69, 2
προχωρῇ, ὅπως dy 7, 3
πρύμναν κρούομαι 40, 1
πρῴ 78, 4; mpprepow 39, 1; πρῴτατα 19, 1
πρῴραθεν, τά, ‘bows,’ 36, ὃ
πρῶτος : ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης, ad- verbial, 48, 5. See ἔπειτα
Πυθήν, Corinthian admiral, 1 ;
0
πυνθάνομαι, w. accus. and inf., 1, 2; w. ὅτι 1,1; w. partic.,
4, πωλῶ ἐδώδιμα 39, 2
P
ῥᾷον ἔσται ἡ ἑἐσκομιδή 4,40; ῥᾷόν τι ἔσται σφίσιν 84, 2;
GREEK INDEX
ῥᾷδιος ἐς τὸ βλάπτεσθαι 67, 3
ῥύμῃ, τῇ πρώτῃ 70, 2
ῥώμη γίγνεταί run 18, 2; ἡ ῥ. προλείπει τινι 75, 4: ῥώμῃ προφέρειν τινος 77, 2
ῥώννυμαι 15, 2
Σ
σβεστήρια κωλύματα 53, 4
σημεῖον αἴρειν 84, 4
Σικελιῶται, almost universally on side of Syr., 32; 33
Σικελοί, generally on side of A., 58, 8
σιτία παραγγεῖλαι 48, 2
σῖτος ἐνῆν τοῖς τείχεσι 24, 2
σπανίῳ χρῆσθαι τῳ ὕδατι 4, 6
σπένδομαι, mid. denoting ἃ re- ciprocal act, 3,1; σ. πέμψαι 83, 1
σπονδὰς πρότερος λύω 18, 2
σπουδὴ ἔσται τῆς ὁδοῦ 77, 6
στασιάζω 46. στάσει ἐκπεσεῖν 33,5. στασιωτικοὶ καιροί 57, 11
στενόπορα : τὰ σ. τῶν χωρίων φυλάσσειν 73, 1
στενότης 62, 1
στενοχωρία 34, 6 αἱ.
στέριφος, ‘thick,’ 86, 3
στρατεία γίγνεται 57, 9
στρατιά: τῆς o. ὁ ξύλλογος 31, 4; στρατιᾳ ἄλλῃ προσδόκιμος εἶναι 25, 9
στρατὸς ἴσος καὶ παραπλήσιος τῷ προτέρῳ 42, 2; 1.6. ‘equal in importance and in numbers’ (no tautology here). Cf. Aristotle’s remark: ἔστι δὲ διττὸν τὸ ἴσον : τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἀριθμῷ, τὸ δὲ κατ᾽ ἀξίαν ἐστιν
Συρακόσιοι, after arrival of Gylippus, 2:
247
1. take Labdalum, 8
2. begin a counter - wall N. of κύκλος, and place cav at Olympieum, 4; after driving back the A., carry the wall past the A. lines, 6
3. prepare to attack the A. by sea, 7; 21
4, defeated at sea, but take Plemmyrium, 22 ; 23
5. defeat the A. at sea, and become confident, 41
6: dismayed by the arrival of Demosth., 42
7. through valour of Boeo- tians repulse the night attack on Epipolae, 43 ; 44
8. defeat the A. fleet, 52; and control the Harbour, 56:; are confident of success, 56 9. completely defeat the A. fleet in the final battle, 70; 71; 72 10. prevent the A. retreat, 73; 74; 78-81 11. capture and execute Dem. and Nic., 81-86 12. confine the prisoners to the quarries, 86 σφάλλω τὰς ναῦς 67, 2; opdd- λομαι τοῦ αὐχήματος (7) 66, 3
n
σφᾶς, properly indirect re- flexive, is sometimes used by Thue. as direct, = ἑαυτούς, σφᾶς αὐτούς, as 35, 2 al,
σχεδόν τι, ‘almost,’ 38, 2 ©
σχολαίτερον 15, 2; 81, 2
σῴζομαι : ὅπῃ σωθήσονται διε- σκόπουν 71, 63 οἱ σῳζόμενοι 44, 8
σῶμα popn 75, 4 τ
248
σωτηρία, ἡ és τὴν πατρίδα 70, 7; οὐδεμία ἔστι σ. 8, 1 σωτήριος τοῖς ξύμπασι 64, 2
T
ταλαιπωρῶ 16, 1 al. ταλαι- πωρία : ὑπὸ τῆς τ. Kal τοῦ πιεῖν ἐπιθυμίᾳ 84, 2
ταπεινότης : ἐς τ. ἀφικέσθαι 75,
ταραχὴ ἐμπίπτει 80,3; τ. ποιῶ τινι 86, 4 ταρσοί, ‘banks of oars,’ 40, 5
n τάχος, ὅτι 42, 8. ws εἶχον τάχους 2, 1: διὰ τάχους 22, 2; κατὰ τάχος 4, 3 . δέ 1, δ᾽; 81, 8; τε con- necting sentences, 4, 4 ai. ; τε... Kal=sive... sive 6, 1; τε summing up and con- cluding 7,4 al.; <re> 75,
τείας 6, 1; τειχισμός 20, 1; τείχισμα 2, "3
τελευταῖος ὁρμῶμαι 2,1
τέλος : ol ἐν τ. 73, 1
τετρυχωμένος πολέμῳ 28, ὃ
τέχνης λείπεσθαι 70, 8
τήρησις ἀσφαλής 86, 2
τίθεμαι τὰ ὅπλα 8, 1
τιμωρία : ὡς ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ τοῦ προσπεσόντος 68, 1
τιμωροῦμαι (pass.) ἀποχρώντως
mis: the following show its flexibility ; ἠπίστησεν ἄν τις ἀκούσας 28, 3; ὅσα τις ἔχει ἐδώδιμα, πάντας ἀναγκάσαι πωλεῖν 89, 2; ἔφερον πάντες ὅ τι τις ἐδύνατο ἕκαστος 78, 5; ᾿Ερμοκράτονς καὶ εἴ τον ἄλλου πειθόντων 21, ὅ :.- ἣν κρατήσωμεν, ἔστι τῳ τὴν. ..
ΘΟΥΚΥΔΙΔΟῪ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Ζ
πόλιν ἐτιδεῖν 61, 1; ἀξιῶν . . @ ὑπῆρχε λαμπρότητός τι μὴ προδιδόναι τινα 69, 2; πλέον τι 21, 4 : σχεδόν τι 38, 2; δηλοῦντες ὁποῖόν τι ποιή- σουσιν 88, 2; τὸ δέ τι καὶ, adverbial, 48, 2; τι μᾶλλον 57, 1. The nom. and accus. neut. plur. are avoided 76 with infin.: (1) may be subject or object, as τὸ μήτε αὐτοὺς ἀνακρούεσθαι μήτ᾽ ἐκείνους ἐᾶν ὠφέλιμον φαίνε- ται 62,4; (2) with prep., as ἐκ τοῦ σφαλῆναι parallel w. διὰ τὸ εὐτυχῆσαι 68,3; ἢ διὰ τὸ φεύγειν ἢ ἐπιπλέουσα 70, 4 : οὐκ ἔλασσον κατὰ τὸ ὠφελεῖ- σθαι, sre. . . τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖ- σθαι πολὺ πλέον μετείχετε 68, 3; οὐ φυλάξασθαι πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν τινι ἀρχαιολογεῖν 69, (8) gen., dat.: βραδὺς γίγνεσθαι τοῦ περαίνεσθαι 48, 5n; πέρας τοῦ ἀπαλλαγῆναι 42, 2m”. In 86, 5; 67, 1 and 87, 3 τὸ w. inf..appears in the MSS. as epexegesis of a gen. or dat. The accus. is defended by Herbst. See Append. II. τοιόσδε, irregularly referring to what precedes, 78, 1. Cf. ὅδε τοιοῦτος : ἐν τῷ τ. 81, 3; ἐν τῷ τ. τοῦ καιροῦ 69, 2 τοσόσδε, irregularly referring to what precedes, 57, 11; 59, 1 τοσοῦτος : παρὰ τοσοῦτον ἐλθεῖν κινδύνου 2, 4 τότε, referring to events previ- ously mentioned, 31, 3; 32, 1; 57,11; 81, 2: ‘rére δή 18, 8 τοὐναντίον ἢ 80, 1 τραυματίαι τε καὶ ἀσθενεῖς 75, 8
GREEK
τρέπω: τὸ πρὸς Λιβύην μέρος τετραμμένον νέμεσθαι 58, 2; τρέπεσθαι πρὸς πόσιν 73, 2; τ. πρὸς ἀνάκλησιν θεῶν 71, 3; τ. πρὸς ἀντιβολίαν καὶ ὀλο- φυρμόν 75, 4. Note that ἐτρεψάμην is trans., ἐτραπό- μὴν intrans.
τρέφω : ὅθεν θρέψονται (pass. ) 49, 2
τρίβω, intrans., 48, 6 ; 49, 2
τροπαῖον ναυμαχίας, τροπῆς etc., 41,4; 54 αἱ.
τρόπος : τρόπῳ @ ἂν «ἐνῇ: 7, 3; οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ 49,3; παντὶ τ. 10, 8; τῷ αὐτῷ τ. 17, 8 ; τὸν αὐτὸν τ. 39, 2. τρόπων μίμησις 63, 3 2
τροφὴν μὴ διδόναι 48, 5
τυγχάνω : (1) with τυγχάνω, ἐτύγχανον, the partic. keeps its time relative to the verb; (2) w. ἔτυχον, pres. and perf. partic. keep their time, but aor. partic. expresses time coincident w. the verb, 2, 4n; 4,2; 29,57; 50, 4 n. Distinguish ἐτύγχανον αὐλιζόμενοι, ἐτύγχανον αὐ- λισάμενοι (or perf. better), ἔτυχον αὐλισάμενοι
τύχη : τὸ τῆς τ. 61, 3 ἡ
Tt
vdpela μακρά 18, 2
Ὑκκαρικὰ ἀνδράποδα 13, 2 2
ὑπάρχω : ws ἐκ τῶν ὑ. ἐθάρσυνε 76
ὑπέρ, ‘in place of,’ 18, 2; ‘above,’ 79, 1; ‘on behalf of,’ 66, 1; ‘for the purpose of, 69, 2; ‘about,’ 71, 2. Cf. περί
πύὑερβάλλω, ‘be excessive,’ 67, 4
INDEX 249
ὑπερώφθη, ‘was disregarded, despised,’ 42, 3
ὑπέχω τὸ αὐτό τινι 21, ὃ
ὕπνος : ἀπὸ πρώτον ὕ, 48, 2
ὑπό: (1) w. gen., as ὑπὸ τῆς Δεκελείας πολλὰ βλαπτούσης ἀδύνατοι ἐγένοντο τοῖς χρήμασι 28, 4 π; ὑπὸ τῶν παρόντων ἐκπεπληγμένος 69, 2; cf. διὰ τὸ τοιοῦτον ἐκπλαγέντων av- τῶν 21, 4; (2) w. dat., ὑπὸ Συρακοσίοις γίγνεσθαι 64, 1; (3) w. accus., as ὑπὸ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους 21, 1
ὑποδοχή: ἐς ὑ. τοῦ στρατεύματος . . « ἐτάσσοντο 74, 2
ὑποκρίνομαι-- ἀπο- 44, 5 ἡ
ὑπολείπομαι or ἀπολείπομαι 7ὅ, 4n
ὑπομιμνήσκω τινά τι 64, 1; πατρίδος 69, 2
ὑπόνοια μή 49, 4
ὑποτελὴς φόρου 57, 4 2
ὑστεραῖος 11, 2”
ὕστερον, ‘late,’ 27, 2
ὑστερῶ τινι 29, 1
ὑφίστασθαι τῷ ναυτικῷ 66, 2
}
φανερὸς εἶναι w. partic., 12, 5 φειδώ τις γίγνεται μὴ w. inf,
φέρω: πάντα οἰστὰ φαίνεται 75,
φθέγγομαι 70,6; 71, 4
φθόνου ἄξιος 77, 4
φθορὰ ἀνθρώπων 27, 2
φιλονικῶ περὶ τοῦ πλείονος ἤδη καλοῦ 71,1. φιλονικία : πρὸς τὴν αὐτίκα φ. 70, 7; ἐς φ. καταστῆναι 28, 3
φιλῶ, w. inf., 79, 3; 80, 3
φοβερός, active, 42, 3 ἢ
φόβοι καὶ δείματα 80, 3
250
φονεύω 85, 1n
govexwraros 29, 4
φρουραὶ ἐπίασι 27, 8
φρουρῶ 4, 3 al.
φρυγανισμός : ἐπὶ φ. ἐξελθεῖν 4, δπ
φωνή : φ. τῇ αὐτῇ χρῆσθαί τινι 57, 2
x ‘
χαλεπὸς ἄρξαι 14, 2; ‘un- healthy,’ 47, 2». χαλεπώ- τερον ἴσχειν 50,3; ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα διάγειν 71, 8
Χαρικλῆς, as strategus, 20; 26. See Append. III.
χείρ: ἐν χερσὶ γενέσθαι 5, 2; ἐς χεῖρας ἱέναι 44, 7; 70, 5
χείρω πράττειν 71, 1
Χῖοι, autonomy of, 57, 4
χρηματίζομαι 13, 2
χρῶμαι : ἑαντῷ x. 5 τι βούλονται 8ὅ,1 5
χώρα: κατὰ x. μένειν 49, ἐπ
ΘΟΥΚΎΔΙΔΟΥ ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
Ψ
ψήφισμα : ἄνεν ᾿Αθηναίων y., showing the control exercised by the Ecclesia over strategi having ‘full powers,’ 49, 2
Q
ὥρα, ‘season,’ 47, 2; ‘time,’ 81, 1. The meaning ‘an hour’ is not classical
Ὥρωπός 28, 1 n
ws= ore 84, 6; ws ἐκ κακῶν 42,2; ws... kal 48, lm; 60, 3; ws ἕκαστοι 65, 2”; 74, 2
ὥς : καὶ ὥς 74, 1 al.; οὐδ᾽ ὥς 75, 63; μηδ᾽ ὥς 28, 8 n
ὥστε, ‘on condition that,’ 82, 2; =quamobrem, 4, 6 n, al.
ὠφελήσομαι, pass., 67, 3
ὠφελία és τὸ θαρσεῖν γίγνεται 69, 3
ὠφέλιμος 47, 4 al.
ENGLISH INDEX
HISTORY : RHETORIC: GRAMMAR
A
abstract for concrete 4, 6 Acarnania 31, 2
accus. See παρά
Aegina 28, 4 ' agent with perf. pass. 18, 3 Alcibiades and Nicias p. xxx.
Amphipolis 9, 1
anacoluthon 18, 2; 15, 8; 28, 8; 42,2; 49,1; 70,7
anaphora 24,1; 25, 6; 27, 4; 57, 2
antecedent omitted 27, 1
antithesis noticed 5, 4; 12, 3; 48,3; 67, 4; order modified for sake of 17, 4; falee 78, 5
Archonides 1, 4
Argos and Sparta 20, 1
argumenta, πίστεις ; (1) εἰκότα —66, 1 καλὰ τὰ προειργασ- μένα καὶ ὑπὲρ καλῶν τῶν μελλόντων ὁ ἀγὼν ἔσται : 66, 3; (2) παραδείγματα---7, 2 κἀγώ τοι κιτιλ.; 21, 8 πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους λέγων κ.τ.λ. (8) ἐνθυμήματα 66, 2 end-3 ; 75, 2-4; (4) yrouu—67, 1 end ; 68, 3end; 77, 7 end;
(5) τόποι---66, 3 (τ., instead
of being amplified, are often compressed either into γνῶμαι or into the premiss of an enthymeme)
Aristotle on Nicias p. xix
Arnold, Dr., on 85, 3, p. 210
article 1, 1; 2, 8; 4, 2; omitted before a prep. 18, 1; case of 67, 1, Append. IT.
Athens and her allies 20, 2; 57, 1; state of A. in 414, 413 Append. III.; Athenian prisoners 87, 5; J. 8. Mill on the democracy p. xvii. ; treatment of Nicias ἢ. XxXili.
Attica, invasion of 19, 1; p. 219
attraction of short clauses 21, 3; 47,4
—— of preposition 23, 1
— of relative 28,3; of nom. of rel. 67, 3
augment in Thue. 82, 3
B Bekker, his text of Thuc. p.
ΧΙ.
252
brachylogy 18, 4
Brasidas and the helots 19, 3
brevity, excessive in Thuc. (συντομία) Append. I.
C
Callias, son of Hipponicus, p. 221
Camarina and Syracuse 33, 1
capitalia finalia. See fines
Catana 14, 2
Charicles 20, 2
chiasmus 5, 4; 12, 1; 14, 2; 55, 1; 57,1; 68, 8; 70, 4; 75, 5
Classen on 57, 1, p. 177
Cleon pp. xx., xx1., xxvi.
closed harbours 38, 2 ; 69, 4
comedy in 414 B.c. p. 218
comparative, ellipse with 12, 4
Conon 29, 4
construction of πυνθάνομαι 1, 2; of πέμπω 3, 1; of πε- ραιοῦμαι 1, 2; of ἔσχον 1, 2; of τυγχάνω 1, 4; 4, 3; of ἀγγέλλω 17, 3; of λέγω 29, 1; of participle 28, 4; of perf. pass. 4, 6; of κρατῶ 11, 2; of ξυμβαίνω 11, 4
contrast, Thuc. fond of 1, 3
co-ordination of dissimilar clauses 14, 2; 18, 1; of participles 53, 3
Corcyra 57, 3
D
dative of possession 26, 1 dead, recovery of 72, 2; 74, 2 Decelea 27, 4
definitions (Spo) preferred by | figurae elocutionis,
Thuc. to examples (παρα- δείγματα) 36, 5
BOYKYAIAOY ZYTTPA®H? Z
demes and tribes 69, 2
democracy 14, 2
Demosthenes 16, 1 ; his entry into the Great Harbour 42, 1; his death 86, 2
Dionysius of Halicarnassus p.
213 docks of Syracuse 22, 1 drama in 414 B.c. p. 219 Ducetius 1, 4; 32,1
E Ecclesia at Athens 10, 1; 48, 4
eclipses 50, 4
elections Append. ITI.
ellipse w. comparative 12, 4; oy. 6; of verb after ὅσος 23, 4; after ws 68, 2; of masc. noun 35, 1
Enthymeme 75, 4
epanalepsis w. οὗτος 42, 3
epexegesis w. ὥστε 14, 3
ethos, use of in opening of a speech, exemplified 77, 2
euphemism 64, 1
Euripides and Nicias p. xxxvii. ; resemblance to style of 71
Eurymedon 16, 1
exordium, πρόλογος, in military harangues closely connected with the propostiio, πρόθεσις, 61; 66; 77
F
jigurae, σχήματα, comprising
(a) f. elocutionis, σ. λέξεως, (Ὁ) f. sententiarum, o. δια- volas :
σχήματα λέξεως, ‘figures of language’ ; see antithesis; homoeote-
ENGLISH INDEX
leuton, 75, 3 τῶν τεθνεώτων λυπηρότεροι . .. τῶν ἀπο- λωλότων ἀθλιώτεροι : paro- moeosis (parallelism in sound of whole phrases), 3, 3 ὁρῶν τοὺς Συρακοσίους ταρασσο- μένους καὶ οὐ ῥᾳδίως ἔυν- Tagoopévous: paronomasia (parallelism in sound of single words — by far the commonest ‘figure’ in Thuc. —next to antithesis), 39, 2: anaphora 18, 1; 24,1; 25, 6 ἔβαλλον .. . ἀντέβαλλον ; 27, 4; 57,.2 ξυνεστράτευσαν . . . ξυνεστράτευον : asyndeton 71, 4; 77,1
Jigurae sententiarum, σχήματα διανοίας, ‘figures of thought’ ; question 44, 1: oxymoron, 62, 4 πεζομαχεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν ; 70, 8 φεύγοντας φεύ- γουσιν
finance 28, 4
fines or capitalia finalia, τέλη or τελικὰ κεφάλαια : (1) τὸ συμφέρον 14, 4; (2) τὸ νόμιμον 68, 1; (8) τὸ καλόν 63 ; (4) τὸ ἀναγκαῖον 77, 7
future indic. after εἰ, 8, 1; purpose after relative 25, 1; ut. mid. in pass. sense 42, 4; 48,5; 67,3; 69, 2
G genitive abs. in proximity w. another case 48, 1 — of definition 42, 2 of measure 2, 4 after πείθομαι 73, 2 Gibbon, his imitation of 71, 3
Grote on Nicias p. xviii. Gylippus 1, 1
253
H
harangues of generals 61; 66; 77 (the last mainly a Adyos παραμυθητικός)
Hegemon of Thasos p, 221
Helorine Road 80, 5
helots 19, 2; 26
Heracles, feast of 73, 2
Herbst, notes from, Append. IT.
I
impeachment 48, 4
imperfect after ἐπειδή 23, 2; see τυγχάνω: of γίγνομαι ete. ὅθ, ὃ; 71,7; equivalent to pluperf. 36, 1
impersonal passive 62, 3
indicative after ὅτι 34, 7; see a ply
infinitive ; see τό, ‘ attraction,’ Append. IT.
interpretation, corrected, of 3, 3; 4, 1; 6, 4; 18, 2; 14, 1; 21, 3; 27, 8; 28, 3; 29, 5; 36,4; 41,1; 42,3; 44, 2; 48 1, 3, 4, 6; 50, 3, 4; 55, 2; 57, 7, 9; 68, 4; 64, 2; 67, 2; 68, 1, 3; 69, 2, 3; 73, 1; 75, 4, 5, 6
inventio, Thuc. usually excels in p. 215
Ionic forms 4, 6; 75, 6
iterative dy 71, 3
L
Leake, Coil., on the κύκλος p. xii.
Lucian 2, 4
Lucretius, false antithesis in 75,3
254
M
Macaulay on ‘the Retreat’ 75, 5
manceuvres at sea 36, 4, 6
Manuscripts of Thue. p. xxxix.; bearing of the Vatican M3. on the text pp. xl.-xlii.
meaning of ἐπισκευάζω 1, 1; ἥκω 1, 4; ἡσυχάζω 3, ὃ: ταλαιπωρῶ 16, 1; ὑπομένω 17, 1; ἡγεμών 19, 1; ὄλεθρος 27, 3; ὅπλα 28, 2; δυνάστης 33, 4; παρασκενάζω 85, 1; ἔσπλοι 41, 1; τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν 69, 2; καθ᾽ ἕν 75, 2; τε γάρ 81, 3; ἀρετή of ‘moral’ worth (its later meaning, as in Kurip.) 86, 5
Menander, not strategus, but specially appointed (προσῃρη- μένος) to share the command (ξυνάρχων) w. Nicias, 16, 1
mercenaries 48, 5
metaphor 56, 2; 68, 3
middle voice, of ἐξελαύνω 5, 4; πειρῶ 82, 1; reciprocal use of 40, 4
Mill, on the Athenian demo- cracy p. XVii.
Mycalessus, destruction of 29, 2
N
narratio, διήγησις 11, 2
Naxos in Sicily 14, 2
neuter adj. w. art., w. genitive ; τῆς γνώμης τὸ θυμούμενον 68, 1
-—— for masc. 14, 2; 71, 3
---— plur. of adj. and verbal 48, 2; 78, 2, 3; καθ᾽ ἕκαστα τῶν γιγνομένων 8, 1
Nicias and Cleon pp. xx., XXV1. ; Peace of p. xxviii; Thuc. on N. as strategus p. xxxi. ;
BOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
N. and the Athenians p. xxxiii. ;. his responsibility p. Xxxiv. ; superstition of p. XXXvV. ; private character ἢ. xxxvii.; letter of, its rhe- torical character 10; first harangue of, weak points of Append. I.; perfection of the second harangue of Append. I. ; topics of 77, 1
nouns, verbal, in Thuc. 18, 1 ; periphrases with abstract 16, 2, 3
number of verb w. ἕκαστος 44,1
O
object, common to verb and partic. 1, 3
obscurity due to brevity 55, 1
oligarchs at Athens p. 220
omission of antecedent 27, 1; 48, 6; of verb in rel. clause 45, 1 ; of preposition in 2nd clause 47, 4; 60, 4; of ws with παρασκευάζομαι 17, 3; of art. before a prep. 18, 1
optative joined to subjun. in final clause 17, 4
oratio obliqua, attraction in 21, 3; 47, 4; long passages in 48, 5
order of words, why modified 2, 8, 4; 18, 1; 22, 1; 23, 3; 50, 1; 69,2; rare order 71, 3
Ρ
Parataxis 4, 2; 22, 1; 83, 4. In sentences connected by particles, such as ἐπειδὴ. . . τότε 54, ws ... καί (see
ENGLISH INDEX
Greek Index) relics of para- taxis may be seen arenthesis 42, 3 arthenon p. 221 participle, attributive, outside the article 23, 3 ' .--— construction of 28, 4 -—— co-ordination of 53, 3 ——— W. prep. and noun 29, 4 neut. 68, 1; 83, 4 -—— change to inf. after 68, 2 —— see τυγχάνω | accus. abs. in fem. 31, - -— gen, abs. without noun 48, 2 pathos, Thuc. great master of 3 3 perf. pass. 18, 3; 62, 3 period in Thuc., state of its development 19, 4 peroratio, ἐπίλογος 15, 3; 64, 2; 68; 77, 7. These illus- trate the manner appropriate to, viz. exhortation, recapitu- lation, pathos person, 2nd or 3rd 61,3; 63, 3; use of Ist 14, 1 Pisander, archon eponymus in 414 Bc. p. 219 pleonasm with αὐτοῦ 16, 1 plural of abstract nouns 62, 3 ; 80, 3 polyptoton 44, 7 preposition attracted 23, 1; preposition and case as object of verb 8, 1 present joined w. aor. 3, 4;
probatio, πίστις 12-15 ; 62-64 ; 67, 2-4; 77, 1-6
proleptic use of adj. 4, 3
pronoun, epanaleptic 48, 3; use of, to express reciprocity 23, 3; nom. of rel. attracted 67, 3; influence of rel. lost in 2nd clause 29, 5; 69, 2
255
proportion, how expressed 28, 4
propositio, πρόθεσις 11, 4; 61, 2-3; 66; 77, 1
prose composition at Athens p. 219
R
relative clause, attraction to 61, 3; rel. not expressed in 2nd clause 29, 5
Retreat, the, from Syr., object of the Athenians 78, 3; 80, 2; direction of their advance 79, 5; 80, 5; description of the start analysed 75
rhetorical devices 15, 2; 66, 3
romantic style, approximation to the 71, 7
5
sculpture at Athens p. 219
Segesta 57, 11
service, military, at Athens, 16 1; obligation to 13, 2
Sicels and Athens 57, 11
Sicyon and Sparta 19, 4
siege- works at Syracuse pp. i.-Xvi.; position of the Round Fort pp. xii.-xiv.
statesmen, culpability of 15, 1
strategi pp. 218, 220; 31, 5
style noticed 18, 3; 19, 4; 40,1; 64: Append. I.; 84, 2
subject, rapid change of 4, 4; 18, 4; omission of 84, 4; placed first for emphasis 22, 1; 32,1
—— of infin., case of 20, 1; 21, 3; 34, 6
256 SCOYKYAIAOY ΞΥΓΓΡΑΦΗΣ Z
superlatives accumulated 42, U 3
—— placed in rel]. clause 20, | usage of πότερον 1, 1 ; τότε 2, 2; 21,1; 60,2; 86,1 3; ws 8, 3; ποιῶ, ποιοῦμαι symmetry of clauses, disregard} 5, 8; ἐκεῖνος 6, 1; ἀίδιος 21, of, noticed 14,2; 18,1; 27, 3; Te 24, 3; καὶ in πολλὰ δ; 32, 2 καὶ ἄλλα 25, 8; οὐκέτι 34, 6: synonyms distinguished 36, 2 Te... Te 34,7
T WwW Tarentum, gender of 1, 1 Wilamowitz - Moellendorff on taxation of allies 28, 4 the division of Thuc. into
traductio 67, 1 κρατίστους εἶναι [ἡ books p. xl. el τοὺς κρατίστους ἐνικήσαμεν ;
70, 8 φεύγοντας φεύγουσιν Ζ tragedy, writers of at Athens p. 218 Zacynthus, policy of 31, 2 THE END
Printed by R. & R. Crarx, Limitep, Edinturgh.